JP7728010B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine.

For example, Patent Document 1 describes using a display screen or the like to create effects in gaming machines.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-033816

However, in gaming machines such as those described in the above patent documents, there was room for further improvement in presentation in order to increase the entertainment value of the game.

The purpose of this invention is to increase the enjoyment of games.

The present invention, which achieves the above object, is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 100) includes:
A gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player,
A determination means for making a determination;
A performance control means (for example, a performance control unit 300) for controlling the performance;
an adjustment means used to adjust the performance effect;
an operating means,
The performance control means
It can be set to either a first mode or a second mode,
It is possible to display information display according to game information,
A predetermined character image can be displayed,
It is possible to perform a role-playing effect that operates the movable means,
It is possible to execute a variable effect in which the effect pattern is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped.
In the variable performance, a specific performance suggesting that the special game will be executed can be executed,
When the specific effect is executed, a first emphasis effect can be executed,
The adjusting means includes a first adjusting means and a second adjusting means different from the first adjusting means,
When the first emphasis effect is being executed, a specific notification regarding the effect can be executed when the first adjustment means is operated,
During the execution of the variable performance, a second emphasis performance that periodically changes the performance pattern can be executed at a predetermined timing,
It is possible to execute an operation performance that prompts the user to operate the operation means,
The operation performance includes a first operation performance and a second operation performance,
Before the start of the predetermined performance executed in the variable performance and after the start of the predetermined performance, the execution time of the first operation performance and the execution time of the second operation performance can be made different,
In the second operation presentation, the operation image can be periodically changed and displayed,
The cycle of the second emphasis effect and the cycle of the operation image can be made different ,
The displays that periodically change the operation image include a first display that can be executed in a first cycle, a second display that can be executed in the first cycle, and a third display that can be executed in a second cycle that is different from the first cycle .

Please note that the above symbols in this section are used for illustrative purposes only and do not limit the scope of the present invention.

This invention can increase the enjoyment of games.

1 is a schematic front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine when viewed from the rear. (a) is an enlarged view showing an example of a display arranged at the bottom left of the game board, (b) is a partial plan view of a pachinko game machine, and (c) is an enlarged view showing an example of a sub-information display arranged at the bottom left of the game board. 2 is a diagram showing the internal configuration of a control unit of the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of an image/sound control unit and a lamp control unit according to the present embodiment. 2 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of a game control unit of the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the operation of basic processing by the game control unit. 10 is a flowchart showing the operation of the game control unit during power interruption processing. 10 is a flowchart showing the main control processing of the game control unit. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of the start port switch processing. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of a gate switch process. A flowchart showing the contents of the second large prize entry port switch processing. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of special symbol processing. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of the big win determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation pattern selection process. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of processing during stoppage. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of a customer waiting setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of normal symbol processing. A flowchart showing the contents of the first large prize slot processing. A flowchart showing the contents of the second large prize slot processing. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of a game status setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of an electric tulip process. These figures show examples of the configuration of random numbers used in this embodiment, where (a) is a figure showing an example of the configuration of a jackpot random number, (b) is a figure showing an example of the configuration of a jackpot pattern random number, (c) is a figure showing an example of the configuration of a small jackpot pattern random number, (d) is a figure showing an example of the configuration of a reach random number, and (e) is a figure showing an example of the configuration of a winning random number. A figure showing an example of the fluctuation patterns and table settings used in the fluctuation pattern selection process. A figure showing an example of the fluctuation patterns and table settings used in the fluctuation pattern selection process. 1A and 1B are block diagrams illustrating an example of the configuration of the RAM of a game control unit, where FIG. 1A is a block diagram showing the configuration of a memory area, and FIG. 1B is a block diagram showing the configuration of each of the memory units shown in FIG. 10A and 10B are block diagrams illustrating an example of the configuration of the RAM of the performance control unit, where (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the reserved memory area, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of each of the memory units shown in (a). 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of a preliminary determination process. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating examples of pre-determination patterns and table settings used in the pre-determination process. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating examples of pre-determination patterns and table settings used in the pre-determination process. 10A and 10B are flowcharts showing the operation of the performance control unit, in which FIG. 10A is a diagram showing main processing, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing interrupt processing. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of a command receiving process. 33 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pre-determination effect selection process and the effect selection process of FIG. 32. A flowchart showing the contents of the big win effect selection process of Figure 32. 33 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending effect selection process of FIG. 32. 33 is a flowchart showing the contents of the customer waiting command receiving process of FIG. 32. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of a specific time-saving related performance process. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of effect button processing. This is a pre-determined presentation pattern table used when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole in a normal gaming state. This is a pre-determined presentation pattern table used when a game ball enters the second starting hole in a special time-saving game state. This is a variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation is performed based on winning at the first starting port in normal game mode. This is a variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation is performed based on winning at the second starting port in a special time-saving game state. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. (1) is a diagram showing the execution timing of each notification in the first left-handed hit notification, and (2) is a diagram showing the execution timing of each notification in the second left-handed hit notification. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. A diagram showing the display timing of each effect image in the second right-hit image and the output timing of the right-hit sound effect and right-hit sound. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. A diagram showing the execution timing of each effect in the button effect. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. A diagram showing the execution timing of each effect in the button effect. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. A diagram showing the execution timing of each effect in the button effects. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. A diagram showing the execution timing of each effect in the button effect. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. A diagram showing the execution timing of each effect in the button effects. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. A diagram showing the execution timing of each effect in the button effect. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. A diagram showing the execution timing of each effect in the button effect. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. A diagram showing the execution timing of each effect in the button effect. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. A diagram showing the execution timing of each effect in the button effect. A diagram showing the execution time and cycle of each button effect. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. A diagram showing the execution time of each effect during reach-time effects. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. A diagram showing the execution time of each performance in the role-playing performance. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. (1) is a diagram showing the execution time of each effect in the start suggestion effect, and (2) is a diagram showing the execution time of each effect in the ongoing suggestion effect. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. A diagram showing the execution timing of each effect in the jackpot effect. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. A diagram showing the execution time and cycle of each effect in the jackpot effect. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the relationship between images related to the presentation. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. A diagram showing a timing chart of the performance when a fluctuation stop command is received by the performance control unit. A diagram showing a timing chart of the performance when the fluctuation stop command is not received by the performance control unit. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 1 is a diagram showing the flow of a game on a pachinko gaming machine 100. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a background setting table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of a background image. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a background setting table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of a background image. A figure showing a setting table when a special losing pattern stops. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. A diagram showing a gradual display effect using a pending image. A diagram showing a gradual display effect using a pending image. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. A diagram showing a gradual display effect using a pending image. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. A diagram showing a gradual display effect using a pending image. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. A diagram showing a gradual display effect using a pending image. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. A diagram showing a gradual display effect using a pending image. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. A diagram showing a gradual display effect using a pending image. An explanatory diagram of each effect in variable effect example 9. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. An explanatory diagram of each effect in variable effect example 10. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. A diagram showing a gradual display effect using a pending image. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. An explanatory diagram of each effect in variable effect example 14. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit.

(First embodiment)
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings.
[Basic configuration of gaming machine]
FIG. 1 is a schematic front view of a pachinko gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment.
FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when viewed from the rear side.
1 shows a pachinko gaming machine 100 as an example of a gaming machine, which is configured to pay out prize balls when a gaming ball shot out in response to a player's instruction enters a prize ball. The pachinko gaming machine 100 includes a gaming board 110 from which the gaming balls are shot out, and a frame member 150 that surrounds the gaming board 110. The gaming board 110 is detachably attached to the frame member 150.

The game board 110 has, on the front, a game area 111 for playing games with game balls, a rail member 112 that forms a path along which game balls launched from below rise and head toward the upper position of the game area 111, and a guide member 113 on the right side of the game area 111 that guides the game balls.
In this embodiment, an image display unit 114 that displays various images for effects is disposed in a position in the game area 111 that is easily visible to the player. This image display unit 114 has a display screen such as a liquid crystal display, and as the player progresses through the game, it displays, for example, decorative symbols to notify the player of the lottery results (pattern variation results) of the special symbol lottery, or displays effect images due to the appearance of characters or items. In addition, the image display unit 114 is provided with a plurality of layers on which images are displayed, and an image is displayed on each of the plurality of layers.
The front of the gaming board 110 is also provided with three movable role pieces 115 and a board lamp 116 used for various effects. The three movable role pieces 115 are arranged in a row in the left-right direction above the image display unit 114. When describing each of the three movable role pieces 115 individually, the movable role piece 115 arranged on the left side will be referred to as the "left movable role piece 115A." The movable role piece 115 arranged in the center will be referred to as the "middle movable role piece 115B." The movable role piece 115 arranged on the right side will be referred to as the "right movable role piece 115C." When no particular distinction is made between the three movable role pieces 115, they will simply be referred to as the movable role pieces 115. When describing the left movable role piece 115A, the middle movable role piece 115B, and the right movable role piece 115C collectively, they will be referred to as the "three movable role pieces 115." The movable accessory 115 performs various effects by moving on the game board 110. The board lamp 116 also performs various effects by emitting light.

The game area 111 is equipped with game spikes and windmills (not shown) that change the direction in which game balls fall. Various prize-winning and lottery-related devices are also provided in predetermined positions in the game area 111. The game area 111 is also equipped with an outlet 117 that discharges game balls that are shot into the game area 111 but do not enter a winning slot. The pachinko game machine 100 is equipped with an out-ball detection switch (SW) 227 (see Figure 4, described below) that detects out-balls, which are game balls that flow into the outlet 117.

In this embodiment, various prize-winning and lottery-related devices are provided on the game board 110, including a first start gate 121 and a second start gate 122 that trigger a special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery) when a game ball enters, and a start gate (hereinafter simply referred to as a gate) 124 that triggers a normal symbol lottery (open/close lottery) when a game ball passes through. In FIG. 1, the gates 124 are located on the left and right sides of the game area 111, with the left gate 124 labeled 124L and the right gate 124 labeled 124R. The first start gate 121 and second start gate 122 refer to the winning gates that trigger the activation of a predetermined special symbol display device. Specifically, the first start hole 121 and the second start hole 122 are provided with switches (first start hole switch 211 and second start hole switch 212, described below) that detect the passage of a gaming ball when a winning prize is awarded. When a gaming ball enters the first start hole 121 or the second start hole 122, this switch detects the passage of the gaming ball, which triggers the activation of the special symbol display device.

The second starting hole 122 is equipped with an electric tulip (opening/closing member) 123, a standard electric device with a pair of tulip-shaped blades that open and close using an electric solenoid and light up. The electric tulip 123 is configured so that when the blades are closed, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 122, but when the blades are open, the entrance to the second starting hole 122 expands, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 122. When a standard symbol lottery is won, the electric tulip 123's blades light up or flash while opening for a specified time (e.g., 0.15 to 1.8 seconds) and a specified number of times (e.g., 1 to 3 times).

The pachinko gaming machine 100 has two game states: a no-electric support state in which there are fewer chances of winning at the second starting hole 122, and an electric support state in which there are more chances of winning at the second starting hole 122 than in the no-electric support state. The machine is controlled to either the no-electric support state or the electric support state under a predetermined condition, such as triggered by a jackpot or the number of draws for a special symbol. The electric support state is a game state controlled by, for example, shortening the normal symbol variation time, extending the opening time of the electric tulip 123, or increasing the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery, or a combination thereof.
The pachinko gaming machine 100 has two game states: a no-time-reduction state in which the special symbol variation time is long, and a time-reduction state in which the special symbol variation time is shorter than that in the no-time-reduction state. Here, the time-reduction state is more advantageous to the player than the no-time-reduction state.
In this embodiment, the electric support state and the time-saving state are controlled simultaneously. In the following description, the electric support state and the time-saving state are simply referred to as the time-saving state, and the no electric support state and no time-saving state are simply referred to as the no-time-saving state.

In this embodiment, as other prize-winning and lottery-related devices, first large prize opening 125 and second large prize opening 126 are arranged on game board 110 as special electric devices that open depending on the results of a special symbol drawing, and regular prize opening 127, which does not trigger a lottery even if a game ball wins. First large prize opening 125 is provided with first large prize opening door 125D that opens and closes first large prize opening 125. Second large prize opening 126 is provided with second large prize opening door 126D that opens and closes second large prize opening 126. In the following description, for convenience, the open/closed state and opening/closing operation of first large prize opening door 125D may be referred to as the open/closed state and opening/closing operation of first large prize opening 125. In addition, in the following description, the open/closed state and opening/closing operation of the second large prize opening door 126D may be described as the open/closed state and opening/closing operation of the second large prize opening door 126D for convenience.
In this embodiment, a display 130 is provided at the bottom left of the game board 110 to display the lottery results and the number of reserved balls.

In the pachinko gaming machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 , the second starting hole 122 equipped with the electric tulip 123, the gate 124R, the first large winning hole 125, and the second large winning hole 126 are located in the right area of the gaming area 111. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, when attempting to win a prize in the second starting hole 122, the gate 124R, the first large winning hole 125, the second large winning hole 126, etc., the gaming ball is caused to flow down into the right area of the gaming area 111. Here, the left area of the gaming area 111 is regarded as the first gaming area. Furthermore, the right area of the gaming area 111 is regarded as the second gaming area.
In the illustrated example, the second starting gate 122 equipped with the electric tulip 123, the gate 124R, the first large prize opening 125, and the second large prize opening 126 are arranged in the right-hand area of the play area 111, but this is not limiting. The second starting gate 122 equipped with the electric tulip 123, the gate 124R, the first large prize opening 125, and the second large prize opening 126 may be arranged in the left-hand area of the play area 111, and the first starting gate 121, the gate 124L, and the regular prize opening 127 may be arranged in the left-hand area of the play area 111. In this case, the right-hand area of the play area 111 is regarded as the first play area. The left-hand area of the play area 111 is regarded as the second play area.

In addition, on the back of the game board 110, there are attached a game control board 200B which determines whether a special symbol has been won, and a presentation control board 300B which controls the presentation in an integrated manner.
A background volume control volume 300S is also attached to the performance control board 300B. The background volume control volume 300S is a switch used to adjust the volume of the sound output from the speaker 156 (described later) from the back of the pachinko gaming machine 100. In this embodiment, the background volume control volume 300S is configured to adjust the volume to any of ten levels, from "1" to "10." The background volume control volume 300S is also rotatable, allowing the volume to be adjusted one level at a time by rotating it. For example, if the background volume control volume 300S is set to volume "3," and then rotated clockwise to set the volume to "4," the performance control unit 300 sets the volume to "4." If the background volume control volume 300S is set to volume "3," and then rotated counterclockwise to set the volume to "2," the performance control unit 300 sets the volume to "2."
In this embodiment, the administrator of the pachinko gaming machine 100 can operate the background volume adjustment volume 300S by opening the board case 300C that houses the performance control board 300B.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 sets the volume to one of seven levels, from "1" to "7." The volume settings of "1" to "7" on the background volume adjustment volume 300S correspond to the volume settings of "1" to "7" on the performance control unit 300, respectively. In addition, the volume settings of "8" to "10" on the background volume adjustment volume 300S all correspond to the volume setting of "8" on the performance control unit 300.

In addition, various boards (not shown) are attached to the back of the gaming board 110, such as an image control board that controls the effects using images and sounds, and a lamp control board that controls the effects using various lamps and movable devices 115. Also, on the back of the gaming board 110, a connector 200C that connects the gaming control board 200B and the effect control board 300B, and a switching power supply (not shown) that converts the supplied 24V AC power into DC power and outputs it to the various boards, etc. are arranged. The connector 200C is provided with multiple wires (not shown) for connecting the gaming control board 200B and the effect control board 300B.

The frame member 150 is equipped with a launching device (not shown) that electrically launches game balls at predetermined time intervals (e.g., 100 balls per minute) with a hitting force corresponding to the angle of operation when a player touches the handle 151 and rotates the lever 152 clockwise. The frame member 150 also has a supplying device (not shown) that supplies game balls to the launching device one by one in sequence in accordance with the player's operation of the lever 152, and a tray 153 that temporarily stores game balls supplied by the supplying device to the launching device. Balls dispensed by a payout unit, for example, are dispensed onto this tray 153.
In this embodiment, the tray 153 is configured as an integrated upper and lower tray, but a configuration example in which the upper and lower trays are separated is also conceivable. Also, a configuration example in which the handle 151 of the launching device is made to emit light under predetermined conditions is also conceivable.

The frame member 150 also has a stop button 154 for temporarily stopping the launch of game balls even when the player is touching the handle 151 of the launching device, and an ejection button 155 for dropping the game balls accumulated in the tray 153 into a box (not shown) and removing them.
The frame member 150 also includes a speaker 156 and a frame lamp 157 that notify the game status and situation of the pachinko gaming machine 100 and perform various effects. The speaker 156 performs various effects using music, voice, and sound effects. The frame lamp 157 is composed of a light-emitting element such as an LED, and performs various effects using light by changing lighting/flashing patterns, light emission colors, etc. Note that the frame lamp 157 may be configured in a way that allows it to perform effects by changing the direction of light irradiation.
The frame member 150 also includes a transparent plate (not shown) for separating the game board 110 from the player.

Figure 3 is a diagram explaining the pachinko gaming machine 100 according to this embodiment, where Figure 3(a) is an enlarged view showing an example of a display 130 arranged at the bottom left of the gaming board 110, Figure 3(b) is a partial plan view of the pachinko gaming machine 100, and Figure 3(c) is an enlarged view showing an example of a sub-information display 80 arranged at the bottom left of the gaming board.
3(a), the display 130 of the pachinko gaming machine 100 includes a first special symbol display 221 that operates in response to a win at the first start gate 121, a second special symbol display 222 that operates in response to a win at the second start gate 122, and a normal symbol display 223 that operates in response to passage through the gate 124. The first special symbol display 221 displays a special symbol in a variable manner and then a static display to display the lottery result based on a win at the first start gate 121. The second special symbol display 222 displays a special symbol in a variable manner and then a static display to display the lottery result based on a win at the second start gate 122. The first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222 perform a cyclical change (cyclical display) multiple times, with the change in display mode being one cycle (= 256 ms), and display a static display after the special symbol change time has elapsed.
The normal symbol display 223 displays the lottery result by variably displaying normal symbols and then stopping them based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through the gate 124. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222 are each composed of a display device with an array of LEDs, and the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is displayed by the lighting mode of the LEDs. Similarly, the normal symbol display 223 is also composed of a display device with an array of LEDs, and the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery is displayed by the lighting mode of the LEDs.

The display 130 also includes a first special symbol reserve indicator 218 that operates in response to a reserve on the first special symbol display 221, a second special symbol reserve indicator 219 that operates in response to a reserve on the second special symbol display 222, and a regular symbol reserve indicator 220 that operates in response to a reserve on the regular symbol display 223. In this embodiment, the first special symbol reserve indicator 218, the second special symbol reserve indicator 219, and the regular symbol reserve indicator 220 are each comprised of a display device with an array of LEDs, and the number of reserved symbols is displayed by the lighting pattern of the LEDs.

Here, we will explain the reservation. If a game ball enters the first start slot 121 or the second start slot 122 during the variable display operation of the special symbol (while the variable display for one winning game is being performed), the variable display operation of the special symbol based on the later winning game cannot be started because the special symbol is still changing. Therefore, the later winning game is stored up to a specified number (for example, four), and the right to start the special symbol for that winning game ball is reserved until the variable display operation for the previously winning game ball is completed.
The normal symbols are also processed in the same manner as the special symbols. The fact that such a reservation has been made and the number of reservations (the number that has not yet changed) are displayed on the first special symbol reservation indicator 218, the second special symbol reservation indicator 219, and the normal symbol reservation indicator 220.

The display 130 also includes a status indicator 224 that displays the status of the pachinko gaming machine 100. In this embodiment, the status indicator 224 is configured as a display device with an array of two LEDs. One of the two LEDs lights up to indicate whether the status of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a time-saving state in which the special symbol variation time is short. The other LED lights up to indicate whether a state is favorable to the player by hitting to the right (by changing the hitting force of the gaming ball).

The display 130 also includes a round number display 225 that displays the number of rounds when the first major winning slot 125 is activated during a jackpot game that is played based on the results of the special symbol lottery. Jackpot games are described below. The round number display 225 is comprised of a display device with an array of LEDs, and the number of rounds when the first major winning slot 125 is activated during a jackpot game is displayed by the lighting pattern of the LEDs.

The display 130 also includes a status confirmation indicator 226. The status confirmation indicator 226 is composed of a single LED and is used to indicate that the setting change mode (described below) or the setting confirmation mode (described below) has been set. The LED begins to light up when the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is entered, and turns off when the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends. As such, because the status confirmation indicator 226 is provided on the front (surface) of the gaming machine, it is possible to easily check whether the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode has been set. The status confirmation indicator 226 may be installed in any location as long as it is on the front (surface) of the pachinko gaming machine 100.

In addition, in this embodiment, the same display mode (illuminated display) is used regardless of whether the setting is changed or checked, but the display may be configured to make it clear which mode is set. For example, the status check indicator 226 may be illuminated in the setting change mode and flashing in the setting check mode, or vice versa.

In addition, in this embodiment, a status confirmation indicator 226 is provided as a dedicated indicator to indicate that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode has been set, but it may also be used as another indicator. For example, in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, the first special symbol indicator 221, the second special symbol indicator 222, the first special symbol reserved indicator 218, the second special symbol reserved indicator 219, the number of rounds indicator 225, the status indicator 224, etc. are turned off, so one or more LEDs of these indicators may be turned on.

The frame member 150 of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is equipped with an input device that allows the player to input information regarding effects. As shown in FIG. 3(b), in this embodiment, an example of an input device is provided on the frame member 150. The input device is an effect button 161 and effect keys 162, which are adjacent to the effect button 161 and consist of multiple keys arranged in a roughly cross shape. In the illustrated example, consider a case where an effect is performed that accepts an operation to select one image from multiple images. In this case, for example, a player can select one of multiple images displayed on the image display unit 114 by operating the effect keys 162, which consist of four keys arranged in a cross shape, and then select the selected image by operating the effect button 161. Furthermore, in addition to the illustrated effect button 161 and effect keys 162, various input forms, such as a lever or a handle, can be adopted as the input device depending on the content of the effect, etc.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 100 of this embodiment is equipped with a sub-information display 80 inside the game area 111, which consists of a sub-first change display 81, a sub-second change display 82, a sub-first hold display 83, a sub-second hold display 84, a sub-normal map change display 85, a sub-normal map hold display 86, and a sub-right-hit display 87.
The sub-information display 80 is basically composed of LEDs and is designed to be dynamically lit. The sub-information display 80 does not have an indicator, such as the status check indicator 226, that indicates whether the setting is in the setting change mode or setting check mode.

The sub-first variable indicator 81 is used to display (notify) whether the first special symbol is being displayed or not, and the sub-second variable indicator 82 is used to display (notify) whether the second special symbol is being displayed or not. Each is composed of one LED. When the display of the corresponding special symbol begins, the LED flashes at a predetermined cycle (1 second) (on for 0.5 seconds, then off for 0.5 seconds), and lights up when the corresponding special symbol is displayed as a static symbol. In other words, the sub-first variable indicator 81 and the sub-second variable indicator 82 repeatedly display in cycles, with one flash representing one cycle (= 1 second), and light up when the corresponding special symbol is displayed as a static symbol.

The results of the special symbol jackpot determination may be announced using the sub-first variable indicator 81 or the sub-second variable indicator 82. In this case, the LED may light up in the event of a jackpot, and turn off in the event of a miss.

The sub-first hold indicator 83 is for displaying the number of first hold information items (first hold number), which will be described later, and the sub-second hold indicator 84 is for displaying the number of second hold information items (second hold number), which will be described later. Each is composed of two LEDs. When the hold number is "0", the left and right LEDs are off; when the hold number is "1", the left LED is on and the right LED is off; when the hold number is "2", the left and right LEDs are on; when the hold number is "3", the left LED flashes and the right LED is on; and when the hold number is "4", the left and right LEDs flash.

The sub-regular symbol variation indicator 85 is used to display (announce) the results of the winning lottery, and is composed of a single LED. When the normal symbol variation display begins, the LED flashes (varies) at a predetermined interval. When the normal symbol is displayed in a static state, the LED displays a static display indicating the result of the winning lottery (lights up if there is a win, and goes out if there is a loss).

In addition, the sub-regular symbol variation indicator 85 may be configured to flash while displaying a regular symbol variation, and to light up or turn off when the regular symbol is displayed as stopped, so that it is possible to determine whether or not a regular symbol variation is being displayed.

The sub-regular map reserve indicator 86 is used to display the number of reserved regular map memories (regular map reserve number) and is composed of two LEDs. When the regular map reserve number is "0", the left and right LEDs are off, when the regular map reserve number is "1", the left LED is on and the right LED is off, when the regular map reserve number is "2", the left and right LEDs are on, when the regular map reserve number is "3", the left LED flashes and the right LED is on, and when the regular map reserve number is "4", the left and right LEDs flash.

The sub-right hit indicator 87 is used to encourage the player to fire the game ball toward the right area of the play area 111 (a so-called right hit), and is composed of a single LED. The LED lights up during a jackpot state (special play) and a time-saving play state, and is off in other play states.

[Configuration of the control unit]
Next, a control unit that controls the operation and processes signals in the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be described.
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of the control unit of the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment.
FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram of the image/sound control unit and the lamp control unit of this embodiment.

As shown in Figure 4, the control unit includes a game control unit 200 as a game control means, which determines whether a special symbol has been won. It also includes a presentation control unit 300 as a presentation control means, which controls the presentation overall, and a payout control unit 330 as a presentation control means, which controls the payout of balls.

[Game control unit configuration and functions]
The game control unit 200 comprises a CPU 201 that performs calculations when determining whether a special symbol has been won, a ROM 202 that stores programs executed by the CPU 201 and various data, and a RAM 203 that is used as a working memory for the CPU 201.

The gaming control unit 200 controls the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 to either a no-time-reduction state or a time-reduction state. The gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 in the no-time-reduction state may be referred to below as the normal gaming state. Furthermore, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 in the time-reduction state may be referred to below as the time-reduction gaming state. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the time-reduction gaming state includes a special time-reduction gaming state and a specific time-reduction gaming state. The special time-reduction gaming state is a gaming state that is controlled via a jackpot game. Furthermore, the specific time-reduction gaming state is a gaming state that is controlled when the number of times the special symbol variable display executed after a predetermined condition is met (executing RAM clear and resetting the number of variations) reaches a specific number (300 times in this embodiment). As a result, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 becomes one of the normal gaming state, the special time-shortened gaming state, and the specific time-shortened gaming state. The gaming control unit 200 switches between the normal gaming state and the special time-shortened gaming state based on predetermined conditions. The gaming control unit 200 also switches between the normal gaming state and the specific time-shortened gaming state based on predetermined conditions. The gaming control unit 200 also switches between the specific time-shortened gaming state and the special time-shortened gaming state based on predetermined conditions. In the time-shortened gaming state, the gaming control unit 200 also performs control such as increasing the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery compared to the normal gaming state, shortening the normal symbol variation time, and extending the opening time of the electric tulip 123.

The game control unit 200 conducts a special symbol lottery when a gaming ball enters the first start slot 121 or the second start slot 122. Then, depending on the results of the special symbol lottery, a special game such as a jackpot game or a small jackpot game is played. During a jackpot game, the game control unit 200 controls the first large prize slot 125, a special electric device, to repeat a predetermined number of rounds in which it remains open until a predetermined condition (e.g., 29.5 seconds have elapsed or 10 gaming balls have entered) is met. The game control unit 200 then controls the interval between opening and closing operations of the first large prize slot 125 when it opens. During a small jackpot game, the game control unit 200 controls the second large prize slot 126, a special electric device, to repeat a predetermined number of rounds in which it remains open until a predetermined condition (e.g., 0.9 seconds have elapsed) is met. The game control unit 200 then controls the interval between opening and closing operations when the second large prize opening 126 is opened.

The game control unit 200 also performs a normal symbol lottery when the gaming ball passes through the gate 124. Then, the game control unit 200 controls the operation of the electric tulip according to the determination result of the normal symbol lottery.
In addition, the game control unit 200 sets holds that occur when the game ball enters the first start port 121 or the second start port 122 during special pattern fluctuation, and holds that occur when the game ball passes through the gate 124 during normal pattern fluctuation.
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 sends information related to game control, such as the results of the special pattern lottery and the normal pattern lottery, information on changing the time-saving state to no time-saving state, and information on setting hold, to the presentation control unit 300 via the connector 200C (see Figure 2) using commands described below.

Furthermore, when a gaming ball enters the first start opening 121, the second start opening 122, the first large prize opening 125, the second large prize opening 126, or the normal prize opening 127, the game control unit 200 instructs the payout control unit 330 to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls per gaming ball depending on the location where the gaming ball entered. For example, the game control unit 200 sends an instruction command (command) to the payout control unit 330 so as to pay out three prize balls when the gaming ball enters the first start opening 121, four prize balls when the gaming ball enters the second start opening 122, nine prize balls when the gaming ball enters the second large prize opening 126, thirteen prize balls when the gaming ball enters the first large prize opening 125, and ten prize balls when the gaming ball enters the normal prize opening 127. Even if it is detected that a gaming ball has passed through the gate 124, the payout control unit 330 is not instructed to pay out any prize balls associated with that.
When the payout control unit 330 pays out prize balls in accordance with an instruction from the game control unit 200, the game control unit 200 acquires information on the number of paid-out prize balls from the payout control unit 330. In this way, the number of paid-out prize balls is managed.
The game control unit 200 can be regarded as a first control means for controlling the progress of the game.

As shown in Figure 4, the game control unit 200 is connected to detection means including a first start port detection unit (first start port switch (SW)) 211 that detects the entry of a game ball into the first start port 121, a second start port detection unit (second start port switch (SW)) 212 that detects the entry of a game ball into the second start port 122, an electric tulip opening/closing unit 213 that opens and closes the electric tulip 123, and a gate detection unit (gate switch (SW)) 214 that detects the passage of a game ball through the gate 124.
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 is connected to a first large prize opening detection unit (first large prize opening switch (SW)) 215 that detects the entry of a game ball into the first large prize opening 125, a first large prize opening door opening/closing unit 216 that sets the first large prize opening door 125D of the first large prize opening 125 to a closed state and a protruding and tilted open state, a second large prize opening detection unit (second large prize opening switch (SW)) 209 that detects the entry of a game ball into the second large prize opening 126, a second large prize opening door opening/closing unit 210 that sets the second large prize opening door 126D of the second large prize opening 126 to a closed state and a protruding and tilted open state, and a regular prize opening detection unit (regular prize opening switch (SW)) 217 that detects the entry of a game ball into the regular prize opening 127.

In addition, a magnetic detection sensor 207 that detects abnormal magnetism for a predetermined period of time and a radio wave detection sensor 208 that detects abnormal radio waves for a predetermined period of time are connected to the game control unit 200. The magnetic detection sensor 207 and the radio wave detection sensor 208 are connected to the game control board 200B via wiring (not shown).
In addition, the game control unit 200 is connected to a first special pattern reserve display 218 that displays the number of reserved, unchanging symbols that have entered the first start gate 121 while the special pattern is changing, a second special pattern reserve display 219 that displays the number of reserved, unchanging symbols that have entered the second start gate 122 while the special pattern is changing, and a normal pattern reserve display 220 that displays the number of reserved, unchanging symbols that have passed through the gate 124 while the normal pattern is changing.
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 is connected to a first special pattern display 221 which displays the change in the special pattern that occurs when a game ball enters the first starting port 121 and the results of the special pattern lottery, a second special pattern display 222 which displays the change in the special pattern that occurs when a game ball enters the second starting port 122 and the results of the special pattern lottery, a normal pattern display 223 which displays the change in the normal pattern and the results of the normal pattern lottery, and a status display 224 which displays the status of the pachinko game machine 100.

Then, detection signals detected by the first start gate switch 211, the second start gate switch 212, the gate switch 214, the first large prize gate switch 215, the second large prize gate switch 209, the normal prize gate switch 217, the magnetic detection sensor 207, and the radio wave detection sensor 208 are sent to the game control unit 200. In addition, control signals from the game control unit 200 are sent to the electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, the first large prize gate door opening/closing unit 216, the second large prize gate door opening/closing unit 210, the first special symbol reserve indicator 218, the second special symbol reserve indicator 219, the normal symbol reserve indicator 220, the first special symbol indicator 221, the second special symbol indicator 222, the normal symbol indicator 223, and the status indicator 224. As a result, the game control unit 200 performs various controls related to the number of prize balls paid out as described above.

Also mounted on the surface of the gaming control board are a RAM clear switch 228 that inputs a signal to clear the contents stored in RAM 203 of the gaming control unit 200 or to update the setting value, which indicates the degree of advantage in the game (the probability of determining a jackpot), a setting key switch 229 that inputs a signal to transition to a setting change mode or setting confirmation mode (described below) by operating the setting key, an information display 230 that displays performance information and setting values that enable the actual performance of the gaming machine to be understood, and other electronic components.

The information display 230 is composed of four 7-segment displays (230a-230d, see Figure 48 below) arranged horizontally. The two 7-segment displays 230a and 230b from the left form an identification segment for displaying identification information indicating the type of performance information (data type), while the two 7-segment displays 230c and 230d from the right form a numeric segment for displaying numerical information indicating setting values and performance information values. Static lighting is used to display setting values, and dynamic lighting is used to display performance information.

Furthermore, the game control unit 200 is connected to an external information terminal board 350 for the board, which transmits various information to a host computer (not shown) installed in the hall. The game control unit 200 then transmits information obtained from the payout control unit 330, such as information regarding the number of prize balls paid out and information indicating the status of the game control unit 200, to the host computer via the external information terminal board 350.

[Configuration and function of the disbursement control unit]
The payout control unit 330 comprises a CPU 331 that performs calculations when controlling the payout of balls, a ROM 332 that stores programs executed by the CPU 331 and various data, and a RAM 333 that is used as working memory for the CPU 331.
The payout control unit 330 then controls the payout of balls based on commands sent from the game control unit 200.
Specifically, the payout control unit 330 receives a command from the game control unit 200 to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls according to the location where the game ball has entered (such as the first starting hole 121). Then, the payout control unit 330 controls the payout drive unit 334 to pay out the number of prize balls specified in the command. The payout drive unit 334 here is composed of a drive motor that sends out game balls from a game ball storage unit.

Also connected to the payout control unit 330 are a payout ball detection unit 335 that detects the number of prize balls actually paid out from the game ball storage unit by the payout drive unit 334, a ball presence detection unit 336 that detects whether game balls are stored in the storage unit (not shown), and a full tank detection unit 337 that detects whether the tray 153 that holds the game balls used by the player when playing and the paid-out prize balls is full. The payout control unit 330 receives detection signals detected by the payout ball detection unit 335, ball presence detection unit 336, and full tank detection unit 337, and performs predetermined processing in accordance with these detection signals.
Furthermore, the payout control unit 330 is connected to a slot external information terminal board 340 that transmits various information to a host computer installed in the hall. The payout control unit 330 then transmits to the host computer via the slot external information terminal board 340, for example, information regarding the number of prize balls that the payout drive unit 334 has been instructed to pay out, and information regarding the number of prize balls actually paid out detected by the payout ball detection unit 335. The same information is also transmitted to the game control unit 200.

[Configuration and functions of the production control unit]
The performance control unit 300 comprises a CPU 301 that performs calculations when controlling the performance, a ROM 302 that stores programs executed by the CPU 301 and various data, a RAM 303 that is used as working memory for the CPU 301, and a real-time clock (RTC) 304 that measures the date and time.
The effect control unit 300 sets the effect content based on, for example, the result of the determination of whether or not a special symbol lottery has been won and the variation pattern sent from the game control unit 200. At this time, the effect control unit 300 may receive operation input from the user using the effect button 161 or the effect key 162 and set the effect content according to the operation input. In this case, for example, a signal (operation signal) according to the operation is received from a controller (not shown) such as the effect button 161, and the operation content identified by this operation signal is reflected in the effect setting.
In addition, the performance control unit 300 receives a signal (operation signal) corresponding to the operation of the background volume adjustment volume 300S (see Figure 2), and reflects the volume identified by this operation signal in the setting of the volume to be output from the speaker 156.
Furthermore, when a game is suspended for a predetermined period of time, the effect control unit 300 instructs the setting of a screen display for waiting for customers as one of the effects.
Furthermore, the presentation control unit 300 sets the presentation content based on the change information of the time-shortening state and the time-shortening state received from the game control unit 200.
Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 sends a command to the image/sound control unit 310 and the lamp control unit 320 to instruct the execution of the set performance content.
In this way, the performance control unit 300 can execute a performance in response to the establishment of a specific condition. Examples of the specific condition include the reception of various commands (various signals), the passage of a predetermined period measured by the real-time clock (RTC) 304, etc. The performance control unit 300 can also be regarded as a second control means for controlling the performance.
The performance control unit 300 also performs performances using various performance elements, such as a board lamp 116, a frame lamp 157, an image display unit 114, a movable role object 115, a speaker 156, and a performance button 161.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 is connected to an image/sound control unit 310 that controls performances using images and sounds, and a lamp control unit 320 that controls performances using various lamps and movable props 115.

[Image/sound control unit configuration and functions]
As shown in FIG. 5, the image/audio control unit 310 includes a CPU 311 that performs calculations when controlling the images and sounds that represent the performance content, a ROM 312 that stores programs executed by the CPU 311 and various data, a RAM 313 that is used as working memory for the CPU 311, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 314, a CGROM 315, and an SNDROM 316.

Then, based on the command sent from the performance control unit 300, the image/sound control unit 310 controls the image displayed on the image display unit 114 and the sound output from the speaker 156.
Specifically, the CGROM 315 stores image data such as symbol images and background images to be displayed on the image display unit 114 during play, decorative symbols for notifying the player of lottery results, characters and items for displaying preview effects to the player, etc. The SNDROM 316 also stores various sound data such as music and voice to be output from the speaker 156 in synchronization with the image data or independently of the image data, as well as sound effects such as jingles.
Based on the pending number command or variable performance start command sent from the performance control unit 300, the CPU 311 analyzes the animation pattern, creates a display list that summarizes drawing-related commands, and sends the display list to the VDP 314.

The VDP 314 reads image data and sound data stored in the CGROM 315 and the SNDROM 316, respectively, based on the display list received from the CPU 311. Furthermore, the VDP 314 performs drawing processing for background image display, pattern image display, pattern image variation, character/item display, etc. using the read image data, and performs sound processing using the read sound data. The VDP 314 then controls the screen display on the image display unit 114 using the image data that has been subjected to the drawing processing. The VDP 314 also controls the sound output from the speaker 156 using the sound data that has been subjected to the sound processing.
In this embodiment, the VDP 314 is configured to perform audio processing in addition to drawing processing, but this is not limiting, and a separate processor dedicated to audio processing may be provided.

[Configuration and function of lamp control unit]
The lamp control unit 320 comprises a CPU 321 that performs calculations when controlling the illumination of the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 and the operation of the movable part 115, a ROM 322 that stores programs executed by the CPU 321 and various data, and a RAM 323 that is used as working memory for the CPU 321.
The lamp control unit 320 controls the lighting/flashing and light color of the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 based on commands sent from the performance control unit 300. It also controls the operation of the movable prop 115.

Specifically, ROM 322 of lamp control unit 320 stores lighting/flashing pattern data and light color pattern data (light emission pattern data) for board lamp 116 and frame lamp 157 according to the performance content set by performance control unit 300. CPU 321 selects and reads out the light emission pattern data stored in ROM 322 that corresponds to the command sent from performance control unit 300. Then, lamp control unit 320 controls the light emission of board lamp 116 and frame lamp 157 according to the read light emission pattern data.
In addition, the ROM 322 of the lamp control unit 320 stores operation pattern data of the movable role object 115 according to the performance content set by the performance control unit 300. The CPU 321 controls the operation of the movable role object 115 based on the read operation pattern data.

In this embodiment, the game control unit 200, the presentation control unit 300, the image/sound control unit 310, the lamp control unit 320, and the payout control unit 330 are each individually configured on a game control board 200B as a main board arranged on the rear surface of the game board 110, a presentation control board 300B as a sub-board, an image control board, a lamp control board, and a payout control board.
5, the effect button 161, the effect key 162, and the background volume adjustment volume 300S are connected to the effect control unit 300 and controlled by the effect control unit 300, but are not limited to this. The effect button 161, the effect key 162, and the background volume adjustment volume 300S may be connected to the lamp control unit 320 and controlled by the lamp control unit 320.

[Functional configuration of the game control unit]
Next, the functional configuration of the game control unit 200 will be described.
Fig. 6 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the game control unit 200. As shown in Fig. 6, the game control unit 200 includes a random number acquisition unit 231, a normal symbol determination unit 232, a special symbol variation control unit 233, a special symbol determination unit 234, and a normal symbol variation control unit 236 as functional units that execute various lottery processes.
The game control unit 200 also includes a variation pattern selection unit 235 as a functional unit that executes processing associated with the variation of special symbols.
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 is equipped with a large prize opening operation control unit 237, an electric tulip operation control unit 238, a prize ball processing unit 239, an output control unit 240, and a random number control unit 241, which are functional units that control the operation of various devices and process data related to prize balls, etc.

The random number acquisition unit 231 acquires a random number value used in the special symbol lottery and a random number value used in the normal symbol lottery. Specifically, in the case of the random number value used in the special symbol lottery, one number (random number value) is selected (acquired) from a predetermined range of numbers for each type of random number, on the condition that a gaming ball has entered the first start hole 121 or the second start hole 122. The acquired random number value is used for determination by the special symbol determination unit 234. As will be described in detail later, the random numbers used in the special symbol lottery include a jackpot random number indicating whether or not a jackpot has occurred, a pattern random number indicating the type of jackpot, a variable pattern random number, a reach random number, etc.
Furthermore, in the case of the random number value used in the normal symbol lottery, specifically, one number (random number value) is selected (obtained) from a predetermined range of numbers on the condition that the gaming ball has passed through the gate 124. The obtained random number value is used for determination by the normal symbol determination unit 232. Note that as the random number used in the normal symbol lottery, in addition to a winning random number indicating whether or not there is a win, a pattern random number indicating the type of win or a variable pattern random number may also be set.
When a special pattern lottery is held, the special pattern change control unit 233 controls the change of the special pattern on the first special pattern display device 221 or the second special pattern display device 222 according to the lottery result.

When the special symbols start to change, the special symbol determination unit 234 uses a random number table such as that shown in FIG. 23, which will be described later, to determine whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, the type of jackpot if a jackpot is won, and whether it is a minor jackpot or a miss if a jackpot is not won. That is, the random number acquisition unit 231 acquires a random number value (game information) related to the special symbol when the passage of the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 211 or the second start port switch 212, which serve as detection means, and the special symbol determination unit 234 determines whether or not to play a special game (such as a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, based on the acquired random number value. The aforementioned special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery) refers to the processing performed by the random number acquisition unit 231 and the special symbol determination unit 234.

The variation pattern selection unit 235 selects a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol to be displayed on the first special symbol display unit 221 and the second special symbol display unit 222. Specifically, the variation pattern selection unit 235 determines the variation pattern based on the determination result of whether or not a jackpot game will be played and the determination result of whether or not a variation pattern (for example, 15.0 seconds or more) that can produce a reach effect in the decorative symbol variation effect accompanying the special symbol variation is to be used. Then, based on the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection unit 235, the special symbol variation control unit 233 controls the variation of the special symbol. Details of the operation of the variation pattern selection unit 235 and the special symbol variation control unit 233 will be described later.
Here, "reach" refers to a presentation that makes the player expect a big win in the decorative symbols described below.

When the normal symbol starts to vary, the normal symbol determination unit 232 uses a random number table as shown in FIG. 23( e), which will be described later, to determine whether the result of the normal symbol lottery is a "win" or not. That is, the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines whether or not to play the auxiliary game of opening and closing the electric tulip 123, based on the random number value for the normal symbol lottery acquired by the random number acquisition unit 231. Furthermore, if multiple types of wins are set in the normal symbol lottery, the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines the "type of win" when the determination result is a win. The normal symbol lottery is a process performed by the random number acquisition unit 231 and the normal symbol determination unit 232.
When a regular symbol lottery is held, the regular symbol variation control unit 236 controls the variation of the regular symbol by the regular symbol display device 223 according to the lottery result.
If the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines a "win" in the normal symbol lottery, the electric tulip operation control unit 238 opens the electric tulip 123 for a specified time and a specified number of times, creating a state in which a gaming ball can easily enter the second starting hole 122. On the other hand, if a "loss" is determined, the electric tulip 123 does not open in this manner. The operation patterns of the electric tulip 123 will be described later, but examples include an operation pattern in which the electric tulip opens once with an opening time of 0.15 seconds, and an operation pattern in which the electric tulip opens three times with an opening time of 1.80 seconds.

When the special symbol determination unit 234 determines a "big win" in the special symbol lottery, the large prize opening operation control unit 237 controls the opening operation of the first large prize opening 125 in an operation pattern specified based on the type of big win won, as a big prize game. Also, when the special symbol determination unit 234 determines a "small win" in the special symbol lottery, the large prize opening operation control unit 237 opens the second large prize opening 126 for a specified time and a specified number of times, as a small prize game.
The prize ball processing unit 239 manages the number of prizes won by various devices related to winning and lottery, and sets commands for controlling the payout of prize balls according to the winning.
The output control unit 240 controls the output of control commands from the game control unit 200 to the presentation control unit 300 and the payout control unit 330 .
The random number control unit 241 updates various random number values acquired by the random number acquisition unit 231 at predetermined timings.

[Basic operation of gaming machine]
Next, the basic operation of the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be described.
When the power is turned on, the game control unit 200 of the pachinko gaming machine 100 performs initialization and initial settings of various devices as basic processing at startup. After performing the basic processing, the game control unit 200 repeatedly executes main control processing, which is a series of processing related to the progress of the game. Furthermore, when the power is turned off, the game control unit 200 executes a series of power-off processing.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the basic processing operation by the game control unit 200.
When the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, the gaming control unit 200 first permits access to the RAM 203 (see FIG. 4) (step (hereinafter, step will be abbreviated as "S") 701). Then, the gaming control unit 200 determines whether a RAM clear switch for clearing the RAM 203 is ON (S702).
If the RAM clear switch is OFF (No in S702), the game control unit 200 next determines whether or not a backup flag relating to operation when the power is cut off is ON (S703).
If the backup flag is ON (Yes in S703), the game control unit 200 next determines whether the checksum created when the power was cut off is normal (S704).
If the checksum is normal (Yes in S704), the game control unit 200 then executes a recovery process (S705). In this recovery process, the game control unit 200 configures the sub-control means, such as the presentation control unit 300, in response to the recovery from the power-off state. Specifically, the game control unit 200 outputs a command to the presentation control unit 300 to configure the sub-control means so as to reflect the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 at the time of the power-off (whether or not a jackpot game is being played, and whether the game is in a normal game state, a special time-saving game state, or a specific time-saving game state). In addition, in this recovery process, the game control unit 200 turns off the backup flag.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is ON (Yes in S702), the backup flag is OFF (No in S703), or the checksum is abnormal (No in S704), the game control unit 200 then performs initialization processing, clearing the contents of RAM 203 (S706) and setting the working area of RAM 203 (S707). The game control unit 200 then outputs a command to the performance control unit 300 to set (initialize) the sub-control means, and sets the sub-board (sub-control means) (S708). Setting the sub-board includes clearing RAM 303, RAM 313, and RAM 323 mounted on each sub-board.

After the return process (see S705) is completed or after the sub-board setting (see S708) is completed, the game control unit 200 sets various counters and timers used for game control (S709).The game control unit 200 then repeatedly executes the following loop processes: interrupt permission (S710), interrupt prohibition (S711), symbol random number control process (S712), initial value random number update process (S713), and determination of whether the power cutoff flag is ON (S714).
Here, the interrupt permission (S710) and the interrupt prohibition (S711) are provided to enable the execution of an interrupt process during the execution of this loop process (S710 to S714). In this embodiment, this interrupt process executes the main control process in the game control. Details of the main control process will be described later.
In the pattern random number control process (S712), the game control unit 200 updates the variable pattern random number used in the special pattern lottery.
In the initial value random number update process (S713), the game control unit 200 updates the initial values of various random number values used in game control.
In determining the power-off flag, if the power-off flag is OFF (No in S714), the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not cut off, and the game control unit 200 repeatedly executes the loop processing (S710 to S714) and the main control processing by interruption. On the other hand, if the power-off flag is ON (Yes in S714), the game control unit 200 starts processing for cutting off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (processing at the time of power-off).

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the operation of the game control unit 200 during power-off processing.
In the power-off process, the game control unit 200 first clears the settings of the output ports for various outputs (S801). Next, the game control unit 200 creates a checksum and stores it in the RAM 203 (S802). Next, the game control unit 200 turns on the backup flag (S803), prohibits access to the RAM 203 (S804), and enters an infinite loop.

[Main control process of gaming machine]
Next, the main control process of the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be described.
In the main control process, the game control unit 200 controls the game in the pachinko game machine 100, and also instructs the presentation control unit 300, which is a sub-control means, to control the presentation, and instructs the payout control unit 330 to control the payout of prize balls.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the main control process of the game control unit 200.
The main control process consists of a series of processes in game control, and is repeatedly executed at predetermined intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds). In this embodiment, the game control unit 200 generates an interrupt at predetermined intervals, and when the interrupt is permitted (see S710) in the loop process shown in Figure 7, the main control process is executed as interrupt processing. As shown in Figure 9, the main control process sequentially executes a random number update process, a switch process, a symbol process, an electric device process, a prize ball process, and an output process (S901 to S906).

In the random number update process (S901), the game control unit 200 calls a function (subroutine) of the random number control unit 241 and updates the values of various random numbers used in game control by the game control unit 200. Details of setting random numbers and updating random number values will be described later.

The switch processing (S902) includes start port switch processing, gate switch processing, and second large prize port switch processing.
In the start port switch processing, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the random number acquisition unit 231, monitors the state of the first start port switch 211 and the second start port switch 212 in Fig. 4, and executes processing for the special symbol lottery when the switch is turned ON. Also, as will be described in detail later, when performing pre-determination processing in the first start port switch 211 and the second start port switch 212, it calls the functions (subroutines) of the special symbol determination unit 234 and the variation pattern selection unit 235, and executes processing for pre-determination.
In the gate switch processing, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the random number acquisition unit 231, monitors the state of the gate switch 214 in Figure 4, and when the switch is turned ON, executes processing for the normal pattern lottery.
In the second big prize opening processing, the game control unit 200 monitors the state of the second big prize opening switch 209 in FIG. 4, and when the switch is turned ON, executes processing to play a big prize game.
The details of these switch processes will be described later.

As the symbol processing (S903), special symbol processing and normal symbol processing are carried out.
In the special symbol processing, the game control unit 200 calls the functions (subroutines) of the special symbol change control unit 233, the special symbol determination unit 234, and the change pattern selection unit 235, and executes the special symbol change and the processing associated with this pattern change.
In the normal symbol processing, the game control unit 200 calls the functions (subroutines) of the normal symbol determination unit 232 and the normal symbol change control unit 236, and executes the normal symbol change and the processing associated with this pattern change.
The details of these symbol processes will be described later.

As the electric accessory processing (S904), the first large prize slot processing, the second large prize slot processing, and the electric tulip processing are carried out.
In the first large prize opening processing, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the large prize opening operation control unit 237 and controls the opening operation of the first large prize opening 125, which is a special electric device, based on specified conditions.
In the second large prize opening processing, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the large prize opening operation control unit 237 and controls the opening operation of the second large prize opening 126, which is a special electric device, based on specified conditions.
In the electric tulip processing, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the electric tulip operation control unit 238, and controls the opening operation of the electric tulip 123, which is a normal electric device, based on predetermined conditions.
The details of these electric accessory processes will be described later.

In prize ball processing (S905), the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the prize ball processing unit 239 and sets commands for managing the number of winning balls and controlling the payout of prize balls according to the winning balls.

In the output process (S906), the game control unit 200 calls a function (subroutine) of the output control unit 240, outputs a command for effect control to the effect control unit 300, and outputs a command for payout control to the payout control unit 330. The effect control commands are generated in each process from S902 to S904, and are stored (set) in a control command storage area provided in RAM 203. The payout control command is generated in the process of S905, and is stored (set) in a control command storage area provided in RAM 203. The RAM 203 has a storage area set up for each type of control command.

The output control unit 240 sequentially checks the storage areas of each control command in RAM 203, and if a control command is stored in an individual storage area (i.e., if a control command has been generated in the processing of S902 to S905), it reads out that control command and outputs it to the output destination (the performance control unit 300 or the payout control unit 330).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, output processing is performed at the end of a series of main control processing. That is, the commands generated in each of the processing steps S902 to S905 by the above-mentioned functions as first processing means are stored in the corresponding storage area of RAM 203 for each processing step. Then, after these processing steps, output control unit 240, which serves as second processing means, outputs all of the commands generated in each processing step that have been accumulated in the storage area of RAM 203. In other words, in this embodiment, when one cycle of main control processing is executed, the commands generated in that cycle are output after the final command in that cycle is generated.

[Modification of the basic operation of the gaming machine]
In the example of operation described with reference to Figures 7 to 9, an interrupt is permitted in the loop processing portion of the basic processing, and a main control processing consisting of a series of processes is executed as the interrupt processing. However, the main control processing may be configured to be repeatedly executed at regular intervals, and the specific implementation means (execution procedure) is not limited to the examples shown in Figures 7 to 9. For example, the main control processing may be incorporated into the series of operations of the basic processing, the elapsed time may be measured at a predetermined timing, and the system may return to the main control processing every regular interval (e.g., 4 milliseconds). Furthermore, while the main control processing is incorporated into the series of operations of the basic processing, an interrupt may be generated every regular interval, as in the operation described with reference to Figures 7 to 9, and when an interrupt is generated, the system may return to the main control processing incorporated into the basic processing.

Furthermore, when a command generated in basic processing is output, as a general rule, it is stored in a command storage area in RAM 203 each time it is generated, and the function of the output control unit 240, which is the second processing means, is called and output. Basic processing differs from main control processing related to the progress of the game, and is special processing such as initial operations that are performed only when the power is turned on. Furthermore, because the processing procedure may change due to branching based on conditions such as the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when the power is turned on, basic processing is processing that promptly outputs generated commands to ensure that no output processing is missed. Note that, depending on the specific processing requirements, such as when commands are generated consecutively by multiple related processes, a processing procedure may be adopted in which multiple commands are stored in a command storage area in RAM 203 and output together.

[Random number update process by game control unit]
Random numbers, which serve as judgment information for various lotteries in game control, such as special symbol lotteries, are counted by a counter, starting from a predetermined initial value and incremented by one each time the random number update process (S901) of the main control process shown in FIG. 9 is performed. The value at the time of each lottery is obtained by the start switch process (FIG. 10) and the gate switch process (FIG. 11) and used in the special symbol process (FIG. 13) and the normal symbol process (FIG. 18). This random number counter is an infinite loop counter, and after the counted random number reaches the maximum random number value (e.g., 299 for the jackpot random number shown in FIG. 23(a) described below), it returns to the initial value. Furthermore, because the random number update process is performed at regular intervals, if the initial value of each random number is identified, the winning value may be estimated based on the update interval and initial value information. Therefore, after returning from the main control process to the basic process shown in FIG. 7, the initial value of each random number is randomly changed in the initial value random number update process at S713.

[Start port switch processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of the start port switch process of the switch process shown in S902 of FIG.
This start port switch processing sequentially processes the winnings at the first start port 121 and the winnings at the second start port 122. Referring to FIG. 10 , the game control unit 200 first determines whether a game ball has won at the first start port 121 and the first start port switch 211 has been turned ON (S1001). If the first start port switch 211 has been turned ON, the game control unit 200 then determines whether the number U1 of reserved balls remaining after the winnings at the first start port 121 is less than the upper limit (S1002). In the example shown in FIG. 10 , the upper limit is set to four balls. If the number U1 of reserved balls has reached the upper limit (No in S1002), no more winning balls remaining after the winnings can be reserved, and processing for the winnings at the first start port 121 is terminated.

On the other hand, if the reserved number U1 is less than the upper limit (Yes in S1002), the random number acquisition unit 231 of the game control unit 200 acquires a random number value for determining whether or not a win has been won this time and stores it in RAM 203 (S1003). In this case, since the win occurred in the first starting slot 121, a random number value for the special symbol lottery is acquired. The random number value acquired at this time is the value updated in the random number update process of S901. This random number value then determines the result of the special symbol lottery in the subsequent special symbol processing. The random number values referred to here include a jackpot random number value that determines whether or not a win is won, a small win, or a miss; a pattern random number value (jackpot pattern random number value) that determines the type of jackpot; a variation pattern random number value that specifies the variation pattern in the pattern variation; and a reach random number value that determines whether or not a variation pattern (variation time) that can execute the reach effect described below will be set in the event of a miss.

Next, the game control unit 200 performs a pre-determination process (S1004). The pre-determination process is a process (pre-determination) in which a winning ball (reserved ball) that has already obtained a random number by winning at the starting hole but has not yet had its random number determined by the special pattern process described below is subjected to a random number determination (pre-determination) before the random number is determined by the special pattern process.

The effect control unit 300 of this embodiment can then perform a preview effect that suggests the result of the random number determination made by the pre-determination process (pre-determination result) before the random number is determined by the special pattern processing and the result is announced. This preview effect is performed, for example, using a reserve display effect (described below) displayed on the image display unit 114 in response to the occurrence of a winning ball (reserved ball) that has already obtained a random number by winning at the starting port but for which the random number has not yet been determined by the special pattern processing. This preview effect based on pre-determination suggests to the player the result of the subsequent random number determination made by the special pattern processing for the reserved ball corresponding to the pre-determination related to the preview effect. This allows the player to play with anticipation for the reserved ball. Details of the preview effect based on pre-determination will be described later.

Then, the game control unit 200 adds 1 to the value of the reserved number U1 (S1005).
Thereafter, the game control unit 200 sets a pre-determination result command including the pre-determination information obtained by the pre-determination process of S1004 in the RAM 203 in order to notify the presentation control unit 300 of the pre-determination result (S1006).
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 sets a reserved number increase command in the RAM 203 to notify the presentation control unit 300 of the increase in reserved number U1 due to S1005 (S1007), and ends processing for the winning at the first starting port 121.

Next, processing for a win at the second start port 122 is carried out. Referring to Figure 10, the game control unit 200 then determines whether a game ball has won at the second start port 122 and the second start port switch 212 has been turned ON (S1008). If the second start port switch 212 has been turned ON, the game control unit 200 then determines whether the number of reserved balls U2 for the win at the second start port 122 that have not yet changed is less than the upper limit (S1009). In the example shown in Figure 10, the upper limit is set to four balls. If the number of reserved balls U2 has reached the upper limit (No in S1009), no more unreserved winning balls can be reserved, and processing for the win at the second start port 122 is terminated.

On the other hand, if the reserved number U2 is less than the upper limit (Yes in S1009), the random number acquisition unit 231 of the game control unit 200 acquires a random number value for the lottery resulting from this winning and stores it in RAM 203 (S1010). In this case, since the winning occurred in the second starting slot 122, a random number value for the special symbol lottery (jackpot random number value, jackpot symbol random number value, small jackpot symbol random number value, reach random number value, variable pattern random number value, etc.) is acquired, just as in S1003 above. The random number value acquired at this time is the value updated in the random number update process of S901. This random number value is then used to determine the result of the special symbol lottery in the subsequent special symbol process.

Next, the game control unit 200 performs a preliminary determination process (S1011). The contents of this preliminary determination process are the same as those of S1004.
Then, the game control unit 200 adds 1 to the value of the reserved number U2 (S1012).
After this, the game control unit 200 sets a pre-determination result command including the pre-determination information obtained by the pre-determination process of S1011 in the RAM 203 in order to notify the presentation control unit 300 of the pre-determination result (S1013).
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 sets a reserved number increase command in the RAM 203 to notify the presentation control unit 300 of the increase in reserved number U2 due to S1012 (S1014), and ends processing for the winning at the second start port 122.

[Gate switch processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the gate switch processing when a gaming ball passes through the gate 124.
In this gate switch processing, the game control unit 200 first determines whether the game ball has passed through the gate 124 and the gate switch 214 has been turned ON (S1101). If the gate switch 214 has been turned ON, the game control unit 200 then determines whether the number G of reserved balls that have not yet changed is less than the upper limit (S1102). In the example shown in FIG. 11, the upper limit is set to four balls. If the number G of reserved balls has reached the upper limit (No in S1102), no more winning balls that have not yet changed can be reserved, and the gate switch processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the reserved number G is less than the upper limit (Yes in S1102), the random number acquisition unit 231 of the game control unit 200 acquires a random number value for the lottery due to this winning and stores it in RAM 203 (S1103). In this case, since the winning is at gate 124, a random number value (such as a winning random number value) for the normal symbol lottery is acquired.

Next, the game control unit 200 adds 1 to the value of the reserved number G (S1104).
After the value of the reserved number G is added in S1104, the game control unit 200 sets a reserved number G increase command in RAM 203 to notify the presentation control unit 300 of the increase in reserved number G due to S1104 (S1105), and ends processing for the winning at gate 124.

[Second large prize slot switch processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second large prize entrance switch processing among the switch processing shown in S902 of FIG.
In this second large prize opening switch processing, the game control unit 200 first determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the second large prize opening 126 and the second large prize opening switch 209 has been turned ON (S1201). If the second large prize opening switch 209 has not been turned ON (NO in S1201), the second large prize opening switch processing ends.

On the other hand, if the second large prize opening switch 209 is ON (YES in S1201), the game control unit 200 determines whether a small prize game is in progress (S1202). If a small prize game is in progress (YES in S1202), the game control unit 200 sets a second large prize opening passage command in RAM 203 (S1203). The second large prize opening passage command is a command indicating that the game ball has passed through the second large prize opening 126. The second large prize opening passage command set in S1203 is sent to the presentation control unit 300 by the output process shown in S906 of FIG. 9. On the other hand, if a small prize game is not in progress (NO in S1202), the game control unit 200 notifies the presentation control board 300 of a second large prize opening passage error. A second large prize opening passage error is an error that occurs when the game ball passes through the second large prize opening 126 at an abnormal timing.

In addition, an area on the right side of the gaming area 111 that is different from the second large winning opening 126 may be designated as a specific area, and the pachinko gaming machine 100 may be provided with a specific area switch that detects when a gaming ball has passed through this specific area. Then, instead of determining whether the second large winning opening switch 209 has been turned ON, the gaming control unit 200 may determine whether the specific area switch has been turned ON, and if it is turned ON during a small winning game, a large winning game described below may be executed after the small winning game has ended. In other words, the area that detects whether a gaming ball has passed through during a small winning game is not limited to the second large winning opening 126.

[Special symbol processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol processing in the symbol processing shown in S903 of FIG.
In this special symbol processing, the special symbol variation control unit 233 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not a jackpot game flag is ON in the flag setting (hereinafter referred to as flag setting) set in the RAM 203 (S1301). Here, the jackpot game flag is a flag that is set to identify that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.

If the jackpot game flag is ON, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is already in the jackpot, and so the special symbol processing ends without starting the special symbol variation (Yes in S1301). On the other hand, if the jackpot game flag is OFF (No in S1301), the special symbol variation control unit 233 then determines whether the pachinko gaming machine 100 is currently in the special symbol variation state (S1302). If the special symbol is not in the special symbol variation state (No in S1302), the special symbol variation control unit 233 then performs processing on the pending numbers U1 and U2 (see Figure 10) of the special symbol that have not yet been varied (S1303 to S1306). In this embodiment, a distinction is made between the pending number U1 related to the winning of the first starting gate 121 and the pending number U2 related to the winning of the second starting gate 122, and so this processing is also performed separately for each corresponding starting gate.

Specifically, the special symbol variation control unit 233 first determines whether the reserved number U2 related to the winning of the second starting gate 122 is 1 or more (S1303). If the reserved number U2 is 1 or more (Yes in S1303), the special symbol variation control unit 233 subtracts 1 from the value of the reserved number U2 (S1304). On the other hand, if the reserved number U2=0 (No in S1303), the special symbol variation control unit 233 next determines whether the reserved number U1 related to the winning of the first starting gate 121 is 1 or more (S1305). If the reserved number U1 is 1 or more (Yes in S1305), the special symbol variation control unit 233 subtracts 1 from the value of the reserved number U1 (S1306). On the other hand, if the reserved number U1 = 0 (No in S1305), this means that there is no winning combination to trigger the lottery for the special symbol, so the special symbol variation is not initiated, and a separate routine for customer waiting setting processing is executed, and the processing ends (S1319).
In this embodiment, priority is given to processing the reserved number U2 related to the winning of the second starting port 122. That is, if the reserved number U2 is 1 or more, processing is performed for the reserved number U2, and if the reserved number U2 = 0, processing is performed for the reserved number U1 (see S1303 to S1306). On the other hand, it is also possible to control the reserved numbers U1 and U2 to be decremented in the order of winning, regardless of whether the winning is at the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122.

After subtracting the reserved number U1 or reserved number U2 in S1304 or S1306, the special symbol variation control unit 233 generates a game status command indicating the current game status of the pachinko gaming machine 100 and sets it in RAM 203 (S1307). The game status command set in S1307 is sent to the performance control unit 300 in the output process shown in S906 of FIG. 9. Furthermore, the special symbol variation control unit 233 turns OFF the customer waiting flag set in the flag setting of RAM 203 (S1308). The customer waiting flag is a flag for identifying that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a customer waiting state, and is set in the customer waiting setting process (S1319, see FIG. 17 described later).

Next, the special symbol variation control unit 233 executes a separate routine for determining whether a jackpot has occurred and for selecting a variation pattern (S1309, S1310). Details will be described later, but this jackpot determination process and variation pattern selection process determine setting information (jackpot symbol, game status, variation pattern, etc.) for the variation of the special symbols that are displayed on the first special symbol display device 221 and the second special symbol display device 222. This information is included in the variation start command sent to the performance control unit 300.

After this, the special symbol variation control unit 233 starts variation of the special symbols displayed by the first special symbol display unit 221 and the second special symbol display unit 222 shown in Fig. 3 based on the setting contents determined in the jackpot determination process and the variation pattern selection process (S1311). Then, a variation start command including setting information indicating the setting contents (jackpot symbol, game status, variation pattern, etc.) is generated and set in RAM 203 (S1312). The variation start command set in S1312 is sent to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S906 of Fig. 9.
Next, the special symbol variation control unit 233 adds one to the number of times the special symbol has been varied since the establishment of a predetermined condition (executing RAM clear and resetting the number of variations) (S1313). Then, a variation number command indicating the added number of times the variable display has been performed is generated and set in the RAM 203 (S1314). The variation number command set in S1314 is sent to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S906 of FIG. 9.

If it is determined in S1302 that the special symbol is changing (Yes in S1302), or after the change count command is set in S1314, the special symbol change control unit 233 determines whether the change time has elapsed (S1315). In other words, it determines whether the time elapsed since the special symbol started changing in S1311 has reached the change time set in the change pattern selection process in S1310. If the change time has not elapsed (No in S1315), the special symbol change continues, and the special symbol processing ends.

On the other hand, if the variation time has elapsed (Yes in S1315), the special symbol variation control unit 233 first stops the variation of the special symbols on the first special symbol display unit 221 and the second special symbol display unit 222 at the symbol determined in the jackpot determination process of S1309 (S1316). Then, another routine of during-stop processing is executed (S1317). The details of the during-stop processing will be described later. In addition, the special symbol variation control unit 233 sets a variation stop command to stop the decorative symbols (described later) in the RAM 203 (S1318). The variation stop command set in S1318 is sent to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S906 of FIG. 9.
It should be noted that, if a win at the second starting port 122 occurs during the variation of the special pattern triggered by a win at the first starting port 121, the variation of the special pattern triggered by a win at the second starting port 122 may occur during the variation of the special pattern triggered by a win at the first starting port 121. Also, for example, if a win at the first starting port 121 occurs during the variation of the special pattern triggered by a win at the second starting port 122, the variation of the special pattern triggered by a win at the first starting port 121 may occur during the variation of the special pattern triggered by a win at the second starting port 122.

Also, in the example shown in Figure 13, after subtracting the value of the reserved number U2 or reserved number U1 (see S1304, S1306), the jackpot determination process and the variation pattern selection process are executed (see S1309, S1310), but this is not limited to this.
In the special symbol processing, after the jackpot determination processing and the variation pattern selection processing are executed, a processing for subtracting the value of the reserved number U2 or the reserved number U1 may be executed. In this case, in the variation pattern selection processing, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the reserved number U2 or the reserved number U1 before subtraction.

[Jackpot Determination Processing by the Game Control Unit]
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the contents of the big win determination process (S1309 in FIG. 13).
In this jackpot determination process, the special symbol determination unit 234 of the game control unit 200 first determines the jackpot random number value for this special symbol lottery (S1401) and determines whether a jackpot or a small jackpot has occurred (S1402, S1405). Whether a jackpot or a small jackpot has occurred is determined by determining whether the value of the jackpot random number obtained in S1003 or S1010 of Fig. 10 matches the value set as the winning value for the jackpot or the value set as the winning value for the small jackpot (see Fig. 23(a)).

If the result of the random number determination in S1401 is a jackpot (Yes in S1402), the special symbol determination unit 234 then determines the jackpot symbol random number value (S1403). The type of jackpot is determined based on the result of this determination. The type of jackpot is determined by whether the value of the jackpot symbol random number obtained in S1003 or S1010 of FIG. 10 matches any of the values preset for each type of jackpot (see FIG. 23(b)).
After the above determination, the special symbol determination unit 234 sets the symbol (jackpot symbol) representing the type of jackpot determined by the determination of the jackpot symbol random number as setting information in the RAM 203 (S1404).

If the result of the random number determination in S1401 is a small win (No in S1402, Yes in S1405), the special symbol determination unit 234 then determines the small win symbol random number value (S1406). The type of small win is determined based on the result of this determination. The type of small win is determined by whether the value of the big win symbol random number obtained in S1003 or S1010 of FIG. 10 matches any of the values preset for each type of small win (see FIG. 23(c)).
After the above determination, the special symbol determination unit 234 sets the symbol (small win symbol) representing the type of small win determined by the determination of the small win symbol random number as setting information in the RAM 203 (S1407).

If the result of the random number determination in S1401 is neither a big win nor a small win (No in S1402 and S1405), the special symbol determination unit 234 then sets a symbol indicating that the lottery was lost (hereinafter referred to as the losing symbol) as setting information in the RAM 203 (S1408).

[Variation pattern selection process by game control unit]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation pattern selection process (S1310 in FIG. 13).
In this variation pattern selection process, the variation pattern selection unit 235 of the game control unit 200 first refers to the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (whether it is in the normal game state, the special time-saving game state, or the specific time-saving game state) (S1501). Then, using the determination result of S1402 of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 14), it determines whether or not a jackpot has been achieved in this special symbol lottery (S1502). Then, if a jackpot has been achieved (Yes in S1502), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads out a variation pattern table for the jackpot from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1503).

On the other hand, if a jackpot has not been reached (No in S1502), the variation pattern selection unit 235 then uses the determination result of S1405 in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 14) to determine whether or not a small jackpot has been reached in this special pattern lottery (S1504). If a small jackpot has been reached (YES in S1504), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads out the variation pattern table for small jackpots from ROM 202 and sets it in RAM 203 (S1505).

On the other hand, if a small win has not been achieved (NO in S1504), a random number value is judged to determine whether or not to perform a so-called reach effect to make the player expect a big win (S1506). Whether or not to perform a reach effect is determined by judging whether or not the reach random number value acquired in S1003 or S1010 of Fig. 10 matches a preset value (see Fig. 23(d)).
If the result of the determination using the random number value is that a reach effect is to be performed (Yes in S1507), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads out a reach variation pattern table from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1508). On the other hand, if a reach effect is not to be performed (No in S1507), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads out a loss variation pattern table from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1509).
Here, the fluctuation pattern table is a table that associates multiple pre-prepared fluctuation patterns (fluctuation times of 3 seconds, 7 seconds, 13 seconds, 15 seconds, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90 seconds, etc.) with the value of the fluctuation pattern random number.

Next, the variation pattern selection unit 235 determines the variation pattern random number value using the variation pattern random number value acquired in S1003 or S1010 of FIG. 10 and the variation pattern table set in S1503, S1505, S1508, and S1509 (S1510). That is, the variation pattern selection unit 235 references the variation pattern table set in RAM 203 and selects a variation pattern corresponding to the random number value of the variation pattern random number. Therefore, even if the same random number value is acquired, the variation pattern table referenced will differ depending on the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (whether it is in a time-saving state or not), the result of the special symbol lottery (whether it has been a jackpot or a small jackpot, and whether a reach effect will be performed if neither a jackpot nor a small jackpot has been achieved), etc., and therefore the variation pattern that is determined will differ.

Then, the variation pattern selection unit 235 sets the variation pattern selected in S1510 as setting information in RAM 203 (S1511). The setting information for the variation pattern set in S1511 is included in the variation start command set in S1312 of FIG. 13, and is sent to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S906 of FIG. 9. Details of the variation pattern selected in this embodiment and its setting will be described later.

[Processing during stoppage by the game control unit]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stoppage process (S1317 in FIG. 13).
In this stop processing, the game control unit 200 first checks whether a flag indicating a time-shortened state (hereinafter, the time-shortened flag) is ON in the flag setting of RAM 203 (S1601). If the time-shortened flag is ON (Yes in S1601), the game control unit 200 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of lotteries (variable number) J in the time-shortened state (S1602) and checks whether the number of lotteries J has become 0 (S1603). If the number of lotteries J=0 (Yes in S1603), the game control unit 200 turns OFF the time-shortened flag (S1604). The operation of turning ON the time-shortened flag and setting the initial value of the number of lotteries J are performed in the game state setting process (FIG. 21) in the first large prize winning port process (FIG. 19) described below.
If the number of lottery draws J is not 0 (NO in S1603), the game control unit 200 generates a time-saving count command indicating the value of the number of lottery draws J in the time-saving state and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1605). The time-saving count command set in S1605 is sent to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S906 of FIG.

If the time-saving flag is OFF (No in S1601), or after the time-saving flag is turned OFF in S1604, or after the time-saving count command is set in S1605, the game control unit 200 then generates a game status command and sets it in RAM 203 (S1606). The game status command set in S1606 is sent to the presentation control unit 300 by the output process shown in S906 of FIG.
Next, the game control unit 200 determines whether or not a jackpot has been awarded in this special symbol lottery (S1607). Here, the determination of whether or not a jackpot has been awarded can be made based on the determination result of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 14). For example, if any of the symbols shown in the chart of FIG. 23(b), which will be described later, is set, the answer is Yes in S1607. If a losing symbol or a small winning symbol is set in the RAM 203 by the jackpot determination process, the answer is No in S1607.

If it is a jackpot (Yes in S1607), the game control unit 200 then turns on the jackpot game flag (S1608), which sets the game state in the RAM 203 to the jackpot game state.
Next, the game control unit 200 initializes the value of the number of lottery draws J (S1609). Furthermore, if the time-saving flag is ON in S1601 and the number of lottery draws J is not 0 in S1603, the game control unit 200 turns the time-saving flag OFF (S1610).

After initializing the value of the number of lotteries J in S1610, the game control unit 200 starts the opening operation of the jackpot game (S1611).
After this, the game control unit 200 sets in the RAM 203 an opening command for the effect control unit 300 to perform an effect in the opening operation according to the jackpot game flag (S1612), and ends the stopped processing. This opening command is sent to the effect control unit 300 by the output processing shown in S906 of FIG. 9.

On the other hand, if the result of this special symbol lottery is not a big win (No in S1607), the game control unit 200 next determines whether the result of this special symbol lottery is a small win or not (S1613).
If it is a small win (YES in S1613), the game control unit 200 then turns on the small win game flag (S1614). This sets the game state in the RAM 203 to the small win game state. Furthermore, the game control unit 200 starts the opening operation for the small win game (S1615).
Next, the game control unit 200 sets an opening command in the RAM 203 for the effect control unit 300 to perform an effect in an opening operation according to the small win game flag (S1616). This opening command is sent to the effect control unit 300 by the output process shown in S906 of FIG. 9.

On the other hand, if it is not a small win (No in S1613), the game control unit 200 determines whether the number of times the special symbol variable display has been executed since the establishment of a predetermined condition (execution of RAM clear, reset of the variable number) has reached a specific number (300 in this embodiment) (S1617). If the specific number has been reached (YES in S1617), the game control unit 200 executes a game status setting process of a separate routine (S1618). The content of the game status setting process will be described later.
Also, if the number of times the variable display has been displayed has not reached the specified number (NO in S1617), the processing during stoppage is terminated.

[Customer waiting setting processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the contents of the customer waiting setting process (S1319 in FIG. 13).
In this customer waiting setting process, the game control unit 200 first checks whether the customer waiting flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1701). Here, the customer waiting flag is a flag that is set to identify that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a customer waiting state.

If the customer waiting flag is ON, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a customer waiting state, and processing ends immediately (Yes in S1701). On the other hand, if the customer waiting flag is OFF (No in S1701), the game control unit 200 generates a customer waiting command and sets it in RAM 203 (S1702), and turns the customer waiting flag ON (S1703). The customer waiting command set in S1702 is sent to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S906 in Figure 9. The customer waiting flag is set when the variation of special symbols has stopped and there are no reserved symbols.

[Normal symbol processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal symbol processing in the symbol processing shown in S903 of FIG.
In this normal symbol processing, the normal symbol variation control unit 236 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether the auxiliary game flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1801). Here, the auxiliary game flag is a flag that is set when a normal symbol lottery is won. When the auxiliary game flag is set, the electric tulip 123 is opened according to the electric tulip processing (FIG. 22) described below, making it easier to win the second start hole 122 (auxiliary game state).

If the auxiliary game flag is ON, the auxiliary game state is already in effect and the normal symbol is stopped, so the normal symbol processing ends without starting the normal symbol change (Yes in S1801). On the other hand, if the auxiliary game flag is OFF (No in S1801), the normal symbol change control unit 236 then determines whether the current state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is during normal symbol change (S1802). If the normal symbol is not during normal symbol change (No in S1802), the normal symbol change control unit 236 then determines whether the reserved number G (see FIG. 11) of unchanged normal symbols is 1 or greater (S1803). If the reserved number G = 0 (No in S1803), this means that there is no winning combination to start the normal symbol lottery, so the processing ends without starting the normal symbol change.

On the other hand, if the reserved number G is 1 or more (Yes in S1803), the normal symbol variation control unit 236 subtracts 1 from the value of the reserved number G (S1804). Then, the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines the winning random number for this normal symbol lottery and determines whether or not the normal symbol lottery has been won (S1805). Whether or not a win has been achieved is determined by determining whether or not the value of the winning random number obtained in S1103 of FIG. 11 matches the value set as the winning value in a table such as that shown in FIG. 23(e) described below.

Next, the normal symbol variation control unit 236 sets the normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol lottery (S1806). That is, if the normal symbol lottery is won, a symbol representing the win (hereinafter, the winning symbol) is set in RAM 203 as setting information. On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is not won, a symbol representing the loss (hereinafter, the losing symbol) is set in RAM 203 as setting information.

Next, the normal symbol variation control unit 236 sets the normal symbol variation time (S1807). This variation time is set based on the time-saving flag set in processes such as S1604 and S1610 in FIG. 16 and S2101 in FIG. 21 described below. That is, if the time-saving flag is ON when setting in S1807, the variation time is set to a short time (e.g., 1.5 seconds), and if the time-saving flag is OFF, the variation time is set to a long time (e.g., 4.0 seconds). After this setting, the normal symbol variation control unit 236 starts varying the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 223 shown in FIG. 2(a) and FIG. 4 based on the settings in S1807 (S1808). The normal symbol variation pattern can also be determined by lottery. In this case, for example, when the gaming ball passes through the gate 124, the random number acquisition unit 231 acquires the random number value for the normal symbol fluctuation pattern, and in S1807, the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 determines the random number value for the normal symbol fluctuation pattern, thereby setting the fluctuation time.

After the normal pattern change has started in S1808, or if it is determined in S1802 that the normal pattern is changing (Yes in S1802), the normal pattern change control unit 236 determines whether the change time has elapsed (S1809). In other words, it determines whether the time elapsed since the normal pattern change started in S1808 has reached the change time set in S1807. If the change time has not elapsed (No in S1809), the normal pattern change continues, and the normal pattern processing ends.

On the other hand, if the variation time has ended (Yes in S1809), the normal symbol variation control unit 236 stops the variation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 223 (S1810). Then, the normal symbol variation control unit 236 determines whether the result of the determination in S1805 was a win (S1811). If it was a win (Yes in S1811), the auxiliary game flag is turned ON (S1812). On the other hand, if the lottery was unsuccessful (No in S1811), the normal symbol processing ends without turning ON the auxiliary game flag.

[First major prize slot processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first big winning slot processing in the electric role processing shown in S904 of FIG.
In this first special prize opening process, the special prize opening operation control unit 237 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether the special prize opening flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1901). If the special prize opening flag is OFF, there is no prize in the first special prize opening 125, and the first special prize opening process is terminated (No in S1901). On the other hand, if the special prize opening flag is ON (Yes in S1901), the special prize opening operation control unit 237 next determines whether the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the middle of the opening operation in the special prize opening operation control that was started in the stop processing (FIG. 16) (S1902).

If the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the opening mode (Yes in S1902), the special prize opening operation control unit 237 then determines whether the time (opening time) for the preset opening operation has elapsed (S1903). If the opening time has not elapsed, the opening operation of the first special prize opening 125 continues, and the first special prize opening processing is terminated (No in S1903). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S1903), the special prize opening operation control unit 237 then performs operation settings for the first special prize opening 125 (S1904), initializes the number of wins C (C = 0) (S1905), adds 1 to the current value of the number of rounds R for the operation of the first special prize opening 125 (S1906), and starts operation (opens) the first special prize opening 125 (S1907).

The activation setting in S1904 sets the activation pattern of the first large winning opening 125 and the number of rounds (number of activation rounds) to be activated with that activation pattern. The activation pattern and number of rounds are set in various ways depending on the type of jackpot in the special symbol lottery. It is stipulated that the first large winning opening 125 is activated multiple times (multiple rounds) in succession during a jackpot game. One example is activation for 15 rounds (15R), with one round opening for 29.5 seconds. Another example is activation for two rounds (2R), with one round opening for 0.9 seconds. More specifically, it is opened for 0.9 seconds, closed for 1.0 second, and then opened for 0.9 seconds.

Next, the large prize opening operation control unit 237 determines whether the opening time for the operation pattern set in S1904 has elapsed (S1908). If the open state of the first large prize opening 125 has not elapsed the opening time (No in S1908), the large prize opening operation control unit 237 then determines whether the number of prizes C won by the first large prize opening 125 is equal to or greater than a specified number (e.g., 9 prizes) (S1909). If the opening time has not elapsed and the number of prizes C is less than the specified number, the first large prize opening 125 will remain in an operating state (open state), and the first large prize opening processing is terminated (No in S1909). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S1908) or the number of winning prizes C has reached the specified number (Yes in S1909), the large prize opening operation control unit 237 will terminate operation of (close) the first large prize opening 125 (S1910).

Next, the special prize opening operation control unit 237 determines whether the number of rounds R of operation of the first special prize opening 125 has reached the maximum value set in S1904 (S1911). If the maximum value has not been reached, the remaining operations will be performed, and the first special prize opening processing is terminated (No in S1911).

When the number of rounds R of operation of the first big prize opening 125 reaches the maximum value (Yes in S1911), the big prize opening operation control unit 237 then starts the ending operation (S1912). Here, the content of the ending operation corresponds to the state of the big prize game flag.
After this, the big win opening operation control unit 237 sets an ending command in the RAM 203 for the performance control unit 300 to perform the performance in the ending operation according to the big win game flag (S1913). This ending command is sent to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S906 of FIG. 9.

Next, the special prize opening operation control unit 237 resets the number of rounds R of operation of the first special prize opening 125 to 0 (S1914), and then determines whether the time elapsed since the start of the ending operation has exceeded the preset time for the ending operation to be performed (ending time) (S1917). If the ending time has not passed, the ending operation continues, and the first special prize opening processing is terminated (No in S1917). On the other hand, if the ending time has passed (Yes in S1917), the special prize opening operation control unit 237 then performs a game status setting process by the game control unit 200 (S1918), and then turns off the jackpot game flag and terminates the first special prize opening processing (S1919). The details of the game status setting process will be described later.

If it is determined in S1902 that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not in the opening mode (No in S1902), the special prize opening operation control unit 237 then determines whether or not the ending mode is in progress (S1915). If the ending mode is in progress (Yes in S1915), the operations from S1917 onwards are executed.

On the other hand, if the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not currently ending (No in S1915), the special prize opening operation control unit 237 then determines whether the first special prize opening 125 is in operation (open) (S1916). If it is not in operation (No in S1916), the operations from S1905 onwards are executed, and if it is in operation (Yes in S1916), the operations from S1908 onwards are executed.

[Second major prize slot processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second large winning slot processing in the electric role processing shown in S904 of FIG.
In this second large prize opening process, the large prize opening operation control unit 237 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether the small prize game flag is ON in the flag setting of RAM 203 (S2001). If the small prize game flag is OFF (No in S2001), there is no prize in the second large prize opening 126, and the second large prize opening process is terminated. On the other hand, if the small prize game flag is ON (Yes in S2001), the large prize opening operation control unit 237 next determines whether the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the middle of the opening operation in the operation control for a small prize that was started in the stop processing (FIG. 16) (S2002).

If the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the opening mode (Yes in S2002), the special prize opening operation control unit 237 then determines whether the time (opening time) for the preset opening operation has elapsed (S2003). If the opening time has not elapsed, the opening operation of the second special prize opening 126 continues, and the second special prize opening processing is terminated (No in S2003). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S2003), the special prize opening operation control unit 237 then performs operation settings for the second special prize opening 126 (S2004), initializes the number of wins C (C = 0) (S2005), adds 1 to the current value of the number of rounds R for the operation of the second special prize opening 126 (S2006), and starts operation (opens) the second special prize opening 126 (S2007).

In the operation setting of S2004, the operation pattern of the second large winning opening 126 and the number of rounds (number of operation rounds) to be operated with that operation pattern are set. The operation pattern and number of rounds are set in various ways depending on the type of small win in the special symbol lottery. Note that in the case of a small win, the cumulative opening time of the second large winning opening 126 must be set to within 1.8 seconds.

Next, the special prize opening operation control unit 237 determines whether the opening time for the operation pattern set in S2004 has elapsed (S2008). If the second special prize opening 126 has not yet elapsed the opening time (No in S2008), the special prize opening operation control unit 237 then determines whether the number of prizes C won by the second special prize opening 126 is equal to or greater than a specified number (S2009). If the opening time has not elapsed and the number of prizes C is less than the specified number, the second special prize opening 126 will remain in operation (open), and the second special prize opening processing will be terminated (No in S2009). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S2008) or the number of prizes C has reached the specified number (Yes in S2009), the special prize opening operation control unit 237 will terminate operation (close) of the second special prize opening 126 (S2010).

Next, the special prize opening operation control unit 237 determines whether the number of rounds R of operation of the second special prize opening 126 has reached the maximum value set in S2004 (S2011). If the maximum value has not been reached, the remaining operations will be performed, and the second special prize opening processing is terminated (No in S2011).

If the number of rounds R of operation of the second large prize opening 126 reaches the maximum value (Yes in S2011), the large prize opening operation control unit 237 next determines whether or not the gaming ball has passed through the second large prize opening 126 during the small prize game (S2012). This determination is made based on the determination of the second large prize opening switch processing (S1202 in FIG. 12).
When the gaming ball passes through the second big winning opening 126 (YES in S2012), the gaming control unit 200 turns on the big win gaming flag (S2013). As a result, the gaming state setting in the RAM 203 becomes the big win gaming state.
Next, the game control unit 200 starts the opening operation of the jackpot game (S2014). Then, the effect control unit 300 sets an opening command in the RAM 203 to perform the effect in the opening operation according to the jackpot game flag (S2015). Furthermore, the first jackpot winning slot processing (see FIG. 19), which is a separate routine, is executed, and the second jackpot winning slot processing is completed (S2016).

On the other hand, if the gaming ball has not passed through the second large prize opening 126 (NO in S2012), the large prize opening operation control unit 237 starts the ending operation (S2017).
After this, the big prize opening operation control unit 237 sets an ending command in the RAM 203 for the performance control unit 300 to perform the performance in the ending operation according to the small prize game flag (S2018). This ending command is sent to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S906 of FIG. 9.

Next, the special prize opening operation control unit 237 resets the number of rounds R for the operation of the second special prize opening 126 to 0 (S2019), and then determines whether the time elapsed since the start of the ending operation has exceeded the preset time for the ending operation (ending time) (S2020). If the ending time has not elapsed (No in S2020), the ending operation continues, and the second special prize opening processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (Yes in S2020), the special prize opening operation control unit 237 then generates a game status command and sets it in RAM 203 (S2021). Furthermore, the small win game flag is turned OFF, and the second special prize opening processing is terminated (S2022).

If it is determined in S2002 that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not in the opening mode (No in S2002), the special prize opening operation control unit 237 then determines whether or not the ending mode is in progress (S2023). If the ending mode is in progress (Yes in S2023), the operations from S2020 onwards are executed.

On the other hand, if the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not currently ending (No in S2023), the special prize opening operation control unit 237 then determines whether the second special prize opening 126 is in operation (open) (S2024). If it is not in operation (No in S2024), the operations from S2005 onwards are executed, and if it is in operation (Yes in S2024), the operations from S2008 onwards are executed.

[Game status setting process]
The contents of the game status setting process (S1618, S1918) by the game control unit 200 are shown in FIG.
First, the game control unit 200 determines whether the result of the special symbol lottery was a big win or a small win (S2101, S2103). This determination can be made, for example, based on the type of symbol set as setting information in the RAM 203 in the big win determination process (FIG. 14). Note that these determinations are generally similar to S1402, S1403, S1405, and S1406 in the big win determination process (FIG. 14), and therefore the determination results of S1402, S1403, S1405, and S1406 may also be used.

If a jackpot is reached (YES in S2101), the game control unit 200 sets an initial value for the number of lottery draws J based on the type of jackpot symbol set as setting information in the RAM 203 (S2102). This initial value is, for example, 30. When the set number of lottery draws J is drawn, the time-saving game mode ends and the game enters the normal game mode.
If the result is a small win (NO in S2101, YES in S2103), the game control unit 200 sets an initial value of the number of lottery draws J based on the type of small win symbol set as setting information in the RAM 203 (S2104). This initial value is, for example, 30 draws.

Next, the game control unit 200 resets the number of times the special symbol has been displayed after the predetermined condition is met (executing RAM clear and resetting the number of times the special symbol has been displayed) (S2105). In addition, the game control unit 200 generates a command indicating the number of times the special symbol has been displayed and sets it in the RAM 203 (S2106). This command is sent to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S906 of FIG. 9.
Next, the game control unit 200 turns on the special time-shortening flag (S2107), which causes the game state setting in the RAM 203 to become the special time-shortening game state.

On the other hand, if the result is neither a big win nor a small win (NO in S2101, NO in S2103), the game control unit 200 sets the initial value of the number of lottery draws J (S2108). In this embodiment, the initial value of the number of lottery draws J is 295. Therefore, when 295 lottery draws are performed in the time-saving gaming state, the time-saving gaming state ends and the normal gaming state is entered.
Next, the game control unit 200 turns on the specific time-shortening flag (S2109), which causes the game state setting in the RAM 203 to become the specific time-shortening game state.

Next, the game control unit 200 generates a game status command and sets it in RAM 203 (S2110). This game status command is sent to the presentation control unit 300 by the output process shown in S906 of Figure 9.

[Electric tulip processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the contents of the electric tulip processing in the electric accessory processing shown in S904 of FIG.
In the electric tulip processing, the electric tulip operation control unit 238 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether the auxiliary game flag is ON in the flag settings of the RAM 203 (S2201). If the auxiliary game flag is OFF, the electric tulip 123 will not open, and the electric tulip processing is terminated (No in S2201). On the other hand, if the auxiliary game flag is ON (Yes in S2201), the electric tulip operation control unit 238 next determines whether the electric tulip 123 is operating (S2202).

If the electric tulip 123 is not in operation (No in S2202), the electric tulip operation control unit 238 sets the operation pattern for the electric tulip 123 (S2203) and operates the electric tulip 123 according to the set operation pattern (S2204). The operation pattern is set based on the time-saving flag set in processes such as S1604 and S1610 in FIG. 16 and S2107 and S2109 in FIG. 21. For example, if the time-saving flag is OFF when set in S2203, an operation pattern is set that opens the electric tulip once with an opening time of 0.15 seconds. If the time-saving flag is ON, an operation pattern is set that opens the electric tulip three times with an opening time of 1.80 seconds. Thus, when the time-saving flag is ON (in the time-saving state), the electric tulip 123 typically opens multiple times for a long period of time, providing a winning support (electric tulip support) that makes it easier to win a prize in the second starting hole 122. It is also possible to provide multiple operation patterns (types of auxiliary games) for the electric tulip 123 when the time-saving flag is ON or OFF, and set the operation pattern according to the type of win determined in the normal symbol processing (see Figure 18).

If it is determined in S2202 that the electric tulip 123 is in operation (Yes in S2202), or after operating the electric tulip 123 in S2204, the electric tulip operation control unit 238 determines whether the opening time for the set operation pattern has elapsed (S2205). If the opening time has not elapsed, the electric tulip 123 will remain in operation (open state), and the electric tulip processing will end (No in S2205). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S2205), the electric tulip operation control unit 238 will turn off the auxiliary game flag and end the electric tulip processing (S2206).

[Random number determination method]
Here, we will explain in detail the random number determination method used in the jackpot determination process (Figure 14), variable pattern selection process (Figure 15), normal pattern process (Figure 18), etc.
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of random numbers (determination table) used in the special symbol lottery and the normal symbol lottery in this embodiment.
Figure 23(a) shows an example of the composition of a jackpot random number used in the special pattern lottery, Figure 23(b) shows an example of the composition of a jackpot random number used in the special pattern lottery, Figure 23(c) shows an example of the composition of a small win random number used in the special pattern lottery, Figure 23(d) shows an example of the composition of a reach random number used in the special pattern lottery that is triggered by the game ball entering the first starting hole 121 in normal game mode, and Figure 23(e) shows an example of the composition of a winning random number used in the normal pattern lottery.

Referring to FIG. 23(a), a jackpot and a small jackpot are set as the jackpot random number determination values. The range of values for the random numbers (jackpot random numbers) is 300, ranging from 0 to 299. Furthermore, while a jackpot winning value is set for each of the first start slot 121 and the second start slot 122, which trigger the special symbol lottery, a small jackpot winning value is set only for the second start slot 122. For the jackpot, three winning values are set for both the first start slot 121 and the second start slot 122, with a winning probability of 3/300 (= 1/100). Furthermore, ten winning values are set for the small jackpot, with a winning probability of 10/300 (= 1/30).
Here, an example of the special symbol lottery will be explained. It is determined whether the jackpot random number value (see S1003, S1010) obtained as a result of winning the first starting slot 121 or the second starting slot 122 matches any of the winning values of the jackpot lottery in Fig. 23(a), namely "8", "58", and "208". Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, the same applies to the special symbol lottery for small prizes.

Referring to Figure 23(b), there are five types of jackpot symbols available: jackpot symbol A, jackpot symbol B, jackpot symbol C, jackpot symbol D, and jackpot symbol E. Here, jackpot symbol A, jackpot symbol B, and jackpot symbol C are symbols that indicate a jackpot as the result of the special symbol lottery, which is triggered by a win in the first starting gate 121. Of these, jackpot symbol A indicates an 8-round jackpot. Jackpot symbol B indicates a 4-round jackpot. Jackpot symbol C indicates a 15-round jackpot. Furthermore, jackpot symbol D and jackpot symbol E are symbols that indicate a jackpot as the result of the special symbol lottery, which is triggered by a win in the second starting gate 122. Of these, jackpot symbol D indicates a 15-round jackpot. Jackpot symbol E indicates an 8-round jackpot. The random number value range is 100, from 0 to 99.

For the jackpot symbol A, 20 winning values are assigned to the first starting slot 121. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery initiated by winning the first starting slot 121, the probability of winning with the jackpot symbol A is 20/100 (= 2/10).
For the jackpot symbol B, 70 winning values are assigned to the first starting slot 121. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery initiated by winning the first starting slot 121, the probability of winning with the jackpot symbol B is 70/100 (=7/10).
For the jackpot symbol C, 10 winning values are assigned to the first starting slot 121. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery initiated by winning the first starting slot 121, the probability of winning with the jackpot symbol C is 10/100 (= 1/10).

For the jackpot symbol D, 50 values are assigned as winning values when the symbol enters the second starting slot 122. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery initiated by winning the second starting slot 122, the probability of winning with the jackpot symbol D is 50/100 (= 5/10).
For the jackpot symbol E, 50 values are assigned as winning values when the symbol enters the second starting slot 122. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting slot 122, the probability of winning with the jackpot symbol E is 50/100 (= 5/10).

Here, taking jackpot pattern A as an example, it is determined whether the jackpot pattern random number value (see S1003) obtained upon winning in the first starting slot 121 matches the winning value of jackpot pattern A in Figure 23 (b), which is "0 to 19." While a detailed explanation will be omitted, the same applies to the special pattern lottery for other jackpot patterns, such as jackpot pattern B.

The pachinko gaming machine 100 of this embodiment is capable of setting a set value, which is a level of advantageousness in the game. In the pachinko gaming machine 100, the set value can be set to one of, for example, six levels: "1,""2,""3,""4,""5," and "6."
In the pachinko gaming machine 100, when the set value is set to "1," the probability of winning is the lowest. For example, when the set value is "1," the probability of winning is 1/100.
In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 100, the winning probability is highest when the set value is set to "6." For example, when the set value is "6," the winning probability is 1/95.
In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 100, the winning probability is set to increase in the order of the set values "1"<"2"<"3"<"4"<"5"<"6".

Referring to Figure 23(c), there are three types of small win symbols available: small win symbol A, small win symbol B, and small win symbol C. Here, small win symbol A, small win symbol B, and small win symbol C all indicate a two-round small win. The range of random number values is 100, from 0 to 99.

For the small prize symbol A, 20 values are assigned as winning values for the second starting slot 122. Therefore, when a small prize is won in the special symbol lottery that is initiated by winning the second starting slot 122, the probability of winning with the small prize symbol A is 20/100 (= 2/10).
For the small prize symbol B, 50 values are assigned as winning values for the second starting slot 122. Therefore, when a small prize is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting slot 122, the probability of winning with the small prize symbol B is 50/100 (= 5/10).
For the small prize symbol C, 30 values are assigned as winning values for the second starting slot 122. Therefore, when a small prize is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting slot 122, the probability of winning with the small prize symbol C is 30/100 (= 3/10).

Next, the determination of the reach random number will be explained. The reach random number is set according to the number of reserved balls, as will be described later. Here, as an example, the reach random number when the number of reserved balls in the first starting port 121 is one will be explained.
Referring to FIG. 23(d), the range of random number values is 250, from 0 to 249. 22 random number values are assigned to the lottery results (with reach) that result in a variation pattern (variation time) in which a reach effect can be executed (e.g., 15.0 seconds or more), and 228 random number values are assigned to the lottery results (without reach) that do not result in a variation pattern in which a reach effect can be executed (e.g., less than 15.0 seconds). In other words, in the illustrated example, if a jackpot is not won in the special pattern lottery, a reach effect is executed with a probability of 22/250 (= 11/125). Hereinafter, the reach effect is an effect executed on the image display unit 114 when a special pattern changes. Hereinafter, an effect when a special pattern changes that does not result in a variation pattern in which a reach effect can be executed is referred to as a reach-free effect, and a effect when a special pattern changes that results in a variation pattern in which a reach effect can be executed is referred to as a reach-enabled effect.

Here, taking the example of a reach-enabled situation, it is determined whether the reach random number value (see S1003) obtained upon winning in the first starting port 121 matches the reach-enabled winning value of "0 to 21" in Figure 23 (d). A detailed explanation will be omitted, but the same applies to the special symbol lottery without a reach. Furthermore, the reach random number used in the special symbol lottery based on winning in the first starting port 121 and the reach random number used in the special symbol lottery based on winning in the second starting port 122 may have the same or different winning values. Furthermore, the reach random number used in the special symbol lottery in the normal play state, the reach random number used in the special symbol lottery in the special time-saving play state, and the reach random number used in the special symbol lottery in the specific time-saving play state may have the same or different winning values.

In many cases, when the special symbol changes, an effect using decorative symbols is produced on the image display unit 114 in conjunction with the display control of the first special symbol display unit 221 and the second special symbol display unit 222 (hereinafter, referred to as special symbol displays 221 and 222 when no distinction is made). The decorative symbols are, for example, three rows of symbols consisting of a vertically consecutive sequence of numbers from 1 to 9. When the special symbol display units 221 and 222 begin to display the special symbol changes, the decorative symbols displayed on the image display unit 114 begin scrolling. Furthermore, when the special symbol is displayed as a static symbol a predetermined time after the start of the special symbol display (the start of the decorative symbol scrolling), the decorative symbol is also fixed and stopped. Generally, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win or a small win, the decorative symbol displays three identical numbers lined up horizontally, vertically, or diagonally. The effect produced in conjunction with the display of the special symbol changes is called a dynamic effect. Note that, below, a variation effect that is executed based on the result of the special symbol lottery being a big win or a small win may be referred to as a big win variation effect. Also, below, a variation effect that is executed based on the result of the special symbol lottery being a miss may be referred to as a miss variation effect. In particular, below, a miss variation effect in which a reach effect is executed may be referred to as a reach miss variation effect. Also, below, a miss variation effect in which a reach effect is not executed may be referred to as a miss variation effect.

In the reach effect, the following operation is performed on the decorative symbols as a variable effect. First, before the decorative symbols scrolling vertically (horizontally) are fixed and stopped, any two symbols (number series) are temporarily stopped first. At this time, the same numbers are temporarily stopped in a horizontal (vertical) or diagonal line. To explain further, if the decorative symbols are scrolling vertically, the same numbers are temporarily stopped in a horizontal line.
Next, the scrolling speed for the last row gradually slows down, giving the player a sense of anticipation that three identical numbers will line up in a straight line. After the last row temporarily stops, the three symbols will stop.
Here, a temporary stop is a pseudo-stop state in which the symbols appear to be stopped at first glance, but in reality, the symbols are slightly fluctuating. In other words, a temporary stop of a symbol is a state in which the game control treats the change as continuing. Here, the stop includes not only a fixed stop but also a temporary stop. Furthermore, a fixed stop of a symbol refers to a state in which the symbol is stopped as a fixed symbol in the variable display of one change of a special symbol.
In addition, in the reach effect, an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect may be performed before the three symbols are fixed and stopped. The SP reach effect is generally called a super reach or a special reach, and is an effect that gives more hope for a jackpot than a reach effect, and is a moving image effect in which various characters appear and a story unfolds. The SPSP reach effect is generally called a super super reach or a special special reach, and is an effect that gives more hope for a jackpot than an SP reach effect, and is a moving image effect in which various characters appear and a story unfolds.
In addition, a reach effect in which neither the SP reach effect nor the SPSP reach effect is performed may be referred to as a normal reach effect below.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 24, which will be described later, in this embodiment, when the fluctuation time is longer (for example, 90 seconds or 60 seconds), the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is set to be executed.
On the other hand, in the no-reach performance, the decorative symbols scrolling vertically (horizontally) are not fixed and stopped until they are fixed and stopped without any performance that gives the player a sense of expectation like the reach performance, and the symbols are fixed and stopped without the same numbers lining up in a straight line horizontally (vertically) or diagonally.

In this way, when the result of the judgment of the jackpot random number is a miss, the reach random number determines whether to perform a reach effect in which the reach effect is an executable variation pattern on the image display unit 114, or a reach-less effect in which the reach effect is not an executable variation pattern. Also, the reach random number changes the execution rate of the reach effect according to the number of reserved numbers, enabling efficient game progress while giving the player an appropriate sense of expectation.
In addition, when a big win is won, a reach effect is performed, and the decorative symbols can be fixed and stopped with the same numbers lined up in a horizontal (vertical) or diagonal line. On the other hand, when a small win or a loss occurs, a reach effect is performed, and the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped with the same numbers not lined up in the above line.

Next, the determination of the winning random number used in the normal symbol lottery will be described.
23(e), the range of random number values is 10, from 0 to 9, with one value assigned as the winning value when the time-saving flag is OFF and nine values assigned as the winning value when the time-saving flag is ON. Therefore, when a gaming ball passes through gate 124 in the non-time-saving state and a regular symbol lottery is held, there is a 1/10 probability of winning. In contrast, when a gaming ball passes through gate 124 in the time-saving state and a regular symbol lottery is held, there is a 9/10 probability of winning.

Here, taking the time-saving flag OFF as an example, it is determined whether the winning random number value (see S1103) obtained when the gaming ball passes through the gate 124, first start gate 121, or second start gate 122 matches the winning value of "0" when the time-saving flag is OFF in Figure 23 (e). A detailed explanation will be omitted, but the same applies to the normal symbol lottery when the time-saving flag is ON.

Furthermore, although not shown, it is possible to set a plurality of winning options with different contents of the auxiliary game (opening patterns of the electric tulips 123) to be played when a winning is determined in the normal symbol lottery. In this case, for example, a winning symbol random number for specifying the type of winning in the normal symbol lottery is set in the same way as the jackpot symbol random number (see FIG. 23(b)) that specifies the type of jackpot in the special symbol lottery. Then, the game control unit 200 acquires the random number value of the winning symbol random number together with the random number value of the winning random number in the gate switch process (see FIG. 11) by the random number acquisition unit 231, and identifies the type of winning based on the acquired random number value by the normal symbol determination unit 232.
Note that the range of random numbers, the percentage of winning values, and the values of winning values shown in the configuration example of each random number in Figure 23 are merely examples and are not limited to the values shown.

[Example of setting a fluctuation pattern]
Next, an example of the setting of the fluctuation patterns and tables used in the fluctuation pattern selection process shown in FIG. 15 will be described.
Figure 24 is a diagram showing an example of setting the variation pattern and table used in the variation pattern selection process shown in Figure 15. In addition, Figure 24 shows a setting example when the variation of the special symbol is performed based on winning the first start port 121 in the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 24, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot (Yes in S1502 in FIG. 15), the special symbol variation control unit 233 determines a variation pattern based on the jackpot symbol and variation pattern random number. Specifically, the special symbol variation control unit 233 determines a variation pattern based on whether the variation pattern random number value (see S1003) acquired together with the jackpot random number value by the random number acquisition unit 231 matches any of the variation pattern random number values assigned to each jackpot symbol. For example, if the jackpot symbol is "jackpot symbol C" and the variation pattern random number is "51," this matches the variation pattern random number range of "50 to 69" assigned to "jackpot symbol C" in FIG. 24, and therefore "PB3" is selected as the variation pattern. The special symbol variation time for this "PB3" is "90.18 seconds."

Furthermore, when the determination result of the special symbol lottery is a miss (when both S1502 and S1504 in FIG. 15 are No), the special symbol variation control unit 233 determines a variation pattern based on the reserved number U1 of the first special symbol lottery, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number. Specifically, when the reserved number U1 of the first special symbol lottery is "1", the special symbol variation control unit 233 determines whether the reach random number value (see S1003) acquired by the random number acquisition unit 231 together with the jackpot random number value is allocated to the reach random number range "0 to 21" allocated to the reserved number "1" of "miss" in FIG. 23, or to the reach random number range "22 to 249". Then, if the acquired reach random number is included in the reach random number range "0 to 21", the fluctuation pattern is determined based on whether the fluctuation pattern random number value (see S1003) acquired together with the jackpot random number value by the random number acquisition unit 231 matches any of the fluctuation pattern random number values assigned to the reach random number range "0 to 21". For example, if the fluctuation pattern random number is "51", it matches the fluctuation pattern random number range "50 to 59", so "PR10" is selected as the fluctuation pattern.
Note that the "..." shown in the "Variation Pattern" in Figure 24 means that a variation pattern that is not shown in the figure is provided.

25 is a diagram showing an example of the setting of the variation pattern and the table used in the variation pattern selection process. In addition, FIG. 25 shows an example of the setting when the variation of the special symbol is performed based on the winning of the second start hole 122 in the special time-saving game state.
The table shown in Figure 25 provides a variation pattern according to the determination result of the special pattern lottery, the reserved number U2 for the second special pattern lottery, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number.
Note that the "..." shown in the "Variation Pattern" in Figure 25 means that a variation pattern that is not shown in the figure is provided.

The game control unit 200 determines the table to be used to select the special symbol variation pattern based on whether the gaming ball has entered the first start slot 121 or the second start slot 122 and the game status of the pachinko gaming machine 100. Then, as described above, the game control unit 200 determines the special symbol variation pattern based on the variation pattern random number value (see S1003 and S1010 in FIG. 10) obtained when the gaming ball entered the first start slot 121 or the second start slot 122, and conditions such as the presence or absence of a reach effect and the number of reserved balls. Information on the determined special symbol variation pattern is then included in a variation start command and sent from the game control unit 200 to the presentation control unit 300. As described below, the presentation control unit 300 selects and executes, as the presentation when the special symbol varies, a presentation that corresponds to (can be executed within) the variation time specified based on the variation pattern information included in the variation start command.

[Configuration of RAM of game control unit and RAM of performance control unit for performing preview performance based on advance judgment]
Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the game control unit 200 and the RAM 303 of the presentation control unit 300 in this embodiment for executing the preview presentation based on the advance determination will be described.
26A and 26B are block diagrams illustrating an example of the configuration of the RAM 203 (see FIG. 4) of the game control unit 200 according to this embodiment. Fig. 26A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the memory area 204, and Fig. 26B is a block diagram showing the configuration of each of the memory units shown in Fig. 26A.

As shown in Figure 26(a), RAM 203 has memory area 204, which serves as a special symbol reserve memory area for storing jackpot random numbers obtained by the jackpot random number lottery. This memory area 204 has eight memory sections corresponding to the maximum number of reserved numbers for first start port 121 and second start port 122 (when the upper limit for each reserved number is 4). Specifically, memory area 204 has first memory section 204a, second memory section 204b, third memory section 204c, fourth memory section 204d, fifth memory section 204e, sixth memory section 204f, seventh memory section 204g, and eighth memory section 204h.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 26(b), each of these memory units 204a to 204h has an area for storing information indicating which starting gate (first starting gate 121 or second starting gate 122) was selected, an area for storing the obtained jackpot random number, an area for storing a pattern random number, an area for storing a reach random number, and an area for storing a variation pattern random number. In other words, each of memory units 204a to 204h stores a jackpot random number, a pattern random number, a reach random number, and a variation pattern random number.

Here, each random number is stored in order, starting with the first storage unit 204a. To be more specific, for example, if no random numbers are stored in any of the first storage unit 204a through the eighth storage unit 204h, the acquired random number will be stored in the first storage unit 204a. Also, for example, if random numbers are already stored in the first storage unit 204a through the fourth storage unit 204d, the acquired random number will be stored in the fifth storage unit 204e.

Fig. 27 is a block diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of RAM 303 (see Fig. 4) of performance control unit 300 according to this embodiment. Fig. 27(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of reserved memory areas 305 and 306, and Fig. 27(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of each of the memory units shown in Fig. 27(a).
As shown in FIG. 27A, RAM 303 includes a first reserved memory area 305 and a second reserved memory area 306 as reserved status memory areas for storing the status of reserved balls. The first reserved memory area 305 and the second reserved memory area 306 correspond to reserved balls for winning the first starting hole 121 and reserved balls for winning the second starting hole 122, respectively, and each has four memory sections. Specifically, the first reserved memory area 305 includes a first memory section 305a, a second memory section 305b, a third memory section 305c, and a fourth memory section 305d. The second reserved memory area 306 includes a first memory section 306a, a second memory section 306b, a third memory section 306c, and a fourth memory section 306d.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 27(b), each of these memory units 305a-305d and 306a-306d has a reserve flag memory area that turns a reserve flag ON/OFF and a notification flag memory area that turns a notification flag ON/OFF. The reserve flag is a flag that identifies whether or not there are reserved balls in each of the memory units 305a-305d and 306a-306d. For example, if the number of reserved balls due to winning in the first starting hole 121 is three, the reserve flags will be ON in the three reserve flag memory areas of the first through third memory units 305a, 305b, and 305c. The notification flag is a flag that determines whether or not to perform a preview effect based on the results of a preliminary determination for each reserved ball. In the pachinko gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can determine whether or not to perform a preview effect based on the results of a preliminary determination depending on the game status and the presentation situation. Therefore, if a preview effect is to be performed, the notification flag is turned ON, and if a preview effect is not to be performed, the notification flag is turned OFF. For example, if a preview effect is to be performed on the third of the three reserved balls, the notification flag is turned ON in the notification flag storage area of the third storage unit 305c.

In addition, although not specifically shown, RAM 203 also has an area (hereinafter referred to as the "pre-determination information storage area") for storing pre-determination information, separate from the configuration shown in Figure 26(a). Pre-determination information is information obtained by the pre-determination process based on the above-mentioned random numbers (see S1004 and S1011 in Figure 10). The content of the pre-determination information is similar to the information obtained as various determination results in the special symbol process (see Figure 13). Specifically, the content of the pre-determination information indicates whether a jackpot has been achieved (and whether a small jackpot has been achieved), and if so, the type of jackpot, whether the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is long enough to execute a reach effect, and the content of the fluctuation pattern. The pre-determination information stored in the pre-determination information storage area is included in a pre-determination result command and sent from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300, either together with information regarding the reserve corresponding to the winning ball (reserved ball) for which the pre-determination process was performed (hereinafter referred to as the "reserved information"), or at a unique timing separate from this reserve information.

[Preliminary Determination Processing]
Next, the preliminary determination process (see S1004 and S1011 in FIG. 10) will be described in detail.
In the preliminary determination process in this embodiment, the game control unit 200 performs preliminary determination as follows using a random number table similar to the example of random number configuration described with reference to Figures 24 and 25.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the contents of the preliminary determination process (S1004 and S1011 in FIG. 10) according to this embodiment.
As shown in Figure 28, the game control unit 200 first refers to the game status (S3201), selects a table corresponding to the current game status of the pachinko game machine 100, and performs a preliminary determination of the jackpot random number and jackpot pattern random number (S3202).
Next, the game control unit 200 selects a table according to the current game state of the pachinko game machine 100 and performs a preliminary determination of the reach random number (S3203). Furthermore, it selects a table according to the current game state and performs a preliminary determination of the fluctuation pattern random number (S3204).
Although not shown in the figures, in S3202, S3203 and S3204, a dedicated table is selected depending on whether the pre-determination process is based on a winning entry at the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122.

Next, the game control unit 200 selects a pre-determination pattern according to the results of the pre-determinations in S3202, S3203, and S3204 (S3205).
After that, the game control unit 200 stores the results of the preliminary determination of the jackpot random number, the results of the preliminary determination of the jackpot pattern random number, the results of the preliminary determination of the reach random number, the results of the preliminary determination of the variation pattern, and the preliminary determination pattern obtained as described above in the preliminary determination information storage area as preliminary determination information (S3206).Furthermore, in order to transmit the preliminary determination information to the performance control unit 300, a preliminary determination result command including the preliminary determination information is set in the RAM 203 (S3207).

The above-mentioned preliminary determination was made using a random number value (see S1003 and S1010 in FIG. 10) obtained in response to the entry of a gaming ball into the first start hole 121 and the second start hole 122, and a determination table with a configuration similar to that of the determination table used in the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 23). In other words, the determination itself after selecting the determination table to be used is the same as the determination in the jackpot determination process (see S1401 in FIG. 14). Therefore, in this embodiment, the subroutine (see S1309 in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14) of the jackpot determination process used in the special symbol process (see FIG. 13) is called, and the random number determination in the above-mentioned preliminary determination is made.

By adopting this configuration, in this embodiment, there is no need to prepare a processing function (subroutine) for determining random numbers separately from the jackpot determination process in order to determine the random numbers in the pre-determination process. This reduces the number of control instructions and prevents the increase in program size related to the jackpot determination process and pre-determination process. Furthermore, as described above, if the determination table used for the pre-determination has the same configuration as the determination table used for the jackpot determination, the determination table used for the jackpot determination may also be used for the pre-determination.

While only the advance determination (whether or not a jackpot is reached) of the special symbol lottery has been described here, in this embodiment, advance determination is also made of the variation patterns when the special symbol variable display and stop display are performed. The variation pattern for the special symbol lottery is selected using the variation pattern selection random number value (see S1003 and S1010 in FIG. 10) obtained in response to the entry of the game ball into the first start slot 121 and the second start slot 122, and the variation pattern table (see FIGS. 24 to 27) (see S1310 and FIG. 13). Therefore, when predicting the variation pattern, the variation pattern to be selected can be predicted using the variation pattern selection random number value obtained at the time of entry and a predictive table with the same configuration as the variation pattern table used in the variation pattern selection process for the special symbol processing. In other words, a different predictive table can be used for each game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100. In addition, different look-ahead tables can be used depending on whether the first starting slot 121 or the second starting slot 122 is won.

In this case, the subroutine (see S1310 in FIG. 13 and FIG. 15) of the variation pattern selection process used in the special symbol processing (see FIG. 13) can be called and used to predict the variation pattern to be selected in the variation pattern selection process. Furthermore, the variation pattern table used in the variation pattern selection process for the special symbol processing can also be used for the predictive table used to predict the variation pattern selection. This configuration reduces the number of control commands related to predictive prediction of variation pattern selection, and prevents the program size from increasing.

Note that if the preliminary determination process and the jackpot determination process when a special symbol changes are performed in the same subroutine using the same set of determination tables, the execution times of each process may differ, resulting in different results between the preliminary determination and the jackpot determination process when a special symbol changes. This occurs when the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (either the normal game state, the special time-limited game state, or the specific time-limited game state) changes after the preliminary determination process is performed and before the special symbol changes. In this case, different types of determination tables are used depending on the game state, so the specific determination tables used for the determination differ between the execution of the preliminary determination process and the execution of the jackpot determination process. Therefore, even if the same random number value obtained when winning the first start slot 121 and the second start slot 122 is used, the preliminary determination and the determination results of the jackpot determination process may differ. In such cases, if the game state changes after the preliminary determination process is performed and before the special symbol variation begins, the effect control unit 300 may perform control such as prohibiting the execution of effects based on the preliminary determination results.

In accordance with the commands output from the game control unit 200 to the presentation control unit 300 as described above, the presentation control unit 300 controls, for example, the image display unit 114, board lamp 116, speaker 156, and frame lamp 157. For example, when the presentation control unit 300 receives a command indicating the start of a door opening error, the presentation control unit 300 causes the image display unit 114 to display a message such as "Please call an attendant" or an image indicating an abnormal condition. The presentation control unit 300 also causes the speaker 156 to output an alarm indicating an abnormal condition, and restricts the output of music, voice, sound effects, and the like. The presentation control unit 300 also turns on the board lamp 116 and frame lamp 157, for example, in red, to indicate an abnormal condition.

In addition, while it has been described here that the performance control unit 300 notifies the occurrence of an error using all of the image display unit 114, board lamp 116, speaker 156, and frame lamp 157, it may also be possible to use only some of these. The notification mode may also be switched depending on the nature of the error. For example, if a door opening error occurs, the image display unit 114, board lamp 116, speaker 156, and frame lamp 157 may all be used as described above. Furthermore, if a payout error occurs, the occurrence of an error is notified by the image display unit 114 and speaker 156. This allows staff at gaming establishments (pachinko parlors) and the like to easily determine the urgency of an error that has occurred in a gaming machine.

[Example of setting a pre-determination pattern]
Next, an example of setting the pre-determination patterns and tables used in the pre-determination process shown in FIG. 28 will be described.
Fig. 29 is a diagram showing an example of the settings of the pre-determination pattern and table used in the pre-determination process shown in Fig. 28. Fig. 29 shows an example of the settings when the special symbol is changed based on the winning of the first start slot 121 in the normal game state.

In the table shown in Figure 29, "judgment result,""pattern,""reach random number,""variation pattern random number,""expected variation pattern," and "pre-judgment pattern" are associated with each other.
The game control unit 200 determines the expected fluctuation pattern and the pre-determination pattern based on the pre-determination results of the jackpot random number and jackpot pattern random number, the pre-determination results of the reach random number, and the pre-determination results of the fluctuation pattern random number.
The "..." shown in the "pre-determination pattern" in FIG. 29 means that a pre-determination pattern not shown is provided.

30 is a diagram showing an example of the setting of the pre-determination pattern and the table used in the pre-determination process. Note that FIG. 30 shows an example of the setting when the special symbol is changed based on the winning of the second start slot 122 in the special time-saving game state.
In the table shown in Figure 30, "judgment result,""pattern,""reach random number,""variation pattern random number,""expected variation pattern," and "pre-judgment pattern" are associated with each other.

[Operation of the production control unit]
Next, the operation of the performance control unit 300 will be described.
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the operation of the performance control unit 300.
The operation of the performance control unit 300 consists of the main processing shown in Fig. 31(a) and the interrupt processing shown in Fig. 31(b). Referring to Fig. 31(a), the performance control unit 300 first performs initial setting at startup (S3601), sets the cycle of the CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) (S3602), and then accepts interrupt processing while updating the random numbers used in performance control according to the set cycle (S3603).

Interrupt processing is performed periodically according to the cycle set in S3602. Referring to FIG. 31(b), in this interrupt processing, the presentation control unit 300 receives a command from the game control unit 200 and performs command reception processing (S3611). In this command reception processing, the presentation content (presentation pattern) is selected. The presentation control unit 300 also performs specific time-saving related presentation processing to execute presentations related to the specific time-saving game state (S3612). The presentation control unit 300 also performs presentation button processing to accept operation of the presentation button 161 or the like by the player (S3613). Thereafter, the presentation control unit 300 performs command transmission processing to send a command including information on the selected presentation pattern to the image/sound control unit 310 and lamp control unit 320 (S3614). This results in presentations such as image display and sound output on the image display unit 114, operation of the movable role object 115, and illumination of the board lamp 116 and frame lamp 157.

[Command reception processing by the production control unit]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command reception process (S3611 in FIG. 31(b)).
In this command reception process, the performance control unit 300 first determines whether or not it has received a preliminary determination result command and a reserved number increase command (S3701). The preliminary determination result command and the reserved number increase command are set in the game control unit 200 in the start port switch process shown in Figure 10 (S1006, S1007, S1013, S1014) and are commands sent to the performance control unit 300 in the output process (S906) shown in Figure 9.
Then, if the performance control unit 300 determines that it has received a pre-determination result command and a hold number increase command (Yes in S3701), it adds 1 to the value of the hold number stored in RAM 303 (S3702).
Furthermore, the effect control unit 300 performs a pre-determination effect selection process based on the pre-determination result command and the hold number increase command (S3703). The details of the pre-determination effect selection process will be described later.

If the received command is neither a pre-determination result command nor a reserved number increase command (No in S3701), the performance control unit 300 determines whether the received command is a fluctuation start command (S3704). This fluctuation start command is set in the game control unit 200 in the special symbol processing shown in Fig. 13 (S1312) and is a command sent to the performance control unit 300 in the output processing (S906) shown in Fig. 9.
If the received command is a fluctuation start command (Yes in S3704), the performance control unit 300 executes a performance selection process (S3705). Also, when a fluctuation start command is received, a random number value for performance control used in the performance selection process is acquired. This random number value is a random number value that is periodically updated in S3603 of the main process shown in Figure 31 (a). The performance selection process will be described in detail later.

If the received command is not a preliminary determination result command, a reserved number increase command, or a fluctuation start command (No in S3701 and S3704), the performance control unit 300 determines whether the received command is a fluctuation stop command (S3706). This fluctuation stop command is set in the game control unit 200 in the special symbol processing shown in Figure 13 (S1318) and is a command sent to the performance control unit 300 in the output processing (S906) shown in Figure 9.
If the received command is a fluctuation stop command (Yes in S3707), the performance control unit 300 executes a fluctuation performance end process (S3707). In the fluctuation performance end process, the performance control unit 300 analyzes the received fluctuation stop command and sets a fluctuation performance end command in RAM 303 to instruct the end of the symbol fluctuation performance.

If the received command is not a pre-determination result command, a reserve number increase command, a fluctuation start command, or a fluctuation stop command (No in S3701, S3704, and S3706), the presentation control unit 300 determines whether the received command is an opening command for starting the opening operation of a jackpot game (S3708). This opening command is set (S1618) in the stopped game process (S1618) shown in Fig. 16 or the second jackpot opening process (S2015) shown in Fig. 20, and is a command sent to the presentation control unit 300 in the output process (S906) shown in Fig. 9.
If the received command is an opening command (Yes in S3708), the effect control unit 300 executes a big win effect selection process (S3709). The big win effect selection process will be described in detail later.

If the received command is not a preliminary determination result command, a reserved number increase command, a fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, or an opening command (No in S3701, S3704, S3706, and S3708), the presentation control unit 300 determines whether the received command is an ending command for starting the ending operation of the jackpot game (S3710). This ending command is set in the first jackpot winning slot processing shown in Fig. 19 (S1913) and is the command sent to the presentation control unit 300 in the output processing (S906) shown in Fig. 9.
If the received command is an ending command (Yes in S3710), the rendering control unit 300 executes an ending rendering selection process (S3711). The details of the ending rendering selection process will be described later.

If the received command is not a pre-determination result command, a hold number increase command, a fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, an opening command, or an ending command (No in S3701, S3704, S3706, S3708, and S3710), the performance control unit 300 then executes a customer waiting command reception process to transition the received command to a customer waiting state (S3712). Details of the customer waiting command reception process will be described later.

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pre-determination effect selection process (S3703) and the effect selection process (S3705) of FIG.
In the pre-determination effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the pre-determination result command received from the game control unit 200 (S3801). The effect control unit 300 then analyzes the hold number increase command received from the game control unit 200 (S3802). The effect control unit 300 then selects an effect pattern (pre-determination effect pattern) to be used in the pre-determination effect based on the pre-determination result command and the hold number increase command (S3803).

Pre-determination effect patterns can include various effect patterns that foretell the results of the random number determination made by the special pattern processing before the start of fluctuations based on the results of the random number determination made by the special pattern processing. For example, effects such as a hold display effect or a continuous notice effect can be provided as pre-determination effect patterns. In this embodiment, when a reserved ball is generated, a display indicating the number of reserved balls is displayed on the first special pattern reserved display 218 and the second special pattern reserved display 219 of the display unit 130 (see Figure 3), and a reserve display indicating the occurrence of a reserved ball and the number of reserved balls is displayed on the image display unit 114 (hold display effect). Therefore, by reflecting the pre-determination result in the display mode of the reserve display in this reserve display effect, a pre-determination effect can be provided that suggests to the player the determination result when a random number determination is subsequently made using the special pattern processing for that reserved ball.

Note that while we have explained the case where the hold display effect is used as a pre-determination effect, by reflecting this in the various effect contents that are performed before the start of fluctuations based on the random number determination results from special pattern processing, it is possible to perform a variety of preview effects. For example, effects using the effect image displayed on the image display unit 114, effects using the illumination of the board lamp 116 and frame lamp 157, effects using the movement of movable parts, effects using audio output such as music and sound effects, etc. can be set as pre-determination effect patterns.

In addition, the pre-determination effect may be executed in conjunction with a pattern change for another winning ball that occurs before the pattern change for the winning ball (reserved ball) for which a pre-determination has been made. In this embodiment, the number of reserved balls is limited to four per start port (first start port 121 or second start port 122) (see Figure 10). Priority is given to the consumption of reserved balls in second start port 122. In this case, for example, if a pre-determination is made for a reserved ball in second start port 122, pattern changes will occur for up to four winning balls, including the currently changing change (referred to as the change in question), before the pattern change for that reserved ball occurs. In the preview effect for a reserved ball for which a pre-determination has been made, if multiple pattern changes occur before the pattern change for that reserved ball, a preview effect (continuous preview effect) may be executed that spans those multiple pattern changes.

Then, the effect control unit 300 sets in RAM 303 a hold number command containing the value of the hold number after the addition and information about the pre-determined effect pattern selected in the pre-determined effect selection process (S3804). The hold number command contains information indicating the selected pre-determined effect pattern, in order to notify the CPU 311 of the image/sound control unit 310 of that pattern. Upon receiving the hold number command, the CPU 311 creates a display list or the like to cause the VDP 314 to draw and output images and sounds corresponding to the selected pre-determined effect pattern. Based on the display list or the like, the VDP 314 reads image data and sound data representing the selected pre-determined effect pattern from CGROM 315 and SNDROM 316, and displays the pre-determined effect using the image display unit 114 and speaker 156.

In the effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the received fluctuation start command (S3811). It also subtracts 1 from the value of the reserved number stored in RAM 303 (S3812). The effect control unit 300 then selects a fluctuation effect pattern for the pattern fluctuations using images to be displayed on the image display unit 114 based on various setting information (such as the type of jackpot, the game status after the jackpot, and fluctuation patterns) obtained from the analysis results of the fluctuation start command (S3813). Note that after a fluctuation effect pattern is selected, the value of the reserved number stored in RAM 303 may be subtracted by 1. In other words, the fluctuation effect pattern may be selected before the value of the reserved number stored in RAM 303 is subtracted by 1.

Finally, the performance control unit 300 sets a variable performance start command in RAM 303 to instruct the start of execution of the selected performance (S3814). The variable performance start command includes information indicating the selected variable performance pattern, in order to notify the CPU 311 of that pattern. Upon receiving the variable performance start command, the CPU 311 creates a display list or the like to cause the VDP 314 to draw and output images and sounds corresponding to the selected variable performance pattern. Based on the display list or the like, the VDP 314 reads image data and sound data representing the selected variable performance pattern from the CGROM 315 and SNDROM 316, and displays the variable performance using the image display unit 114 and speaker 156.

Although not described in detail, in the process of selecting the variation presentation pattern for the symbol variation in S3813, the variation presentation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern. The variation presentation pattern determined here determines the variation display of the decorative symbol, background presentation, preview presentation, etc. Note that the variation presentation of the decorative symbol is a presentation display performed on the image display unit 114 in conjunction with the variation display of the special symbol performed on the first special symbol display device 221 or the second special symbol display device 222. In this variation presentation of the decorative symbol, a reach presentation, etc. is executed. Note that, unlike this embodiment, if multiple variation presentation patterns are set for a variation pattern, the variation presentation pattern may be selected by lottery using a presentation random number (one of the random numbers updated in S3603 of Figure 31 (a), and the presentation random number value is obtained when the variation start command is received).

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the contents of the big win effect selection process (S3709) of FIG.
In this jackpot effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the received opening command (including information about the type of jackpot symbol) (S3901) and selects an effect pattern (jackpot effect pattern) (S3902). The effect control unit 300 then reads from ROM 302 the image data and sound data used for the effects of the selected jackpot effect pattern, sets this data together with a jackpot effect start command instructing the selected effect in RAM 303, and terminates the jackpot effect selection process (S3903). This determines the effects during the jackpot. Note that the selection of the jackpot effect pattern (S3902) may be determined based on a random number value obtained when the command is received.

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending effect selection process (S3711) of FIG.
In this ending effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the received ending command (including information about the type of jackpot symbol) (S4001) and selects an effect pattern (ending effect pattern) (S4002). The effect control unit 300 then reads from ROM 302 the image data and sound data used for the effects of the selected ending effect pattern, and sets these data and an ending effect start command instructing the selected effect in RAM 303, thereby terminating the ending effect selection process (S4003). Note that in selecting the ending effect pattern (S4002), a determination may be made based on a random number value obtained when the command is received.

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the contents of the customer waiting command receiving process (S3712) of FIG.
The performance control unit 300 determines whether or not a customer waiting command for transitioning to a customer waiting state has been received (S4101). If a customer waiting command has been received (Yes in S4101), the performance control unit 300 starts measuring the elapsed time (S4102) and turns on a measurement flag in RAM 303 (S4103). On the other hand, if the received command is not a customer waiting command (No in S4101), the performance control unit 300 determines whether or not the measurement flag stored in RAM 303 is on (S4104). If the measurement flag is off (No in S4104), the performance control unit 300 ends the customer waiting command reception process.

If the measurement flag is ON (Yes in S4104 or after being set to ON in S4103), the performance control unit 300 then determines whether the measurement time has reached a predetermined time-out period (e.g., 10 seconds) (S4105). If the time has not expired (No in S4105), the customer waiting command reception process ends. On the other hand, if the time has expired (Yes in S4105), the performance control unit 300 turns OFF the measurement flag stored in RAM 303 (S4106).

Next, the effect control unit 300 determines whether the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the specific time-shortened game state (S4107). If it is in the specific time-shortened game state (YES in S4107), the effect control unit 300 determines whether the first variable effect in the special time-shortened game state has not yet started (S4108).
If it is not before the start of the first variable performance (NO in S4108), the performance control unit 300 sets a customer waiting performance command to perform the first customer waiting performance in RAM 303 and terminates the customer waiting command receiving process (S4109).
Furthermore, if the specific time-saving game state is not in effect (NO in S4107) or if the first variable effect in the specific time-saving game state has not yet started (YES in S4108), the effect control unit 300 sets a customer waiting effect command for performing a second customer waiting effect (demo effect) in the RAM 303 and ends the customer waiting command reception process (S4110). The second customer waiting effect is an effect that is different in type from the first customer waiting effect.

When the command reception process is completed in this manner, one of the following commands is set in RAM 303: variable effect start command, variable effect end command, jackpot effect start command, ending effect start command, or customer waiting effect command.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the contents of the specific time-saving related effect processing (S3612) of FIG. 31(b).
The presentation control unit 300 determines whether the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is the normal gaming state (S4201). If it is the normal gaming state (YES in S4201), the presentation control unit 300 determines whether it has been controlled from the specific time-shortened gaming state to the normal gaming state (S4202). If it has been controlled from the specific time-shortened gaming state to the normal gaming state (YES in S4202), the presentation control unit 300 terminates the specific time-shortened gaming state related presentation processing. Furthermore, if it has not been controlled from the specific time-shortened gaming state to the normal gaming state (NO in S4202), the presentation control unit 300 determines whether a variable presentation is being executed (S4203). If it is not in a variable presentation state (NO in S4203), the presentation control unit 300 terminates the specific time-shortened gaming state related presentation processing.

On the other hand, if a variable effect is being performed (YES in S4203), the effect control unit 300 determines whether RAM clearing was performed when the pachinko gaming machine 100 most recently returned from a power-off state (S4204). If RAM clearing was not performed (NO in S4204), the effect control unit 300 determines whether the number of times the decorative symbols have changed since the most recent return is equal to or greater than the first number (S4205). In this embodiment, the first number is 50 times. However, the first number may be any value. If the number of times of change is less than the first number (NO in S4205), the specific time-saving related effect processing is terminated. Note that the condition for the effect control unit 300 to determine that the number of times of change is equal to or greater than the first number may be that the first number of times of change has ended or that the first number of times of change has started.
If the number of changes is equal to or greater than the first number (YES in S4205), the performance control unit 300 determines whether the number of changes of the decorative pattern after the return is equal to or greater than the second number (S4206). The second number is a number of changes greater than the first number. In this embodiment, the second number is, for example, 101 times. However, the second number may be any value as long as it is a number of changes greater than the first number. Note that the performance control unit 300 may determine that the number of changes is equal to or greater than the second number when the second number of changes has ended or when the second number of changes has started.
If the number of changes is less than the second number (NO in S4206), the performance control unit 300 determines whether the number of changes of the decorative pattern after the return is the third number (S4207). In this embodiment, the third number is 100. Note that the performance control unit 300 may determine that the number of changes is the third number based on whether the third change has ended or whether the third change has started.

If the number of times of change is not the third number (NO in S4207), the effect control unit 300 determines by lottery (for example, at a rate of 1/2) whether or not to execute a clear negation effect (S4208). The clear negation effect is an effect indicating that RAM clear has not been executed. If it is determined that the clear negation effect will not be executed (NO in S4208), the specific time-saving related effect processing is terminated.
If it is determined that a clear denial effect should be executed (YES in S4208), the effect control unit 300 executes a clear denial effect and an effect informing the player of the number of remaining times (S4209). The effect informing the player of the number of remaining times is an effect informing the player of the number of variable effects required to reach the specific time-shortened game state.

Also, if the number of changes is the third number (YES in S4207), the performance control unit 300 determines whether a clear negation effect has been executed (S4210). If a clear negation effect has not been executed (NO in S4210), the performance control unit 300 executes a clear negation effect and a remaining number of times notification effect (S4211).

On the other hand, if a RAM clear was performed when the pachinko gaming machine 100 most recently returned from a power-off state (YES in S4204), the presentation control unit 300 determines whether the most recent reset of the number of fluctuations was a reset based on a jackpot (S2105 in FIG. 21) (S4212). If the reset was not based on a jackpot (NO in S4212), the presentation control unit 300 determines whether the number of fluctuations after the pachinko gaming machine 100 most recently returned from a power-off state was the fourth number or more (S4213). The fourth number is a number of fluctuations greater than the first number. In this embodiment, the fourth number is 100. However, the fourth number may be any value as long as it is a number of fluctuations greater than the first number. If the number of fluctuations is less than the fourth number (NO in S4213), the specific time-saving related presentation processing is terminated. The performance control unit 300 may determine that the number of fluctuations is equal to or greater than the fourth number when the fourth fluctuation has ended or when the fourth fluctuation has started.

If the number of times of change is equal to or greater than the fourth number (YES in S4213) or if the most recent reset was due to a jackpot (YES in S4212), the effect control unit 300 determines whether or not the remaining number of times notification effect has been executed (S4214).If the remaining number of times notification effect has not been executed (NO in S4214), the effect control unit 300 executes the remaining number of times notification effect (S4215).
Furthermore, if S4206 is YES, if S4210 is YES, after S4209 is executed, after S4211 is executed, if S4214 is YES, or after S4215 is executed, the presentation control unit 300 executes a remaining number update presentation (S4216). The remaining number update presentation is a presentation that notifies the user of the updated number of variable presentations required to enter the specific time-saving gaming state.

On the other hand, if the game is not in the normal game state (NO in S4201), the effect control unit 300 determines whether the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the specific time-shortened game state (S4217). If the game is not in the specific time-shortened game state (NO in S4217), the specific time-shortened effect processing is terminated.
If the specific time-saving game state is active (YES in S4217), the presentation control unit 300 determines whether or not the first variable presentation in the specific time-saving game state has yet to begin (S4218). If the first variable presentation has yet to begin (YES in S4218), the presentation control unit 300 determines whether or not there is a hold (S4219). If there is a hold (NO in S4219), the specific time-saving related presentation processing is terminated.
If there is no reserved ball (YES in S4219), the performance control unit 300 starts a right-hit notification (S4220). More specifically, the performance control unit 300 starts a notification to prompt the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side of the game area 111.

On the other hand, if the first variable effect in the specific time-saving game state has already started (NO in S4218), the effect control unit 300 determines whether or not the right-hit notification has already started (S4221). If the right-hit notification has already started (NO in S4221), the specific time-saving related effect processing ends.
If the right-hit notification has not yet started (YES in S4221), the effect control unit 300 starts the right-hit notification (S4222). Furthermore, the effect control unit 300 executes a specific time-shortening notification effect (S4223). The specific time-shortening notification effect is an effect that notifies the user that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a specific time-shortening game state.

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect button processing (S3613 in FIG. 31(b)).
In this effect button processing, the effect control unit 300 first determines whether the player has operated an operation means such as the effect button 161 during a predetermined acceptance period (the operation valid period described below) (S4301). Here, operation of the operation means includes the effect button 161 being pressed so that it moves from its non-operation position (reference position) to a predetermined position, turning it ON, and the center key or surrounding keys of the effect keys 162 being pressed, turning it ON. Furthermore, if the pachinko gaming machine 100 is equipped with an operation device other than the effect button 161 and effect keys 162, such as a touch panel, this also includes detecting the operation of that device. The effect control unit 300 receives operation signals from the controllers of these devices and detects that an operation has been performed.
If an operating means such as the effect button 161 is not operated (No in S4301), the effect button processing is terminated.

Also, if an operating means such as the effect button 161 is operated (Yes in S4301), the effect control unit 300 sets an effect button command containing information indicating the operation content of the operating means in RAM 303 and terminates effect button processing (S4302).

Then, the performance control unit 300 performs the command sending process (S3614) in Figure 31 (b) and sends the commands set in RAM 303 in the command receiving process and performance button process described above to the image/sound control unit 310 and lamp control unit 320. Based on the received commands, the image/sound control unit 310 and lamp control unit 320 then control the image display on the image display unit 114, the sound output, the operation of the movable prop 115, the illumination of the board lamp 116 and frame lamp 157, etc., to execute the set performance.

[Pre-determined effect pattern table]
39 and 40 are diagrams showing examples of pre-determination effect patterns and table settings used in the pre-determination effect pattern selection (S3803) in the pre-determination effect selection process of FIG. 33(a). Note that FIG. 39 shows a pre-determination effect pattern table used when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 121 in the normal gaming state. Also, FIG. 40 shows a pre-determination effect pattern table used when a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 122 in the special time-saving gaming state.

The pre-determination effect pattern table shown in Figure 39, which is used when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 121 in normal gaming mode, has multiple pre-determination effect patterns set. The pre-determination patterns "JA1" to "JA8," "JB1" to "JB6," and "JR1" to "JR21" set using Figure 29 above are associated one-to-one with the pre-determination effect patterns "AA1" to "AA8," "AB1" to "AB6," and "AR1" to "AR21."

Furthermore, the pre-determination effect pattern table shown in Figure 40, which is used when a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 122 in the special time-saving gaming state, has multiple pre-determination effect patterns set. The pre-determination patterns "JF1" to "JF5," "JG1" to "JG3," and "JH1" to "JH11" set using Figure 30 above are associated one-to-one with the pre-determination effect patterns "AF1" to "AF3," "AG1" to "AG3," and "AH1" to "AH11."

Here, the pre-determination effect is an effect that is performed based on the pre-determination process.
In addition, the pre-determined effect patterns shown in the figures include "reserved image,""displaycolor,""chanceeye,""zone,""gimmick," and "vibration." Note that "-" in each column of the table shown in the figures indicates that the corresponding effect will not be executed.

Here, the "reserved image" is an image indicating that the right to judge a big win is reserved. The reserved image will be described in detail later.
"Display color" refers to the display color of the reserved image. In this embodiment, the display color of the reserved image is changed to notify or suggest to the player the likelihood of winning the jackpot. In this embodiment, one of "white,""blue,""green,""red," and "rainbow" is selected as the display color. For example, the display colors of the reserved images may be set in the order of white, blue, green, red, and rainbow, with the later colors indicating a higher likelihood of winning. Furthermore, a variable effect in which a rainbow-colored reserved image is displayed may be a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. In other words, a rainbow-colored reserved image may have a 100% likelihood of winning.

"Chance Eye" indicates the type of chance eye effect. The chance eye effect is an effect that displays a chance eye based on the result of a preliminary determination process. The chance eye is three decorative symbols that are a combination of symbols of the same predetermined color and that include different numbers. The chance eye effect, for example, notifies or suggests that there is a high possibility of a jackpot in the special symbol variation that follows the special symbol variation that initiated the chance eye effect. Furthermore, the chance eye effect may be performed multiple times in multiple variation effects. In the illustrated example, one of "RO1" to "RO3" is executed as the type of chance eye effect. Furthermore, the higher the number in the order of "RO1,""RO2," and "RO3," the higher the expectation level.
The chance eye may be any three specific decorative patterns 41 that notify or suggest that there is a high possibility of a jackpot in the special pattern variation following the special pattern variation that initiated the chance eye performance, and the three decorative patterns 41 do not have to be the same color.

"Zone" refers to a zone effect. A zone effect is, for example, an effect that creates the expectation that a jackpot will occur when a special symbol changes. A zone effect that is performed based on a pre-determination result may be an effect that creates the expectation that a jackpot will occur when a special symbol changes that initiated the zone effect, or an effect that creates the expectation that a jackpot will occur when a special symbol changes after the special symbol change that initiated the zone effect.

"Gem" refers to a gem effect. A gem effect is an effect in which the movable gem 115 operates. The gem effect, which is performed based on the results of a preliminary determination, may be an effect that gives the player hope for a jackpot in the special pattern variation that started the gem effect, or an effect that gives the player hope for a jackpot in the special pattern variation that follows the special pattern variation that started the gem effect.

"Vibration" refers to a vibration effect. A vibration effect is an effect in which the effect button 161 vibrates. The vibration effect, which is performed based on the results of a preliminary determination, is an effect that raises the expectation that a jackpot will occur in the special pattern variation following the special pattern variation that initiated the vibration effect.

The performance control unit 300 determines a pre-determination performance pattern based on the tables shown in Figures 39 and 40. Specifically, the performance control unit 300 selects a pre-determination performance pattern corresponding to the pre-determination pattern set in the pre-determination process (see Figure 28) based on the tables shown in Figures 39 and 40.
39, if the "judgment result" is "miss" and the pre-determination pattern is "JR6,""AR6" is selected as the pre-determination effect pattern. In this pre-determination effect pattern "AR6," a "reserved image," a "display color," a "chance number," a "zone," and a "gimmick" are set. That is, in the pre-determination effect pattern "AR6," a "reserved image" is displayed, the "display color" becomes "blue,""RO1" is executed as the "chance number," a zone effect is executed, and "CH1" is executed as the "gimmick."

Furthermore, in this embodiment, there is no pre-determination effect pattern table that is used when a gaming ball enters the first start hole 121 in the special time-saving gaming state. In other words, in this embodiment, when a gaming ball enters the first start hole 121 in the special time-saving gaming state, no pre-determination effect is performed. However, there may be a pre-determination effect pattern table that is used when a gaming ball enters the first start hole 121 in the special time-saving gaming state. The effect control unit 300 may then use this pre-determination effect pattern table to perform a pre-determination effect when a gaming ball enters the first start hole 121 in the special time-saving gaming state.

[Variable performance pattern table]
41 and 42 are diagrams showing examples of variable presentation patterns and table settings used in the variable presentation pattern selection (S3813) in the presentation selection process of FIG. 33(b). Note that FIG. 41 shows a variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation is performed based on a winning entry into the first starting slot 121 in the normal gaming state. Also, FIG. 42 shows a variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation is performed based on a winning entry into the second starting slot 122 in the special time-saving gaming state.

The variable effect pattern table shown in Figure 41, which is used when a variable effect is performed based on a winning entry into the first starting slot 121 during normal game play, has multiple variable effect patterns set. The variable effect patterns "PA1" to "PA8," "PB1" to "PB6," and "PR1" to "PR21" set using Figure 24 above are associated one-to-one with the variable effect patterns "EA1" to "EA8," "EB1" to "EB6," and "ER1" to "ER21."

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 42, the variable effect pattern table used when a variable effect is performed based on a win at the second starting slot 122 in the special time-saving game state has multiple variable effect patterns set. Variable effect patterns "PF1" to "PF5," "PG1" to "PG3," and "PH1" to "PH11" set using Figure 25 above are associated one-to-one with variable effect patterns "EF1" to "EF5," "EG1" to "EG3," and "EH1" to "EH11."

Here, the variable effect is an effect that notifies the result of the special pattern lottery (i.e., whether or not a jackpot has been won) in a dramatic manner by displaying a variable effect pattern and then displaying it in a stationary state.
In addition, the variable presentation patterns shown in the figure include the following settings: "final display color,""pseudoexcitement,""pseudo consecutive number of times,""reachexcitement,""normal,""SPreach,""SPSPreach,""zoneexcitement,""zone,""developmentexcitement,""development,""gimmick,""button,""vibration,""promotionexcitement,""promotion," and "revival." Note that a "-" in each column of the table shown indicates that the corresponding presentation will not be executed.

Here, "final display color" refers to the final display color of the variable image (described below). In this embodiment, the display color of the variable image is changed to notify or suggest to the player the likelihood of winning the jackpot. In the example shown, one of "white," "blue," "green," "red," or "rainbow" is selected as the final display color. For example, the display colors of the variable image may be set in the order of white, blue, green, red, and rainbow, with the later colors indicating a higher likelihood of winning. Furthermore, a variable effect in which a rainbow-colored variable image is displayed may be a variable effect in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot. In other words, a rainbow-colored variable image may have a 100% likelihood of winning.

"Pseudo-stimulation" refers to a pseudo-sequential stimulation effect. A pseudo-sequential stimulation effect is an effect that stimulates the execution of a pseudo-sequential effect (pseudo-sequential effect). A pseudo-sequential effect is an effect that makes it appear as if multiple decorative pattern changes are being displayed during the display of one change of a special pattern (one change effect). In a pseudo-sequential effect, the effect control unit 300 changes the decorative pattern before entering a reach state, temporarily stops the decorative pattern, and then resumes the display of the decorative pattern changes. In other words, in a pseudo-sequential effect, after the decorative pattern starts to change, the decorative pattern temporarily stops and changes again a set number of times, and then stops to complete the display of one change of the special pattern. Here, a temporary stop is a pseudo-stop state in which the pattern appears to be stopped at first glance, but in reality, the pattern is slightly fluctuating. In other words, a temporary stop of the pattern is treated as a continuous change in terms of game control. Here, the term "stop" includes not only a fixed stop but also a provisional stop. The fixed stop of the symbol refers to a state in which the special symbol stops as a fixed symbol in the variable display of one variation of the special symbol.
In the pseudo consecutive performance, the performance control unit 300 may start the variable display of the decorative symbols again after the reach state is reached. Furthermore, in the pseudo consecutive performance, after starting the variable display of the decorative symbols (variable display), the performance control unit 300 may start the variable display of the decorative symbols again without temporarily stopping the decorative symbols.

Here, the "pseudo consecutive number of times" refers to the number of times the pseudo consecutive effects are performed. In the example shown, the "pseudo consecutive number of times" is set to "-", "1", "2", or "3", i.e., between 0 and 3 times. The pseudo consecutive number of times is also set in relation to the expectation (reliability) of a jackpot, which is the degree to which one can expect to win. In other words, the higher the pseudo consecutive number of times, the higher the expectation.

"Reach stimulation" indicates the type of reach stimulation effect. A reach stimulation effect is an effect that stimulates the execution of a reach effect. In the example shown, either "RE1" or "RE2" is executed as the type of reach stimulation effect. Furthermore, in the order of "RE1" and "RE2", the larger the number, the higher the expectation level when a reach effect is executed (when the reach stimulation effect is successful).
"Normal" indicates the type of normal reach effect. In the illustrated example, one of "N1", "N2", and "N3" is executed as the reach effect type. In addition, the higher the number in the order of "N1", "N2", and "N3", the higher the expectation level.
"SP Reach" indicates the type of SP Reach effect. In the illustrated example, one of "SP1", "SP2", and "SP3" is executed as the type of SP Reach effect. In addition, the higher the number in the order of "SP1", "SP2", and "SP3", the higher the expectation level.
"SPSP Reach" indicates the SPSP Reach performance.

"Zone hype" refers to a zone hype effect. The zone hype effect is an effect that hypes up the execution of a zone effect.
"Zone" indicates a zone effect.
"Development provocation" refers to a development provocation effect. The development provocation effect is an effect that encourages the execution of a development effect. The development effect is an effect that suggests or notifies that the game will develop into an SPSP reach.
"Development" indicates developmental performance.

"Gem" refers to a gem performance. More specifically, "before temporary stop" in a "gem" refers to a gem performance that takes place before the decorative pattern temporarily stops in a variable performance, and "after temporary stop" in a "gem" refers to a gem performance that takes place after the decorative pattern temporarily stops in a variable performance.

"Button" refers to a button effect. More specifically, "before temporary stop" of "button" refers to a button effect that occurs before a decorative symbol temporarily stops in a variable effect, and "after temporary stop" of "button" refers to a button effect that occurs after a decorative symbol temporarily stops in a variable effect. Furthermore, a button effect is an effect that prompts the player to operate the effect button 161. The button effect may be executed based on the results of a pre-determination process. The button effect executed based on the results of a pre-determination may be an effect that encourages the player to expect a jackpot in the special symbol variation that initiated the button effect, or an effect that encourages the player to expect a jackpot in the special symbol variation following the special symbol variation that initiated the button effect.

"Vibration" refers to a vibration effect. More specifically, "before temporary stop" in "vibration" refers to a vibration effect that occurs before the decorative symbol temporarily stops in the variable effect, and "after temporary stop" in "vibration" refers to a vibration effect that occurs after the decorative symbol temporarily stops in the variable effect. Furthermore, a vibration effect is an effect that vibrates the effect button 161. A vibration effect may be executed based on the results of a pre-determination process. A vibration effect that is executed based on the results of a pre-determination process is an effect that creates anticipation of a jackpot in the special symbol variation following the special symbol variation that initiated the vibration effect. In other words, the vibration effect may be an effect that suggests or notifies the degree of expectation in one or more variable effects.

The "promotion teaser" refers to a promotion teaser effect. The promotion teaser effect is an effect in which a decorative symbol indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot is temporarily stopped, and then the decorative symbol is changed to a decorative symbol indicating that the player will be in a more advantageous gaming state.
"Promotion" means a promotion effect. The promotion effect is an effect in which a decorative symbol indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot is temporarily stopped, and then changed to a decorative symbol indicating that the player will be in a more advantageous gaming state. In this promotion effect, for example, after the decorative symbol "444" is temporarily stopped, the decorative symbol "777" is displayed as the stopped symbol.
The "revival" refers to a revival effect. The revival effect is an effect in which the decorative symbols 41 of the losing numbers are temporarily stopped, and then the decorative symbols 41 of the double numbers are stopped.

The performance control unit 300 determines the variable performance pattern based on the tables shown in Figures 41 and 42. Specifically, the performance control unit 300 selects a variable performance pattern corresponding to the variable pattern set in the variable pattern selection process (see Figure 15) based on the tables shown in Figures 41 and 42.
For example, in Figure 41, when the "jackpot symbol" is "jackpot symbol A" and the variation pattern is "PA1", "EA1" is selected as the variation effect pattern. In this variation effect pattern "EA1", "pseudo-stimulation", "reach stimulation", "zone stimulation", "promotion", and "revival" are set to "-". In other words, when "EA1" is selected as the variation effect pattern, the pseudo-stimulation effect, reach stimulation effect, zone stimulation effect, promotion effect, and revival effect are not executed. Furthermore, in the variable presentation pattern "EA1,""red" is displayed as the "final display color,""2" is executed as the "pseudo consecutive number of times,""N2" is executed as "normal,""SP2" is executed as the "SP reach,""SPSPreach" is executed, "zone" is executed, "development teaser" and "development" are executed, "devices""before the temporary stop" and "after the temporary stop" are executed, "buttons""before the temporary stop" and "after the temporary stop" are executed, "vibration""before the temporary stop" and "after the temporary stop" are executed, and "promotion teaser" is executed.

In this embodiment, as will be described later, the performance control unit 300 controls one of multiple stages (performance modes), but the same variable performance pattern table shown in Figures 41 and 42 is used regardless of the stage. However, different variable performance pattern tables may be used for each stage.

[Produced image]
Next, the effect image that the effect control unit 300 causes the image display unit 114 to display will be described.
43 , the effect control unit 300 controls the image display unit 114 to display the effect image. In this embodiment, the effect image displayed on the image display unit 114 includes a decorative pattern 41, a volume image 42, a light intensity image 43, a variable image 51, a reserved image 52, a reserved number display 55, a small pattern 56, a stage image 61, a stage notification image 501, and a variable number image 502. In addition, the image display unit 114 displays a first right-hit image 503, a time-saving remaining number image 504, a customer waiting volume image 44, a customer waiting light intensity image 45, a menu promotion image 46, a menu image 505, a demo image 506, a first left-hit image 47, a second left-hit image 48, a second right-hit image 507, a first precursory emphasis image 508, a button image 509, a first post-operation emphasis image 510, a second post-operation emphasis image 511, a third post-operation emphasis image 512, a second precursory emphasis image 513, a first operation-in-progression emphasis image 514, a fourth After-operation emphasized image 515, fifth after-operation emphasized image 516, sixth after-operation emphasized image 517, third omen-enhanced image 518, seventh after-operation emphasized image 519, eighth after-operation emphasized image 520, ninth after-operation emphasized image 521, tenth after-operation emphasized image 522 , 11th post-operation emphasized image 523, 12th post-operation emphasized image 524, 13th post-operation emphasized image 525, 14th post-operation emphasized image 526, 4th omen emphasized image 527, 15th post-operation emphasized image 528, 16th post-operation emphasized image 529, 5th strong omen Adjustment image 530, second operation in-progression emphasis image 531, seventeenth operation post-progression emphasis image 532, eighteenth operation post-progression emphasis image 533, sixth precursor emphasis image 534, nineteenth operation post-progression emphasis image 535, first zone start image 536, first zone execution image 537, second zone start image 538, second zone execution image 613, reach line image 539, reach suggestion image 540, reach emphasis image 541, first reach eye emphasis image 542, second reach eye emphasis image 543, third reach eye emphasis image 544 , 4th reach eye emphasis image 545, 5th reach eye emphasis image 546, 6th reach eye emphasis image 547, 7th reach eye emphasis image 548, 8th reach eye emphasis image 549, 9th reach eye emphasis image 550, 1st role emphasis image 551, SP reach image 552, development image 584, development emphasis image 554, 2nd role emphasis image 555, SPSP start image 556, 1st start emphasis image 557, 2nd start emphasis image 558, 3rd start emphasis image 559, 4th start emphasis image 560, SP SP suggestion image 561, first execution highlight image 562, second execution highlight image 563, third execution highlight image 564, fourth execution highlight image 565, first jackpot highlight image 566, second jackpot highlight image 567, third jackpot highlight image 568, fourth jackpot highlight image 569, fifth jackpot highlight image 570, first button post image 571, first stop highlight image 572, second stop highlight image 573, third stop highlight image 574, fourth stop highlight image 575, second button post image 57 6, image after third button 577, image after fifth stop emphasis 578, image after sixth stop emphasis 579, image after fourth button 580, pseudo consecutive image 581, pseudo consecutive image emphasis 582, re-change notification image 583, image after first development emphasis 585, switching image 586, image after chance highlight 587, image after first start emphasis 588, image after fifth button 589, image after sixth button 590, image after first double number highlight 591, image after promotion highlight 592, image after big win start 593, image after number of rounds 594, image after round Image in the middle 595, image of start of time reduction 596, image emphasizing the first reach tease 597, image emphasizing the second doublet 598, revival image 599, image of special effect 600, image after seventh button 601, image emphasizing the seventh stop 602, image emphasizing the eighth stop 603, image emphasizing the ninth stop 604, image emphasizing the tenth stop 605, image after eighth button 606, image after ninth button 607, image emphasizing the eleventh stop 608, image emphasizing the twelfth stop 609, image emphasizing the second development tease 610, image emphasizing the second start 611, image emphasizing the first An image after pressing the 0 button 612, a third doublet emphasis image 614, a fourth doublet emphasis image 615, a thirteenth stop emphasis image 616, a second reach teaser emphasis image 617, a first transition image 618, an image after pressing the eleventh button 619, a fifth doublet emphasis image 620, an image after pressing the twelfth button 621, a second transition image 622, a result image 623, a fourteenth stop emphasis image 624, a third reach teaser emphasis image 625, a sixth doublet emphasis image 626, a preparation in progress image 627, and a jackpot notification image 628 may be displayed.

(Decorative design 41)
As shown in FIG. 43 (1), three decorative symbols 41 are displayed on the image display unit 114. When describing each of the three decorative symbols 41 individually, the symbol located on the left side may be referred to as the "left decorative symbol 41," the symbol located in the center as the "middle decorative symbol 41," and the symbol located on the right side as the "right decorative symbol 41." When describing the left decorative symbol 41 and the right decorative symbol 41 together, they may be referred to as the "left and right decorative symbols 41." When describing the left decorative symbol 41, the middle decorative symbol 41, and the right decorative symbol 41 together, they may be referred to as the "three decorative symbols 41." Furthermore, left and right decorative symbols 41 with matching numbers, i.e., left and right decorative symbols 41 for which a reach has been achieved, may be referred to as "reach-eye decorative symbols 41." Furthermore, three decorative symbols 41 with different numbers may be referred to as "missing-eye decorative symbols 41." Furthermore, three decorative patterns 41 with matching numbers may be referred to as "double-digit decorative patterns 41."

In this embodiment, the display modes of the decorative pattern 41 include a highly decorative display mode in which character images are displayed in addition to letters such as numbers (see Figures 43 (1) and (3)), and a less decorative display mode in which letters such as numbers are displayed as the main feature (see Figures 43 (5) and (7), Figure 153 (18), etc.). The images of characters and the like provided in the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 are different for each character of the decorative pattern 41, and the pattern can be identified by the images of these characters and the like. Furthermore, the less decorative decorative pattern 41 has a higher proportion of the area occupied by the characters in the decorative pattern 41 than the more decorative decorative pattern 41.
Here, the display mode of the decorative symbols 41 is switched according to changes in the game state or the progress of the presentation, etc. Although the details will be described later, for example, decorative symbols 41 with low decorativeness are displayed in the SP reach presentation, the SPSP reach presentation, and the time-saving game state, etc., and decorative symbols 41 with high decorativeness are displayed in other cases.
In addition to characters such as numbers, simple pictures, images of characters, etc. may also be displayed on the less decorative decorative patterns 41. In other words, the "less decorative decorative patterns 41" shown in Figures 43(5), (7), 153(18), etc. may be less decorative than the "highly decorative decorative patterns 41" shown in Figures 43(1), (3), etc.

In the variable presentation, the presentation control unit 300 displays three decorative patterns 41 in a variable manner, for example by vertical scrolling (scrolling downwards), and then temporarily stops the left decorative pattern 41 (for example, the number "4"), then the right decorative pattern 41 (for example, the number "2"), and then the center decorative pattern (for example, the number "1"). After all decorative patterns 41 have been temporarily stopped in this manner, all decorative patterns 41 are finally stopped in accordance with the stopped display of the special patterns. Note that the combination "412" of stopped decorative patterns 41 shown in Figure 43 (1) is an example of a combination when the special pattern lottery result is a losing draw. The decorative patterns 41 are also an example of a presentation pattern.

(Volume image 42)
43(1), a volume image 42 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The volume image 42 is an image that indicates the volume of the sound output from the speaker 156, which is set in the performance control unit 300. The volume image 42 will be described in detail later.

(Light intensity image 43)
43(1), a light intensity image 43 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The light intensity image 43 is an image showing the size set in the performance control unit 300 as the light intensity of the light emitted by the board lamp 116, the frame lamp 157, the movable role object 115, and the performance button 161. The light intensity image 43 will be described in detail later.

(Variable image 51)
As shown in FIG. 43 (1), the image display unit 114 displays a variable image 51 indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (the performance symbol is being displayed in a variable manner) by the special symbol variable control unit 233 (see FIG. 6, etc.). In other words, the variable image 51 is displayed as an image related to the variable display of the special symbol while the variable display of the special symbol is in progress. Then, when the variable display of the special symbol begins, the variable image 51 is displayed in the area where the variable image 51 is displayed (in the illustrated example, the lower side of the display area of the image display unit 114), and the display disappears when the special symbol is displayed in a static manner. In the illustrated example, the variable image 51 has a spherical shape. Also, a variable base is displayed in the area where the variable image 51 is displayed.
The variable image 51 may be erased (not displayed) when the variable performance ends, or may be erased (not displayed) before the variable performance ends (during the variable performance).

The variable image 51 also changes its display mode, such as its display color, to notify or suggest the likelihood of winning the jackpot. Furthermore, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, a color with a higher likelihood of winning is displayed than if the result is a loss.

(Pending image 52)
43(1), the image display unit 114 displays a reserved image 52 based on information in the memory area corresponding to the currently reserved ball in the RAM 303 (see FIG. 4, etc.). In other words, the reserved image 52 is an image indicating that the right to determine a jackpot is reserved. In addition, in this embodiment, the display mode of the reserved image 52 on the screen is determined based on the result of the preliminary determination process.
The display size of the reserved image 52 is smaller than that of the variable image 51. In the illustrated example, the reserved image 52 has a spherical shape. A reserved base is displayed in the area where the reserved image 52 is displayed. The variable base of the variable image 51 and the reserved base of the variable image 52 are displayed in different ways.

When the colors of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are set to white, blue, green, red, or rainbow, they may be set so that the later the order, the higher the expectation. Furthermore, the expectation of a rainbow-colored variable image 51 or a rainbow-colored reserved image 52 may be 100%. Note that, hereinafter, the display mode of the white variable image 51 and the display mode of the white reserved image 52 may be referred to as the normal display mode.

As described above, a win at the first starting port 121 can result in up to four pending images 52. Therefore, a win at the first starting port 121 can result in up to four pending images 52 being displayed on the image display unit 114. In addition, in this embodiment, the multiple pending images 52 generated by a win at the first starting port 121 are displayed in an area to the left of the variable image 51, in order from a position closer to the variable image 51 to a position further away, that is, from right to left.

Although detailed description will be omitted, a maximum of four reserved images 52 are also generated by a winning game ball entering the second starting hole 122. Therefore, a maximum of four reserved images 52 are displayed on the image display unit 114 in response to a winning game ball entering the second starting hole 122. In this embodiment, the multiple reserved images 52 generated by a winning game ball entering the second starting hole 122 are displayed in an area to the right of the variable image 51, in order from a position closer to the variable image 51 to a position farther away, that is, from left to right.
In this embodiment, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are basically configured in the same or similar form. However, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 may be configured in different forms. Furthermore, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 displayed upon winning the first starting port 121 may be displayed in a different form from the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 displayed upon winning the second starting port 122.

In addition, in the following description, the up to four pending images 52 that are displayed may be referred to as the "first pending image 52," "second pending image 52," "third pending image 52," and "fourth pending image 52," in order of their proximity to the variable image 51.

(Pending number display 55)
As shown in Figure 43 (1), the image display unit 114 displays a reserved number display 55 based on information in the memory area corresponding to the reserved balls in RAM 303 (see Figure 4, etc.). This reserved number display 55 is an image showing the reserved number. Here, the reserved image 52 displayed on the image display unit 114 changes in number depending on the reserved number for winning at each of the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122. In the reserved number display 55, the reserved number for winning at the first starting port 121 is displayed on the left side, and the reserved number for winning at the second starting port 122 is displayed on the right side.

(Small design 56)
43(1), the image display unit 114 displays a small symbol 56, which indicates that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (the decorative symbol 41 is being displayed in a variable manner) by the special symbol change control unit 233 (see FIG. 6, etc.) based on winning at the first start gate 121 or the second start gate 122. The small symbol 56 is controlled by the performance control unit 300, and is displayed in a variable manner in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol, and is displayed in a stationary manner in accordance with the stationary display of the special symbol.

In the illustrated example, the small patterns 56 are three images each corresponding to the decorative patterns 41, and are displayed on the right side of the image display area of the image display unit 114. The small patterns 56 are displayed as images smaller in size than the decorative patterns 41. As mentioned above, the decorative patterns 41 may be displayed in either a highly decorative display mode or a less decorative display mode, but the small patterns 56 are displayed only in a less decorative display mode that mainly consists of text. However, the small patterns 56 may also be displayed in a display mode that displays images such as pictures and characters in addition to text. In other words, the small patterns 56 may be less decorative than the highly decorative decorative patterns 41.

The small symbols 56 are displayed (vertically scrolled) in a manner that indicates that a special symbol is being displayed in a changing manner in response to a winning entry into the first starting slot 121 or the second starting slot 122. As the small symbols 56 scroll, number images are displayed in increments of one from "1" to "9," and then the numbers are displayed again in increments of one from "1." When the special symbol is displayed in a static state, the small symbols 56 are also displayed in a static state. In the example shown, the number indicated by the statically displayed small symbols 56 matches the number indicated by the decorative symbols 41. To explain further, in the example of Figure 43 (1), the number corresponding to "412" on the decorative symbols 41 is displayed as the small symbols 56. The small symbols 56 can also be considered as performance symbols.

(Stage image 61)
43(1), a stage image 61 is displayed on the image display unit 114 as a background for the decorative pattern 41. This stage image 61 is, for example, an image (stage, etc.) related to the content (idols, anime characters, etc.) that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100. In the illustrated example, a space-themed moving image is displayed as the stage image 61.
Furthermore, the stage image 61 in this embodiment is an image that is played in a loop. More specifically, an image within a partial area (selected area) of the entire image (entire image) that forms the background of the decorative pattern 41, etc., is displayed on the image display unit 114 as the stage image 61. The selected area then moves in one direction over time, and when it reaches the edge of the entire image, it moves in the opposite direction, repeating this (looping). As a result, the stage image 61 displayed on the image display unit 114 changes over time, and the same image is repeated at regular intervals.

In this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 selects one of the presentation modes and executes a variable presentation in the selected presentation mode. The presentation control unit 300 then displays the stage image 61 in a display mode corresponding to the selected presentation mode. In this embodiment, a presentation mode is provided for each game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100. Each time the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 changes, the presentation control unit 300 sets the presentation mode corresponding to the changed game state and displays the stage image 61 in a display mode corresponding to the set presentation mode. Furthermore, when a variable presentation in one presentation mode has been performed a predetermined number of times, the presentation control unit 300 switches the presentation mode and displays the stage image 61 in a display mode corresponding to the switched presentation mode. Therefore, the presentation mode can also be considered as the stage displayed in the stage image 61. The stage image 61 (the display mode of the stage image 61) may also be switched when a specific variable presentation (e.g., a variable presentation in which an SP reach or SPSP reach presentation is performed) is performed.
In this embodiment, the stage image 61 is displayed on a layer behind other performance images such as the decorative pattern 41, volume image 42, light intensity image 43, variable image 51, hold image 52, hold number display 55, small pattern 56, etc.

(Stage notification image 501)
43(1), a stage notification image 501 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The stage notification image 501 is an image that notifies or suggests the stage that has been set in the performance control unit 300. In the example shown, the stage notification image 501 displays the text "Space" that notifies or suggests the stage that has been set in the performance control unit 300.

(Change count image 502)
43(1), a variation count image 502 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The variation count image 502 is an image that notifies or suggests the number of times the variation effect has been executed in the normal gaming state (the number of times the special symbol has changed). In the illustrated example, the variation count image 502 displays the text "10 games," which includes the number of times the variation effect has been executed in the normal gaming state (the number of times the special symbol has changed).

(First right-hand hit image 503)
As shown in FIG. 43 (5), a first right-hit image 503 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The first right-hit image 503 is an image for encouraging the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side of the game area 111. In the example shown, an arrow mark pointing to the right is displayed as the first right-hit image 503. The first right-hit image 503 is displayed, for example, during a jackpot game and in a time-saving game state. The first right-hit image 503 will be described in detail later.

(Remaining time-saving number image 504)
43(5), the image display unit 114 displays a time-saving remaining number image 504. The time-saving remaining number image 504 is an image indicating the remaining number of special symbol lotteries in the time-saving game state (the remaining number of variable effects in the time-saving game state). In the illustrated example, the time-saving remaining number image 504 displays the text "90 more," indicating that the remaining number of special symbol lotteries in the special time-saving game state is 90.

(Image 44 of waiting customer volume)
52(2), a customer waiting volume image 44 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The customer waiting volume image 44 is an image that indicates the volume of the sound output from the speaker 156 when the restaurant is in a customer waiting state, which is set in the performance control unit 300. The customer waiting volume image 44 will be described in detail later.

(Image 45 of light intensity while waiting for customers)
52(2), a customer waiting light intensity image 45 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The customer waiting light intensity image 45 is an image that indicates the size set in the performance control unit 300 as the light intensity of the board lamp 116, the frame lamp 157, the movable prop 115, and the performance button 161 when the machine is in a customer waiting state. The customer waiting light intensity image 45 will be described in detail later.

(Menu promotion image 46)
As shown in Fig. 52 (2), a menu promotion image 46 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The menu promotion image 46 is an image that prompts the user to perform an operation to display a menu image 505, which will be described later. In the example shown, the menu promotion image 46 displays an image that resembles the effect button 161 and the text "Display menu by operation." The menu promotion image 46 will be described in detail later.

(Menu image 505)
As shown in Fig. 52 (6), a menu image 505 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The menu image 505 is an image showing the performance items that can be set in the performance control unit 300. The menu image 505 is displayed over the entire display area of the image display unit 114. However, the menu image 505 may be displayed in a portion of the display area of the image display unit 114 and not in the other portion.

(Demo image 506)
As shown in FIG. 52 (8), a demo image 506 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The demo image 506 is an image for advertising the pachinko gaming machine 100 when it is in a waiting state for customers. The demo image 506 is displayed over the entire display area of the image display unit 114. However, the demo image 506 may be displayed in a portion of the display area of the image display unit 114 and not in the other portion. The demo image 506 may also be a moving image. In the illustrated example, a moving image related to the content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is displayed as the demo image 506.

(First left-handed image 47)
As shown in FIG. 54 (2), a first left-handed hit image 47 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The first left-handed hit image 47 is an image for encouraging the player to shoot the game ball toward the left side of the game area 111. In the illustrated example, the text "Hit Left" is displayed as the first left-handed hit image 47. The first left-handed hit image 47 will be described in detail later.

(Second left-handed image 48)
As shown in FIG. 54 (8), the image display unit 114 displays a second left-handed hit image 48. The second left-handed hit image 48 is an image for encouraging the player to shoot the game ball toward the left side of the game area 111. In the illustrated example, the text "Hit Left" is displayed as the second left-handed hit image 48. The second left-handed hit image 48 is also larger in display size than the first left-handed hit image 47. The second left-handed hit image 48 will be described in detail later.

(Second right-hand hit image 507)
As shown in FIG. 58 (2), a second right-hit image 507 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The second right-hit image 507 is an image for urging the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side of the game area 111. In the example shown, the text "right hit" is displayed as the second right-hit image 507. The second right-hit image 507 is also larger in display size than the first right-hit image 503. The second right-hit image 507 will be described in detail later.

(First precursor-enhanced image 508)
As shown in Figure 60 (1), a first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed on image display unit 114. First precursor emphasis image 508 is an image that emphasizes that a button effect will be executed as a precursor to the button effect. In other words, first precursor emphasis image 508 is an image that emphasizes that a button image 509 (see Figure 60 (2)), which will be described later, will be displayed as a precursor to the display of button image 509. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light is displayed as first precursor emphasis image 508.

(Button image 509)
As shown in FIG. 60 (2), a button image 509 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The button image 509 is an image that emphasizes the promotion of operating the effect button 161. The button image 509 is displayed when a button effect is being executed. The display of this button image 509 allows the player to recognize that it is time to operate the effect button 161. In the example shown, the button image 509 displays an image that resembles the effect button 161 and a gauge that indicates the valid operation period. The valid operation period is the period during which operation of the effect button 161 is accepted by the effect control unit 300 as valid. The button image 509 is displayed during the valid operation period, and if the effect button 161 is operated between the display of the button image 509 and the expiration of the valid operation period, a predetermined effect is executed. The button image 509 will be described in detail later.

(Highlighted image 510 after first operation)
61 (10), a first post-operation emphasis image 510 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The first post-operation emphasis image 510 is an image that emphasizes that the effect button 161 has been operated when a button effect is being executed. In other words, the first post-operation emphasis image 510 is an image that is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 161 when a button effect is being executed. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light is displayed as the first post-operation emphasis image 510.

(Highlighted image 511 after second operation)
61 (11), a second post-operation emphasis image 511 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The second post-operation emphasis image 511 is an image that emphasizes that the effect button 161 has been operated when a button effect is being executed. In other words, the second post-operation emphasis image 511 is an image that is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 161 when a button effect is being executed. In the example shown in the figure, an image that imitates light is displayed as the second post-operation emphasis image 511.

(Highlighted image 512 after third operation)
61 (12), a third post-operation emphasis image 512 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The third post-operation emphasis image 512 is an image that emphasizes that the effect button 161 has been operated when a button effect is being executed. In other words, the third post-operation emphasis image 512 is an image that is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 161 when a button effect is being executed. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light is displayed as the third post-operation emphasis image 512.

(Second precursory enhanced image 513)
As shown in Figure 63 (1), second precursor emphasis image 513 is displayed on image display unit 114. Second precursor emphasis image 513 is an image that emphasizes that a button effect will be executed as a precursor to the button effect. In other words, second precursor emphasis image 513 is an image that emphasizes that button image 509 will be displayed as a precursor to the display of button image 509. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light is displayed as second precursor emphasis image 513.

(First operation highlight image 514)
As shown in Fig. 63 (4), a first operation highlight image 514 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The first operation highlight image 514 is an image that highlights that the effect button 161 is being operated when a button effect is being executed. In other words, the first operation highlight image 514 is an image that is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 161 when a button effect is being executed. The first operation highlight image 514 is displayed around the display area of the button image 509 (the area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41) and in the area that overlaps with the display area of the button image 509. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light is displayed as the first operation highlight image 514.

(Fourth post-operation emphasized image 515)
64 (10), a fourth post-operation emphasis image 515 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The fourth post-operation emphasis image 515 is an image that emphasizes that the effect button 161 has been operated when a button effect is being executed. In other words, the fourth post-operation emphasis image 515 is an image that is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 161 when a button effect is being executed. In the example shown in the figure, an image that imitates light is displayed as the fourth post-operation emphasis image 515.

(Fifth post-operation emphasized image 516)
66 (10), a fifth post-operation emphasis image 516 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The fifth post-operation emphasis image 516 is an image that emphasizes that the effect button 161 has been operated when a button effect is being executed. In other words, the fifth post-operation emphasis image 516 is an image that is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 161 when a button effect is being executed. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light is displayed as the fifth post-operation emphasis image 516.

(Sixth post-operation emphasized image 517)
69 (10), a sixth post-operation emphasis image 517 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The sixth post-operation emphasis image 517 is an image that emphasizes that the effect button 161 has been operated when a button effect is being executed. In other words, the sixth post-operation emphasis image 517 is an image that is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 161 when a button effect is being executed. In the example shown in the figure, an image that imitates light is displayed as the sixth post-operation emphasis image 517.

(Third precursor-enhanced image 518)
As shown in Fig. 70 (1), third precursor emphasis image 518 is displayed on image display unit 114. Third precursor emphasis image 518 is an image that emphasizes that a button effect will be executed as a precursor to the button effect. In other words, third precursor emphasis image 518 is an image that emphasizes that button image 509 will be displayed as a precursor to the display of button image 509. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light is displayed as third precursor emphasis image 518.

(7th post-operation emphasized image 519)
71 (10), a seventh post-operation emphasis image 519 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The seventh post-operation emphasis image 519 is an image that emphasizes that the effect button 161 has been operated when a button effect is being executed. In other words, the seventh post-operation emphasis image 519 is an image that is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 161 when a button effect is being executed. The seventh post-operation emphasis image 519 is displayed over the entirety of one layer on the image display unit 114. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light is displayed as the seventh post-operation emphasis image 519.

(Eighth post-operation emphasized image 520)
As shown in Fig. 71 (11), an eighth post-operation emphasis image 520 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The eighth post-operation emphasis image 520 is an image that emphasizes that the effect button 161 has been operated when a button effect is being executed. In other words, the eighth post-operation emphasis image 520 is an image that is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 161 when a button effect is being executed. The eighth post-operation emphasis image 520 is displayed over the entirety of one layer on the image display unit 114. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light is displayed as the eighth post-operation emphasis image 520.

(9th post-operation emphasized image 521)
77 (11), a ninth post-operation emphasis image 521 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The ninth post-operation emphasis image 521 is an image that emphasizes that the effect button 161 has been operated when a button effect is being executed. In other words, the ninth post-operation emphasis image 521 is an image that is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 161 when a button effect is being executed. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light is displayed as the ninth post-operation emphasis image 521.

(10th post-operation emphasized image 522)
80 (11), a tenth post-operation emphasis image 522 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The tenth post-operation emphasis image 522 is an image that emphasizes that the effect button 161 has been operated when a button effect is being executed. In other words, the tenth post-operation emphasis image 522 is an image that is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 161 when a button effect is being executed. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light is displayed as the tenth post-operation emphasis image 522.

(Eleventh post-operation emphasized image 523)
80 (12), an eleventh post-operation emphasis image 523 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The eleventh post-operation emphasis image 523 is an image that emphasizes that the effect button 161 has been operated when a button effect is being executed. In other words, the eleventh post-operation emphasis image 523 is an image that is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 161 when a button effect is being executed. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light is displayed as the eleventh post-operation emphasis image 523.

(12th post-operation emphasized image 524)
80 (13), a twelfth post-operation emphasis image 524 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The twelfth post-operation emphasis image 524 is an image that emphasizes that the effect button 161 has been operated when a button effect is being executed. In other words, the twelfth post-operation emphasis image 524 is an image that is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 161 when a button effect is being executed. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light is displayed as the twelfth post-operation emphasis image 524.

(13th post-operation emphasized image 525)
80 (14), a thirteenth post-operation emphasis image 525 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The thirteenth post-operation emphasis image 525 is an image that emphasizes that the effect button 161 has been operated when a button effect is being executed. In other words, the thirteenth post-operation emphasis image 525 is an image that is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 161 when a button effect is being executed. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light is displayed as the thirteenth post-operation emphasis image 525.

(14th post-operation emphasized image 526)
82 (11), a fourteenth post-operation emphasis image 526 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The fourteenth post-operation emphasis image 526 is an image that emphasizes that the effect button 161 has been operated when a button effect is being executed. In other words, the fourteenth post-operation emphasis image 526 is an image that is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 161 when a button effect is being executed. In the example shown in the figure, an image that imitates light is displayed as the fourteenth post-operation emphasis image 526.

(Fourth precursory image 527)
As shown in FIG. 83 (1), fourth precursor emphasis image 527 is displayed on image display unit 114. Fourth precursor emphasis image 527 is an image that emphasizes that a button effect will be executed as a precursor to the button effect. In other words, fourth precursor emphasis image 527 is an image that emphasizes that button image 509 will be displayed as a precursor to the display of button image 509. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light is displayed as fourth precursor emphasis image 527.

(15th post-operation emphasized image 528)
84 (10), a fifteenth post-operation emphasis image 528 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The fifteenth post-operation emphasis image 528 is an image that emphasizes that the effect button 161 has been operated when a button effect is being executed. In other words, the fifteenth post-operation emphasis image 528 is an image that is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 161 when a button effect is being executed. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light is displayed as the fifteenth post-operation emphasis image 528.

(16th post-operation emphasized image 529)
84 (11), a sixteenth post-operation emphasis image 529 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The sixteenth post-operation emphasis image 529 is an image that emphasizes that the effect button 161 has been operated when a button effect is being executed. In other words, the sixteenth post-operation emphasis image 529 is an image that is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 161 when a button effect is being executed. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light is displayed as the sixteenth post-operation emphasis image 529.

(Fifth precursory image 530)
As shown in Figure 89 (1), a fifth precursor emphasis image 530 is displayed on image display unit 114. Fifth precursor emphasis image 530 is an image that emphasizes that a button effect will be executed as a precursor to the button effect. In other words, fifth precursor emphasis image 530 is an image that emphasizes that button image 509 will be displayed as a precursor to the display of button image 509. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light is displayed as fifth precursor emphasis image 530.

(Second operation highlight image 531)
As shown in FIG. 89 (6), a second operation highlight image 531 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The second operation highlight image 531 is an image that highlights that the effect button 161 is being operated when a button effect is being executed. In other words, the second operation highlight image 531 is an image that is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 161 when a button effect is being executed. The second operation highlight image 531 is displayed around the display area of the button image 509 (the area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41) and in the area that overlaps with the display area of the button image 509. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light is displayed as the second operation highlight image 531.

(17th post-operation emphasized image 532)
92 (25), a 17th post-operation emphasis image 532 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The 17th post-operation emphasis image 532 is an image that emphasizes that the effect button 161 has been operated when a button effect is being executed. In other words, the 17th post-operation emphasis image 532 is an image that is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 161 when a button effect is being executed. In the example shown in the figure, an image that imitates light is displayed as the 17th post-operation emphasis image 532.

(18th post-operation emphasized image 533)
96 (25), an 18th post-operation emphasis image 533 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The 18th post-operation emphasis image 533 is an image that emphasizes that the effect button 161 has been operated when a button effect is being executed. In other words, the 18th post-operation emphasis image 533 is an image that is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 161 when a button effect is being executed. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light is displayed as the 18th post-operation emphasis image 533.

(Sixth precursory image 534)
As shown in Figure 98 (1), a sixth precursor emphasis image 534 is displayed on image display unit 114. Sixth precursor emphasis image 534 is an image that emphasizes that a button effect will be executed as a precursor to the button effect. In other words, sixth precursor emphasis image 534 is an image that emphasizes that button image 509 will be displayed as a precursor to the display of button image 509. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light is displayed as sixth precursor emphasis image 534.

(19th post-operation emphasized image 535)
99 (14), a 19th post-operation emphasis image 535 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The 19th post-operation emphasis image 535 is an image that emphasizes that the effect button 161 has been operated when a button effect is being executed. In other words, the 19th post-operation emphasis image 535 is an image that is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 161 when a button effect is being executed. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light is displayed as the 19th post-operation emphasis image 535.

(Zone 1 start image 536)
102(1), a first zone start image 536 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The first zone start image 536 is an image that notifies or suggests that a zone effect will begin when the image stops. In the illustrated example, the first zone start image 536 displays the text "X Zone," which includes the type of zone effect.

(First zone execution image 537)
102(2), a first zone execution image 537 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The first zone execution image 537 is an image that notifies or suggests that a zone effect is being executed. In the illustrated example, the first zone execution image 537 displays the text "X Zone," which includes the type of zone effect.

(Zone 2 start image 538)
As shown in FIG. 103(1), a second zone start image 538 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The second zone start image 538 is an image that notifies or suggests that a zone effect will begin. The second zone start image 538 has a different outline than the first zone start image 536 (see FIG. 102(1)). In the illustrated example, the second zone start image 538 displays the text "Y Zone," which includes the type of zone effect.

(Image 613 of second zone in progress)
As shown in FIG. 103 (2), the image display unit 114 displays a second zone execution image 613. The second zone execution image 613 is an image that notifies or suggests that a zone effect is being executed. The second zone execution image 613 has a different outline than the first zone execution image 537. In the illustrated example, the second zone execution image 613 displays the text "Y Zone," which includes the type of zone effect.

(Reach line image 539)
104(2), a reach line image 539 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The reach line image 539 is a linear image that crosses the reach-eye decorative pattern 41. In the example shown in the figure, an image that resembles light is displayed in white as the reach line image 539.

(Reach suggestion image 540)
As shown in FIG. 104 (2), a reach suggestion image 540 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The reach suggestion image 540 is an image that notifies or suggests that a reach has been achieved. In this embodiment, when a reach effect is executed, the reach suggestion image 540 is displayed, thereby notifying or suggesting to the player that a reach has been achieved. In the example shown, the reach suggestion image 540 displays the text "reach." Note that the reach suggestion image 540 is in an area that overlaps with the display area of the reach-eye decorative pattern 41, and may be displayed on a layer in front of the reach-eye decorative pattern 41.

(Reach-emphasized image 541)
As shown in FIG. 104 (2), a reach emphasis image 541 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The reach emphasis image 541 is an image that emphasizes the reach suggestion image 540. In other words, the reach emphasis image 541 is an image that emphasizes that a reach effect will be executed (a reach effect). In the example shown, an image that imitates light is displayed as the reach emphasis image 541 in an area that overlaps with the display area of the reach suggestion image 540, on a layer in front of the reach suggestion image 540.

(First reach-eye emphasized image 542)
104(2), a first reach-eye emphasis image 542 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The first reach-eye emphasis image 542 is an image that emphasizes the reach-eye decorative pattern 41. The first reach-eye emphasis image 542 is displayed for each of the left and right decorative patterns 41. In the example shown in the figure, an image that resembles light is displayed as the first reach-eye emphasis image 542, surrounding the decorative pattern 41.

(Second reach-eye emphasized image 543)
105(2), a second reach-eye emphasis image 543 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The second reach-eye emphasis image 543 is an image that emphasizes the reach-eye decorative pattern 41. The second reach-eye emphasis image 543 is displayed for each of the left and right decorative patterns 41. In the example shown in the figure, an image that resembles light is displayed as the second reach-eye emphasis image 543, surrounding the decorative pattern 41.

(Third reach-eye emphasized image 544)
106(2), a third reach-eye emphasis image 544 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The third reach-eye emphasis image 544 is an image that emphasizes the reach-eye decorative pattern 41. The third reach-eye emphasis image 544 is displayed for each of the left and right decorative patterns 41. In the example shown in the figure, an image that resembles light is displayed as the third reach-eye emphasis image 544, surrounding the decorative pattern 41.

(Fourth reach-eye emphasized image 545)
107(2), a fourth reach-eye emphasis image 545 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The fourth reach-eye emphasis image 545 is an image that emphasizes the reach-eye decorative pattern 41. The fourth reach-eye emphasis image 545 is displayed for each of the left and right decorative patterns 41. In the example shown, an image that resembles light is displayed as the fourth reach-eye emphasis image 545, surrounding the decorative pattern 41.

(5th reach-eye emphasized image 546)
108(2), a fifth reach-eye emphasis image 546 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The fifth reach-eye emphasis image 546 is an image that emphasizes the reach-eye decorative pattern 41. The fifth reach-eye emphasis image 546 is displayed for each of the left and right decorative patterns 41. In the example shown, an image that resembles light is displayed as the fifth reach-eye emphasis image 546, surrounding the decorative pattern 41.

(6th reach-eye emphasized image 547)
109(2), a sixth reach-eye emphasis image 547 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The sixth reach-eye emphasis image 547 is an image that emphasizes the reach-eye decorative pattern 41. The sixth reach-eye emphasis image 547 is displayed for each of the left and right decorative patterns 41. In the example shown in the figure, an image that resembles light is displayed as the sixth reach-eye emphasis image 547, surrounding the decorative pattern 41.

(7th reach-eye emphasized image 548)
110(2), a seventh reach-eye emphasis image 548 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The seventh reach-eye emphasis image 548 is an image that emphasizes the reach-eye decorative pattern 41. The seventh reach-eye emphasis image 548 is displayed for each of the left and right decorative patterns 41. In the example shown, an image that resembles light is displayed as the seventh reach-eye emphasis image 548, surrounding the decorative pattern 41.

(Eighth reach-eye emphasized image 549)
111(4), an eighth reach-eye emphasis image 549 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The eighth reach-eye emphasis image 549 is an image that emphasizes the reach-eye decorative pattern 41. The eighth reach-eye emphasis image 549 is displayed for each of the left and right decorative patterns 41. In the example shown in the figure, an image that resembles light is displayed around the decorative pattern 41 as the eighth reach-eye emphasis image 549.

(9th reach-eye emphasized image 550)
112(2), a 9th reach-eye emphasis image 550 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The 9th reach-eye emphasis image 550 is an image that emphasizes the reach-eye decorative pattern 41. The 9th reach-eye emphasis image 550 is displayed for each of the left and right decorative patterns 41. In the illustrated example, an image that resembles light is displayed around the decorative pattern 41 as the 9th reach-eye emphasis image 550.

(First highlighted image of reel 551)
114(3), a first reel emphasis image 551 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The first reel emphasis image 551 is an image that emphasizes the left movable reel 115A (reel performance). In the example shown, an image that imitates light as the first reel emphasis image 551 is displayed around the area of the display area of the image display unit 114 that overlaps with the left movable reel 115A.

(SP reach image 552)
As shown in FIG. 115(1), an SP reach image 552 is displayed on the image display unit 114. This SP reach image 552 is an image indicating that an SP reach effect is being executed. The SP reach image 552 is, for example, a moving image in which a character appearing in content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100 plays a mini-game. In this embodiment, the SP reach image 552 is displayed over the entire display area of the image display unit 114. Also, in this embodiment, the SP reach image 552 is displayed as a background for the decorative pattern 41 or the like, instead of the stage image 61. Therefore, the SP reach image 552 can also be regarded as the stage image 61. The stage (effect mode) in this case is a stage (effect mode) specific to when the SP reach effect is being executed.

(Advanced image 584)
As shown in FIG. 115(1), a development image 584 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The development image 584 is an image that notifies or suggests that a development effect will be executed when it stops. In the example shown, the development image 584 displays the text "Development." Note that, as will be described later, the development image 584 is displayed in a variable or stopped state as part of the middle decorative pattern 41. Therefore, the development image 584 can also be broadly regarded as an effect pattern.

(Development-enhanced image 554)
As shown in FIG. 115 (4), a development emphasis image 554 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The development emphasis image 554 is an image that emphasizes the development effect. The development emphasis image 554 can also be considered as an image that emphasizes the middle movable role object 115B (role object effect). The development emphasis image 554 is displayed on the entire surface of the image display unit 114, but may also be displayed partially on one surface of the image display unit 114. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light is displayed as the development emphasis image 554.

(Second highlighted image of reel 555)
117(3), a second reel emphasis image 555 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The second reel emphasis image 555 is an image that emphasizes the left movable reel 115A (reel performance). In the example shown, an image that imitates light as the second reel emphasis image 555 is displayed so as to surround the area of the display area of the image display unit 114 that overlaps with the left movable reel 115A.

(SPSP start image 556)
119(1), an SPSP start image 556 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The SPSP start image 556 is an image that is displayed when the SPSP reach effect starts. In the example shown, the SPSP start image 556 has the text "SPSP" displayed in white.

(First start-up emphasized image 557)
119(1), a first start emphasis image 557 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The first start emphasis image 557 is an image that emphasizes the SPSP start image 556. In other words, the first start emphasis image 557 can also be regarded as an image that emphasizes the SPSP reach effect. In the example shown, the image that imitates light as the first start emphasis image 557 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the SPSP start image 556, on a layer in front of the SPSP start image 556.

(Second start-up emphasized image 558)
120(1), a second start emphasis image 558 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The second start emphasis image 558 is an image that emphasizes the SPSP start image 556. In other words, the second start emphasis image 558 can also be regarded as an image that emphasizes the SPSP reach effect. In the illustrated example, an image that resembles light is displayed around the SPSP start image 556 as the second start emphasis image 558.

(Third start-up emphasized image 559)
122(2), a third start emphasis image 559 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The third start emphasis image 559 is an image that emphasizes the SPSP start image 556. In other words, the third start emphasis image 559 can also be regarded as an image that emphasizes the SPSP reach effect. In the illustrated example, an image that resembles light is displayed around the SPSP start image 556 as the third start emphasis image 559.

(Fourth start-up emphasized image 560)
123(2), a fourth start emphasis image 560 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The fourth start emphasis image 560 is an image that emphasizes the SPSP start image 556. In other words, the fourth start emphasis image 560 can also be regarded as an image that emphasizes the SPSP reach effect. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light as the fourth start emphasis image 560 is displayed so as to surround the SPSP start image 556.

(SPSP suggestion image 561)
As shown in Fig. 124 (1), an SPSP suggestion image 561 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The SPSP suggestion image 561 is an image that suggests the probability (expectation level) that the result of the special symbol lottery will be a big win (small win) from the display mode (display color, content of displayed text, etc.) during the execution of the SPSP reach effect. In the example shown, the SPSP suggestion image 561 is displayed in white with the text "Chance!?"

(First execution highlight image 562)
124(2), a first in-execution emphasis image 562 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The first in-execution emphasis image 562 is an image that emphasizes the SPSP suggestion image 561. In other words, the first in-execution emphasis image 562 can also be regarded as an effect that emphasizes the SPSP reach effect. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light as the first in-execution emphasis image 562 is displayed around the SPSP suggestion image 561.

(Second execution highlighted image 563)
125(2), a second in-execution emphasis image 563 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The second in-execution emphasis image 563 is an image that emphasizes the SPSP suggestion image 561. In other words, the second in-execution emphasis image 563 can also be regarded as an effect that emphasizes the SPSP reach effect. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light as the second in-execution emphasis image 563 is displayed so as to surround one character of the text in the second in-execution emphasis image 563.

(Third execution highlight image 564)
127(2), a third in-execution emphasis image 564 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The third in-execution emphasis image 564 is an image that emphasizes the SPSP in-execution suggestion image 561. In other words, the third in-execution emphasis image 564 can also be regarded as an effect that emphasizes the SPSP reach effect. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light as the third in-execution emphasis image 564 is displayed around the SPSP in-execution suggestion image 561.

(Fourth execution highlight image 565)
128(2), a fourth in-execution emphasis image 565 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The fourth in-execution emphasis image 565 is an image that emphasizes the SPSP suggestion image 561. In other words, the fourth in-execution emphasis image 565 can also be regarded as an effect that emphasizes the SPSP reach effect. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light as the fourth in-execution emphasis image 565 is displayed around the SPSP suggestion image 561.

(First jackpot emphasis image 566)
As shown in Fig. 130 (5), a first jackpot emphasis image 566 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The first jackpot emphasis image 566 is an image that emphasizes that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot (small jackpot). The first jackpot emphasis image 566 is displayed on the entire surface of the image display unit 114. In the example shown in the figure, an image that imitates light is displayed in rainbow colors as the first jackpot emphasis image 566.

(Second jackpot highlighted image 567)
As shown in Fig. 133 (5), a second jackpot emphasis image 567 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The second jackpot emphasis image 567 is an image that emphasizes that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot (small jackpot). The second jackpot emphasis image 567 is displayed on the entire surface of the image display unit 114. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light is displayed in rainbow colors as the second jackpot emphasis image 567.

(Third jackpot highlighted image 568)
135(5), a third jackpot emphasis image 568 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The third jackpot emphasis image 568 is an image that emphasizes that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot (small jackpot). The third jackpot emphasis image 568 is displayed on the entire surface of the image display unit 114. In the example shown, an image that imitates light is displayed in rainbow colors as the third jackpot emphasis image 568.

(Fourth jackpot highlighted image 569)
137(5), a fourth jackpot emphasis image 569 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The fourth jackpot emphasis image 569 is an image that emphasizes that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot (small jackpot). The fourth jackpot emphasis image 569 is displayed on the entire surface of the image display unit 114. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light is displayed in rainbow colors as the fourth jackpot emphasis image 569.

(Fifth jackpot highlighted image 570)
As shown in Fig. 139 (5), a fifth jackpot emphasis image 570 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The fifth jackpot emphasis image 570 is an image that emphasizes that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot (small jackpot). The fifth jackpot emphasis image 570 is displayed on the entire surface of the image display unit 114. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light is displayed in rainbow colors as the fifth jackpot emphasis image 570.

(Image after first button 571)
As shown in FIG. 142 (6), the image display unit 114 displays a post-first button image 571. The post-first button image 571 is an image that is displayed after a button effect is executed. In this embodiment, the post-first button image 571 is displayed regardless of whether the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the button effect. In the illustrated example, the post-first button image 571 displays the text "...", which suggests that the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss.

(First stop-enhanced image 572)
As shown in Fig. 142 (7), a first stop emphasis image 572 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The first stop emphasis image 572 is an image that emphasizes the stopping decorative pattern 41. In this embodiment, the first stop emphasis image 572 is displayed when either the left or right decorative pattern 41 that is an even number (2, 4, 6, 8, etc.) stops in the first stage described below. In the illustrated example, an image that resembles light as the first stop emphasis image 572 is displayed around the left decorative pattern 41.

(Second stop-emphasized image 573)
As shown in FIG. 142 (8), a second stop emphasis image 573 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The second stop emphasis image 573 is an image that emphasizes the stopping decorative pattern 41. In this embodiment, the second stop emphasis image 573 is displayed when either the left or right decorative pattern 41 that is an odd number (1, 3, 5, 9, etc.) stops in the first stage described below. In the illustrated example, an image that resembles light as the second stop emphasis image 573 is displayed around the right decorative pattern 41.

(Third stop-emphasized image 574)
As shown in Fig. 143 (9), a third stop emphasis image 574 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The third stop emphasis image 574 is an image that emphasizes the stopping decorative pattern 41. In this embodiment, the third stop emphasis image 574 is displayed when an even-numbered middle decorative pattern 41 (such as 2, 4, 6, or 8) stops in the first stage described below. In the illustrated example, an image simulating light as the third stop emphasis image 574 is displayed around the middle decorative pattern 41.

(Fourth stop-enhanced image 575)
As shown in Fig. 144 (3), a fourth stop emphasis image 575 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The fourth stop emphasis image 575 is an image that emphasizes the stopping decorative pattern 41. In this embodiment, the fourth stop emphasis image 575 is displayed when an odd-numbered middle decorative pattern 41 (such as 1, 3, 5, 7, or 9) stops in the first stage described below. In the illustrated example, an image simulating light as the fourth stop emphasis image 575 is displayed around the middle decorative pattern 41.

(Image after second button 576)
As shown in FIG. 145 (6), the image display unit 114 displays a post-second button image 576. The post-second button image 576 is an image that is displayed after a button effect is executed. In this embodiment, the post-second button image 576 is displayed regardless of whether the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the button effect. In the illustrated example, the post-second button image 576 displays the text "Reach?", which notifies or suggests the effect that will be executed.

(Image after third button 577)
As shown in FIG. 146 (13), the image display unit 114 displays a post-third button image 577. The post-third button image 577 is an image that is displayed after a button effect is executed. In this embodiment, the post-third button image 577 is displayed regardless of whether the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the button effect. In the illustrated example, the post-third button image 577 displays the text "Go for it!", which suggests that the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss.

(Fifth stop-enhanced image 578)
As shown in FIG. 146 (14), a fifth stop emphasis image 578 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The fifth stop emphasis image 578 is an image that emphasizes the decorative symbol 41 that stops. In this embodiment, when a normal reach effect in the first stage described below is executed and an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect is not executed, the fifth stop emphasis image 578 is displayed when an odd-numbered (1, 3, 5, 7, 9, etc.) middle decorative symbol 41 stops. In the illustrated example, an image that resembles light as the fifth stop emphasis image 578 is displayed so as to surround the middle decorative symbol 41.

(Sixth stop-enhanced image 579)
As shown in FIG. 149 (14), a sixth stop emphasis image 579 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The sixth stop emphasis image 579 is an image that emphasizes the decorative symbol 41 that stops. In this embodiment, when a normal reach effect in the first stage described below is executed and an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect is not executed, the sixth stop emphasis image 579 is displayed when an even-numbered (2, 4, 6, 8, etc.) middle decorative symbol 41 stops. In the illustrated example, an image that resembles light as the sixth stop emphasis image 579 is displayed so as to surround the middle decorative symbol 41.

(Image after fourth button 580)
As shown in FIG. 150 (6), the image display unit 114 displays a post-fourth button image 580. The post-fourth button image 580 is an image that is displayed after a button effect is executed. In this embodiment, the post-fourth button image 580 is displayed regardless of whether the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the button effect. In the illustrated example, the post-fourth button image 580 displays the text "X", which indicates that the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss.

(Pseudo-continuous image 581)
As shown in FIG. 151 (6), a pseudo consecutive image 581 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The pseudo consecutive image 581 is an image that notifies or suggests that a pseudo consecutive effect will be performed when it stops. In this embodiment, the pseudo consecutive image 581 is displayed instead of the middle decorative pattern 41. However, even when the pseudo consecutive image 581 is displayed, the middle decorative pattern 41 may be displayed. In the illustrated example, the text "pseudo consecutive" is displayed as the pseudo consecutive image 581. Note that, as will be described later, the pseudo consecutive image 581 is displayed as a variable display or a stopped display as part of the middle decorative pattern 41. Therefore, the pseudo consecutive image 581 can also be broadly regarded as an effect pattern.

(Pseudo-serial-enhanced image 582)
151(6), a pseudo consecutive highlight image 582 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The pseudo consecutive highlight image 582 is an image that highlights the pseudo consecutive image 581. In other words, the pseudo consecutive highlight image 582 is an image that emphasizes that a pseudo consecutive effect is being executed (pseudo consecutive effect). In the example shown, an image simulating light as the pseudo consecutive highlight image 582 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive image 581 and on a layer in front of the pseudo consecutive image 581 that overlaps with the display area of the pseudo consecutive image 581.

(Re-change notification image 583)
151(8), a re-change notification image 583 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The re-change notification image 583 is an image that notifies that the decorative pattern 41 will change again due to the pseudo-consecutive effect. In the illustrated example, the re-change notification image 583 displays the text "x2" indicating the number of times the decorative pattern 41 will change in the change effect due to the re-change.

(First development promotion image 585)
As shown in FIG. 153 (19), a first development provocation emphasis image 585 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The first development provocation emphasis image 585 is an image that emphasizes the development image 584 and the middle decorative pattern 41. In other words, the first development provocation emphasis image 585 is an image that emphasizes the development provocation effect. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light as the first development provocation emphasis image 585 is displayed around the development image 584 and the middle decorative pattern 41.

(Switching image 586)
As shown in FIG. 153 (22), a switching image 586 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The switching image 586 is an image for switching the background (display mode of the stage image 61) of the decorative pattern 41 and the like from the background corresponding to the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect to the background (display mode of the stage image 61) before the reach effect starts in the variable effect. The switching image 586 is displayed on the entire surface of the image display unit 114. The switching image 586 is also displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41, variable image 51, reserved image 52, stage image 61, etc., and on a layer behind the reserved number display 55 and small pattern 56.

(Chance Eye Emphasis Image 587)
As shown in FIG. 156 (4), a chance eye highlighting image 587 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The chance eye highlighting image 587 is an image that highlights the three decorative patterns 41 that are chance eyes. In the example shown, an image that imitates light as the chance eye highlighting image 587 is displayed around the three decorative patterns 41. The chance eye highlighting image 587 may be displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative patterns 41, in a layer in front of the decorative patterns 41. Furthermore, the chance eye highlighting image 587 may be displayed on the same layer as the decorative patterns 41, or may be displayed on a different layer (a layer behind) from the decorative patterns 41.

(First start emphasized image 588)
157(2), a first start emphasis image 588 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The first start emphasis image 588 is an image that emphasizes the decorative pattern 41 that has started to change. The first start emphasis image 588 is displayed for each of the three decorative patterns 41. In the illustrated example, an image that simulates light as the first start emphasis image 588 is displayed around the decorative pattern 41.

(Image after pressing the fifth button 589)
157(7), the image display unit 114 displays a post-fifth button image 589. The post-fifth button image 589 is an image that is displayed after a button effect is executed. In this embodiment, the post-fifth button image 589 is displayed regardless of whether the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the button effect. In the example shown, the post-fifth button image 589 displays the text "Super Hot!?" which suggests that there is a high probability (expectation level) that the result of the special pattern lottery will be a big win (small win).

(Image after 6th button 590)
As shown in FIG. 161 (34), the image display unit 114 displays a post-sixth button image 590. The post-sixth button image 590 is an image that is displayed after a button effect is executed. In this embodiment, the post-sixth button image 590 is displayed regardless of whether the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the button effect. In the illustrated example, the post-sixth button image 590 displays the text "Sorry...", which suggests that the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss.

(First doublet-enhanced image 591)
166 (34), a first doublet emphasis image 591 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The first doublet emphasis image 591 is an image that emphasizes the doublet decorative patterns 41. The first doublet emphasis image 591 is displayed for each of the three decorative patterns 41. In the illustrated example, the image simulating light as the first doublet emphasis image 591 is displayed around the decorative patterns 41 and in front of the decorative patterns 41 in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative patterns 41.

(Promotion promotion image 592)
As shown in FIG. 166 (35), a promotion highlighting image 592 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The promotion highlighting image 592 is an image that emphasizes the promotion highlighting effect. In other words, the promotion highlighting image 592 can also be seen as an image that emphasizes the three decorative patterns 41 (double-digit decorative patterns 41) in the promotion highlighting effect. The promotion highlighting image 592 is displayed on the entire surface of the image display unit 114. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light is displayed as the promotion highlighting image 592.
The promotion highlight image 592 is displayed on a layer behind the decorative pattern 41. However, the promotion highlight image 592 may be displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41.

(Jackpot start image 593)
As shown in FIG. 167 (42), a jackpot start image 593 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The jackpot start image 593 is an image that notifies the user that a jackpot game will start. In the example shown, the text "Bonus!" is displayed as the jackpot start image 593. The jackpot start image 593 indicates the type of jackpot game (for example, the total number of rounds) and the game status after the jackpot game ends.

(Round number image 594)
As shown in FIG. 167 (44), a round number image 594 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The round number image 594 is an image for informing the player of the number of rounds currently being played in a jackpot game. In the illustrated example, the round number image 594 displays the text "Round 1."

(Round image 595)
167 (44), a round-in-progress image 595 is displayed on the image display unit 114. This round-in-progress image 595 is a moving image of a character appearing in the content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100. The round-in-progress image 595 is displayed during a round in a jackpot game.

(Time-saving start image 596)
167 (45), a time-saving start image 596 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The time-saving start image 596 is an image that notifies the start of a time-saving gaming state. In the illustrated example, the time-saving start image 596 displays the text "Special time-saving entry!!" which suggests or notifies that the gaming state will be controlled to a special time-saving gaming state.

(First reach teaser image 597)
As shown in Figure 172 (5), a first reach stimulation emphasis image 597 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The first reach stimulation emphasis image 597 is an image that emphasizes the left and right decorative patterns 41 in the reach stimulation effect. In other words, the first reach stimulation emphasis image 597 is an image that emphasizes the reach stimulation effect. In the example shown, an image that imitates light as the first reach stimulation emphasis image 597 is displayed so as to surround the left and right decorative patterns 41.

(Second doublet-enhanced image 598)
173 (13), a second doublet emphasis image 598 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The second doublet emphasis image 598 is an image that emphasizes the doublet decorative patterns 41. The second doublet emphasis image 598 is displayed for each of the three decorative patterns 41. In the illustrated example, an image simulating light as the second doublet emphasis image 598 is displayed around the decorative patterns 41.

(Resurrected image 599)
174(3), a revival image 599 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The revival image 599 is an image that suggests or notifies that a revival effect will be performed. In the example shown, the revival image 599 displays the text "Revival!!"

(Special effect image 600)
As shown in FIG. 176 (3), a special effect image 600 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The special effect image 600 is an image that is intended to draw the player's attention. The special effect image 600 is larger in display size than the decorative pattern 41. The special effect image 600 may also be displayed on the entire surface of the image display unit 114. The special effect image 600 is displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41. In the illustrated example, the text "!?" is displayed as the special effect image 600.

(Image after seventh button 601)
As shown in FIG. 181 (6), the image display unit 114 displays a seventh button post-image 601. The seventh button post-image 601 is an image that is displayed after a button effect is executed. In this embodiment, the seventh button post-image 601 is displayed regardless of whether the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the button effect. In the illustrated example, the seventh button post-image 601 displays the text "??", which suggests that the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss.

(Seventh stop-enhanced image 602)
As shown in FIG. 181 (7), a seventh stop emphasis image 602 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The seventh stop emphasis image 602 is an image that emphasizes the stopping decorative pattern 41. In this embodiment, the seventh stop emphasis image 602 is displayed when either the left or right decorative pattern 41 that is an even number (2, 4, 6, 8, etc.) stops in the second stage described below. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light as the seventh stop emphasis image 602 is displayed around the left decorative pattern 41.

(Eighth stop-enhanced image 603)
As shown in FIG. 181 (8), an eighth stop emphasis image 603 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The eighth stop emphasis image 603 is an image that emphasizes the stopping decorative pattern 41. In this embodiment, the eighth stop emphasis image 603 is displayed when either the left or right decorative pattern 41 that is an odd number (1, 3, 5, 9, etc.) stops in the second stage described below. In the illustrated example, an image that resembles light as the eighth stop emphasis image 603 is displayed around the right decorative pattern 41.

(Ninth stop-enhanced image 604)
As shown in Fig. 182 (9), a ninth stop emphasis image 604 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The ninth stop emphasis image 604 is an image that emphasizes the stopping decorative pattern 41. In this embodiment, in the second stage described below, the ninth stop emphasis image 604 is displayed when an even-numbered (2, 4, 6, 8, etc.) middle decorative pattern 41 stops. In the illustrated example, an image simulating light as the ninth stop emphasis image 604 is displayed around the middle decorative pattern 41.

(Tenth stop-enhanced image 605)
As shown in Fig. 183 (3), a tenth stop emphasis image 605 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The tenth stop emphasis image 605 is an image that emphasizes the stopping decorative pattern 41. In this embodiment, in the second stage described below, the tenth stop emphasis image 605 is displayed when an odd-numbered middle decorative pattern 41 (such as 1, 3, 5, 7, or 9) stops. In the illustrated example, an image simulating light as the tenth stop emphasis image 605 is displayed around the middle decorative pattern 41.

(Image after 8th button 606)
As shown in FIG. 184 (6), the image display unit 114 displays an eighth button post-image 606. The eighth button post-image 606 is an image that is displayed after a button effect is executed. In this embodiment, the eighth button post-image 606 is displayed regardless of whether the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the button effect. In the illustrated example, the text "Expectations?" is displayed as the eighth button post-image 606.

(Image after 9th button 607)
As shown in FIG. 185 (13), the image display unit 114 displays a post-ninth button image 607. The post-ninth button image 607 is an image that is displayed after a button effect is executed. In this embodiment, the post-ninth button image 607 is displayed regardless of whether the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the button effect. In the illustrated example, the post-ninth button image 607 displays the text "Can it work?", which suggests that the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss.

(Eleventh stop-enhanced image 608)
As shown in FIG. 185 (14), an eleventh stop emphasis image 608 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The eleventh stop emphasis image 608 is an image that emphasizes the decorative symbol 41 that stops. In this embodiment, when a normal reach effect in the second stage described below is executed and an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect is not executed, the eleventh stop emphasis image 608 is displayed when an odd-numbered (1, 3, 5, 7, 9, etc.) middle decorative symbol 41 stops. In the illustrated example, an image that resembles light as the eleventh stop emphasis image 608 is displayed around the middle decorative symbol 41.

(12th stop-enhanced image 609)
As shown in FIG. 187 (14), a twelfth stop emphasis image 609 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The twelfth stop emphasis image 609 is an image that emphasizes the decorative symbol 41 that stops. In this embodiment, when a normal reach effect in the second stage described below is executed and an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect is not executed, the twelfth stop emphasis image 609 is displayed when an even-numbered (2, 4, 6, 8, etc.) middle decorative symbol 41 stops. In the illustrated example, an image that resembles light as the twelfth stop emphasis image 609 is displayed so as to surround the middle decorative symbol 41.

(Second development promotion image 610)
As shown in FIG. 191 (2), a second development promotion emphasis image 610 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The second development promotion emphasis image 610 is an image that emphasizes the development image 584 and the middle decorative pattern 41. In other words, the second development promotion emphasis image 610 is an image that emphasizes the development promotion effect. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light as the second development promotion emphasis image 610 is displayed so as to surround the development image 584 and the middle decorative pattern 41.

(Second start emphasized image 611)
194(2), a second start emphasis image 611 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The second start emphasis image 611 is an image that emphasizes the decorative pattern 41 that has started to change. The second start emphasis image 611 is displayed for each of the three decorative patterns 41. In the illustrated example, an image that simulates light as the second start emphasis image 611 is displayed around the decorative pattern 41.

(Image after 10th button 612)
194(7), the image display unit 114 displays a post-tenth button image 612. The post-tenth button image 612 is an image that is displayed after a button effect is executed. In this embodiment, the post-tenth button image 612 is displayed regardless of whether the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the button effect. In the example shown, the post-tenth button image 612 displays the text "Big Chance!?" which suggests that there is a high probability (expectation level) that the result of the special pattern lottery will be a big win (small win).

(Third doublet emphasized image 614)
As shown in Fig. 208 (9), a third duplicated number emphasis image 614 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The third duplicated number emphasis image 614 is an image that emphasizes the duplicated number decorative patterns 41. The third duplicated number emphasis image 614 is displayed for each of the three decorative patterns 41. In the illustrated example, an image that simulates light as the third duplicated number emphasis image 614 is displayed around the decorative patterns 41.

(Fourth doublet emphasized image 615)
As shown in FIG. 211 (20), a fourth duplicated number emphasis image 615 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The fourth duplicated number emphasis image 615 is an image that emphasizes the duplicated number decorative pattern 41. The fourth duplicated number emphasis image 615 is displayed for each of the three decorative patterns 41. In the illustrated example, an image simulating light as the fourth duplicated number emphasis image 615 is displayed around the decorative pattern 41 and in front of the decorative pattern 41 in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41.

(13th stop emphasis image 616)
As shown in FIG. 212 (3), a thirteenth stop emphasis image 616 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The thirteenth stop emphasis image 616 is an image that emphasizes the decorative pattern 41 that is stopping. The thirteenth stop emphasis image 616 is displayed for each of the three decorative patterns 41. In this embodiment, the thirteenth stop emphasis image 616 is displayed when the decorative pattern 41 stops in the third stage, which will be described later. In the illustrated example, an image that resembles light as the thirteenth stop emphasis image 616 is displayed below the decorative pattern 41.

(Second reach teasing emphasis image 617)
As shown in Figure 214 (3), a second reach stimulation emphasis image 617 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The second reach stimulation emphasis image 617 is an image that emphasizes the left and right decorative patterns 41 in the reach stimulation effect. In other words, the second reach stimulation emphasis image 617 is an image that emphasizes the reach stimulation effect. In the example shown, an image that imitates light as the second reach stimulation emphasis image 617 is displayed around the left and right decorative patterns 41.

(First transitional image 618)
As shown in FIG. 214 (5), a first transition image 618 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The first transition image 618 is an image that suggests or notifies that the effect being executed will transition from a normal reach effect to an SPSP reach effect. In this embodiment, the first transition image 618 is displayed on the entire surface of the image display unit 114. Also, in this embodiment, the first transition image 618 is displayed as a background for the decorative pattern 41, etc., instead of the stage image 61. Therefore, the first transition image 618 can also be regarded as the stage image 61. The stage (effect mode) in this case is a stage (effect mode) specific to when the first transition image 618 is displayed.

(Image 619 after pressing button 11)
As shown in Fig. 215 (11), an eleventh button post-image 619 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The eleventh button post-image 619 is an image that is displayed after a button effect is executed. In this embodiment, the eleventh button post-image 619 is displayed regardless of whether the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the button effect. In the illustrated example, the eleventh button post-image 619 displays the text "No good...", which suggests that the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss.

(5th repeated number emphasized image 620)
As shown in Fig. 217 (14), a fifth duplicated number emphasis image 620 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The fifth duplicated number emphasis image 620 is an image that emphasizes the duplicated number decorative pattern 41. The fifth duplicated number emphasis image 620 is displayed for each of three decorative patterns 41. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light as the fifth duplicated number emphasis image 620 is displayed so as to surround the decorative pattern 41.

(Image after 12th button 621)
As shown in FIG. 219 (6), a post-12th button image 621 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The post-12th button image 621 is an image that is displayed after a button effect is executed. In this embodiment, the post-12th button image 621 is displayed regardless of whether the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the button effect. In the illustrated example, the post-12th button image 621 displays the text "So close!", which suggests that the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss.

(Second transitional image 622)
As shown in FIG. 222 (5), a second transition image 622 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The second transition image 622 is an image that is displayed when the stage image 61 is switched. In this embodiment, the stage image 61 corresponding to the special time-saving game state is switched to the stage image 61 corresponding to the normal game state via the second transition image 622. The second transition image 622 is displayed on the entire surface of the image display unit 114. The second transition image 622 is displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41, the variable image 51, the reserved image 52, the stage image 61, the stage notification image 501, the remaining number of times of time-saving game image 504, etc., and on a layer behind the reserved number display 55 and the small pattern 56, etc. In the illustrated example, an image resembling a door is displayed as the second transition image 622.

(Result image 623)
As shown in FIG. 222 (5), a result image 623 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The result image 623 is an image showing the result of a jackpot game. The result image 623 is displayed when the second transition image 622 is displayed after a jackpot game has been played. Furthermore, if multiple jackpot games have been played before the second transition image 622 is displayed, the result image 623 shows the cumulative results of these multiple jackpot games. In the illustrated example, the result image 623 displays the text "TOTAL 3 times," which indicates that three jackpot games have been played, and the text "3024 points obtained," which corresponds to the number of prize balls won in the jackpot game.

(14th stop-enhanced image 624)
As shown in FIG. 224 (3), a fourteenth stop emphasis image 624 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The fourteenth stop emphasis image 624 is an image that emphasizes the decorative pattern 41 that is stopping. The fourteenth stop emphasis image 624 is displayed for each of the three decorative patterns 41. In this embodiment, the fourteenth stop emphasis image 624 is displayed when the decorative pattern 41 stops in the fourth stage, which will be described later. In the illustrated example, an image that resembles light as the fourteenth stop emphasis image 624 is displayed around the decorative pattern 41.

(Third reach teasing image 625)
As shown in Figure 229 (4), a third reach stimulation emphasis image 625 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The third reach stimulation emphasis image 625 is an image that emphasizes the left and right decorative patterns 41 in the reach stimulation effect. In other words, the third reach stimulation emphasis image 625 is an image that emphasizes the reach stimulation effect. In the example shown, an image that imitates light as the third reach stimulation emphasis image 625 is displayed so as to surround the left and right decorative patterns 41.

(6th doublet emphasized image 626)
As shown in FIG. 230 (12), a sixth duplicated number emphasis image 626 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The sixth duplicated number emphasis image 626 is an image that emphasizes the duplicated number decorative pattern 41. In this embodiment, when "777", which is a duplicated number decorative pattern 41, stops in the variable presentation that started from the fourth stage, the sixth duplicated number emphasis image 626 is displayed. The sixth duplicated number emphasis image 626 is displayed for each of the three decorative patterns 41. In the illustrated example, an image that simulates light as the sixth duplicated number emphasis image 626 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41 and is displayed in front of the decorative pattern 41.

(Image 627 in preparation)
As shown in Fig. 242 (9), a preparation image 627 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The preparation image 627 is an image that notifies or suggests that preparation for restoration is underway when the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is restored after being turned off. The preparation image 627 is displayed on the entire surface of the image display unit 114. In the illustrated example, the preparation image 627 displays the text "preparing."

(Jackpot notification image 628)
As shown in FIG. 245 (14), a jackpot notification image 628 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The jackpot notification image 628 is an image that notifies or suggests that a jackpot game is being played. The jackpot notification image 628 is displayed on the entire surface of the image display unit 114. In the example shown, the text "jackpot in progress" is displayed as the jackpot notification image 628.

In this embodiment, the first aura-enhanced image 508, the second aura-enhanced image 513, the third aura-enhanced image 518, the fourth aura-enhanced image 527, the fifth aura-enhanced image 530, and the sixth aura-enhanced image 534 are each different images (having different display modes).
In addition, in this embodiment, the first post-operation emphasis image 510, the second post-operation emphasis image 511, the third post-operation emphasis image 512, the fourth post-operation emphasis image 515, the fifth post-operation emphasis image 516, the sixth post-operation emphasis image 517, the seventh post-operation emphasis image 519, the eighth post-operation emphasis image 520, the ninth post-operation emphasis image 521, the tenth post-operation emphasis image 522, the eleventh post-operation emphasis image 523, the twelfth post-operation emphasis image 524, the thirteenth post-operation emphasis image 525, the fourteenth post-operation emphasis image 526, the fifteenth post-operation emphasis image 528, the sixteenth post-operation emphasis image 529, the seventeenth post-operation emphasis image 532, the eighteenth post-operation emphasis image 533, and the nineteenth post-operation emphasis image 535 are each different images (having different display modes).

In addition, in this embodiment, the first reach eye emphasis image 542, the second reach eye emphasis image 543, the third reach eye emphasis image 544, the fourth reach eye emphasis image 545, the fifth reach eye emphasis image 546, the sixth reach eye emphasis image 547, the seventh reach eye emphasis image 548, the eighth reach eye emphasis image 549, the ninth reach eye emphasis image 550, the first stop emphasis image 572, the second stop emphasis image 573, the third stop emphasis image 574, the fourth stop emphasis image 575, the fifth stop emphasis image 578, the sixth stop emphasis image 579, the pseudo consecutive emphasis image 582, the first development tease emphasis image 585, the chance eye emphasis image 587, the first start emphasis image 588, the first doublet emphasis image 590, the Image 591, reach teaser emphasis image 597, second doublet emphasis image 598, seventh stop emphasis image 602, eighth stop emphasis image 603, ninth stop emphasis image 604, tenth stop emphasis image 605, eleventh stop emphasis image 608, twelfth stop emphasis image 609, second development teaser emphasis image 610, second start emphasis image 611, third doublet emphasis image 614, fourth doublet emphasis image 615, thirteenth stop emphasis image 616, second reach teaser emphasis image 617, fifth doublet emphasis image 620, fourteenth stop emphasis image 624, third reach teaser emphasis image 625, and sixth doublet emphasis image 626 are all different images (different display modes).

Furthermore, the first button rear image 571, the second button rear image 576, the third button rear image 577, the fourth button rear image 580, the fifth button rear image 589, the sixth button rear image 590, the seventh button rear image 601, the eighth button rear image 606, the ninth button rear image 607, the tenth button rear image 612, the eleventh button rear image 619, and the twelfth button rear image 621 may all be displayed across the entirety of one layer in the image display unit 114.

In the following description, when the volume image 42 and the customer waiting volume image 44 are not particularly distinguished from each other, they may be simply referred to as volume images.
In the following description, when the light intensity image 43 and the customer waiting light intensity image 45 are not particularly distinguished from each other, they may be simply referred to as light intensity images.
In the following, when the first right-hit image 503 and the second right-hit image 507 are described without any particular distinction, they may be simply referred to as right-hit images.
In the following, when the first left-handed hit image 47 and the second left-handed hit image 48 are described without any particular distinction, they may be simply referred to as left-handed hit images.

In addition, in the following, when the first aura-enhanced image 508, the second aura-enhanced image 513, the third aura-enhanced image 518, the fourth aura-enhanced image 527, the fifth aura-enhanced image 530, and the sixth aura-enhanced image 534 are described without any particular distinction, they may be simply referred to as aura-enhanced images.
In addition, in the following, when describing the first post-operation emphasis image 510, the second post-operation emphasis image 511, the third post-operation emphasis image 512, the fourth post-operation emphasis image 515, the fifth post-operation emphasis image 516, the sixth post-operation emphasis image 517, the seventh post-operation emphasis image 519, the eighth post-operation emphasis image 520, the ninth post-operation emphasis image 521, the tenth post-operation emphasis image 522, the eleventh post-operation emphasis image 523, the twelfth post-operation emphasis image 524, the thirteenth post-operation emphasis image 525, the fourteenth post-operation emphasis image 526, the fifteenth post-operation emphasis image 528, the sixteenth post-operation emphasis image 529, the seventeenth post-operation emphasis image 532, the eighteenth post-operation emphasis image 533, and the nineteenth post-operation emphasis image 535 without making any particular distinction between them, they may be simply referred to as post-operation emphasis images.
In the following description, when the first operation-in-progress highlight image 514 and the second operation-in-progress highlight image 531 are not particularly distinguished from each other, they may be simply referred to as operation-in-progress highlight images.
In addition, in the following, when describing the first button post image 571, the second button post image 576, the third button post image 577, the fourth button post image 580, the fifth button post image 589, the sixth button post image 590, the seventh button post image 601, the eighth button post image 606, the ninth button post image 607, the tenth button post image 612, the eleventh button post image 619, and the twelfth button post image 621 without making any particular distinction, they may be simply referred to as button post images.

Furthermore, in the following, when the first stop emphasis image 572, the second stop emphasis image 573, the third stop emphasis image 574, the fourth stop emphasis image 575, the fifth stop emphasis image 578, the sixth stop emphasis image 579, the seventh stop emphasis image 602, the eighth stop emphasis image 603, the ninth stop emphasis image 604, the tenth stop emphasis image 605, the eleventh stop emphasis image 608, the twelfth stop emphasis image 609, the thirteenth stop emphasis image 616, and the fourteenth stop emphasis image 624 are described without making any particular distinction, they may be simply referred to as stop emphasis images.
In the following description, when the first development promotion emphasis image 585 and the second development promotion emphasis image 610 are described without any particular distinction, they may be simply referred to as development promotion emphasis images.
In addition, in the following, when the first reach-eye emphasis image 542, the second reach-eye emphasis image 543, the third reach-eye emphasis image 544, the fourth reach-eye emphasis image 545, the fifth reach-eye emphasis image 546, the sixth reach-eye emphasis image 547, the seventh reach-eye emphasis image 548, the eighth reach-eye emphasis image 549, and the ninth reach-eye emphasis image 550 are described without any particular distinction, they may be simply referred to as reach-eye emphasis images.
In addition, in the following, when the first doublet emphasized image 591, the second doublet emphasized image 598, the third doublet emphasized image 614, the fourth doublet emphasized image 615, the fifth doublet emphasized image 620, and the sixth doublet emphasized image 626 are described without making any particular distinction, they may be simply referred to as doublet emphasized images.

In addition, in the following, when the first jackpot emphasis image 566, the second jackpot emphasis image 567, the third jackpot emphasis image 568, the fourth jackpot emphasis image 569, and the fifth jackpot emphasis image 570 are described without making any particular distinction, they may be simply referred to as jackpot emphasis images.
In addition, in the following, when describing the first start-up emphasis image 557, the second start-up emphasis image 558, the third start-up emphasis image 559, and the fourth start-up emphasis image 560 without making any particular distinction, they may be simply referred to as start-up emphasis images.
In addition, in the following, when describing the first execution highlight image 562, the second execution highlight image 563, the third execution highlight image 564, and the fourth execution highlight image 565 without making any particular distinction, they may be simply referred to as start-time highlight images.
In the following description, when the first start emphasis image 588 and the second start emphasis image 611 are not particularly distinguished from each other, they may be simply referred to as start emphasis images.
In addition, in the following, when the first reach promotion emphasis image 597, the second reach promotion emphasis image 617, and the third reach promotion emphasis image 625 are described without making any particular distinction, they may be simply referred to as reach promotion emphasis images.
In the following, when the first reel-emphasized image 551 and the second reel-emphasized image 555 are described without any particular distinction, they may be simply referred to as reel-emphasized images.

(emphasis)
Next, the emphasis effect will be described. In this embodiment, the emphasis effect is executed. The emphasis effect is an effect that emphasizes a specific effect target. Examples of the specific effect target include the decorative pattern 41, the button image 509 (button effect), the reach suggestion image 540, the SPSP start image 556, the SPSP suggestion image 561, the pseudo consecutive image 581, the movable role object 115, the operation of the effect button 161, the operation of the effect button 161, the role object effect, the development effect, the reach effect, the SPSP reach effect, the result of the special symbol lottery (the execution of a jackpot game), the pseudo consecutive effect, and the promotion teasing effect.

When highlighting effects are realized using the image display unit 114, the highlighting effects include the first precursor highlighting image 508, the button highlighting portion 509c of the button image 509, the first post-operation highlighting image 510, the second post-operation highlighting image 511, the third post-operation highlighting image 512, the second precursor highlighting image 513, the first during-operation highlighting image 514, the fourth post-operation highlighting image 515, the fifth post-operation highlighting image 516, the sixth post-operation highlighting image 517, the third precursor highlighting image 518, the seventh post-operation highlighting image 519, the eighth post-operation highlighting image 520, the ninth post-operation highlighting image 521, the tenth post-operation highlighting image 522, the eleventh post-operation highlighting image 523, the twelfth post-operation highlighting image 524, the thirteenth post-operation highlighting image 525, the fourteenth post-operation highlighting image 526, the fourth precursor highlighting image 527, the 15th post-operation emphasis image 528, 16th post-operation emphasis image 529, 5th precursor emphasis image 530, 2nd during-operation emphasis image 531, 17th post-operation emphasis image 532, 18th post-operation emphasis image 533, 6th precursor emphasis image 534, 19th post-operation emphasis image 535, reach line image 539, reach suggestion image 540, reach emphasis image 541, 1st reach eye emphasis image 542, 2nd reach eye emphasis image 543, 3rd reach eye emphasis image 544, 4th reach eye emphasis image 545, 5th reach eye emphasis image 546, 6th reach eye emphasis image 547, 7th reach eye emphasis image 548, 8th reach eye emphasis image 549, 9th reach eye emphasis image 550, 1st role emphasis image 551, development emphasis image 554, 2nd role emphasis image 555, S PSP start image 556, first start emphasis image 557, second start emphasis image 558, third start emphasis image 559, fourth start emphasis image 560, SPSP suggestion image 561, first execution emphasis image 562, second execution emphasis image 563, third execution emphasis image 564, fourth execution emphasis image 565, first jackpot emphasis image 566, second jackpot emphasis image 567, third jackpot emphasis image 568, fourth jackpot emphasis image 569, fifth jackpot emphasis image 570, first stop emphasis image 572, second stop emphasis image 573, third stop emphasis image 574, fourth stop emphasis image 575, fifth stop emphasis image 578, sixth stop emphasis image 579, pseudo consecutive emphasis image 582, first development teaser emphasis image 585, strong chance eye The image display unit 114 displays a tone image 587, a first start emphasis image 588, a first doublet emphasis image 591, a promotion teaser emphasis image 592, a first reach teaser emphasis image 597, a second doublet emphasis image 598, a seventh stop emphasis image 602, an eighth stop emphasis image 603, a ninth stop emphasis image 604, a tenth stop emphasis image 605, an eleventh stop emphasis image 608, a twelfth stop emphasis image 609, a second development teaser emphasis image 610, a second start emphasis image 611, a third doublet emphasis image 614, a fourth doublet emphasis image 615, a thirteenth stop emphasis image 616, a second reach teaser emphasis image 617, a fifth doublet emphasis image 620, a fourteenth stop emphasis image 624, a third reach teaser emphasis image 625, a sixth doublet emphasis image 626, and the like.

An example of the highlight effect will be described. When the highlight effect is realized by displaying the first stop highlight image 572 (see FIG. 142 (7)), the target of the highlight effect (specific target of the effect) is the decorative pattern 41.
In this embodiment, by executing an emphasis effect, it is possible to draw the player's attention to a specific effect target.

(Stage-specific production images)
Next, the effect images displayed for each stage (effect mode) will be described.
In this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 displays a specific performance image in a display mode that corresponds to the stage.
FIG. 43 shows the effect images displayed for each stage.
43(1) is a diagram showing the effect image in the first stage. In the first stage, a space-themed moving image is displayed as the stage image 61. In addition, in the first stage, a girl character is added to the decorative pattern 41, thereby creating a highly decorative decorative pattern 41.

43(2) shows a stage notification image 501 and a change count image 502 in the first stage. The stage notification image 501 is provided with an identifying portion 501a and an emphasizing portion 501b.
The identification section 501a is an image for identifying the stage (performance mode) set by the performance control section 300. The identification section 501a in the first stage is formed in a rectangular shape. The identification section 501a in the first stage also has the text "Space" written in black to identify the stage.
The highlighting portion 501b is an image that highlights the identifying portion 501a. The highlighting portion 501b can also be regarded as an image that highlights the stage notification image 501. The highlighting portion 501b in the first stage is an image in which arch-shaped portions are arranged side by side to surround the identifying portion 501a.

As shown in FIG. 43(2), the variation frequency image 502 is provided with a distinguishing portion 502a and an emphasizing portion 502b.
The indicator 502a is an image for identifying the number of times the variable effect has been executed in the normal game mode (the number of times the special symbol has changed). The indicator 502a is rectangular and has the text "10 games" to identify the number of times the variable effect has been executed in the normal game mode (the number of times the special symbol has changed).
The highlighting portion 502b is an image that highlights the identification portion 502a. The highlighting portion 502b can also be regarded as an image that highlights the fluctuation count image 502. The highlighting portion 502b is an image that is formed in the shape of a rectangular frame made of solid lines and is arranged so as to surround the identification portion 502a.

Figure 43 (3) shows the effect image in the second stage. In the second stage, a sky-themed moving image is displayed as the stage image 61. In addition, in the second stage, a girl character is added to the decorative pattern 41, creating a highly decorative decorative pattern 41. The display manner of the decorative pattern 41 differs between the first and second stages in that the decoration of the character added to the decorative pattern 41 is different.

43(4) shows a stage notification image 501 and a change count image 502 in the second stage. The identification portion 501a of the stage notification image 501 in the second stage has the same shape as the identification portion 501a in the first stage. However, the identification portion 501a in the second stage differs from the identification portion 501a in the first stage in that the text "empty" that identifies the stage is displayed in light blue.
The highlighting portion 501b of the stage notification image 501 in the second stage is an image in which triangular portions are arranged so as to surround the indicator portion 501a.
Furthermore, the identification portion 502a and the emphasis portion 502b of the change count image 502 in the second stage are displayed in the same manner as the identification portion 502a and the emphasis portion 502b of the change count image 502 in the first stage.

Figure 43 (5) shows the effect image in the third stage. In the third stage, a moving image with a sea theme is displayed as the stage image 61. Also displayed in the third stage are a decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness, a stage notification image 501, a first right-hit image 503, and a remaining number of times for time-saving play image 504.

43(6) shows a stage notification image 501 and a remaining time-saving number image 504 in the third stage. The indicator 501a of the stage notification image 501 in the third stage has the same shape as the indicator 501a in the first stage and the indicator 501a in the second stage. However, the indicator 501a in the third stage differs from the indicator 501a in the first stage and the indicator 501a in the second stage in that the text "ocean" identifying the stage is displayed in blue.
The highlighting portion 501b of the stage notification image 501 in the third stage is a ring-shaped image that surrounds the indicator portion 501a.

As shown in FIG. 43(6), the remaining time-saving number image 504 has an indicator 504a and an emphasis portion 504b.
The indicator 504a is an image for identifying the remaining number of times for special symbol lotteries in the time-shortened game state (the remaining number of times for variable effects in the time-shortened game state). The indicator 504a is rectangular and has the text "90 more" that identifies the remaining number of times for special symbol lotteries in the time-shortened game state (the remaining number of times for variable effects in the time-shortened game state).
The highlighting portion 504b is an image that highlights the indicator 504a. The highlighting portion 504b can also be regarded as an image that highlights the remaining time-saving count image 504. The highlighting portion 504b is formed in the shape of a rectangular frame made up of dotted lines and is an image that is arranged to surround the indicator 504a.

Figure 43 (7) shows the effect image in the fourth stage. In the fourth stage, a moving image with a grassland theme is displayed as the stage image 61. Also displayed in the fourth stage are a decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness, a stage notification image 501, a first right-hit image 503, and a remaining number of times for time-saving play image 504. In the third and fourth stages, the decorative pattern 41 and the first right-hit image 503 are displayed in the same manner.

43(8) shows a stage notification image 501 and a remaining time-reduction number image 504 for the fourth stage. The identification portion 501a of the stage notification image 501 for the fourth stage has the same shape as the identification portion 501a for the first stage, the identification portion 501a for the second stage, and the identification portion 501a for the third stage. However, the identification portion 501a for the fourth stage differs from the identification portion 501a for the first stage, the identification portion 501a for the second stage, and the identification portion 501a for the third stage in that the text "Grassland" identifying the stage is displayed in green.
The highlighting portion 501b of the stage notification image 501 in the fourth stage is a rectangular image surrounding the indicator portion 501a.
Furthermore, the indicator 504a and the highlighting portion 504b of the remaining time-saving number image 504 in the fourth stage have the same display form as the indicator 504a and the highlighting portion 504b of the remaining time-saving number image 504 in the third stage.

In addition, in the first to fourth stages, the variable image 51, the reserved image 52, the reserved number display 55, and the small symbol 56 are displayed in the same manner. However, the variable image 51, the reserved image 52, the reserved number display 55, and the small symbol 56 may be displayed in different manners for each stage.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 have different display sizes in each stage, but are not limited to this. In each stage, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 may have the same display size.
In addition, in this embodiment, the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 may be displayed, but in the first to fourth stages, the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are displayed in the same manner.

(Operational aspects of variable images)
Next, the operation of the variable image 51 will be described.
In this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 displays the variable image 51 in various operation modes according to the display color. More specifically, the performance control unit 300 periodically displays the variable image 51 in various operation modes according to the display color.
FIG. 44 is a diagram showing the operation mode of the variable image 51 in the normal display mode.
As shown in Fig. 44 (1), the variable image 51 in the normal display mode is formed in a spherical shape. Moreover, the variable image 51 in the normal display mode periodically rotates clockwise. In this embodiment, the rotation period of the variable image 51 in the normal display mode is 2 seconds. However, the rotation period of the variable image 51 in the normal display mode may be any time.

The variable image 51 shown in Fig. 44(2) is rotated by a quarter of a rotation relative to the display mode shown in Fig. 44(1). At this time, a quarter of a cycle has elapsed since the display mode shown in Fig. 44(1).
The variable image 51 shown in Fig. 44(3) is rotated halfway relative to the display mode shown in Fig. 44(1). At this time, half a cycle has passed since the display mode shown in Fig. 44(1).
The variable image 51 shown in Fig. 44(4) is rotated by 3/4 of a rotation relative to the display mode shown in Fig. 44(1). At this time, 3/4 of a cycle has elapsed since the display mode shown in Fig. 44(1).

The dynamic image 51 shown in Fig. 44(5) has rotated once relative to the display mode shown in Fig. 44(1). At this time, one cycle has passed since the display mode shown in Fig. 44(1). After this, the dynamic image 51 continues to display the movements shown in Fig. 44(2) to (5).
As described above, the variable image 51 in the normal display mode rotates periodically by repeatedly displaying the display modes shown in Figures 44 (2) to (5).
In addition, the pending image 52 in the normal display mode may also be displayed in the same manner as the variable image 51 in the normal display mode.

FIG. 45 is a diagram showing the operation mode of the blue variable image 51.
As shown in FIG. 45(1), a blue variation image 51 has a distinguishing portion 51a and an emphasizing portion 51b.
The identification unit 51a is a portion for identifying the display color of the variable image 51. The identification unit 51a is formed in a spherical shape. The identification unit 51a periodically rotates in a clockwise direction. The rotation period of the identification unit 51a is 2 seconds. However, the rotation period of the identification unit 51a may be any time period.
The highlighting portion 51b is a portion that highlights the identifying portion 51a. The highlighting portion 51b can also be considered as a portion that highlights the varying image 51. The highlighting portion 51b is formed in a crown shape. The highlighting portion 51b periodically oscillates in a clockwise direction and a counterclockwise direction. The oscillation period of the highlighting portion 51b is 1.5 seconds. That is, the oscillation period of the highlighting portion 51b in this embodiment is shorter than the rotation period of the identifying portion 51a. However, the oscillation period of the highlighting portion 51b may be longer than or the same as the rotation period of the identifying portion 51a.

The identification portion 51a of the dynamic image 51 shown in FIG. 45(2) is rotated relative to the display mode shown in FIG. 45(1).
The highlighting portion 51b has moved to the right side relative to the display mode shown in Fig. 45(1). At this time, a quarter of the oscillation period of the highlighting portion 51b has elapsed since the display mode shown in Fig. 45(1).

The identification portion 51a of the dynamic image 51 shown in FIG. 45(3) is further rotated relative to the display mode shown in FIG. 45(2).
Moreover, the highlighting portion 51b moves to the left in the display mode shown in Fig. 45(2) and is positioned in the same position as in Fig. 45(1). At this time, a half cycle of the oscillation of the highlighting portion 51b has passed since the display mode shown in Fig. 45(1).

The identification portion 51a of the dynamic image 51 shown in FIG. 45(4) is further rotated relative to the display mode shown in FIG. 45(3).
The highlighting portion 51b has moved to the left in the display mode shown in Fig. 45(3). At this time, ¾ of a period of the oscillation of the highlighting portion 51b has elapsed since the display mode shown in Fig. 45(1).

The identification portion 51a of the dynamic image 51 shown in FIG. 45(5) is further rotated relative to the display mode shown in FIG. 45(4).
Moreover, the highlighting section 51b moves to the right in the display mode shown in Fig. 45(4), and is thus positioned in the same position as in Fig. 45(1). At this point, one period of oscillation by the highlighting section 51b has elapsed since the display mode shown in Fig. 45(1). After this, the highlighting section 51b continues to repeat the operational display shown in Fig. 45(2) to (5).

The identification section 51a of the variable image 51 shown in Fig. 45(6) has rotated once relative to the display mode shown in Fig. 45(1). At this time, one rotation cycle by the identification section 51a has elapsed since the display mode shown in Fig. 45(1). After this, the identification section 51a continues to repeat the operation display shown in Fig. 45(2) to (6). In addition, the highlighting section 51b has moved to the right relative to the display mode shown in Fig. 45(5).
As described above, in the blue variable image 51, the identification section 51a rotates periodically by repeatedly displaying the display modes shown in Figures 45(2) to (6), and the highlighting section 51b oscillates periodically by repeatedly displaying the display modes shown in Figures 45(2) to (5).

The blue pending image 52 may also be displayed in the same manner as the blue variable image 51. In this case, the distinguishing portion 51a and the highlighting portion 51b of the variable image 51 correspond to the distinguishing portion 52a and the highlighting portion 52b of the variable image 52, respectively. The distinguishing portion 52a of the pending image 52 is displayed in the same manner at the same cycle as the distinguishing portion 51a of the variable image 51. The highlighting portion 52b of the pending image 52 is displayed in the same manner at the same cycle as the highlighting portion 51b of the variable image 51.

FIG. 46 is a diagram showing the operation mode of the green variable image 51.
As shown in FIG. 46(1), a green variable image 51 has a distinguishing portion 51a and an emphasizing portion 51b.
The recognition unit 51a is formed in a spherical shape. The recognition unit 51a rotates periodically in a clockwise direction. The rotation period of the recognition unit 51a is 2 seconds. However, the rotation period of the recognition unit 51a may be any time period.
The highlighting portion 51b is formed in a crown shape with a curved top, and has a different display form from the highlighting portion 51b of the blue variation image 51. The highlighting portion 51b also moves periodically in the left-right direction. The period of movement by the highlighting portion 51b is 1 second. That is, the period of movement by the highlighting portion 51b in this embodiment is shorter than the period of rotation by the identification portion 51a. However, the period of movement by the highlighting portion 51b may be longer than or the same as the period of rotation by the identification portion 51a.

The identification unit 51a of the dynamic image 51 shown in Fig. 46(2) has rotated a quarter of a turn relative to the display mode shown in Fig. 46(1). At this time, a quarter of a rotation cycle of the identification unit 51a has elapsed since the display mode shown in Fig. 46(1).
Moreover, the highlighting portion 51b has moved to the left in the display mode shown in Fig. 46(1). At this time, a half cycle of the movement of the highlighting portion 51b has elapsed since the display mode shown in Fig. 46(1).

The identification unit 51a of the dynamic image 51 shown in Fig. 46(3) has rotated half a turn relative to the display mode shown in Fig. 46(1). At this time, a half cycle of rotation by the identification unit 51a has elapsed since the display mode shown in Fig. 46(1).
Moreover, the highlighting section 51b has been moved to the right in the display mode shown in Fig. 46(2), and is now positioned in the same position as in Fig. 46(1). At this point, one period of movement by the highlighting section 51b has elapsed since the display mode shown in Fig. 46(1).

The identification unit 51a of the dynamic image 51 shown in Fig. 46(4) has rotated 3/4 of the time from the display mode shown in Fig. 46(1). At this time, 3/4 of the rotation period of the identification unit 51a has elapsed since the display mode shown in Fig. 46(1).
Moreover, the highlighting portion 51b moves to the left compared to the display mode shown in FIG. 46(3).

The identification unit 51a of the dynamic image 51 shown in Fig. 46(5) has rotated once relative to the display mode shown in Fig. 46(1). At this time, one rotation cycle of the identification unit 51a has elapsed since the display mode shown in Fig. 46(1).
Moreover, the highlighting section 51b has been moved to the right in the display mode shown in Fig. 46(4), and is now positioned in the same position as in Fig. 46(3). At this point, two periods of movement by the highlighting section 51b have passed since the display mode shown in Fig. 46(1).
As described above, in the green variable image 51, the identification section 51a rotates periodically by repeatedly displaying the display modes shown in Figures 46 (2) to (5), and the highlighting section 51b moves periodically by repeatedly displaying the display modes shown in Figures 46 (2) to (3).

The green pending image 52 may also be displayed in the same manner as the green variable image 51. In this case, the distinguishing portion 51a and the highlighting portion 51b of the variable image 51 correspond to the distinguishing portion 52a and the highlighting portion 52b of the variable image 52, respectively. The distinguishing portion 52a of the pending image 52 is displayed in the same manner at the same cycle as the distinguishing portion 51a of the variable image 51. The highlighting portion 52b of the pending image 52 is displayed in the same manner at the same cycle as the highlighting portion 51b of the variable image 51.

FIG. 47 is a diagram showing the operation mode of the red variable image 51.
As shown in FIG. 47(1), a red variation image 51 has a distinguishing portion 51a and an emphasizing portion 51b.
The recognition unit 51a is formed in a spherical shape. The recognition unit 51a rotates periodically in a clockwise direction. The rotation period of the recognition unit 51a is 2 seconds. However, the rotation period of the recognition unit 51a may be any time period.
The highlighting portion 51b is formed in a lightning bolt shape and has a display mode different from that of the highlighting portion 51b of the blue variation image 51 and that of the green variation image 51. Furthermore, when the highlighting portion 51b moves from the top to the bottom, the display position is switched to the top and then moved to the bottom again. The highlighting portion 51b operates periodically by repeating this movement and switching of the display position. The operation period of the highlighting portion 51b is 0.5 seconds. That is, the operation period of the highlighting portion 51b in this embodiment is shorter than the rotation period of the identification portion 51a. However, the operation period of the highlighting portion 51b may be longer than or the same as the rotation period of the identification portion 51a.

The identification portion 51a of the dynamic image 51 shown in FIG. 47(2) is rotated relative to the display mode shown in FIG. 47(1).
Moreover, the highlighting portion 51b has been moved downward with respect to the display mode shown in FIG. 47(1).

The identification unit 51a of the dynamic image 51 shown in Fig. 47(3) is further rotated from the display mode shown in Fig. 47(2) and is thus rotated a quarter of the way from the display mode shown in Fig. 47(1). At this time, a quarter of a rotation cycle of the identification unit 51a has elapsed since the display mode shown in Fig. 47(1).
Furthermore, the highlighting section 51b is arranged in the same position as in Fig. 47(1) by switching the display position from the display mode shown in Fig. 47(2). At this time, one cycle of the operation display by the highlighting section 51b has elapsed since the display mode shown in Fig. 47(1).

The identification unit 51a of the dynamic image 51 shown in Fig. 47(4) is rotated half a turn relative to the display mode shown in Fig. 47(1). At this time, a half cycle of rotation by the identification unit 51a has elapsed since the display mode shown in Fig. 47(1).
Moreover, the highlighting section 51b is moved downward and its display position is switched from the display mode shown in Fig. 47(3) to the same position as in Fig. 47(3). At this time, two periods of the operation display by the highlighting section 51b have passed since the display mode shown in Fig. 47(1).

The identification unit 51a of the dynamic image 51 shown in Fig. 47(5) has rotated 3/4 of the time from the display mode shown in Fig. 47(1). At this time, 3/4 of the rotation period of the identification unit 51a has elapsed since the display mode shown in Fig. 47(1).
Moreover, the highlighting section 51b is moved downward and its display position is switched from the display mode shown in Fig. 47(4) to the same position as in Fig. 47(4). At this time, three periods of the operation display by the highlighting section 51b have passed since the display mode shown in Fig. 47(1).

The identification unit 51a of the dynamic image 51 shown in Fig. 47(6) has rotated once relative to the display mode shown in Fig. 47(1). At this time, one rotation cycle of the identification unit 51a has elapsed since the display mode shown in Fig. 47(1).
Moreover, the highlighting section 51b is moved downward and its display position is switched from the display mode shown in Fig. 47(5) to the same position as in Fig. 47(5). At this time, four periods of the operation display by the highlighting section 51b have passed since the display mode shown in Fig. 47(1).
As described above, in the red variable image 51, the identification unit 51a rotates periodically by repeatedly displaying the display modes shown in Figures 47(2) to (6), and the highlighting unit 51b operates periodically by repeatedly displaying the display modes shown in Figures 47(2) to (3).

The red pending image 52 may also be displayed in the same manner as the red variable image 51. In this case, the distinguishing portion 51a and the highlighting portion 51b of the variable image 51 correspond to the distinguishing portion 52a and the highlighting portion 52b of the variable image 52, respectively. The distinguishing portion 52a of the pending image 52 is displayed in the same manner at the same cycle as the distinguishing portion 51a of the variable image 51. The highlighting portion 52b of the pending image 52 is displayed in the same manner at the same cycle as the highlighting portion 51b of the variable image 51.

FIG. 48 is a diagram showing the operation of the rainbow-colored fluctuating image 51.
As shown in FIG. 48(1), a rainbow-colored fluctuation image 51 is provided with a distinguishing portion 51a and an emphasizing portion 51b.
The recognition unit 51a is formed in a spherical shape. The recognition unit 51a rotates periodically in a clockwise direction. The rotation period of the recognition unit 51a is 2 seconds. However, the rotation period of the recognition unit 51a may be any time period.
The highlighting portion 51b is formed in a spherical shape smaller than the identifying portion 51a, and has a display mode different from the highlighting portion 51b of the blue fluctuation image 51, the highlighting portion 51b of the green fluctuation image 51, and the highlighting portion 51b of the red fluctuation image 51. The highlighting portion 51b periodically moves counterclockwise along the outer periphery of the identifying portion 51a. The period of movement by the highlighting portion 51b is 1 second. That is, the period of movement by the highlighting portion 51b in this embodiment is shorter than the period of rotation by the identifying portion 51a. However, the period of movement by the highlighting portion 51b may be longer than or the same as the period of rotation by the identifying portion 51a.

The identification unit 51a of the dynamic image 51 shown in Fig. 48(2) has rotated a quarter of a turn relative to the display mode shown in Fig. 48(1). At this time, a quarter of a rotation cycle of the identification unit 51a has elapsed since the display mode shown in Fig. 48(1).
The highlighting portion 51b has moved counterclockwise relative to the display mode shown in Fig. 48(1) and is now positioned below the indicator portion 51a. At this point, a half cycle of the movement of the highlighting portion 51b has elapsed since the display mode shown in Fig. 48(1).

The identification unit 51a of the dynamic image 51 shown in Fig. 48(3) has rotated half a turn relative to the display mode shown in Fig. 48(1). At this time, a half cycle of rotation by the identification unit 51a has elapsed since the display mode shown in Fig. 48(1).
Moreover, the highlighting section 51b is moved counterclockwise relative to the display mode shown in Fig. 48(2), and is thus positioned at the same position as in Fig. 48(1). At this point, one period of movement by the highlighting section 51b has elapsed since the display mode shown in Fig. 48(1).

The identification unit 51a of the dynamic image 51 shown in Fig. 48(4) has rotated 3/4 of the time from the display mode shown in Fig. 48(1). At this time, 3/4 of the rotation period of the identification unit 51a has elapsed since the display mode shown in Fig. 48(1).
Moreover, the highlighting portion 51b is moved counterclockwise relative to the display mode shown in FIG. 48(3), and is thus positioned in the same position as in FIG. 48(2).

The identification unit 51a of the dynamic image 51 shown in Fig. 48(5) has rotated once relative to the display mode shown in Fig. 48(1). At this time, one rotation cycle of the identification unit 51a has elapsed since the display mode shown in Fig. 48(1).
Moreover, the highlighting section 51b is moved counterclockwise relative to the display mode shown in Fig. 48(4), and is thus positioned at the same position as in Fig. 48(3). At this time, two periods of movement by the highlighting section 51b have passed since the display mode shown in Fig. 48(1).
As described above, in the rainbow-colored variable image 51, the identification section 51a rotates periodically by repeatedly displaying the display modes shown in Figures 48(2) to (5), and the highlighting section 51b moves periodically by repeatedly displaying the display modes shown in Figures 48(2) to (3).

The rainbow-colored reserved image 52 may also be displayed in the same manner as the rainbow-colored variable image 51. In this case, the distinguishing portion 51a and the highlighting portion 51b of the variable image 51 correspond to the distinguishing portion 52a and the highlighting portion 52b of the variable image 52, respectively. The distinguishing portion 52a of the reserved image 52 is displayed in the same manner at the same cycle as the distinguishing portion 51a of the variable image 51. The highlighting portion 52b of the reserved image 52 is displayed in the same manner at the same cycle as the highlighting portion 51b of the variable image 51.
Furthermore, the period of operation display of the variable image 51 (reserved image 52) in the normal display mode, the identification section 51a (identification section 52a) of the blue variable image 51 (reserved image 52), the identification section 51a (identification section 52a) of the green variable image 51 (reserved image 52), the identification section 51a (identification section 52a) of the red variable image 51 (reserved image 52), and the identification section 51a (identification section 52a) of the rainbow variable image 51 (reserved image 52) may be the same as or different from each other.
Furthermore, the highlighting portion 51b (highlighting portion 52b) of the blue changing image 51 (reserved image 52), the highlighting portion 51b (highlighting portion 52b) of the green changing image 51 (reserved image 52), the highlighting portion 51b (highlighting portion 52b) of the red changing image 51 (reserved image 52), and the highlighting portion 51b (highlighting portion 52b) of the rainbow changing image 51 (reserved image 52) may have the same period of operation display, or may have different periods of operation display.

(Volume and light intensity images)
Next, the volume image and the light intensity image will be described.
49 is a diagram showing the display mode of the volume image 42 in response to the player's operation of the effect key 162. In the example shown in FIG. 49, it is assumed that the variation of the special symbols is stopped (the variation effect is not being executed). Also, in FIGS. 49(1) to (8), the area in the image display section 114 where the volume image 42 is displayed and the surrounding area of this area are shown enlarged.
As shown in Figure 49 (1), a stage image 61 and decorative symbols 41 corresponding to the first stage are displayed. This stage image 61 shows "☆" marks and "◯" marks. At this time, the volume image 42 is not displayed. At this time, the volume of the sound output from the speaker 156 is set to "4."

Next, when the player presses the upper key of the effect keys 162 (see Figure 3 (b)), the volume is set to "5" (the volume increases). In this case, as shown in Figure 49 (2), a volume image 42 is displayed. This volume image 42 has a gauge portion 421, a volume identification portion 422, an object identification portion 423, a frame portion 424, and a background portion 425. At this time, a volume 5 notification sound is output from the speaker 156 to notify that the volume set in the effect control portion 300 is "5."

The gauge section 421 indicates a number recognizable to the player as the number of levels of volume set by the performance control section 300. In this embodiment, five rectangular frames are displayed as the gauge section 421, so that the player can recognize that there are five levels of volume set by the performance control section 300.
The volume identification section 422 identifies the level of volume set in the performance control section 300. The volume identification section 422 is displayed by filling the inside of the frame displayed as the gauge section 421 in black. In this embodiment, the level of volume set in the performance control section 300 is identified to the player by the number of filled-in areas as the volume identification section 422 among the frames displayed as the gauge section 421. In the example shown in the figure, all five frames of the gauge section 421 are filled in as the volume identification section 421, which allows the player to recognize that the volume set in the performance control section 300 is "5."

The object identifying section 423 identifies an object that is notified or suggested by the volume image 42. In the illustrated example, an image that resembles the speaker 156 is displayed as the object identifying section 423.
The frame portion 424 forms the outer frame of the volume image 42. The frame portion 424 is formed in a rectangular shape that extends in the vertical direction.
The background portion 425 is the background of the volume image 42. In other words, the background portion 425 is the background of the gauge portion 421, the volume identification portion 422, and the object identification portion 423 in the area surrounded by the frame portion 424.

The volume image 42 is displayed in a layer in front of the stage image 61 in the image display section 114. Therefore, the stage image 61 and the volume image 42 are displayed in an overlapping manner in the image display section 114.
In this embodiment, the volume identification portion 422 and the target identification portion 423 are displayed in a display mode with low transparency. Therefore, when the volume image 42 is displayed, the portions of the stage image 61 that overlap the volume identification portion 422 or the target identification portion 423 are difficult or impossible for the player to see.
On the other hand, the background portion 425 is displayed in a display mode with a higher transparency than the volume identification portion 422 and the target identification portion 423. Therefore, even when the volume image 42 is displayed, the portion of the stage image 61 that overlaps the background portion 425 is visible to the player. In other words, the portion of the stage image 61 that overlaps the background portion 425 is easier for the player to see than the portions of the stage image 61 that overlap the volume identification portion 422 or the target identification portion 423.

Next, when the player presses the upper key of the effect keys 162, the volume remains at "5" (the volume does not change). In this case, as shown in Figure 49 (3), the display mode of the volume identification unit 422 does not change. Also, at this time, no sound is output to notify the volume set in the effect control unit 300.
Next, when the player presses the lower key of the effect keys 162, the volume is set to "4" (the volume decreases). In this case, as shown in FIG. 49 (4), the volume identification section 422 is hidden in the uppermost frame of the gauge section 421. At this time, a volume 4 notification sound is output from the speaker 156 to notify the player that the volume set in the effect control section 300 is "4."

Next, when the player presses the lower key of the effect keys 162, the volume is set to "3." In this case, as shown in Fig. 49 (5), the volume identification section 422 is hidden in the second box from the top of the gauge section 421. At this time, a volume 3 notification sound is output from the speaker 156 to notify that the volume set in the effect control section 300 is "3."
Furthermore, in this embodiment, the inside of the frame of the gauge section 421 is displayed in a display mode with a higher transparency than the volume identification section 422 and the target identification section 423. Therefore, when the volume image 42 is displayed, the portion of the stage image 61 that is within the frame of the gauge section 421 and overlaps with a portion where the volume identification section 422 is not displayed (such as the "☆" mark in the stage image 61 shown in FIG. 49(5)) is visible to the player. In other words, the portion of the stage image 61 that is within the frame of the gauge section 421 and overlaps with a portion where the volume identification section 422 is not displayed is easier for the player to see than the portion of the stage image 61 that overlaps with the volume identification section 422 or the target identification section 423.

Next, when the player presses the lower key of the effect keys 162, the volume is set to "2." In this case, as shown in Fig. 49 (6), the volume identification section 422 is hidden in the third box from the top of the gauge section 421. At this time, a volume 2 notification sound is output from the speaker 156 to notify the player that the volume set in the effect control section 300 is "2."
Next, when the player presses the lower key of the effect keys 162, the volume is set to "1." In this case, as shown in Fig. 49 (7), the volume identification section 422 is hidden in the fourth box from the top of the gauge section 421. At this time, a volume 1 notification sound is output from the speaker 156 to notify that the volume set in the effect control section 300 is "1."
49(7), even if the player presses the lower key of the effect keys 162, the display mode of the volume identification section 422 does not change, and the volume set in the effect control section 300 remains at "1." In addition, at this time, no notification sound is output to notify the player of the volume set in the effect control section 300.

If the player does not press either the upper or lower key among the effect keys 162 within a predetermined time after pressing either the upper or lower key among the effect keys 162, the volume image 42 will be hidden, as shown in FIG. 49 (8). The predetermined time is five seconds. However, the predetermined time may be any time.
In this way, the volume image 42 is hidden when a predetermined time has elapsed since the volume image 42 was displayed, but if the effect key 162 (the upper key or the lower key) is operated again before the predetermined time has elapsed since the volume image 42 was displayed, the volume image 42 will not be hidden even if the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of display of the volume image 42. In other words, the volume image 42 will not be hidden as long as the effect key 162 (the upper key or the lower key) is operated before the predetermined time has elapsed since the most recent operation of the effect key 162 (the upper key or the lower key).

Note that, regardless of when the display of the volume image 42 begins, the display time of the volume image 42 when the effect key 162 is operated once is constant (5 seconds). In addition, regardless of when the display of the volume image 42 begins in each of the variable effect examples described below, the display time of the volume image 42 when the effect key 162 is operated once is constant (5 seconds).

In the following, when volume 1 alert sounds, volume 2 alert sounds, volume 3 alert sounds, volume 4 alert sounds, and volume 5 alert sounds are described without distinction, they may be simply referred to as volume alert sounds.
The volume 1 alert sound, volume 2 alert sound, volume 3 alert sound, volume 4 alert sound, and volume 5 alert sound may all be the same sound. In this case, each volume alert sound may be output at a volume set in the performance control unit 300. In other words, the volume 1 alert sound, volume 2 alert sound, volume 3 alert sound, volume 4 alert sound, and volume 5 alert sound may be louder the later they are in the order.
Furthermore, the volume 1 alert sound, volume 2 alert sound, volume 3 alert sound, volume 4 alert sound, and volume 5 alert sound may be different sounds from each other.
In this embodiment, the output time of the volume notification sound is 0.1 seconds, but the output time of the volume notification sound may be any time.

As described above, in this embodiment, when an upper key among the effect keys 162 is operated, the volume set in the effect control unit 300 increases, with the upper limit being volume "5." Also, when a lower key among the effect keys 162 is operated, the volume set in the effect control unit 300 decreases, with the lower limit being volume "1."
Furthermore, a volume notification sound is output when the volume set in the performance control unit 300 is changed by operating the performance key 162. On the other hand, even when the performance key 162 is operated, if the volume set in the performance control unit 300 is not changed, the volume notification sound is not output, but the volume image 42 is displayed.

50 is a diagram showing the display mode of the light intensity image 43 in response to the player's operation of the effect key 162. In the example shown in FIG. 50, it is assumed that the variation of the special symbols is stopped (the variation effect is not being executed). Also, in FIG. 50 (1) to (8), the area of the image display section 114 where the light intensity image 43 is displayed and the surrounding area of this area are shown enlarged.
As shown in Figure 50 (1), a stage image 61 and decorative pattern 41 corresponding to the first stage are displayed. At this time, the light intensity image 43 is not displayed. At this time, the light intensity set in the performance control unit 300 for the board lamp 116, frame lamp 157, movable role object 115, and performance button 161 is set to "4."

Next, when the player presses the right key of the effect key 162 (see Figure 3 (b)), the light intensity is set to "5" (the light intensity increases). In this case, as shown in Figure 50 (2), a light intensity image 43 is displayed. This light intensity image 43 has a gauge portion 431, a light intensity identification portion 432, an object identification portion 433, a frame portion 434, and a background portion 435. At this time, a light intensity 5 notification sound is output from the speaker 156 to notify that the light intensity set in the effect control portion 300 is "5."

The gauge section 431 indicates the number of light intensity levels that can be set by the performance control section 300 (a number that can be recognized by the player as the number of light intensity levels set by the performance control section 300). In this embodiment, five rectangular frames are displayed as the gauge section 431, which allows the player to recognize that there are five levels in which the light intensity can be set by the performance control section 300.
The light intensity identifying section 432 identifies the level of light intensity set in the performance control section 300. The light intensity identifying section 432 is displayed by filling the frame displayed as the gauge section 431 in brown. In this embodiment, the level of light intensity set in the performance control section 300 is identified to the player by the number of filled-in areas of the frame displayed as the gauge section 431 as light intensity identifying sections 432. In the example shown in the figure, all five frames of the gauge section 431 are filled in as light intensity identifying sections 432, which allows the player to recognize that the light intensity set in the performance control section 300 is "5" out of five levels. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 50 (1), the player presses the right key of the performance keys 162 to set the light intensity to "5."

The object identification section 433 identifies an object that is notified or suggested by the light amount image 43. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates lighting is displayed as the object identification 433.
The frame portion 434 forms the outer frame of the light quantity image 43. The frame portion 434 is formed in a rectangular shape that extends in the vertical direction.
The background portion 435 is the background of the light amount image 43. In other words, the background portion 435 is the background of the gauge portion 431, the light amount identification portion 432, and the object identification portion 433 in the area surrounded by the frame portion 434.

The light intensity image 43 is displayed in a layer in front of the stage image 61 on the image display unit 114. Therefore, the stage image 61 and the light intensity image 43 are displayed in an overlapping manner on the image display unit 114.
In this embodiment, the light amount identifying portion 432 and the target identifying portion 433 are displayed in a display mode with low transparency. Therefore, when the light amount image 43 is displayed, the portions of the stage image 61 that overlap the light amount identifying portion 432 or the target identifying portion 433 are difficult or impossible for the player to see.
On the other hand, the background portion 435 is displayed in a display mode with higher transparency than the light amount identification portion 432 and the target identification portion 433. Therefore, even when the light amount image 43 is displayed, the portion of the stage image 61 that overlaps the background portion 435 is visible to the player. In other words, the portion of the stage image 61 that overlaps the background portion 435 is easier for the player to see than the portions of the stage image 61 that overlap the light amount identification portion 432 or the target identification portion 433.

Next, when the player presses the right key of the effect keys 162, the light intensity does not change. In this case, as shown in Figure 50 (3), the display mode of the light intensity identifying unit 432 does not change. Also, at this time, the notification sound to notify the light intensity set in the effect control unit 300 is not output.
Next, when the player presses the left key of the effect keys 162, the light intensity is set to "4" (the light intensity decreases). In this case, as shown in FIG. 50 (4), the light intensity identification section 432 is hidden in the uppermost frame of the gauge section 431. At this time, a light intensity 4 notification sound is output from the speaker 156 to notify the player that the light intensity set in the effect control section 300 is "4".

Next, when the player presses the left key of the effect keys 162, the light intensity is set to "3." In this case, as shown in Figure 50 (5), the light intensity identification section 432 is hidden in the second-top frame of the gauge section 431. At this time, a light intensity 3 notification sound is output from the speaker 156 to notify that the light intensity set in the effect control section 300 is "3."

Next, when the player presses the left key of the effect keys 162, as shown in Fig. 50 (6), the light amount identifying section 432 disappears in the third box from the top of the gauge section 431. At this time, a light amount 2 notification sound is output from the speaker 156 to notify that the light amount set in the effect control section 300 is "2".
In this embodiment, the inside of the frame of the gauge section 431 is displayed in a display mode with higher transparency than the light amount indicator section 432 and the target indicator section 433. Therefore, when the light amount image 43 is displayed, the portion of the stage image 61 that is within the frame of the gauge section 431 and overlaps with a portion where the light amount indicator section 432 is not displayed (such as the "◯" mark portion of the stage image 61 shown in FIG. 50(6)) is visible to the player. In other words, the portion of the stage image 61 that is within the frame of the gauge section 431 and overlaps with a portion where the light amount indicator section 432 is not displayed is easier for the player to see than the portion of the stage image 61 that overlaps with the light amount indicator section 432 or the target indicator section 433.

Next, when the player presses the left key of the effect keys 162, the light intensity is set to "1." In this case, as shown in Figure 50 (7), the light intensity identification section 432 is hidden in the fourth box from the top of the gauge section 431. At this time, a light intensity 1 notification sound is output from the speaker 156 to notify that the light intensity set in the effect control section 300 is "1."
50(7), even if the player presses the left key of the effect keys 162, the display mode of the light amount identifying section 432 does not change, and the light amount set in the effect control section 300 remains at "1." In addition, at this time, no notification sound is output to notify the player of the light amount set in the effect control section 300.

If the player does not press either the right or left key among the effect keys 162 within a predetermined time after pressing either the right or left key among the effect keys 162, the light intensity image 43 will be hidden, as shown in FIG. 50 (8). The predetermined time is five seconds. That is, the display time of the light intensity image 43 is the same as the display time of the volume image 42. However, the display time of the light intensity image 43 may be longer or shorter than the display time of the volume image 42.
In this way, the light quantity image 43 becomes invisible when a predetermined time has elapsed since the light quantity image 43 was displayed, but if the effect key 162 (the right-side key or the left-side key) is operated again before the predetermined time has elapsed since the light quantity image 43 was displayed, the light quantity image 43 will not become invisible even if the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of display of the light quantity image 43. In other words, the light quantity image 43 will not become invisible as long as the effect key 162 (the right-side key or the left-side key) is operated before the predetermined time has elapsed since the most recent operation of the effect key 162 (the right-side key or the left-side key).

Note that, regardless of when the display of the light intensity image 43 begins, the display time of the light intensity image 43 when the effect key 162 is operated once is constant (5 seconds). In addition, regardless of when the display of the light intensity image 43 begins in each of the variable effect examples described below, the display time of the light intensity image 43 when the effect key 162 is operated once is constant (5 seconds).

Furthermore, the light intensity of the image display unit 114 (light intensity of the backlight (not shown) of the image display unit 114 ) does not change depending on the operation of the effect key 162 .
In addition, in the following, when the light quantity 1 alert sound, light quantity 2 alert sound, light quantity 3 alert sound, light quantity 4 alert sound, and light quantity 5 alert sound are described without any particular distinction, they may be simply referred to as light quantity alert sounds.
The light quantity 1 alert sound, the light quantity 2 alert sound, the light quantity 3 alert sound, the light quantity 4 alert sound, and the light quantity 5 alert sound may all be the same sound. In this case, each light quantity alert sound may be output at a volume set in the performance control unit 300.
Furthermore, the light quantity 1 notification sound, the light quantity 2 notification sound, the light quantity 3 notification sound, the light quantity 4 notification sound, and the light quantity 5 notification sound may be different sounds from each other.
Furthermore, the sound notifying the amount of light is different from the sound notifying the volume of sound.
In this embodiment, the light amount notification sound is output for 0.1 seconds, but the light amount notification sound may be output for any length of time.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the right key of the effect keys 162 is operated, the light intensity set in the effect control unit 300 increases, with the upper limit being light intensity "5." Also, when the left key of the effect keys 162 is operated, the light intensity set in the effect control unit 300 decreases, with the lower limit being light intensity "1."
Furthermore, a light intensity notification sound is output when the light intensity set in the performance control unit 300 is changed by operating the performance key 162. On the other hand, even when the performance key 162 is operated, if the light intensity set in the performance control unit 300 is not changed, the light intensity notification sound is not output, but the light intensity image 43 is displayed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 have the same display form in the first to fourth stages. More specifically, in the first to fourth stages, the gauge portion 421, volume identification portion 422, object identification portion 423, frame portion 424, and background portion 425 of the volume image 42 have the same display form. Furthermore, in the first to fourth stages, the gauge portion 431, light intensity identification portion 432, object identification portion 433, frame portion 434, and background portion 435 of the light intensity image 43 have the same display form.

FIG. 51 is a diagram showing the state when the effect key 162 is operated while the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (while the variable effect is being executed).
As shown in Figure 51 (1), as the special symbol changes, a change effect is executed, and the decorative symbol 41 changes. At this time, both the volume and the light intensity are set to "3."
In addition, when the drawing shows that the decorative pattern 41 or small pattern 56 is changing (scrolling) particularly quickly and is difficult or impossible to see, the target performance pattern is displayed with an arrow to make it easier to understand.

Next, when the player presses the lower key of the effect keys 162, the volume is set to "2" as shown in Fig. 51 (2), and the display mode of the volume image 42 (the display mode of the volume identification section 421 (see Fig. 49 (2))) is updated. At this time, however, the volume notification sound is not output.
Next, when the player presses the lower key of the effect keys 162, the volume is set to "1" and the display mode of the volume image 42 is updated, as shown in Figure 51 (3). At this time, however, no volume notification sound is output.
Next, when the player presses the left key of the effect keys 162, the light intensity is set to "2" as shown in Fig. 51 (4), and the display mode of the light intensity image 43 (the display mode of the light intensity identification section 432 (see Fig. 50 (2))) is updated. At this time, however, the light intensity notification sound is not output.
Next, when the player presses the left key of the effect keys 162, the light intensity is set to "1" and the display mode of the light intensity image 43 is updated, as shown in Figure 51 (5). At this time, however, the light intensity notification sound is not output.

Next, as shown in Figure 51 (6), when the special symbol stops, the decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped, and the variable effect ends. At this time, if the player presses the upper key or the right key of the effect key 162, the display mode of the volume image 42 and the display mode of the light intensity image 43 are both updated. Meanwhile, at this time, neither the volume notification sound nor the light intensity notification sound is output.
When the upper or lower key of the effect keys 162 is pressed while the fluctuations are stopped after the fluctuation effect has ended, the display mode of the volume image 42 is updated and a volume notification sound is output. Also, when the right or left key of the effect keys 162 is pressed while the fluctuations are stopped after the fluctuation effect has ended, the display mode of the light quantity image 43 is updated and a light quantity notification sound is output.
In this way, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 limits the output of the volume alert sound and light intensity alert sound while the variable performance is being performed and at the end of the variable performance, even if the performance key 162 is operated.

FIG. 52 is a diagram showing the display mode of the volume image and the light intensity image when the restaurant is waiting for customers.
As shown in FIG. 52(1), when the special symbol stops, the decorative symbol 41 is displayed stopped.
Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the special symbol stopped (since the variable effect ended), the machine enters a customer waiting state. In the customer waiting state, a customer waiting volume image 44, a customer waiting light intensity image 45, and a menu promotion image 46 are displayed, as shown in FIG. 52 (2).

The customer waiting volume image 44 has a larger display size than the volume image 42 and is displayed at a different position from the volume image 42. The customer waiting volume image 44 also displays a gauge portion 441, a volume identification portion 442, an object identification portion 443, an operation explanation portion 444, a frame portion 445, and a background portion 446.
The gauge portion 441 corresponds to the gauge portion 421 of the volume image 42 .
The volume identifier 442 corresponds to the volume identifier 422 of the volume image 42. In the illustrated example, the volume identifier 442 is displayed in three of the five frames in the gauge portion 441, which allows the player to recognize that the volume is "3."
The object identification portion 443 corresponds to the object identification portion 423 of the volume image 42. In the illustrated example, the object identification portion 443 is displayed as the text "volume."
The operation explanation section 444 explains the operations required to change the volume. In the illustrated example, an image resembling the effect key 162 is displayed, and the portions resembling the upper and lower keys of the effect key 162 are filled in.
The frame 445 corresponds to the frame 424 of the volume image 42 .
The background portion 446 corresponds to the background portion 425 of the volume image 42 .

The customer waiting volume image 44 is displayed in a layer in front of the stage image 61 and the decorative pattern 41 in the image display unit 114. Therefore, the stage image 61, the decorative pattern 41, and the customer waiting volume image 44 are displayed overlapping each other in the image display unit 114. On the other hand, the customer waiting volume image 44 is not displayed in an area overlapping with the display area of the reserved number display 55 and the small pattern 56.
In this embodiment, the volume identification portion 442 in the customer waiting volume image 44 is displayed in a display mode with low transparency. Therefore, when the customer waiting volume image 44 is displayed, the portions of the stage image 61 and the decorative pattern 41 that overlap the volume identification portion 442 are difficult or impossible for the player to see.
On the other hand, the inside of the frame of the gauge portion 441 and the background portion 446 are displayed in a display mode with a higher transparency than the volume identifier portion 442. Therefore, even when the customer waiting volume image 44 is displayed, the portions of the stage image 61 and the decorative pattern 41 that are within the frame of the gauge portion 441 and overlap with areas where the volume identifier portion 442 is not displayed and the portions that overlap with the background portion 446 are visible to the player. In other words, the portions of the stage image 61 and the decorative pattern 41 that are within the frame of the gauge portion 441 and overlap with areas where the volume identifier portion 442 is not displayed and the portions that overlap with the background portion 446 are easier for the player to see than the portions of the stage image 61 and the decorative pattern 41 that overlap with the volume identifier portion 442.

In this embodiment, the gauge portion 441, the volume identification portion 442, and the frame portion 445 of the customer waiting volume image 44 have shapes different from the gauge portion 421, the volume identification portion 422, and the frame portion 424 of the volume image 42, respectively.
However, the customer waiting volume image 44 may have the same display size and the same display format as the volume image 42. Furthermore, the customer waiting volume image 44 may be displayed at the same position as the volume image 42.

The customer waiting light intensity image 45 has a larger display size than the light intensity image 43 and is displayed in a different position from the light intensity image 43. The customer waiting light intensity image 45 also displays a gauge section 451, a light intensity identification section 452, an object identification section 453, an operation explanation section 454, a frame section 455, and a background section 456.
The gauge portion 451 corresponds to the gauge portion 431 of the light quantity image 43 .
The light amount identifying portions 452 correspond to the light amount identifying portions 432 of the light amount image 43. In the illustrated example, the light amount identifying portions 452 are displayed in three of the five frames in the gauge portion 451, which allows the player to recognize that the light amount is "3."
The object identification portion 453 corresponds to the object identification portion 433 of the light amount image 43. In the illustrated example, the object identification portion 453 is displayed as the text "light amount."
The operation explanation section 454 explains the operations required to change the light intensity. In the illustrated example, an image imitating the effect key 162 is displayed, and the portions imitating the right and left keys of the effect key 162 are filled in.
The frame 455 corresponds to the frame 434 of the light amount image 43 .
The background portion 456 corresponds to the background portion 435 of the light amount image 43 .

The customer waiting light intensity image 45 is displayed in a layer in front of the stage image 61 and the decorative pattern 41 in the image display unit 114. Therefore, the stage image 61 and the decorative pattern 41 are displayed overlapping the customer waiting light intensity image 45 in the image display unit 114. On the other hand, the customer waiting light intensity image 45 is not displayed in an area overlapping with the display area of the reserved number display 55 and the small pattern 56.
In this embodiment, the light intensity identification portion 452 in the customer waiting light intensity image 45 is displayed in a display mode with low transparency. Therefore, when the customer waiting light intensity image 45 is displayed, the portions of the stage image 61 and the decorative pattern 41 that overlap the light intensity identification portion 452 are difficult or impossible for the player to see.
On the other hand, the inside of the frame of the gauge section 451 and the background section 456 are displayed in a display mode with higher transparency than the light amount identification section 452. Therefore, even when the customer waiting light amount image 45 is displayed, the portions of the stage image 61 and the decorative patterns 41 that are within the frame of the gauge section 451 and overlap with areas where the light amount identification section 452 is not displayed and that overlap with the background section 456 are visible to the player. In other words, the portions of the stage image 61 and the decorative patterns 41 that are within the frame of the gauge section 451 and overlap with areas where the light amount identification section 452 is not displayed and that overlap with the background section 456 are easier for the player to see than the portions of the stage image 61 and the decorative patterns 41 that overlap with the light amount identification section 452.

In addition, in this embodiment, the gauge portion 451, the light amount identification portion 452, and the frame portion 455 of the customer waiting light amount image 45 have shapes different from the gauge portion 431, the light amount identification portion 432, and the frame portion 434 of the light amount image 43, respectively.
However, the customer waiting light intensity image 45 may have the same display size and the same display format as the light intensity image 43. Furthermore, the customer waiting light intensity image 45 may be displayed at the same position as the light intensity image 43.

The menu promotion image 46 displays an operation target identification portion 461, an operation explanation portion 462, a frame portion 463, and a background portion 464.
The operation object identification unit 461 identifies an object that needs to be operated in order to display the menu image 505. In the illustrated example, the operation object identification unit 461 displays an image that resembles the effect button 161, which is an object that needs to be operated in order to display the menu image 505.
The operation explanation section 462 explains the operations required to display the menu image 505. In the illustrated example, the operation explanation section 462 displays the text "Display menu with this operation."
The frame portion 463 forms the outer frame of the menu promotion image 46. The frame portion 463 is formed in a rectangular shape that extends in the vertical direction.
The background portion 464 is the background of the menu promotion image 46. In other words, the background portion 464 is the background of the operation object identification portion 461 and the operation explanation portion 462 in the area surrounded by the frame portion 463.

The menu promotion image 46 is displayed in a layer in front of the stage image 61 and the decorative pattern 41 in the image display unit 114. Therefore, the stage image 61, the decorative pattern 41, and the menu promotion image 46 are displayed in an overlapping manner in the image display unit 114.
In this embodiment, the operation target identifying portion 461 in the menu prompting image 46 is displayed in a display mode with low transparency. Therefore, when the menu prompting image 46 is displayed, the portions of the stage image 61 and the decorative pattern 41 that overlap the operation target identifying portion 461 are difficult or impossible for the player to see.
On the other hand, the background portion 464 is displayed in a display mode with a higher transparency than the operation object identification portion 461. Therefore, even when the menu promotion image 46 is displayed, the portions of the stage image 61 and the decorative pattern 41 that overlap the background portion 464 are visible to the player. In other words, the portions of the stage image 61 and the decorative pattern 41 that overlap the background portion 464 are easier for the player to see than the portions of the stage image 61 and the decorative pattern 41 that overlap the operation object identification portion 461.

Next, when the player presses the upper key of the effect keys 162, the volume is set to "4." In this case, as shown in Figure 52 (3), a volume identification section 442 is displayed in the second box from the top of the gauge section 441 in the customer waiting volume image 44. At this time, a volume 4 notification sound is output.
Next, when the player presses the right key of the effect keys 162, the light intensity is set to "4." In this case, as shown in Figure 52 (4), the light intensity identifying section 452 is displayed in the second frame from the top of the gauge section 451 in the customer waiting light intensity image 45. At this time, a light intensity 4 notification sound is also output.

Next, when the player presses the effect button 161, as shown in Fig. 52 (5), an operation highlighting image 465 is displayed on the menu prompting image 46. At this time, an operation notification sound is output to notify that the effect button 161 has been operated.
The operation emphasis image 465 is an image that emphasizes that the effect button 161 has been operated. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light as the operation emphasis image 465 is displayed above the operation target identification section 461.

Next, as shown in FIG. 52(6), a menu image 505 is displayed.
Next, when the player operates the effect button 161 again, the stage image 61, decorative pattern 41, customer waiting volume image 44, customer waiting light intensity image 45 and menu promotion image 46 are displayed again, as shown in Figure 52 (7).
Then, when the machine is waiting for customers and a predetermined time (e.g., 3 minutes) has elapsed without the variable effect being started and the effect key 162 and effect button 161 being operated, a demo image 506 is displayed as shown in Figure 52 (8).

In this embodiment, the customer waiting volume image 44, customer waiting light intensity image 45, and menu promotion image 46 may be displayed, but in the first to fourth stages, the customer waiting volume image 44, customer waiting light intensity image 45, and menu promotion image 46 are displayed in the same manner. More specifically, in the first to fourth stages, the gauge section 441, volume identification section 442, object identification section 443, operation explanation section 444, frame section 445, and background section 446 of the customer waiting volume image 44 are displayed in the same manner. In addition, in the first to fourth stages, the gauge section 451, light intensity identification section 452, object identification section 453, operation explanation section 454, frame section 455, and background section 456 of the customer waiting light intensity image 45 are displayed in the same manner. Furthermore, in the first to fourth stages, the operation target identification section 461, operation explanation section 462, frame section 463, background section 464, and operation emphasis image 465 are displayed in the same manner.

In this embodiment, the setting of the performance effect, i.e., the volume output from the speaker 156, is notified by displaying the volume image 42, the customer waiting volume image 44, and the output of the volume notification sound. In addition, the setting of the performance effect, i.e., the light intensity of the light emitted by the board lamp 116, the frame lamp 157, the movable role object 115, and the performance button 161, is notified by displaying the light intensity image 43, the customer waiting light intensity image 45, and the output of the light intensity notification sound.
Therefore, the display of the volume image 42, the display of the light intensity image 43, the display of the customer waiting volume image 44, the display of the customer waiting light intensity image 45, the output of the volume notification sound, and the output of the light intensity notification sound are all regarded as specific notifications related to the performance effects.

Furthermore, when the bar is waiting for customers, the bar's waiting volume image 44 and waiting light intensity image 45 continue to be displayed. Therefore, the display time of the volume image and light intensity image is longer when the bar is waiting for customers than when the bar is changing (see Figure 51 (4)).

(Modifications of Volume Image and Light Intensity Image)
Next, modified examples of the display mode of the volume image 42 and the light amount image 43 will be described.
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a display mode as a modified example of the volume image 42 and the light amount image 43.

(Variation 1)
53(1), when the lower key and the left key of the effect keys 162 are pressed during the execution of the variable effect, the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are displayed. At this time, the volume notification sound and the light intensity notification sound are not output.
In Modification 1, when the variable effect ends (the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped), the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are hidden, as shown in FIG. 53 (2). More specifically, the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are hidden when the variable effect ends (the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped), regardless of whether the display period has elapsed. Furthermore, even if the effect key 162 is operated at this time, the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are not displayed, the volume notification sound and the light intensity notification sound are not output, and neither the volume nor the light intensity is changed (adjusted).
In this way, the performance control unit 300 may limit the display of the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 by hiding the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 when the variable performance ends (the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped).

(Variation 2)
53(3), in the second modification, the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are displayed in an area overlapping with the display area of the decorative pattern 41 (left decorative pattern 41) during the execution of the variable performance, in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41. On the other hand, the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are not displayed in an area overlapping with the display area of the reserved number display 55 and the small pattern 56.
Then, when the variable effect ends (the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped), as shown in Figure 53 (4), the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are displayed in a layer behind the decorative pattern 41 in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41.
In this way, the performance control unit 300 may limit the display of the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 by changing the display layer of the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 when the variable performance ends (the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped).

(Variation 3)
In addition, in variant example 3, when the volume and light intensity are both "2", if the upper key of the effect key 162 is pressed while the variable effect is being performed, the volume image 42 is not displayed, but a volume 3 alarm sound is output, as shown in Figure 53 (5).
Next, when the variable effect ends (the decorative pattern 41 stops to be fixed), if the right key of the effect key 162 is pressed, the light quantity image 43 is not displayed, but a light quantity 3 notification sound is output, as shown in Figure 53 (6).
53(7), when the machine enters a waiting state, a waiting volume image 44, a waiting light intensity image 45, and a menu prompt image 46 are displayed. If the upper or lower key of the effect keys 162 is pressed at this time, the waiting volume image 44 is displayed and a volume alert sound is output in accordance with the updated state of the volume identification section 442. If the right or left key of the effect keys 162 is pressed, the waiting light intensity image 45 is displayed and a light intensity alert sound is output in accordance with the updated state of the light intensity identification section 452.

Furthermore, even if the right or left key of the effect keys 162 is pressed during execution of the variable effect, the light quantity image 43 is not displayed but a light quantity notification sound is output. Also, even if the upper or lower key of the effect keys 162 is pressed when the variable effect ends (the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped), the volume image 42 is not displayed but a volume notification sound is output.
In this way, in variant example 3, when the variable performance is being executed and when the variable performance ends (when the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped), the display of the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 is restricted, while the volume notification sound and the light intensity notification sound are not restricted.

(Variation 4)
53(8), in the customer waiting state, the volume image 42 is displayed instead of the customer waiting volume image 44, and the light intensity image 43 is displayed instead of the customer waiting light intensity image 45. More specifically, in the customer waiting state, the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are displayed in a larger size than when the customer waiting state is not in effect.
In this way, the display manner of the volume image and the light intensity image may be displayed in the same decorative manner regardless of whether or not the bar is waiting for customers.

In addition, if the display of the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43 and the volume and light intensity notification sounds are restricted when the variable effect ends (the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped), the timing of this restriction may be immediately before or after the variable effect ends (the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped). In other words, the display of the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43 and the volume and light intensity notification sounds may be restricted as long as it is when the variable effect ends (the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped).

Furthermore, the manner in which the volume notification sound and the light intensity notification sound are output is not limited to the above example.
When the effect key 162 is operated while the variable effect is being performed, a volume alert sound or a light intensity alert sound is output, and when the effect key 162 is operated when the variable effect has ended (the decorative pattern 41 has stopped being fixed), the volume alert sound or the light intensity alert sound may not be output. Then, when the effect key 162 is operated during a subsequent stop of the variable effect, the volume alert sound or the light intensity alert sound may be output. In other words, the timing when the volume alert sound or the light intensity alert sound is not output (is limited) when the effect key 162 is operated may be only when the variable effect has ended (the decorative pattern 41 has stopped being fixed).

In addition, in this embodiment, the display manner of the volume image and the light intensity image differs between during the variable performance and when waiting for customers, but this is not limited to this.
The display manner of the volume image and the light intensity image may be the same whether the volume is fluctuating or the waiting state. For example, the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 may be displayed in the same manner regardless of whether the volume is fluctuating or the waiting state.

Furthermore, while a variable effect is being performed, a volume notification sound may be output when the upper or lower key of the effect keys 162 is operated, while no light intensity notification sound may be output when the right or left key of the effect keys 162 is operated.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 may execute vibration performance or gimmick performance (for example, as an example of a performance in a customer waiting state) even when specific notifications (at least one of displaying the volume image 42, displaying the light intensity image 43, displaying the customer waiting volume image 44, displaying the customer waiting light intensity image 45, outputting the volume notification sound, and outputting the light intensity notification sound) by operating the performance key 162 are restricted, such as when the variable performance is not being executed (when the fluctuation is stopped).
In this case, the restriction on specific notifications can prevent players from realizing that there is a malfunction in the pachinko gaming machine 100.

(About left-handed hit notification)
Next, the left hit notification will be described. The left hit notification is a notification that encourages the player to shoot the game ball toward the left side of the game area 111. As will be described later, the left hit notification includes a first left hit notification and a second left hit notification.
54 and 55 are diagrams showing the manner of left-handed hit notification.
54(1), the decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped in association with the stopping of the special symbol. At this time, the player launches the gaming ball toward the right side of the gaming area 111.

Next, assume that three game balls enter the gate 124 located on the right side of the game area 111. In this case, the performance control unit 300 issues a first left-hit notification, as shown in FIG. 54 (2). In the first left-hit notification, a first left-hit image 47 is displayed, and a first left-hit sound is output to encourage the player to shoot the game ball toward the left side of the game area 111. An example of the first left-hit sound is a voice saying, "Please hit left."
In this embodiment, in a normal game state, the first left-hand hit notification is issued on the condition that three game balls enter the gate 124 provided on the right side of the game area 111. The first left-hand hit image 47 displays a text portion 47a, an arrow portion 47b, an emphasis portion 47c, and a background portion 47d.

The character portion 47a is a character that encourages the player to shoot the game ball toward the left side of the game area 111. In the illustrated example, the text "Hit Left" is displayed as the character portion 47a.
The arrow portion 47b indicates the direction in which the game ball is to be launched, and in the illustrated example, the arrow portion 47b points left.
The emphasis portion 47c emphasizes the encouragement to the player to launch the game ball toward the left side of the game area 111. In other words, the emphasis portion 47c emphasizes the text portion 47a. The emphasis portion 47c can also be considered to emphasize the first left-hit image 47. In the illustrated example, the image simulating light as the emphasis portion 47c is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the arrow portion 47b and on a layer in front of the arrow portion 47b.
The background portion 47d is the background behind the character portion 47a, the arrow portion 47b, and the highlight portion 47c.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54 (3), the arrow portion 47b is displayed as moving to the left. More specifically, the arrow portion 47b is displayed as moving to the left within the display area of the background portion 47d. The highlight portion 47c is displayed as moving to the left within the display area of the arrow portion 47b. Meanwhile, the character portion 47a is not displayed as moving. At this time, the first left-hit sound continues to be output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 54(4), the arrow portion 47b is displayed moving to the right within the display area of the background portion 47d, returning to the same display position as in Fig. 54(2). At this time, the highlight portion 47c is no longer displayed. At this time, the output of the first left-hit sound continues.

Next, as shown in Fig. 54 (5), the first left-hit image 47 remains stationary, and the output of the first left-hit sound ends.
After this, the effects shown in Figures 54(2) to 54(5) are performed again. After that, as shown in Figure 54(6), the first left-hit image 47 is no longer displayed.
In this way, the arrow portion 47b is displayed in motion to emphasize the arrow portion 47b (first left-hit image 47). Note that the character portion 47a may be displayed in motion without the arrow portion 47b being displayed in motion, thereby emphasizing the character portion 47a (first left-hit image 47). Alternatively, both the character portion 47a and the arrow portion 47b may be displayed in motion.

Next, the player launches the game ball toward the right side of the game area 111, and five more game balls enter the gate 124 located on the right side of the game area 111. In this case, the presentation control unit 300 issues a second left-hit notification, as shown in FIG. 54 (7). In the second left-hit notification, a second left-hit image 48 is displayed, and a left-hit warning sound is output to alert the player. Examples of the left-hit warning sound include specific sound effects such as alarms. In this embodiment, in the normal game state, after the first left-hit notification is issued, a second left-hit notification is issued on the condition that five game balls enter the gate 124 located on the right side of the game area 111. Furthermore, after the first second left-hit notification is issued, a second left-hit notification is issued each time a game ball enters the gate 124 located on the right side of the game area 111. In the illustrated example, the second left-hand hit image 48 is displayed as moving from the right side to the left side on the image display section 114 .
At this time, the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 flash in white to indicate a second left-hand hit. In the following description, when the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 are collectively described, they may be simply referred to as "lamp L."

Next, as shown in Figure 54 (8), the second left-handed hit image 48 is displayed in an operational manner so as to move further to the left on the image display unit 114, and the entire second left-handed hit image 48 is displayed. At this time, the left-handed hit warning sound continues to be output.
The second left-hand hit image 48 is larger in display size than the first left-hand hit image 47. The second left-hand hit image 48 displays a text portion 48a, an arrow portion 48b, an emphasis portion 48c, and a background portion 48d.

The text portion 48a is text that encourages the player to shoot the game ball toward the left side of the game area 111. The text portion 48a of the second left-hand hit image 48 is displayed in a larger size than the text portion 47a of the first left-hand hit image 47. In the illustrated example, the text "Hit Left" is displayed as the text portion 48a.
The arrow portion 48b is an arrow that indicates the direction in which the game ball will be launched, encouraging the player. The arrow portion 48b of the second left-hand hit image 48 is displayed larger in size than the arrow portion 47b of the first left-hand hit image 47. In the illustrated example, the arrow portion 48b is shown pointing left.
The emphasis portion 48c emphasizes the encouragement to the player to launch the game ball toward the left side of the game area 111. The emphasis portion 48c can be perceived as an image that emphasizes the arrow portion 48b. In other words, the emphasis portion 48c can be perceived as an image that emphasizes the second left-hand hit image 48. In the illustrated example, an image that resembles light as the emphasis portion 48c is displayed around the arrow portion 48b.
The background portion 48d is the background behind the character portion 48a, the arrow portion 48b, and the highlight portion 48c.

Next, as shown in Figure 55 (9), the character section 48a and the arrow section 48b are displayed so as to move leftward within the display area of the background section 48d. The highlight section 48c is displayed so as to move to the left periphery of the arrow section 48b. At this time, the left-hit warning sound is output and the lamp L continues to flash.
Next, as shown in FIG. 55 (10), the character portion 48a and the arrow portion 48b are displayed so as to move to the right within the display area of the background portion 48d, returning to the same display position as in FIG. 54 (8). At this time, the highlight portion 48c is hidden. At this time, the output of the left-hit warning sound has ended, and the output of a second left-hit sound, which encourages the player to launch the game ball toward the left side of the game area 111, begins. An example of the second left-hit sound is a sound such as "Please hit left." The second left-hit notification sound is louder than the first left-hit notification sound. More specifically, regardless of the volume setting by operating the effect key 162, the second left-hit notification sound is louder than the first left-hit notification sound.
The second left-hit alert sound may be the same as the first left-hit alert sound, or may be a different sound from the first left-hit alert sound. The second left-hit alert sound may also have the same volume as the first left-hit alert sound.

Next, the display of the second left-handed hit image 48 shown in Figure 54 (8), Figure 55 (9) and (10) is repeated twice.
55(11), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed moving to the left on the image display unit 114. At this time, the output of the second left-hit sound ends, and the output of the left-hit warning sound begins.
55(12), the second left-hand hit image 48 is displayed in such a way that it moves further to the left, and the second left-hand hit image 48 is no longer displayed. At this time, the left-hand hit warning sound continues to be output and the lamp L continues to flash.

Although not shown, after this, the display of the second left-handed hit image 48 shown in Figures 54(7) and (8), the motion display of the second left-handed hit image 48 shown in Figures 54(8), 55(9) and (10) are repeated twice, and the motion display of the second left-handed hit image 48 shown in Figures 55(11) and (12) are repeated two more times. After that, as the second left-handed hit image 48 disappears, the flashing of the lamp L stops and the second left-handed hit notification ends.
In this way, in the second left-hand hit image 48, the character portion 48a and the arrow portion 48b are displayed in motion at a specific display position, thereby emphasizing the character portion 48a and the arrow portion 48b (second left-hand hit image 48). Note that in the second left-hand hit image 48, one of the character portion 48a and the arrow portion 48b may be displayed in motion, and the other may not be displayed in motion.

In a broad sense, the left-hit warning sound can also be considered as the second left-hit sound. When describing the first left-hit sound and the second left-hit sound without making a distinction between them, they may be simply referred to as the left-hit sound.
In addition, the left hit notification (first left hit notification, second left hit notification) is executed in the same manner whether it is executed during the execution of the variable effect or during the stop of the variable effect. In addition, the left hit notification (first left hit notification, second left hit notification) is executed in the same manner in the first stage and the second stage.

Figure 56 (1) is a diagram showing the execution timing of each notification in the first left-handed hit notification, and Figure 56 (2) is a diagram showing the execution timing of each notification in the second left-handed hit notification.
In the first left-hit notification, as shown in Figure 56 (1), at time T0, the display of the text section 47a, the movement of the arrow section 47b to the left and right, the movement display of the highlight section 47c, and the output of the first left-hit sound begin.
Next, at time T1, the operational display of the highlighting section 47c ends, and the highlighting section 47c becomes invisible.
Next, at time T2, the left-right movement of the arrow portion 47b and the output of the first left-hit sound end.
Next, at time T3, the second left/right movement of the arrow portion 47b, the second movement display of the highlight portion 47c, and the second output of the first left-hit sound are started.

Next, at time T4, the operational display of the highlighting section 47c ends, and the highlighting section 47c becomes invisible.
In this way, in the first left-hand hit notification, the highlighting unit 47c displays the action twice. The highlighting unit 47c displays the action periodically, with one cycle being two seconds, which is the period from time T0 to time T3. The total execution time of the action display by the highlighting unit 47c is one second. However, the cycle and execution time of the action display by the highlighting unit 47c may be any length of time.

Next, at time T5, the left-right movement of the arrow portion 47b and the output of the first left-hit sound end.
In this way, in the first left-hand hit notification, the arrow portion 47b displays the movement twice. The movement display of the arrow portion 47b is performed periodically, with one cycle being 2 seconds, which is the period from time T0 to time T3. The total execution time of the movement display by the arrow portion 47b is 2 seconds.
In addition, in the first left-hit notification, the first left-hit sound is output twice. The time for outputting the first left-hit sound in the first left-hit notification is 2 seconds.
The period of the action display by the arrow portion 47b, the execution time of the action display, and the execution time of the output of the first left-hit sound may be any time.

Next, at time T6, the display of the character section 47a ends. The display time of the character section 47a in the first left-hand hit notification is 4 seconds. In other words, the execution time of the first left-hand hit notification is 4 seconds.
The timing of displaying the arrow portion 47b and the background portion 47d is the same as the timing of displaying the text portion 47a. The display time of the text portion 47a (the execution time of the first left-hand hit notification) may be any time.

In addition, in the second left-handed hit notification, as shown in Figure 56 (2), at time T0, the display of the character section 48a, the output of the left-handed hit warning sound, and the flashing of the lamp L begin.
Next, at time T1, the arrow portion 48b starts moving left and right and the highlight portion 48c starts moving and displaying.
Next, at time T2, the operation display of the highlighting section 48c and the output of the left-hit warning sound end.
Next, at time T3, the left-right movement of the arrow portion 48b ends and the output of the second left-hitting sound begins.

Next, at time T4, the arrow portion 48b starts to move left and right a second time, and the highlighting portion 48c starts to display the movement a second time.
Next, at time T5, the operation display of the highlighting section 48c and the output of the second left-hit sound end.
Next, at time T6, the left and right movement of the arrow portion 48b ends.
Next, at time T7, the second output of the left-hand hit warning sound is initiated.
Next, at time T8, the character portion 48a is hidden.
Next, at time T9, the output of the left-hit warning sound ends. In this way, in the second left-hit notification, the output of the left-hit warning sound is executed twice. The execution time of the output of the left-hit warning sound in the second left-hit notification is 2 seconds. However, the execution time of the output of the left-hit warning sound may be any time.

Next, at time T10, the second display of the character portion 48a begins.
Next, at time T11, the second output of the second left-hand hit sound is started.
Next, at time T12, the third left-right movement of the arrow portion 48b and the third movement display of the highlight portion 48c are started.
Next, at time T13, the operational display of the highlighting section 48c ends.

Next, at time T14, the output of the second left-hit sound ends. In this way, in the second left-hit notification, the output of the second left-hit sound is executed twice. The execution time of the output of the second left-hit sound in the second left-hit notification is 2 seconds. However, the execution time of the output of the second left-hit sound may be any time.
Next, at time T15, the left and right movement of the arrow portion 48b ends.
Next, at time T16, the fourth left-right movement of the arrow portion 48b and the fourth movement display of the highlight portion 48c are started.
Next, at time T17, the operational display of the highlighting section 48c ends.
Next, at time T18, the left and right movement of the arrow portion 48b ends.
Next, at time T19, the character portion 48a is hidden.

Next, at time T20, the third display of the character portion 48a begins.
Next, at time T21, the fifth left-right movement of the arrow portion 48b and the fifth movement display of the highlight portion 48c are started.
Next, at time T22, the operational display of the highlighting section 48c ends.
Next, at time T23, the left and right movement of the arrow portion 48b ends.
Next, at time T24, the sixth left-right movement of the arrow portion 48b and the sixth movement display of the highlight portion 48c are started.

Next, at time T25, the highlighting section 48c ends its motion display. In this way, in the second left-hit notification, the highlighting section 48c displays its motion twice each time the text section 48a is displayed. The highlighting section 48c displays its motion periodically, with one cycle being 1.5 seconds, which is the period from time T1 to time T4. The text section 48a is displayed three times in the second left-hit notification, so the highlighting section 48c displays its motion a total of six times in the second left-hit notification. The total execution time of the highlighting section 48c's motion display is three seconds. However, the cycle and execution time of the highlighting section 48c's motion display may be any length of time.

Next, at time T26, the left-right movement by the arrow section 48b ends. In this way, in the second left-hit notification, the arrow section 48b displays two movements each time the text section 48a is displayed. The movement of the arrow section 48b is displayed periodically, with one cycle being 1.5 seconds, which is the period from time T1 to time T4. The text section 48a is displayed three times in the second left-hit notification, so the movement of the arrow section 48b is displayed a total of six times in the second left-hit notification. The total execution time of the movement display by the arrow section 48b is six seconds. However, the period of the movement display by the arrow section 48b and the execution time of the movement display may be any time.

Next, at time T27, the display of the text section 48a and the blinking of the lamp L end. In this way, in the second left-hand hit notification, the text section 48a displays three times. The text section 48a is displayed periodically, with one cycle being six seconds, which is the period from time T0 to time T10. The total display time of the text section 48a is 12 seconds. In the second left-hand hit notification, the blinking of the lamp L is performed periodically, with one cycle being one second, which is the time from when the lamp L starts to emit light until it goes out and then emits light again. The total blinking time of the lamp L is 18 seconds. However, the display time of the text section 48a and the blinking time of the lamp L may be any time.
The timing at which the arrow portion 48b and the background portion 48d are displayed is the same as the timing at which the text portion 48a is displayed.

Furthermore, the notification time of each notification (display of the character portion, left/right movement of the arrow portion, display of the highlight portion, output of the left-hit sound, blinking of the lamp L) in the above-mentioned left-hit notification (first left-hit notification, second left-hit notification) may be the time from when the notification starts to when it ends. As an example, the time from time T0 (see FIG. 56(1)) when the output of the first left-hit sound starts to time T5 when the output finally ends may be set to 2 seconds, and this time may be considered to be the notification time of the first left-hit sound.
Furthermore, it has been explained that for each notification (display of the text section, left and right movement of the arrow section, display of the highlight section, output of the left-hit sound, flashing of lamp L) in the left-hit notification (first left-hit notification, second left-hit notification), there is a period from the start to the end of the notification during which the notification is not executed (for example, the period from time T2 to time T3 for the first left-hit sound), but this is not limited to this, and each notification may continue to be executed from the start to the end of the notification.

In this embodiment, when the execution conditions for a left-hit notification (first left-hit notification, second left-hit notification) are met, the game control unit 200 sends a specified command to the presentation control unit 300, and when the presentation control unit 300 receives the specified command, the presentation control unit 300 issues a left-hit notification (first left-hit notification, second left-hit notification). Therefore, if the specified command sent from the game control unit 200 when the execution conditions for a left-hit notification (first left-hit notification, second left-hit notification) are met is not properly received by the presentation control unit 300, the left-hit notification (first left-hit notification, second left-hit notification) may be restricted.

(About right-hand hit notification)
Next, the right hit notification will be described. The right hit notification is a notification that encourages the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side of the game area 111. As will be described later, the right hit notification includes a first right hit notification and a second right hit notification.
Figure 57 is a diagram showing the first right hit notification.
First, when a predetermined condition is met, a first right-hit notification is issued. The predetermined condition may be when a jackpot game (opening of a jackpot game) is being executed, or when the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a time-saving game state. Then, in the first right-hit notification, a first right-hit image 503 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 57(1). The first right-hit image 503 displays a text portion 503a, an arrow portion 503b, and a background portion 503c.

The character portion 503a is a character that encourages the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side of the game area 111. In the illustrated example, the text "Hit to the right" is displayed as the character portion 503a.
The arrow portion 503b indicates the direction in which the game ball is to be launched, and is directed to the player. In the illustrated example, the arrow portion 503b indicates a right-pointing arrow.
The background portion 503c is the background behind the character portion 503a and the arrow portion 503b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 57(2), the character portion 503a and the arrow portion 503b are displayed so as to move to the right within the display area of the background portion 503c.
Next, as shown in FIG. 57(3), the character portion 503a and the arrow portion 503b are displayed so as to move to the left within the display area of the background portion 503c, thereby returning to the same display position as in FIG. 57(1).
In this embodiment, while the first right-hit image 503 is displayed, the motion displays shown in Figures 57(1) to 57(3) are periodically performed. In this manner, the character portion 503a is displayed in motion, thereby emphasizing the character portion 503a (first right-hit image 503). Furthermore, the arrow portion 503b is displayed in motion, thereby emphasizing the arrow portion 503b (first right-hit image 503).

Figure 58 is a diagram showing the second right hit notification.
First, when the opening of the jackpot game begins, the second right hit notification is initiated. In the second right hit notification, a second right hit image 507 is displayed as shown in FIG. 58 (1). In the illustrated example, the second right hit image 507 is displayed in motion, moving from left to right on the image display unit 114, thereby starting the display of the second right hit image 507. At this time, the first right hit image 503 is also displayed. In the first right hit image 503, the motion displays shown in FIG. 57 (1) to (3) are periodically performed.
Next, the second right-hit image 507 is displayed in an operation such that it moves further to the right, and the entire second right-hit image 507 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 58 (2). The second right-hit image 507 is larger in display size than the first right-hit image 503. At this time, a right-hit sound effect is output, which is the sound effect that indicates that the second right-hit image 507 is displayed. The second right-hit image 507 displays a text portion 507a, an arrow portion 507b, an emphasis portion 507c, and a background portion 507d.

The text portion 507a is text that encourages the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side of the game area 111. The text portion 507a of the second right-hit image 507 is displayed in a larger size than the text portion 503a of the first right-hit image 503. In the illustrated example, the text "Hit Right" is displayed as the text portion 507a.
The arrow portion 507b is an arrow that indicates the direction in which the game ball will be launched, encouraging the player. The arrow portion 507b of the second right-hit image 507 is displayed larger in size than the arrow portion 503b of the first right-hit image 503. In the illustrated example, the arrow portion 507b shows an arrow pointing to the right.
The emphasis portion 507c emphasizes the encouragement to the player to launch the game ball toward the right side of the game area 111. In other words, the emphasis portion 507c emphasizes the arrow portion 507b. The emphasis portion 507c can also be regarded as an image that emphasizes the second right hit image 507 (second right hit notification). In the illustrated example, the image simulating light as the emphasis portion 507c is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the arrow portion 507b, on a layer in front of the arrow portion 507b.
The background portion 507d is the background behind the character portion 507a, the arrow portion 507b, and the highlighted portion 507c.

Next, as shown in Fig. 58(3), character portion 507a and arrow portion 507b are displayed so as to move to the right within the display area of background portion 507d. At this time, highlight portion 507c is displayed so as to move to the right within the display area of arrow portion 507b. At this time, the right-hit sound effect continues to be output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 58(4), the character portion 507a and the arrow portion 507b are displayed so as to move to the left within the display area of the background portion 507d, thereby returning to the same display position as in Fig. 58(2). At this time, the highlight portion 507c is no longer displayed. At this time, the output of the right-hit sound effect has ended, and the output of a right-hit sound that encourages the player to launch the game ball toward the right side of the game area 111 begins. An example of the right-hit sound is the voice saying, "Please hit to the right."
Next, as shown in Fig. 58(5), the output of the right-hit sound effect ends. After this, the motion display of the second right-hit image 507 shown in Fig. 58(2) to (5) is repeated twice.
Next, as shown in FIG. 58(6), the second right-hit image 507 is displayed in a manner that moves to the right.
Next, as shown in FIG. 58(7), the second right-hit image 507 is displayed in such a way that it moves to the right, and the second right-hit image 507 is no longer displayed.
In this way, the second right-hit image 507 is displayed in motion at a specific display position, thereby emphasizing the second right-hit image 507. Note that in the second right-hit image 507, one of the character portion 507a and the arrow portion 507b may be displayed in motion, and the other may not be displayed in motion.

Figure 59 is a diagram showing the display timing of each effect image in the second right hit image 507 and the output timing of the right hit sound effect and right hit sound.
First, at time T0, the display of the text portion 507a begins.
Next, at time T1, the left and right movement of the arrow portion 507b, the movement display of the highlight portion 507c, and the output of the right-hit sound effect are started.
Next, at time T2, the operational display of the highlighting portion 507c ends, and the highlighting portion 507c is no longer displayed.
Next, at time T3, the left-right movement of the arrow portion 507b and the output of the right-hit sound effect end. The execution time for the output of the right-hit sound effect is 1.5 seconds. However, the execution time for the output of the right-hit sound effect may be any time.
Next, at time T4, the output of the right-hit sound begins.

Next, at time T5, the second left-right movement of the arrow portion 507b and the second movement display of the highlight portion 507c are started.
Next, at time T6, the output of the right-hit sound ends. The execution time for outputting the right-hit sound is 0.75 seconds. However, the execution time for outputting the right-hit sound may be any time.
Next, at time T7, the operational display of the highlighting section 507c ends.
Next, at time T8, the left and right movement of the arrow portion 507b ends.
Next, at time T9, the third left-right movement of the arrow portion 507b and the third movement display of the highlight portion 507c are started.

Next, at time T10, the motion display of the highlighting unit 507c ends. In this way, the highlighting unit 507c displays the motion three times. The motion display of the highlighting unit 507c is performed periodically, with one cycle being 2 seconds, which is the period from time T1 to time T5. The total execution time of the motion display by the highlighting unit 507c is 2.25 seconds. However, the cycle and execution time of the motion display by the highlighting unit 507c may be any time.
Next, at time T11, the left-right movement of the arrow portion 507b ends. In this way, the arrow portion 507b displays the movement three times. The movement display of the arrow portion 507b is performed periodically, with one cycle being 2 seconds, which is the period from time T1 to time T5. The total execution time of the movement display by the arrow portion 507b is 4.5 seconds. However, the cycle and execution time of the movement display by the arrow portion 507b may be any time.
Next, at time T12, the text portion 507a is hidden. The display time of the text portion 507a is 7.5 seconds.
The timing of displaying the arrow portion 507b and the background portion 507d is the same as the timing of displaying the text portion 507a. The display time of the text portion 507a may be any time.

Furthermore, the execution time of each notification (the motion display of the arrow portion 507b and the motion display of the highlighting portion 507c) in the second right-hit notification described above may be the time from when the notification starts to when it ends. For example, the time from time T1 (see FIG. 59 ) when the motion display of the highlighting portion 507c starts to time T10 when the motion display ends may be set to 2.25 seconds, and this time may be considered to be the execution time of the motion display of the highlighting portion 507c.
Furthermore, it has been explained that for each notification in the second right-hit notification (the operation display of the arrow section 507b, the operation display of the highlight section 507c), there is a period from the start to the end of the notification during which the notification is not executed (for example, the period from time T2 to time T5 for the operation display of the highlight section 507c), but this is not limited to this, and each notification may continue to be executed from the start to the end of the notification.

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute the emphasis performance of the left hit notification more times than the emphasis performance of the right hit notification (for example, the emphasis portion 507c of the second right hit image 507 can be displayed three times (see Figure 59), and the emphasis portion 48c of the second left hit image 48 can be displayed six times (see Figure 56 (2))).
Therefore, the left-hand hit notification can urge the user to operate the handle 151 more strongly than the right-hand hit notification.

(Button effect execution mode)
Next, the manner in which button effects are executed will be described.
The button effects in this embodiment include button 1 effects to button 22 effects, and various effects are performed depending on the button effect being executed.
60 and 61 are diagrams showing how the first button effect to the third button effect are executed.
When the first button effect is executed, first, as shown in FIG. 60(1), a first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed. The first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41, in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41. The display time of the first precursor emphasis image 508 is 0.1 seconds. However, the display time of the first precursor emphasis image 508 may be any time.

Next, as shown in Figure 60 (2), the first button effect starts, and a button image 509 is displayed. The button image 509 displays a button portion 509a and a gauge portion 509b.
The button section 509a is an image that imitates the effect button 161. In the illustrated example, the button section 509a is displayed in a display mode that imitates the state in which the effect button 161 is not pressed.
The gauge section 509b notifies or suggests the valid operation period in the button effect. As the valid operation period in the button effect decreases (passes), the display mode of the gauge section 509b is updated, thereby notifying or suggesting the remaining valid operation period in the button effect. In this embodiment, when the display of the button image 509 starts, the entire gauge section 509b is displayed in white, but as time passes, the white display area in the gauge section 509b decreases and the black display area increases, thereby notifying or suggesting the remaining valid operation period in the button effect.

60(3), the button section 509a is displayed in an operational state so as to mimic a display state in which the effect button 161 is half-pressed. At this time, a button highlight section 509c is displayed on the button image 509.
The button highlighting section 509c emphasizes the button section 509a (button image 509). In other words, the button highlighting section 509c emphasizes the button effect. In the illustrated example, a white image simulating light as the button highlighting section 509c is displayed in an area overlapping the display area of the button section 509a in a highly transparent display mode. The display layer of the button section 509c may be the same layer as the button section 509a, or may be a layer in front of the button section 509a.

Next, as shown in Fig. 60(4), the button section 509a is displayed in an operational state so as to mimic the state in which the effect button 161 is fully pressed. Also, the button highlight section 509c is displayed in a white display state with a lower transparency than that shown in Fig. 60(3).
Next, as shown in Fig. 60(5), the button section 509a is displayed in an operational state so as to return to a display state simulating a state in which the effect button 161 is half-pressed. Also, the button highlight section 509c is displayed in a display state with the same transparency as Fig. 60(3).
60(6), the button section 509a is displayed in an operational state so as to return to a display state simulating a state in which the effect button 161 is not pressed. Also, the button highlight section 509c is hidden.

Next, as shown in Fig. 60(7), there continues a period in which the operation display of the button section 509a and the display of the button highlight section 509c are not performed. Although not shown in the figures, after this, the button image 509 is again displayed in the manner shown in Fig. 60(2) to (7).
Next, as shown in FIG. 60(8), the gauge section 509b notifies or indicates that the remaining valid operation period for the button effect has run out.
If the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period in the first button effect, the button image 509 will be hidden as shown in FIG. 61 (9).
On the other hand, when the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the first button effect, a first post-operation emphasis image 510 is displayed as shown in FIG. 61 (10). The first post-operation emphasis image 510 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41, in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41. The display time of the first post-operation emphasis image 510 is 0.2 seconds. However, the display time of the first post-operation emphasis image 510 may be any time.

Furthermore, even when the second button effect is executed, the same effect as the first button effect (the effect described above using Figures 60 (1) to (8)) is performed, and if the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period for the second button effect, the effect shown in Figure 61 (9) is performed. On the other hand, if the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period for the second button effect, a second post-operation emphasis image 511 is displayed, as shown in Figure 61 (11). The second post-operation emphasis image 511 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41, in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41. Furthermore, the display time for the second post-operation emphasis image 511 is 0.2 seconds. However, the display time for the second post-operation emphasis image 511 may be any length of time.

Furthermore, even when the third button effect is executed, the same effect as the first button effect (the effect described above using Figures 60 (1) to (8)) is performed, and if the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period for the third button effect, the effect shown in Figure 61 (9) is performed. On the other hand, if the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period for the third button effect, a third post-operation emphasis image 512 is displayed, as shown in Figure 61 (12). The third post-operation emphasis image 512 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41, in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41. Furthermore, the display time for the third post-operation emphasis image 512 is 0.2 seconds. However, the display time for the third post-operation emphasis image 512 may be any length of time.

FIG. 62 is a diagram showing the execution timing of each effect in the first button effect.
In the first button performance, first, at time T0, the display of the button section 509a (button image 509) begins.
Next, at time T1, the operation display of the button section 509a and the display of the button highlight section 509c start.
Next, at time T2, the operation display of the button section 509a ends, and the button highlighting section 509c goes invisible.
Next, at time T3, the second operation display of the button section 509a and the second display of the button highlighting section 509c are started.

Next, at time T4, the operation display of button section 509a ends and button highlighting section 509c is hidden. In this way, button section 509a displays its operation twice. The operation display of button section 509a is performed cyclically, with one cycle being 1.25 seconds, which is the period from time T1 to time T3. The total execution time of the operation display by button section 509a is 1.5 seconds. Button highlighting section 509c displays its operation twice. The display of button highlighting section 509c is performed cyclically, with one cycle being 1.25 seconds, which is the period from time T1 to time T3. The total display time of button highlighting section 509c is 1.5 seconds. However, the cycle and execution time of the operation display by button section 509a, and the cycle and display time of the display by button highlighting section 509c may be any time.

Next, at time T5, the first button effect ends (the valid operation period for the first button effect has elapsed), and button section 509a (button image 509) is hidden. The display time for button section 509a (button image 509) is 2.5 seconds. This time is the same as the execution time of the first button effect and the valid operation period for the first button effect.

The timings at which the gauge section 509b is displayed and hidden are the same as the timings at which the button section 509a is displayed and hidden. The display time of the button section 509a may be any time.
In addition, the execution timing (period, execution time) of each effect in the second button effect and the execution timing (period, execution time) of each effect in the third button effect are the same as the execution timing (period, execution time) of each effect in the first button effect described using Figure 62.
Furthermore, if the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the first button effect to the third button effect, the effect shown in Figure 62 ends at the time of operation, and an enhanced image is displayed after the operation (see Figures 61 (10) to (12)).

63 and 64 are diagrams showing how the fourth button effect is executed. In the examples shown in Fig. 63 and 64, it is assumed that the effect button 161 is operated continuously (repeatedly) during the operation valid period of the fourth button effect.
When the fourth button effect is executed, first, as shown in FIG. 63(1), the second precursor emphasis image 513 is displayed. The second precursor emphasis image 513 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41, in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41. The display time of the second precursor emphasis image 513 is 0.4 seconds. However, the display time of the second precursor emphasis image 513 may be any time.
Next, as shown in Fig. 63(2), the fourth button effect is started, and button image 509 is displayed. Button image 509 displays button portion 509a and gauge portion 509b. In the illustrated example, button portion 509a is displayed in a display mode that simulates a mode in which effect button 161 is not pressed. In addition, highlighted character 509d is displayed on button image 509.
The highlighted characters 509d are characters that emphasize the promotion of operating the effect button 161. In other words, the highlighted characters 509d are characters that highlight the button image 509 (button effect). In the illustrated example, the highlighted characters 509d display the text "Repeat!"

Next, as shown in Fig. 63(3), the button section 509a is displayed in a manner that mimics the display state of the effect button 161 being fully pressed. Also, the highlighted character 509d is displayed in a manner that moves to the left. Also, the button highlight section 509c is displayed in white.
Furthermore, when the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the fourth button effect, a first operation-in-progress highlight image 514 is displayed as shown in Fig. 63(4). The first operation-in-progress highlight image 514 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41 and in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41. At this time, the highlight character 509d is displayed as if moving to the right, returning to the same display position as in Fig. 63(2).
Next, as shown in Fig. 63(5), the first operation highlight image 514 continues to be displayed, and the highlight character 509d is displayed as if moving further to the right.
Next, as shown in Fig. 63(6), the first operation highlight image 514 is hidden. Also, the highlight character 509d is displayed so as to move to the left, returning to the same display position as in Fig. 63(2).

Next, as shown in Figure 63 (7), the button section 509a is displayed in a manner that mimics the state in which the effect button 161 is not pressed. The button highlight section 509c is hidden. The highlighted character 509d is displayed in a manner that moves to the left.
Next, as shown in Fig. 63(8), there continues a period in which the operation display of the button section 509a and the display of the button highlight section 509c are not performed. Although not shown, thereafter, the display of the button image 509 in the manner shown in Fig. 63(2) to (8) is repeated nine times.
Next, as shown in FIG. 64(9), the gauge section 509b notifies or indicates that the remaining valid operation period for the button effect has run out.
Then, as shown in FIG. 64 (10), a fourth post-operation emphasis image 515 is displayed. The fourth post-operation emphasis image 515 is displayed in an area overlapping the display area of the decorative pattern 41, in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41. The display time of the fourth post-operation emphasis image 515 is 0.3 seconds. However, the display time of the fourth post-operation emphasis image 515 may be any time.
In addition, if the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period in the fourth button effect, the first operation highlight image 514 will not be displayed.

65 and 66 are diagrams showing how the fifth button effect is executed. In the examples shown in Fig. 64 and 65, it is assumed that the operation of the effect button 161 is performed continuously (repeatedly) during the operation valid period of the fifth button effect.
When the fifth button effect is executed, first, a second precursor emphasis image 513 is displayed, as shown in Figure 65 (1).
65(2), the fifth button effect is started, and a button image 509 is displayed. A button portion 509a, a gauge portion 509b, and highlighted characters 509d are displayed on the button image 509. In the illustrated example, the button portion 509a is displayed in a manner that simulates the manner in which the effect button 161 is not pressed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 65(3), the button section 509a is displayed in a manner that mimics the display state of the effect button 161 being fully pressed. Also, the highlighted character 509d is displayed in a manner that moves to the left. Also, the button highlight section 509c is displayed in white.
Furthermore, when the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the fifth button effect, the first operation highlight image 514 is displayed as shown in Fig. 65(4). At this time, the highlight character 509d is displayed as moving to the right, returning to the same display position as in Fig. 65(2).
Next, as shown in Fig. 65(5), the first operation highlight image 514 is hidden. Also, the highlight character 509d is displayed as if moving further to the right.
Next, as shown in FIG. 65(6), the highlighted character 509d is displayed so as to move to the left, returning to the same display position as in FIG. 65(2).

Next, as shown in Figure 65 (7), the button section 509a is displayed in a manner that mimics the display state in which the effect button 161 is not pressed. Also, the button highlight section 509c is hidden. Also, the highlighted character 509d is displayed in a manner that moves to the left.
Next, as shown in Fig. 65(8), there continues a period in which the operation display of the button section 509a and the display of the button highlight section 509c are not performed. Although not shown, thereafter, the display of the button image 509 in the manner shown in Fig. 65(2) to (8) is repeated nine times.
Next, as shown in FIG. 66(9), the gauge section 509b notifies or indicates that the remaining valid operation period for the button effect has run out.
Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (10), a fifth post-operation emphasis image 516 is displayed. The fifth post-operation emphasis image 516 is displayed in an area overlapping the display area of the decorative pattern 41, in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41. The display time of the fifth post-operation emphasis image 516 is 0.3 seconds. However, the display time of the fifth post-operation emphasis image 516 may be any time.
In addition, if the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period in the fifth button effect, the first operation highlight image 514 will not be displayed.

Figure 67 is a diagram showing the execution timing of each effect in the fourth button effect and the fifth button effect. Note that the example shown in Figure 67 explains the case where the fourth button effect and the fifth button effect start at the same timing. Furthermore, when the fourth button effect and the fifth button effect start at the same timing, the display timing of the button section 509a (button image 509), the display timing of the action of the button section 509a, the display timing of the button highlighting section 509c, and the display timing of the action of the highlighted character 509d are the same in the fourth button effect and the fifth button effect.

In the fourth button performance and the fifth button performance, first, at time T0, the display of the button section 509a (button image 509) and the display of the highlighted character 509d in motion are started.
Next, at time T1, the operation display of the button section 509a and the display of the button highlight section 509c start.
Next, at time T2, the display of the first operation highlight image 514 in the fourth button performance begins.
Next, at time T3, the display of the first operation highlight image 514 in the fifth button performance begins.
Next, at time T4, the display of the first operation highlight image 514 in the fifth button performance ends.
Next, at time T5, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d ends.
Next, at time T6, the display of first operation highlight image 514 in the fourth button effect ends. That is, the display time of first operation highlight image 514 in the fourth button effect is longer than that in the fifth button effect.
Next, at time T7, the motion display of the button section 509a and the display of the button highlight section 509c end, and the second motion display of the highlighted character 509d begins.

Next, at time T8, the second operation display of the button section 509a and the second display of the button highlighting section 509c are started.
Next, at time T9, the second display of the first operation highlight image 514 in the fourth button performance begins.
Next, at time T10, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d ends.
Next, at time T11, the second display of the first operation highlight image 514 in the fifth button performance begins.
Next, at time T12, the third motion display of the highlighted character 509d starts.
Next, at time T13, the display of the first operation highlight image 514 in the fifth button performance ends.
Next, at time T14, the display of the first operation highlight image 514 in the fourth button performance ends.
Next, at time T15, the operation display of the button section 509a and the display of the button highlight section 509c end.
Next, at time T16, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d ends.

The button section 509a continues to be displayed after time T16 and is hidden when the button effects (the fourth button effect and the fifth button effect) end. The display time of the button section 509a during the fourth button effect and the fifth button effect is 6 seconds. This time is the same as the execution time of the fourth button effect and the fifth button effect and the valid operation period during the fourth button effect and the fifth button effect. However, the display time of the button section 509a during the fourth button effect and the fifth button effect may be any time.
The operation display of the button section 509a is performed periodically, with one cycle being 0.6 seconds, which corresponds to the period from time T1 to time T8. The operation display of the button section 509a is also repeated eight times after time T15, for a total of 10 times. The total execution time of the operation display of the button section 509a is four seconds. However, the execution time of the operation display of the button section 509a may be any length of time.
The button highlighting section 509c is displayed periodically, with one cycle being 0.6 seconds, which corresponds to the period from time T1 to time T8. The button highlighting section 509c is displayed eight more times after time T15, for a total of 10 times. The total display time of the button highlighting section 509c is four seconds. However, the display time of the button highlighting section 509c may be any length of time.

The motion display of the highlighted character 509d is performed periodically, with one cycle being 0.4 seconds, which corresponds to the period from time T0 to time T7. The motion display of the highlighted character 509d is also repeated 12 times after time T16, for a total of 15 times. The total execution time of the motion display of the highlighted character 509d is 4.5 seconds. However, the execution time of the motion display of the highlighted character 509d may be any length of time.
Furthermore, the display of first operation highlight image 514 in the fourth button effect is repeated eight times after time T16, for a total of 10 times. The total display time of first operation highlight image 514 in the fourth button effect is three seconds. However, the display time of first operation highlight image 514 in the fourth button effect may be any length of time.
Furthermore, the display of first operation highlight image 514 in the fifth button effect is repeated eight times after time T16, for a total of 10 times. The total display time of first operation highlight image 514 in the fifth button effect is 1.5 seconds. However, the display time of first operation highlight image 514 in the fifth button effect may be any length of time.
The timings at which the gauge section 509b is displayed and hidden are the same as the timings at which the button section 509a is displayed and hidden.

68 and 69 are diagrams showing how the sixth button effect is executed.
When the sixth button effect is executed, first, a first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed as shown in FIG. 68(1).
Next, as shown in Figure 68 (2), the sixth button effect starts, and a button image 509 is displayed. The button image 509 displays a button portion 509a and a gauge portion 509b.
68(3), the button section 509a is displayed in an operational state so as to mimic a display state in which the effect button 161 is half-pressed. At this time, the button image 509 displays a button highlight section 509c in a highly transparent white display state.
Next, as shown in Fig. 68(4), the button section 509a is displayed in an operational state so as to mimic the state in which the effect button 161 is fully pressed. Also, the button highlight section 509c is displayed in a white display state with a lower transparency than that shown in Fig. 68(3).

Next, as shown in Fig. 68(5), the button section 509a is displayed in an operational state so as to return to a display state simulating a state in which the effect button 161 is half-pressed. Also, the button highlight section 509c is displayed in a display state with the same transparency as Fig. 68(3).
68(6), the button section 509a is displayed in an operational state so as to return to a display state simulating a state in which the effect button 161 is not pressed. Also, the button highlight section 509c is hidden.
Next, as shown in Fig. 68(7), there continues a period in which the operation display of the button section 509a and the display of the button highlight section 509c are not performed. Although not shown in the figures, after this, the button image 509 is again displayed in the manner shown in Fig. 68(2) to (7).
Next, as shown in FIG. 68(8), the gauge section 509b notifies or indicates that the remaining valid operation period for the button effect has run out.

If the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period in the sixth button effect, the button image 509 will be hidden as shown in FIG. 69(9).
On the other hand, if the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the sixth button effect, a sixth post-operation emphasis image 517 is displayed as shown in FIG. 69 (10). The sixth post-operation emphasis image 517 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41, in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41. The display time of the sixth post-operation emphasis image 517 is 0.2 seconds. However, the display time of the sixth post-operation emphasis image 517 may be any time.
Furthermore, the execution timing (cycle, execution time) of each effect in the sixth button effect is the same as the execution timing (cycle, execution time) of each effect in the first button effect described using Figure 62.

70 and 71 are diagrams showing how the seventh button effect and the eighth button effect are executed.
When the seventh button effect is executed, first, a third precursor emphasis image 518 is displayed as shown in FIG. 70(1).
Next, as shown in Figure 70 (2), the third precursor-enhanced image 518 is enlarged and displayed. The display time of the third precursor-enhanced image 518 is 1.5 seconds. However, the display time of the third precursor-enhanced image 518 may be any time.
70(3), the seventh button effect is started, and a button image 509 is displayed. The button image 509 includes a button portion 509a, a gauge portion 509b, and highlighted text 509d. In the illustrated example, the highlighted text 509d reads "Make it!"

Next, as shown in Fig. 70(4), the button section 509a is displayed in a manner that simulates the effect button 161 being half-pressed. At this time, the button highlight section 509c is displayed in a highly transparent white display mode on the button image 509. The highlighted character 509d is also displayed in a manner that moves upward.
Next, as shown in Fig. 70(5), the button section 509a is displayed in a manner that mimics the state in which the effect button 161 is fully pressed. Also, the button highlight section 509c is displayed in a white display manner with a lower transparency than Fig. 70(4). Also, the highlighted character 509d is displayed in a manner that moves downward from the position shown in Fig. 70(3).
Next, as shown in Fig. 70(6), the button section 509a is displayed in a manner that returns it to a display state that simulates the effect button 161 being half-pressed. Also, the button highlight section 509c is displayed in a display state with the same transparency as Fig. 70(4). Also, the highlighted character 509d is displayed in a manner that moves it upward, thereby returning it to the display position of Fig. 70(3).

Next, as shown in Fig. 70(7), the button section 509a is displayed in a manner that returns to a display state that mimics the state in which the effect button 161 is not pressed. The button highlight section 509c is also hidden. The highlighted character 509d is also displayed in a manner that moves upward. Although not shown, the display of the button image 509 in the manner shown in Fig. 70(3) to (7) is then repeated twice.
Next, as shown in FIG. 70(8), the gauge section 509b notifies or indicates that the remaining valid operation period for the button effect has run out.
If the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period in the seventh button effect, the button image 509 will be hidden as shown in FIG. 71 (9).
On the other hand, if the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the seventh button effect, a seventh post-operation emphasis image 519 is displayed as shown in FIG. 71 (10). The seventh post-operation emphasis image 519 is displayed in a layer behind the decorative pattern 41. The display time of the seventh post-operation emphasis image 519 is 0.4 seconds. However, the display time of the seventh post-operation emphasis image 519 may be any time.

Furthermore, even when the eighth button effect is executed, the same effect as the seventh button effect (the effect described above using Figures 70 (1) to (8)) is performed, and if the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period for the eighth button effect, the effect shown in Figure 71 (9) is performed. On the other hand, if the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period for the eighth button effect, the eighth post-operation emphasis image 520 is displayed, as shown in Figure 71 (11). The eighth post-operation emphasis image 520 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41. Furthermore, the display time for the eighth post-operation emphasis image 520 is 0.5 seconds. However, the display time for the eighth post-operation emphasis image 520 may be any length of time.

FIG. 72 is a diagram showing the execution timing of each effect in the seventh button effect.
In the seventh button performance, first, at time T0, the display of the button section 509a (button image 509) and the display of the highlighted character 509d in motion are started.
Next, at time T1, the operation display of the button section 509a and the display of the button highlight section 509c start.
Next, at time T2, the operation display of the button section 509a ends, and the button highlighting section 509c goes invisible.
Next, at time T3, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d ends.
Next, at time T4, the second motion display of the highlighted character 509d starts.
Next, at time T5, the second operation display of the button section 509a and the second display of the button highlighting section 509c are started.
Next, at time T6, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d ends.
Next, at time T7, the third motion display of the highlighted character 509d starts.
Next, at time T8, the operation display of the button section 509a ends, and the button highlighting section 509c goes invisible.

Next, at time T9, the third operation display of the button section 509a and the third display of the button highlighting section 509c are started.
Next, at time T10, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d ends.
Next, at time T11, the fourth motion display of the highlighted character 509d starts.
Next, at time T12, the operation display of the button section 509a ends, and the button highlighting section 509c goes invisible.
Next, at time T13, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d ends.
Next, at time T14, the fifth motion display of the highlighted character 509d starts.
Next, at time T15, the fourth operation display of the button section 509a and the fourth display of the button highlighting section 509c are started.
Next, at time T16, with the end of the seventh button presentation (the expiration of the valid operation period for the seventh button presentation), the button section 509a (button image 509) ceases to display its motion and becomes invisible, the button highlight section 509c becomes invisible, and the motion display of the highlighted character 509d ends.

The display time of button section 509a (button image 509) in the seventh button effect is 5.5 seconds. This time is the same as the execution time of the seventh button effect and the valid operation period in the seventh button effect. However, the display time of button section 509a (button image 509) (the execution time of the seventh button effect and the valid operation period in the seventh button effect) may be any time.
In the seventh button performance, the button section 509a displays four motions. The motions of the button section 509a are displayed periodically, with one cycle being 1.6 seconds, which corresponds to the period from time T1 to time T5. The total execution time of the motions displayed by the button section 509a is 3 seconds. However, the execution time of the motions displayed by the button section 509a may be any length of time.
In the seventh button effect, the button highlighting unit 509c displays four times. The button highlighting unit 509c displays periodically, with one cycle being 1.6 seconds, which corresponds to the period from time T1 to time T5. The total execution time of the display by the button highlighting unit 509c is 3 seconds. However, the execution time of the display by the button highlighting unit 509c may be any length of time.
In the seventh button effect, the highlighted character 509d displays five motions. The motions of the highlighted character 509d are displayed periodically, with each cycle being 1.25 seconds, which corresponds to the period from time T0 to time T4. The total execution time of the motions displayed by the highlighted character 509d is 4.4 seconds. However, the execution time of the motions displayed by the highlighted character 509d may be any length of time.
The timings at which the gauge section 509b is displayed and hidden are the same as the timings at which the button section 509a is displayed and hidden.

In addition, the execution timing (cycle, execution time) of each effect in the eighth button effect is the same as the execution timing (cycle, execution time) of each effect in the seventh button effect described using Figure 72.
Furthermore, if the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the seventh button effect and the eighth button effect, the effect shown in FIG. 72 ends at the time of operation, and a post-operation highlighted image is displayed.

73 and 74 are diagrams showing how the ninth button effect is executed.
When the ninth button effect is executed, first, the third precursor emphasis image 518 is displayed as shown in Figure 73 (1).
Next, as shown in FIG. 73(2), the third precursor-enhanced image 518 is enlarged and displayed.
73(3), the ninth button effect is started, and button image 509 is displayed. Button image 509 includes a button portion 509a, a gauge portion 509b, and highlighted text 509d. In the illustrated example, the highlighted text 509d reads "Make it!"
73(4), the button section 509a is displayed in an operational state so as to mimic a display state in which the effect button 161 is half-pressed. At this time, the button image 509 has a button highlight section 509c displayed in a highly transparent red display state.
Next, as shown in Fig. 73(5), the button section 509a is displayed in a manner that mimics the state in which the effect button 161 is fully pressed. Also, the button highlight section 509c is displayed in a red display mode with a lower transparency than Fig. 73(4). Also, the highlighted character 509d is displayed in a manner that moves upward.
Next, as shown in Fig. 73(6), the button section 509a is displayed in a motion that returns to a display state that simulates the effect button 161 being half-pressed. The button highlight section 509c is displayed in a red display state with the same transparency as Fig. 73(4). The highlighted character 509d is also displayed in a motion that moves downward, returning to the display position of Fig. 73(4).

Next, as shown in Fig. 73 (7), the button section 509a is displayed in a motion to return to a display state simulating a state in which the effect button 161 is not pressed. Also, the button highlight section 509c is hidden. Also, the highlighted character 509d is displayed in a motion to move downward.
Next, as shown in Fig. 73(8), the button section 509a is displayed in a manner that mimics the appearance of the effect button 161 being half-pressed. The button highlight section 509c is displayed in a red display manner with the same transparency as in Fig. 73(4). The highlighted characters 509d are displayed in a manner that moves upward, returning to the same display position as in Fig. 73(5). Although not shown, thereafter, the button section 509a and the button highlight section 509c repeat the displays shown in Figs. 73(5) to (8), and the highlighted characters 509d repeat the displays shown in Figs. 73(3) to (8).

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(9), the gauge section 509b notifies or indicates that the remaining valid operation period for the button effect has run out.
If the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period in the ninth button effect, the button image 509 will be hidden as shown in FIG. 74 (10).
On the other hand, if the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the ninth button effect, the eighth post-operation emphasis image 520 is displayed as shown in FIG. 74 (11).

FIG. 75 is a diagram showing the execution timing of each effect in the ninth button effect.
In the ninth button performance, first, at time T0, the display of the button section 509a (button image 509) begins.
Next, at time T1, the operation display of the button section 509a and the display of the button highlight section 509c start.
Next, at time T2, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d begins.
Next, at time T3, the operation display of the button section 509a ends, and the button highlighting section 509c goes invisible.
Next, at time T4, the second operation display of the button section 509a and the second display of the button highlighting section 509c are started.
Next, at time T5, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d ends.
Next, at time T6, the second motion display of the highlighted character 509d starts.
Next, at time T7, the operation display of the button section 509a ends, and the button highlighting section 509c goes invisible.

Next, at time T8, the third operation display of the button section 509a and the third display of the button highlighting section 509c are started.
Next, at time T9, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d ends.
Next, at time T10, the third motion display of the highlighted character 509d starts.
Next, at time T11, the operation display of the button section 509a ends, and the button highlighting section 509c goes invisible.
Next, at time T12, the fourth operation display of the button section 509a and the fourth display of the button highlighting section 509c are started.
Next, at time T13, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d ends.
Next, at time T14, the fourth motion display of the highlighted character 509d starts.
Next, at time T15, the operation display of the button section 509a ends, and the button highlighting section 509c goes invisible.
Next, at time T16, the fifth operation display of the button section 509a and the fifth display of the button highlighting section 509c are started.
Next, at time T17, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d ends.
Next, at time T18, the fifth motion display of the highlighted character 509d starts.

Next, at time T19, the operation display of the button section 509a ends, and the button highlighting section 509c goes invisible.
In this way, the button section 509a performs five motion displays. The motion displays of the button section 509a are performed periodically, with one cycle being 1.1 seconds, which corresponds to the period from time T1 to time T4. The total execution time of the motion displays of the button section 509a is 4.5 seconds. However, the execution time of the motion displays of the button section 509a may be any length of time.
The button highlighting section 509c is displayed five times. The button highlighting section 509c is displayed periodically, with one cycle being 1.1 seconds, which corresponds to the period from time T1 to time T4. The total execution time for the display of the button highlighting section 509c is 4.5 seconds. However, the execution time for the display of the button highlighting section 509c may be any length of time.

Next, at time T20, as the ninth button effect ends (the valid operation period for the ninth button effect has elapsed), the button section 509a (button image 509) is hidden and the display of the highlighted character 509d ceases.
Here, the display time of button section 509a (button image 509) in the ninth button effect is 5.5 seconds. This time is the same as the execution time of the ninth button effect and the valid operation period in the ninth button effect. However, the display time of button section 509a (button image 509) (the execution time of the ninth button effect and the valid operation period in the ninth button effect) may be any time.
In the ninth button effect, the highlighted character 509d displays five motions. The motions of the highlighted character 509d are displayed periodically, with each cycle being 1.25 seconds, which corresponds to the period from time T2 to time T6. The total execution time of the motions displayed by the highlighted character 509d is 4.4 seconds. However, the execution time of the motions displayed by the highlighted character 509d may be any length of time.
Furthermore, if the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the ninth button effect, the effect shown in FIG. 75 ends at the time of operation, and a post-operation highlighted image is displayed.
The timings at which the gauge section 509b is displayed and hidden are the same as the timings at which the button section 509a is displayed and hidden.

76 and 77 are diagrams showing how the tenth button effect is executed.
When the tenth button effect is executed, first, a first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed as shown in FIG. 76(1).
76(2), the tenth button effect is started, and a button image 509 is displayed. The button image 509 includes a button portion 509a, a gauge portion 509b, and highlighted text 509d. In the illustrated example, the highlighted text 509d reads "Press it!"
Next, as shown in FIG. 76(3), the highlighted characters 509d are displayed in an enlarged manner.
Next, as shown in Fig. 76 (4), the button section 509a is displayed in a manner that simulates the effect button 161 being half-pressed. At this time, the button highlight section 509c is displayed in a highly transparent red display mode on the button image 509. The highlighted character 509d is also displayed in a manner that makes it appear even larger.

Next, as shown in Fig. 76(5), the button section 509a is displayed in a manner that mimics the state in which the effect button 161 is fully pressed. Also, the button highlight section 509c is displayed in a red display mode with a lower transparency than Fig. 76(4). Also, the highlighted character 509d is displayed in a manner that returns it to the size shown in Fig. 76(3).
Next, as shown in Fig. 76(6), the button section 509a is displayed in a manner that returns it to a display state that simulates the effect button 161 being half-pressed. The button highlight section 509c is displayed in a red display state with the same transparency as Fig. 76(4). The highlighted character 509d is displayed in a manner that returns it to the size shown in Fig. 76(2).

Next, as shown in Fig. 76(7), the button section 509a is displayed in a manner that returns to a display state that mimics the state in which the effect button 161 is not pressed. The button highlight section 509c is also hidden. The highlighted character 509d is also displayed in a manner that enlarges it to the size shown in Fig. 76(3).
Next, as shown in Fig. 76(8), the highlighted text 509d is displayed so as to expand to the size shown in Fig. 76(4). Although not shown, thereafter the button section 509a and the button highlighting section 509c repeat the displays shown in Fig. 76(2) to (8), and the highlighted text 509d repeats the displays shown in Fig. 76(5) to (8).
Next, as shown in FIG. 77(9), the gauge section 509b notifies or indicates that the remaining valid operation period for the button effect has run out.
If the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period in the tenth button effect, the button image 509 will be hidden as shown in FIG. 77 (10).
On the other hand, if the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the tenth button effect, a ninth post-operation emphasis image 521 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 77 (11). The ninth post-operation emphasis image 521 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41, in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41. The display time of the ninth post-operation emphasis image 521 is 0.5 seconds. However, the display time of the ninth post-operation emphasis image 521 may be any time.

FIG. 78 is a diagram showing the execution timing of each effect in the 10th button effect.
In the tenth button performance, first, at time T0, the display of the button section 509a (button image 509) and the display of the highlighted character 509d in motion are started.
Next, at time T1, the operation display of the button section 509a and the display of the button highlight section 509c start.
Next, at time T2, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d ends.
Next, at time T3, the operation display of the button section 509a ends, and the button highlighting section 509c goes invisible.
Next, at time T4, the second motion display of the highlighted character 509d starts.
Next, at time T5, the second operation display of the button section 509a and the second display of the button highlighting section 509c are started.
Next, at time T6, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d ends.
Next, at time T7, the third motion display of the highlighted character 509d starts.

Next, at time T8, the operation display of the button section 509a ends, and the button highlighting section 509c goes invisible.
In this way, the button section 509a performs two motion displays. The motion display of the button section 509a is performed periodically, with one cycle being 1.25 seconds, which is the period from time T1 to time T5. The total execution time of the motion display of the button section 509a is 1.5 seconds. However, the execution time of the motion display of the button section 509a may be any length of time.
The button highlighting section 509c is displayed twice. The button highlighting section 509c is displayed periodically, with one cycle being 1.25 seconds, which corresponds to the period from time T1 to time T5. The total execution time for the display of the button highlighting section 509c is 1.5 seconds. However, the execution time for the display of the button highlighting section 509c may be any length of time.

Next, at time T9, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d ends.
In this way, the highlighted character 509d displays the motion three times. The highlighted character 509d displays the motion periodically, with one cycle being 0.8 seconds, which is the period from time T0 to time T4. The total execution time of the highlighted character 509d is 2 seconds. However, the execution time of the highlighted character 509d may be any length of time.

Next, at time T10, as the tenth button effect ends (the valid operation period for the tenth button effect has elapsed), button section 509a (button image 509) is hidden. The display time of button section 509a (button image 509) in the tenth button effect is 2.5 seconds. This time is the same as the execution time of the tenth button effect and the valid operation period for the tenth button effect. However, the display time of button section 509a (button image 509) (the execution time of the tenth button effect, the valid operation period for the tenth button effect) may be any time.
Furthermore, if the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the 10th button effect, the effect shown in FIG. 78 ends at the time of operation, and the 9th post-operation emphasis image 521 is displayed.
The timings at which the gauge section 509b is displayed and hidden are the same as the timings at which the button section 509a is displayed and hidden.

79 and 80 are diagrams showing how the 11th button effects to the 15th button effects are executed.
When the 11th button effect is executed, first, a first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed as shown in FIG. 79(1).
79(2), the first button effect is started and a button image 509 is displayed. The button image 509 displays a button portion 509a and a gauge portion 509b.
79(3), the button section 509a is displayed in an operational state so as to mimic a display state in which the effect button 161 is half-pressed. At this time, the button image 509 displays a button highlight section 509c in a highly transparent white display state.
Next, as shown in Fig. 79(4), the button section 509a is displayed in an operational state so as to mimic the state in which the effect button 161 is fully pressed. Also, the button highlight section 509c is displayed in a white display state with a lower transparency than that shown in Fig. 79(3).
Next, as shown in Fig. 79(5), the button section 509a is displayed in an operational state so as to return to a display state simulating a state in which the effect button 161 is half-pressed. Also, the button highlight section 509c is displayed in a display state with the same transparency as Fig. 79(3).

79(6), the button section 509a is displayed in an operational state so as to return to a display state simulating a state in which the effect button 161 is not pressed. Also, the button highlight section 509c is hidden.
Next, as shown in Fig. 79(7), there continues a period in which the operation display of the button section 509a and the display of the button highlight section 509c are not performed. Although not shown in the figure, after this, the button image 509 is again displayed in the manner shown in Fig. 79(2) to (7).
Next, as shown in FIG. 79(8), the gauge section 509b notifies or indicates that the remaining valid operation period for the button effect has run out.
If the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period in the 11th button effect, the button image 509 will be hidden as shown in FIG. 80(9).
On the other hand, if the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the 11th button effect, the 8th post-operation emphasis image 520 is displayed as shown in FIG. 80 (10).

Furthermore, even when the 12th button effect is executed, the same effect as the 11th button effect (the effect described above using Figures 79 (1) to (8)) is performed, and if the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period for the 12th button effect, the effect shown in Figure 80 (9) is performed. On the other hand, if the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period for the 12th button effect, the 10th post-operation emphasis image 522 is displayed, as shown in Figure 80 (11). The display time for the 10th post-operation emphasis image 522 is 0.3 seconds. However, the display time for the 10th post-operation emphasis image 522 may be any length of time.

Furthermore, even when the 13th button effect is executed, the same effect as the 11th button effect (the effect described above using Figures 79 (1) to (8)) is performed, and if the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period for the 13th button effect, the effect shown in Figure 80 (9) is performed. On the other hand, if the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period for the 13th button effect, an 11th post-operation emphasis image 523 is displayed, as shown in Figure 80 (12). The display time for the 11th post-operation emphasis image 523 is 0.3 seconds. However, the display time for the 11th post-operation emphasis image 523 may be any length of time.

Furthermore, even when the 14th button effect is executed, the same effect as the 11th button effect (the effect described above using Figures 79 (1) to (8)) is performed, and if the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period for the 14th button effect, the effect shown in Figure 80 (9) is performed. On the other hand, if the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period for the 14th button effect, a 12th post-operation emphasis image 524 is displayed, as shown in Figure 80 (13). The display time for the 12th post-operation emphasis image 524 is 0.3 seconds. However, the display time for the 12th post-operation emphasis image 524 may be any length of time.

Furthermore, even when the 15th button effect is executed, the same effect as the 11th button effect (the effect described above using Figures 79 (1) to (8)) is performed, and if the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period for the 15th button effect, the effect shown in Figure 80 (9) is performed. On the other hand, if the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period for the 15th button effect, a 13th post-operation emphasis image 525 is displayed, as shown in Figure 80 (14). The display time for the 13th post-operation emphasis image 525 is 0.3 seconds. However, the display time for the 13th post-operation emphasis image 525 may be any length of time.

Furthermore, the execution timing (cycle, execution time) of each effect in the 11th button effect through the 15th button effect is the same as the execution timing (cycle, execution time) of each effect in the 1st button effect described using Figure 62.

81 and 82 are diagrams showing how the 16th button effect is executed.
When the 16th button effect is executed, first, a third precursor emphasis image 518 is displayed as shown in FIG. 81 (1).
Next, as shown in FIG. 81(2), the third precursor-enhanced image 518 is enlarged and displayed.
81(3), the sixteenth button effect is started, and a button image 509 is displayed. The button image 509 includes a button portion 509a, a gauge portion 509b, and highlighted text 509d. In the illustrated example, the highlighted text 509d reads "Make it!"
81(4), the button section 509a is displayed in an operational state so as to mimic a display state in which the effect button 161 is half-pressed. At this time, the button image 509 has a button highlight section 509c displayed in a highly transparent red display state.
Next, as shown in Fig. 81(5), the button section 509a is displayed in a manner that mimics the state in which the effect button 161 is fully pressed. Also, the button highlight section 509c is displayed in a red display manner with a lower transparency than Fig. 81(4). Also, the highlighted character 509d is displayed in a manner that moves upward.
Next, as shown in Fig. 81(6), the button section 509a is displayed in a motion that returns to a display state that simulates the effect button 161 being half-pressed. Also, the button highlight section 509c is displayed in a red display state with the same transparency as Fig. 81(4). Also, the highlighted character 509d is displayed in a motion that moves downward, thereby returning to the display position of Fig. 81(4).

Next, as shown in Fig. 81 (7), the button section 509a is displayed in a motion to return to a display state simulating a state in which the effect button 161 is not pressed. The button highlight section 509c is also hidden. The highlighted character 509d is also displayed in a motion to move downward.
Next, as shown in Fig. 81(8), the button section 509a is displayed in a manner that mimics the appearance of the effect button 161 being half-pressed. The button highlight section 509c is displayed in a red display manner with the same transparency as in Fig. 81(4). The highlighted characters 509d are displayed in a manner that moves upward, returning to the same display position as in Fig. 81(5). Although not shown, thereafter, the button section 509a and the button highlight section 509c repeat the displays shown in Figs. 81(5) to (8), and the highlighted characters 509d repeat the displays shown in Figs. 81(3) to (8).
Next, as shown in FIG. 82(9), the gauge section 509b notifies or indicates that the remaining valid operation period for the button effect has run out.
If the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period in the 16th button effect, the button image 509 will be hidden as shown in Figure 82 (10).
On the other hand, if the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the 16th button effect, a 14th post-operation highlighted image 526 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 82 (11). The display time of the 14th post-operation highlighted image 526 is 0.5 seconds. However, the display time of the 14th post-operation highlighted image 526 may be any time.
In addition, the execution timing (cycle, execution time) of each effect in the 16th button effect is the same as the execution timing (cycle, execution time) of each effect in the 9th button effect described using Figure 75.

83 and 84 are diagrams showing how the 17th button effect and the 18th button effect are executed.
When the seventeenth button effect is executed, first, as shown in FIG. 83(1), fourth precursor emphasis image 527 is displayed. The display time of fourth precursor emphasis image 527 is one second. However, the display time of fourth precursor emphasis image 527 may be any length of time.
Next, as shown in FIG. 83(2), the fourth prognostic image 527 is displayed in an enlarged manner.
83(3), the seventeenth button effect is started, and a button image 509 is displayed. The button image 509 includes a button portion 509a, a gauge portion 509b, and highlighted text 509d. In the illustrated example, the highlighted text 509d reads "Operate!"
Next, as shown in Fig. 83 (4), the button section 509a is displayed in a manner that mimics the appearance of the effect button 161 being half-pressed. At this time, the button highlight section 509c is displayed in a highly transparent white display mode on the button image 509. Also, a part of the highlight character 509d is displayed in a moving manner. More specifically, the text portion of "!" in the highlight character 509d is displayed in a moving manner so as to move clockwise around the text portion of "operation" in the highlight character 509d.
Next, as shown in Fig. 83(5), the button section 509a is displayed in an operational state so as to mimic the display state of the effect button 161 being fully pressed. Also, the button highlight section 509c is displayed in a white display state with a lower transparency than Fig. 83(3). Also, the text portion of the "!" in the highlighted character 509d is displayed in an operational state so as to move clockwise.

Next, as shown in Fig. 83(6), the button section 509a is displayed in a manner that returns it to a display state that simulates the effect button 161 being half-pressed. The button highlight section 509c is displayed in a display state with the same transparency as Fig. 83(4). The "!" text portion of the highlight character 509d is displayed in a manner that moves clockwise, and is therefore located in the same display position as Fig. 83(3).
Next, as shown in FIG. 83(7), the button section 509a is displayed in a motion to return to a display state simulating a state in which the effect button 161 is not pressed. The button highlighting section 509c is also hidden. The "!" text portion of the highlighted character 509d is displayed in a motion to move clockwise, and is thus positioned in the same display position as in FIG. 83(4). Although not shown, thereafter, the button section 509a and the button highlighting section 509c repeat the displays shown in FIGS. 83(3) to (7). The highlighted character 509d also repeats the displays shown in FIGS. 83(5) to (7).
Next, as shown in FIG. 83(8), the gauge section 509b notifies or indicates that the remaining valid operation period for the button effect has run out.

If the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period in the 17th button effect, the button image 509 will be hidden as shown in FIG. 84 (9).
On the other hand, if the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the 17th button effect, a 15th post-operation emphasis image 528 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 84 (10). The 15th post-operation emphasis image 528 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41, in a layer behind the decorative pattern 41. The display time of the 15th post-operation emphasis image 528 is 0.4 seconds. However, the display time of the 15th post-operation emphasis image 528 may be any time.

Furthermore, even when the 18th button effect is executed, the same effect as the 17th button effect (the effect described above using Figures 83 (1) to (8)) is performed, and if the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period for the 18th button effect, the effect shown in Figure 84 (9) is performed. On the other hand, if the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period for the 18th button effect, a 16th post-operation emphasis image 529 is displayed, as shown in Figure 84 (11). The 16th post-operation emphasis image 529 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41, in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41. The display time for the 16th post-operation emphasis image 529 is 0.4 seconds. However, the display time for the 16th post-operation emphasis image 529 may be any length of time.

FIG. 85 is a diagram showing the execution timing of each effect in the 17th button effect.
In the 17th button performance, first, at time T0, the display of the button section 509a (button image 509) begins.
Next, at time T1, the operation display of the button section 509a and the display of the button highlight section 509c start.
Next, at time T2, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d begins.
Next, at time T3, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d ends.
Next, at time T4, the operation display of the button section 509a ends, and the button highlighting section 509c goes invisible.
Next, at time T5, the second motion display of the highlighted character 509d starts.

Next, at time T6, the second operation display of the button section 509a and the second display of the button highlighting section 509c are started.
Next, at time T7, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d ends.
Next, at time T8, the third motion display of the highlighted character 509d starts.
Next, at time T9, the operation display of the button section 509a ends, and the button highlighting section 509c goes invisible.
Next, at time T10, the third operation display of the button section 509a and the third display of the button highlighting section 509c are started.
Next, at time T11, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d ends.
Next, at time T12, the fourth motion display of the highlighted character 509d starts.

Next, at time T13, the operation display of the button section 509a ends, and the button highlighting section 509c goes invisible.
In this way, the button section 509a performs three motion displays. The motion display of the button section 509a is performed periodically, with one cycle being 1.5 seconds, which is the period from time T1 to time T6. The total execution time of the motion display of the button section 509a is 3.3 seconds. However, the execution time of the motion display of the button section 509a may be any length of time.
The button highlighting section 509c is displayed three times. The button highlighting section 509c is displayed periodically, with one cycle being 1.5 seconds, which corresponds to the period from time T1 to time T6. The total display time of the button highlighting section 509c is 3.3 seconds. However, the display time of the button highlighting section 509c may be any length of time.

Next, at time T14, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d ends.
In this way, the highlighted character 509d displays its motion four times. The highlighted character 509d displays its motion periodically, with one cycle being 1.1 seconds, which corresponds to the period from time T2 to time T5. The total execution time of the highlighted character 509d's motion display is 3.6 seconds. However, the execution time of the highlighted character 509d's motion display may be any length of time.

Next, at time T15, as the 17th button effect ends (the valid operation period for the 17th button effect has elapsed), button section 509a (button image 509) is hidden. Button section 509a (button image 509) is displayed for 4.5 seconds. This time is the same as the execution time of the 17th button effect and the valid operation period for the 17th button effect. However, the display time of button section 509a (button image 509) (the execution time of the 17th button effect, the valid operation period for the 17th button effect) may be any time.
The timings at which the gauge section 509b is displayed and hidden are the same as the timings at which the button section 509a is displayed and hidden.
Furthermore, the execution timing (cycle, execution time) of each effect in the 18th button effect is the same as the execution timing (cycle, execution time) of each effect in the 17th button effect described using Figure 85.
Furthermore, if the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the 17th button effect and the 18th button effect, the effect shown in Figure 85 ends at the time of operation, and an enhanced image is displayed after the operation (see Figures 84 (10) and (11)).

86 and 87 are diagrams showing how the 19th button effect is executed.
When the 19th button effect is executed, first, a fourth precursor emphasis image 527 is displayed as shown in FIG. 86 (1).
Next, as shown in FIG. 86(2), the fourth precursor-emphasized image 527 is displayed in an enlarged manner.
86(3), the 19th button effect is started, and a button image 509 is displayed. The button image 509 includes a button portion 509a, a gauge portion 509b, and highlighted text 509d. In the illustrated example, the highlighted text 509d reads "You can do it!"
Next, as shown in FIG. 86(4), the highlighted character 509d is displayed in a motion such that it moves to the upper left.

Next, as shown in Fig. 86(5), the button section 509a is displayed in a manner that simulates the effect button 161 being half-pressed. Also, the button image 509 has a button highlight section 509c displayed in a highly transparent red display mode. Also, the highlighted character 509d is displayed in a manner that moves it toward the lower right, returning it to the same display position as in Fig. 86(3).
Next, as shown in Fig. 86(6), the button section 509a is displayed in a manner that mimics the state in which the effect button 161 is fully pressed. Also, the button highlight section 509c is displayed in a red display manner with a lower transparency than Fig. 86(4). Also, the highlighted character 509d is displayed in a manner that moves further to the lower right.
Next, as shown in Fig. 86(7), the button section 509a is displayed in a manner that returns it to a display state that simulates the effect button 161 being half-pressed. Also, the button highlight section 509c is displayed in a red display state with the same transparency as Fig. 86(5). Also, the highlighted character 509d is displayed in a manner that moves it to the upper left, thereby returning it to the display position of Fig. 86(5).

Next, as shown in Fig. 86(8), the button section 509a is displayed in a motion to return to a display state simulating a state in which the effect button 161 is not pressed. The button highlighting section 509c is also hidden. The highlighted characters 509d are also displayed in a motion to move to the upper left, thereby reaching the display position shown in Fig. 86(4). Although not shown, thereafter, the button section 509a and the button highlighting section 509c repeat the displays shown in Fig. 86(3) to (8), and the highlighted characters 509d repeat the displays shown in Fig. 86(5) to (8).
Next, as shown in FIG. 87(9), the gauge section 509b notifies or indicates that the remaining valid operation period for the button effect has run out.
If the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period in the 19th button effect, the button image 509 will be hidden as shown in Figure 87 (10).
On the other hand, if the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the 19th button effect, a 16th post-operation emphasis image 529 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 87 (11).

FIG. 88 is a diagram showing the execution timing of each effect in the 19th button effect.
In the 19th button performance, first, at time T0, the display of the button section 509a (button image 509) begins.
Next, at time T1, the operation of displaying the button section 509a, the operation of displaying the button highlight section 509c, and the operation of displaying the highlighted character 509d are started.
Next, at time T2, the operation display of the button section 509a ends, and the button highlighting section 509c goes invisible.
Next, at time T3, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d ends.
Next, at time T4, the second motion display of the highlighted character 509d starts.
Next, at time T5, the second operation display of the button section 509a and the second display of the button highlighting section 509c are started.
Next, at time T6, the operation display of the button section 509a ends, and the button highlighting section 509c goes invisible.
Next, at time T7, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d ends.

Next, at time T8, the third motion display of the highlighted character 509d starts.
Next, at time T9, the third operation display of the button section 509a and the third display of the button highlighting section 509c are started.
Next, at time T10, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d ends.
Next, at time T11, the fourth motion display of the highlighted character 509d starts.
Next, at time T12, the operation display of the button section 509a ends, and the button highlighting section 509c goes invisible.
Next, at time T13, the fourth operation display of the button section 509a and the fourth display of the button highlighting section 509c are started.
Next, at time T14, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d ends.
Next, at time T15, the fifth motion display of the highlighted character 509d starts.

Next, at time T16, the operation display of the button section 509a ends, and the button highlighting section 509c goes invisible.
In this way, the button section 509a performs four motion displays. The motion display of the button section 509a is performed periodically, with one cycle being 1.1 seconds, which corresponds to the period from time T1 to time T5. The total execution time of the motion display of the button section 509a is 3.2 seconds. However, the execution time of the motion display of the button section 509a may be any length of time.
The button highlighting section 509c is displayed four times. The button highlighting section 509c is displayed periodically, with one cycle being 1.1 seconds, which corresponds to the period from time T1 to time T5. The total execution time of the button highlighting section 509c is 3.2 seconds. However, the execution time of the button highlighting section 509c may be any length of time.

Next, at time T17, as the 19th button effect ends (the valid operation period for the 19th button effect has elapsed), the button section 509a (button image 509) is hidden and the display of the highlighted character 509d ceases.
Here, the display time of button section 509a (button image 509) in the 19th button effect is 4.5 seconds. This time is the same as the execution time of the 19th button effect and the valid operation period in the 19th button effect. However, the display time of button section 509a (button image 509) (the execution time of the 19th button effect and the valid operation period in the 19th button effect) may be any time.
In the 19th button effect, the highlighted character 509d displays five motions. The motions of the highlighted character 509d are displayed periodically, with one cycle being one second, which corresponds to the period from time T1 to time T4. The total execution time of the motions displayed by the highlighted character 509d is 4.2 seconds. However, the execution time of the motions displayed by the highlighted character 509d may be any length of time.
The timings at which the gauge section 509b is displayed and hidden are the same as the timings at which the button section 509a is displayed and hidden.

89 to 92 are diagrams showing how the 20th button effect is executed. In the examples shown in Fig. 89 to 92, it is assumed that the operation of the effect button 161 is continued during the operation valid period of the 20th button effect.
When the 20th button effect is executed, first, as shown in Figure 89 (1), the fifth precursor emphasis image 530 is displayed with high transparency.
Next, as shown in Figure 89 (2), a fifth precursor-enhanced image 530 is displayed with low transparency. The display time of the fifth precursor-enhanced image 530 is 0.3 seconds. However, the display time of the fifth precursor-enhanced image 530 may be any time.
89(3), the 20th button effect is started, and a button image 509 is displayed. The button image 509 includes a button portion 509a, a gauge portion 509b, and highlighted text 509d. In the illustrated example, the highlighted text 509d reads "Press as much as you want!"
Next, as shown in FIG. 89(4), the highlighted character 509d is displayed in a motion such that it moves to the upper right.
Next, as shown in Fig. 89(5), the button section 509a is displayed in a manner that mimics the display state of the effect button 161 being fully pressed. Also, a button highlight section 509c is displayed in white on the button image 509. Also, the highlighted character 509d is displayed in a manner that moves it to the lower left, returning it to the same display position as in Fig. 89(3).
Next, as shown in Fig. 89(6), the highlighted character 509d is displayed so as to move further downward to the left, and a second in-operation highlighted image 531 is also displayed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 89(7), the highlighted character 509d is displayed in such a way that it moves to the upper right side, returning to the same display position as in Fig. 89(5). Also, the second in-operation highlighted image 531 continues to be displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 89(8), the button section 509a is displayed in a motion to return to a display state simulating a state in which the effect button 161 is not pressed. The button highlighting section 509c and the second operation-in-progress highlighting image 531 are also hidden. The highlighting character 509d is displayed in a motion to move to the upper right, so that it is located in the same display position as in FIG. 89(4). Although not shown, thereafter, the button section 509a, the button highlighting section 509c, and the second operation-in-progress highlighting image 531 repeat the displays shown in FIGS. 89(3) to (8). The highlighting character 509d repeats the displays shown in FIGS. 89(5) to (8).
Next, as shown in Figure 90(9), the gauge section 509b notifies or indicates the decrease in the remaining valid operation period in the button effect. Also, the highlighted character 509d is positioned in the same display position as in Figure 89(7).

Next, as shown in Fig. 90 (10), the button section 509a is displayed in a manner that mimics the display state of the effect button 161 being fully pressed. Also, a button highlight section 509c is displayed in blue on the button image 509. Also, the highlighted character 509d is displayed in a manner that moves it to the upper right, so that it is located in the same display position as in Fig. 89 (8).
Next, as shown in Fig. 90(11), the highlighted character 509d is displayed so as to move downward to the left, and is positioned in the same position as in Fig. 90(9). Also, a second highlighted image 531 during operation is displayed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 90(12), the highlighted character 509d is displayed so as to move further to the lower left, and is thus positioned in the same position as in Fig. 89(6). Also, the second in-operation highlighted image 531 continues to be displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (13), the button section 509a is displayed in a motion to return to a display state simulating a state in which the effect button 161 is not pressed. The button highlighting section 509c and the second operation-in-progress highlighting image 531 are also hidden. The highlighting character 509d is displayed in a motion to move to the upper right, so that it is located in the same display position as in FIG. 90 (11). Although not shown, thereafter, the button section 509a, the button highlighting section 509c, and the second operation-in-progress highlighting image 531 repeat the display shown in FIGS. 90 (9) to (13). The highlighting character 509d repeats the display shown in FIGS. 90 (10) to (13).
Next, as shown in Figure 90(14), the gauge section 509b notifies or indicates the decrease in the remaining valid operation period in the button effect. Also, the highlighted character 509d is positioned in the same display position as in Figure 90(12).

Next, as shown in Fig. 90 (15), the button section 509a is displayed in an operational state so as to mimic the display state of the effect button 161 being fully pressed. Also, the button image 509 has a button highlight section 509c displayed in green. Also, a highlight character 509d is located in the same display position as in Fig. 90 (13).
Next, as shown in Fig. 90(16), the highlighted character 509d is displayed so as to move to the upper right side, and is positioned in the same display position as in Fig. 90(10). Also, a second highlighted image 531 during operation is displayed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 91 (17), the highlighted character 509d is displayed so as to move downward to the left, and is thus positioned in the same position as in Fig. 90 (15). Also, the second in-operation highlighted image 531 continues to be displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (18), the button section 509a is displayed in a motion to return to a display state simulating a state in which the effect button 161 is not pressed. The button highlighting section 509c and the second operation-in-progress highlighting image 531 are also hidden. The highlighting character 509d is also displayed in a motion to move further to the lower left, thereby being positioned in the same display position as in FIG. 90 (14). Although not shown, thereafter, the button section 509a, the button highlighting section 509c, and the second operation-in-progress highlighting image 531 repeat the displays shown in FIGS. 90 (14) to (16), 91 (17), and (18). The highlighting character 509d also repeats the displays shown in FIGS. 90 (15), (16), 91 (17), and (18).
Next, as shown in Figure 91 (19), the gauge section 509b notifies or indicates the decrease in the remaining valid operation period in the button effect. Also, the highlighted character 509d is positioned in the same display position as in Figure 90 (18).

Next, as shown in Fig. 91 (20), the button section 509a is displayed in an operational state so as to mimic the display state of the effect button 161 being fully pressed. Also, a button highlight section 509c is displayed in red on the button image 509. Also, a highlight character 509d is located in the same display position as in Fig. 91 (17).
Next, as shown in Fig. 91 (21), the highlighted character 509d is displayed so as to move downward to the left, and is positioned in the same position as in Fig. 91 (18). Also, a second highlighted image 531 during operation is displayed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 91 (22), the highlighted character 509d is displayed in such a way that it moves to the upper right side, and is located in the same display position as in Fig. 91 (20). Also, the second in-operation highlighted image 531 continues to be displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (23), the button section 509a is displayed in a motion to return to a display state simulating a state in which the effect button 161 is not pressed. The button highlighting section 509c and the second operation-in-progress highlighting image 531 are also hidden. The highlighting character 509d is also displayed in a motion to move further to the upper right, thereby being positioned in the same display position as in FIG. 90 (16). Although not shown, thereafter, the button section 509a, the button highlighting section 509c, and the second operation-in-progress highlighting image 531 repeat the displays shown in FIGS. 91 (19) to (23). The highlighting character 509d also repeats the displays shown in FIGS. 91 (20) to (23).
Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (24), the gauge section 509b notifies or indicates that the remaining valid operation period for the button effect has run out.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92 (25), a 17th post-operation emphasis image 532 is displayed. The 17th post-operation emphasis image 532 is displayed in an area overlapping the display area of the decorative pattern 41, in a layer behind the decorative pattern 41. The display time of the 17th post-operation emphasis image 532 is 0.35 seconds. However, the display time of the 17th post-operation emphasis image 532 may be any time.
In addition, if the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period in the 20th button effect, the second operation highlight image 531 will not be displayed.

93 to 96 are diagrams showing how the button 21 effect is executed. In the examples shown in Fig. 93 to 96, it is assumed that the effect button 161 is continuously operated during the operation valid period of the button 21 effect.
When the 21st button effect is executed, first, as shown in Figure 93 (1), the fifth precursor emphasis image 530 is displayed with high transparency.
Next, as shown in FIG. 93(2), a fifth precursor-enhanced image 530 is displayed with low transparency.
93(3), the 21st button effect is started, and a button image 509 is displayed. The button image 509 includes a button portion 509a, a gauge portion 509b, and highlighted text 509d. In the illustrated example, the highlighted text 509d reads "Press as much as you want!"
Next, as shown in FIG. 93(4), the highlighted character 509d is displayed in a motion such that it moves to the upper right.
Next, as shown in Fig. 93(5), the button section 509a is displayed in a manner that mimics the display state of the effect button 161 being fully pressed. Also, a button highlight section 509c is displayed in white on the button image 509. Also, the highlighted character 509d is displayed in a manner that moves it to the lower left, returning it to the same display position as in Fig. 93(3).
Next, as shown in Fig. 93(6), the highlighted character 509d is displayed so as to move further downward to the left, and a second in-operation highlighted image 531 is also displayed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 93(7), the highlighted character 509d is displayed in such a way that it moves to the upper right side, returning to the same display position as in Fig. 93(5). Also, the second in-operation highlighted image 531 is hidden.
Next, as shown in FIG. 93(8), the button section 509a is displayed in a motion to return to a display state simulating a state in which the effect button 161 is not pressed. The button highlighting section 509c is also hidden. The highlighted character 509d is also displayed in a motion to move to the upper right, so that it is located in the same display position as in FIG. 93(4). Although not shown, thereafter, the button section 509a, the button highlighting section 509c, and the second operation highlighted image 531 repeat the displays shown in FIGS. 93(3) to (8). The highlighted character 509d also repeats the displays shown in FIGS. 93(5) to (8).
Next, as shown in Figure 94(9), the gauge section 509b notifies or indicates the decrease in the remaining valid operation period in the button effect. Also, the highlighted character 509d is positioned in the same display position as in Figure 93(7).

Next, as shown in Fig. 94 (10), the button section 509a is displayed in a manner that mimics the display state of the effect button 161 being fully pressed. Also, a button highlight section 509c is displayed in blue on the button image 509. Also, the highlighted character 509d is displayed in a manner that moves to the upper right, so that it is located in the same display position as in Fig. 93 (8).
Next, as shown in Fig. 94(11), the highlighted character 509d is displayed so as to move downward to the left, and is positioned in the same position as in Fig. 94(9). Also, a second highlighted image 531 during operation is displayed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 94(12), the highlighted character 509d is displayed so as to move further to the lower left, and is positioned in the same display position as in Fig. 93(6). Also, the second highlighted image 531 during operation is hidden.
Next, as shown in FIG. 94 (13), the button section 509a is displayed in a motion to return to a display state simulating a state in which the effect button 161 is not pressed. The button highlighting section 509c is also hidden. The highlighted character 509d is also displayed in a motion to move to the upper right, so that it is located in the same display position as in FIG. 94 (11). Although not shown, thereafter, the button section 509a, the button highlighting section 509c, and the second operation highlighted image 531 repeat the display shown in FIGS. 94 (9) to (13). The highlighted character 509d also repeats the display shown in FIGS. 94 (10) to (13).
Next, as shown in Fig. 94(14), the gauge section 509b notifies or indicates the decrease in the remaining valid operation period in the button effect. Also, the highlighted character 509d is positioned in the same display position as in Fig. 94(12).

Next, as shown in Fig. 94 (15), the button section 509a is displayed in an operational state so as to mimic the display state of the effect button 161 being fully pressed. Also, a button highlight section 509c is displayed in green on the button image 509. Also, a highlight character 509d is positioned in the same display position as in Fig. 94 (13).
Next, as shown in Fig. 94(16), the highlighted character 509d is displayed so as to move to the upper right side, and is positioned in the same display position as in Fig. 94(10). Also, a second highlighted image 531 during operation is displayed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 95 (17), the highlighted character 509d is displayed so as to move downward to the left, and is positioned in the same position as in Fig. 94 (15). Also, the second highlighted image 531 during operation is hidden.
Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (18), the button section 509a is displayed in a motion to return to a display state simulating a state in which the effect button 161 is not pressed. The button highlight section 509c is also hidden. The highlighted character 509d is also displayed in a motion to move further to the lower left, thereby being positioned in the same display position as in FIG. 94 (14). Although not shown, thereafter, the button section 509a, the button highlight section 509c, and the second operation highlighted image 531 repeat the displays shown in FIGS. 94 (14) to (16), 95 (17), and (18). The highlighted character 509d also repeats the displays shown in FIGS. 94 (15), (16), 95 (17), and (18).
Next, as shown in Figure 95 (19), the gauge section 509b notifies or indicates the decrease in the remaining valid operation period in the button effect. Also, the highlighted character 509d is positioned in the same display position as in Figure 94 (18).

Next, as shown in Fig. 95 (20), the button section 509a is displayed in an operational state so as to mimic the display state of the effect button 161 being fully pressed. Also, a button highlight section 509c is displayed in red on the button image 509. Also, a highlight character 509d is located in the same display position as in Fig. 95 (17).
Next, as shown in Fig. 95 (21), the highlighted character 509d is displayed so as to move downward to the left, and is positioned in the same position as in Fig. 95 (18). Also, a second highlighted image 531 during operation is displayed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 95 (22), the highlighted character 509d is displayed so as to move to the upper right side, and is positioned in the same display position as in Fig. 95 (20). Also, the second highlighted image 531 during operation is hidden.
Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (23), the button section 509a is displayed in a motion to return to a display state simulating a state in which the effect button 161 is not pressed. The button highlighting section 509c is also hidden. The highlighted character 509d is also displayed in a motion to move further to the upper right, thereby being positioned in the same display position as in FIG. 94 (16). Although not shown, thereafter, the button section 509a, the button highlighting section 509c, and the second operation highlighted image 531 repeat the displays shown in FIGS. 95 (19) to (23). The highlighted character 509d also repeats the displays shown in FIGS. 95 (20) to (23).
Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (24), the gauge section 509b notifies or indicates that the remaining valid operation period for the button effect has run out.

96 (25), an eighteenth post-operation emphasized image 533 is displayed. The display time of the eighteenth post-operation emphasized image 533 is 0.35 seconds. However, the display time of the eighteenth post-operation emphasized image 533 may be any time.
In addition, if the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period in the 21st button effect, the second operation highlight image 531 will not be displayed.

97 is a diagram showing the execution timing of each effect in the 20th button effect and the 21st button effect. The example shown in FIG. 97 describes a case where the 20th button effect and the 21st button effect start at the same timing. Furthermore, when the 20th button effect and the 21st button effect start at the same timing, the display timing of button section 509 a (button image 509), the display timing of the action of button section 509 a, the display timing of button highlight section 509 c, and the display timing of the action of highlighted character 509 d are the same in the 20th button effect and the 21st button effect.
In the twentieth button performance and the twenty-first button performance, first, at time T0, the display of the button section 509a (button image 509) and the display of the highlighted character 509d in motion are started.
Next, at time T1, the button section 509a starts to be displayed in operation and the button highlight section 509c starts to be displayed in white.
Next, at time T2, the display of the second operation highlight image 531 in the 20th button performance begins.
Next, at time T3, the display of the second operation highlight image 531 in the 21st button performance begins.
Next, at time T4, the display of the second operation highlight image 531 in the 21st button performance ends.
Next, at time T5, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d ends.
Next, at time T6, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d begins.
Next, at time T7, the display of second operation highlight image 531 in the 20th button effect ends. That is, the display time of second operation highlight image 531 in the 20th button effect is longer than that in the 21st button effect.
Next, at time T8, the display of the operation of button section 509a and the display of button highlighting section 509c end. Although not shown, from after time T8 to time T9, the display of the operation of button section 509a, the display of button highlighting section 509c in white, the display of highlighted character 509d, the display of second operation-in-progress highlighted image 531 in the 20th button performance, and the display of second operation-in-progress highlighted image 531 in the 21st button performance are repeated. The display of the operation of button section 509a, the display of button highlighting section 509c in white, and the display of highlighted character 509d are all performed periodically.

Next, at time T9, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d begins.
Next, at time T10, the operation display of the button section 509a and the blue display of the button highlight section 509c begin.
Next, at time T11, the display of the second operation highlight image 531 in the 20th button performance begins.
Next, at time T12, the display of the second operation highlight image 531 in the 21st button performance begins.
Next, at time T13, the display of the second operation highlight image 531 in the 21st button performance ends.
Next, at time T14, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d ends.
Next, at time T15, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d starts.
Next, at time T16, the display of the second operation highlight image 531 in the 20th button performance ends.
Next, at time T17, the display of the operation of button section 509a and the display of button highlighting section 509c end. Although not shown, from after time T17 to time T18, the display of the operation of button section 509a, the display of button highlighting section 509c in blue, the display of highlighted character 509d, the display of second operation-in-progress highlighted image 531 in the 20th button performance, and the display of second operation-in-progress highlighted image 531 in the 21st button performance are all repeated. The display of the operation of button section 509a, the display of button highlighting section 509c in blue, and the display of highlighted character 509d are all performed periodically.

Next, at time T18, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d starts.
Next, at time T19, the operation display of the button section 509a and the green display of the button highlight section 509c begin.
Next, at time T20, the display of the second operation highlight image 531 in the 20th button performance begins.
Next, at time T21, the display of the second operation highlight image 531 in the 21st button performance begins.
Next, at time T22, the display of the second operation highlight image 531 in the 21st button performance ends.
Next, at time T23, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d ends.
Next, at time T24, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d starts.
Next, at time T25, the display of the second operation highlight image 531 in the 20th button performance ends.
Next, at time T26, the display of the operation of button section 509a and the display of button highlighting section 509c end. Although not shown, from after time T26 to time T27, the display of the operation of button section 509a, the display of button highlighting section 509c in green, the display of highlighted character 509d, the display of second operation-in-progress highlighted image 531 in the 20th button performance, and the display of second operation-in-progress highlighted image 531 in the 21st button performance are repeated. The display of the operation of button section 509a, the display of button highlighting section 509c in green, and the display of highlighted character 509d are all performed periodically.

Next, at time T27, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d starts.
Next, at time T28, the button section 509a starts to be displayed in operation and the button highlight section 509c starts to be displayed in red.
Next, at time T29, the display of the second operation highlight image 531 in the 20th button performance begins.
Next, at time T30, the display of the second operation highlight image 531 in the 21st button performance begins.
Next, at time T31, the display of the second operation highlight image 531 in the 21st button performance ends.
Next, at time T32, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d ends.
Next, at time T33, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d starts.
Next, at time T34, the display of the second operation highlight image 531 in the 20th button performance ends.
Next, at time T35, the display of the operation of button section 509a and the display of button highlight section 509c end. Although not shown, from time T35 until the end of the button effects, the display of the operation of button section 509a, the display of button highlight section 509c in red, the display of highlighted character 509d, the display of second operation-in-progress highlighted image 531 in the 20th button effect, and the display of second operation-in-progress highlighted image 531 in the 21st button effect are repeated. The display of the operation of button section 509a, the display of button highlight section 509c in red, and the display of highlighted character 509d are all performed periodically.

Here, the display time of button section 509a (button image 509) in the 20th button effect and the 21st button effect is 7 seconds. This time is the same as the execution time of the 20th button effect and the 21st button effect and the valid operation period in the 20th button effect and the 21st button effect. However, the display time of button section 509a (button image 509) (the execution time of the 20th button effect and the 21st button effect and the valid operation period in the 20th button effect and the 21st button effect) may be any time.
The button section 509a displays its movements periodically, with one cycle being 0.5 seconds. The total execution time of the button section 509a's movements in the 20th and 21st button effects is 6.3 seconds. However, the execution time of the button section 509a's movements in the 20th and 21st button effects may be any length of time.
The white, blue, green, and red display of button highlighting section 509c are all performed periodically, with one cycle being 0.5 seconds. The total display time of button highlighting section 509c in the 20th and 21st button effects is 6.3 seconds. However, the display time of button highlighting section 509c in the 20th and 21st button effects may be any length of time.

The motion display of highlighted character 509d is performed periodically, with one cycle being 0.35 seconds. The total execution time of the motion display of highlighted character 509d in the 20th button effect and the 21st button effect is 6.6 seconds. However, the execution time of the motion display of highlighted character 509d in the 20th button effect and the 21st button effect may be any length of time.
Furthermore, the display time of second operating highlight image 531 in the 20th button effect is 5.6 seconds. However, the display time of second operating highlight image 531 in the 20th button effect may be any time.
Furthermore, the display time of second operating highlight image 531 in the 21st button effect is 2.8 seconds. However, the display time of second operating highlight image 531 in the 21st button effect may be any time.
The timings at which the gauge section 509b is displayed and hidden are the same as the timings at which the button section 509a is displayed and hidden.
In addition, in the 20th button performance and the 21st button performance, the gauge section 509b may not be displayed.

98 and 99 are diagrams showing how the 22nd button effect is executed.
When the 22nd button effect is executed, first, as shown in Figure 98 (1), the 6th precursor emphasis image 534 is displayed in a highly transparent display mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 98(2), the sixth prognostic image 534 is displayed in an enlarged manner.
Next, as shown in Figure 98 (3), a sixth precursor-emphasized image 534 is displayed in a display mode with lower transparency than that of Figure 98 (2). The display time of the sixth precursor-emphasized image 534 is 1.25 seconds. However, the display time of the sixth precursor-emphasized image 534 may be any time.

98(4), the 22nd button effect is started, and a button image 509 is displayed. A button portion 509a, a gauge portion 509b, and highlighted text 509d are displayed on the button image 509. The button portion 509a in the 22nd button effect is displayed larger than the button portions 509a in the 1st through 21st button effects.
Moreover, the button highlighting section 509c is displayed in rainbow colors. More specifically, the button highlighting section 509c is divided into seven areas of different heights, and the areas are displayed in red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple in that order from the top, so that the entire button highlighting section 509c is displayed in a rainbow-colored visual appearance.
In addition, highlighted text 509d displays seven characters of text, "Congratulations!", in rainbow colors. More specifically, the seven characters of highlighted text 509d are displayed one by one in the colors red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple from the left, so that highlighted text 509d as a whole is displayed in a rainbow-colored visual appearance.

98(5), seven characters that are highlighted 509d are displayed one by one in purple, red, orange, yellow, green, blue, and indigo from the left. That is, the highlighting section 509c is displayed so that the display color of the seven characters changes.
Next, as shown in Fig. 98(6), the button section 509a is displayed in a manner that simulates the effect button 161 being pressed one-quarter way. The button highlight section 509c is displayed in a manner that displays the colors purple, red, orange, yellow, green, blue, and indigo in order from the top. The seven characters that make up the highlighted characters 509d are displayed in a manner that displays the colors indigo, purple, red, orange, yellow, green, and blue one by one from the left.

98(7), the button section 509a is displayed in a manner that simulates the effect button 161 being half-pressed. The button highlight section 509c is displayed in the colors indigo, purple, red, orange, yellow, green, and blue, starting from the top. The seven characters of the highlighted characters 509d are displayed in the colors blue, indigo, purple, red, orange, yellow, and green, starting from the left.
98(8), the button section 509a is displayed in a manner that mimics the display of the effect button 161 being fully pressed. The button highlight section 509c is displayed in a manner that displays the colors blue, indigo, purple, red, orange, yellow, and green in order from the top. The seven characters of the highlighted characters 509d are displayed in a manner that displays the colors green, blue, indigo, purple, red, orange, and yellow one by one from the left.

99(9), the button section 509a is displayed in a manner that returns the display state to one that simulates the effect button 161 being half-pressed. The button highlight section 509c is displayed in a manner that displays the colors green, blue, indigo, purple, red, orange, and yellow in order from the top. The seven characters that make up the highlighted characters 509d are displayed in a manner that displays the colors yellow, green, blue, indigo, purple, red, and orange, one by one, from the left.
Next, as shown in Figure 99 (10), the button section 509a is displayed in a manner that returns to a display state that simulates the effect button 161 being pressed one-quarter. The button highlight section 509c is displayed in a manner that displays the colors yellow, green, blue, indigo, purple, red, and orange in order from the top. The seven characters that make up the highlighted characters 509d are displayed in a manner that displays the colors orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, purple, and red one by one from the left.

Next, as shown in Figure 99 (11), the button section 509a is displayed in a manner that returns to a display state that simulates the state in which the effect button 161 is not pressed. The button highlight section 509c is displayed in a manner that displays the colors orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, purple, and red, starting from the top. The seven characters of the highlighted characters 509d are displayed in a manner that displays the colors red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple, starting from the left, one by one, in the same colors as those shown in Figure 98 (4). Although not shown, the button section 509a, the button highlight section 509c, and the highlighted characters 509d then repeat the displays shown in Figures 98 (5) to (8) and 99 (9) to (11).
Next, as shown in FIG. 99(12), the gauge section 509b notifies or indicates that the remaining valid operation period for the button effect has run out.
If the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period in the 22nd button effect, the button image 509 will be hidden as shown in Figure 99 (13).
On the other hand, if the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the 22nd button effect, a 19th post-operation emphasis image 535 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 99 (14).

Figure 100 is a diagram showing the execution timing of each effect in the 22nd button effect.
In the 22nd button performance, first, at time T0, the display of the button section 509a (button image 509) begins.
Next, at time T1, the display of the highlighted characters 509d starts, and the change in the display mode of the highlighted characters 509d (moving display) also starts. The change in the display mode of the highlighted characters 509d (moving display) is performed periodically.
Next, at time T2, the operational display of button section 509a is started. Also, the display of button highlighting section 509c is started, and the change in the display mode of button highlighting section 509c (operational display) is started. The operational display of button section 509a and the change in the display mode of button highlighting section 509c (operational display) are periodically performed.
Next, at time T3, one cycle has passed since the change in the display mode of the highlighted characters 509d (moving display) started, and the change in the display mode of the highlighted characters 509d (moving display) for the second cycle starts.

Next, at time T4, one cycle has elapsed since the operation display of the button section 509a and the change in the display mode (operation display) of the button highlight section 509c began, and the operation display of the button section 509a and the change in the display mode (operation display) of the button highlight section 509c for the second cycle begins.
Next, at time T5, two periods have passed since the change in the display mode of the highlighted characters 509d (moving display) started, and the change in the display mode of the highlighted characters 509d (moving display) for the third period starts.
Next, at time T6, two cycles have passed since the operation display of the button section 509a and the change in the display mode (operation display) of the button highlight section 509c began, and the operation display of the button section 509a and the change in the display mode (operation display) of the button highlight section 509c for the third cycle begin.

Next, at time T7, with the end of the 22nd button presentation (the expiration of the valid operation period in the 22nd button presentation), the button section 509a (button image 509) becomes hidden, and the operation display of the button section 509a, the change in the display mode of the button highlight section 509c (operation display), and the change in the display mode of the highlighted character 509d (operation display) end.
Here, the display time of button section 509a (button image 509) in the 22nd button effect is 4.5 seconds. This time is the same as the execution time of the 22nd button effect and the valid operation period in the 22nd button effect. However, the display time of button section 509a (button image 509) (the execution time of the 22nd button effect and the valid operation period in the 22nd button effect) may be any time.

The button section 509a periodically displays an operation, with one cycle being 1.4 seconds, which corresponds to the period from time T2 to time T4. The total execution time of the operation display of the button section 509a is 3.5 seconds. However, the execution time of the operation display of the button section 509a may be any length of time.
The button highlighting unit 509c periodically changes the display mode (operational display) with one cycle being 1.4 seconds, which corresponds to the period from time T2 to time T4. The total execution time of the display mode change (operational display) of the button highlighting unit 509c is 3.5 seconds. However, the execution time of the display mode change (operational display) of the button highlighting unit 509c may be any length of time.
The highlighted character 509d periodically changes its display mode (movement display) with one cycle being 1.2 seconds, which corresponds to the period from time T1 to time T3. The total execution time of the change in display mode (movement display) of the highlighted character 509d is 3.8 seconds. However, the execution time of the change in display mode (movement display) of the highlighted character 509d may be any length of time.
The timings at which the gauge section 509b is displayed and hidden are the same as the timings at which the button section 509a is displayed and hidden.

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 displays the button unit 509a in operation in each button performance in a display mode that mimics the mode in which the performance button 161 alternates (periodically) between an operated state and a not-operated state.
In this case, in the button effect, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that he should operate the effect button 161. Also, since the operation display of the button section 509a is repeated, even if the player misses part of the operation display of the button section 509a, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that he should operate the effect button 161.

In this embodiment, the expectation of a jackpot game being executed varies depending on the button effect that is executed. More specifically, the jackpot game is more likely to be executed (higher expectation) when the 8th button effect and the 11th button effect are executed than when the 1st button effect through the 7th button effect and the 12th button effect through the 15th button effect are executed. Also, the 5th button effect is more likely to be executed (higher expectation) when the 4th button effect is executed.
Furthermore, the ninth, tenth, and sixteenth button effects are more likely to result in a jackpot game (higher expectations) than the first through eighth button effects and the twelfth through fifteenth button effects. In other words, the button effect in which the button highlighting section 509c is displayed in red (see FIG. 73(5) and the like) is more likely to result in a jackpot game (higher expectations) than the button effect in which the button highlighting section 509c is displayed in white (see FIG. 60(4) and the like).
Furthermore, when the ninth button effect and the sixteenth button effect are performed, a jackpot game is more likely to be executed (there is a higher expectation) than when the tenth button effect is performed.

Furthermore, the jackpot game is more likely to be executed (higher expectation) when the 18th button effect is performed than when the 17th button effect is performed. Also, the jackpot game is more likely to be executed (higher expectation) when the 21st button effect is performed than when the 20th button effect is performed.
Furthermore, the button 19 effect, if performed, is more likely to result in a jackpot game (higher expectations) than the button 17 effect and the button 18 effect. In other words, the button effect in which the button highlighting section 509c is displayed in red is more likely to result in a jackpot game (higher expectations) than the button effect in which the button highlighting section 509c is displayed in white.
Furthermore, among the first button effects to the second button effects, the second button effect is the effect that is most likely to result in a jackpot game (the effect with the highest expectation) when performed. The second button effect may be configured to always result in a jackpot game (the expectation is 100%) when performed.

In the present embodiment, the button highlighting section 509c is displayed in a manner corresponding to the operation display of the button section 509a in the button effect. In other words, the operation display of the button section 509a and the display of the button highlighting section 509c are synchronized in the button effect.
In the button presentation, the operation display of the button section 509a and the display of the button highlighting section 509c do not have to be completely synchronized. That is, in the button presentation, the operation display of the button section 509a and the display of the button highlighting section 509c only need to be synchronized or approximately synchronized. In other words, the cycle of the operation display of the button section 509a and the cycle of the display of the button highlighting section 509c only need to be the same or approximately the same.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the button effect, a post-operation emphasized image is displayed, but this is not limited to this.
Even if the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the button effect, the variable effect may proceed without displaying the post-operation emphasis image.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it has been described that in each button effect, the transparency of the button highlighting portion 509c changes depending on the lapse of the valid operation period, but this is not limiting.
In each button effect, the display color of the button highlighting section 509c may change as the valid operation period elapses (for example, changing from gray to white to yellow in that order as the valid operation period elapses). In this case, the transparency of the button highlighting section 509c may or may not change as the valid operation period elapses.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the ninth, tenth, sixteenth, and nineteenth button effects, the display color of the button highlighting section 509c changes from red to white (see Figures 73 (6) and (7)), but this is not limited to this. As the valid operation period in the button effect passes, the transparency and display color of the button highlighting section 509c change, but it does not have to return to white. As an example, the display color of the button highlighting section 509c may alternate between dark red and light red as the valid operation period in the button effect passes.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the 4th button effect, the 5th button effect, the 20th button effect, and the 21st button effect are effects that can accept multiple operations (rapid hits) by the player on the effect button 161 during the operation valid period of the button effect, but this is not limited to this.
In addition, the fourth button performance, the fifth button performance, the twentieth button performance, and the twenty-first button performance may be performances that can accept long periods of continuous operation (so-called long press) during the effective operation period of the button performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the fourth button presentation, fifth button presentation, twentieth button presentation, and twenty-first button presentation, the presentation mode of the button image 509 (operation display of the button section 509a, display of the button highlight section 509c, etc.) does not change regardless of whether the presentation button 161 is operated during the valid operation period, but this is not limited to this.
In the fourth, fifth, twentieth, and twenty-first button effects, when the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period, the button portion 509a and the button highlight portion 509c may continue to be displayed in a specific display mode (for example, the button portion 509a may be displayed in a display mode that simulates the effect button 161 being fully pressed, or the button highlight portion 509c may be displayed with low transparency). Even in this case, the periodic motion display of the highlight character 509d may continue. The highlight character 509d may also continue to be displayed in a specific display mode.

Furthermore, in the 20th and 21st button effects, the time from when the button highlighting section 509c starts to display in white to when it starts to display in blue, the time from when the button highlighting section 509c starts to display in blue to when it starts to display in green, and the time from when the button highlighting section 509c starts to display in green to when it starts to display in red may all be different. More specifically, the later the order, the longer the time may be.

Furthermore, the execution time of each of the above-described effects in each button effect (display of button section 509a, display of operation of button section 509a, display of button highlight section 509c, display of operation of highlighted character 509d, and display of highlighted image during operation) may be the time from the start of the effect to the end of the effect. For example, the time from time T1 (see FIG. 62 ) when display of button highlight section 509c in the first button effect starts to time T4 when the final display ends may be set to 1.5 seconds, and this time may be considered as the execution time of the operation display of button highlight section 509c in the first button effect.
Furthermore, it has been explained that in each effect in each button effect (the operation display of button section 509a, the display of button highlight section 509c, the operation display of highlighted character 509d, and the display of an image highlighted during operation), there is a period from the start to the end of the effect during which the effect is not executed (for example, the period from time T2 to time T3 for button highlight section 509c in the first button effect), but this is not limited to this, and each effect may continue to be executed from the start to the end of the effect. Even in this case, the start and end timings of each effect in each button effect are different, and therefore the execution times are different.

In addition, in this embodiment, in each button performance, the period of the operation display of the button section 509a and the period of the display of the button highlight section 509c are made different from the period of the operation display of the highlight character 509d, but this is not limited to this.
The performance control unit 300 may make the period of the operation display of the button unit 509a and the period of the display of the button highlight unit 509c, and the period of the operation display of the highlight character 509d common to each other in each button performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, in each button performance, the execution time of the operation display of the button section 509a and the execution time of the display of the button highlight section 509c are different from the execution time of the operation display of the highlight character 509d, but this is not limited to this.
The performance control unit 300 may make the execution time of the operation display of the button unit 509a, the execution time of the display of the button highlight unit 509c, and the execution time of the operation display of the highlighted character 509d common to each other in each button performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, in each button performance, the cycle of the operation display of the button section 509a and the cycle of the display of the button highlight section 509c are the same, but this is not limited to this.
The performance control unit 300 may make the cycle of the operation display of the button unit 509a and the cycle of the display of the button highlight unit 509c different in each button performance.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in each button performance, the execution time of the action display of the button section 509a and the execution time of the display of the button highlighting section 509c are the same, but this is not limited to this.
The performance control unit 300 may make the execution time of the operation display of the button unit 509a different from the execution time of the display of the button highlighting unit 509c in each button performance.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the cycle of the operation display of the button section 509a may differ depending on the button effect being executed, but this is not limiting. The cycle of the operation display of the button section 509a may be the same regardless of the button effect being executed.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the display cycle of the button highlighting portion 509c may differ depending on the button effect being executed, but this is not limiting. The display cycle of the button highlighting portion 509c may be the same regardless of the button effect being executed.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the period of the motion display of the highlighted character 509d may differ depending on the button effect being executed, but this is not limiting. The period of the motion display of the highlighted character 509d may be the same regardless of the button effect being executed.

FIG. 101 is a diagram showing the execution time and cycle of each effect in the first button effect through the twenty-second button effect.
Figure 101 shows, for each button effect, the display time of the precursory emphasis image, the display time of the button section 509a (execution time of the button effect, valid operation period for the button effect), the operation display time of the button section 509a, the display time of the button emphasis section 509c, the operation display time of the emphasized character 509d, the display time of the emphasized image during operation, the display time of the emphasized image after operation, the period of the operation display of the button section 509a, the display period of the button emphasis section 509c, and the period of the operation display of the emphasized character 509d.

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can vary the display time of the premonition-emphasizing image depending on the button performance to be executed, thereby diversifying the way in which anticipation for the execution of the button performance can be created depending on the button performance to be executed.
Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can change the display mode (action display mode) of the premonition-emphasizing image depending on the button performance to be executed, thereby diversifying the way in which anticipation for the execution of the button performance can be created depending on the button performance to be executed.
The performance control unit 300 may vary the display mode (operation display mode) of the premonition emphasis image in each button performance, but may share the same execution time. Also, the performance control unit 300 may vary the execution time of the premonition emphasis image in each button performance, but may share the same display mode (operation display mode).
In addition, the display time of the prophecy emphasis image for each button effect may be the opposite of the long/short relationship shown in the example in Figure 101.

In this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can vary the execution time of the operation display of the button unit 509a depending on the button performance to be executed, so that the way of promoting the operation of the performance button 161 can be diversified depending on the button performance to be executed.
Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can change the operation mode (cycle) of the operation display of the button unit 509a depending on the button performance to be executed, so that the way of promoting the operation of the performance button 161 can be diversified depending on the button performance to be executed.
The performance control unit 300 may set different execution times for the operation display of the button unit 509a in each button performance, but may set the same operation mode (cycle). Also, the performance control unit 300 may set different execution times for the operation display of the button unit 509a in each button performance, but may set the same operation mode (cycle).
Furthermore, the execution time of the operation display of the button section 509a in each button performance may be the opposite of the long-short relationship to the example shown in Fig. 101. Furthermore, the cycle of the operation display of the button section 509a in each button performance may be the opposite of the long-short relationship to the example shown in Fig. 101.

In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can vary the duration of the display (operation display) of the button highlighting unit 509c depending on the button effect being executed, thereby diversifying the way in which the operation of the effect button 161 is promoted depending on the button effect being executed.
Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can vary the operation mode (cycle) of the display (operation display) of the button highlighting unit 509c depending on the button performance being executed, so that the way of promoting the operation of the performance button 161 can be diversified depending on the button performance being executed.
The performance control unit 300 may vary the execution time of the display (operation display) of the button highlighting unit 509c in each button performance, but may share the same operation mode (cycle). Also, the performance control unit 300 may vary the execution time of the display (operation display) of the button highlighting unit 509c in each button performance, but may share the same operation mode (cycle).
Furthermore, the execution time of the display (operation display) of the button highlighting section 509c in each button effect may be the opposite of the long/short relationship to the example shown in Fig. 101. Furthermore, the cycle of the display (operation display) of the button highlighting section 509c in each button effect (first button effect to twenty-second button effect) may be the opposite of the long/short relationship to the example shown in Fig. 101.

In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can vary the duration of the action display of the highlighted character 509d depending on the button effect being executed, so that the way of promoting the operation of the effect button 161 can be diversified depending on the button effect being executed.
Furthermore, the effect control unit 300 can vary the operation mode (cycle) of the operation display of the highlighted character 509d depending on the button effect being executed, so that the way of promoting the operation of the effect button 161 can be diversified depending on the button effect being executed.
The performance control unit 300 may vary the execution time of the highlighted character 509d in each button performance, but may share the same operation mode (cycle). Also, the performance control unit 300 may vary the execution time of the highlighted character 509d in each button performance, but may share the same operation mode (cycle).
In addition, the execution time of the motion display of the highlighted character 509d in each button effect may be the opposite of the long-short relationship to the example shown in Fig. 101. In addition, the cycle of the motion display of the highlighted character 509d in each button effect may be the opposite of the long-short relationship to the example shown in Fig. 101.

In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can vary the duration of the display of the highlight image during operation depending on the button effect being executed, so that the way of promoting the operation of the effect button 161 can be diversified depending on the button effect being executed.
In addition, the performance control unit 300 may vary the display mode of the operation highlight image for each button performance (4th button performance, 5th button performance, 20th button performance, 21st button performance), but may make the execution time the same.
In addition, the performance control unit 300 may vary the execution time of the operation highlight image for each button performance (4th button performance, 5th button performance, 20th button performance, 21st button performance), but make the display format common.
In addition, the execution time for displaying the operation highlight image for each button effect (4th button effect, 5th button effect, 20th button effect, 21st button effect) may be the opposite of the long/short relationship shown in the example in Figure 101.

In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can vary the display time of the post-operation highlight image depending on the button effect being executed, so that the way of promoting the operation of the effect button 161 can be diversified depending on the button effect being executed.
The performance control unit 300 may vary the display mode of the post-operation emphasis image for each button performance, but may make the display time the same.
Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 may vary the display time of the post-operation emphasis image for each button performance, but may make the display format common.
In addition, the execution time for displaying the post-operation emphasis image in each button effect may be the opposite of the long/short relationship shown in the example of FIG.

In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 differentiates the display time of the button section 509a, the operation display time of the button section 509a, the display time of the button highlight section 509c, and the operation display time of the highlighted character 509d in each button effect, making it easier for the player to notice each effect compared to when the execution times of each effect are the same.
In addition, in each button performance, the display time of the button section 509a, the operation display time of the button section 509a, the display time of the button highlight section 509c, and the operation display time of the highlighted character 509d may be in the opposite length relationship to the example shown in Figure 101.

Figure 101 also shows the total execution time of each effect (operation display of button section 509a, display of button highlight section 509c, operation display of highlighted character 509d, and display of highlighted image during operation) that is repeated in each button effect.
Here, in each button effect, each effect (the operation display of the button section 509a, the display of the button highlight section 509c, the operation display of the highlighted character 509d, and the display of the highlighted image during operation) may be performed only once. In this case, the time shown in Fig. 101 may be the execution time of each effect (the operation display of the button section 509a, the display of the button highlight section 509c, the operation display of the highlighted character 509d, and the display of the highlighted image during operation) that is performed only once in each button effect (the first button effect to the twenty-second button effect).

Furthermore, although it has been explained that the display time of the button section 509a, the operation valid period for the button effect, and the execution time for the button effect are the same for each button effect, this is not limited to this.
In each button effect, the display time of the button section 509a, the valid operation period of the button effect, and the execution time of the button effect may be different from each other. In addition, in each button effect, the valid operation period of the button effect may be shorter than the display time of the button section 509a or the execution time of the button effect. Furthermore, in each button effect, the execution time of the button effect may be longer than the display time of the button section 509a.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that there are button effects (for example, the 7th button effect and the 8th button effect) in which the premonition emphasis image and the post-operation emphasis image are different, but the presentation style of the button image 509 in the button effect is common.
Here, button effects in which the precursory emphasis image and post-operation emphasis image are different but the presentation mode of the button image 509 in the button effect is common may be considered to be the same button effect.

(Zone effect execution mode)
Next, the manner in which the zone effects are executed will be described.
The zone effects in this embodiment include a first zone effect and a second zone effect, and various effects are performed depending on the zone effect being executed.
FIG. 102 is a diagram showing how the first zone presentation is executed.
In the first zone effect, first, as shown in Figure 102 (1), a first zone start image 536 is displayed. When the first zone start image 536 is displayed, the first zone effect begins.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (2), the first zone execution image 537 is displayed. In this embodiment, the first zone execution image 537 is displayed in motion. More specifically, in the first zone execution image 537, the displayed image moves from the left to the right on the image display unit 114, and after passing the right edge of the image display unit 114, the image is displayed again at the left edge of the image display unit 114 and moves to the right. In the example shown, the first zone execution image 537 displays, in order from left to right, the marks O, △, □, and ◇. The display of these marks emphasizes the text portion of "X Zone" in the first zone execution image 537. In other words, the display of the marks O, △, □, and ◇ emphasizes the first zone execution image 537 (first zone presentation).

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(3), the action display of the first zone execution image 537 continues, and the first zone execution image 537 shows marks ◇, ◯, △, and □ in that order from the left.
Next, as shown in FIG. 102(4), the action display of the first zone execution image 537 continues, and marks of □, ◇, ◯, and △ are displayed in order from the left in the first zone execution image 537.
Next, as shown in FIG. 102(5), the action display of the first zone execution image 537 continues, and marks △, □, ◇, and ◯ are displayed in order from the left in the first zone execution image 537.
Next, as shown in Figure 102 (6), the action display of the first zone execution image 537 continues, and marks of circle, triangle, square, and diamond are displayed in order from the left in the first zone execution image 537. Although not shown, thereafter, the first zone execution image 537 repeats the displays shown in Figures 102 (3) to (6).

In this way, the first zone execution image 537 periodically displays the movement, with one cycle being 1.5 seconds, which corresponds to the period from the time shown in Figure 102(2) to the time shown in Figure 102(6). Note that the cycle of the first zone execution image 537 may be any time.
Additionally, although the text portion of "X Zone" is not displayed in motion in the first zone execution image 537, this is not limiting. The text portion of "X Zone" in the first zone execution image 537 may also be displayed in motion together with the marks "○, △, □, ◇." Furthermore, the period of the display of the motion of the text portion of "X Zone" in the first zone execution image 537 may be the same as or different from the period of the display of the marks "○, △, □, ◇."

FIG. 103 is a diagram showing how the second zone presentation is executed.
In the second zone effect, first, as shown in Figure 103 (1), a second zone start image 538 is displayed. When the second zone start image 538 is displayed, the second zone effect starts.
Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (2), a second zone execution image 613 is displayed. In this embodiment, the second zone execution image 613 is displayed in a dynamic manner. More specifically, in the second zone execution image 613, the displayed image moves from the left side to the right side of the image display unit 114, and after passing the right end of the image display unit 114, the image is displayed again at the left end of the image display unit 114 and moves to the right. In the illustrated example, the second zone execution image 613 displays, in order from left to right, the marks ●, ▲, ■, and ◆. The display of these marks emphasizes the text portion of "Y Zone" in the second zone execution image 613. In other words, the display of the marks ●, ▲, ■, and ◆ emphasizes the second zone execution image 613 (the second zone effect).

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(3), the action display of the second zone execution image 613 continues, and the marks ◆, ●, ▲, and ■ are displayed in order from the left in the second zone execution image 613.
Next, as shown in FIG. 103(4), the action display of the second zone execution image 613 continues, and marks ■, ◆, ●, and ▲ are displayed in order from the left in the second zone execution image 613.
Next, as shown in FIG. 103(5), the action display of the second zone execution image 613 continues, and the marks ▲, ■, ◆, and ● are displayed in order from the left in the second zone execution image 613.
Next, as shown in Figure 103 (6), the action display of the second zone execution image 613 continues, and the marks ●, ▲, ■, and ◆ are displayed in order from the left in the second zone execution image 613. Although not shown, thereafter, the second zone execution image 613 repeats the displays shown in Figures 103 (3) to (6).

In this way, the second zone execution image 613 periodically displays the movement, with one cycle being one second, which is the period from the time shown in FIG. 103(2) to the time shown in FIG. 103(6). That is, the first zone execution image 537 and the second zone execution image 613 have different movement display cycles. However, the first zone execution image 537 and the second zone execution image 613 may have the same movement display cycle. Furthermore, the second zone execution image 613 may have a longer movement display cycle than the first zone execution image 537.
Furthermore, in the second zone execution image 613, the text portion of "Y zone" is not displayed in motion, but this is not limited to this. The text portion of "Y zone" in the second zone execution image 613 may also be displayed in motion together with the marks "●, ▲, ■, ◆". Furthermore, the period of the motion display of the text portion of "Y zone" in the second zone execution image 613 may be the same as or different from the period of the motion display of the marks "●, ▲, ■, ◆".

Furthermore, when a zone effect is executed, the effect control unit 300 may set a stage (effect mode) according to the zone effect. Therefore, the zone execution images (first zone execution image 537, second zone execution image 613) can also be regarded as images that identify the effect mode.

(Execution mode of reach effect)
Next, the manner in which the reach-time effects are executed will be described. The reach-time effects are effects that are executed when the reach-time effects start. The reach-time effects in this embodiment include the first reach-time effect to the ninth reach-time effect, and various effects are executed depending on the reach-time effect that is executed.
Figure 104 shows how the first reach effect is executed.
First, as shown in FIG. 104(1), in the first stage (first presentation mode), the even number "4" decorative symbols 41 on the left and right are temporarily stopped.

Next, the first reach effect begins. In the first reach effect, as shown in Figure 104 (2), a reach line image 539, a reach suggestion image 540, and a first reach highlight image 542 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the reach line image 539 is displayed in white, and the reach suggestion image 540 displays the text "Reach." Furthermore, when a reach effect is performed, a reach highlight effect is performed to emphasize the reach effect. In the first reach effect, a first reach highlight effect is performed as a reach highlight effect. In the first reach highlight effect, a reach highlight image 541 is displayed. More specifically, an image simulating light as the reach highlight image 541 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the text portion of "Ri" in the reach suggestion image 540, on a layer in front of this text portion. Furthermore, in the first reach effect, a first reach action is performed. In the first reach action, each of the left and right decorative patterns 41 is displayed as if raising both hands directly above.

Next, as shown in Fig. 104 (3), the reach emphasis image 541 is displayed in motion. More specifically, the reach emphasis image 541 is displayed in motion so as to move to a layer in front of the text portion of "Chi" in the reach suggestion image 540, in an area that overlaps the display area of this text portion.
Next, as shown in FIG. 104(4), the reach emphasis image 541 is hidden, and the first reach emphasis effect ends.
Next, as shown in FIG. 104(5), the reach line image 539, the reach suggestion image 540, and the first reach highlight image 542 are hidden.

Next, as shown in Figure 104(6), the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed as if they are lowering their hands, returning to the same display mode as Figure 104(1), and the first reach action ends. This ends the first reach performance.
Here, in the first reach-time performance, the display time of the reach line image 539 is 1.5 seconds, the display time of the reach suggestion image 540 is 1.5 seconds, the display (action display) time of the reach emphasis image 541 (execution time of the first reach emphasis performance) is 1 second, the execution time of the first reach action is 2 seconds, and the display time of the first reach eye emphasis image 542 is 1.5 seconds. However, the execution time of each performance in the first reach-time performance may be any time.

Figure 105 shows how the second reach effect is executed.
First, as shown in FIG. 105(1), in the first stage (first presentation mode), the odd number "5" decorative symbols 41 on the left and right are temporarily stopped.
Next, the second reach effect begins. In the second reach effect, as shown in FIG. 105 (2), a reach line image 539, a reach suggestion image 540, a reach emphasis image 541, and a second reach eye emphasis image 543 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the reach line image 539 is displayed in white, and the reach suggestion image 540 displays the text "reach." In the second reach effect, a second reach emphasis effect is performed. This second reach emphasis effect is the same as the first reach emphasis effect. That is, in the second reach emphasis effect, an image simulating light as the reach emphasis image 541 is displayed in an area overlapping the display area of the text portion of "ri" in the reach suggestion image 540, on a layer in front of this text portion. In addition, in the second reach effect, a second reach action is performed. In the second reach action, each of the left and right decorative patterns 41 is displayed as if both hands are raised horizontally.

Next, as shown in Fig. 105(3), the reach emphasis image 541 is displayed in motion. More specifically, the reach emphasis image 541 is displayed in motion so as to move to a layer in front of the text portion of "Chi" in the reach suggestion image 540, in an area that overlaps with the display area of this text portion.
Next, as shown in FIG. 105(4), the reach emphasis image 541 is hidden, and the second reach emphasis effect ends.
Next, as shown in FIG. 105(5), the reach line image 539, the reach suggestion image 540, and the second reach highlight image 543 are hidden.

Next, as shown in Figure 105(6), the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed as if they are lowering their hands, returning to the same display mode as Figure 105(1), and the second reach action ends. This ends the second reach performance.
Here, in the second reach-time performance, the display time of the reach line image 539 is 1.5 seconds, the display time of the reach suggestion image 540 is 1.5 seconds, the display (action display) time of the reach emphasis image 541 (execution time of the second reach emphasis performance) is 1 second, the execution time of the second reach action is 2 seconds, and the display time of the second reach eye emphasis image 543 is 1.5 seconds. However, the execution time of each performance in the second reach-time performance may be any time.

Figure 106 shows how the third reach effect is executed.
First, as shown in FIG. 106(1), in the first stage (first presentation mode), the even number "4" decorative symbols 41 on the left and right are temporarily stopped.
Next, the third reach effect starts. In the third reach effect, as shown in FIG. 106 (2), a reach line image 539, a reach suggestion image 540, a reach emphasis image 541, and a fourth reach eye emphasis image 544 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the reach line image 539 is displayed in red, and the reach suggestion image 540 displays the text "Super Hot!". In addition, in the third reach effect, a third reach emphasis effect is performed. In the third reach emphasis effect, an image resembling a flame is displayed above the reach suggestion image 540 as the reach emphasis image 541. In addition, in the third reach effect, a third reach action is performed. In the third reach action, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in an expanding manner.

106(3), in the third reach emphasis effect, the reach emphasis image 541 is displayed in motion. More specifically, the reach emphasis image 541 is displayed in motion so that the display area thereof becomes wider.
Next, as shown in FIG. 106(4), the reach emphasis image 541 is hidden, and the third reach emphasis effect ends.
Next, as shown in FIG. 106(5), the reach line image 539, the reach suggestion image 540, and the third reach highlight image 544 are hidden.

Next, as shown in Fig. 106(6), the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a shrinking manner, returning to the same display mode as Fig. 106(1), and the third reach action ends. This ends the third reach effect.
Here, in the third reach performance, the display time of the reach line image 539 is 2 seconds, the display time of the reach suggestion image 540 is 2 seconds, the display (action display) time of the reach emphasis image 541 (execution time of the third reach emphasis performance) is 1.5 seconds, the execution time of the third reach action is 2.5 seconds, and the display time of the third reach eye emphasis image 544 is 2 seconds. However, the execution time of each performance in the third reach performance may be any time.

Figure 107 shows how the fourth reach effect is executed.
First, as shown in FIG. 107(1), in the first stage (first presentation mode), the decorative symbols 41 "7" on the left and right are temporarily stopped.
Next, the fourth reach effect starts. In the fourth reach effect, as shown in FIG. 107 (2), a reach line image 539, a reach suggestion image 540, and a fourth reach highlight image 545 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the reach line image 539 is displayed in gold, and the reach suggestion image 540 displays the text "Jackpot!?". In addition, in the fourth reach effect, a fourth reach highlight effect is performed. In the fourth reach highlight effect, the text portion of "Jackpot" in the reach suggestion image 540 is displayed in an upward motion, so that it is displayed above the text portion of "Tari!?". In addition, in the fourth reach effect, a fourth reach action is performed. In the fourth reach action, each of the left and right decorative patterns 41 is displayed in a vibrating motion.

107(3), the reach suggestion image 540 is displayed in motion. More specifically, the reach suggestion image 540 is displayed in motion such that the text portion of "Big Hit" descends and the text portion of "Tari" rises, so that the text portion of "Tari" is positioned above the text portions of "Big Hit" and "!?".
107(4), the reach suggestion image 540 is displayed in motion. More specifically, the reach suggestion image 540 is displayed in motion such that the text portion of "??" is positioned above the text portion of "jackpot" by descending and the text portion of "??" is raised.
Next, as shown in FIG. 107(5), the reach suggestion image 540 is hidden, and the fourth reach emphasis effect ends.
Next, as shown in FIG. 107(6), the reach line image 539 and the fourth reach-eye emphasis image 545 are hidden.

Next, as shown in Figure 107(7), the left and right decorative symbols 41 return to the same display mode as in Figure 107(1), and the fourth reach action ends. This ends the fourth reach effect.
Here, in the fourth reach-time performance, the display time of the reach line image 539 is 2.5 seconds, the display time of the reach suggestion image 540 is 2 seconds, the display time of the action of the reach suggestion image 540 (execution time of the fourth reach emphasis performance) is 2 seconds, the execution time of the fourth reach action is 3 seconds, and the display time of the fourth reach eye emphasis image 545 is 2.5 seconds. However, the execution time of each performance in the fourth reach-time performance may be any time.

Figure 108 shows how the fifth reach effect is executed.
First, as shown in FIG. 108(1), in the second stage (second presentation mode), the even number "4" decorative symbols 41 on the left and right are temporarily stopped.
Next, the fifth reach effect begins. In the fifth reach effect, as shown in FIG. 108 (2), a reach line image 539, a reach suggestion image 540, a reach emphasis image 541, and a fifth reach eye emphasis image 546 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the reach line image 539, the reach suggestion image 540, and the reach emphasis image 541 are displayed in the same display manner as in the first reach effect and the second reach effect. Furthermore, in the fifth reach effect, a fifth reach emphasis effect is performed. The fifth reach emphasis effect is the same effect as the first reach emphasis effect and the second reach emphasis effect. That is, in the fifth reach emphasis effect, an image simulating light as the reach emphasis image 541 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the text portion of "ri" in the reach suggestion image 540, in a layer in front of this text portion. In addition, in the fifth reach operation, the left decorative symbol 41 is displayed in an upward movement, and the right decorative symbol 41 is displayed in a downward movement.

Next, as shown in Fig. 108 (3), the reach emphasis image 541 is displayed in motion. More specifically, the reach emphasis image 541 is displayed in motion so as to move to a layer in front of the text portion of "Chi" in the reach suggestion image 540, in an area that overlaps with the display area of this text portion.
Next, as shown in FIG. 108(4), the reach emphasis image 541 is hidden, and the fifth reach emphasis effect ends.
Next, as shown in FIG. 108(5), the reach line image 539, the reach suggestion image 540, and the fifth reach highlight image 546 are hidden.

Next, as shown in Figure 108 (6), the left decorative symbol 41 is displayed to move downwards, and the right decorative symbol 41 is displayed to move upwards, so that the left and right decorative symbols 41 return to the same display mode as in Figure 108 (1), and the fifth reach operation ends. This ends the fifth reach performance.
Here, in the 5th reach effect, the display time of the reach line image 539 is 1.5 seconds, the display time of the reach suggestion image 540 is 1.5 seconds, the display (action display) time of the reach emphasis image 541 (execution time of the 5th reach emphasis effect) is 1 second, the execution time of the 5th reach action is 2 seconds, and the display time of the 5th reach eye emphasis image 546 is 1.5 seconds. However, the execution time of each effect in the 5th reach effect may be any time.

Figure 109 shows how the sixth reach effect is executed.
First, as shown in FIG. 109(1), in the second stage (second presentation mode), the odd number "5" decorative symbols 41 on the left and right are temporarily stopped.
Next, the sixth reach effect begins. In the sixth reach effect, as shown in FIG. 109 (2), a reach line image 539, a reach suggestion image 540, a reach emphasis image 541, and a sixth reach eye emphasis image 547 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the reach line image 539, the reach suggestion image 540, and the reach emphasis image 541 are displayed in the same display manner as in the first reach effect, the second reach effect, and the fifth reach effect. Furthermore, in the sixth reach effect, a sixth reach emphasis effect is performed. The sixth reach emphasis effect is the same effect as the first reach emphasis effect, the second reach effect, and the fifth reach emphasis effect. That is, in the sixth reach emphasis effect, an image simulating light as the reach emphasis image 541 is displayed in an area overlapping the display area of the text portion of "ri" in the reach suggestion image 540, in a layer in front of this text portion. In addition, in the sixth reach operation, the left decorative symbol 41 is displayed as moving down, and the right decorative symbol 41 is displayed as moving up.

109(3), the reach emphasis image 541 is displayed in motion. More specifically, the reach emphasis image 541 is displayed in motion so as to move to a layer in front of the text portion of "Chi" in the reach suggestion image 540, in an area that overlaps the display area of this text portion.
Next, as shown in FIG. 109(4), the reach emphasis image 541 is hidden, and the sixth reach emphasis effect ends.
Next, as shown in FIG. 109(5), the reach line image 539, the reach suggestion image 540, and the sixth reach highlight image 547 are hidden.

Next, as shown in Fig. 109(6), the left decorative symbol 41 is displayed in an upward motion, and the right decorative symbol 41 is displayed in a downward motion, so that the left and right decorative symbols 41 return to the same display mode as in Fig. 109(1), and the 6th reach motion ends. This ends the 6th reach effect.
Here, in the 6th reach effect, the display time of the reach line image 539 is 1.5 seconds, the display time of the reach suggestion image 540 is 1.5 seconds, the display (action display) time of the reach emphasis image 541 (execution time of the 6th reach emphasis effect) is 1 second, the execution time of the 6th reach action is 2 seconds, and the display time of the 6th reach eye emphasis image 547 is 1.5 seconds. However, the execution time of each effect in the 6th reach effect may be any time.

Figure 110 shows how the seventh reach effect is executed.
First, as shown in FIG. 110(1), in the second stage (second presentation mode), the even number "4" decorative symbols 41 on the left and right are temporarily stopped.
Next, the seventh reach effect starts. In the seventh reach effect, as shown in FIG. 110 (2), a reach line image 539, a reach suggestion image 540, a reach emphasis image 541, and a seventh reach eye emphasis image 548 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the reach line image 539, the reach suggestion image 540, and the reach emphasis image 541 are displayed in the same display manner as in the third reach effect. Furthermore, in the seventh reach effect, a seventh reach emphasis effect is performed. The seventh reach emphasis effect is the same effect as the third reach emphasis effect. Furthermore, in the seventh reach action, each of the left and right decorative symbols 41 is displayed to sway in a clockwise and counterclockwise direction.

Next, as shown in Fig. 110(3), the reach emphasizing image 541 is displayed in a dynamic manner. More specifically, the reach emphasizing image 541 is displayed in a dynamic manner so that the display area thereof becomes wider.
Next, as shown in FIG. 110(4), the reach emphasis image 541 is hidden, and the seventh reach emphasis effect ends.
Next, as shown in FIG. 110(5), the reach line image 539, the reach suggestion image 540, and the seventh reach highlight image 548 are hidden.

Next, as shown in Fig. 110(6), the left and right decorative symbols 41 finish their motion display and return to the same display mode as Fig. 110(1), and the seventh reach motion ends. This ends the seventh reach effect.
Here, in the seventh reach-time performance, the display time of the reach line image 539 is 2 seconds, the display time of the reach suggestion image 540 is 2 seconds, the display (action display) time of the reach emphasis image 541 (execution time of the seventh reach emphasis performance) is 1.5 seconds, the execution time of the seventh reach action is 2.5 seconds, and the display time of the seventh reach eye emphasis image 548 is 2 seconds. However, the execution time of each performance in the seventh reach-time performance may be any time.

Figure 111 shows how the eighth reach effect is executed.
First, as shown in FIG. 111(1), in the third stage (third presentation mode), the even number "4" decorative symbols 41 on the left and right are temporarily stopped.
Next, the eighth reach effect starts. In the eighth reach effect, an eighth reach action is performed. In the eighth reach action, as shown in FIG. 111 (2), the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in an enlarged manner.
Next, as shown in FIG. 111(3), the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed in an enlarged manner.
Next, as shown in Fig. 111(4), the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in an enlarged manner, and an eighth reach-eye emphasis image 549 is displayed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 111(5), the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a shrinking manner, returning to the same display mode as Fig. 111(1), and the 8th reach action ends. This ends the 8th reach effect.
Here, in the eighth reach effect, the execution time of the eighth reach action is 2.75 seconds, and the display time of the eighth reach-eye emphasis image 549 is 2.5 seconds. However, the execution time of each effect in the eighth reach effect may be any time.

Figure 112 shows how the 9th reach effect is executed.
First, as shown in FIG. 112(1), in the fourth stage (fourth presentation mode), the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right, "7", temporarily stop.
Next, the 9th reach effect starts. In the 9th reach effect, a 9th reach action is performed. In the 9th reach action, as shown in FIG. 112 (2), the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in an enlarged manner. In addition, a 9th reach effect highlight image 550 is displayed.
112(3), the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a shrinking manner. In addition, as the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a shrinking manner, the ninth reach-eye emphasis image 550 is also displayed in a shrinking manner.
112(4), the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in an enlarged manner again. In addition, along with the enlargement of the left and right decorative symbols 41, the ninth reach-eye emphasis image 550 is also displayed in an enlarged manner.

Next, as shown in Figure 112 (5), the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a shrinking manner, returning to the same display mode as in Figure 112 (1), and the 8th reach operation ends. Also, the 9th reach-eye emphasis image 550 is no longer displayed. This ends the 9th reach performance.
Here, in the ninth reach effect, the execution time of the ninth reach action is 3.5 seconds, and the display time of the ninth reach-eye emphasis image 550 is 3.25 seconds. However, the execution time of each effect in the ninth reach effect may be any time.

In the following description, when the first to ninth reach actions are described without any particular distinction, they may be simply referred to as reach actions.
In addition, in the following, when the first reach emphasis effect to the seventh reach emphasis effect are described without any particular distinction, they may be simply referred to as reach emphasis effects.
In the present embodiment, it has been described that the reach line image 539 is displayed, the reach eye emphasis image is displayed, and the reach action is executed. Here, the display of the reach line image 539, the display of the reach eye emphasis image, and the reach action can also be regarded as effects that emphasize the reach effect. Furthermore, the display of the reach line image 539, the display of the reach eye emphasis image, and the reach action can also be regarded as effects that emphasize the reach eye decorative symbol 41.

Figure 113 is a diagram showing the execution time of each effect in each reach effect.
Figure 113 shows, for each reach-time effect, the display time of the reach line image 539, the display time of the reach suggestion image 540, the execution time of the reach emphasis effect, the execution time of the reach action, and the display time of the reach eye emphasis image.

As described above, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can vary the display time of the reach line image 539 depending on the reach-time effect being executed. Therefore, the way in which the player is drawn to the reach-time effect can be diversified depending on the reach-time effect being executed.
In addition, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can change the display mode of the reach line image 539 depending on the reach-time effect being executed. Therefore, the way in which the player is drawn to the reach-time effect can be diversified depending on the reach-time effect being executed.
The effect control unit 300 may vary the display mode of the reach line image 539 in each reach-time effect, but may share the display time. Also, the effect control unit 300 may vary the display time of the reach line image 539 in each reach-time effect, but may share the display mode.
In addition, the display time of the reach line image 539 in each reach performance may be reversed from the example shown in Figure 113.

In addition, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can vary the display time of the reach suggestion image 540 depending on the reach effect being executed, so that the way in which the player is drawn to the reach effect can be diversified depending on the reach effect being executed.
In addition, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can change the display mode of the reach suggestion image 540 depending on the reach effect being executed, so that the way in which the player is drawn to the reach effect can be diversified depending on the reach effect being executed.
The effect control unit 300 may vary the display mode of the reach suggestion image 540 in each reach-time effect, but may share the display time. Also, the effect control unit 300 may vary the display time of the reach suggestion image 540 in each reach-time effect, but may share the display mode.
In addition, the display time of the reach suggestion image 540 in each reach performance may be the opposite of the long/short relationship shown in the example of FIG.

In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can vary the execution time of the reach emphasis effect depending on the reach effect being executed, so that the way in which the player is drawn to the reach effect can be diversified depending on the reach effect being executed.
In addition, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can change the operating mode of the reach emphasis effect depending on the reach effect being executed, so that the way in which the player is drawn to the reach effect can be diversified depending on the reach effect being executed.
The performance control unit 300 may vary the operation mode of the reach emphasis performance in each reach performance but may make the execution time the same. Also, the performance control unit 300 may vary the execution time of the reach emphasis performance in each reach performance but may make the operation mode the same.
In addition, the execution time of the reach emphasis effect in each reach effect may be the opposite of the long/short relationship shown in the example of Figure 113.

In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can vary the execution time of the reach action depending on the reach effect being executed, so that the way in which the player is drawn to the reach effect can be diversified depending on the reach effect being executed.
In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can change the operation mode of the reach action depending on the reach effect being executed, so that the way in which the player is drawn to the reach effect can be diversified depending on the reach effect being executed.
The performance control unit 300 may vary the operation mode of the reach action in each reach-time performance, but may make the execution time the same. Also, the performance control unit 300 may vary the execution time of the reach action in each reach-time performance, but may make the operation mode the same.
In addition, the execution time of the reach action in each reach performance may be the opposite of the long/short relationship shown in the example of FIG.

In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can vary the display time of the reach-eye emphasis image depending on the reach-time effect being executed, so that the way in which the player is drawn to the reach-time effect can be diversified depending on the reach-time effect being executed.
In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can change the display mode of the reach-eye emphasis image depending on the reach-time effect being executed, so that the way in which the player is drawn to the reach-time effect can be diversified depending on the reach-time effect being executed.
The effect control unit 300 may vary the display mode of the reach-eye emphasis image in each reach-time effect, but may share the display time. Also, the effect control unit 300 may vary the display time of the reach-eye emphasis image in each reach-time effect, but may share the display mode.
In addition, the display time of the reach-eye highlight image in each reach-time performance may be the opposite of the long/short relationship shown in the example of FIG.

In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 varies the display time of the reach line image 539, the display time of the reach suggestion image 540, the display time of the reach eye emphasis image, the execution time of the reach emphasis effect, and the execution time of the reach action in each reach effect. This makes it easier for the player to recognize each effect compared to when the execution time of each effect is the same.
In addition, in each reach-time performance, the display time of the reach line image 539, the display time of the reach suggestion image 540, the display time of the reach eye emphasis image, the execution time of the reach emphasis performance, and the execution time of the reach action may be reversed from the example shown in Figure 113.
In addition, in each reach-time performance, the display time of the reach line image 539, the display time of the reach suggestion image 540, the display time of the reach eye emphasis image, the execution time of the reach emphasis performance, and the execution time of the reach action may be the same.
Furthermore, each effect in each reach effect is not repeated, but is performed only once.

(Execution mode of the role-playing performance)
Next, the manner in which the special effects are performed will be described.
The role presentation of this embodiment includes first role presentation to third role presentation, and various presentations are performed depending on the role presentation to be executed.
Figure 114 is a diagram showing the execution mode of the first role presentation.
When the first role performance starts, first, as shown in Figure 114 (1), the left movable role 115A starts moving downward.
Next, as shown in Figure 114 (2), the left movable part 115A moves further downward and stops at a position where it overlaps with the center in the vertical direction of the image display unit 114. The left movable part 115A also emits white light.

Next, as shown in Fig. 114(3), a first highlight image of the reel 551 is displayed. The first highlight image of the reel 551 is displayed so as to rotate in a clockwise direction.
Next, as shown in FIG. 114(4), the motion display of the first highlight image 551 of the reel continues.
Next, as shown in Fig. 114(5), the first highlight image 551 of the reel continues to be displayed in the same display mode as Fig. 114(3). The first highlight image 551 of the reel is displayed periodically, with one cycle being 0.8 seconds, which is the period from the time of Fig. 114(3) to the time of Fig. 114(5). However, the cycle of the first highlight image 551 of the reel may be any time.
Although not shown in the figure, thereafter, the first highlighted image 551 of the reel repeats periodic movement display.

Next, as shown in Figure 114 (6), the left movable accessory 115A is turned off. Also, the accessory first emphasized image 551 is not displayed.
Next, as shown in Figure 114 (7), the left movable part 115A starts to move upward.
Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (8), the left movable role piece 115A returns to the position it was in before the first role piece performance started, and the first role piece performance ends.
Here, in the first role performance, the display (operation display) time of the role first emphasized image 551 is 2.4 seconds, the light emission time of the left movable role 115A is 2.7 seconds, and the operation time of the left movable role 115A (execution time of the first role performance) is 3 seconds. However, the execution time of each performance in the first role performance may be any time.

Figures 115 and 116 are diagrams showing how the second role presentation is executed.
When the second role performance is performed, a development image 584 is displayed before the start of the second role performance, as shown in Fig. 115(1). Therefore, the second role performance can also be regarded as a development performance.
Next, as shown in Figure 115 (2), the middle movable part 115B starts to move downward.
Next, as shown in Figure 115 (3), the middle movable role object 115B moves further downward and stops at a position where it overlaps with the upper part of the image display unit 114. In addition, the middle movable role object 115B emits red light.

Next, as shown in Fig. 115 (4), a development emphasis image 554 is displayed. In this embodiment, the development emphasis image 554 is displayed in a dynamic manner. More specifically, in the development emphasis image 554, the displayed image moves from the top to the bottom of the image display unit 114, and an image that has passed the bottom end of the image display unit 114 is displayed again at the top end of the image display unit 114 and moves downward. In the example shown, marks of circle, triangle, square, and diamond are displayed in order from top to bottom in the development emphasis image 554.
Next, as shown in FIG. 115(5), the motion display of the development emphasis image 554 continues, and marks ◇, ◯, △, and □ are displayed in order from top to bottom in the development emphasis image 554.
Next, as shown in FIG. 115(6), the motion display of the development emphasis image 554 continues, and marks □, ◇, ◯, and △ are displayed in order from top to bottom in the development emphasis image 554.
Next, as shown in FIG. 115(7), the motion display of the development emphasis image 554 continues, and in the development emphasis image 554, marks △, □, ◇, and ◯ are displayed in order from top to bottom.

Next, as shown in Fig. 115(8), the moving display of the development emphasis image 554 continues, and marks of O, △, □, and ◇ are displayed in order from top to bottom in the development emphasis image 554. Although not shown, thereafter, the development emphasis image 554 repeats the displays shown in Fig. 115(5) to (8).
In this way, the development emphasis image 554 periodically displays a motion, with one cycle being one second, which is the period from the time shown in Figure 115(4) to the time shown in Figure 115(8). Note that the cycle of the motion display of the development emphasis image 554 may be any time.

Next, as shown in Figure 116 (9), the central movable part 115B is turned off. Also, the development highlight image 554 is no longer displayed.
Next, as shown in Figure 116 (10), the middle movable part 115B starts to move upward.
Next, as shown in Figure 116 (11), the middle movable role 115B returns to the position it was in before the start of the second role performance (development performance), and the second role performance (development performance) ends.
Here, in the second role performance (development performance), the display (operation display) time of the development emphasis image 554 is 6 seconds, the light emission time of the middle movable role performance 115B is 6.5 seconds, and the operation time of the middle movable role performance 115B (execution time of the second role performance (development performance)) is 6.7 seconds. However, the execution time of each performance in the second role performance (development performance) may be any time.

Figure 117 is a diagram showing how the third role presentation is executed.
When the third role performance starts, first, as shown in Figure 117 (1), the left movable role 115A starts moving downward.
Next, as shown in Figure 117 (2), the left movable part 115A moves further downward and stops at a position where it overlaps with the center in the vertical direction of the image display unit 114. In addition, the left movable part 115A emits white light.

Next, as shown in Fig. 117(3), the second highlight image 555 of the reel is displayed. The second highlight image 555 of the reel is displayed so as to rotate in a clockwise direction.
Next, as shown in FIG. 117(4), the motion display of the second highlight image 555 of the reel continues.
Next, as shown in Fig. 117(5), the motion display of the second highlight image 555 of the reel continues, and is displayed in the same display mode as Fig. 117(3). The motion display of the second highlight image 555 of the reel is performed periodically, with one cycle being 0.7 seconds, which is the period from the time of Fig. 117(3) to the time of Fig. 117(5). However, the cycle of the motion display of the second highlight image 555 of the reel may be any time.
Although not shown in the figure, thereafter, the second highlighting image 555 of the reel repeats periodic movement display.

Next, as shown in Figure 117 (6), the left movable accessory 115A is turned off. Also, the accessory second emphasized image 555 is not displayed.
Next, as shown in Figure 117 (7), the left movable part 115A starts to move upward.
Next, as shown in Figure 117 (8), the left movable role piece 115A returns to the position before the start of the third role piece performance, and the third role piece performance ends. Note that the left movable role piece 115A performs the same operation in the third role piece performance and the first role piece performance (see Figure 114).
Here, in the third role performance, the display (operation display) time of the role second emphasized image 555 is 2.1 seconds, the light emission time of the left movable role 115A is 2.7 seconds, and the operation time of the left movable role 115A (execution time of the third role performance) is 3 seconds. However, the execution time of each performance in the third role performance may be any time.

Figure 118 is a diagram showing the execution time of each performance in the first to third role performances.
Figure 118 shows, for each reel performance, the operating time of the movable reel 115 (execution time of the reel performance), the light emitting time of the movable reel 115, the display (operation display) time of the reel highlight image (first reel highlight image 551, development highlight image 554, second reel highlight image 555), and the period of the operation display.

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can vary the operation time of the movable role object 115 depending on the role object performance being executed. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the ways in which the player focuses on the role object performance.
In addition, the performance control unit 300 may make the operating time of the movable role object 115 common in each role object performance.
In addition, the operating time of the movable device 115 in each device performance may be the opposite of the long/short relationship shown in the example of Figure 118.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can vary the light emission time of the movable role object 115 depending on the role object performance being executed. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the ways in which the player is drawn to the role object performance.
In addition, the performance control unit 300 may make the light emission time of the movable role object 115 common in each role object performance.
In addition, the light emission time of the movable role 115 in each role performance may be reversed from the example shown in Figure 118.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can vary the display time (action display time) of the reel highlighting image depending on the reel performance being executed, thereby diversifying the ways in which the player can focus on the reel performance.
Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can change the period of the motion display of the reel highlighting image depending on the reel performance being executed, thereby diversifying the ways in which the player can focus on the reel performance.
The performance control unit 300 may make the display time (action display time) of the reel emphasis image in each reel effect the same, but make the cycle of the action display different. The performance control unit 300 may make the operation display cycle of the reel emphasis image in each reel effect the same, but make the display time (action display time) different. The performance control unit 300 may make both the operation display cycle and the display time (action display time) of the reel emphasis image in each reel effect the same.
In addition, the display time (action display time) of the reel highlighting image in each reel performance may be the opposite of the long/short relationship to the example shown in Fig. 118. In addition, the period of the action display of the reel highlighting image in each reel performance may be the opposite of the long/short relationship to the example shown in Fig. 118.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can make the operation time of the movable role object 115, the light emission time of the movable role object 115, and the display time of the role object highlighting image different for each role object performance. Therefore, it is possible to make each performance more easily noticeable to the player compared to when the execution time of each performance is the same.
In addition, the performance control unit 300 may make the operating time of the movable role object 115, the light emission time of the movable role object 115, and the display time of the role object highlighting image common in each role object performance.
Furthermore, in each reel performance, the operating time of the movable reel 115, the light emission time of the movable reel 115, and the display time of the reel highlighting image may have a reversed long/short relationship to that shown in the example in Figure 118.

(Execution mode of suggestive performance)
Next, a description will be given of how the suggestion effect is executed. The suggestion effect is an effect that suggests the probability (expectation level) that the result of the special symbol lottery will be a big win (small win).
The suggestive effects in this embodiment include a start suggestive effect and an in-progress suggestive effect. The start suggestive effect is an effect that suggests the probability (expectation level) that the result of the special symbol lottery will be a big win (small win) when the SPSP reach effect starts. The in-progress suggestive effect is an effect that suggests the probability (expectation level) that the result of the special symbol lottery will be a big win (small win) while the SPSP reach effect is being executed (after the SPSP reach effect starts).
In addition, the start suggestion effect of this embodiment has execution modes of first to fifth modes, and various effects are performed depending on the mode of execution.
In addition, the in-execution suggestion effects of this embodiment have execution modes of first to fifth modes, and various effects are performed depending on the mode of execution.

Figure 119 shows the suggestive effect at the start of the first mode.
When the start suggestion effect of the first mode starts, first, as shown in Fig. 119(1), an SPSP start image 556 is displayed. The SPSP start image 556 displays the text "SPSP" horizontally in white.
Furthermore, when a start suggestion effect is performed, a start emphasis effect is performed that emphasizes the start suggestion effect. The start emphasis effect can also be considered as an effect that emphasizes the SPSP start image 556. In the first form of start suggestion effect, a first start emphasis effect is performed. In the first start emphasis effect, a first start emphasis image 557 is displayed. The first start emphasis image 557 is an area that overlaps with the display area of the "S" which is the leftmost text portion of the SPSP start image 556, and is displayed on a layer in front of this text portion.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (2), the first start-up emphasis image 557 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the text portion of the SPSP start image 556, which is the second character from the left, "P," and is displayed on a layer in front of this text portion.
Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (3), the first start-up emphasis image 557 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the "S" text portion, which is the third character from the left in the SPSP start image 556, and is displayed on a layer in front of this text portion.
Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (4), the first start-up emphasis image 557 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the "P" text portion, which is the rightmost part of the SPSP start image 556, and is displayed on a layer in front of this text portion.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119(5), the first start emphasis image 557 is hidden, and the first start emphasis effect ends.
Although not shown in the figure, after this, the SPSP start image 556 disappears and the start suggestion effect of the first mode ends.
Here, in the start suggestion effect of the first mode, the display time of the SPSP start image 556 is 2.5 seconds, and the display (action display) time of the first start emphasis image 557 (execution time of the first start emphasis effect) is 2 seconds. However, the execution time of each effect in the start suggestion effect of the first mode may be any time.

Figure 120 shows the start suggestion effect of the second mode.
When the start suggestion effect of the second mode starts, first, as shown in Fig. 120(1), an SPSP start image 556 is displayed. The SPSP start image 556 displays the text "SPSP" in red horizontally.
Furthermore, in the start suggestion effect of the second mode, a second start emphasis effect is performed. In the second start emphasis effect, a second start emphasis image 558 is displayed. The second start emphasis image 558 is displayed above the "P" that is the rightmost text portion of the SPSP start image 556.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120(2), the second start emphasis image 558 is displayed in motion so as to move above the "S" which is the third character from the left in the text portion of the SPSP start image 556.
Next, as shown in FIG. 120(3), the second start emphasis image 558 is displayed in motion so as to move above the "P" which is the second character from the left in the text portion of the SPSP start image 556.
Next, as shown in FIG. 120(4), the second start emphasis image 558 is displayed in motion so as to move above the "S" that is the leftmost text portion of the SPSP start image 556.
Next, as shown in FIG. 120(5), the second start-up emphasis image 558 is displayed in motion so as to move to the part of the SPSP start image 556 between the second text character from the left, "P," and the third text character from the left, "S."

Next, as shown in FIG. 120(6), the second start emphasis image 558 is hidden, and the second start emphasis effect ends.
Although not shown in the figure, after this, the SPSP start image 556 disappears and the start suggestion effect of the second mode ends.
Here, in the start suggestion effect of the second mode, the display time of the SPSP start image 556 is 3.5 seconds, and the display (action display) time of the second start emphasis image 558 (execution time of the second start emphasis effect) is 2.8 seconds. However, the execution time of each effect in the start suggestion effect of the second mode may be any time.

Figure 121 shows the start suggestion effect of the third mode.
When the start suggestion effect of the third mode starts, first, as shown in Fig. 121 (1), an SPSP start image 556 is displayed. In the SPSP start image 556, two "SP" texts are displayed in red, one above the other.

Next, in the start suggestion effect of the third aspect, a third start emphasis effect is performed. In the third start emphasis effect, as shown in FIG. 121 (2), the SPSP start image 556 is displayed in motion. More specifically, the "SP" text portion at the top of the SPSP start image 556 is displayed in motion so as to expand.
Next, as shown in FIG. 121(3), the upper text portion "SP" of the SPSP start image 556 is displayed in a manner that causes the "SP" portion to shrink and the lower text portion "SP" to expand.
Next, as shown in FIG. 121(4), the upper text portion "SP" of the SPSP start image 556 is displayed again in an enlarged manner.

Next, as shown in Figure 121 (5), the upper text portion "SP" and the lower text portion "SP" of the SPSP start image 556 are both displayed in a shrinking manner, and the third start-up emphasis effect ends.
Although not shown in the figure, after this, the SPSP start image 556 disappears and the start suggestion effect of the third mode ends.
Here, in the start suggestion effect of the third aspect, the display time of the SPSP start image 556 is 3.3 seconds, and the execution time of the third start emphasis effect is 2.7 seconds. However, the execution time of each effect in the start suggestion effect of the third aspect may be any time.

Figure 122 shows the start suggestion effect of the fourth mode.
When the start suggestion effect of the fourth mode starts, first, as shown in Fig. 122 (1), an SPSP start image 556 is displayed. The SPSP start image 556 displays the text "SPSP" vertically in white.

Next, in the start suggestion effect of the fourth aspect, a fourth start emphasis effect is performed. In the fourth start emphasis effect, as shown in FIG. 122 (2), a third start emphasis image 559 is displayed in motion. In the illustrated example, the third start emphasis image 559 is displayed around the "S" which is the uppermost text portion of the SPSP start image 556.
Next, as shown in FIG. 122(3), the third start emphasis image 559 is displayed in motion so as to move around the "P" which is the second character from the top of the text portion of the SPSP start image 556.
Next, as shown in FIG. 122(4), the third start emphasis image 559 is displayed in motion so as to move around the "S" which is the third letter from the top of the text portion of the SPSP start image 556.
Next, as shown in FIG. 122(5), the third start emphasis image 559 is displayed in motion so as to move around the "P" which is the bottommost text portion of the SPSP start image 556.

Next, as shown in FIG. 122(6), the third start emphasis image 559 is hidden, and the fourth start emphasis effect ends.
Although not shown in the figure, after this, the SPSP start image 556 disappears and the start suggestion effect of the fourth mode ends.
Here, in the start suggestion effect of the fourth mode, the display time of the SPSP start image 556 is 2 seconds, and the display (action display) time of the third start emphasis image 559 (execution time of the fourth start emphasis effect) is 1.6 seconds. However, the execution time of each effect in the start suggestion effect of the fourth mode may be any time.

Figure 123 shows the suggestive effects at the start of the fifth mode.
When the start suggestion effect of the fifth mode starts, first, as shown in Fig. 123 (1), an SPSP start image 556 is displayed. The SPSP start image 556 displays the text "SPSP" arranged diagonally in white.

Next, in the start suggestion effect of the fifth aspect, a fifth start emphasis effect is performed. In the fifth start emphasis effect, as shown in FIG. 123(2), a fourth start emphasis image 560 is displayed in motion. In the illustrated example, the fourth start emphasis image 560 is displayed so as to cover the SPSP start image 556.
Next, the fourth start emphasis image 560 is displayed in an enlarged manner. At this time, the fourth start emphasis image 560 is displayed in a layer in front of the left decorative pattern 41 in an area overlapping the display area of the left decorative pattern 41.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(4), the fourth start emphasis image 560 is hidden, and the fifth start emphasis effect ends.
Although not shown in the figure, after this, the SPSP start image 556 disappears and the start suggestion effect of the fifth mode ends.
Here, in the start suggestion effect of the fifth aspect, the display time of the SPSP start image 556 is 1.5 seconds, and the display (action display) time of the fourth start emphasis image 560 (execution time of the fifth start emphasis effect) is 1.1 seconds. However, the execution time of each effect in the start suggestion effect of the fifth aspect may be any time.

In the following, when the first to fifth start emphasis effects are described without any particular distinction, they may be simply referred to as start emphasis effects.
In addition, each effect in the start suggestion effect (display of the SPSP start image 556, execution of the start emphasis effect) is not repeated and is performed only once.

Here, the start suggestion effect indicates the probability (expectation) of a jackpot game being executed depending on the execution mode. In this embodiment, the start suggestion effect of the second mode and the start suggestion effect of the third mode have a higher probability (expectation) of a jackpot game being executed when executed than the start suggestion effect of the first mode, the start suggestion effect of the fourth mode, and the start suggestion effect of the fifth mode. In other words, the probability (expectation) of a jackpot game being executed when executed is higher when the display color of the SPSP start image 556 is red (see Figures 120 (6) and 121 (5)) than when the display color of the SPSP start image 556 is white (see Figures 119 (5), 122 (6), and 123 (4)).

In addition, the probability (expectation) of a jackpot game being executed may be higher when the start-up suggestion effect of the third mode is executed than when the start-up suggestion effect of the second mode is executed, or the probability (expectation) of a jackpot game being executed may be higher when the start-up suggestion effect of the second mode is executed than when the start-up suggestion effect of the third mode is executed.
Furthermore, in the order of the start suggestion effect of the first mode, the start suggestion effect of the fourth mode, and the start suggestion effect of the fifth mode, the later the order, the higher the probability (expectation) of a jackpot game being executed when executed. Furthermore, in the order of the start suggestion effect of the first mode, the start suggestion effect of the fourth mode, and the start suggestion effect of the fifth mode, the earlier the order, the higher the probability (expectation) of a jackpot game being executed when executed.
Furthermore, the probability (expectation) of a jackpot game being executed when the start-up suggestion effect of the fourth mode and the start-up suggestion effect of the fifth mode is executed may be higher than the start-up suggestion effect of the second mode and the start-up suggestion effect of the third mode. In this case, the probability (expectation) of a jackpot game being executed when the start-up suggestion effect of the fifth mode is executed may be higher than the start-up suggestion effect of the fourth mode, or the probability (expectation) of a jackpot game being executed when the start-up suggestion effect of the fourth mode is executed may be higher than the start-up suggestion effect of the fifth mode.

Here, the SPSP start image 556 and the start emphasis image are regarded as suggestive images that suggest the likelihood of a jackpot game being executed. The SPSP start image 556 is regarded as a specific portion of the suggestive image, and the start emphasis image is regarded as an emphasis portion that emphasizes the specific portion in the suggestive image.
Also, like the start suggestion effect of the third aspect, the part of the SPSP start image 556 that displays the action (see Figure 121 (2)) can be seen as an emphasis part that emphasizes a specific part (SPSP start image 556).
That is, in the suggestion image, the specific portion and the highlighting portion may be provided integrally or separately.

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can change the display mode of the start emphasis image depending on the mode of the SPSP start image 556 to be displayed.
In this case, the variety of aspects of the SPSP start image 556 can be more prominent.

Figure 124 shows the first mode of in-play suggestion effect.
When the in-execution suggestion effect of the first mode starts, first, as shown in Fig. 124 (1), an SPSP suggestion image 561 is displayed. The SPSP suggestion image 561 displays the text "Chance!?" in white.
Furthermore, when an in-execution suggestion effect is performed, an in-execution emphasis effect is performed to emphasize the in-execution suggestion effect. The in-execution emphasis effect can also be considered as an effect that emphasizes the SPSP in-execution suggestion image 561 (SPSP reach effect). In the first type of in-execution suggestion effect, a first in-execution emphasis effect is performed. In the first in-execution emphasis effect, a first in-execution emphasis image 562 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 124 (2). In the illustrated example, the first in-execution emphasis image 562 is displayed on the left periphery of the SPSP in-execution suggestion image 561. Furthermore, in the first in-execution emphasis effect, the first in-execution emphasis image 562 is displayed in motion.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124(3), the first execution highlight image 562 is displayed in a manner that moves to the right side of the SPSP suggestion image 561.
Next, as shown in FIG. 124(4), the first execution highlight image 562 is hidden, and the first execution highlight effect ends.
Although not shown in the figure, after this, the SPSP suggestion image 561 is hidden and the first mode of suggestion during execution ends.
Here, in the first mode of the in-execution suggestion effect, the display time of the SPSP in-execution suggestion image 561 is 1.5 seconds, and the display time (action display) of the first in-execution highlight image 562 (execution time of the first in-execution highlight effect) is 0.6 seconds. However, the execution time of each effect in the in-execution suggestion effect of the first mode may be any time.

Figure 125 shows the in-execution suggestion effect of the second mode.
When the in-execution suggestion effect of the second mode starts, first, as shown in Fig. 125 (1), an SPSP suggestion image 561 is displayed. The SPSP suggestion image 561 displays the text "Expectations!" in red.

Next, in the second mode of the in-play suggestion effect, a second in-play emphasis effect is performed. In the second in-play emphasis effect, as shown in FIG. 125(2), a second in-play emphasis image 563 is displayed in motion. In the illustrated example, the second in-play emphasis image 563 is displayed so as to cover the text portion of "期" in the SPSP suggestion image 561.
Next, as shown in FIG. 125(3), the second execution highlight image 563 is displayed so as to move to a position covering the text portion of "wait" in the SPSP suggestion image 561.
Next, as shown in FIG. 125(4), the second execution highlight image 563 is displayed so as to move to a position covering the "!" text portion of the SPSP suggestion image 561.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125(5), the second execution highlight image 563 is hidden, and the second execution highlight effect ends.
Although not shown in the figure, after this, the SPSP suggestion image 561 is hidden and the second mode of suggestion during execution ends.
Here, in the in-execution suggestion effect of the second mode, the display time of the SPSP in-execution suggestion image 561 is 2 seconds, and the display time (action display) of the second in-execution highlight image 563 (execution time of the second in-execution highlight effect) is 1.2 seconds. However, the execution time of each effect in the in-execution suggestion effect of the second mode may be any time.

Figure 126 shows the in-execution suggestion effect of the third mode.
When the execution suggestion effect of the third mode is started, first, the SPSP suggestion image 561 is displayed in red as shown in Fig. 126 (1). More specifically, the SPSP suggestion image 561 is displayed in motion so as to move from the left end to the right side of the image display unit 114, and the "DOKI!" text portion of the SPSP suggestion image 561 is displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 126 (2), the SPSP suggestion image 561 is displayed in an action that moves further to the right, and the entire SPSP suggestion image 561, the text "Thump! Thump!", is displayed.
Next, in the third mode of the in-play suggestion effect, a third in-play emphasis effect is performed. In the third in-play emphasis effect, as shown in FIG. 126(3), the text portion "DOKI!" on the left side of the SPSP suggestion image 561 is displayed in an enlarged manner.
Next, as shown in FIG. 126(4), the text portion "Doki!" on the left side of the SPSP suggestion image 561 is displayed in an operational manner so that it shrinks and the text portion "Doki!" on the right side expands.
Next, as shown in Figure 126 (5), the text portion "Doki!" on the right side of the SPSP suggestion image 561 is displayed in a shrinking motion, and the third execution highlighting effect ends.

Next, as shown in Figure 126 (6), the suggestion image 561 during SPSP is displayed in an action such that it moves to the right, and only the text portion "Doki!" on the left side of the suggestion image 561 during SPSP is displayed.
Next, as shown in Figure 126 (7), the SPSP suggestion image 561 is displayed to move further to the right, causing the SPSP suggestion image 561 to disappear and the third mode of suggestion during execution to end.
Here, in the in-execution suggestion effect of the third aspect, the display time of the SPSP suggestion image 561 is 2.5 seconds, and the execution time of the third in-execution highlight effect is 1.4 seconds. However, the execution time of each effect in the in-execution suggestion effect of the third aspect may be any time.

Figure 127 shows the fourth mode of in-play suggestion effect.
When the in-execution suggestion effect of the fourth mode starts, first, as shown in Fig. 127 (1), an SPSP suggestion image 561 is displayed. The SPSP suggestion image 561 displays the text "Some chance!?" in white.

Next, in the fourth mode of the in-play suggestion effect, a fourth in-play emphasis effect is performed. In the fourth in-play emphasis effect, as shown in FIG. 127(2), a third in-play emphasis image 564 is displayed in motion. In the illustrated example, the third in-play emphasis image 564 is displayed around the text portion "!?" in the SPSP suggestion image 561.
Next, as shown in FIG. 127(3), the third execution highlight image 564 is displayed in such a manner that it moves to the periphery of the text portion of "nance" in the SPSP suggestion image 561.
Next, as shown in FIG. 127(4), the third execution highlight image 564 is displayed in such a manner that it moves to the periphery of the text portion of the "cha" in the SPSP suggestion image 561.
Next, as shown in FIG. 127(5), the third execution highlight image 564 is displayed in such a manner that it moves to the periphery of the text portion of the SPSP suggestion image 561, "ya."

Next, as shown in FIG. 127(6), the third execution highlight image 564 is hidden, and the fourth execution highlight effect ends.
Although not shown in the figure, after this, the SPSP suggestion image 561 is hidden and the fourth mode of suggestion during execution ends.
Here, in the fourth mode of the in-execution suggestion effect, the display time of the SPSP in-execution suggestion image 561 is 1.4 seconds, and the display time (action display) of the third in-execution highlight image 564 (execution time of the fourth in-execution highlight effect) is 1.2 seconds. However, the execution time of each effect in the in-execution suggestion effect of the fourth mode may be any time.

Figure 128 shows the in-execution suggestion effect of the fifth mode.
When the in-execution suggestion effect of the fifth mode is started, first, as shown in Fig. 128 (1), an SPSP suggestion image 561 is displayed. The SPSP suggestion image 561 displays the text "Maybe!?" More specifically, in the SPSP suggestion image 561, the text portion "Maybe!?" is displayed in white, and the portion "Maybe!?" is displayed in red.

Next, in the fifth aspect of the in-play suggestion effect, a fifth in-play emphasis effect is performed. In the fifth in-play emphasis effect, as shown in FIG. 128(2), a fourth in-play emphasis image 565 is displayed in motion. In the illustrated example, an image simulating light as the fourth in-play emphasis image 565 is displayed around the text portion of "Good" in the SPSP suggestion image 561.
Next, as shown in FIG. 128 (3), the fourth execution highlight image 565 changes to a display form that resembles a flame, and is displayed in such a way that it covers the text portion of the "mo" in the SPSP suggestion image 561.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(4), the fourth execution highlight image 565 is hidden, and the fifth execution highlight effect ends.
Although not shown in the figure, after this, the SPSP suggestion image 561 is hidden and the suggestion effect during execution of the fifth mode ends.
Here, in the in-execution suggestion effect of the fifth aspect, the display time of the SPSP in-execution suggestion image 561 is 2 seconds, and the display time (action display) of the fourth in-execution highlight image 565 (execution time of the fifth in-execution highlight effect) is 1 second. However, the execution time of each effect in the in-execution suggestion effect of the fifth aspect may be any time.

In addition, when describing the first to fifth execution emphasis effects without making any particular distinction, they may be simply referred to as execution emphasis effects.
In addition, each effect in the in-execution suggestion effect (display of the SPSP in-execution suggestion image 561, execution of the in-execution highlight effect) is not repeated, but is performed only once.

Here, the in-play suggestion effect indicates the probability (expectation) of a jackpot game being executed depending on the execution mode. In this embodiment, the in-play suggestion effect of the second mode, the in-play suggestion effect of the third mode, and the in-play suggestion effect of the fifth mode have a higher probability (expectation) of a jackpot game being executed when executed than the in-play suggestion effect of the first mode and the in-play suggestion effect of the fourth mode. In other words, the probability (expectation) of a jackpot game being executed when executed is higher when the display color of the SPSP suggestion image 561 is red (see Figures 125 (5), 126 (5), and 128 (4)) than when the display color of the SPSP suggestion image 561 is white (see Figures 124 (4) and 127 (6)).

Note that the earlier the in-play suggestion effect of the second mode, the in-play suggestion effect of the third mode, and the in-play suggestion effect of the fifth mode are in the order, the higher the probability (expectation) that a jackpot game will be executed when executed. Also, the later the in-play suggestion effect of the second mode, the in-play suggestion effect of the third mode, and the in-play suggestion effect of the fifth mode are in the order, the higher the probability (expectation) that a jackpot game will be executed when executed.
In addition, the probability (expectation) of a jackpot game being executed may be higher when the in-execution suggestion effect of the fourth mode is executed than when the in-execution suggestion effect of the first mode is executed, or the probability (expectation) of a jackpot game being executed may be higher when the in-execution suggestion effect of the first mode is executed than when the in-execution suggestion effect of the fourth mode is executed.
In addition, the probability (expectation) of a jackpot game being executed may be higher when the in-execution suggestion effect of the fourth mode is executed than when the in-execution suggestion effect of the first mode is executed, and the probability (expectation) of a jackpot game being executed may be higher when the in-execution suggestion effect of the fifth mode is executed than when the in-execution suggestion effect of the fourth mode is executed.

Furthermore, the probability (expectation) of a jackpot game being executed when the in-play suggestion effect of the second mode, the in-play suggestion effect of the third mode, and the in-play suggestion effect of the fifth mode is higher than the start suggestion effect of the first mode, the start suggestion effect of the fourth mode, and the start suggestion effect of the fifth mode. In other words, the probability (expectation) of a jackpot game being executed when the SPSP in-play suggestion image 561 is displayed in red (see FIGS. 125(5), 126(5), 128(4)) is higher than when the SPSP start image 556 is displayed in white (see FIGS. 119(5), 122(6), 123(4)).
Furthermore, the probability (expectation) of a jackpot game being executed when the start suggestion effect of the second mode and the start suggestion effect of the third mode is higher than the execution suggestion effect of the first mode and the execution suggestion effect of the fourth mode. In other words, the probability (expectation) of a jackpot game being executed when the SPSP start image 556 is displayed in red (see FIGS. 120(6) and 121(5)) is higher than the probability (expectation) of a jackpot game being executed when the SPSP execution suggestion image 561 is displayed in white (see FIGS. 124(4) and 127(6)). However, the probability (expectation) of a jackpot game being executed when the execution suggestion effect of the fourth mode may be higher than the start suggestion effect of the second mode and the start suggestion effect of the third mode.
Furthermore, the suggestive effect during execution of the fifth mode may have a higher probability (expectation) of a jackpot game being executed when executed than the suggestive effect at the start of the second mode and the suggestive effect at the start of the third mode.

In addition, the probability (expectation) of a jackpot game being executed may be higher when the suggestive effect during execution of the first mode is executed than when the suggestive effect at the start of the first mode is executed, or the probability (expectation) of a jackpot game being executed may be higher when the suggestive effect at the start of the first mode is executed than when the suggestive effect during execution of the first mode.
In addition, the probability (expectation level) of a jackpot game being executed may be higher when the suggestive effect during execution of the second mode is executed than when the suggestive effect at the start of the second mode is executed, or the probability (expectation level) of a jackpot game being executed may be higher when the suggestive effect at the start of the second mode is executed than when the suggestive effect at the start of the second mode is executed.
In addition, the probability (expectation level) of a jackpot game being executed may be higher when the suggestive effect during execution of the third mode is executed than when the suggestive effect at the start of the third mode is executed, or the probability (expectation level) of a jackpot game being executed may be higher when the suggestive effect at the start of the third mode is executed than when the suggestive effect at the start of execution of the third mode is executed.
In addition, the probability (expectation level) of a jackpot game being executed may be higher when the execution suggestion effect of the fourth mode is executed than when the start suggestion effect of the fourth mode is executed, or the probability (expectation level) of a jackpot game being executed may be higher when the start suggestion effect of the fourth mode is executed than when the execution suggestion effect of the fourth mode is executed.
In addition, the probability (expectation level) of a jackpot game being executed may be higher when the suggestive effect during execution of the fifth mode is executed than when the suggestive effect at the start of the fifth mode is executed, or the probability (expectation level) of a jackpot game being executed may be higher when the suggestive effect at the start of the fifth mode is executed than when the suggestive effect at the start of the fifth mode is executed.

The SPSP suggestion image 561 and the execution emphasis image are regarded as suggestion images that suggest the likelihood of a jackpot game being executed. The SPSP suggestion image 561 is regarded as a specific part of the suggestion image, and the execution emphasis image is regarded as an emphasis part that emphasizes the specific part in the suggestion image.
Furthermore, like the suggestion effect during execution of the third aspect, the part of the suggestion image 561 during SPSP that displays the action (see Figure 126 (3)) can be regarded as an emphasis part that emphasizes the specific part (the suggestion image 561 during SPSP).
That is, in the suggestion image, the specific portion and the highlighting portion may be provided integrally or separately.

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can change the display mode of the execution highlight image depending on the mode of the SPSP suggestion image 561 to be displayed.
In this case, the variety of aspects of the SPSP suggestion image 561 can be made more prominent.

Figure 129 (1) is a diagram showing the execution time of each effect in the start suggestion effects of the first to fifth modes.
Figure 129 (1) shows the display time of the SPSP start image 556 and the execution time of the start emphasis effect for each execution mode of the start suggestion effect.
Also, Figure 129 (2) is a diagram showing the execution time of each effect in the in-progress suggestion effects of the first to fifth modes.
Figure 129 (2) shows the display time of the SPSP suggestion image 561 and the execution time of the execution highlighting effect for each execution mode of the execution suggestion effect.

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can make the execution time of the emphasis performance different between the start suggestion performance and the ongoing suggestion performance (see Figures 129 (1) and (2)).
Therefore, the player can feel the variety of ways to focus on the SPSP reach effect depending on the suggestive effect being executed.
In addition, the performance control unit 300 may make the execution time of the emphasis performance the same for the start suggestion performance and the ongoing suggestion performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can vary both the display time of the SPSP start image 556 and the execution time of the start emphasis performance depending on the execution mode of the start suggestion performance.
Therefore, the player can be made to feel the variety of ways to focus on the SPSP reach effect depending on the execution mode of the start suggestion effect that is executed.
The performance control unit 300 may make the display time of the SPSP start image 556 the same in each execution mode of the start suggestion performance, and may make the execution time of the start emphasis performance different. Also, in each execution mode of the start suggestion performance, the execution time of the start emphasis performance may be the same in each execution mode of the start suggestion performance, and may make the display time of the SPSP start image 556 different. Also, in each execution mode of the start suggestion performance, the display time of the SPSP start image 556 and the execution time of the start emphasis performance may both be the same.
In addition, the display time of the SPSP start image 556 in each execution mode of the start suggestion effect may be the opposite of the length relationship shown in the example of Fig. 129(1). In addition, the execution time of the start emphasis effect in each execution mode of the start suggestion effect may be the opposite of the length relationship shown in the example of Fig. 129(1).

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can vary both the display time of the SPSP suggestion image 561 and the execution time of the execution highlighting effect depending on the execution mode of the execution suggestion effect.
Therefore, the player can be made to feel the variety of ways to draw attention to the SPSP reach effect depending on the execution mode of the execution suggestion effect being executed.
The performance control unit 300 may make the display time of the SPSP suggestion image 561 common to all execution modes of the in-progress suggestion performance, and may make the execution time of the in-progress emphasis performance different. Also, the performance control unit 300 may make the execution time of the in-progress emphasis performance common to all execution modes of the in-progress suggestion performance, and may make the display time of the SPSP suggestion image 561 different. Also, the display time of the SPSP suggestion image 561 and the execution time of the in-progress emphasis performance may both be common to all execution modes of the in-progress suggestion performance.
Furthermore, the display time of the SPSP suggestion image 561 in each execution mode of the in-execution suggestion effect may have a length relationship that is the opposite of that in the example shown in FIG. 129(2). Furthermore, the execution time of the in-execution emphasis effect in each execution mode of the in-execution suggestion effect may have a length relationship that is the opposite of that in the example shown in FIG. 129(2). Furthermore, the display time of the SPSP suggestion image 561 in each execution mode of the in-execution suggestion effect and the execution time of the in-execution emphasis effect may have a length relationship that is the opposite of that in the example shown in FIG. 129(2).

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can make the display time of the SPSP start image 556 and the execution time of the start emphasis performance different in each execution mode of the start suggestion performance.
Therefore, compared to when the display time of the SPSP start image 556 and the execution time of the start emphasis effect are the same, it is possible to make it easier for the player to focus on each of the display time of the SPSP start image 556 and the execution time of the start emphasis effect.
In addition, the performance control unit 300 may make the display time of the SPSP start image 556 and the execution time of the start emphasis performance the same in each execution mode of the start suggestion performance.
Furthermore, the display time of the SPSP start image 556 and the execution time of the start emphasis effect in each execution mode of the start suggestion effect may be in the opposite length relationship to the example shown in Figure 129 (1).

(Execution mode of big win effect)
Next, a description will be given of how the big win effect is executed. The big win effect is an effect that notifies or suggests that the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win (small win).
The jackpot presentation in this embodiment includes first to fifth jackpot presentations, and various presentations are performed depending on the jackpot presentation that is executed.
Figures 130 and 131 show how the first big win presentation is executed.
When the first jackpot effect is executed, an eighth post-operation emphasis image 520 is displayed before the start of the first jackpot effect, as shown in FIG. 130(1).

Next, when the first jackpot presentation starts, as shown in Figure 130 (2), first, a first jackpot notification sound is output to notify or suggest that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot (small jackpot).
Next, as shown in FIG. 130(3), a vibration effect is started.
Next, as shown in Fig. 130 (4), the effect button 161 starts to emit light in the colors of the rainbow. More specifically, the effect button 161 emits light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple, so that the effect button 161 appears to emit light in the colors of the rainbow. The effect button 161 also periodically emits light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130 (5), a first jackpot emphasis image 566 is displayed. In the illustrated example, in the first jackpot emphasis image 566, marks are displayed at the four corners of the display area of the image display unit 114. More specifically, marks of circle, triangle, square, and diamond are displayed in the upper right corner, lower right corner, lower left corner, and upper left corner of the image display unit 114, in that order. Furthermore, the first jackpot emphasis image 566 is displayed in a manner that rotates clockwise.
Next, as shown in FIG. 130(6), the lamp L starts to emit light in rainbow colors. More specifically, the lamp L emits light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple, so that the lamp L appears to emit light in rainbow colors. The lamp L also periodically emits light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple. In addition, the first jackpot highlight image 566 continues to display the action, and the ◇, ◯, △, and □ marks are displayed in the upper right corner, lower right corner, lower left corner, and upper left corner of the image display section 114, in that order.

Next, as shown in Figure 130 (7), the bonus feature performance starts, and the middle movable bonus feature 115B starts moving downward. This bonus feature performance can also be considered as the fourth bonus feature performance. In addition, in the first jackpot highlight image 566, the action display continues, and marks of □, ◇, ◯, △ are displayed in the upper right corner, lower right corner, lower left corner, and upper left corner of the image display section 114 in this order.
Next, as shown in FIG. 130 (8), the middle movable part 115B moves further downward and stops at a position where it overlaps with the center of the image display unit 114 in the vertical direction. The middle movable part 115B also begins to emit light in rainbow colors. More specifically, the middle movable part 115B emits light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple, so that the middle movable part 115B appears to be emitting light in rainbow colors. The middle movable part 115B also periodically emits light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple. In addition, the first jackpot highlight image 566 continues to display the operation, and △, □, ◇, and ◯ marks are displayed in the upper right corner, lower right corner, lower left corner, and upper left corner of the image display unit 114, in that order.

Next, as shown in Figure 131 (9), the action display continues in the first jackpot emphasis image 566, and marks of circle, triangle, square, and ◇ are displayed in the upper right corner, lower right corner, lower left corner, and upper left corner of the image display section 114, in that order, resulting in the same display mode as Figure 130 (5).
Although not shown, thereafter, the first big win emphasis image 566 periodically repeats the operation displays shown in Figures 130(6) to 130(8) and Figure 131(9).
Next, as shown in FIG. 131 (10), the vibration effect ends.
Next, as shown in FIG. 131 (11), the effect button 161 stops emitting light in rainbow colors and goes out.
Next, as shown in FIG. 131 (12), the first jackpot highlight image 566 is hidden.

Next, as shown in Figure 131 (13), the center movable role 115B moves upward and stops. Note that Figure 131 (13) shows the center movable role 115B, but at this time, the center movable role 115B has returned to the position before the role performance started.
Next, as shown in FIG. 131 (14), the output of the first jackpot notification sound ends.
Next, as shown in FIG. 131 (15), the lamp L stops emitting light in rainbow colors and emits white light.
Next, as shown in Figure 131 (16), the center movable role object 115B stops emitting light in rainbow colors and goes out. This ends the first big win effect.

Figure 132 shows the execution timing of each effect in the first jackpot effect.
In the first jackpot presentation, first, at time T0, output of a jackpot notification sound (first jackpot notification sound) is started.
Next, at time T1, a vibration effect is started.
Next, at time T2, the effect button 161 begins to emit light in rainbow colors.
Next, at time T3, the display of the jackpot emphasis image (first jackpot emphasis image 566) starts.
Next, at time T4, the lamp L starts to emit light in rainbow colors.
Next, at time T5, the role effect (fourth role effect) starts.
Next, at time T6, the middle movable part 115B begins to emit light in rainbow colors.

Next, at time T7, the vibration effect ends. The execution time of the vibration effect is 13.2 seconds.
Next, at time T8, the rainbow-colored illumination of the effect button 161 ends. The cycle of illumination of the effect button 161 in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple (the time from when the effect button 161 starts emitting red light until it starts emitting red light again) is 1.5 seconds. The rainbow-colored illumination time of the effect button 161 is 13.5 seconds.
Next, at time T9, the jackpot emphasis image (first jackpot emphasis image 566) is hidden. The period of the dynamic display of the first jackpot emphasis image 566 is 1.6 seconds. The display (dynamic display) time of the first jackpot emphasis image 566 is 13.8 seconds.

Next, at time T10, the fourth bonus effect ends. The execution time of the fourth bonus effect is 14.1 seconds.
Next, at time T11, the output of the jackpot notification sound (first jackpot notification sound) ends. The output time of the first jackpot notification sound is 15 seconds.
Next, at time T12, the rainbow light emission of the lamp L ends. The cycle of the lamp L emitting light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple (the time from when the lamp L starts emitting red light to when it starts emitting red light again) is 1.7 seconds. The rainbow light emission time of the lamp L is 14.7 seconds.
Next, at time T13, the rainbow-colored illumination of the middle movable part 115B ends. The cycle of illumination of the middle movable part 115B in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple (the time from when the middle movable part 115B starts emitting red light to when it starts emitting red light again) is 1.4 seconds. The rainbow-colored illumination time of the middle movable part 115B is 14.4 seconds.
The execution time and cycle of each effect in the first big win effect may be any time.

Figures 133 and 134 show how the second big win presentation is executed.
When the second jackpot effect is executed, a first post-operation emphasis image 510 is displayed before the start of the second jackpot effect, as shown in FIG. 133(1).
Next, when the second jackpot presentation starts, as shown in Figure 133 (2), first, a second jackpot notification sound is output to notify or suggest that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot (small jackpot).
Next, as shown in FIG. 133(3), a vibration effect is started.
Next, as shown in Fig. 133 (4), the effect button 161 starts to emit light in the colors of the rainbow. More specifically, the effect button 161 emits light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple, so that the effect button 161 appears to emit light in the colors of the rainbow. The effect button 161 also periodically emits light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133 (5), a second jackpot emphasis image 567 is displayed. In the illustrated example, in the second jackpot emphasis image 567, marks are displayed in the upper right corner and the lower left corner of the image display section 114. More specifically, marks ☆ and ▽ are displayed in the upper right corner and the lower left corner of the image display section 114, in that order. In addition, the second jackpot emphasis image 567 is displayed in a manner that rotates clockwise.
Next, as shown in FIG. 133(6), the lamp L starts to emit light in rainbow colors. More specifically, the lamp L emits light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple, so that the lamp L appears to emit light in rainbow colors. The lamp L also periodically emits light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple. In addition, the second jackpot highlight image 567 continues to display an action, and a star and a groove are displayed in the lower right corner and upper left corner of the image display section 114, respectively.

Next, as shown in Figure 133 (7), the action display continues in the second jackpot emphasis image 567, and ▽ and ☆ marks are displayed in the upper right corner and lower left corner of the image display section 114, respectively.
Next, as shown in Figure 133 (8), the action display continues in the second jackpot emphasis image 567, and ▽ and ☆ marks are displayed in the lower right corner and upper left corner of the image display section 114, respectively.

Next, as shown in Figure 134 (9), the action display continues in the second jackpot emphasis image 567, and the ☆ and ▽ marks are displayed in the upper right corner and lower left corner of the image display section 114, respectively, resulting in the same display mode as Figure 133 (5).
Although not shown, thereafter, the second jackpot emphasis image 567 periodically repeats the operation displays shown in Figures 133(6) to (8) and Figure 134(9).
Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (10), the vibration effect ends.
Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (11), the effect button 161 stops emitting light in rainbow colors and goes out.
Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (12), the second jackpot highlight image 567 is hidden.
Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (13), the output of the second jackpot notification sound ends.
Next, as shown in Figure 134 (14), the lamp L stops emitting rainbow colors and emits white light, thereby ending the second big win effect.

Here, the output time of the second big win notification sound is 9 seconds.
The vibration effect lasts for 7.8 seconds.
The cycle of the illumination of the effect button 161 in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple (the time from when the effect button 161 starts emitting red light until when it starts emitting red light again) is 2.1 seconds. The illumination time of the effect button 161 in the rainbow colors is 8.1 seconds.
The period of the second jackpot emphasis image 567 is 2.2 seconds, and the display (movement display) time of the second jackpot emphasis image 567 is 8.4 seconds.
The cycle of lamp L emitting light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and violet (the time from when lamp L starts emitting red light to when it starts emitting red light again) is 2.3 seconds, and the duration of lamp L emitting light in the rainbow colors is 8.7 seconds.
In addition, the execution time and cycle of each effect in the second jackpot effect may be any time.

In addition, in the second jackpot presentation, the timing at which the jackpot notification sound (second jackpot notification sound) starts to be output, the timing at which the vibration presentation starts, the timing at which the presentation button 161 starts to emit light in rainbow colors, the timing at which the jackpot highlight image (second jackpot highlight image 567) starts to be displayed, the timing at which the lamp L starts to emit light in rainbow colors, the timing at which the vibration presentation ends, the timing at which the presentation button 161 stops to emit light in rainbow colors, the timing at which the jackpot highlight image (second jackpot highlight image 567) stops to be displayed, the timing at which the jackpot notification sound (second jackpot notification sound) starts to be output, and the timing at which the lamp L stops to emit light in rainbow colors are all the same as in the first jackpot presentation (see Figure 132).

Figures 135 and 136 show how the third jackpot effect is executed.
When the third jackpot effect is executed, a 14th post-operation emphasis image 526 is displayed before the start of the third jackpot effect, as shown in FIG. 135(1).
Next, when the third jackpot presentation starts, as shown in Figure 135 (2), first, a third jackpot notification sound is output to notify or suggest that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot (small jackpot).
Next, as shown in FIG. 135(3), a vibration effect is started.
Next, as shown in Fig. 135 (4), the effect button 161 starts to emit light in the colors of the rainbow. More specifically, the effect button 161 emits light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple, so that the effect button 161 appears to emit light in the colors of the rainbow. The effect button 161 also periodically emits light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple.

135(5), a third jackpot emphasis image 568 is displayed. In the example shown, in the third jackpot emphasis image 568, a star mark is displayed in the center of the image display section 114, and a circle mark is displayed in the upper part of the image display section 114. Furthermore, the third jackpot emphasis image 568 is displayed in a clockwise direction.
Next, as shown in FIG. 135 (6), the lamp L begins to emit light in rainbow colors. More specifically, the lamp L emits light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple, so that the lamp L appears to emit light in rainbow colors. The lamp L also periodically emits light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple. In addition, the third jackpot highlight image 568 continues to display an operation display, and a circle mark is displayed in a layer behind the small symbol 56 in an area overlapping the display area of the small symbol 56. In the illustrated example, the circle mark in the third jackpot highlight image 568 is hidden by the small symbol 56, making it difficult or impossible to see.

Next, as shown in Figure 135 (7), the bonus feature effect starts, and the right movable bonus feature 115C starts moving downward. This bonus feature effect can also be considered as the fifth bonus feature effect. In addition, in the third jackpot highlight image 568, the action display continues, and a circle mark is displayed at the bottom of the image display unit 114.
Next, as shown in FIG. 135 (8), the right movable part 115C moves further downward and stops at a position where it overlaps with the center of the image display unit 114 in the vertical direction. The right movable part 115C also begins to emit light in rainbow colors. More specifically, the right movable part 115C emits light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple, so that the right movable part 115C appears to be emitting light in rainbow colors. The right movable part 115C also periodically emits light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple. In the third jackpot highlight image 568, the action display continues, and a circle mark is displayed on the left side of the image display unit 114.

Next, as shown in Figure 136 (9), the action display continues in the third jackpot emphasis image 568, and a circle mark is displayed at the top of the image display section 114, resulting in the same display mode as Figure 135 (5).
Although not shown, thereafter, the third jackpot emphasis image 568 periodically repeats the operation displays shown in Figures 135(6) to 135(8) and Figure 136(9).
Next, as shown in Figure 136 (10), the vibration effect ends.
Next, as shown in FIG. 136 (11), the effect button 161 stops emitting light in rainbow colors and goes out.
Next, as shown in FIG. 136 (12), the third jackpot highlight image 568 is hidden.

Next, as shown in Figure 136 (13), the right movable role 115C moves upward and stops. Note that Figure 136 (13) shows the right movable role 115C, but at this time, the right movable role 115C has returned to the position before the role performance started.
Next, as shown in FIG. 136 (14), the output of the third jackpot notification sound ends.
Next, as shown in FIG. 136 (15), the lamp L stops emitting light in rainbow colors and emits white light.
Next, as shown in Figure 136 (16), the right movable accessory 115C stops emitting light in rainbow colors and goes out. This ends the third big win effect.

Here, the output time of the third jackpot notification sound is 11 seconds.
The vibration effect lasts for 9.2 seconds.
The cycle of the illumination of the effect button 161 in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple (the time from when the effect button 161 starts emitting red light until when it starts emitting red light again) is 1.7 seconds. The illumination time of the rainbow colors of the effect button 161 is 9.5 seconds.
The period of the third jackpot emphasis image 568 is 1.8 seconds, and the display (movement display) time of the third jackpot emphasis image 568 is 9.8 seconds.
The execution time of the fifth special effect is 10.1 seconds.
The cycle of the right movable part 115C emitting light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple (the time from when the right movable part 115C starts emitting light in red until when it starts emitting light in red again) is 1.6 seconds. The time it takes for the right movable part 115C to emit light in the rainbow colors is 10.4 seconds.
The cycle of lamp L emitting light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and violet (the time from when lamp L starts emitting red light to when it starts emitting red light again) is 1.9 seconds, and the duration of lamp L emitting light in the rainbow colors is 10.7 seconds.
In addition, the execution time and cycle of each effect in the third jackpot effect may be any time.

In addition, in the third jackpot effect, the timing at which the jackpot alert sound (third jackpot alert sound) starts to be output, the timing at which the vibration effect starts, the timing at which the effect button 161 starts to light up in rainbow colors, the timing at which the jackpot highlight image (third jackpot highlight image 568) starts to be displayed, the timing at which the lamp L starts to light up in rainbow colors, the timing at which the special feature effect (fifth special feature effect) starts, the timing at which the movable feature 115 (right movable feature 115C) starts to light up in rainbow colors, the timing at which the vibration effect ends, the timing at which the effect button 161 stops light up in rainbow colors, the timing at which the jackpot highlight image (third jackpot highlight image 568) stops to be displayed, the timing at which the special feature effect (fifth special feature effect) ends, the timing at which the jackpot alert sound (third jackpot alert sound) starts to be output, the timing at which the lamp L starts to light up in rainbow colors, and the timing at which the movable feature 115 (right movable feature 115C) stops light-emitting in rainbow colors are all the same as in the first jackpot effect (see Figure 132).

Figures 137 and 138 show how the fourth jackpot presentation is executed.
When the fourth jackpot effect is executed, a 16th post-operation emphasis image 529 is displayed before the start of the fourth jackpot effect, as shown in FIG. 137(1).
Next, when the fourth jackpot presentation starts, as shown in Figure 137 (2), first, a fourth jackpot notification sound is output to notify or suggest that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot (small jackpot).
Next, as shown in FIG. 137(3), a vibration effect is started.
Next, as shown in Fig. 137 (4), the effect button 161 starts to emit light in the colors of the rainbow. More specifically, the effect button 161 emits light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple, so that the effect button 161 appears to emit light in the colors of the rainbow. The effect button 161 also periodically emits light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple.

137(5), a fourth jackpot emphasis image 569 is displayed. In the illustrated example, in the fourth jackpot emphasis image 569, marks of circle, triangle, square, and diamond are displayed in order from right to left at the bottom of the image display unit 114. The fourth jackpot emphasis image 569 is displayed in an operational manner such that the displayed image moves from right to left in the image display unit 114, and the image that has passed the left end of the image display unit 114 is again displayed at the right end of the image display unit 114 and moves left.
Next, as shown in FIG. 137(6), the lamp L starts to emit light in rainbow colors. More specifically, the lamp L emits light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple, so that the lamp L appears to emit light in rainbow colors. The lamp L also periodically emits light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple. In addition, the fourth jackpot highlight image 569 continues to display an action, and the following marks are displayed in the lower part of the image display unit 114 in order from right to left: ◇, ◯, △, and □.

Next, as shown in FIG. 137 (7), the bonus feature performance starts, and the three movable bonus features 115 start moving downward. This bonus feature performance can also be considered as the sixth bonus feature performance. In addition, in the fourth jackpot highlight image 569, the action display continues, and marks of □, ◇, ◯, and △ are displayed in order from right to left at the bottom of the image display section 114.
Next, as shown in FIG. 137 (8), the three movable parts 115 move further downward and stop at a position where they overlap with the vertical center of the image display unit 114. The three movable parts 115 also begin to emit light in rainbow colors. More specifically, the three movable parts 115 emit light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple, so that the three movable parts 115 appear to be emitting light in rainbow colors. The three movable parts 115 also periodically emit light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple. The fourth jackpot highlight image 569 continues to display the action, and the marks △, □, ◇, and ◯ are displayed in order from right to left at the bottom of the image display unit 114.

Next, as shown in Figure 138 (9), the action display continues in the fourth jackpot emphasis image 569, and marks of circle, triangle, square, and ◇ are displayed in order from right to left at the bottom of the image display section 114, resulting in the same display mode as Figure 137 (5).
Although not shown, thereafter, the fourth jackpot emphasis image 569 periodically repeats the operation displays shown in Figures 137(6) to 137(8) and Figure 138(9).
Next, as shown in Figure 138 (10), the vibration effect ends.
Next, as shown in FIG. 138 (11), the effect button 161 stops emitting light in rainbow colors and goes out.
Next, as shown in FIG. 138 (12), the fourth jackpot highlight image 569 is hidden.

Next, as shown in Figure 138 (13), the three movable parts 115 move upward and stop. Note that although Figure 138 (13) shows three movable parts 115, at this time, the three movable parts 115 have returned to the positions before the start of the part performance.
Next, as shown in FIG. 138 (14), the output of the fourth jackpot notification sound ends.
Next, as shown in FIG. 138(15), the lamp L stops emitting rainbow colors and emits white light.
Next, as shown in Figure 138 (16), the three movable parts 115 stop emitting light in rainbow colors and turn off. This ends the fourth big win effect.

Here, the output time of the fourth jackpot notification sound is 10 seconds.
The vibration effect lasts for 8.2 seconds.
The cycle of the illumination of the effect button 161 in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple (the time from when the effect button 161 starts emitting light in red until when it starts emitting light in red again) is 1.1 seconds. The illumination time of the rainbow colors of the effect button 161 is 8.5 seconds.
The period of the fourth jackpot emphasis image 569 is 1.2 seconds, and the display (movement display) time of the fourth jackpot emphasis image 569 is 8.8 seconds.
The execution time of the sixth role performance is 9.1 seconds.
The cycle of the three movable parts 115 emitting light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple (the time from when the three movable parts 115 start emitting light in red until when they start emitting light in red again) is 1 second. The duration of the light emission of the three movable parts 115 in the rainbow colors is 9.4 seconds.
The cycle of lamp L emitting light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and violet (the time from when lamp L starts emitting red light to when it starts emitting red light again) is 1.3 seconds, and the duration of lamp L emitting light in the rainbow colors is 9.7 seconds.
In addition, the execution time and cycle of each effect in the fourth jackpot effect may be any time.

In addition, in the fourth jackpot presentation, the timing at which the jackpot notification sound (fourth jackpot notification sound) starts to be output, the timing at which the vibration presentation starts, the timing at which the presentation button 161 starts to light up in rainbow colors, the timing at which the jackpot highlight image (fourth jackpot highlight image 569) starts to be displayed, the timing at which the lamp L starts to light up in rainbow colors, the timing at which the special feature presentation (sixth special feature presentation) starts, the timing at which the movable feature 115 (three movable feature 115) starts to light up in rainbow colors, the timing at which the vibration presentation ends, the timing at which the presentation button 161 stops to light up in rainbow colors, the timing at which the jackpot highlight image (fourth jackpot highlight image 569) stops to be displayed, the timing at which the special feature presentation (sixth special feature presentation) ends, the timing at which the jackpot notification sound (fourth jackpot notification sound) starts to be output, the timing at which the lamp L starts to light up in rainbow colors, and the timing at which the movable feature 115 (three movable feature 115) starts to light up in rainbow colors are all the same as in the first jackpot presentation (see FIG. 132).

Figures 139 and 140 show how the fifth jackpot presentation is executed.
When the fifth jackpot effect is executed, a nineteenth post-operation emphasis image 535 is displayed before the fifth jackpot effect starts, as shown in FIG. 139(1).
Next, when the fifth jackpot presentation starts, as shown in Figure 139 (2), first, a fifth jackpot notification sound is output to notify or suggest that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot (small jackpot).
Next, as shown in FIG. 139(3), a vibration effect is started.
Next, as shown in Fig. 139 (4), the effect button 161 starts to emit light in the colors of the rainbow. More specifically, the effect button 161 emits light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple, so that the effect button 161 appears to emit light in the colors of the rainbow. The effect button 161 also periodically emits light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple.

139(5), a fifth jackpot emphasis image 570 is displayed. In the example shown, a star mark is displayed in the upper right corner of the image display section 114 in the fifth jackpot emphasis image 570. The fifth jackpot emphasis image 570 is also displayed so as to rotate clockwise.
Next, as shown in FIG. 139(6), the lamp L starts to emit light in rainbow colors. More specifically, the lamp L emits light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple, so that the lamp L appears to emit light in rainbow colors. The lamp L also periodically emits light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple. In addition, the fifth jackpot highlight image 570 continues to display the action, and a star mark is displayed in the lower right corner of the image display unit 114.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139 (7), the bonus feature effect starts, and the three movable bonus features 115 start moving downward. This bonus feature effect can also be considered as the seventh bonus feature effect. In addition, in the fifth jackpot highlight image 570, the action display continues, and a star mark is displayed in the lower left corner of the image display section 114.
Next, as shown in FIG. 139 (8), the three movable parts 115 move further downward and stop at a position where they overlap with the vertical center of the image display unit 114. The three movable parts 115 also begin to emit light in rainbow colors. More specifically, the three movable parts 115 emit light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple, so that the three movable parts 115 appear to be emitting light in rainbow colors. The three movable parts 115 also periodically emit light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple. The fifth jackpot highlight image 570 continues to display the action, and a star mark is displayed in the upper left corner of the image display unit 114.

Next, as shown in Figure 140 (9), the action display continues in the fifth jackpot emphasis image 570, and a ☆ mark is displayed in the upper right corner of the image display section 114, resulting in the same display mode as Figure 139 (5).
Although not shown, thereafter, the fifth jackpot emphasis image 570 periodically repeats the operation displays shown in Figures 139(6) to 139(8) and Figure 140(9).
Next, as shown in FIG. 140 (10), the vibration effect ends.
Next, as shown in FIG. 140 (11), the effect button 161 stops emitting light in rainbow colors and goes out.
Next, as shown in FIG. 140 (12), the fifth jackpot highlight image 570 is hidden.

Next, as shown in Figure 140 (13), the three movable parts 115 move upward and stop. Note that although Figure 140 (13) shows three movable parts 115, at this time, the three movable parts 115 have returned to the positions before the start of the part performance.
Next, as shown in FIG. 140 (14), the output of the fifth jackpot notification sound ends.
Next, as shown in FIG. 140(15), the lamp L stops emitting light in rainbow colors and emits white light.
Next, as shown in Figure 140 (16), the three movable parts 115 stop emitting light in rainbow colors and turn off. This ends the fifth big win effect.

Here, the output time of the fifth jackpot notification sound is 8 seconds.
The vibration effect lasts for 6.2 seconds.
The cycle of the illumination of the effect button 161 in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple (the time from when the effect button 161 starts emitting red light until when it starts emitting red light again) is 0.7 seconds. The illumination time of the rainbow colors of the effect button 161 is 6.5 seconds.
The period of the motion display of the fifth jackpot emphasis image 570 is 0.8 seconds, and the display (motion display) time of the fifth jackpot emphasis image 570 is 6.8 seconds.
The execution time of the seventh role performance is 7.1 seconds.
The cycle of the three movable parts 115 emitting light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple (the time from when the three movable parts 115 start emitting light in red until when they start emitting light in red again) is 0.6 seconds. The duration of the light emission of the three movable parts 115 in the rainbow colors is 7.4 seconds.
The cycle of lamp L emitting light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and violet (the time from when lamp L starts emitting red light to when it starts emitting red light again) is 0.9 seconds, and the duration of lamp L emitting light in the rainbow colors is 7.7 seconds.
In addition, the execution time and cycle of each effect in the fifth jackpot effect may be any time.

In addition, in the fifth jackpot presentation, the timing at which the jackpot notification sound (fifth jackpot notification sound) starts to be output, the timing at which the vibration presentation starts, the timing at which the presentation button 161 starts to light up in rainbow colors, the timing at which the jackpot highlight image (fifth jackpot highlight image 570) starts to be displayed, the timing at which the lamp L starts to light up in rainbow colors, the timing at which the special feature presentation (seventh special feature presentation) starts, the timing at which the movable feature 115 (three movable feature 115) starts to light up in rainbow colors, the timing at which the vibration presentation ends, the timing at which the presentation button 161 stops to light up in rainbow colors, the timing at which the jackpot highlight image (fifth jackpot highlight image 570) stops to be displayed, the timing at which the special feature presentation (seventh special feature presentation) ends, the timing at which the jackpot notification sound (fifth jackpot notification sound) starts to be output, the timing at which the lamp L starts to light up in rainbow colors, and the timing at which the movable feature 115 (three movable feature 115) starts to light up in rainbow colors are all the same as in the first jackpot presentation (see FIG. 132).

In the following, when the first to fifth jackpot notification sounds are described without any particular distinction, they may be simply referred to as jackpot notification sounds.
Furthermore, as described above, the various jackpot emphasis images (first jackpot emphasis image 566, third jackpot emphasis image 568, fourth jackpot emphasis image 569, fifth jackpot emphasis image 570) are displayed during the execution of the bonus effect. When the various jackpot emphasis images are displayed, the movable bonus object 115 that overlaps with the jackpot emphasis image is more likely to be noticed. Therefore, the display of the various jackpot emphasis images can also be considered as an emphasis effect that emphasizes the movable bonus object 115 (bonus effect).

Figure 141 is a diagram showing the execution time and cycle of each effect in the first to fifth jackpot effects.
Figure 141 shows, for each jackpot effect, the output time of the jackpot notification sound (first jackpot notification sound to fifth jackpot notification sound), the rainbow light emission time of lamp L, the rainbow light emission time of movable role device 115, the execution time of role device effects (fourth jackpot effect to seventh role device effect), the display time (operation display time) of the jackpot emphasis image (first jackpot emphasis image 566 to fifth jackpot emphasis image 570), the rainbow light emission time of effect button 161, the execution time of the vibration effect, the rainbow light emission cycle of lamp L, the rainbow light emission cycle of movable role device 115, the operation display cycle of the jackpot emphasis image (first jackpot emphasis image 566 to fifth jackpot emphasis image 570), and the rainbow light emission cycle of effect button 161.

As described above, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can vary the type of jackpot notification sound and the output time of the jackpot notification sound depending on the jackpot effect being executed, thereby diversifying the way in which the player is made aware that a jackpot game is being executed depending on the jackpot effect being executed.
The performance control unit 300 may use the same type of jackpot notification sound for each jackpot performance, but vary the output time of the jackpot notification sound. Alternatively, the performance control unit 300 may use the same output time of the jackpot notification sound for each jackpot performance, but vary the type of jackpot notification sound. Alternatively, the performance control unit 300 may use the same type of jackpot notification sound and the same output time of the jackpot notification sound for each jackpot performance.
In addition, the output time of the jackpot notification sound in each jackpot presentation may be the opposite of the long/short relationship shown in the example of FIG.

In addition, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can vary the light emission time and light emission mode (light emission cycle) of the lamp L depending on the jackpot effect to be executed. Therefore, the way in which the player is made aware that a jackpot game is being executed can be diversified depending on the jackpot effect to be executed.
The effect control unit 300 may make the light emission time of the lamp L the same for each jackpot effect, but vary the light emission mode (light emission cycle) of the lamp L. Also, the effect control unit 300 may make the light emission mode (light emission cycle) of the lamp L the same for each jackpot effect, but vary the light emission time of the lamp L. Also, the light emission time and the light emission mode (light emission cycle) of the lamp L may both be the same for each jackpot effect.
In addition, the light emission time of the lamp L in each jackpot effect may be the opposite of the long/short relationship to the example shown in Fig. 141. In addition, the light emission cycle of the lamp L in each jackpot effect may be the opposite of the long/short relationship to the example shown in Fig. 141.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can vary the light emission time and light emission mode (light emission cycle) of the movable role object 115 depending on the jackpot performance to be executed. Therefore, the way in which the player is made aware that a jackpot game is being executed can be diversified depending on the jackpot performance to be executed.
The performance control unit 300 may make the light emission time of the movable role element 115 common to each other in each jackpot performance (first jackpot performance, third jackpot performance to fifth jackpot performance), but may make the light emission mode (light emission cycle) of the movable role element 115 different. Also, the light emission mode (light emission cycle) of the movable role element 115 common to each other in each jackpot performance (first jackpot performance, third jackpot performance to fifth jackpot performance), but may make the light emission time of the movable role element 115 different. Also, the light emission time and the light emission mode (light emission cycle) of the movable role element 115 may both be common to each other in each jackpot performance (first jackpot performance, third jackpot performance to fifth jackpot performance).
In addition, the light emission time of the movable role device 115 in each jackpot performance (first jackpot performance, third jackpot performance to fifth jackpot performance) may be the opposite of the example shown in Fig. 141. In addition, the light emission cycle of the movable role device 115 in each jackpot performance (first jackpot performance, third jackpot performance to fifth jackpot performance) may be the opposite of the example shown in Fig. 141.

In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can vary the type of bonus effect and the duration of the bonus effect depending on the type of bonus effect being executed, thereby diversifying the way in which the player is made aware that a bonus game is being played depending on the type of bonus effect being executed.
The performance control unit 300 may use the same type of bonus feature performance for each jackpot performance (first jackpot performance, third jackpot performance to fifth jackpot performance) but vary the execution time of the bonus feature performance. Alternatively, the performance control unit 300 may use the same execution time of the bonus feature performance for each jackpot performance (first jackpot performance, third jackpot performance to fifth jackpot performance) but vary the type of bonus feature performance. Alternatively, the performance control unit 300 may use the same type of bonus feature performance and the same execution time of the bonus feature performance for each jackpot performance (first jackpot performance, third jackpot performance to fifth jackpot performance).
In addition, the execution time of the special feature effects in each jackpot effect (first jackpot effect, third jackpot effect to fifth jackpot effect) may be the opposite of the long/short relationship shown in the example of FIG.

In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can vary the display time of the jackpot highlight image and the cycle of the motion display of the jackpot highlight image depending on the jackpot effect being executed, thereby diversifying the way in which the player is made aware that a jackpot game is being executed depending on the jackpot effect being executed.
The effect control unit 300 may make the display time of the jackpot emphasis image common to each jackpot effect, but vary the period of the motion display of the jackpot emphasis image. Alternatively, the effect control unit 300 may make the period of the motion display of the jackpot emphasis image common to each jackpot effect, but vary the display time of the jackpot emphasis image. Alternatively, the display time of the jackpot emphasis image and the period of the motion display of the jackpot emphasis image may both be common to each jackpot effect.
In addition, the display time of the jackpot emphasis image in each jackpot effect may be the opposite of the long/short relationship to the example shown in Fig. 141. In addition, the period of the motion display of the jackpot emphasis image in each jackpot effect may be the opposite of the long/short relationship to the example shown in Fig. 141.

In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can vary the light emission time and light emission pattern (light emission cycle) of the effect button 161 depending on the jackpot effect to be executed. Therefore, the way in which the player is made aware that a jackpot game is being executed can be diversified depending on the jackpot effect to be executed.
The effect control unit 300 may make the light emission time of the effect button 161 the same for each jackpot effect, but vary the light emission mode (light emission cycle) of the effect button 161. Also, the light emission mode (light emission cycle) of the effect button 161 may be the same for each jackpot effect, but vary the light emission time of the effect button 161. Also, the light emission time and the light emission mode (light emission cycle) of the effect button 161 may both be the same for each jackpot effect.
In addition, the light emission time of the effect button 161 in each jackpot effect may be the opposite of the long-short relationship to the example shown in Fig. 141. In addition, the light emission cycle of the effect button 161 in each jackpot effect may be the opposite of the long-short relationship to the example shown in Fig. 141.

In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can vary the execution time of the vibration effect depending on the jackpot effect being executed, so that the way in which the player is made aware that a jackpot game is being executed can be diversified depending on the jackpot effect being executed.
In addition, the effect control unit 300 may make the execution time of the vibration effect the same for each jackpot effect.
In addition, the execution time of the vibration effect in each jackpot effect may be the opposite of the long/short relationship shown in the example in Figure 141.

In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 varies the output time of the jackpot notification sound, the light emission time of the lamp L, the light emission time of the movable role object 115, the execution time of the role object effect, the display time of the jackpot highlighting image, the light emission time of the effect button 161, and the execution time of the vibration effect in each jackpot effect. Therefore, it is easier for the player to notice each effect compared to when the execution time of each effect is the same.
In addition, the performance control unit 300 may make the output time of the jackpot notification sound, the light-emitting time of the lamp L, the light-emitting time of the movable role device 115, the execution time of the role device performance, the display time of the jackpot highlighting image, the light-emitting time of the performance button 161, and the execution time of the vibration performance common to each jackpot performance.
In addition, in each jackpot performance, the output time of the jackpot notification sound, the light-emitting time of the lamp L, the light-emitting time of the movable device 115, the execution time of the device performance, the display time of the jackpot highlighting image, the light-emitting time of the performance button 161, and the execution time of the vibration performance may have a reversed long/short relationship to the example shown in Figure 141.

In addition, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 differentiates the light emission cycle of the lamp L, the light emission cycle of the movable role object 115, the period of the motion display of the jackpot highlighting image, and the light emission cycle of the effect button 161 in each jackpot effect. Therefore, it is possible to make each effect more easily noticeable to the player compared to when the execution time of each effect is the same.
In addition, the performance control unit 300 may make the light emission cycle of the lamp L, the light emission cycle of the movable role object 115, the cycle of the operation display of the jackpot highlight image, and the light emission cycle of the performance button 161 the same for each jackpot performance.
In addition, in each jackpot performance, the light emission period of the lamp L, the light emission period of the movable device 115, the period of the operation display of the jackpot emphasis image, and the light emission period of the performance button 161 may have a length relationship that is reversed from the example shown in Figure 141.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second big win presentation does not include the execution of the role presentation and the illumination of the movable role 115 in rainbow colors, but this is not limited to this.
In the second jackpot performance, the role performance and the rainbow-colored light emission of the movable role device 115 may also be executed. In this case, the role performance and the rainbow-colored light emission of the movable role device 115 may both be common performance modes in the first jackpot performance and the second jackpot performance. Also, the role performance and the rainbow-colored light emission of the movable role device 115 may both be different performance modes in the first jackpot performance and the second jackpot performance. Also, the first jackpot performance and the second jackpot performance may have one of the role performance and the rainbow-colored light emission of the movable role device 115 in the common performance mode, and the other performance mode may be different.

Furthermore, the start timing of each effect in each big win effect is not limited to the above example.
In each jackpot effect, the vibration effect may start after the rainbow-colored illumination of the effect button 161 has started. Also, in each jackpot effect, the rainbow-colored illumination of the effect button 161 and the vibration effect may start simultaneously.
In addition, in each jackpot effect, the output of a jackpot notification sound may begin after the rainbow-colored illumination or vibration effect of the effect button 161 begins.
In addition, in each jackpot presentation, the display of a jackpot highlighting image may begin after the lamp L starts emitting light in rainbow colors.
In addition, in each big win performance, the lamp L may start emitting light in rainbow colors after the special feature performance or the movable special feature 115 starts emitting light in rainbow colors.
Furthermore, in each jackpot effect, the timing at which the frame lamp 157 starts to emit light in rainbow colors and the timing at which the board lamp 116 starts to emit light in rainbow colors may be simultaneous or may be different. More specifically, the board lamp 116 may start to emit light in rainbow colors after the frame lamp 157 starts to emit light in rainbow colors. Furthermore, the frame lamp 157 may start to emit light in rainbow colors after the board lamp 116 starts to emit light in rainbow colors.

Furthermore, the timing at which each effect in each big win effect ends is not limited to the above example.
In each jackpot effect, the vibration effect may end after the rainbow-colored illumination of the effect button 161 has ended. Also, in each jackpot effect, the rainbow-colored illumination of the effect button 161 and the vibration effect may end simultaneously.
In addition, in each big win effect, the effect that ends first among the effects may be the output of a big win notification sound.
In each jackpot presentation, the presentation that finishes last may be a bonus presentation. In each jackpot presentation, the presentation that finishes last may be the display of a jackpot highlighting image. In each jackpot presentation, the presentation that finishes last may be the output of a jackpot notification sound.
Furthermore, in each jackpot effect, the timing at which the rainbow-colored light emission of the frame lamp 157 ends and the timing at which the rainbow-colored light emission of the board lamp 116 ends may be simultaneous or different. More specifically, the rainbow-colored light emission of the board lamp 116 may end after the rainbow-colored light emission of the frame lamp 157 ends. Furthermore, the rainbow-colored light emission of the frame lamp 157 may end after the rainbow-colored light emission of the board lamp 116 ends.

Furthermore, the relationship between the start timing of each effect in the jackpot effect may be the same or different between the normal game state and the special time-saving game state.
Furthermore, the relationship between the end timing of each effect in the big win effect may be the same or different between the normal game state and the special time-saving game state.

(Example of variation 1)
142 and 143, a specific description will be given of a variable effect (variable effect example 1) performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114, etc. Variable effect example 1 is a variable effect example based on a game ball entering the first start opening 121 in a normal game state. Also, variable effect example 1 is an example of a random miss variable effect, which is a variable effect based on the number of reserved balls for the entry into the first start opening 121 being "1".
The variable effects shown in Figures 142 and 143 are variable effects that are executed when "ER1" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 41.
In addition, each of the variation effects from variation effect example 1 to variation effect example 15 described below is an example of a variation effect when the variation effect starts in the first stage.

In addition, in each of the following variable effect examples (Variable effect example 1 to Variable effect example 38), the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43 are continuously displayed when the player repeatedly presses the lower and left keys of the effect key 162 (for example, once every second).

As shown in FIG. 142 (1), the highly decorative decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114 as the effect control unit 300 stops the previous special symbol. At this time, the image display unit 114 displays the reserve number display 55, small symbol 56, stage image 61, stage notification image 501, and change count image 502. Additionally, the stage image 61 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the first stage, with the stage notification image 501 displaying the text "Space" and the change count image 502 displaying the text "0 games." The first stage is a normal game mode. At this time, the reserve number display 55 of the first start gate 121 indicates "0," which is the reserve number for winning at the first start gate 121, and the reserve number display 55 of the second start gate 122 indicates "0," which is the reserve number for winning at the second start gate 122.
Also, as described above, when the player repeatedly presses the lower and left keys of the effect keys 162, the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are displayed.

Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, as shown in Figure 142 (2), the special symbol begins to change, and the change effect begins. At this time, the change image 51 is displayed. At this time, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 also begin to change. In this embodiment, the left decorative symbol 41, the center decorative symbol 41, the right decorative symbol 41, and the small symbol 56 each change by repeatedly displaying the numbers "1" through "9" in sequence. That is, in this embodiment, the left decorative symbol 41, the center decorative symbol 41, the right decorative symbol 41, and the small symbol 56 each have individually variable numbers. The left decorative symbol 41, the center decorative symbol 41, the right decorative symbol 41, and the small symbol 56 may display characters other than numbers, such as English letters. At this time, background music (BGM), which is a sound effect corresponding to the change effect currently being performed, is output from the speaker 156. Although not shown in the figures, in each of the variation presentation examples described below, background music continues to be output from the start to the end of the variation presentation, unless otherwise specified.

Furthermore, there are cases where a game ball enters the first starting port 121 when there is no reservation for a winning entry at the first starting port 121 and the special symbol has not changed. In this case, first, a reservation for a winning entry at the first starting port 121 occurs. Then, in this state, a variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern table (see FIG. 24). Therefore, when a variation pattern is selected, the "reservation number" is "1". Then, when a variation pattern is selected, the reservation number for a winning entry at the first starting port 121 is subtracted.
Furthermore, when a game ball enters the first starting port 121 in a state where no reservation has been made for a winning entry at the first starting port 121 and the special symbol has not changed, "1" is displayed in the reservation number display 55 at the first starting port 121, and the reservation image 52 is also displayed. Then, "0" is displayed in the reservation number display 55 at the first starting port 121. Furthermore, the reservation image 52 moves to the display position of the changing image 51 (moving animation is performed), and the changing image 51 is displayed.

Furthermore, when a game ball enters the second start port 122 in a state where there is no reservation for a winning entry at the second start port 122 and the special symbol has not changed, a reservation for a winning entry at the second start port 122 is first made. Then, in this state, a variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern table. Therefore, the "reservation number" when a variation pattern is selected is "1". Then, when a variation pattern is selected, the reservation number for a winning entry at the second start port 122 is subtracted.
Furthermore, when a game ball enters the second start port 122 in a state where no reservation has been made for a winning entry at the second start port 122 and the special symbol has not changed, "1" is displayed in the reservation number display 55 at the second start port 122, and the reservation image 52 is also displayed. Then, "0" is displayed in the reservation number display 55 at the second start port 122. Furthermore, the reservation image 52 moves to the display position of the changing image 51, and the changing image 51 is displayed.

In addition, the pending image 52 in the normal display mode and the variable image 51 in the normal display mode displayed in each variable performance example are displayed in motion in the manner described using Figure 44.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142 (3), a first foreshadowing emphasis image 508 is displayed. The first foreshadowing emphasis image 508 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, the volume image 42, and the light intensity image 43. The first foreshadowing emphasis image 508 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and behind the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43. A first foreshadowing emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the first foreshadowing emphasis image 508 is displayed, is output. The first foreshadowing emphasis sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes that the button image 509 is displayed. The output time of the first foreshadowing emphasis sound is 0.08 seconds.
Next, as shown in FIG. 142 (4), the first button effect is started, and the button image 509 is displayed. The button image 509 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41, in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41. In the first button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in the manner described using FIGS. 60 (2) to (8). In addition, a first button emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the button image 509 is displayed, is output. The first button emphasis sound can also be considered as an effect sound that emphasizes the button image 509 (button effect). The output time of the first button emphasis sound is 0.1 seconds.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the effect button 161 in the first button effect, a first post-operation emphasis image 510 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 142 (5). The first post-operation emphasis image 510 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, the volume image 42, and the light intensity image 43. The first post-operation emphasis image 510 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and behind the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43. A first post-operation emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the first post-operation emphasis image 510 is displayed, is output. The first post-operation emphasis sound can also be considered as an emphasis sound corresponding to the operation of the effect button 161. The output time of the first post-operation emphasis sound is 0.12 seconds.
Next, as shown in FIG. 142 (6), a first-button post-image 571 is displayed. The first-button post-image 571 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41, in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41. The display time of the first-button post-image 571 is 2.5 seconds. In addition, a first-button post-emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the first-button post-image 571 is displayed, is output. The output time of the first-button post-emphasis sound is 0.2 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142 (7), the left decorative symbol 41, "4," temporarily stops, and a first stop-time action, which is the action taken when the decorative symbol 41 temporarily stops, is performed. The first stop-time action is performed when an even-numbered decorative symbol 41 (e.g., 2, 4, 6, 8, etc.) temporarily stops in the first stage. The first stop-time action is the decorative symbol 41 raising its right hand. At this time, a first stop-time emphasis image 572 is displayed around the left decorative symbol 41. The first stop-time emphasis image 572 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43, on a layer behind the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43. The execution time of the first stop-time action and the display time of the first stop-time emphasis image 572 are both 0.5 seconds. However, the execution time of the first stop-time action and the display time of the first stop-time emphasis image 572 may differ. Furthermore, the execution time of the first stop-time action and the display time of the first stop emphasis image 572 may be any time. In addition, a first stop emphasis sound, which is a sound effect when the stop emphasis image is displayed, is output. The first stop emphasis sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the decorative pattern 41 in the first stage. The output time of the first stop emphasis sound is 0.15 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142 (8), the right decorative symbol 41, "1," temporarily stops, and a second stop-time action is performed, which is the action taken when the decorative symbol 41 temporarily stops. The second stop-time action is performed when an odd-numbered decorative symbol 41 (such as 1, 3, 5, or 9) temporarily stops in the first stage. The second stop-time action is the decorative symbol 41 raising its left hand. At this time, a second stop-time emphasis image 573 is displayed around the right decorative symbol 41. The execution time of the second stop-time action and the display time of the second stop-time emphasis image 573 are both 0.5 seconds. However, the execution time of the second stop-time action and the display time of the second stop-time emphasis image 573 may differ. The execution time of the second stop-time action and the display time of the second stop-time emphasis image 573 may be any time. The first stop-time emphasis sound is also output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (9), the "2" central decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped, and the first stop-time action is performed. At this time, a third stop emphasis image 574 is displayed around the central decorative pattern 41. The display time of the third stop emphasis image 574 is 0.5 seconds. However, the display time of the third stop emphasis image 574 may be different from the execution time of the first stop-time action, and may be any time. In addition, a first stop emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (10), the third stop emphasis image 574 is hidden, and the three decorative patterns 41 continue to be temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (11), three decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped with the display of the special symbols. This combination of decorative symbols 41, "421," is an example of a combination when the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss. Also, with the special symbols stopping to fluctuate, three small symbols 56 are also fixed and stopped. In other words, in this fluctuating effect, all small symbols 56 are fixed and stopped without being temporarily stopped. At this time, the combination of small symbols 56, "421," matches the combination of decorative symbols 41. Also, with the end of the fluctuating effect, the fluctuating image 51 is erased (displayed). Also, the fluctuating count image 502 is updated to "1 game."

(Example of variation 2)
FIG. 144 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variation presentation example 2) of the variation presentation will be described with reference to Fig. 144. Variation presentation example 2 is a variation presentation example of the decorative pattern 41 based on a game ball entering the first start opening 121 in a normal game state. Also, variation presentation example 2 is an example of a random miss variation presentation, which is a variation presentation based on the number of reserved balls for the entry into the first start opening 121 being "4".
144 is a variation effect that is executed when "ER3" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 41. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect example 1 will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect example 1 may be omitted.

First, as shown in Fig. 144(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 from being fixed in the image display unit 114. In addition, four reserved images 52 are displayed, and the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121 shows "4."
Next, as shown in Figure 144 (2), the display of the next special symbol begins, and the display of the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 begins.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (3), three decorative symbols 41, "472," temporarily stop. At this time, the left and right decorative symbols 41 perform the first stop-time action, and the center decorative symbol 41 performs the second stop-time action. A first stop emphasis image 572 is displayed around each of the left and right decorative symbols 41, and a fourth stop emphasis image 575 is displayed around the center decorative symbol 41. The display time of the fourth stop emphasis image 575 is 0.5 seconds. However, the display time of the fourth stop emphasis image 575 may be different from the execution time of the second stop-time action and may be any time. Furthermore, a first stop emphasis sound is output.
Next, as the special symbol stops changing, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56, "472", are fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. 144 (4). Also, the changing image 51 is hidden. Also, the changing count image 502 is updated to "1 game."

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can change the stop behavior of the decorative pattern 41 and the display mode of the highlighted image in accordance with the characters of the decorative pattern 41 in one stage (see FIGS. 142(8) and 144(3)). This allows the uniqueness of the performance using the decorative pattern 41 to be enhanced for each character of the decorative pattern 41.
In addition, in this embodiment, in a variable presentation based on the number of reserved symbols for the first starting port 121 being "4", three decorative symbols 41 can be displayed in a line to be temporarily stopped.

In addition, in the variable performance based on the reservation number for the first starting port 121 being "4", the three decorative symbols 41 "421" may temporarily stop, as in the variable performance example 1. In this case, when the middle decorative symbol 41 "2" temporarily stops, the first stop action of the middle decorative symbol 41 is performed, and the third stop emphasis image 574 is displayed around the middle decorative symbol 41.
In addition, in a variable effect based on the fact that the reserved number for the first starting port 121 is "4", three decorative symbols 41, "412", may temporarily stop. In this case, when the middle decorative symbol 41, "1", temporarily stops, the second stop action of the middle decorative symbol 41 is performed, and a fourth stop emphasis image 575 is displayed around the middle decorative symbol 41.
In addition, in a variable presentation based on the fact that the reserved number for the first starting port 121 is "4", three decorative symbols 41, "241", may temporarily stop. In this case, when the middle decorative symbol 41, "4", temporarily stops, the first stop action of the middle decorative symbol 41 is performed, and a third stop emphasis image 574 is displayed around the middle decorative symbol 41.

(Variation example 3)
145 and 146 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variation presentation example 3) of the variation presentation will be described with reference to Figures 145 and 146. Variation presentation example 3 is a variation presentation example in which a reach-miss variation presentation is executed based on winning into the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state.
Note that variation effect example 3 is a variation effect that is executed when "ER6" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in Figure 41.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, as shown in Fig. 145(1), the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56, "623", are stopped and fixed by the performance control unit 300 as the previous special symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, one reserved image 52 is displayed in blue, and "1" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121.
Next, as shown in Fig. 145 (2), the variable effect starts with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 start to vary. In addition, the reserved image 52 moves, and the variable image 51 is displayed.
In each variation presentation example, the blue pending image 52 and the blue variation image 51 are displayed in motion in the manner described using Figure 45.

Next, as shown in Figure 145 (3), a first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed, and a first precursor emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 145(4), the second button effect starts, and the button image 509 is displayed. In the second button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in the manner described with reference to Figs. 60(2) to (8). In addition, the first button emphasis sound is output.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the effect button 161 in the second button effect, a second post-operation emphasis image 511 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 145 (5). In addition, a second post-operation emphasis sound is output. The second post-operation emphasis sound can also be considered as an emphasis sound corresponding to the operation of the effect button 161. The output time of the second post-operation emphasis sound is 0.12 seconds.
Next, as shown in FIG. 145(6), a second button post image 576 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 145 (7), the left decorative symbol 41, "4," temporarily stops and performs the first stop action. At this time, a first stop emphasis image 572 is displayed around the left decorative symbol 41. Also, a first stop emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (8), the right decorative symbol 41, "4," temporarily stops, and the first stop action is performed. As a result, the left and right decorative symbols 41 stop at the same number, resulting in a reach state. At this time, a first stop emphasis image 572 is displayed around the right decorative symbol 41. Also, a first stop emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 146 (9), the first reach effect starts, a reach line image 539, a reach suggestion image 540, a reach emphasis image 541, and a first reach eye emphasis image 542 are displayed, and the first reach action is performed. In the first reach effect, the effect is performed in the manner described using Figures 104 (2) to (6). In addition, a first reach emphasis sound, which is a sound effect for the first reach effect, is output. The first reach emphasis sound can also be considered as an effect sound that emphasizes the reach effect. The output time of the first reach emphasis sound is 0.5 seconds.
Next, as shown in Figure 146 (10), a first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed, and a first precursor emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 146 (11), the third button effect starts, and the button image 509 is displayed. In the third button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in the manner described with reference to Figs. 60 (2) to (8). In addition, the first button emphasis sound is output.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the effect button 161 in the third button effect, a third post-operation emphasis image 512 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 146 (12). The third post-operation emphasis image 512 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the variable image 51, and the small pattern 56. The third post-operation emphasis image 512 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and in a layer behind the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the variable image 51, and the small pattern 56. A third post-operation emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the third post-operation emphasis image 512 is displayed, is output. The third post-operation emphasis sound can also be considered as an emphasis sound corresponding to the operation of the effect button 161. The output time of the third post-operation emphasis sound is 0.12 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (13), a post-third button image 577 is displayed. The display time of the post-third button image 577 is 2.5 seconds. In addition, a post-second button emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the post-third button image 577 is displayed, is output. The output time of the post-second button emphasis sound is 0.2 seconds.
Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (14), the middle decorative symbol 41, "5," temporarily stops, and a third stop-time action is performed, which is the action performed when the decorative symbol 41 temporarily stops. The third stop-time action is performed when a normal reach effect is executed and the middle decorative symbol 41, which is an odd number (1, 3, 5, 7, 9, etc.), temporarily stops. The third stop-time action is an action in which the decorative symbol 41 shakes both hands up and down. At this time, a fifth stop-time emphasis image 578 is displayed surrounding the middle decorative symbol 41. The execution time of the third stop-time action and the display time of the fifth stop-time emphasis image 578 are both 0.5 seconds. However, the execution time of the third stop-time action and the display time of the fifth stop-time emphasis image 578 may be different. The execution time of the third stop-time action and the display time of the fifth stop-time emphasis image 578 may be any time. A first stop-time emphasis sound is also output.
Then, as the special symbols stop varying, the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "454," are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 146 (15). Also, the variable image 51 is no longer displayed. Also, the variable count image 502 is updated to "11 games."

As described above, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can make the emphasis effect that emphasizes that the button image 509 is displayed before the button image 509 is displayed common before and after the start of a specific effect (such as a temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41 or a reach effect) (see Figure 145 (3) and Figure 146 (10)).
Therefore, regardless of the progress of the variable effect, it is possible to make the player more aware that the button effect will start when the emphasis effect is executed, and it is possible to increase the expectation of the button effect even before the button effect starts.

Figure 147 is a diagram showing the relationship between images related to the effects used in variable effect example 3.
147(1), when the variable performance is executed by the performance control unit 300, various images constituting the variable performance are displayed on the image display unit 114. In the variable performance example 3 of this embodiment, the image display unit 114 displays the stage image 61, the stage notification image 501, the number of times of change image 502, the decorative pattern 41, the post-second operation emphasis image 511, the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the variable image 51, the number of reserved images 55, and the small pattern 56, respectively.

147(2), the image display unit 114 displays various images by drawing and superimposing multiple different layers. Here, the multiple layers are defined as upper layers on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 100, which is on the player's side, and lower layers on the rear side of the pachinko gaming machine 100, which is on the opposite side from the player. The multiple layers in this embodiment are configured in the following order from the uppermost layer to the lowermost layer: first layer LA1, second layer LA2, third layer LA3, fourth layer LA4, fifth layer LA5, and sixth layer LA6.
In this embodiment, a volume image 42, a light intensity image 43, a variable image 51, a hold number display 55, and a small symbol 56 are drawn on the first layer LA1. No images are drawn on the second layer LA2. A second post-operation emphasis image 511 is drawn on the third layer LA3. A decorative symbol 41 is drawn on the fourth layer LA4. A stage notification image 501 and a change count image 502 are drawn on the fifth layer LA5. A stage image 61 is displayed on the sixth layer LA6.

In this embodiment, by drawing each image on multiple layers configured as described above, an image drawn on a higher layer is not obscured by an image drawn on a lower layer even when the image is superimposed on the image drawn on the lower layer.
For example, the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are images that notify the player of the results of the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 100 regarding the presentation effects such as the volume and the light intensity. Therefore, in this embodiment, even when an emphasis image such as the second post-operation emphasis image 511 is displayed, the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are not hidden by this emphasis image.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, the decorative pattern 41, the stage notification image 501, the number of changes image 502 and the stage image 61 may be hidden by the emphasis image when the emphasis image is displayed.

In this embodiment, each precursor emphasis image, each operation emphasis image, each reach eye emphasis image, each role emphasis image, development emphasis image 554, each start emphasis image, each execution emphasis image, each jackpot emphasis image, each stop emphasis image, pseudo consecutive emphasis image 582, each development teaser emphasis image, chance eye emphasis image 587, each start emphasis image, each double number emphasis image, promotion teaser emphasis image 592, each reach teaser emphasis image, and button image 509 are drawn on the third layer LA3.
In addition, in this embodiment, each post-operation emphasized image is drawn on the third layer LA3, unless otherwise specified.

(Variation example 4)
148 and 149 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variation presentation example 4) of the variation presentation will be described with reference to Figures 148 and 149. Variation presentation example 4 is an example of a reach miss variation presentation, which is a variation presentation based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 121 in a normal game state.
The variation effects shown in Figures 148 and 149 are variation effects that are executed when "ER7" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in Figure 41. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in Fig. 148(1), the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56, "623", are stopped and fixed by the performance control unit 300 as the previous special symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, one reserved image 52 is displayed, and "1" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121.
Next, as shown in FIG. 148 (2), the change performance starts as the special pattern starts to change, and the decorative pattern 41 and small pattern 56 start to change.
Next, as shown in Figure 148 (3), a first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed, and a first precursor emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 148(4), the second button effect starts, and the button image 509 is displayed. In the second button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in the manner described with reference to Figs. 60(2) to (8). In addition, the first button emphasis sound is output.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the effect button 161 in the second button effect, a second post-operation emphasis image 511 is displayed as shown in Fig. 148 (5). Also, a second post-operation emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 148(6), a second button post image 576 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 148 (7), the left decorative symbol 41, "5," temporarily stops and performs a second stop action. At this time, a second stop emphasis image 573 is displayed around the left decorative symbol 41. The second stop emphasis image 573 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43, on a layer behind the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43. In addition, a first stop emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 148 (8), the right decorative symbol 41, "5", temporarily stops and performs the second stop action. At this time, the second stop emphasis image 573 is displayed around the right decorative symbol 41. In addition, the first stop emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 149 (9), the second reach effect starts, a reach line image 539, a reach suggestion image 540, a reach emphasis image 541, and a second reach eye emphasis image 543 are displayed, and the second reach action is performed. In the second reach effect, the effect is performed in the manner described using Fig. 105 (2) to (6). In addition, a first reach emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 149 (10), a first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed, and a first precursor emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 146 (11), the second button effect starts, and the button image 509 is displayed. In the second button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in the manner described using Fig. 60 (2) to (8). In addition, the first button emphasis sound is output.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the effect button 161 in the second button effect, a second post-operation emphasis image 511 is displayed as shown in Fig. 149 (12). Also, a second post-operation emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 149 (13), a post-third button image 577 is displayed, and a post-second button emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149 (14), the center decorative symbol 41, "6," temporarily stops, and a fourth stop-time action is performed, which is the action performed when the decorative symbol 41 temporarily stops. The fourth stop-time action is performed when a center decorative symbol 41 that is an even number (e.g., 2, 4, 6, 8) temporarily stops when a normal reach effect is executed. The fourth stop-time action is performed when the decorative symbol 41 lowers both hands. At this time, a sixth stop-time emphasis image 579 is displayed surrounding the center decorative symbol 41. The execution time of the fourth stop-time action and the display time of the sixth stop-time emphasis image 579 are 0.5 seconds. However, the execution time of the fourth stop-time action and the display time of the sixth stop-time emphasis image 579 may be different. The execution time of the fourth stop-time action and the display time of the sixth stop-time emphasis image 579 may be any time. A first stop-time emphasis sound is also output.
Then, as the special symbols stop varying, the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "565," are fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. 149 (15). The variable image 51 is no longer displayed. The variable count image 502 is updated to "11 games."

In the variation effect example 4, the second button effect is executed both before and after the reach effect starts, but this is not limited to this.
In the variation presentation example 4, as in the variation presentation example 3, the second button presentation may be executed before the start of the reach presentation, and the third button presentation may be executed after the start of the reach presentation.
In addition, in the variable performance example 3, the second button performance may be executed both before and after the start of the reach performance.

(Variation example 5)
FIG. 150 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variation presentation example 5) of the variation presentation of the decorative pattern 41 will be described with reference to Fig. 150. Variation presentation example 5 is an example of a random miss variation presentation, which is a variation presentation based on winning into the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state.
The variable effect shown in Figure 150 is the variable effect that is executed when "ER2" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 41.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

150(1), the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56, "623," are stopped and fixed by the performance control unit 300 as the previous special symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, the first of the two reserved images 52 is displayed in blue, and the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121 shows "2."
Next, as shown in FIG. 150 (2), the change effect starts as the special pattern starts to change, and the decorative pattern 41 and small pattern 56 start to change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150 (3), the second foreshadowing emphasis image 513 is displayed. The second foreshadowing emphasis image 513 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, the volume image 42, and the light intensity image 43. The second foreshadowing emphasis image 513 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and in a layer behind the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43. A second foreshadowing emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the second foreshadowing emphasis image 513 is displayed, is output. The second foreshadowing emphasis sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes that the button image 509 is displayed. The output time of the second foreshadowing emphasis sound is 0.25 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150 (4), the fourth button effect begins, and button image 509 is displayed. Furthermore, when effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the fourth button effect, first operation emphasis image 514 is displayed. First operation emphasis image 514 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of decorative pattern 41, volume image 42, and light intensity image 43. First operation emphasis image 514 is displayed in a layer in front of decorative pattern 41 and behind volume image 42 and light intensity image 43. In the fourth button effect, button image 509 is displayed in the manner described using FIGS. 63 (2) to (8) and 64 (9). Furthermore, a second button emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating the display of button image 509, is output. The second button emphasis sound can also be considered as an effect sound that emphasizes button image 509 (button effect). The output time of the second button emphasis sound is 1 second.

Then, regardless of whether the effect button 161 is operated or not, when the operation valid period for the fourth button effect has elapsed, a fourth post-operation emphasis image 515 is displayed as shown in FIG. 150 (5). The fourth post-operation emphasis image 515 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, the volume image 42, and the light intensity image 43. The fourth post-operation emphasis image 515 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and behind the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43. A fourth post-operation emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the fourth post-operation emphasis image 515 is displayed, is output. The fourth post-operation emphasis sound can also be considered as an emphasis sound corresponding to the operation of the effect button 161. The output time of the fourth post-operation emphasis sound is 0.15 seconds.
Next, as shown in FIG. 150 (6), the fourth button post-image 580 is displayed. The fourth button post-image 580 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41, in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41. The display time of the fourth button post-image 580 is 2 seconds. In addition, a third button post-emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the fourth button post-image 580 is displayed, is output. The output time of the third button post-emphasis sound is 0.25 seconds.

Next, as shown in Fig. 150 (7), three decorative symbols 41, "421", are temporarily stopped. On the other hand, no sound effect is output in association with the stopping of the decorative symbols 41.
Then, as the special symbols stop varying, the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "421," are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 150(8). The variable image 51 is no longer displayed. The variable count image 502 is updated to "21 games."
In addition, in the variation effect example 5, the action when the decorative pattern 41 stops and the display of the stop emphasis image may not be executed. Also, although the action when the decorative pattern 41 stops and the display of the stop emphasis image are executed, they may be difficult or impossible for the player to see because they are hidden by the after-fourth-button image 580.

(Example of variation 6)
151 to 153 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
151 to 153, another specific example (variation presentation example 6) of the variation presentation of the decorative symbol 41 will be described. Variation presentation example 6 is a variation presentation based on a win in the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variation presentation in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and an SP reach presentation is executed.
The variable effects shown in Figures 151 to 153 are variable effects that are executed when "ER8" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 41.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, as shown in Fig. 151 (1), the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56, "623," are stopped and fixed by the performance control unit 300 as the previous special pattern is stopped and displayed. In addition, the first of the two reserved images 52 is displayed in blue, and the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121 shows "2."
Next, as shown in FIG. 151 (2), the change effect starts as the special pattern starts to change, and the decorative pattern 41 and small pattern 56 start to change.
Next, as shown in Figure 151 (3), a second precursor emphasis image 513 is displayed, and a second precursor emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 151 (4), the fifth button effect starts, and button image 509 is displayed. Furthermore, when effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the fifth button effect, first operation highlight image 514 is displayed. In the fifth button effect, button image 509 is displayed in the manner described using Figs. 65 (2) to (8) and 66 (9). Furthermore, a second button highlight sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 151 (5), a fifth post-operation emphasis image 516 is displayed. The fifth post-operation emphasis image 516 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, the volume image 42, and the light intensity image 43. The fifth post-operation emphasis image 516 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and in a layer behind the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43. A fifth post-operation emphasis sound is output. The fifth post-operation emphasis sound is an emphasis sound corresponding to the operation of the effect button 161. The output time of the fifth post-operation emphasis sound is 0.23 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151 (6), pseudo-continuous hit image 581 and pseudo-continuous hit highlight image 582 are displayed. Pseudo-continuous hit highlight image 582 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of pseudo-continuous hit image 581, volume image 42, and light intensity image 43. Furthermore, pseudo-continuous hit highlight image 582 is displayed in a layer in front of pseudo-continuous hit image 581 and in a layer behind volume image 42 and light intensity image 43. The display time of pseudo-continuous hit highlight image 582 is 0.4 seconds. However, the display time of pseudo-continuous hit highlight image 582 may be any length of time. Furthermore, a second stop highlight sound, which is a sound effect indicating that pseudo-continuous hit highlight image 582 is displayed, is output. The second stop highlight sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes pseudo-continuous hit image 581 (pseudo-continuous hit effect). The output time of the second stop highlight sound is 1.5 seconds.

151(7), the pseudo-series image 581 is enlarged and displayed. The pseudo-series image 581 is displayed for 0.4 seconds. However, the time for which the pseudo-series image 581 is displayed may be different from the display time of the pseudo-series highlight image 582, and may be any time.
151(8), a re-change notification image 583 is displayed. The re-change notification image 583 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41 and in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41.

Next, as shown in Figure 152 (9), the decorative pattern 41 starts to change again. At this time, the re-change notification image 583 is displayed in a reduced size.
Next, as shown in FIG. 152 (10), the left decorative pattern 41, "4," temporarily stops, and the first stop operation is performed. At this time, a first stop emphasis image 572 is displayed around the left decorative pattern 41. At this time, a change effect is performed, and the display color of the variable image 51 changes from blue to green. A first green emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the variable image 51 has changed to green, is output. The first green emphasis sound can also be considered as an effect sound that emphasizes the green variable image 51 (reserved image 52). The output time of the first green emphasis sound is 1.1 seconds. At this time, the first stop emphasis sound is output, although not shown.
In each variation presentation example, the green pending image 52 and the green variation image 51 are displayed in motion in the manner described using Figure 46.

Next, as shown in Figure 152 (11), the right decorative symbol 41, "4," temporarily stops and performs the first stop action. At this time, a first stop emphasis image 572 is displayed around the right decorative symbol 41. Also, a first stop emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 152 (12), the first reach effect starts, a reach line image 539, a reach suggestion image 540, a reach emphasis image 541, and a first reach eye emphasis image 542 are displayed, and the first reach action is performed. In the first reach effect, the effect is performed in the manner described using Figs. 104 (2) to (6). In addition, a first reach emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 152 (13), a first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed, and a first precursor emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 152 (14), the third button effect starts, and the button image 509 is displayed. In the third button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in the manner described with reference to Figs. 60 (2) to (8). In addition, the first button emphasis sound is output.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the effect button 161 in the third button effect, a third post-operation emphasis image 512 is displayed as shown in Fig. 152 (15). Also, a third post-operation emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 152(16), a post-third button image 577 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 153 (17), the character portion of the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is erased, thereby reducing its decorativeness, and the movement is displayed in an enlarged manner. A first movement emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is being displayed in movement, is output. The first movement emphasis sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the movement display of the reach-eye decorative symbol 41. The first movement emphasis sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the start of the SP reach-eye movement. At this time, the stage image 61, the reserved image 52, the stage notification image 501, and the change count image 502 are hidden.

Next, as shown in Fig. 153 (18), each of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 is displayed in a shrinking motion. Also, each of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 is displayed in a moving motion to both upper corners of the image display section 114. Also, the SP reach effect is started, and the SP reach image 552 is displayed. Also, the output of the first action emphasis sound continues.
The execution time of the action display of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 shown in Figures 153 (17) and (18) is 2.5 seconds. However, the execution time of the action display of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 may be any time. Also, the output time of the first action emphasis sound is 1.5 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 153 (19), a development teaser effect is executed, displaying the middle decorative symbol 41, "5," the development image 584, and the first development teaser highlight image 585. In the illustrated example, the middle decorative symbol 41 and the development image 584 are displayed in a swaying motion from side to side. The middle decorative symbol 41 and the development image 584 are displayed in motion for 3.5 seconds. However, the middle decorative symbol 41 and the development image 584 may be displayed in motion for any length of time. Furthermore, the first development teaser highlight image 585 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display areas of the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the number of reserved items displayed 55, and the small symbols 56, and is displayed on a layer behind the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the number of reserved items displayed 55, and the small symbols 56. The display time of the first development teaser highlight image 585 is 2.5 seconds. However, the display time of the first development teaser highlight image 585 may be any length of time. In addition, a first development provocation emphasis sound is output, which is a sound effect indicating that the first development provocation emphasis image 585 is displayed. The first development provocation emphasis sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the middle decorative pattern 41 and the development image 584 (development provocation effect). The output time of the first development provocation emphasis sound is 2 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 153 (20), the development image 584 is hidden, and the middle decorative pattern 41 is displayed as moving toward the center of the image display unit 114. That is, after the development teasing effect is executed, the development effect is not executed. The execution time of the action display of the middle decorative pattern 41 is 2 seconds. A second action emphasis sound, which is a sound effect of the action display of the middle decorative pattern 41, is output. The second action emphasis sound can also be regarded as an effect sound that emphasizes the middle decorative pattern 41. The output time of the second action emphasis sound is 1.25 seconds.
Next, as shown in FIG. 153 (21), the middle decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 153 (22), a switching image 586 is displayed. The switching image 586 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, the volume image 42, and the light intensity image 43. The switching image 586 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and behind the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, and the small pattern 56.
153 (23), the switching image 586 is hidden, and the three decorative symbols 41, "454," are temporarily stopped in a highly decorative display mode. At this time, the variable image 51, the reserved image 52, the stage image 61, the stage notification image 501, and the variable count image 502 are redisplayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 153 (24), the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "454," are fixed and stopped as the special symbols stop varying. Also, the variable image 51 is hidden. Also, the variable count image 502 is updated to "21 games."

In addition, in the variable performance example 6, after the switching image 586 is displayed, the output of the performance sound is restricted.
Furthermore, when the switching image 586 is displayed, the variable image 51 may be hidden or may be displayed in a layer behind the switching image 586 .

154 and 155 are diagrams showing an example in which the second left-hit image 48 is displayed in Variation Presentation Example 6. In the following example, in Variation Presentation Example 6, the player continues to shoot the game ball toward the right side of the game area 111, and the game ball continuously enters the gate 124 provided on the right side of the game area 111.
In this example, first, the execution conditions for the first left-handed hit notification are met, and the first left-handed hit notification is executed. Then, the execution conditions for the second left-handed hit notification are met, and the second left-handed hit notification is executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 154 (1), when the second premonition emphasis image 513 is displayed (see FIG. 151 (3)), the second left-handed hit image 48 is displayed. The second left-handed hit image 48 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, the second premonition emphasis image 513, the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, and the small pattern 56. The second left-handed hit image 48 is also drawn on the second layer LA2 (see FIG. 147 (2)) in the image display unit 114. That is, the second left-handed hit image 48 is displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and the second premonition emphasis image 513, and on a layer behind the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, and the small pattern 56.

In each variation presentation example, the second left-hit notification is executed in the manner described using Figures 54 and 55.
Furthermore, the second left-hit sound is output at a volume of "5" regardless of the volume setting by operating the effect key 162. That is, in the illustrated example, while the volume is adjusted by operating the effect key 162 when the second left-hit notification is being made, the volume of the second left-hit sound is not adjusted.

Next, when the fifth button effect starts, as shown in Fig. 154(2), while the button image 509 and the first operation highlight image 514 are displayed (see Fig. 151(4)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output. The second left-hit image 48 is in an area that overlaps with the display areas of the button image 509 and the first operation highlight image 514, and is displayed in a layer in front of the button image 509 and the first operation highlight image 514.
Next, as shown in Fig. 154 (3), when the pseudo consecutive hit image 581 and the pseudo consecutive hit highlight image 582 are displayed (see Fig. 151 (6)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output. The second left-hit image 48 is in an area that overlaps with the display areas of the pseudo consecutive hit image 581 and the pseudo consecutive hit highlight image 582, and is displayed in a layer in front of the pseudo consecutive hit image 581 and the pseudo consecutive hit highlight image 582.

Next, when the first reach performance starts, as shown in Fig. 154 (4), when the reach line image 539, reach suggestion image 540, reach emphasis image 541, and first reach eye emphasis image 542 are displayed (see Fig. 152 (12)), the second left hit image 48 is displayed and a second left hit sound is output. The second left hit image 48 is in an area that overlaps with the display areas of the reach line image 539, reach suggestion image 540, reach emphasis image 541, and first reach eye emphasis image 542, and is displayed on a layer in front of the reach line image 539, reach suggestion image 540, reach emphasis image 541, and first reach eye emphasis image 542.
Next, as shown in Figure 154 (5), when the first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed (see Figure 152 (13)), the second left hit image 48 is displayed and the second left hit sound is output.

Next, when the third button effect starts, as shown in Figure 154 (6), when the button image 509 is displayed (see Figure 152 (14)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output.
Next, when the SP reach effect starts, as shown in Figure 154 (7), when the middle decorative symbol 41 "5", the development image 584, and the first development provocation highlight image 585 are displayed (see Figure 153 (19)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output. The second left-hit image 48 is in an area that overlaps with the display areas of the middle decorative symbol 41, the development image 584, and the first development provocation highlight image 585, and is displayed on a layer in front of the middle decorative symbol 41, the development image 584, and the first development provocation highlight image 585.

Next, as shown in Fig. 154 (8), when the switching image 586 is displayed (see Fig. 153 (22)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output. The second left-hit image 48 is in an area that overlaps the display area of the switching image 586 and is displayed on a layer in front of the switching image 586.
Next, as shown in Figure 155 (9), when the three decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped (see Figure 153 (23)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 155 (10), when the three decorative patterns 41 and the small pattern 56 "454" are fixed and stopped as the special pattern stops varying (see Figure 153 (24)), the second left-hit image 48 is no longer displayed and the second left-hit sound is no longer output. More specifically, when the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped, the second left-hit notification ends even if it is in the middle of being notified.

As described above, when the second left-hit notification is executed in variable presentation example 6, each of the presentation sounds described in variable presentation example 6 is restricted while the second left-hit notification is being executed.
In addition, when the first left-hit notification is executed in variable presentation example 6, each of the presentation sounds described in variable presentation example 6 is output even while the first left-hit notification is being executed.
In Variation Presentation Example 5, the pseudo consecutive hit effect is not executed after the execution of the fourth button effect. In Variation Presentation Example 6, the pseudo consecutive hit effect is executed after the execution of the fifth button effect. Here, the fourth button effect and the fifth button effect can also be considered as pseudo consecutive hit effect that encourages the execution of the pseudo consecutive hit effect.

In this embodiment, even if the left hit notification (first left hit notification, second left hit notification) is in progress, the left hit notification will end midway when the variable effect ends (the special symbol stops and displays). Also, even if the execution condition for the left hit notification (first left hit notification, second left hit notification) is met when the variable effect ends (the special symbol stops and displays), the left hit notification will not be executed.
However, even when the variable effect ends (the special symbol stops and displays), the left hit notification that was in progress may be continued. Also, when the variable effect ends (the special symbol stops and displays), if the execution conditions for the left hit notification (first left hit notification, second left hit notification) are met, the left hit notification may be made.

(Example of variation 7)
FIG. 156 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variation presentation example 7) of the variation presentation will be described with reference to Fig. 156. Variation presentation example 7 is an example of a variation presentation based on winning the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state.
The variable performance shown in Fig. 156 is a variable performance that is executed when "AR11" is selected as the "pre-determined performance pattern" in Fig. 39 and "ER4" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Fig. 41. In the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the above-mentioned variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 156(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "623" in the image display unit 114. At this time, two reserved images 52 are displayed. Also, at this time, "2" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121.
Next, as shown in Fig. 156 (2), as the display of the next special symbol begins to change, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 begin to change. Also, the second reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the first reserved image 52, and the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the changing image 51. Also, the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121 is updated to "1."

Next, when a game ball enters the first start slot 121, as shown in FIG. 156 (3), the second reserved image 52 is displayed and the reserved number display 55 for the first start slot 121 is updated to "2." At this time, a change effect is executed, and the first reserved image 52 changes from its normal display state to blue. A first blue emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the variable image 51 has changed to blue, is also output. The first blue emphasis sound can also be considered as an effect sound that emphasizes the blue reserved image 52 (variable image 51) in the normal game state. The output time of the first blue emphasis sound is 1 second.

Next, as shown in FIG. 156 (4), a chance eye effect is executed, and three decorative symbols 41, "331," stop. All three decorative symbols 41 are displayed in red. At this time, a chance eye emphasis image 587 is displayed around the three decorative symbols 41. The chance eye emphasis image 587 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43, in a layer behind the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43. The display time of the chance eye emphasis image 587 is 1.25 seconds. When the chance eye effect is executed, the lamp L may be illuminated in a color corresponding to the chance eye effect. For example, the lamp L may be illuminated in the color of the decorative symbol 41 when the chance eye effect is executed (red in the illustrated example). A first chance eye emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating the display of the chance eye emphasis image 587, is output. The first chance eye emphasis sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the three decorative symbols 41 in the chance eye effect. The output duration of the first chance eye emphasis sound is 1 second.

Next, as shown in FIG. 156 (5), as the special symbols stop varying, the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56 "331" are fixed and stopped.
The chance eye effect in the variation effect example 7 is an example of a pre-determination effect. This pre-determination effect is an effect that makes the player expect a jackpot in the variation effect following the variation effect when the pre-determination effect is being executed.

(Example of variation 8)
157 to 161 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable presentation (variable presentation example 8) will be described with reference to Figures 157 to 161. Variable presentation example 8 is a variable presentation based on a win in the first starting slot 121 in the normal gaming state, and is an example of a variable presentation in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and an SPSP reach presentation is executed. Also, variable presentation example 8 is an example of a variable presentation executed after the variable presentation shown in variable presentation example 7. In other words, variable presentation example 8 is an example of a variable presentation showing the result of the special symbol lottery suggested by the blue reserved image 52 (see Figure 156 (5)) shown in variable presentation example 7.
157 to 161 are the variation effects that are executed when "ER11" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in Fig. 41. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in Figure 157 (1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "331" on the image display unit 114. At this time, the first reserved image 52 is displayed in blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 157 (2), as the display of the next special symbol begins to change, the decorative symbol 41 and small symbol 56 begin to change. A first start action is performed when the decorative symbol 41 begins to change. The first start action is an action in which the decorative symbol 41 moves upward. The execution time of the first start action is 1.7 seconds. However, the execution time of the first start action may be any time. At this time, a first start emphasis image 588 is displayed around each of the three decorative symbols 41. The first start emphasis image 588 displayed around the left decorative symbol 41 is an area that overlaps with the display areas of the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43, and is displayed on a layer behind the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43. The display time of the first start emphasis image 588 is 0.8 seconds. However, the display time of the first start emphasis image 588 may be any time. A first start emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the first start emphasis image 588 is displayed, is output. The first start emphasis sound can also be considered a sound effect that emphasizes the decorative pattern 41 that performs the first start action. The output time of the first start emphasis sound is 0.3 seconds. In addition, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51, and the variable image 51 is displayed in blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 157 (3), the first reel effect begins, and the left movable reel 115A moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. A first reel emphasis image 551 is also displayed. The first reel emphasis image 551 is displayed in an area where it overlaps with the display areas of the left decorative pattern 41, the volume image 42, and the light intensity image 43. The first reel emphasis image 551 is also displayed in a layer in front of the left decorative pattern 41 and behind the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43. In the first reel effect, the effect described using FIGS. 114 (1) to (8) is performed. A first reel emphasis sound, which is a sound effect for the first reel effect, is also output. The first reel emphasis sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the movable reel 115. The output time of the first reel emphasis sound is 0.9 seconds.
Next, as shown in Figure 157 (4), a first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed, and a first precursor emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 157(5), the sixth button effect starts, and the button image 509 is displayed. In the sixth button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in the manner shown in Fig. 68(2) to (8). In addition, the first button emphasis sound is output.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the sixth button effect, a sixth post-operation emphasis image 517 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 157 (6). The sixth post-operation emphasis image 517 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, the change count image 502, the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, and the change image 51. The sixth post-operation emphasis image 517 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and the change count image 502, and in a layer behind the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, and the change image 51. A sixth post-operation emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the sixth post-operation emphasis image 517 is displayed, is output. The sixth post-operation emphasis sound can also be considered as an emphasis sound corresponding to the operation of the effect button 161. The output time of the sixth post-operation emphasis sound is 0.12 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 157(7), a fifth button post image 589 is displayed.
157(8), a change effect is executed, and the variable image 51 changes from blue to green. Also, a first green emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 158(9), a zone promotion effect is executed, and the first zone start image 536 is displayed in an up and down motion.
Next, as shown in FIG. 158(10), the first zone start image 536 stops.
Next, as shown in Figure 158 (11), the first zone effect starts, and a first zone execution image 537 is displayed. In the first zone effect, the effects described with reference to Figures 102 (2) to (6) are performed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 158 (12), a pseudo-continuous image 581 and a pseudo-continuous emphasis image 582 are displayed. Also, a second stop emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 158(13), the pseudo-continuous image 581 is enlarged and displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 158(14), a re-change notification image 583 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Figure 158 (15), the decorative pattern 41 starts to change again.
Next, as shown in FIG. 158 (16), a change effect is executed, and the changing image 51 changes from green to red. In addition, a red emphasis sound is output, which is a sound effect when the red changing image 51 is displayed. The red emphasis sound can also be regarded as an effect sound that emphasizes the changing image 51 (reserved image 52) for which a change effect has been executed. The output time of the red emphasis sound is 1.5 seconds.

Next, as shown in Fig. 159 (17), a pseudo-continuous image 581 and a pseudo-continuous emphasis image 582 are displayed. Also, a second stop emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 159(18), the pseudo-continuous image 581 is enlarged and displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 159 (19), a re-change notification image 583 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Figure 159 (20), the decorative pattern 41 begins to change again.
Next, as shown in Figure 159 (21), the left decorative symbol 41, "4," temporarily stops and performs the first stop action. At this time, a first stop emphasis image 572 is displayed around the left decorative symbol 41. Also, a first stop emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 159 (22), the right decorative symbol 41, "4," temporarily stops and performs the first stop action. At this time, a first stop emphasis image 572 is displayed around the right decorative symbol 41. Also, a first stop emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 159 (23), the first reach effect starts, a reach line image 539, a reach suggestion image 540, a reach emphasis image 541, and a first reach eye emphasis image 542 are displayed, and the first reach action is performed. In the first reach effect, the effect is performed in the manner described using Fig. 104 (2) to (6). In addition, a first reach emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 159 (24), in the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye, the character portion is erased to reduce the decorativeness, and the action is displayed in an enlarged manner. At this time, the stage image 61, the stage notification image 501, and the change count image 502 are not displayed. Also, a first action emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 160 (25), each of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 is displayed in a shrinking motion. Also, each of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 is displayed in a moving motion to both upper corners of the image display section 114. Also, the SP reach effect is started, and the SP reach image 552 is displayed. Also, the first motion emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 160 (26), a development provocation effect is executed, and the middle decorative symbol 41, "5," the development image 584, and the first development provocation emphasis image 585 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the middle decorative symbol 41 and the development image 584 are displayed in a motion that sways from side to side. In addition, the first development provocation emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 160 (27), the "5" which is the middle decorative pattern 41 is hidden, and the development image 584 stops. In addition, a first development emphasis sound, which is a sound effect when the development image 584 stops, is output. The first development emphasis sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the development image 584. The output time of the first development emphasis sound is 2 seconds.
Next, the development effect (second reel effect) begins, and as shown in FIG. 160 (28), the middle movable reel 115B moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. In addition, the development emphasis image 554 is displayed. In the development effect (second reel effect), the effect described using FIGS. 115 (1) to (8) and 116 (9) to (11) is performed. Also, at this time, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are not displayed. Also, a second reel emphasis sound, which is a sound effect of the second reel effect, is output. The second reel emphasis sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the development effect. The output time of the second reel emphasis sound is 6 seconds.

Next, the SPSP reach effect is started. At this time, the start suggestion effect of the first mode is started, and as shown in FIG. 160 (29), an SPSP start image 556 and a first start emphasis image 557 are displayed. In the start suggestion effect of the first mode, the effect described using FIGS. 119 (1) to (5) is performed. In addition, a first start emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the first start emphasis image 557 is displayed, is output. The first start emphasis sound can also be considered as an effect sound that emphasizes the start suggestion effect. The output time of the first start emphasis sound is 1.5 seconds.
Next, the first mode of in-execution suggestion effect is started, and as shown in FIG. 160 (30), an SPSP suggestion image 561 and a first in-execution highlight image 562 are displayed. In the first mode of in-execution suggestion effect, the effect described using FIGS. 124 (1) to (3) is performed. In addition, a first in-execution highlight sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the first in-execution highlight image 562 is displayed, is output. The first in-execution highlight sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the in-execution suggestion effect. The output time of the first in-execution highlight sound is 0.3 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 160 (31), a third portent emphasis image 518 is displayed. The third portent emphasis image 518 is displayed in the manner described with reference to FIGS. 70 (1) and (2). In addition, a third portent emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the third portent emphasis image 518 is displayed, is output. The third portent emphasis sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes that the button image 509 is displayed. The output time of the third portent emphasis sound is 1.2 seconds.
Next, the seventh button effect is initiated, and the button image 509 is displayed as shown in Fig. 160 (32). In the seventh button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in motion in the manner described with reference to Figs. 70 (3) to (8). In addition, a third button emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the button image 509 is displayed, is output. The third button emphasis sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the button image 509 (button effect). The output time of the third button emphasis sound is 0.5 seconds.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period for the seventh button effect, a seventh post-operation emphasis image 519 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 161 (33). The seventh post-operation emphasis image 519 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, volume image 42, and light intensity image 43. The seventh post-operation emphasis image 519 is also drawn on the fifth layer LA5 (see FIG. 147 (2)) in the image display unit 114. That is, the seventh post-operation emphasis image 519 is displayed on a layer behind the decorative pattern 41, volume image 42, and light intensity image 43. A seventh post-operation emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the seventh post-operation emphasis image 519 is displayed, is also output. The seventh post-operation emphasis sound can also be considered as an emphasis sound corresponding to the operation of the effect button 161. The output time of the seventh post-operation emphasis sound is 0.3 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 161 (34), the sixth button post-image 590 is displayed. The display time of the sixth button post-image 590 is 2.5 seconds. In addition, a fourth button post-emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the sixth button post-image 590 is displayed, is output. The output time of the fourth button post-emphasis sound is 1.6 seconds.
Next, as shown in FIG. 161 (35), three less decorative symbols 41, "454," are displayed moving from top to bottom. The emphasis sound after pressing the fourth button continues to be output. Therefore, the emphasis sound after pressing the fourth button can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the three decorative symbols 41.
Next, as shown in FIG. 161 (36), three decorative patterns 41 with low decorativeness are temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 161 (37), a switching image 586 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 161 (38), the switching image 586 is hidden, and the three decorative symbols 41, "454," are temporarily stopped in a highly decorative display mode. At this time, the reserved image 52, the stage image 61, the stage notification image 501, and the change count image 502 are redisplayed. On the other hand, the change image 51 is not redisplayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 161 (39), the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "454", are fixed and stopped as the special symbols stop varying. Also, the variation count image 502 is updated to "31 games."

(Example of variation 9)
162 to 167 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variation presentation example 9) of the variation presentation will be described with reference to Figs. 162 to 167. Variation presentation example 9 is an example of a jackpot variation presentation that is a variation presentation based on winning at the first starting slot 121 in the normal gaming state. Also, variation presentation example 9 is an example of a variation presentation that is executed after the variation presentation that is executed when "AA1" is selected as the "pre-determination presentation pattern" in Fig. 39. Also, the variation presentation that is executed when "AA1" is selected as the "pre-determination presentation pattern" in Fig. 39 is the variation presentation shown in Figs. 156 (1) to (5). Also, variation presentation example 9 is a variation presentation that is executed when "EA1" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 41.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, as shown in Figure 162 (1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "331" on the image display unit 114. At this time, the first of the two reserved images 52 is displayed in blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 162 (2), as the next special symbol starts to change, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 start to change. Also, the first start operation is executed. Also, at this time, a first start emphasis image 588 is displayed around each of the three decorative symbols 41. Also, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the changing image 51, and the changing image 51 is displayed in blue. Also, a first start emphasis sound is output.
At this time, a vibration effect is also executed. While this vibration effect is being executed, the effect button 161 emits light in white. The execution time of this vibration effect is 6 seconds. The effect button 161 starts emitting light in white after the vibration effect starts, and stops emitting light in white before the vibration effect ends, so that the effect button 161 emits light in white for 5.8 seconds during the vibration effect. However, the execution time of this vibration effect and the light-emitting time of the effect button 161 during the vibration effect may be any time.

Next, as shown in Fig. 162 (3), the first role performance starts, and the left movable role 115A moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. Also, a first role emphasis image 551 is displayed. In the first role performance, the performance described using Figs. 114 (1) to (8) is performed. Also, a first role emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 162 (4), a change effect is executed, and the variable image 51 changes from blue to green. Also, a first green emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 162(5), the first zone start image 536 stops.
Next, as shown in Fig. 162(6), the first zone effect starts, and a first zone execution image 537 is displayed. In the first zone effect, the effects described with reference to Figs. 102(2) to (6) are performed.

Next, as shown in Figure 162 (7), a first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed, and a first precursor emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 162 (8), the sixth button effect starts, and the button image 509 is displayed. In the sixth button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in the manner shown in Fig. 68 (2) to (8). In addition, the first button emphasis sound is output.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the sixth button effect, a sixth post-operation emphasis image 517 is displayed as shown in Fig. 163 (9). In addition, a sixth post-operation emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 163 (10), a pseudo-continuous image 581 and a pseudo-continuous emphasis image 582 are displayed. Also, a second stop emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 163(11), the pseudo-continuous image 581 is enlarged and displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 163 (12), a re-change notification image 583 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Figure 163 (13), the decorative pattern 41 begins to change again.
Next, as shown in Figure 163 (14), a change effect is executed, and the variable image 51 changes from green to red. Also, a red-emphasizing sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 163 (15), a pseudo-continuous image 581 and a pseudo-continuous emphasis image 582 are displayed. Also, a second stop emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 163(16), the pseudo-continuous image 581 is enlarged and displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 164 (17), a re-change notification image 583 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Figure 164 (18), the decorative pattern 41 begins to change again.
Next, as shown in Figure 164 (19), the left decorative symbol 41, "4," temporarily stops and performs the first stop action. At this time, a first stop emphasis image 572 is displayed around the left decorative symbol 41. Also, a first stop emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 164 (20), the right decorative symbol 41, "4," temporarily stops and performs the first stop action. At this time, a first stop emphasis image 572 is displayed around the right decorative symbol 41. Also, a first stop emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 164 (21), the third reach effect starts, a reach line image 539, a reach suggestion image 540, a reach emphasis image 541, and a fourth reach emphasis image 544 are displayed, and the third reach action is performed. In the third reach effect, the effect is performed in the manner described with reference to FIGS. 106 (2) to (6). In addition, a second reach emphasis sound, which is a sound effect for the third reach effect, is output. The second reach emphasis sound can also be considered as an effect sound that emphasizes the reach effect. The output time of the second reach emphasis sound is 1.2 seconds.

Next, as shown in Figure 164 (22), in the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye, the character portion is erased to reduce the decorativeness, and the action is displayed in an enlarged manner. At this time, the stage image 61, the reserved image 52, the stage notification image 501, and the change count image 502 are not displayed. Also, a first action emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 164 (23), each of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 is displayed in a shrinking motion. Also, each of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 is displayed in a moving motion to both upper corners of the image display section 114. Also, the SP reach effect is started, and the SP reach image 552 is displayed. Also, the first motion emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 164 (24), a development provocation effect is executed, and the middle decorative symbol 41, "5," the development image 584, and the first development provocation emphasis image 585 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the middle decorative symbol 41 and the development image 584 are displayed in a motion that sways from side to side. In addition, the first development provocation emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 165 (25), the "5" which is the middle decorative pattern 41 is hidden, and the development image 584 stops. Also, the first development emphasis sound is output.
Next, the development effect (second role effect) starts, and as shown in FIG. 165 (26), the middle movable role 115B moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. Also, the development emphasis image 554 is displayed. Also, at this time, the variable image 51 is not displayed. Also, the second role emphasis sound is output.

Next, the SPSP reach effect is started. Also, the start suggestion effect of the second mode is started, and as shown in FIG. 165 (27), an SPSP start image 556 and a second start emphasis image 558 are displayed. In the start suggestion effect of the second mode, the effect described using FIGS. 120 (1) to (6) is performed. Also, a second start emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the second start emphasis image 558 is displayed, is output. The second start emphasis sound can also be considered as an effect sound that emphasizes the start suggestion effect. The output time of the second start emphasis sound is 2.5 seconds.
Next, the in-execution suggestion effect of the second mode is started, and as shown in FIG. 165 (28), the SPSP suggestion image 561 and the second in-execution highlight image 563 are displayed. In the in-execution suggestion effect of the second mode, the effect described using FIG. 125 (1) to (5) is performed. In addition, a second in-execution highlight sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the second in-execution highlight image 563 is displayed, is output. The second in-execution highlight sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the in-execution suggestion effect. The output time of the second in-execution highlight sound is 1 second.

Next, as shown in Figure 165 (29), a third precursor emphasis image 518 is displayed. The third precursor emphasis image 518 is displayed in the manner described with reference to Figures 70 (1) and (2). In addition, a third precursor emphasis sound is output.
Next, the eighth button effect starts, and the button image 509 is displayed as shown in Fig. 165 (30). In the eighth button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in motion in the manner described with reference to Figs. 70 (3) to (8). In addition, the third button emphasis sound is output.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period for the eighth button effect, an eighth post-operation emphasis image 520 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 165 (31). The eighth post-operation emphasis image 520 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, volume image 42, light intensity image 43, hold number display 55, and small pattern 56. The eighth post-operation emphasis image 520 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and behind the volume image 42, light intensity image 43, hold number display 55, and small pattern 56. An eighth post-operation emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the eighth post-operation emphasis image 520 is displayed, is output. The eighth post-operation emphasis sound can also be considered an emphasis sound corresponding to the operation of the effect button 161. The output time after the eighth operation is 0.3 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165 (32), the first jackpot presentation is executed. In the first jackpot presentation, a first jackpot notification sound is output, a vibration presentation is executed, the center movable role element 115B moves to a position overlapping the display area of the image display unit 114, and the center movable role element 115B, presentation button 161, and lamp L emit rainbow-colored light. A first jackpot highlight image 566 is also displayed. The first jackpot highlight image 566 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative symbol 41, volume image 42, light intensity image 43, reserved number display 55, and small symbol 56. The first jackpot highlight image 566 is also displayed in a layer in front of the decorative symbol 41 and behind the volume image 42, light intensity image 43, reserved number display 55, and small symbol 56. In the first jackpot presentation, the presentations described using FIGS. 130 (2) through (8) and 131 (9) through (16) are executed. Furthermore, when the first jackpot emphasis image 566 is displayed, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed but is difficult or impossible to see because it is covered by the first jackpot emphasis image 566.

166 (33), the doublet decorative pattern 41 "444" is displayed in an enlarged manner. More specifically, the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in an enlarged manner so that the display area of the center decorative pattern 41 is larger than the display area of the left decorative pattern 41 and the display area of the right decorative pattern 41.
Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (34), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a shrinking manner, so that the display areas of the three decorative patterns 41 become the same size. The display time of the doublet decorative pattern 41 is 2.5 seconds. However, the display time of the doublet decorative pattern 41 may be any time. In addition, a first doublet emphasis image 591 is displayed. The first doublet emphasis image 591 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, the volume image 42, and the light intensity image 43. In addition, the first doublet emphasis image 591 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and behind the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43. The display time of the first doublet emphasis image 591 is 1.5 seconds. However, the display time of the first doublet emphasis image 591 may be any time. In addition, a first doublet emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the first doublet emphasis image 591 is displayed, is output. The first doublet emphasis sound can also be regarded as an effect sound that emphasizes the doublet decorative pattern 41. The output time of the first doublet emphasis sound is 1.3 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (35), a promotion promotion effect is executed and a promotion promotion highlight image 592 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Figure 166 (36), a first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed, and a first precursor emphasis sound is output.
Next, the first button effect starts, and the button image 509 is displayed as shown in Fig. 166 (37). In the first button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in motion in the manner described with reference to Figs. 60 (2) to (8). In addition, a first button emphasis sound is output.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the first button effect, a first post-operation emphasis image 510 is displayed as shown in Fig. 166 (38). Also, a first post-operation emphasis sound is output.
166 (39), the doublet decorative pattern 41 "444" is displayed again. At this time, the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in an operational manner so that the display area of the center decorative pattern 41 is larger than the display area of the left decorative pattern 41 and the display area of the right decorative pattern 41.
Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (40), the decorative symbols 41 of the triplet are displayed in a shrinking manner, so that the display areas of the three decorative symbols 41 are all the same size. A first doublet emphasis image 591 is also displayed. A first doublet emphasis sound is also output.

Then, as shown in Figure 167 (41), as the special pattern stops, the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 "444" are fixed and stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 167 (42), a first right hit notification is made and a first right hit image 503 is displayed. Also, a jackpot start image 593 is displayed.
In each variation presentation example, the first right-hit notification is executed in the manner described using Figure 57.

167 (43), a second right hit notification is made and a second right hit image 507 is displayed. The second right hit image 507 is an area that overlaps with the display areas of the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43, and is displayed on a layer behind the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43.
In each variation presentation example, the second right-hit notification is executed in the manner described using Figure 58.

Next, the big win game starts, and as shown in FIG. 167 (44), a round number image 594 and a round in progress image 595 are displayed.
Next, the big win game ends, and a time-saving start image 596 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 167 (45).
Next, in the special time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 167 (46), the decorative symbol 41 with low decorativeness, "444," is fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114. The small symbol 56 is also fixed and stopped as a sequence of numbers "444," similar to the decorative symbol 41. At this time, the stage image 61 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the third stage, which is the presentation mode in the special time-saving game state. The reserved number display 55 of the first start slot 121 displays "1." Meanwhile, the reserved image 52 is not displayed. The stage notification image 501 and the remaining number of times in the time-saving game 504 are also displayed. In the illustrated example, the stage notification image 501 displays the text "Ocean," and the remaining number of times in the time-saving game 504 displays the text "100 more."

As described above, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can display the button image 509 that emphasizes the promotion of the operation of the effect button 161, and can execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the button image 509. The change effect includes a first change effect (for example, the operation display of the button emphasis unit 509c) and a second change effect (for example, the operation display of the highlighted character 509d). The first change effect is performed by the periodic first operation display, and the second change effect is performed by the periodic second operation display.
In this case, it becomes easier to distinguish between the first change effect and the second change effect, and since both change effects are performed periodically, it is possible to prevent the player from missing the change effects.

In particular, in this embodiment, the period of the action display in the first change presentation is made different from the period of the action display in the second change presentation.
Therefore, compared to when the period of the action display in the first change presentation and the period of the action display in the second change presentation are the same, it is easier for the player to recognize that the first change presentation and the second change presentation are different presentations, and the player can feel the diversity of the presentations more.

In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can execute specific effects in the variable effect, display the button image 509 to emphasize the prompting of the operation of the effect button 161, and execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the button image 509. The change effects include a first change effect (e.g., the operation display of the button highlighting unit 509c) and a second change effect (e.g., the operation display of the highlighted character 509d). The specific effects include a temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41, a reach effect, an SP reach effect, an SPSP reach effect, and a pseudo consecutive effect. The effect control unit 300 can also change the execution time of the first change effect and the second change effect before and after the start of the specific effect (see FIGS. 162 (8), 165 (30), and 101). Therefore, the player can be prompted to operate the effect button 161 in a manner appropriate to the progress of the variable effect.
Furthermore, the presentation control unit 300 can make the execution time of the first change presentation and the execution time of the second change presentation before the start of the specific presentation different, which makes it easier for the player to recognize both the first change presentation and the second change presentation before the start of the specific presentation, compared to when the execution time of the first change presentation and the execution time of the second change presentation are the same.
Furthermore, the effect control unit 300 can make the execution time of the first change effect and the execution time of the second change effect after the start of the specific effect different, which makes it easier for the player to recognize both the first change effect and the second change effect after the start of the specific effect, compared to when the execution time of the first change effect and the execution time of the second change effect are the same.

The performance control unit 300 may make one of the performance modes of the first change performance and the second change performance the same before and after the start of the specific performance, and make the other different. The performance control unit 300 may also make both the performance mode of the first change performance and the performance mode of the second change performance the same before and after the start of the specific performance. The performance mode of the change performance may be any (or all) of the execution time of the change performance, the cycle of the change performance, and the display mode (action display mode) of the change performance.
In particular, the performance control unit 300 may keep the execution time of the change effect the same before the start of a specific performance and after the start of the specific performance, but may vary either the cycle of the change effect or the display mode (operation display mode) of the change effect. Also, the performance control unit 300 may keep the cycle of the change effect the same before the start of a specific performance and after the start of the specific performance, but may vary either the execution time of the change effect or the display mode (operation display mode) of the change effect. Also, the performance control unit 300 may keep the display mode (operation display mode) of the change effect the same before the start of a specific performance and after the start of the specific performance, but may vary either the cycle of the change effect or the execution time of the change effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 may make the operation effective period for the button performance (execution time of the button performance, display time of the button unit 509a) the same before and after the start of the specific performance, and may differ at least one of the execution time of the change performance, the period of the change performance, and the display mode (operation display mode) of the change performance.
In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 may make at least one of the execution time of the change performance, the period of the change performance, and the display mode (operation display mode) of the change performance common before and after the start of the specific performance, and may make the operation effective period of the button performance (execution time of the button performance, display time of the button unit 509a) different.

In this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute a specific performance in the variable performance, and can execute an emphasis performance (illumination of the performance button 161) that emphasizes the performance button 161 when a vibration performance is executed. The performance control unit 300 can make the execution time of the vibration performance different from the execution time of the emphasis performance (see FIG. 101).
Therefore, compared to when the execution time of the vibration effect and the execution time of the emphasis effect are the same, it is easier for the player to notice each of the vibration effect and the emphasis effect.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the effect button 161 is operated in the button effect in the SPSP reach effect, the effect control unit 300 can change the execution mode of the emphasis effect in response to the operation of the effect button 161 depending on whether the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss or a jackpot (see Figure 161 (33), Figure 165 (31)).
In this case, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the effect button 161 has been operated regardless of the result of the special pattern lottery, and it is also possible to make the player recognize the result of the special pattern lottery quickly.

In this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute specific performances in variable performances and can execute special device performances. Specific performances include temporary stops of the decorative symbols 41, reach performances, SP reach performances, SPSP reach performances, button performances, and pseudo consecutive performances. The performance control unit 300 changes the operating mode of the movable device 115 in the special device performance before and after the start of the special performance (see (26) and (32) of FIG. 165).
Here, apart from the variable performance example 9, a variable performance may be provided in which the operating mode of the movable role object 115 in the role object performance is the same before and after the start of the specific performance. As an example, as a modified example of the variable performance example 9, a variable performance may be provided in which, at the timing shown in FIG. 162 (3), a role object performance is executed in which the center movable role object 115 operates in the same manner as that shown in FIG. 165 (32), and the first role object emphasis image 551 is displayed. That is, the performance control unit 300 can make the operating mode of the movable role object 115 in the role object performance different before and after the start of the specific performance, and can make the operating mode of the movable role object 115 in the role object performance the same before and after the start of the specific performance. And, while the operating mode of the movable role object 115 in the role object performance is the same before and after the start of the specific performance, the displayed emphasis image is different.

The performance control unit 300 can also execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes the role effect, and the emphasis effect includes a first emphasis effect (e.g., the light emission of the movable role object 115) and a second emphasis effect (e.g., the display of a role object emphasis image, the display of a jackpot emphasis image). The performance control unit 300 can also change the execution time of the first emphasis effect and the execution time of the second emphasis effect before the start of the specific effect and after the start of the specific effect (see FIG. 157 (3), FIG. 165 (32), FIG. 118, and FIG. 141). Therefore, the player can be made to pay attention to the movable role object 115 in a manner that corresponds to the progress of the variable effect.
Furthermore, the effect control unit 300 can make the execution time of the first emphasis effect and the execution time of the second emphasis effect different before the start of the specific effect, which makes it easier for the player to recognize both the first emphasis effect and the second emphasis effect before the start of the specific effect, compared to when the execution time of the first emphasis effect and the execution time of the second emphasis effect are the same.
Furthermore, the effect control unit 300 can make the execution time of the first emphasis effect and the execution time of the second emphasis effect different from each other after the start of the specific effect, which makes it easier for the player to recognize both the first emphasis effect and the second emphasis effect after the start of the specific effect, compared to when the execution time of the first emphasis effect and the execution time of the second emphasis effect are the same.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can change both the display mode (operation display mode) and execution time of the second emphasis performance before the start of the specific performance and after the start of the specific performance.
Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the difference in how the movable device 115 draws the player's attention depending on the progress of the variable presentation.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 is capable of executing an emphasis performance that emphasizes the special device performance, and is capable of executing an emphasis performance that has a shorter execution time than the specific notification, and an emphasis performance that has a longer execution time than the specific notification (see Figure 56 (2), Figure 118, Figure 141).
Therefore, the execution time of the emphasis effect is easily recognized by the player, and it is possible to highlight the variety of ways in which the player can focus on the role-playing effect according to the emphasis effect. Also, the execution time of the specific notification can be set to a time necessary to prompt the player to operate the handle 151, but not to a degree that reduces the player's interest in the game.

The effect control unit 300 can also execute specific effects in variable effects, display a button image 509 that emphasizes the need to operate the effect button 161, and execute change effects that change the display mode of the button image 509. Change effects include the movement display of the button image 509a, the movement display of the button highlighting section 509c, and the movement display of the highlighted text 509d. Specific effects include temporary stopping of the decorative pattern 41, reach effects, SP reach effects, SPSP reach effects, and pseudo consecutive effects. The effect control unit 300 can also change the frequency (cycle) of change effects before and after the start of a specific effect. This allows the player to be encouraged to operate the effect button 161 in a manner that corresponds to the progress of the variable effect.

168 and 169 are diagrams showing an example in which the second left-hit image 48 is displayed in Variation Presentation Example 9. In the following example, in Variation Presentation Example 9, the player continues to shoot the game ball toward the right side of the game area 111, and the game ball continuously enters the gate 124 provided on the right side of the game area 111.
In this example, first, the execution conditions for the first left-hand hit notification are met, and the first left-hand hit notification is executed. Then, the execution conditions for the second left-hand hit notification are met, and the second left-hand hit notification is executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 168 (1), when the first start action is executed and the first start emphasis image 588 is displayed (see FIG. 162 (2)), the second left-hand hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hand hit sound is output. The second left-hand hit image 48 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, the first start emphasis image 588, the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, and the small pattern 56. Furthermore, the second left-hand hit image 48 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and the first start emphasis image 588, and in a layer behind the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, and the small pattern 56.

Next, as shown in Fig. 168 (2), when the first reel effect starts and the reel first emphasis image 551 is displayed (see Fig. 162 (3)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output. The second left-hit image 48 is in an area that overlaps with the display area of the reel first emphasis image 551 and is displayed on a layer in front of the reel first emphasis image 551.
Next, as shown in Figure 168 (3), when the first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed (see Figure 162 (7)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output. The second left-hit image 48 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the first precursor emphasis image 508, and is displayed in a layer in front of the first precursor emphasis image 508.
Next, as shown in Fig. 168(4), when the sixth button effect starts and the button image 509 is displayed (see Fig. 162(8)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output. The second left-hit image 48 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the button image 509, and is displayed on a layer in front of the button image 509.

Next, as shown in Fig. 168 (5), when the sixth post-operation emphasis image 517 is displayed (see Fig. 163 (9)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output. The second left-hit image 48 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the sixth post-operation emphasis image 517, and is displayed in a layer in front of the sixth post-operation emphasis image 517.
Next, as shown in Fig. 168 (6), when the pseudo consecutive hit image 581 and the pseudo consecutive hit highlight image 582 are displayed (see Fig. 163 (10)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and a second left-hit sound is output. The second left-hit image 48 is in an area that overlaps with the display areas of the pseudo consecutive hit image 581 and the pseudo consecutive hit highlight image 582, and is displayed in a layer in front of the pseudo consecutive hit image 581 and the pseudo consecutive hit highlight image 582.

168(7), when the third reach effect starts and the reach line image 539, reach suggestion image 540, reach emphasis image 541, and fourth reach eye emphasis image 544 are displayed (see FIG. 164(21)), the second left hit image 48 is displayed and a second left hit sound is output. The second left hit image 48 is in an area that overlaps with the display areas of the reach line image 539, reach suggestion image 540, reach emphasis image 541, and fourth reach eye emphasis image 544, and is displayed in a layer in front of the reach line image 539, reach suggestion image 540, reach emphasis image 541, and fourth reach eye emphasis image 544.
Next, as shown in Fig. 168 (8), when the middle decorative pattern 41, the development image 584, and the first development provocative highlight image 585 are displayed (see Fig. 164 (24)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and a second left-hit sound is output. The second left-hit image 48 is in an area that overlaps with the display areas of the middle decorative pattern 41, the development image 584, and the first development provocative highlight image 585, and is displayed on a layer in front of the middle decorative pattern 41, the development image 584, and the first development provocative highlight image 585.

Next, as shown in Figure 169 (9), when the development effect (second role effect) starts and the development emphasis image 554 is displayed (see Figure 165 (26)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output. The second left-hit image 48 is in an area that overlaps with the display area of the development emphasis image 554 and is displayed on a layer in front of the development emphasis image 554.
Next, as shown in Figure 169 (10), when the third precursor emphasis image 518 is displayed (see Figure 165 (29)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output. The second left-hit image 48 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the third precursor emphasis image 518, and is displayed in a layer in front of the third precursor emphasis image 518.
Next, as shown in Figure 169 (11), when the 8th button effect starts and the button image 509 is displayed (see Figure 165 (30)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 169 (12), when the eighth post-operation emphasis image 520 is displayed (see Fig. 165 (31)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output. The second left-hit image 48 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the eighth post-operation emphasis image 520, and is displayed in a layer in front of the eighth post-operation emphasis image 520.
Next, as shown in Figure 169 (13), when the first jackpot effect is executed and the first jackpot emphasis image 566 is displayed (see Figure 165 (32)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output. The second left-hit image 48 is in an area that overlaps with the display area of the first jackpot emphasis image 566 and is displayed in a layer in front of the first jackpot emphasis image 566.

Next, as shown in Fig. 169 (14), when the doublet decorative pattern 41 and the first doublet emphasized image 591 are displayed (see Fig. 166 (34)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and a second left-hit sound is output. The second left-hit image 48 is in an area that overlaps with the display area of the doublet decorative pattern 41 and the first doublet emphasized image 591, and is displayed in a layer in front of the doublet decorative pattern 41 and the first doublet emphasized image 591.
Next, as shown in Figure 169 (15), when the first button effect starts and the button image 509 is displayed (see Figure 166 (37)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 169 (16), when the first double-digit highlight image 591 is displayed (see Figure 166 (40)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output.
Although not shown in the figure, after this, when the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 are fixed and stopped in accordance with the stop display of the special pattern, the second left-hit image 48 is no longer displayed.

As described above, when the second left-hit notification is executed in variable presentation example 9, each of the presentation sounds described in variable presentation example 9 is restricted during the execution of the second left-hit notification.
In addition, when the first left-hit notification is executed in variable performance example 9, each of the performance sounds described in variable performance example 9 is output even while the first left-hit notification is being executed.

Furthermore, even when the left-hit notification shown in Figures 168 and 169 is being executed, the illumination of the lamp L, the effect button 161, and the movable device 115, and the output of the effect sound, as described in Variable Performance Example 9, may continue.
Furthermore, not limited to variation performance example 9, even when a left-hit notification is being executed in each variation performance, the illumination of lamp L, performance button 161, and movable role object 115 and the output of performance sounds may continue. Furthermore, when a first left-hit notification is executed in each variation performance, the illumination of lamp L, performance button 161, and movable role object 115 and the output of performance sounds may continue. Furthermore, when a second left-hit notification is executed in each variation performance, the illumination of lamp L, performance button 161, and movable role object 115 and the output of performance sounds may be limited, and the second left-hit notification may be executed preferentially.

Also, although not shown, when the left decorative pattern 41, "4," temporarily stops, the first stop action is performed, and the first stop emphasis image 572 is displayed (see FIG. 164 (19)), the second left hit image 48 is displayed and the second left hit sound is output. At this time, the second left hit image 48 is in an area that overlaps with the display areas of the left decorative pattern 41 and the first stop emphasis image 572, and is displayed on a layer in front of the left decorative pattern 41 and the first stop emphasis image 572.

In addition, Figures 168 and 169 show an example of when the second left-hit image 48 is displayed in variable presentation example 9. For example, when a chance eye presentation is being executed, if game balls continuously enter the gate 124 located on the right side of the game area 111 and the conditions for executing the second left-hit notification are met, the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output. In this case, the second left-hit image 48 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41 and chance eye emphasis image 587 (see Figure 156 (4)), and is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and chance eye emphasis image 587.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the left-hit notification is executed even after the doublet-number emphasized image is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For a predetermined period after the display of the double-digit emphasis image, the left-hand hit notification may not be executed even if the game ball continuously enters the gate 124 located on the right side of the game area 111.

(Variation example 10)
FIG. 170 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 10) will be described with reference to Fig. 170. Variable effect example 10 is an example of a jackpot variable effect, which is a variable effect based on winning the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state.
Note that variation presentation example 10 is a variation presentation that is executed when "EA2" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 41. Also, variation presentation example 10 is an example of a variation presentation that is executed after the variation presentation that is executed when "AA2" is selected as the "pre-determination presentation pattern" in Fig. 39. Also, the variation presentation that is executed when "AA2" is selected as the "pre-determination presentation pattern" in Fig. 39 is the variation presentation shown in Fig. 156 (1) to (5).
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 162 (1) to (8), 163 (9) to (16), 164 (17) to (24), and 165 (25) to (27) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 170 (1), the second type of in-execution suggestion effect begins, and the SPSP in-execution suggestion image 561 and the second in-execution highlight image 563 are displayed. In the second type of in-execution suggestion effect, the effects described using Figures 125 (1) to (5) are performed. In addition, a second in-execution highlight sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 170(2), a third precursor emphasis image 518 is displayed. The third precursor emphasis image 518 is displayed in the manner described with reference to Figs. 70(1) and (2). In addition, a third precursor emphasis sound is output.
Next, the ninth button effect is initiated, and the button image 509 is displayed as shown in Fig. 170 (3). In the ninth button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in motion in the manner described with reference to Figs. 73 (3) to (8) and Fig. 74 (9). In addition, a fourth button emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the button image 509 is displayed, is output. The fourth button emphasis sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the button image 509 (button effect). The output time of the fourth button emphasis sound is 0.6 seconds.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the ninth button effect, an eighth post-operation emphasis image 520 is displayed as shown in Fig. 170 (4). In addition, an eighth post-operation emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 170 (5), the first jackpot presentation is executed. In the first jackpot presentation, a first jackpot notification sound is output, a vibration presentation is executed, the center movable role element 115B moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114, and the center movable role element 115B, presentation button 161, and lamp L emit light in rainbow colors. In addition, a first jackpot highlight image 566 is displayed. In the first jackpot presentation, the presentations described using Figures 130 (2) to (8) and Figures 131 (9) to (16) are executed.
Although not shown in the figures, the same effects as those shown in Figures 166 (33) to (40) and Figures 167 (41) to (46) are then performed.

Furthermore, in variable presentation example 10, if the player continues to fire the game ball toward the right side of the play area 111 and the game ball continuously enters the gate 124 located on the right side of the play area 111, as shown in FIG. 170(6), the ninth button presentation is initiated, and when the button image 509 is displayed (see FIG. 170(3)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and a second left-hit sound is output. The second left-hit image 48 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the button image 509, the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, and the small symbols 56. The second left-hit image 48 is displayed in a layer in front of the button image 509 and behind the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, and the small symbols 56. The output of the fourth button emphasis sound is also limited.
In addition, when the first left-hit notification is being executed in variable performance example 10, the fourth button emphasis sound is output even while the first left-hit notification is being executed.

(Variation example 11)
FIG. 171 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 11) will be described with reference to Fig. 171. Variable effect example 11 is an example of a jackpot variable effect, which is a variable effect based on winning into the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state.
Incidentally, variation presentation example 11 is a variation presentation executed when "EA3" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 41. Also, variation presentation example 11 is an example of a variation presentation executed after the variation presentation executed when "AA3" is selected as the "pre-determination presentation pattern" in Fig. 39. Also, the variation presentation executed when "AA3" is selected as the "pre-determination presentation pattern" in Fig. 39 is the variation presentation shown in Fig. 156 (1) to (5).
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 162(1) to 162(3) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 171(1), a change effect is executed, and the variable image 51 changes from blue to green. Also, a first green emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 171 (2), a first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed, and a first precursor emphasis sound is output.
Next, the tenth button effect is initiated, and the button image 509 is displayed as shown in FIG. 171 (3). In the tenth button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in motion in the manner described with reference to FIGS. 76 (2) to (8) and 77 (9). In addition, a fifth button emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the button image 509 is displayed, is output. The fifth button emphasis sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the button image 509 (button effect). The output time of the fifth button emphasis sound is 0.3 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 171 (4), a ninth post-operation emphasis image 521 is displayed. The ninth post-operation emphasis image 521 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, stage notification image 501, number of changes image 502, volume image 42, light intensity image 43, number of reserved times display 55, and small patterns 56. The ninth post-operation emphasis image 521 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41, stage notification image 501, and number of changes image 502, and in a layer behind the volume image 42, light intensity image 43, number of reserved times display 55, and small patterns 56. A ninth post-operation emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the ninth post-operation emphasis image 521 is displayed, is output. The ninth post-operation emphasis sound can also be considered as an emphasis sound corresponding to the operation of the effect button 161. The output time of the ninth post-operation emphasis sound is 0.35 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 171(5), the first zone start image 536 stops.
Although not shown, after this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 162 (6) to (8), 163 (9) to (16), 164 (17) to (24), 165 (25) to (32), 166 (33) to (40), and 167 (41) to (46) are performed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can execute specific effects in the variable effect, can display the button image 509 that emphasizes the promotion of operation of the effect button 161, and can execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the button image 509. The change effects include a first change effect (e.g., the operation display of the button highlighting unit 509c) and a second change effect (e.g., the operation display of the highlighted character 509d). Specific effects include temporary stopping of the decorative pattern 41, a reach effect, an SP reach effect, an SPSP reach effect, and a pseudo consecutive effect. The effect control unit 300 can change the execution mode of both the first change effect and the second change effect before and after the start of the specific effect (see FIG. 171 (3), FIGS. 76 (2) to (8), FIG. 165 (30), and FIGS. 70 (3) to (8)).
In this case, the uniqueness of how the player focuses on the button image 509 can be enhanced depending on the progress of the variable presentation.

The performance control unit 300 may make the execution mode of the first change performance and the execution mode of the second change performance common before and after the start of the specific performance. For example, at the time shown in FIG. 171 (3) in variation performance example 11, the eighth button performance is executed, so that the execution mode of the first change performance and the execution mode of the second change performance may be common before and after the start of the specific performance.
In this case, regardless of the progress of the variable effect, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the button effect is being executed, and it is possible to further encourage the player to operate the effect button 161.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 may make one of the execution modes of the first change performance and the second change performance the same and make the other different before and after the start of the specific performance.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute an operation performance that displays a button image 509 that emphasizes the promotion of operation of the performance button 161, and can execute a change performance that changes the display mode of the button image 509. The operation performance includes a first operation performance (for example, the eighth button performance (see Figure 165 (30))) and a second operation performance (for example, the tenth button performance (see Figure 171 (3))), and the change performance includes a first change performance (for example, the operation display of the button highlighting unit 509c) and a second change performance (for example, the operation display of the highlighted character 509d). The performance control unit 300 can make the operation mode of the first change performance and the operation mode of the second change performance different in the first operation performance and the second operation performance (see Figures 76 (2) to (8), Figures 70 (3) to (8)).
In this case, the uniqueness of how the player focuses on the button image 509 can be enhanced depending on the operation presentation.
Note that the performance control unit 300 may make either the operation mode of the first change performance or the operation mode of the second change performance different and make the other common between the first operation performance and the second operation performance. Also, the performance control unit 300 may make both the operation mode of the first change performance and the operation mode of the second change performance common between the first operation performance and the second operation performance.

In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can vary the execution time of the first change effect and the execution time of the second change effect in the first operation effect and the second operation effect (see FIG. 101 ). Therefore, the player can be encouraged to operate the effect button 161 in a manner that corresponds to the type of operation effect.
Furthermore, the presentation control unit 300 can make the execution time of the first change presentation in the first operation presentation different from the execution time of the second change presentation, which makes it easier for the player to recognize both the first change presentation and the second change presentation in the first operation presentation compared to when the execution time of the first change presentation and the execution time of the second change presentation are the same.
Furthermore, the presentation control unit 300 can make the execution time of the first change presentation in the second operation presentation different from the execution time of the second change presentation, which makes it easier for the player to recognize both the first change presentation and the second change presentation in the second operation presentation compared to when the execution time of the first change presentation and the execution time of the second change presentation are the same.

The performance control unit 300 can periodically execute the operation display of the first change performance. The performance control unit 300 can make the period of the operation display of the first change performance different between the first operation performance and the second operation performance (see FIG. 101).
Therefore, even with the same first change presentation, a variety of presentations can be realized depending on the operation presentation.

The performance control unit 300 can also periodically execute the operation display of the second change performance. The performance control unit 300 can also make the period of the operation display of the second change performance different between the first operation performance and the second operation performance (see FIG. 101).
Therefore, even with the same second change presentation, a variety of presentations can be realized depending on the operation presentation.

Note that the performance control unit 300 may make either the performance mode of the first change performance or the performance mode of the second change performance common to the first operation performance and the second operation performance, and make the other different. Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 may make both the performance mode of the first change performance and the performance mode of the second change performance common to the first operation performance and the second operation performance. Furthermore, the performance mode of the change performance that is made common or different may be any (or all) of the execution time of the change performance, the cycle of the change performance, and the display mode (action display mode) of the change performance.
In particular, the performance control unit 300 may make the execution time of the change performance common between the first operation performance and the second operation performance, but vary either the period of the change performance or the display mode (operation display mode) of the change performance. Also, the performance control unit 300 may make the period of the change performance common between the first operation performance and the second operation performance, but vary either the execution time of the change performance or the display mode (operation display mode) of the change performance. Also, the performance control unit 300 may make the display mode (operation display mode) of the change performance common between the first operation performance and the second operation performance, but vary either the period of the change performance or the execution time of the change performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 may make the operation effective period of the button performance (execution time of the button performance, display time of the button unit 509a) common in the first operation performance and the second operation performance, but may make at least one of the execution time of the change performance, the period of the change performance, and the display mode (operation display mode) of the change performance different.
In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 may make at least one of the execution time of the change performance, the period of the change performance, and the display mode (operation display mode) of the change performance common to the first operation performance and the second operation performance, and may make the operation effective period (execution time of the button performance, display time of the button unit 509a) in the button performance different.

(Variation example 12)
172 and 173 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 12) will be described with reference to Figures 172 and 173. Variable effect example 12 is an example of a jackpot variable effect, which is a variable effect based on winning the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state.
Note that variation presentation example 12 is a variation presentation that is executed when "EB1" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 41. Also, variation presentation example 12 is an example of a variation presentation that is executed after the variation presentation that is executed when "AB1" is selected as the "pre-determination presentation pattern" in Fig. 39. Also, the variation presentation that is executed when "AB1" is selected as the "pre-determination presentation pattern" in Fig. 39 is the variation presentation shown in Fig. 156 (1) to (5).
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, as shown in Fig. 172 (1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "623" in the image display unit 114. At this time, the first reserved image 52 is displayed in blue, and the reserved number display 55 of the first starting port 121 shows "1."
Next, as shown in FIG. 172 (2), as the display of the next special symbol begins to change, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 begin to change. Also, a first start operation is performed, and a first start emphasis image 588 is displayed around each of the three decorative symbols 41. Also, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51, and the variable image 51 is displayed in blue. Also, the reserved number display 55 of the first start port 121 is updated to "0". Also, a first start emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 172 (3), a change effect is executed, and the display color of the changing image 51 changes from blue to rainbow colors. In addition, a first rainbow emphasis sound, which is a sound effect when the rainbow-colored changing image 51 is displayed, is output. The first rainbow emphasis sound can also be considered as an effect sound that emphasizes the changing image 51 (reserved image 52) for which the change effect has been executed. The output time of the first rainbow emphasis sound is 2.5 seconds.
In each of the variation presentation examples, the rainbow-colored variation image 51 (rainbow-colored pending image 52) is displayed in motion in the manner described using Figures 48 (1) to (5).

Next, as shown in FIG. 172 (4), the left decorative pattern 41, "7," temporarily stops, and a fifth stop-time action, which is the action taken when the decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops, is performed. The fifth stop-time action is performed when the left decorative pattern 41, "7," temporarily stops in the first stage. The fifth stop-time action is an action in which the decorative pattern 41 swings from side to side. The execution time of the fifth stop-time action is 0.6 seconds. However, the execution time of the fifth stop-time action may be any time. A second stop emphasis image 573 is displayed around the left decorative pattern 41. A third stop emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the second stop emphasis image 573 is displayed, is output. The third stop emphasis sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the left decorative pattern 41, "7." The output time of the third stop emphasis sound is 0.5 seconds.

Next, as shown in Figure 172 (5), the first reach stimulation effect is executed. In the first reach stimulation effect, a first reach stimulation emphasis image 597 is displayed surrounding the left and right decorative symbols 41. The display time of the first reach stimulation emphasis image 597 is 5.5 seconds. In addition, a first reach stimulation emphasis sound, which is a sound effect when the first reach stimulation emphasis image 597 is displayed, is output. The first reach stimulation emphasis sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the left and right decorative symbols 41 in the reach stimulation effect. The output time of the first reach stimulation emphasis sound is 5.25 seconds.

Next, as shown in Figure 172 (6), the fourth reach effect is executed, and a reach line image 539, reach suggestion image 540, and fourth reach highlight image 545 are displayed. The fourth reach highlight image 545 is displayed in an area overlapping with the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, volume image 42, and light intensity image 43. The fourth reach highlight image 545 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and behind the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43. The fourth reach action is then performed. In the fourth reach effect, the effects described using Figures 107 (2) to (5) are executed. In addition, a third reach highlight sound, which is a sound effect for the fourth reach effect, is output. The third reach highlight sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the reach effect. The output time of the third reach highlight sound is 1.75 seconds.

Next, as shown in Figure 172 (7), the fourth reach effect ends. Also, the first prognosis emphasis image 508 is displayed. Also, the first prognosis emphasis sound is output.
Next, the first button effect starts, and the button image 509 is displayed as shown in Fig. 172 (8). In the first button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in motion in the manner described with reference to Figs. 60 (2) to (8). In addition, a first button emphasis sound is output.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the first button effect, the double-digit decorative symbol 41 "777" temporarily stops, as shown in FIG. 173 (9). Also, a first post-operation emphasis image 510 is displayed. At this time, the stage image 61, the stage notification image 501, and the change count image 502 are hidden. Also, a first post-operation emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 173 (10), the second jackpot presentation is executed. In the second jackpot presentation, a second jackpot notification sound is output, a vibration presentation is executed, and the presentation button 161 and lamp L emit rainbow-colored light. In addition, a second jackpot highlight image 567 is displayed. The second jackpot highlight image 567 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, and the small pattern 56. In addition, the second jackpot highlight image 567 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and behind the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, and the small pattern 56. In the second jackpot presentation, the presentations described using FIG. 133 (2) to (8) and FIG. 134 (9) to (14) are executed. Furthermore, when the second jackpot emphasis image 567 is displayed, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed but is difficult or impossible to see because it is covered by the second jackpot emphasis image 567.

173 (11), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in an enlarged manner. More specifically, the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in an enlarged manner so that the display area of the center decorative pattern 41 is larger than the display area of the left decorative pattern 41 and the display area of the right decorative pattern 41.
173 (12), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed so as to be further enlarged. More specifically, the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed so that the display area of the center decorative pattern 41 is larger than the display area of the left decorative pattern 41 and the display area of the right decorative pattern 41.

Next, as shown in FIG. 173 (13), the doublet decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a shrinking motion. The motion display time of the doublet decorative symbols 41 is 3.5 seconds. However, the motion display time of the doublet decorative symbols 41 may be any time. In addition, a second doublet emphasis image 598 is displayed around each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. The second doublet emphasis image 598 is displayed in an area overlapping the display area of the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43, on a layer behind the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43. The display time of the second doublet emphasis image 598 is 1.5 seconds. However, the display time of the second doublet emphasis image 598 may be any time. In addition, a second doublet emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the second doublet emphasis image 598 is displayed, is output. The second doublet emphasis sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the doublet decorative symbols 41, "777." The output time of the second doublet emphasis sound is 1.4 seconds.
173(14), as the special symbol stops changing, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56, "777", are fixed and stopped. Also, the variable image 51 is not displayed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the reach-prompting effect is executed. Here, the reach-prompting effect in the variable effect may be executed more easily with the second left and right decorative symbols 41 (for example, the left and right decorative symbols 41 "6") than with the first left and right decorative symbols 41 (for example, the left and right decorative symbols 41 "7"). Furthermore, the reach-prompting effect may be executed more easily (the reach-prompting effect is more likely to succeed) when the reach-prompting effect is executed with the second left and right decorative symbols 41 than when the reach-prompting effect is executed with the first left and right decorative symbols 41. Furthermore, the reach-prompting effect may be executed more easily (the likelihood of a jackpot game being higher) when the reach-prompting effect is executed with the first left and right decorative symbols 41 than when the reach-prompting effect is executed with the second left and right decorative symbols 41. In other words, it may be possible to make it easier (higher expectation) for a jackpot game to be executed when the reach encouraging effect using the first left and right decorative patterns 41 is successful than when the reach encouraging effect using the second left and right decorative patterns 41 is successful.
Furthermore, when a reach stimulation effect using the second left and right decorative patterns 41 is executed, the operation display of the left and right decorative patterns 41, the reach stimulation emphasis image, and the reach stimulation emphasis sound may all be different from when a reach stimulation effect using the first left and right decorative patterns 41 is executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, even if the decorative pattern 41 is the same character (for example, "7"), the emphasis effect differs between the left decorative pattern 41 and the middle decorative pattern 41 (see Figure 144 (3) and Figure 172 (4)).
Therefore, even if the decorative pattern 41 has the same character, the way in which the player is drawn to the decorative pattern 41 can be changed depending on the decorative pattern 41 that is displayed.
In addition, in the decorative pattern 41 of a character other than "7" (for example, "4"), the mode of emphasis effect (type of motion when stopped, type of stop emphasis image) may be the same between the left decorative pattern 41 and the center decorative pattern 41. In this case, it is possible to enhance the special feeling of the decorative pattern 41 of the character in which the mode of emphasis effect differs between the left decorative pattern 41 and the center decorative pattern 41.

In the variation effect example 12, a button effect is executed, but this is not limited to this.
In the variation effect example 12, the button effect may not be executed. That is, after the reach effect is started, the middle decorative pattern 41 "7" may be temporarily stopped without executing the button effect, and the doublet decorative pattern 41 may be displayed. In this case, when the middle decorative pattern 41 "7" temporarily stops, the third stop action may be performed, and the fifth stop emphasis image 578 may be displayed so as to surround the middle decorative pattern 41.

In addition, in the variation effect example 12, the rainbow-colored variation image 51 is displayed, but is not limited to this. In the variation effect example 12, the red variation image 51 may be displayed.
In addition, in the variation presentation example 12, the second jackpot presentation is executed, but this is not limited to this. In the variation presentation example 12, the first jackpot presentation may be executed. In the variation presentation example 12, the variation presentation may end without executing the jackpot presentation.

(Variation example 13)
174 and 175 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 13) will be described with reference to Figures 174 and 175. Variable effect example 13 is an example of a jackpot variable effect, which is a variable effect based on winning the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state.
Incidentally, variation presentation example 13 is a variation presentation executed when "EB2" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 41. Also, variation presentation example 13 is an example of a variation presentation executed after the variation presentation executed when "AB2" is selected as the "pre-determination presentation pattern" in Fig. 39. Also, the variation presentation executed when "AB2" is selected as the "pre-determination presentation pattern" in Fig. 39 is the variation presentation shown in Fig. 156 (1) to (5).
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 157 (1) to (8), 158 (9) to (16), 159 (17) to (24), 160 (25) to (32), and 161 (33) to (36) are performed, and then a switching image 586 is displayed as shown in Figure 174 (1).
Next, as shown in FIG. 174(2), the switching image 586 is hidden, and the three decorative symbols 41, "454," are temporarily stopped in a highly decorative display mode. At this time, the reserved image 52, the stage image 61, the stage notification image 501, and the change count image 502 are redisplayed. On the other hand, the change image 51 is not redisplayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 174(3), a restored image 599 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Figure 174 (4), the first jackpot presentation is executed. In the first jackpot presentation, a first jackpot notification sound is output, a vibration presentation is executed, the center movable role element 115B moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114, and the center movable role element 115B, presentation button 161, and lamp L emit light in rainbow colors. In addition, a first jackpot highlight image 566 is displayed. In the first jackpot presentation, the presentations described using Figures 130 (2) to (8) and Figures 131 (9) to (16) are executed.

174(5), the doublet decorative pattern 41 "444" is displayed in an enlarged manner. More specifically, the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in an enlarged manner so that the display area of the center decorative pattern 41 is larger than the display area of the left decorative pattern 41 and the display area of the right decorative pattern 41.
Next, as shown in FIG. 174 (6), the decorative symbols 41 of the triplet are displayed in a shrinking manner, so that the display areas of the three decorative symbols 41 become the same size. A first doublet emphasis image 591 is also displayed. A first doublet emphasis sound is also output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 174 (7), a promotion promotion effect is executed and a promotion promotion highlight image 592 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Figure 174 (8), a first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed, and a first precursor emphasis sound is output.
Next, the 11th button effect starts, and the button image 509 is displayed as shown in Fig. 175 (9). In the 11th button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in motion in the manner described with reference to Figs. 79 (2) to (8). In addition, the first button emphasis sound is output.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the eleventh button effect, an eighth post-operation emphasis image 520 is displayed as shown in Fig. 175 (10). Also, an eighth post-operation emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 175 (11), the doublet decorative pattern 41 "777" is displayed. At this time, the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a moving manner so that the display area of the center decorative pattern 41 is larger than the display area of the left decorative pattern 41 and the display area of the right decorative pattern 41. In addition, the display size of the doublet decorative pattern 41 at this time is smaller than the display size of the doublet decorative pattern 41 shown in FIG. 166 (33).
Next, as shown in Fig. 175 (12), "777" which is a doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed. At this time, the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a moving manner so that the display area of the center decorative pattern 41 is larger than the display area of the left decorative pattern 41 and the display area of the right decorative pattern 41. In addition, the display size of the doublet decorative pattern 41 at this time is larger than the display size of the doublet decorative pattern 41 shown in Fig. 166 (33).

Next, as shown in FIG. 175 (13), the doublet decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a shrinking manner, so that the display areas of the three decorative symbols 41 become the same size. Also, a second doublet emphasis image 598 is displayed around each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. Also, a second doublet emphasis sound is output.
Then, as shown in FIG. 175 (14), as the special symbol stops, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "777" stop.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figure 167 (42) to (46) are performed, except that the decorative pattern 41 of the double numbers is "777".

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can change both the action display and the highlight image of the double-digit decorative pattern 41 in one stage depending on the characters of the double-digit decorative pattern 41 (see Figures 166 (39) and (40) and Figures 175 (11) to (13)).
In this case, the uniqueness of the presentation using the doublet decorative pattern 41 can be enhanced according to the characters of the doublet decorative pattern 41.

The performance control unit 300 may make the operation display of the doublet decorative pattern 41 the same when the doublet decorative pattern 41 is a "4" and a "7" and make the doublet emphasis image different. The performance control unit 300 may make the operation display of the doublet decorative pattern 41 the same when the doublet decorative pattern 41 is a "4" and a "7" and make the operation display of the doublet decorative pattern 41 different. The performance control unit 300 may make both the operation display of the doublet decorative pattern 41 and the doublet emphasis image the same when the doublet decorative pattern 41 is a "4" and a "7".
Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 may make the execution time of the action display of the doublet decorative pattern 41 and the display time of the doublet emphasis image the same or different between the cases where the doublet decorative pattern 41 is a "4" and a "7". Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 may make the execution time of the action display of the doublet decorative pattern 41 the same and the display time of the doublet emphasis image different between the cases where the doublet decorative pattern 41 is a "4" and a "7". Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 may make the display time of the doublet emphasis image the same and the execution time of the action display of the doublet decorative pattern 41 different between the cases where the doublet decorative pattern 41 is a "4" and a "7".

Note that the variation presentation example 13 is not limited to the above example.
In variation effect example 13, after the eighth post-operation emphasis image 520 is displayed (see FIG. 175 (10)), a so-called full rotation effect may be executed in which the doublet decorative pattern 41 varies. At this time, a second doublet emphasis image 598 may be displayed as an image that emphasizes the varying doublet decorative pattern 41. Then, when the second left-hit notification is executed while the second doublet emphasis image 598 is displayed, the second left-hit image 48 may be displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the second doublet emphasis image 598, in a layer behind the second doublet emphasis image 598.

(Variation example 14)
FIG. 176 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 14) will be described with reference to Fig. 176. Variable effect example 14 is a variable effect based on winning the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss.
176 is a variation effect that is executed when "ER5" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 41. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in Fig. 176 (1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "623" in the image display unit 114. At this time, one reserved image 52 is displayed, and "1" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 of the first start port 121.
Next, as shown in FIG. 176 (2), as the next special symbol begins to change and be displayed, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 begin to change.
Next, as shown in Fig. 176 (3), a special effect image 600 is displayed. The special effect image 600 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, the variable image 51, the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, and the small pattern 56. In addition, the special effect image 600 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and the variable image 51, and in a layer behind the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, and the small pattern 56.
When the reserved image 52 is displayed, the special effect image 600 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the reserved image 52 and on a layer in front of the reserved image 52.

Next, as shown in Figure 176 (4), the display mode of the stage notification image 501 changes. More specifically, the display mode of the identification section 501a (see Figure 43 (2)) of the stage notification image 501 is the same before and after the special effect image 600 is displayed, but the display mode of the highlighting section 501b is different. Also, the display mode of the stage image 61 is different before and after the special effect image 600 is displayed. More specifically, although a space-themed moving image is displayed as the stage image 61, this moving image is different from the image before the special effect image 600 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176 (5), three decorative symbols 41, "472," temporarily stop. At this time, the left and right decorative symbols 41 perform a first stop action, and the center decorative symbol 41 performs a second stop action. A first stop emphasis image 572 is displayed around each of the left and right decorative symbols 41, and a fourth stop emphasis image 575 is displayed around the center decorative symbol 41. A first stop emphasis sound is also output.
Then, as shown in FIG. 176(6), the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56, "472," are fixed and stopped. The variable image 51 is no longer displayed. The variable count image 502 is updated to "31 games."

(Variation example 15)
177 to 180 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 15) will be described with reference to Figures 177 to 180. Variable effect example 15 is an example of a jackpot variable effect, which is a variable effect based on winning the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state.
In addition, the variation performance example 15 is a variation performance that is executed when "EA5" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in Figure 41. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from each of the variation performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in Fig. 177(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "623" in the image display unit 114. At this time, two reserved images 52 are displayed, and "2" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 of the first start port 121.
Next, as shown in FIG. 177 (2), as the next special pattern begins to change and display, the decorative pattern 41 and small pattern 56 begin to change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177(3), the display mode of the stage notification image 501 changes. More specifically, the display mode of the identification portion 501a (see FIG. 43(2)) of the stage notification image 501 remains the same, but the display mode of the highlighting portion 501b changes. This highlighting portion 501b is displayed so as to move periodically in a clockwise direction. The period of the highlighting portion 501b is 1.5 seconds. However, the period of the highlighting portion 501b may be any time. Also, the display mode of the stage image 61 is different. More specifically, although a space-themed moving image is displayed as the stage image 61, this moving image is different from the moving image shown in FIG. 177(1) and the moving images shown in FIGS. 176(4) to (6).
Next, as shown in Figure 177 (4), a first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed, and a first precursor emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 177 (5), the sixth button effect starts, and the button image 509 is displayed. In the sixth button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in the manner shown in Fig. 68 (2) to (8). In addition, the first button emphasis sound is output.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the sixth button effect, a sixth post-operation emphasis image 517 is displayed as shown in Fig. 177(6). Also, a sixth post-operation emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 177(7), a pseudo-continuous image 581 and a pseudo-continuous emphasis image 582 are displayed. Also, a second stop emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 177(8), the pseudo-continuous image 581 is enlarged and displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 178(9), a re-change notification image 583 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Figure 178 (10), the decorative pattern 41 begins to change again.
Next, as shown in Figure 178 (11), a change effect is executed, and the variable image 51 changes from the normal display mode to red. Also, a red-emphasizing sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 178 (12), a pseudo-continuous image 581 and a pseudo-continuous emphasis image 582 are displayed. Also, a second stop emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 178(13), the pseudo-continuous image 581 is enlarged and displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 178 (14), a re-change notification image 583 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Figure 178 (15), the decorative pattern 41 begins to change again.
Next, as shown in FIG. 178 (16), the left decorative symbol 41, "4," temporarily stops and performs the first stop action. At this time, a first stop emphasis image 572 is displayed around the left decorative symbol 41. Also, a first stop emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 179 (17), the right decorative symbol 41, "4," temporarily stops and performs the first stop action. At this time, a first stop emphasis image 572 is displayed around the right decorative symbol 41. Also, a first stop emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 179 (18), the third reach effect starts, a reach line image 539, a reach suggestion image 540, a reach emphasis image 541, and a fourth reach emphasis image 544 are displayed, and the third reach action is performed. In the third reach effect, the effect is performed in the manner described using Fig. 106 (2) to (6). In addition, a second reach emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 179 (19), in the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye, the character portion is erased to reduce the decorativeness, and the action is displayed in an enlarged manner. At this time, the stage image 61, the stage notification image 501, and the change count image 502 are not displayed. Also, a first action emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 179 (20), each of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 is displayed in a shrinking motion. Also, each of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 is displayed in a moving motion to both upper corners of the image display section 114. Also, the SP reach effect is started, and the SP reach image 552 is displayed. Also, the first motion emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 179 (21), a development provocation effect is executed, and the middle decorative symbol 41, "5," the development image 584, and the first development provocation emphasis image 585 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the middle decorative symbol 41 and the development image 584 are displayed in a motion that sways from side to side. In addition, the first development provocation emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 179 (22), the "5" which is the middle decorative pattern 41 is hidden, and the development image 584 stops. Also, the first development emphasis sound is output.
Next, the development effect (second role effect) starts, and as shown in FIG. 179 (23), the middle movable role 115B moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. Also, the development emphasis image 554 is displayed. Also, at this time, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are not displayed. Also, the second role emphasis sound is output.

Next, the SPSP reach effect is started. At this time, the start suggestion effect of the second mode is started, and as shown in FIG. 179 (24), the SPSP start image 556 and the second start emphasis image 558 are displayed. In the start suggestion effect of the second mode, the effect explained using FIG. 120 (1) to (6) is performed. In addition, the second start emphasis sound is output.
Next, the second mode of in-play suggestion effect is started, and as shown in Fig. 180 (25), the SPSP suggestion image 561 and the second in-play highlight image 563 are displayed. In the second mode of in-play suggestion effect, the effects described using Fig. 125 (1) to (5) are performed. In addition, the second in-play highlight sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 180 (26), a third precursor emphasis image 518 is displayed. The third precursor emphasis image 518 is displayed in the manner described with reference to Figures 70 (1) and (2). In addition, a third precursor emphasis sound is output.
Next, the eighth button effect starts, and the button image 509 is displayed as shown in Fig. 180 (27). In the eighth button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in motion in the manner described with reference to Figs. 70 (3) to (8). In addition, the third button emphasis sound is output.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the eighth button effect, an eighth post-operation emphasis image 520 is displayed as shown in Fig. 180 (28). Also, an eighth post-operation emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 180 (29), the first jackpot presentation is executed. In the first jackpot presentation, a first jackpot notification sound is output, a vibration presentation is executed, the center movable device 115B moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114, and the center movable device 115B, presentation button 161, and lamp L emit rainbow colors. In addition, a first jackpot highlight image 566 is displayed. In the first jackpot presentation, the presentation described using Figures 130 (2) to (8) and Figures 131 (9) to (16) is executed.

180 (30), the doublet decorative pattern 41 "444" is displayed in an enlarged manner. More specifically, the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in an enlarged manner so that the display area of the center decorative pattern 41 is larger than the display area of the left decorative pattern 41 and the display area of the right decorative pattern 41.
Next, as shown in FIG. 180 (31), the decorative symbols 41 of the triplet are displayed in a shrinking manner, so that the display areas of the three decorative symbols 41 are all the same size. A first doublet emphasis image 591 is also displayed. A first doublet emphasis sound is also output.
Then, as shown in Figure 180 (32), as the special pattern stops, the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 "444" are fixed and stopped.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figure 167 (42) to (46) are performed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can display an identification image (stage notification image 501) that identifies the performance mode, and the identification image has a specification section (identification section 501a) and an emphasis section (emphasis section 501b). The performance control unit 300 can also execute a change performance that changes the emphasis section, and the change performance includes a first change performance (see FIGS. 176(2) to (4)) and a second change performance (see FIGS. 177(2) and (3)). A jackpot game is more likely to be played when the second change performance is executed than when the first change performance is executed (there is a higher expectation of a jackpot game being played).
In this case, the player can be made aware of the degree of expectation according to the change in the highlighting portion 501b, thereby increasing the interest in the change presentation.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that when a change effect is executed in which the highlighting part 501b of the stage notification image 501 changes, the identification part 501a does not change (see Figures 176 (2) to (4) and Figures 177 (2) and (3)), but this is not limited to this.
When a change effect is executed in which the highlighting portion 501b of the stage notification image 501 changes, the indicator 501a may also change. However, in this case, the indicator 501a changes to a form different from any of the indicators 501a of the stage notification images 501 corresponding to the second to fourth stages. For example, when the change effect shown in FIG. 176(4) is executed, the text in the indicator 501a may change to "Standard Universe," and when the change effect shown in FIG. 177(3) is executed, the text in the indicator 501a may change to "High Expectations Universe."

(Variation example 16)
181 and 182, a specific description will be given of a variable effect (variable effect example 16) performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114, etc. The variable effect example 16 is an example of a random miss variable effect based on the fact that the number of reserved prizes for the first start port 121 in the normal game state is "1".
The variable effects shown in Figures 181 and 182 are variable effects that are executed when "ER14" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 41.
In addition, each of the change presentations from change presentation example 16 to change presentation example 25 described below is a change presentation example when the change begins in the second stage.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

As shown in Figure 181 (1), when the previous special symbol is stopped and displayed by the effect control unit 300, the highly decorative decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114. At this time, the image display unit 114 also displays a volume image 42, a light intensity image 43, a number of reserved symbols display 55, a small symbol 56, a stage image 61, a stage notification image 501, and a number of variations image 502. In addition, the stage image 61 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the second stage, with the text "empty" displayed on the stage notification image 501 and the text "0 games" displayed on the number of variations image 502. The second stage is the effect mode in the normal game state. Also, at this time, the hold number display 55 for the first starting port 121 shows "0", which is the hold number for winning at the first starting port 121, and the hold number display 55 for the second starting port 122 shows "0", which is the hold number for winning at the second starting port 122.

Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, as shown in FIG. 181 (2), the special symbol starts to change and the changing effect starts. At this time, the changing image 51 is displayed. At this time, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 start to change.
Next, as shown in Figure 181 (3), a first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed, and a first precursor emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 181 (4), the 12th button effect starts, and the button image 509 is displayed. In the 12th button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in the manner described with reference to Figs. 79 (2) to (8). In addition, the first button emphasis sound is output.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the effect button 161 in the 12th button effect, a tenth post-operation emphasis image 522 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 181 (5). The tenth post-operation emphasis image 522 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, and the small pattern 56. The tenth post-operation emphasis image 522 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and in a layer behind the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, and the small pattern 56. A tenth post-operation emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the tenth post-operation emphasis image 522 is displayed, is output. The tenth post-operation emphasis sound can also be considered as an emphasis sound corresponding to the operation of the effect button 161. The output time of the tenth post-operation emphasis sound is 0.13 seconds.
Next, as shown in FIG. 181(6), a seventh button post-image 601 is displayed. Also, a fifth button post-emphasis sound is output, which is a sound effect indicating that the seventh button post-image 601 is displayed. The output time of the fifth button post-emphasis sound is 0.21 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 181 (7), the left decorative symbol 41, "4," temporarily stops, and a sixth stop-time action is performed, which is the action performed when the decorative symbol 41 temporarily stops. The sixth stop-time action is performed when an even-numbered decorative symbol 41 (e.g., 2, 4, 6, 8, etc.) temporarily stops in the second stage. The sixth stop-time action involves the decorative symbol 41 swaying up and down. At this time, seventh stop-time emphasis images 602 are displayed on the left and right sides of the left decorative symbol 41. The seventh stop-time emphasis image 602 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43, on a layer behind the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43. The execution time of the sixth stop-time action and the display time of the seventh stop-time emphasis image 602 are 0.5 seconds. However, the execution time of the sixth stop-time action and the display time of the seventh stop-time emphasis image 602 may be different or may be any time. A fourth stop-time emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the stop-time emphasis image is displayed, is also output. The fourth stop emphasis sound can also be regarded as an effect sound that emphasizes the decorative pattern 41 in the second stage. The output time of the fourth stop emphasis sound is 0.18 seconds.
Next, as shown in FIG. 181 (8), the right decorative symbol 41, "1," temporarily stops, and a seventh stop-time action is performed, which is the action performed when the decorative symbol 41 temporarily stops. The seventh stop-time action is performed when an odd-numbered decorative symbol 41 (such as 1, 3, 5, 7, or 9) temporarily stops in the second stage. The seventh stop-time action is an action in which the decorative symbol 41 sways from side to side. At this time, an eighth stop-time emphasis image 603 is displayed below the right decorative symbol 41. The execution time of the seventh stop-time action and the display time of the eighth stop-time emphasis image 603 are 0.5 seconds. However, the execution time of the seventh stop-time action and the display time of the eighth stop-time emphasis image 603 may be different or may be any time. A fourth stop-time emphasis sound is also output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 182 (9), the "2" which is the middle decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped, and the sixth stop action is performed. At this time, the ninth stop emphasis image 604 is displayed on the left and right of the middle decorative pattern 41. The display time of the ninth stop emphasis image 604 is 0.5 seconds. However, the display time of the ninth stop emphasis image 604 may be any time. In addition, the fourth stop emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 182 (10), the ninth stop emphasis image 604 is hidden, and the three decorative patterns 41 continue to be temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 182 (11), with the stop display of the special symbol, the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "421", are fixed and stopped. Also, with the end of the change effect, the change image 51 is erased (displayed). Also, the change count image 502 is updated to "1 game."

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can make the behavior of the decorative pattern 41 when it stops and the display mode of the highlighted image different between the first stage and the second stage when the decorative pattern 41 stops (see Figure 142 (7) and Figure 181 (7)).
Therefore, the uniqueness of the presentation using the decorative pattern 41 for each stage can be enhanced.

Fluctuating performance example 16 may be a fluctuating performance that is executed when "ER1" is selected as the "fluctuating performance pattern" in Figure 41, that is, a fluctuating performance that is executed when the same fluctuating performance pattern as fluctuating performance example 1 is selected. In this way, even if the same fluctuating performance pattern is selected in the first and second stages, the type of emphasis performance that is executed when decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops may be different.

(Variation example 17)
FIG. 183 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 17) will be described with reference to Fig. 183. Variable effect example 17 is a random miss variable effect based on the fact that the number of reserved prizes for the first start port 121 in the normal game state is "4".
In addition, the variation performance example 17 is a variation performance that is executed when "ER15" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in Figure 41. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from each of the variation performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in Fig. 183(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 from being fixed in the image display unit 114. In addition, four reserved images 52 are displayed, and the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121 shows "4."
Next, as shown in Figure 183 (2), the display of the next special symbol begins, and the display of the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 also begins.

Next, as shown in FIG. 183 (3), three decorative symbols 41, "412," temporarily stop. At this time, the left and right decorative symbols 41 perform the sixth stop action, and the middle decorative symbol 41 performs the seventh stop action. Furthermore, a seventh stop emphasis image 602 is displayed on the left and right of each of the left and right decorative symbols 41, and a tenth stop emphasis image 605 is displayed on the left and right of the middle decorative symbol 41. The display time of the tenth stop emphasis image 605 is 0.5 seconds. However, the display time of the tenth stop emphasis image 605 may be any time. Furthermore, a fourth stop emphasis sound is output.
Next, as the special symbol stops changing, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56, "412", are fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. 183 (4). Also, the changing image 51 is hidden. Also, the changing count image 502 is updated to "1 game."

(Example of variation 18)
184 and 185 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 18) will be described with reference to Figures 184 and 185. Variable effect example 18 is an example of a reach-miss variable effect based on winning into the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state.
Note that variation effect example 18 is a variation effect that is executed when "ER16" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in Figure 41.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, as shown in Fig. 184 (1), the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56, "623," are stopped and fixed by the performance control unit 300 as the previous special symbol is stopped and displayed. Also, one reserved image 52 is displayed, and "1" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121.
Next, as shown in FIG. 184 (2), the change performance starts as the special pattern starts to change, and the decorative pattern 41 and small pattern 56 start to change.
Next, as shown in Figure 184 (3), a first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed, and a first precursor emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 184 (4), the 13th button effect is started, and the button image 509 is displayed. In the 13th button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in the manner described with reference to Figs. 79 (2) to (8). In addition, the first button emphasis sound is output.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the effect button 161 in the 13th button effect, an 11th post-operation emphasis image 523 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 184 (5). The 11th post-operation emphasis image 523 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, and the small pattern 56. The 11th post-operation emphasis image 523 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and in a layer behind the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, and the small pattern 56. An 11th post-operation emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the 11th post-operation emphasis image 523 is displayed, is output. The 11th post-operation emphasis sound can also be considered as an emphasis sound corresponding to the operation of the effect button 161. The output time of the 11th post-operation emphasis sound is 0.13 seconds.
Next, as shown in FIG. 184(6), an eighth button post image 606 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Figure 184 (7), the left decorative symbol 41, "4," temporarily stops, and the sixth stop action is performed. At this time, seventh stop emphasis images 602 are displayed on the left and right of the left decorative symbol 41. Also, a fourth stop emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 184 (8), the right decorative symbol 41, "4," temporarily stops, and the sixth stop action is performed. At this time, seventh stop emphasis images 602 are displayed on the left and right of the right decorative symbol 41. Also, a fourth stop emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 185 (9), the 5th reach effect starts, a reach line image 539, a reach suggestion image 540, a reach emphasis image 541, and a 5th reach emphasis image 546 are displayed, and the 5th reach action is performed. In the 5th reach effect, the effect is performed in the manner described using Figs. 108 (2) to (6). In addition, a 1st reach emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 185 (10), a first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed, and a first precursor emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 185 (11), the 14th button effect starts, and the button image 509 is displayed. In the 14th button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in the manner described using Fig. 79 (2) to (8). In addition, the first button emphasis sound is output.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the effect button 161 in the 14th button effect, a 12th post-operation emphasis image 524 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 185 (12). The 12th post-operation emphasis image 524 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the variable image 51, and the small pattern 56. The 12th post-operation emphasis image 524 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and in a layer behind the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the variable image 51, and the small pattern 56. A 12th post-operation emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the 12th post-operation emphasis image 524 is displayed, is output. The 12th post-operation emphasis sound can also be considered as an emphasis sound corresponding to the operation of the effect button 161. The output time of the 12th post-operation emphasis sound is 0.13 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 185 (13), the ninth button post image 607 is displayed. In addition, a sixth button post emphasis sound is output, which is a sound effect indicating that the ninth button post image 607 is displayed. The output time of the sixth button post emphasis sound is 0.21 seconds.
Next, as shown in FIG. 185 (14), the center decorative symbol 41, "5," temporarily stops, and an eighth stop-time action is performed, which is the action performed when the decorative symbol 41 temporarily stops. The eighth stop-time action is performed when an odd-numbered center decorative symbol 41 (e.g., 1, 3, 5, 7, 9) temporarily stops when a normal reach effect is executed in the second stage. The eighth stop-time action rotates the decorative symbol 41 clockwise. At this time, an eleventh stop-time emphasis image 608 is displayed around the center decorative symbol 41. The execution time of the eighth stop-time action and the display time of the eleventh stop-time emphasis image 608 are 0.5 seconds. However, the execution time of the eighth stop-time action and the display time of the eleventh stop-time emphasis image 608 may be different or may be any time. A fourth stop-time emphasis sound is also output.
Then, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "454", are fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. 185 (15). Also, the variable image 51 is hidden. Also, the variable count image 502 is updated to "11 games."

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can make the performance mode of the highlighting performance of the left and right decorative patterns 41 after the start of the reach performance different between the first stage and the second stage (see Figures 146 (9) and 185 (9)), and can make the display mode of the reach line image 539 the same.
In this case, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that a reach has been achieved, while also realizing a variety of reach presentations for each stage.

(Example of variation 19)
186 and 187 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 19) will be described with reference to Figures 186 and 187. Variable effect example 19 is an example of a reach-miss variable effect based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 121 in a normal game state.
The variation effects shown in Figures 186 and 187 are variation effects that are executed when "ER17" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in Figure 41. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in Fig. 186 (1), the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56, "623," are stopped by the effect control unit 300 as the previous special symbol is stopped and displayed. Also, one reserved image 52 is displayed, and "1" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121.
Next, as shown in FIG. 186 (2), the change performance starts as the special pattern starts to change, and the decorative pattern 41 and small pattern 56 start to change.
Next, as shown in Figure 186 (3), a first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed, and a first precursor emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 186 (4), the 13th button effect is started, and the button image 509 is displayed. In the 13th button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in the manner described with reference to Figs. 79 (2) to (8). In addition, the first button emphasis sound is output.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the effect button 161 in the thirteenth button effect, an eleventh post-operation emphasis image 523 is displayed as shown in Fig. 186 (5). In addition, an eleventh post-operation emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 186(6), an eighth button post image 606 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Figure 186 (7), the left decorative symbol 41, "5", temporarily stops, and a seventh stop action is performed. At this time, an eighth stop emphasis image 603 is displayed on the left and right of the left decorative symbol 41. Also, a fourth stop emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 186 (8), the right decorative symbol 41, "5", temporarily stops, and the seventh stop action is performed. At this time, the eighth stop emphasis image 603 is displayed on the left and right of the right decorative symbol 41. In addition, the fourth stop emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 187 (9), the 6th reach effect starts, a reach line image 539, a reach suggestion image 540, a reach emphasis image 541, and a 6th reach eye emphasis image 547 are displayed, and the 6th reach action is performed. In the 6th reach effect, the effect is performed in the manner described using Figs. 109 (2) to (6). In addition, a 1st reach emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 187 (10), a first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed, and a first precursor emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 187 (11), the 13th button effect starts, and the button image 509 is displayed. In the 13th button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in the manner described with reference to Figs. 79 (2) to (8). In addition, the first button emphasis sound is output.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the effect button 161 in the thirteenth button effect, an eleventh post-operation emphasis image 523 is displayed as shown in Fig. 187 (12). Also, an eleventh post-operation emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 187 (13), the ninth button post image 607 is displayed. Also, a sixth button post emphasis sound is output, which is a sound effect indicating that the ninth button post image 607 is displayed. The output time of the first button post emphasis sound is 0.21 seconds.
Next, as shown in FIG. 187 (14), the "6" central decorative symbol 41 temporarily stops, and a ninth stop-time action is performed, which is the action performed when the decorative symbol 41 temporarily stops. The ninth stop-time action is performed when an even-numbered central decorative symbol 41 (e.g., 2, 4, 6, 8) temporarily stops when a normal reach effect is executed in the second stage. The ninth stop-time action rotates the decorative symbol 41 counterclockwise. At this time, a twelfth stop-time emphasis image 609 is displayed around the central decorative symbol 41. The execution time of the ninth stop-time action and the display time of the twelfth stop-time emphasis image 609 are 0.5 seconds. However, the execution time of the ninth stop-time action and the display time of the twelfth stop-time emphasis image 609 may be different or may be any time. A fourth stop-time emphasis sound is also output.
Then, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "565", are fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. 187 (15). Also, the variable image 51 is hidden. Also, the variable count image 502 is updated to "11 games."

(Variation example 20)
188 to 190 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
188 to 190, another specific example (variation presentation example 20) of the variation presentation of the decorative symbol 41 will be described. The variation presentation example 20 is a variation presentation based on a winning entry into the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variation presentation in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and an SP reach presentation is executed.
The variable effects shown in Figures 188 to 190 are variable effects that are executed when "ER18" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 41.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, as shown in Fig. 188(1), the effect control unit 300 stops the display of the previous special symbol, and the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56, "623", are fixed. In addition, two reserved images 52 are displayed, and "2" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 for the first starting slot 121.
Next, as shown in FIG. 188 (2), the change performance starts as the special pattern starts to change, and the decorative pattern 41 and small pattern 56 start to change.
Next, as shown in Figure 188 (3), a second precursor emphasis image 513 is displayed, and a second precursor emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 188 (4), the fifth button effect starts, and button image 509 is displayed. Furthermore, when effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the fifth button effect, first operation highlight image 514 is displayed. In the fifth button effect, button image 509 is displayed in the manner described using Figs. 65 (2) to (8) and 66 (9). Furthermore, a second button highlight sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 188(5), a fifth post-operation emphasis image 516 is displayed, and a fifth post-operation emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 188(6), a pseudo-continuous image 581 and a pseudo-continuous emphasis image 582 are displayed. Also, a second stop emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 188(7), the pseudo-continuous image 581 is enlarged and displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 188(8), a re-change notification image 583 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 189 (9), the decorative pattern 41 starts to change again. At this time, the re-change notification image 583 is displayed in a reduced size. At this time, a change effect is performed, and the display color of the changing image 51 changes from the normal display mode to blue. Also, a first blue accent sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 189 (10), the left decorative symbol 41, "4," temporarily stops, and the sixth stop action is performed. At this time, seventh stop emphasis images 602 are displayed on the left and right of the left decorative symbol 41. Also, a fourth stop emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 189 (11), the right decorative symbol 41, "4," temporarily stops, and the sixth stop action is performed. At this time, seventh stop emphasis images 602 are displayed on the left and right of the right decorative symbol 41. Also, a fourth stop emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 189 (12), the 5th reach effect starts, a reach line image 539, a reach suggestion image 540, a reach emphasis image 541, and a 5th reach emphasis image 546 are displayed, and the 5th reach action is performed. In the 5th reach effect, the effect is performed in the manner described using Figs. 108 (2) to (6). In addition, a 1st reach emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 189 (13), a first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed, and a first precursor emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 189 (14), the 14th button effect starts, and the button image 509 is displayed. In the 14th button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in the manner described with reference to Figs. 79 (2) to (8). In addition, the first button emphasis sound is output.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the effect button 161 in the 14th button effect, a 12th post-operation emphasis image 524 is displayed as shown in Fig. 189 (15). Also, a 12th post-operation emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 189(16), a post-ninth button image 607 is displayed.

190 (17), in the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye, the character portion is erased to reduce the decorativeness, and the action is displayed in an enlarged manner. At this time, the stage image 61, the reserved image 52, the stage notification image 501, and the change count image 502 are not displayed. Also, a first action emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 190 (18), each of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 is displayed in a shrinking motion. Also, each of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 is displayed in a moving motion to both upper corners of the image display section 114. Also, the SP reach effect is started, and the SP reach image 552 is displayed. Also, the first motion emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 190 (19), a development provocation effect is executed, and the middle decorative symbol 41, "5," the development image 584, and the first development provocation emphasis image 585 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the middle decorative symbol 41 and the development image 584 are displayed in a motion that sways from side to side. In addition, the first development provocation emphasis sound is output.
190 (20), the development image 584 is hidden, and the middle decorative pattern 41 is displayed in an action such that it moves toward the center of the image display unit 114. Also, a second action emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 190 (21), the middle decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 190(22), a switching image 586 is displayed.
190(23), the switching image 586 is hidden, and the three decorative symbols 41, "454," are temporarily stopped in a highly decorative display mode. At this time, the variable image 51, the reserved image 52, the stage image 61, the stage notification image 501, and the variable count image 502 are redisplayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 190 (24), three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "454", are fixed and stopped as the special symbols stop varying. Also, the variable image 51 is hidden. Also, the variable count image 502 is updated to "11 games."

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can make the performance mode of the highlighting performance of the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 different between the first stage and the second stage (see Figures 142 (7) and 181 (7)), and can make the performance mode of the highlighting performance of the less decorative decorative pattern 41 the same (see Figures 153 (19) and 190 (19)).
Therefore, it is possible to achieve both a variety of effects according to the stage and to make it easy for the player to recognize the object being emphasized by the emphasis effect being executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can make the performance mode of the emphasis performance of the middle decorative pattern 41 after the start of the reach performance different between the first stage and the second stage (see Figure 149 (14) and Figure 187 (14)), and can make the performance mode of the emphasis performance of the pseudo-consecutive performance the same (see Figure 151 (6) and Figure 188 (6)).
Therefore, it is possible to achieve both a variety of effects according to the stage and to make it easier for players to recognize specific effects such as pseudo consecutive effects that are emphasized by emphasis effects.

(Variation example 21)
191 and 192 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variation presentation example 21) of the variation presentation of the decorative symbol 41 will be described with reference to Figures 191 and 192. Variation presentation example 21 is a variation presentation based on a win in the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variation presentation in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and an SP reach presentation is executed.
The variable effects shown in Figures 191 and 192 are variable effects that are executed when "ER19" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 41.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 188 (1) to (8), 189 (9) to (16), and 190 (17) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 191 (1), each of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 is displayed in a small size in both upper corners of the image display unit 114. Also, the SP reach effect begins, and the SP reach image 552 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 191 (2), a development provocation effect is executed, displaying the "5" center decorative pattern 41, the development image 584, and the second development provocation highlight image 610. In the illustrated example, the development image 584 is displayed in an area overlapping the display area of the center decorative pattern 41, on a layer in front of the center decorative pattern 41. In addition, a second development provocation highlight sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the second development provocation highlight image 610 is displayed, is output. The second development provocation highlight sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the center decorative pattern 41 and the development image 584 (development provocation effect). The output time of the second development provocation highlight sound is 2.5 seconds.
191(3), the development image 584 is displayed in an area overlapping the display area of the middle decorative pattern 41, in a layer behind the middle decorative pattern 41. Also, a second development emphasis sound is output.

191(4), the development image 584 and the middle decorative pattern 41 are displayed so as to interchange their display positions with each other. Also, a second development emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 191 (5), the development image 584 is hidden, and the middle decorative pattern 41 is displayed so as to move to the center of the image display unit 114. That is, after the development teasing effect is executed, the development effect is not executed. Also, a third action emphasis sound, which is a sound effect for displaying the action of the middle decorative pattern 41, is output. The third action emphasis sound can also be regarded as an effect sound that emphasizes the middle decorative pattern 41. The output time of the third action emphasis sound is 1.5 seconds.
Next, as shown in FIG. 191(6), the middle decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 191(7), a switching image 586 is displayed.
191(8), the switching image 586 is hidden, and the three decorative symbols 41, "454," are temporarily stopped in a highly decorative display mode. At this time, the variable image 51, the reserved image 52, the stage image 61, the stage notification image 501, and the variable count image 502 are redisplayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 192(9), three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "454", are fixed and stopped as the special symbols stop varying. Also, the variable image 51 is hidden. Also, the variable count image 502 is updated to "11 games."

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can change the operation modes of the development image 584 and the middle decorative pattern 41, and the development highlight image, in the first and second stages (see Fig. 153 (19) and Fig. 191 (4)). Therefore, it is possible to diversify the SP reach performance according to the stage.
The performance control unit 300 may make the operation modes of the development image 584 and the middle decorative pattern 41 common to the first stage and the second stage, and make the development promotion emphasis image different. The performance control unit 300 may make the operation modes of the development promotion emphasis image common to the first stage and the second stage, and make the operation modes of the development image 584 and the middle decorative pattern 41 different.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the SP reach performance, the development image 584 and the middle decorative pattern 41 are displayed in such a manner that their display positions are interchanged with each other, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, in the SP reach effect in the variation effect example 21, the middle decorative symbols 41 "4" and "5" may be displayed so as to swap their display positions with each other. Even in this case, a common emphasis sound (second development provocation emphasis sound) may be output when the middle decorative symbol 41 "4" is displayed on the front layer and when the middle decorative symbol 41 "5" is displayed on the front layer. On the other hand, the middle decorative symbol 41 "4" may be displayed on the front layer and when the middle decorative symbol 41 "5" is displayed on the front layer, and the middle decorative symbol 41 may be displayed so as to have different display modes.

(Variation example 22)
FIG. 193 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 22) will be described with reference to Fig. 193. Variable effect example 22 is an example of a random miss variable effect based on winning into the first starting slot 121 in the normal gaming state.
The variable performance shown in Fig. 193 is a variable performance that is executed when "AR21" is selected as the "pre-determined performance pattern" in Fig. 39 and "ER20" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Fig. 41. In the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the above-mentioned variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 193(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "623" in the image display unit 114. At this time, two reserved images 52 are displayed. Also, at this time, "2" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121.
Next, as shown in FIG. 193(2), as the display of the next special symbol begins to change, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 begin to change. Also, the second reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the first reserved image 52, and the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the changing image 51. Also, the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121 is updated to "1."

Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, as shown in FIG. 193(3), the second reserved image 52 is displayed and the reserved number display 55 for the first starting hole 121 is updated to "2." At this time, a change effect is executed, and the first reserved image 52 changes from the normal display mode to blue. Also, a first blue accent sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 193 (4), a chance eye effect is executed, and three rows of decorative symbols 41, "331," stop. All three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in green. At this time, a chance eye emphasis image 587 is displayed around the three rows of decorative symbols 41. A second chance eye emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the chance eye emphasis image 587 is displayed, is output. The second chance eye emphasis sound can also be considered as an effect sound that emphasizes the three decorative symbols 41 in the chance eye effect in the second stage. The output time of the second chance eye emphasis sound is 1.2 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 193(5), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "331", are fixed and stopped.
The chance eye effect in the variation effect example 22 is an example of a pre-determination effect. This pre-determination effect is an effect that makes the player expect a jackpot in the variation effect following the variation effect when the pre-determination effect is being executed.

(Variation example 22)
194 to 198 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable presentation (variable presentation example 22) will be described with reference to Figures 194 to 198. Variable presentation example 22 is a variable presentation based on a win in the first starting slot 121 in the normal gaming state, and is an example of a variable presentation in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and an SPSP reach presentation is executed. Also, variable presentation example 22 is an example of a variable presentation executed after the variable presentation shown in variable presentation example 21. In other words, variable presentation example 22 is an example of a variable presentation showing the result of the special symbol lottery suggested by the blue reserved image 52 (see Figure 193 (5)) shown in variable presentation example 21.
194 to 198 are the variation effects that are executed when "ER21" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in Fig. 41. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

194(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56, "331," in the image display unit 114. At this time, the first reserved image 52 is displayed in blue.
Next, as shown in FIG. 194 (2), as the next special symbol begins to change, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 begin to change. A second start action is performed when the decorative symbol 41 begins to change. The second start action is a counterclockwise rotation of the decorative symbol 41. At this time, a second start emphasis image 611 is displayed around each of the three decorative symbols 41. The second start emphasis image 611 displayed around the left decorative symbol 41 overlaps with the display area of the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 and is located in a layer behind the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43. The first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the changing image 51, and the changing image 51 is displayed in blue. A second start emphasis sound, a sound effect indicating the display of the second start emphasis image 611, is output. The second start emphasis sound can also be considered a sound effect that emphasizes the decorative symbol 41 performing the second start action. The output time of the second beginning emphasis sound is 0.35 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 194 (3), the third reel performance begins, and the left movable reel 115A moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. A second reel emphasis image 555 is also displayed. The second reel emphasis image 555 is displayed in an area where it overlaps with the display areas of the left decorative pattern 41, the volume image 42, and the light intensity image 43. The second reel emphasis image 555 is also displayed in a layer in front of the left decorative pattern 41 and behind the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43. In the third reel performance, the performance described using FIGS. 117 (1) to (8) is performed. A third reel emphasis sound, which is a sound effect for the third reel performance, is also output. The third reel emphasis sound can also be considered as a performance sound that emphasizes the movable reel 115. The output time of the third reel emphasis sound is 1 second.
Next, as shown in Figure 194 (4), a first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed, and a first precursor emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 194 (5), the 15th button effect starts, and the button image 509 is displayed. In the 15th button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in the manner shown in Fig. 79 (2) to (8). In addition, the first button emphasis sound is output.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the 15th button effect, a 13th post-operation emphasis image 525 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 194 (6). The 13th post-operation emphasis image 525 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, the change count image 502, the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the change image 51, and the small pattern 56. The 13th post-operation emphasis image 525 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and the change count image 502, and in a layer behind the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the change image 51, and the small pattern 56. A 13th post-operation emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating the display of the 13th post-operation emphasis image 525, is output. The 13th post-operation emphasis sound can also be considered as an emphasis sound corresponding to the operation of the effect button 161. The output time of the 13th post-operation emphasis sound is 0.13 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 194(7), a post-tenth button image 612 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 194(8), a zone promotion effect is executed, and the first zone start image 536 is displayed in an up and down motion.
Next, as shown in FIG. 195(9), the first zone start image 536 stops.
Next, as shown in Fig. 195 (10), the first zone effect starts, and a first zone execution image 537 is displayed. In the first zone effect, the effects described with reference to Figs. 102 (2) to (6) are performed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 195 (11), a pseudo-continuous image 581 and a pseudo-continuous emphasis image 582 are displayed. Also, a second stop emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 195(12), the pseudo-continuous image 581 is enlarged and displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 195(13), a re-change notification image 583 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 195 (14), the decorative pattern 41 starts to change again.
Next, as shown in Figure 195 (15), a change effect is executed, and the variable image 51 changes from blue to red. Also, a red-emphasizing sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 195 (16), a pseudo-continuous image 581 and a pseudo-continuous emphasis image 582 are displayed. Also, a second stop emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 196 (17), the pseudo-continuous image 581 is enlarged and displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 196 (18), a re-change notification image 583 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 196 (19), the decorative pattern 41 starts to change again.
Next, as shown in Figure 196 (20), the left decorative symbol 41, "4," temporarily stops, and the sixth stop action is performed. At this time, seventh stop emphasis images 602 are displayed on the left and right of the left decorative symbol 41. Also, a fourth stop emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 196 (21), the right decorative symbol 41, "4," temporarily stops, and the sixth stop action is performed. At this time, seventh stop emphasis images 602 are displayed on the left and right of the right decorative symbol 41. Also, a fourth stop emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 196 (22), the 5th reach effect starts, a reach line image 539, a reach suggestion image 540, a reach emphasis image 541, and a 5th reach emphasis image 546 are displayed, and the 5th reach action is performed. In the 5th reach effect, the effect is performed in the manner described using Figs. 108 (2) to (6). In addition, a 1st reach emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 196 (23), in the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye, the character portion is erased to reduce the decorativeness, and the action is displayed in an enlarged manner. At this time, the stage image 61, the reserved image 52, the stage notification image 501, and the change count image 502 are not displayed. Also, a first action emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 196 (24), each of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 is displayed in a shrinking motion. Also, each of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 is displayed in a moving motion to both upper corners of the image display section 114. Also, the SP reach effect is started, and the SP reach image 552 is displayed. Also, the first motion emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 197 (25), a development provocation effect is executed, and the middle decorative symbol 41, "5," the development image 584, and the first development provocation emphasis image 585 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the middle decorative symbol 41 and the development image 584 are displayed in a motion that sways from side to side. In addition, the first development provocation emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 197 (26), the "5" which is the middle decorative pattern 41 is hidden, and the development image 584 stops. Also, the first development emphasis sound is output.
Next, the development effect (second role effect) is started, and as shown in FIG. 197 (27), the middle movable role effect 115B moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. Also, the development emphasis image 554 is displayed. In the development effect (second role effect), the effect described using FIGS. 115 (1) to (8) and 116 (9) to (11) is performed. Also, at this time, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are not displayed. Also, the second role effect emphasis sound is output.

Next, the SPSP reach effect starts. At this time, the start suggestion effect of the first mode starts, and as shown in FIG. 197 (28), an SPSP start image 556 and a first start emphasis image 557 are displayed. In the start suggestion effect of the first mode, the effect described using FIG. 119 (1) to (5) is performed. In addition, a first start emphasis sound is output.
Next, the first mode of in-play suggestion effect is started, and as shown in Fig. 197 (29), an SPSP suggestion image 561 and a first in-play highlight image 562 are displayed. In the first mode of in-play suggestion effect, the effects described using Fig. 124 (1) to (3) are performed. In addition, a first in-play highlight sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 197 (30), a third precursor emphasis image 518 is displayed. The third precursor emphasis image 518 is displayed in the manner described with reference to Figures 70 (1) and (2). In addition, a third precursor emphasis sound is output.
Next, the seventh button effect starts, and the button image 509 is displayed as shown in Fig. 197 (31). In the seventh button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in motion in the manner described with reference to Figs. 70 (3) to (8). In addition, a third button emphasis sound is output.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the seventh button effect, a seventh post-operation emphasis image 519 is displayed as shown in Fig. 197 (32). Also, a seventh post-operation emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 198 (33), a post-sixth button image 590 is displayed, and a post-fourth button emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 198 (34), three less decorative decorative patterns 41, "454", are displayed in a manner that moves from the top to the bottom.
Next, as shown in FIG. 198 (35), three decorative patterns 41 with low decorativeness are temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 198(36), a switching image 586 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 198 (37), the switching image 586 is hidden, and the three decorative symbols 41, "454," are temporarily stopped in a highly decorative display mode. At this time, the reserved image 52, the stage image 61, the stage notification image 501, and the change count image 502 are redisplayed. On the other hand, the change image 51 is not redisplayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 198 (38), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "454", are fixed and stopped as the special symbols stop varying. Also, the variation count image 502 is updated to "31 games."

(Variation example 23)
199 to 204 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 22) will be described with reference to Figures 199 to 204. Variable effect example 22 is a variable effect based on winning the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.
Note that variation presentation example 23 is an example of a variation presentation that is executed after the variation presentation that is executed when "AA6" is selected as the "pre-determination presentation pattern" in Figure 39. Also, the variation presentation that is executed when "AA6" is selected as the "pre-determination presentation pattern" in Figure 39 is the variation presentation shown in Figures 193 (1) to (5). Also, variation presentation example 23 is a variation presentation that is executed when "EA6" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Figure 41. Also, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation presentation examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the respective variation presentation examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in Figure 199 (1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "331" on the image display unit 114. At this time, the first reserved image 52 is displayed in blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 199 (2), as the next special symbol starts to change, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 start to change. Also, a second start operation is performed. Also, at this time, a second start emphasis image 611 is displayed around each of the three decorative symbols 41. Also, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the changing image 51, and the changing image 51 is displayed in blue. Also, a second start emphasis sound is output.
At this time, a vibration effect is also executed. While this vibration effect is being executed, the effect button 161 emits light in white. The execution time of this vibration effect is 6 seconds. The effect button 161 starts emitting light in white after the vibration effect starts, and stops emitting light in white before the vibration effect ends, so that the effect button 161 emits light in white for 5.8 seconds during the vibration effect. However, the execution time of this vibration effect and the light-emitting time of the effect button 161 during the vibration effect may be any time.

Next, as shown in FIG. 199 (3), the third role performance starts, and the left movable role 115A moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. Also, the role second emphasis image 555 is displayed. In the third role performance, the performance described using FIGS. 117 (1) to (8) is performed. Also, the third role emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 199(4), a second zone start image 538 is displayed and the second zone presentation begins.
Next, as shown in Figure 199(5), a second zone execution image 613 is displayed. In the second zone effect, the effects explained using Figures 103(2) to (6) are performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 199(6), a first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed, and a first precursor emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 199 (7), the 15th button effect starts, and the button image 509 is displayed. In the 15th button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in the manner shown in Fig. 79 (2) to (8). In addition, the first button emphasis sound is output.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the 15th button effect, a 13th post-operation emphasis image 525 is displayed as shown in Fig. 199 (8). In addition, a 13th post-operation emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 200(9), a pseudo-continuous image 581 and a pseudo-continuous emphasis image 582 are displayed. Also, a second stop emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 200(10), the pseudo-continuous image 581 is enlarged and displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 200(11), a re-change notification image 583 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Figure 200 (12), the decorative pattern 41 starts to change again.
Next, as shown in FIG. 200(13), a change effect is executed, and the variable image 51 changes from blue to red. Also, a red-emphasizing sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 200(14), a pseudo-continuous image 581 and a pseudo-continuous emphasis image 582 are displayed. Also, a second stop emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 200(15), the pseudo-continuous image 581 is enlarged and displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 200(16), a re-change notification image 583 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Figure 201 (17), the decorative pattern 41 begins to change again.
Next, as shown in FIG. 201 (18), the left decorative symbol 41, "4," temporarily stops, and the sixth stop action is performed. At this time, seventh stop emphasis images 602 are displayed on the left and right of the left decorative symbol 41. Also, a fourth stop emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 201 (19), the right decorative symbol 41, "4," temporarily stops, and the sixth stop action is performed. At this time, seventh stop emphasis images 602 are displayed on the left and right of the right decorative symbol 41. Also, a fourth stop emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 201 (20), the seventh reach effect is performed, a reach line image 539, a reach suggestion image 540, a reach emphasis image 541, and a seventh reach emphasis image 548 are displayed, and the seventh reach action is performed. In the seventh reach effect, the effects described using Figs. 110 (2) to (6) are performed. In addition, a second reach emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 201 (21), the character portion of the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is erased, reducing its decorativeness, and the action is displayed in an enlarged manner. At this time, the stage image 61, the reserved image 52, the stage notification image 501, and the change count image 502 are not displayed. Also, a first action emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 201 (22), each of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 is displayed in a shrinking motion. Also, each of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 is displayed in a moving motion to both upper corners of the image display section 114. Also, the SP reach effect is started, and the SP reach image 552 is displayed. Also, the first motion emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 201 (23), a development provocation effect is executed, and the middle decorative symbol 41, "5," the development image 584, and the first development provocation emphasis image 585 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the middle decorative symbol 41 and the development image 584 are displayed in a motion that sways from side to side. In addition, the first development provocation emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 201 (24), the "5" which is the middle decorative pattern 41 is hidden, and the development image 584 stops. Also, the first development emphasis sound is output.
Next, the development effect (second role effect) starts, and as shown in FIG. 202 (25), the middle movable role 115B moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. Also, the development emphasis image 554 is displayed. Also, at this time, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are not displayed. Also, the second role emphasis sound is output.

Next, the SPSP reach effect is started. At this time, the start suggestion effect of the second mode is started, and as shown in FIG. 202 (26), the SPSP start image 556 and the second start emphasis image 558 are displayed. In the start suggestion effect of the second mode, the effect explained using FIG. 120 (1) to (6) is performed. In addition, the second start emphasis sound is output.
Next, the second mode of in-play suggestion effect is started, and as shown in Fig. 202 (27), the SPSP suggestion image 561 and the second in-play highlight image 563 are displayed. In the second mode of in-play suggestion effect, the effects described using Fig. 125 (1) to (5) are performed. In addition, the second in-play highlight sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 202 (28), a third precursor emphasis image 518 is displayed. The third precursor emphasis image 518 is displayed in the manner described with reference to Figures 70 (1) and (2). In addition, a third precursor emphasis sound is output.
Next, the eighth button effect starts, and the button image 509 is displayed as shown in Fig. 202 (29). In the eighth button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in motion in the manner described with reference to Figs. 70 (3) to (8). In addition, the third button emphasis sound is output.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the eighth button effect, an eighth post-operation emphasis image 520 is displayed as shown in Fig. 202 (30). Also, an eighth post-operation emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 202 (31), the first jackpot presentation is executed. In the first jackpot presentation, a first jackpot notification sound is output, a vibration presentation is executed, the center movable role element 115B moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114, and the center movable role element 115B, presentation button 161, and lamp L emit light in rainbow colors. In addition, a first jackpot highlight image 566 is displayed. In the first jackpot presentation, the presentations described using Figures 130 (2) to (8) and Figures 131 (9) to (16) are executed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 202 (32), the doublet decorative pattern 41 "444" is displayed in an enlarged manner. More specifically, the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in an enlarged manner so that the display area of the center decorative pattern 41 is larger than the display area of the left decorative pattern 41 and the display area of the right decorative pattern 41.
Next, as shown in FIG. 203 (33), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a shrinking manner, so that the display areas of the three decorative patterns 41 become the same size. A first doublet emphasis image 591 is also displayed. A first doublet emphasis sound is also output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 203 (34), a promotion promotion effect is executed and a promotion promotion highlight image 592 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Figure 203 (35), a first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed, and a first precursor emphasis sound is output.
Next, the first button effect starts, and the button image 509 is displayed as shown in Fig. 203 (36). In the first button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in motion in the manner described using Figs. 60 (2) to (8). In addition, a first button emphasis sound is output.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the first button effect, a first post-operation emphasis image 510 is displayed as shown in Fig. 203 (37). Also, a first post-operation emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 203 (38), the doublet decorative pattern 41 "444" is displayed again. At this time, the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in an operational manner so that the display area of the center decorative pattern 41 is larger than the display area of the left decorative pattern 41 and the display area of the right decorative pattern 41.
Next, as shown in FIG. 203 (39), the decorative symbols 41 of the triplet are displayed in a shrinking manner, so that the display areas of the three decorative symbols 41 are all the same size. A first doublet emphasis image 591 is also displayed. A first doublet emphasis sound is also output.

Then, as shown in Figure 203 (40), as the special pattern stops, the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 "444" are fixed and stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 204 (41), a first right hit notification is made and a first right hit image 503 is displayed. Also, a jackpot start image 593 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Figure 204 (42), a second right hit notification is made and a second right hit image 507 is displayed.

Next, the big win game starts, and as shown in FIG. 204 (43), a round number image 594 and a round in progress image 595 are displayed.
Next, the big win game ends, and a time-saving start image 596 is displayed as shown in FIG. 204 (44).
Next, in the special time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 204 (45), the decorative symbol 41 with low decorativeness, "444," is fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114. The small symbol 56 is also fixed and stopped as a sequence of numbers "444," similar to the decorative symbol 41. At this time, the stage image 61 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the third stage, which is the presentation mode in the special time-saving game state. The reserved number display 55 of the first starting slot 121 displays "1." Meanwhile, the reserved image 52 is not displayed. The stage notification image 501 and the remaining number of times in the time-saving game 504 are also displayed. In the illustrated example, the stage notification image 501 displays the text "Ocean," and the remaining number of times in the time-saving game 504 displays the text "100 more."

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can make the emphasis performance common to the first and second stages, emphasizing that the button image 509 is displayed before the button image 509 is actually displayed (see Figure 165 (29), Figure 202 (28)).
Therefore, regardless of the stage, it is possible to make the player more aware that the button effect will start when the highlight effect is executed, and it is possible to increase the expectation of the button effect even before the button effect starts.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can display a button image 509 that emphasizes the promotion of operation of the performance button 161, and can execute a change performance that changes the display mode of the button image 509. The change performance includes a first change performance (for example, the operation display of the button emphasis unit 509c) and a second change performance (for example, the operation display of the emphasized character 509d). The performance control unit 300 can make the execution mode of the first change performance and the execution mode of the second change performance common to both the first stage and the second stage (see FIG. 165 (30), FIG. 202 (29), and FIG. 70 (3) to (8)).
In this case, regardless of the stage, it is possible to make the player more aware that a button effect is being executed, and to further encourage the player to operate the effect button 161.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 may make either the execution mode of the first change performance or the execution mode of the second change performance common to the first stage and the second stage, and make the other different.

In addition, in the first and second stages, the performance control unit 300 keeps the operation mode (operation speed, position reached by operation, etc.) of the movable role object 115 in the role object performance before the reach performance begins the same, but makes the display mode (operation display mode) of the highlighted image different (see Figure 162 (3) and Figure 199 (3)).
Therefore, even when a reel performance with a common operating pattern is executed, it is possible to diversify the ways in which attention is drawn to the movable reel 115.

In Variation Presentation Example 23, the second zone presentation is executed, but this is not limited to this. In Variation Presentation Example 23, the first zone presentation (see Figure 102) may also be executed, as in the first stage.

205 and 206 are diagrams showing an example in which the second left-hit image 48 is displayed in the variation presentation example 23. In the following example, in the variation presentation example 23, the player continues to shoot the game ball toward the right side of the game area 111, and the game ball continuously enters the gate 124 provided on the right side of the game area 111.
In this example, first, the execution conditions for the first left-hand hit notification are met, and the first left-hand hit notification is executed. Then, the execution conditions for the second left-hand hit notification are met, and the second left-hand hit notification is executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 205 (1), when the second start operation is executed and the second start emphasis image 611 is displayed (see FIG. 199 (2)), the second left-hand hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hand hit sound is output. The second left-hand hit image 48 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, the second start emphasis image 611, the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, and the small pattern 56. Furthermore, the second left-hand hit image 48 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and the second start emphasis image 611, and in a layer behind the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, and the small pattern 56.

Next, as shown in Fig. 205 (2), when the third reel effect is performed and the reel second emphasis image 555 is displayed (see Fig. 199 (3)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output. The second left-hit image 48 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the reel second emphasis image 555 and is displayed on a layer in front of the reel second emphasis image 555.
Next, as shown in Figure 205 (3), when the first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed (see Figure 199 (6)), the second left hit image 48 is displayed and the second left hit sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 205 (4), when the 15th button effect starts and the button image 509 is displayed (see Figure 199 (7)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 205 (5), when the thirteenth post-operation emphasis image 525 is displayed (see Fig. 199 (8)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output. The second left-hit image 48 is in an area that overlaps with the display area of the thirteenth post-operation emphasis image 525 and is displayed in a layer in front of the thirteenth post-operation emphasis image 525.

Next, as shown in Figure 205 (6), when the pseudo-continuous image 581 and the pseudo-continuous highlight image 582 are displayed (see Figure 200 (9)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 205 (7), when the pseudo-continuous image 581 is enlarged and displayed (see Figure 200 (10)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 205 (8), when the re-change notification image 583 is displayed (see Figure 200 (11)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 206 (9), when the pseudo-continuous image 581 and the pseudo-continuous highlight image 582 are displayed (see Figure 200 (14)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 206 (10), when the pseudo-continuous image 581 is enlarged and displayed (see Figure 200 (15)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 206 (11), when the re-change notification image 583 is displayed (see Figure 200 (16)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 206 (12), when the seventh stop emphasis image 602 is displayed (see Fig. 201 (18)), the second left-hand hit image 48 is displayed. The second left-hand hit image 48 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the seventh stop emphasis image 602, in a layer in front of the seventh stop emphasis image 602.
Next, as shown in Fig. 206 (13), when the reach line image 539, reach suggestion image 540, reach emphasis image 541, and seventh reach eye emphasis image 548 are displayed (see Fig. 201 (20)), the second left hit image 48 is displayed. The second left hit image 48 is in an area that overlaps with the display area of the seventh reach eye emphasis image 548, and is displayed in a layer in front of the seventh reach eye emphasis image 548.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figure 168 (8) and Figure 169 (9) to (16) are performed.

As described above, when the second left hit notification is executed in variable performance example 23, each of the performance sounds described in variable performance example 23 is restricted while the second left hit notification is being executed.
In addition, when the first left-hit notification is executed in variable presentation example 23, each of the presentation sounds described in variable presentation example 23 is output even while the first left-hit notification is being executed.

(Variation example 24)
207 and 208-1 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable presentation (variable presentation example 24) will be described with reference to Figures 207 and 208-1. Variable presentation example 24 is an example of a jackpot variable presentation based on winning into the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state.
Note that variation presentation example 24 is a variation presentation that is executed when "EA7" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 41. Also, variation presentation example 24 is an example of a variation presentation that is executed after the variation presentation that is executed when "AA7" is selected as the "pre-determination presentation pattern" in Fig. 39. Also, the variation presentation that is executed when "AA7" is selected as the "pre-determination presentation pattern" in Fig. 39 is the variation presentation shown in Fig. 193 (1) to (5).
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 199 (1) to (8), 200 (9) to (16), and 201 (17) to (24) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 207 (1), the development effect (second reel effect) begins, and the middle movable reel 115B moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. In addition, the development emphasis image 554 is displayed. At this time, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are hidden. In addition, a second reel emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 207 (2), the start suggestion effect of the third mode is performed, and the SPSP start image 556 is displayed. In the start suggestion effect of the third mode, the effect described using Figs. 121 (1) to (5) is performed. In addition, a third start emphasis sound, which is an effect sound that emphasizes the start suggestion effect of the third mode, is output. The output time of the third start emphasis sound is 2.3 seconds.
Next, as shown in Fig. 207 (3), the in-execution suggestion effect of the third mode is performed, and the SPSP suggestion image 561 is displayed. In the in-execution suggestion effect of the third mode, the effect described using Fig. 126 (1) to (7) is performed. In addition, a third in-execution emphasis sound, which is an effect sound that emphasizes the in-execution suggestion effect of the third mode, is output. The output time of the third in-execution emphasis sound is 0.85 seconds.

Next, as shown in Fig. 207(4), a third precursor emphasis image 518 is displayed. The third precursor emphasis image 518 is displayed in the manner described with reference to Figs. 81(1) and (2). In addition, a third precursor emphasis sound is output.
Next, the 16th button effect starts, and the button image 509 is displayed as shown in Fig. 207 (5). In the 16th button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in motion in the manner described with reference to Figs. 81 (3) to (8) and 82 (9). In addition, a 4th button emphasis sound is output.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the 16th button effect, a 14th post-operation emphasis image 526 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 207 (6). The 14th post-operation emphasis image 526 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, and the small pattern 56. The 14th post-operation emphasis image 526 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and in a layer behind the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, and the small pattern 56. A 14th post-operation emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating the display of the 14th post-operation emphasis image 526, is output. The 14th post-operation emphasis sound can also be considered as an emphasis sound corresponding to the operation of the effect button 161. The output time of the 14th post-operation emphasis sound is 0.4 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 207 (7), the third jackpot effect is executed. In the third jackpot effect, a third jackpot notification sound is output, a vibration effect is executed, the right movable role element 115C moves to a position overlapping the display area of the image display unit 114, and the right movable role element 115C, effect button 161, and lamp L emit rainbow-colored light. Additionally, a third jackpot emphasis image 568 is displayed. The third jackpot emphasis image 568 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative symbol 41, volume image 42, light intensity image 43, reserved number display 55, and small symbol 56. Additionally, the third jackpot emphasis image 568 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative symbol 41 and behind the volume image 42, light intensity image 43, reserved number display 55, and small symbol 56. In addition, in the third jackpot effect, the effects described using FIGS. 135 (2) through (8) and 136 (9) through (16) are executed. Furthermore, when the third jackpot emphasis image 568 is displayed, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed but is difficult or impossible to see because it is covered by the third jackpot emphasis image 568.

Next, as shown in Figure 207 (8), the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness, which is a double-digit number, is displayed so as to expand. More specifically, the display areas of the decorative patterns 41 are displayed so as to be the same size. However, a part of the left decorative pattern 41 is made difficult or impossible to see by the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43.
Next, as shown in FIG. 208-1 (9), the doublet decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a shrinking motion. The motion display time of the doublet decorative symbols 41 is 2.5 seconds. However, the motion display time of the doublet decorative symbols 41 may be any time. Furthermore, a third doublet emphasis image 614 is displayed around each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. The third doublet emphasis image 614 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, and the small symbols 56, and is displayed in a layer behind the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, and the small symbols 56. The display time of the third doublet emphasis image 614 is 1.5 seconds. However, the display time of the third doublet emphasis image 614 may be any time. Furthermore, a third doublet emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the third doublet emphasis image 614 is displayed, is output. The third doublet emphasis sound can also be regarded as an effect sound that emphasizes the doublet decorative pattern 41 in the second stage. The output time of the third doublet emphasis sound is 1.35 seconds.
Then, as shown in FIG. 208-1 (10), as the special symbol stops, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "444" are fixed and stopped.
Although not shown in the figure, the same effects as those shown in Figure 167 (42) to (46) are performed after this.

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can display the button image 509 that emphasizes the promotion of the operation of the performance button 161, and can execute a change performance that changes the display mode of the button image 509. The change performance includes a first change performance (for example, the operation display of the button highlighting unit 509c) and a second change performance (for example, the operation display of the highlighted character 509d). The performance control unit 300 can make the execution mode of the first change performance and the execution mode of the second change performance different in the first stage and the second stage (see FIG. 171 (3), FIGS. 76 (2) to (8), FIG. 207 (5), and FIGS. 81 (3) to (8)).
In this case, it is possible to increase the uniqueness of how the player focuses on the button image 509 depending on the stage.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 may make either the execution mode of the first change performance or the execution mode of the second change performance common to the first stage and the second stage, and make the other different.
In particular, the performance control unit 300 may make the execution time of the change performance the same in the first stage and the second stage, but vary either the cycle of the change performance or the display mode (operation display mode) of the change performance. Also, the performance control unit 300 may make the cycle of the change performance the same in the first stage and the second stage, but vary either the execution time of the change performance or the display mode (operation display mode) of the change performance. Also, the performance control unit 300 may make the display mode (operation display mode) of the change performance the same in the first stage and the second stage, but vary either the cycle of the change performance or the execution time of the change performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 may make the operation effective period of the button performance (execution time of the button performance, display time of the button unit 509a) the same in the first stage and the second stage, but may make at least one of the execution time of the change performance, the period of the change performance, and the display mode (operation display mode) of the change performance different.
In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 may make at least one of the execution time of the change performance, the period of the change performance, and the display mode (operation display mode) of the change performance common to the first stage and the second stage, and may make the operation effective period of the button performance (execution time of the button performance, display time of the button unit 509a) different.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the presentation control unit 300 can execute specific presentations (temporary stop of decorative pattern 41, reach presentation, SP reach presentation, SPSP reach presentation, pseudo consecutive presentation, etc.) in variable presentations, and that it is possible to make the button presentations performed before the start of the specific presentations different in the first and second stages (see Figures 162 (8) and 199 (7)), and to make the button presentations performed after the start of the specific presentations different (see Figures 165 (30) and 207 (5)).
Here, the performance control unit 300 may make the button performance performed before the start of the specific performance common to the first and second stages (for example, a sixth button performance is performed in both), and may make the button performance performed after the start of the specific performance different (an eighth button performance (see Figure 165 (30)) is performed in the first stage, and a sixteenth button performance (see Figure 207 (5)) is performed in the second stage).
In this case, in the first half of the variable presentation, the player will recognize that a common button presentation will be performed regardless of the stage, while in the second half of the variable presentation, different button presentations will be performed depending on the stage, giving the player a sense of surprise in the presentation.

In addition, in the variable presentation example 24, the same SP reach presentation as in the first stage is executed (see Figures 164 (23), (24), and Figure 165 (25)), but this is not limited to this.
In variable performance example 24, an SP reach performance (see Figure 191 (2) to (4)) unique to the second stage may be executed.

In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can execute a predetermined emphasis effect when a jackpot game is executed. Examples of the predetermined emphasis effect include outputting a jackpot notification sound, displaying a jackpot emphasis image, vibration effect, accessory effect, and rainbow-colored illumination of the effect button 161, lamp L, or movable accessory 115. The effect control unit 300 can either use the same effect mode for the predetermined emphasis effect in the first stage and the second stage (see FIG. 165 (32) and FIG. 202 (31)), or use different effect modes for the predetermined emphasis effect (see FIG. 207 (7)).
In this case, depending on the variable effect being executed, it is possible to switch between making it easier for the player to recognize that a jackpot game will be executed by executing an emphasis effect regardless of the stage, and making the player feel the variety of ways of making the player recognize that a jackpot game will be executed depending on the stage.

In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can execute a predetermined emphasis effect when a jackpot game is executed. Examples of the predetermined emphasis effect include outputting a jackpot notification sound, displaying a jackpot emphasis image, vibration effect, accessory effect, and rainbow-colored illumination of the effect button 161, lamp L, or movable accessory 115. The effect control unit 300 can either make the execution time of the predetermined emphasis effect the same in the first stage and the second stage (see FIG. 165 (32) and FIG. 202 (31)), or make the execution time of the predetermined emphasis effect different (see FIG. 207 (7) and FIG. 141).
In this case, depending on the variable effect being executed, it is possible to switch between making it easier for the player to recognize that a jackpot game will be executed by executing an emphasis effect regardless of the stage, and making the player feel the variety of ways of making the player recognize that a jackpot game will be executed depending on the stage.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the first stage and the second stage, the form of the predetermined emphasis effect that is performed when a jackpot game is executed may be the same (see Figure 165 (32) and Figure 202 (31)), or may be different (see Figure 207 (7)).
Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that a big win game will be played by executing the highlighting effect regardless of the stage, and to make the player feel the variety of ways of making the player recognize that a big win game will be played depending on the stage.

In this embodiment, when a button effect (e.g., the 9th button effect, the 16th button effect) in which the display color of the button highlighting section 509c is the same color (e.g., red) is executed in the first and second stages, the same premonition emphasis image (the third premonition emphasis image 518) is displayed (see Figure 170 (2) and Figure 207 (4)), but this is not limited to this.
In the first and second stages, when a button effect is executed in which the display color of the button highlighting section 509c is the same color, different precursor emphasis images may be displayed (different operational display modes of the precursor emphasis images, different display times of the precursor emphasis images).

208-2 is a diagram showing an example in which the second left-hit image 48 is displayed in the variation presentation example 24. In the following example, in the variation presentation example 24, the player continues to shoot the game ball toward the right side of the game area 111, and the game ball continuously enters the gate 124 provided on the right side of the game area 111.
In this example, first, the execution condition for the first left-handed hit notification is met, and the first left-handed hit notification is executed. After that, the execution condition for the second left-handed hit notification is met, and the second left-handed hit notification is executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 208-2(1), when the development emphasis image 554 is displayed (see FIG. 207(1)), the second left-handed hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-handed hit sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 208-2 (2), when the third precursor emphasis image 518 is displayed (see Figure 207 (4)), the second left hit image 48 is displayed and the second left hit sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 208-2 (3), when the 16th button effect starts and the button image 509 is displayed (see Figure 207 (5)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 208-2 (4), when the 14th post-operation emphasis image 526 is displayed (see Figure 207 (6)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 208-2 (5), when the third jackpot effect is executed and the third jackpot emphasis image 568 is displayed (see Fig. 207 (7)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output. The second left-hit image 48 is in an area that overlaps with the display area of the third jackpot emphasis image 568 and is displayed in a layer in front of the third jackpot emphasis image 568.
Next, as shown in Figure 208-2 (6), when the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed in motion (see Figure 207 (8)), a second left-hit image 48 is displayed and a second left-hit sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 208-2(7), when the action display of the doublet decorative pattern 41 and the third doublet emphasis image 614 are displayed (see Fig. 208-1(9)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output. The second left-hit image 48 is in an area that overlaps with the display area of the third doublet emphasis image 614 and is displayed in a layer in front of the third doublet emphasis image 614.
Although not shown in the figure, after this, when the decorative pattern 41 and small pattern 56 are stopped in a confirmed state in conjunction with the stopped display of the special pattern, the second left-hit image 48 is no longer displayed and the output of the second left-hit sound ends.

As described above, when the second left-hit notification is executed in variable presentation example 24, each of the presentation sounds described in variable presentation example 24 is restricted while the second left-hit notification is being executed.
In addition, when the first left-hit notification is executed in variable presentation example 24, each of the presentation sounds described in variable presentation example 24 is output even while the first left-hit notification is being executed.

(Variation example 25)
209 to 211 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable presentation (variable presentation example 25) will be described with reference to Figures 209 to 211. Variable presentation example 25 is an example of a jackpot variable presentation based on winning into the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state.
Note that variation presentation example 25 is a variation presentation that is executed when "EB3" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 41. Also, variation presentation example 25 is an example of a variation presentation that is executed after the variation presentation that is executed when "AB3" is selected as the "pre-determination presentation pattern" in Fig. 39. Also, the variation presentation that is executed when "AB3" is selected as the "pre-determination presentation pattern" in Fig. 39 is the variation presentation shown in Fig. 193 (1) to (5).
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, as shown in Figure 209 (1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "331" on the image display unit 114. At this time, the first reserved image 52 is displayed in blue.
Next, as shown in FIG. 209 (2), as the display of the next special symbol begins to change, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 begin to change. A second start operation is also performed. A second start emphasis image 611 is displayed around each of the three decorative symbols 41. The first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the changing image 51, and the changing image 51 is displayed in blue. A second start emphasis sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Figure 209 (3), a change effect is executed, and the display color of the variable image 51 changes from blue to rainbow colors. Also, a first rainbow emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 209 (4), the "7" decorative symbol 41 on the left is temporarily stopped, and a seventh stop action is performed. Furthermore, eighth stop emphasis images 603 are displayed on the left and right of the left decorative symbol 41. Furthermore, a fifth stop emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the stop emphasis image is displayed, is output. The fifth stop emphasis sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the "7" decorative symbols 41 on the left and right in the second stage. The output time of the fifth stop emphasis sound is 0.6 seconds.
Next, as shown in Fig. 209(5), the right decorative symbol 41, "7", is temporarily stopped, and the seventh stop action is performed. Also, eighth stop emphasis images 603 are displayed on the left and right of the right decorative symbol 41. Also, a fifth stop emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 209 (6), the fourth reach effect is executed, and a reach line image 539, a reach suggestion image 540, and a fourth reach highlight image 545 are displayed. Also, a fourth reach action is performed. In the fourth reach effect, the effects described using Figs. 107 (2) to (5) are executed. Also, a third reach highlight sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 209 (7), a first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed, and a first precursor emphasis sound is output.
Next, the first button effect starts, and the button image 509 is displayed as shown in Fig. 209 (8). In the first button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in motion in the manner described using Figs. 60 (2) to (8). In addition, a first button emphasis sound is output.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the first button effect, a first post-operation emphasis image 510 is displayed as shown in Fig. 210(9). Also, a first post-operation emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 210(10), the development image 584 stops, and the first development emphasis sound is output.
Next, the development effect (second role effect) is started, and as shown in FIG. 210 (11), the middle movable role effect 115B moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. Also, the development emphasis image 554 is displayed. In the development effect (second role effect), the effect described using FIGS. 115 (1) to (8) and 116 (9) to (11) is performed. Also, at this time, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are not displayed. Also, the second role effect emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 210 (12), the start suggestion effect of the second mode is performed, and an SPSP start image 556 and a second start emphasis image 558 are displayed. In the start suggestion effect of the second mode, the effect described using Figs. 120 (1) to (6) is performed. In addition, a second start emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 210 (13), the second mode of in-play suggestion effect is performed, and the SPSP suggestion image 561 and the second in-play emphasis image 563 are displayed. In the second mode of in-play suggestion effect, the effect described using Fig. 125 (1) to (5) is performed. In addition, the second in-play emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 210 (14), a third precursor emphasis image 518 is displayed. The third precursor emphasis image 518 is displayed in the manner described with reference to Figs. 70 (1) and (2). In addition, a third precursor emphasis sound is output.
Next, the eighth button effect starts, and the button image 509 is displayed as shown in Fig. 210 (15). In the eighth button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in motion in the manner described with reference to Figs. 70 (3) to (8). In addition, the third button emphasis sound is output.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the eighth button effect, an eighth post-operation emphasis image 520 is displayed as shown in Fig. 210 (16). Also, an eighth post-operation emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 211 (17), the first jackpot presentation is executed. In the first jackpot presentation, a first jackpot notification sound is output, a vibration presentation is executed, the center movable role element 115B moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114, and the center movable role element 115B, presentation button 161, and lamp L emit light in rainbow colors. In addition, a first jackpot highlight image 566 is displayed. In the first jackpot presentation, the presentations described using FIGS. 130 (2) to (8) and 131 (9) to (16) are executed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 211 (18), the decorative symbols 41 with low decorativeness are displayed in an enlarged manner. More specifically, the display areas of the decorative symbols 41 are displayed in an enlarged manner so that they are all the same size. The display size of the decorative symbols 41 at this time is the same as that shown in Fig. 207 (8).
Next, as shown in Fig. 211 (19), the decorative symbols 41 with low decorativeness are displayed so as to be enlarged further. More specifically, the decorative symbols 41 with low decorativeness are displayed so as to have the same display area.

Next, as shown in FIG. 211 (20), the doublet decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a shrinking motion. The motion display time of the doublet decorative symbols 41 is 3.5 seconds. However, the motion display time of the doublet decorative symbols 41 may be any time. Furthermore, a fourth doublet emphasis image 615 is displayed around each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. The fourth doublet emphasis image 615 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative symbols 41, the volume image 42, and the light intensity image 43. Furthermore, the fourth doublet emphasis image 615 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative symbols 41 and behind the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43. Furthermore, the display time of the fourth doublet emphasis image 615 is 1.5 seconds. However, the display time of the fourth doublet emphasis image 615 may be any time. Furthermore, a fourth doublet emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the fourth doublet emphasis image 615 is displayed, is output. The fourth doublet emphasis sound can also be regarded as an effect sound that emphasizes "777", which is the doublet decorative pattern 41 in the second stage. The output time of the fourth doublet emphasis sound is 1.45 seconds.
Then, with the special symbol being displayed, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "777" are fixed and stopped.
Although not shown in the figures, the same effects as those shown in Figures 167 (42) to (46) are performed after this, except that the decorative pattern 41 and small pattern 56 are "777".

In addition, in the variable presentation example 25, the SPSP reach presentation similar to that in the first stage is executed (see Figures 164 (23), (24), and Figure 165 (25)), but is not limited to this.
In variable performance example 25, an SPSP reach performance (see Figure 191 (2) to (4)) unique to the second stage may be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, even if the decorative pattern 41 has the same character, the display mode of the character of the decorative pattern 41 is different in the first stage and the second stage (see Figure 142 (1) and Figure 181 (1)), but this is not limited to this.
In the first stage and the second stage, when the decorative pattern 41 has the same character, the display mode of the character of the decorative pattern 41 may be the same. In this case, in the first stage and the second stage, when the decorative pattern 41 has the same character, the stop action of the decorative pattern 41 may be the same, but the stop emphasis image displayed may be different. Also, in the first stage and the second stage, when the decorative pattern 41 has the same character, the stop emphasis image displayed may be the same, but the stop action of the decorative pattern 41 may be different. Also, in the first stage and the second stage, when the decorative pattern 41 has the same character, both the stop action of the decorative pattern 41 and the stop emphasis image displayed may be different.
Furthermore, in the first stage and the second stage, when the decorative pattern 41 has the same character, the displayed stop emphasis image may be the same. In this case, in the first stage and the second stage, when the decorative pattern 41 has the same character, the stop action of the decorative pattern 41 may be the same, but the display mode of the character of the decorative pattern 41 may be different. In the first stage and the second stage, when the decorative pattern 41 has the same character, the display mode of the character of the decorative pattern 41 may be the same, but the stop action of the decorative pattern 41 may be different. In addition, in the first stage and the second stage, when the decorative pattern 41 has the same character, the stop action of the decorative pattern 41 and the display mode of the character of the decorative pattern 41 may be different.
Furthermore, in the first stage and the second stage, if the decorative pattern 41 has the same character, the stop action of the decorative pattern 41 may be the same. In this case, in the first stage and the second stage, if the decorative pattern 41 has the same character, the displayed stop emphasis image may be the same, but the display mode of the character of the decorative pattern 41 may be different. In the first stage and the second stage, if the decorative pattern 41 has the same character, the display mode of the character of the decorative pattern 41 may be the same, but the displayed stop emphasis image may be different. In addition, in the first stage and the second stage, if the decorative pattern 41 has the same character, the displayed stop emphasis image and the display mode of the character of the decorative pattern 41 may be different.

Furthermore, in the variable effect, a stage change may be executed, such as transitioning from the first stage to the second stage, or from the second stage to the first stage. However, even if a stage change is executed, the expectation of a jackpot game being executed does not change. On the other hand, if the background of the stage image 61 changes when a zone effect is executed, the expectation of a jackpot game being executed may increase. In other words, the expectation may be higher when a zone effect is executed than when a stage change is executed.

(Variation example 26)
Next, referring to Fig. 212, a specific description will be given of a variable effect (variable effect example 26) performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114, etc. The variable effect example 26 is an example of a random miss variable effect based on the fact that the reserved number for winning into the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state is "1".
Note that the variation effect example 26 is a variation effect that is executed when "EH1" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in Figure 42.
In addition, each of the change presentation examples from change presentation example 26 to change presentation example 33 described below is a change presentation example when the change begins in the third stage.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

As shown in Figure 212 (1), when the previous special symbol is stopped and displayed by the effect control unit 300, a less decorative decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114. At this time, the image display unit 114 also displays a volume image 42, a light intensity image 43, a number of reserved symbols 55, a small symbol 56, a stage image 61, a stage notification image 501, a remaining number of times for time-saving play 504, and a first right-hit image 503. Additionally, the stage image 61 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the third stage, with the text "Ocean" displayed on the stage notification image 501 and the text "90 more" displayed on the remaining number of times for time-saving play 504. The third stage is a presentation mode in the special time-saving play state. Also, at this time, the reserved number display 55 of the first starting port 121 shows "0", which is the reserved number for winning at the first starting port 121, and the reserved number display 55 of the second starting port 122 shows "0", which is the reserved number for winning at the second starting port 122. Also, the first right-hit notification is executed in the manner described using Figures 57 (1) to (3).

Next, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 122, as shown in FIG. 212 (2), the special symbol starts to change and the change effect starts. At this time, the change image 51 is displayed. At this time, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 start to change. In addition, the remaining number of times for the time-saving mode image 504 is updated to "89 more."
Next, as shown in FIG. 212 (3), the three decorative symbols 41, "412," temporarily stop, and a tenth stop-time action is performed, which is the action performed when the decorative symbols 41 temporarily stop. The tenth stop-time action is performed when the decorative symbols 41 temporarily stop regardless of the number of the decorative symbols 41 in the third stage. The tenth stop-time action also involves the decorative symbols 41 bouncing. At this time, a thirteenth stop-time emphasis image 616 is displayed below each of the three decorative symbols 41. The execution time of the tenth stop-time action and the display time of the thirteenth stop-time emphasis image 616 are 0.1 seconds. However, the execution time of the tenth stop-time action and the display time of the thirteenth stop-time emphasis image 616 may be different or may be any time. A sixth stop-time emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating the display of the stop-time emphasis image, is output. The sixth stop-time emphasis sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the decorative symbols 41 in the third stage. The output time of the sixth stop-time emphasis sound is 0.1 seconds.

Next, as shown in Figure 212 (4), with the special symbol stopping, three decorative symbols 41 and a small symbol 56, "412," stop. Also, with the end of the variable effect, the variable image 51 is erased (displayed).

It has been explained that the variation effect example 26 is a variation effect based on the hold of the second starting port 122 being "1".
Here, even if the change presentation is based on the reserved number "4" in the second start port 122, a presentation common to the change presentation example 26 may be executed. That is, in both the change presentation based on the reserved number "1" in the second start port 122 and the change presentation based on the reserved number "4" in the second start port 122, the decorative pattern 41 may be displayed together.

(Variation example 27)
FIG. 213 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 27) will be described with reference to Fig. 213. Variable effect example 27 is an example of a random miss variable effect based on winning into the second starting slot 122 in the special time-saving game state.
Incidentally, variation presentation example 27 is a variation presentation that is executed when "AH8" is selected as the "pre-determined presentation pattern" in Fig. 40 and "EH2" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 42. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation presentation examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation presentation examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 213(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "623" in the image display unit 114. At this time, two reserved images 52 are displayed. Also, at this time, "2" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 for the second starting port 122.
Next, as shown in FIG. 213(2), as the display of the next special symbol begins to change, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 begin to change. Also, the second reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the first reserved image 52, and the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the changing image 51. Also, the reserved number display 55 for the second start port 122 is updated to "1." Also, the remaining number of times for time reduction image 504 is updated to "81 left."

Next, when a game ball enters the second start slot 122, as shown in Figure 213 (3), the second reserved image 52 is displayed and the reserved number display 55 for the second start slot 122 is updated to "2." At this time, a change effect is executed, and the first reserved image 52 changes from its normal display state to blue. A second blue emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the reserved image 52 has changed to blue, is also output. The second blue emphasis sound can also be considered as an effect sound that emphasizes the blue reserved image 52 (variable image 51) in the special time-saving game state. The output time of the second blue emphasis sound is 0.8 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 213 (4), a chance eye effect is executed, and three rows of decorative symbols 41, "331," stop. All three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in red. At this time, a chance eye emphasis image 587 is displayed around the three rows of decorative symbols 41. A third chance eye emphasis sound, which is a sound effect when the chance eye emphasis image 587 is displayed, is output. The third chance eye emphasis sound can also be considered as an effect sound that emphasizes the chance eye decorative symbols 41 in the third stage. The output time of the third chance eye emphasis sound is 0.5 seconds.
Next, as shown in FIG. 213(5), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "331", are fixed and stopped.
The chance eye effect in the variation effect example 27 is an example of a pre-determination effect. This pre-determination effect is an effect that makes the player expect a jackpot in the variation effect following the variation effect when the pre-determination effect is being executed.

(Variation example 28)
214 and 215 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable presentation (variable presentation example 28) will be described with reference to Figures 214 and 215. Variable presentation example 28 is a variable presentation based on winning at the second starting slot 122 in the special time-saving game state, and is an example of a variable presentation in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and an SPSP reach presentation is executed. Also, variable presentation example 28 is an example of a variable presentation executed after the variable presentation shown in variable presentation example 27. In other words, variable presentation example 28 is an example of a variable presentation showing the result of the special symbol lottery suggested by the blue reserved image 52 (see Figure 213 (5)) shown in variable presentation example 27.
214 and 215 are the variation effects that are executed when "EH8" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in Fig. 42. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in Figure 214 (1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "331" on the image display unit 114. At this time, the first reserved image 52 is displayed in blue.
Next, as shown in FIG. 214(2), as the next special symbol starts to change, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 start to change. Also, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the changing image 51, and the changing image 51 is displayed in blue. Also, the remaining number of times for time reduction 504 is updated to "80 more."

Next, as shown in Figure 214 (3), a second reach promotion effect is performed. In the second reach promotion effect, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed as if they are swaying up and down, and a second reach promotion emphasis image 617 is displayed around the left and right decorative symbols 41. The second reach promotion emphasis image 617 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43, and is displayed in a layer behind the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43. In addition, a second reach promotion emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the second reach promotion emphasis image 617 is displayed, is output. The second reach promotion emphasis sound can also be considered as an effect sound that emphasizes the left and right decorative symbols 41 in the third stage. The output time of the second reach promotion emphasis sound is 3.5 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 214 (4), an eighth reach effect is performed, an eighth reach emphasis image 549 is displayed, and an eighth reach action is performed. The eighth reach emphasis image 549 is an area that overlaps with the display areas of the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43, and is displayed in a layer behind the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43. In addition, in the eighth reach effect, the effect described using FIGS. 111 (2) to (5) is performed. In addition, a fourth reach emphasis sound, which is a sound effect for the eighth reach effect, is output. The fourth reach emphasis sound can also be considered as an effect sound that emphasizes the reach effect. The output time of the fourth reach emphasis sound is 1.25 seconds.
214(5), the first transition image 618 is displayed, and the variable image 51, the stage notification image 501, and the remaining number of times for time reduction image 504 are hidden. The first transition image 618 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the first right hit image 503, the reserved number display 55, and the small pattern 56. The first transition image 618 is also displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41, and in a layer behind the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the first right hit image 503, the reserved number display 55, and the small pattern 56.

Next, as shown in FIG. 214 (6), a start suggestion effect of the fourth mode is performed, and an SPSP start image 556 and a third start emphasis image 559 are displayed. In the start suggestion effect of the fourth mode, the effect described using FIGS. 122 (1) to (6) is performed. In addition, a fourth start emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the third start emphasis image 559 is displayed, is output. The fourth start emphasis sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the start suggestion effect. The output time of the fourth start emphasis sound is 1.2 seconds.
Next, as shown in FIG. 214 (7), a fourth type of in-execution suggestion effect is performed, and an SPSP suggestion image 561 and a third in-execution highlight image 564 are displayed. In the fourth type of in-execution suggestion effect, the effect described using FIGS. 127 (1) to (6) is performed. In addition, a fourth in-execution highlight sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the third in-execution highlight image 564 is displayed, is output. The fourth in-execution highlight sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the in-execution suggestion effect. The output time of the fourth in-execution highlight sound is 0.75 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 214 (8), a fourth precursor emphasis image 527 is displayed. The fourth precursor emphasis image 527 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, and the small symbols 56, and is displayed in a layer behind the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, and the small symbols 56. The fourth precursor emphasis image 527 is displayed in an operational manner as described with reference to FIGS. 83 (1) and (2). A fourth precursor emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the fourth precursor emphasis image 527 is displayed, is output. The fourth precursor emphasis sound can also be considered as a sound effect emphasizing the display of the button image 509. The output time of the fourth precursor emphasis sound is 1.1 seconds.
Next, the 17th button effect is performed, and the button image 509 is displayed as shown in FIG. 215 (9). In the 17th button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in motion in the manner described with reference to FIGS. 83 (3) to (8). In addition, a 6th button emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the button image 509 is displayed, is output. The 6th button emphasis sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the button image 509 (button effect). The output time of the 6th button emphasis sound is 0.8 seconds.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period for the 17th button effect, a 15th post-operation emphasis image 528 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 215 (10). The 15th post-operation emphasis image 528 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, volume image 42, light intensity image 43, first right-hit image 503, number of reserved balls display 55, and small pattern 56. The 15th post-operation emphasis image 528 is also drawn on the fifth layer LA5 (see FIG. 147 (2)) in the image display unit 114. That is, the 15th post-operation emphasis image 528 is displayed on a layer behind the decorative pattern 41, volume image 42, light intensity image 43, first right-hit image 503, number of reserved balls display 55, and small pattern 56. A 15th post-operation emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the 15th post-operation emphasis image 528 is displayed, is also output. The 15th post-operation emphasis sound can also be considered as an emphasis sound in response to the operation of the effect button 161. The output time of the 15th post-operation emphasis sound is 0.2 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 215 (11), an eleventh button post image 619 is displayed. In addition, a seventh button post emphasis sound is output, which is a sound effect indicating that the eleventh button post image 619 is displayed. The output time of the seventh button post emphasis sound is 1.4 seconds.
Next, as shown in FIG. 215(12), the first transitional image 618 is displayed again.
Next, as shown in FIG. 215 (13), the three decorative symbols 41, "454," temporarily stop. Also, the stage notification image 501 and the remaining time-reduction number image 504 are redisplayed. On the other hand, the variable image 51 is not redisplayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 215 (14), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "454", are fixed and stopped.

In the variable performance example 28, a common first transition image 618 is displayed before the start of the SPSP reach performance and after the execution of the SPSP reach performance, but this is not limited to this.
In the third stage, the display mode of the first transition image 618 may be different before the start of the SPSP reach performance and after the SPSP reach performance is executed.

(Variation example 29)
216 and 217 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable presentation (variable presentation example 29) will be described with reference to FIGS. 216 and 217. Variable presentation example 29 is an example of a jackpot variable presentation based on winning the second starting slot 122 in the special time-saving game state. Also, variable presentation example 29 is an example of a variable presentation executed after the variable presentation executed when "AF1" is selected as the "pre-determination presentation pattern" in FIG. 40. Also, the variable presentation executed when "AF1" is selected as the "pre-determination presentation pattern" in FIG. 40 is the variable presentation shown in FIGS. 213(1) to (5). Also, variable presentation example 29 is a variable presentation executed when "EF1" is selected as the "variable presentation pattern" in FIG. 42. Also, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variable presentation examples will be mainly described, and explanations of similarities with the variable presentation examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in Figure 216 (1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "331" on the image display unit 114. At this time, the first of the two reserved images 52 is displayed in blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 216(2), as the next special symbol starts to change, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 start to change. Also, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the changing image 51, and the changing image 51 is displayed in blue. Also, the remaining number of times for time reduction 504 is updated to "80 more."
Furthermore, a change effect is executed, and the display color of the changing image 51 changes from blue to green. A second green emphasis sound, which is a sound effect when the green changing image 51 is displayed, is output. The second green emphasis sound can also be considered as an effect sound that emphasizes the changing image 51 (reserved image 52) for which a change effect has been executed in the special time-saving gaming state. The output time of the second green emphasis sound is 1.75 seconds.

Next, as shown in Fig. 216 (3), a second reach stimulation effect is performed. In the second reach stimulation effect, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in an up and down swinging motion, and a second reach stimulation emphasis image 617 is displayed around the left and right decorative symbols 41. In addition, a second reach stimulation emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 216 (4), the eighth reach effect is performed, an eighth reach emphasis image 549 is displayed, and an eighth reach action is performed. In the eighth reach effect, the effects described using Fig. 111 (2) to (5) are performed. In addition, a fourth reach emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 216 (5), the first transition image 618 is displayed, and the variable image 51, the stage notification image 501, and the remaining number of time-saving times image 504 are hidden.

Next, as shown in Fig. 216 (6), the start suggestion effect of the fourth mode is performed, and the SPSP start image 556 and the third start emphasis image 559 are displayed. In the start suggestion effect of the fourth mode, the effect described using Fig. 122 (1) to (6) is performed. In addition, the fourth start emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 216 (7), the fifth mode of in-execution suggestion effect is performed, and the SPSP suggestion image 561 and the fourth in-execution highlight image 565 are displayed. In the fifth mode of in-execution suggestion effect, the effect described using FIGS. 128 (1) to (4) is performed. In addition, a fifth in-execution highlight sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the fourth in-execution highlight image 565 is displayed, is output. The fifth in-execution highlight sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the in-execution suggestion effect. The output time of the fifth in-execution highlight sound is 0.95 seconds.

Next, as shown in Fig. 216 (8), a fourth precursor emphasis image 527 is displayed. The fourth precursor emphasis image 527 is displayed in the manner described with reference to Figs. 83 (1) and (2). In addition, a fourth precursor emphasis sound is output.
Next, the 18th button effect is performed, and the button image 509 is displayed as shown in Fig. 217 (9). In the 18th button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in motion in the manner described with reference to Figs. 83 (3) to (8). In addition, the 6th button emphasis sound is output.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period for the 18th button effect, a 16th post-operation emphasis image 529 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 217 (10). The 16th post-operation emphasis image 529 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, volume image 42, light intensity image 43, first right-hit image 503, hold number display 55, and small pattern 56. The 16th post-operation emphasis image 529 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and in a layer behind the volume image 42, light intensity image 43, first right-hit image 503, hold number display 55, and small pattern 56. A 16th post-operation emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating the display of the 16th post-operation emphasis image 529, is output. The 16th post-operation emphasis sound can also be considered an emphasis sound corresponding to the operation of the effect button 161. The output time of the 16th post-operation emphasis sound is 0.2 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 217 (11), a fourth jackpot presentation is performed. In the fourth jackpot presentation, a fourth jackpot notification sound is output, a vibration presentation is executed, the three movable role pieces 115 move to an area overlapping the image display unit 114, the three movable role pieces 115, the presentation button 161, and the lamp L emit rainbow-colored light, and a fourth jackpot highlight image 569 is displayed. The fourth jackpot highlight image 569 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative symbol 41, the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the first right-hit image 503, the reserved number display 55, and the small symbol 56. Furthermore, the fourth jackpot highlight image 569 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative symbol 41 and behind the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the first right-hit image 503, the reserved number display 55, and the small symbol 56. In addition, the fourth jackpot presentation is the presentation described using Figures 137 (2) to (8) and 138 (9) to (16). Furthermore, when the fourth jackpot highlight image 569 is displayed, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed, but is difficult or impossible to see because it is covered by the fourth jackpot highlight image 569.

Next, as shown in FIG. 217 (12), the decorative pattern 41 of the double numbers "444" is displayed so as to move from the top to the center of the image display section 114.
Next, as shown in Fig. 217 (13), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed so as to expand. More specifically, the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed so that the display area of the center decorative pattern 41 is larger than the display area of the left decorative pattern 41 and the display area of the right decorative pattern 41.

Next, as shown in FIG. 217 (14), the doublet decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a shrinking motion. The display time of the doublet decorative symbols 41 is 2 seconds. However, the display time of the doublet decorative symbols 41 may be any time. Furthermore, a fifth doublet emphasis image 620 is displayed around each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. The fifth doublet emphasis image 620 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, and the small symbols 56, and is displayed in a layer behind the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, and the small symbols 56. The display time of the fifth doublet emphasis image 620 is 1 second. However, the display time of the fifth doublet emphasis image 620 may be any time. Furthermore, a fifth doublet emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the fifth doublet emphasis image 620 is displayed, is output. The fifth doublet emphasis sound can also be regarded as an effect sound that emphasizes the doublet decorative pattern 41 in the third stage. The output time of the fifth doublet emphasis sound is 1.1 seconds.
Next, as shown in FIG. 217 (15), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "444", are fixed and stopped.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figure 167 (42) to (46) are performed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can execute a predetermined emphasis effect when a jackpot game is executed. Examples of the predetermined emphasis effect include outputting a jackpot notification sound, displaying a jackpot emphasis image, vibration effect, accessory effect, and rainbow-colored illumination of the effect button 161, lamp L, or movable accessory 115. The effect control unit 300 can make the effect mode of the predetermined emphasis effect the same in the first and second stages (see FIG. 165 (32) and FIG. 202 (31)), and can make the effect mode of the predetermined emphasis effect different in the first and third stages (see FIG. 217 (11)).
In this case, in the normal game state, the emphasis effect is executed regardless of the stage, making it easier for the player to recognize that a jackpot game is about to be played. Also, depending on the different game states, the player can be made to feel the variety of ways of making the player recognize that a jackpot game is about to be played.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a button effect (e.g., the 8th button effect, the 18th button effect) in which the display color of the button highlighting section 509c is the same color (e.g., white) is executed in the first and third stages, the effect control section 300 can change the execution mode of the highlighting effect that emphasizes the display of the button image 509 (see Figure 165 (29), Figure 217 (9)).
Therefore, even if the display color of the button highlighting section 509c is the same depending on the stage, different button effects are performed, allowing the player to feel the diversity of the effects.

In this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can display a button image 509 that emphasizes the promotion of operation of the performance button 161, and can execute a change performance that changes the display mode of the button image 509. The change performance includes a first change performance (for example, the display color of the button highlighting unit 509c) and a second change performance (for example, the action display of the highlighted character 509d). When a button performance is executed in the first stage and the third stage, the performance control unit 300 can make the mode of the first change performance the same (see FIGS. 165 (29) and 217 (9)) and make the mode of the second change performance different (see FIGS. 70 (3) to (8), and 83 (3) to (8)).
Therefore, even if the first change effect is the same depending on the stage, different button effects are performed, allowing the player to feel the diversity of the effects.

The performance control unit 300 may change the performance mode of the first change performance and the performance mode of the second change performance in the first stage and the third stage. The performance control unit 300 may also make the performance mode of the first change performance and the performance mode of the second change performance the same in the first stage and the third stage. The performance mode of the change performance may be any (or all) of the execution time of the change performance, the cycle of the change performance, and the display mode (action display mode) of the change performance.

In this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 can display a button image 509 that emphasizes the promotion of operation of the presentation button 161 and can execute a change presentation that changes the display mode of the button image 509. The change presentation includes a first change presentation (e.g., the operation display of the button highlighting unit 509c) and a second change presentation (e.g., the operation display of the highlighted character 509d). The presentation control unit 300 can also vary the execution time of the first change presentation and the second change presentation in the first and third stages (see FIGS. 165(30), 217(9), and 101). Therefore, the player can be encouraged to operate the presentation button 161 in a manner appropriate to the stage.
Furthermore, the presentation control unit 300 can make the execution time of the first change presentation in the third stage different from the execution time of the second change presentation, which makes it easier for the player to recognize both the first change presentation and the second change presentation in the third stage compared to when the execution time of the first change presentation and the execution time of the second change presentation are the same.

The performance control unit 300 can also execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes the role effect, and the emphasis effect includes a first emphasis effect (e.g., the light emission of the movable role object 115) and a second emphasis effect (e.g., the display of a role object emphasis image, the display of a jackpot emphasis image). The performance control unit 300 can also vary the execution time of the first emphasis effect and the execution time of the second emphasis effect in the first stage and the third stage (see Figures 165 (32), 217 (3), and 141). Therefore, the player can be made to pay attention to the movable role object 115 in a manner that corresponds to the stage.
Furthermore, the effect control unit 300 can make the execution time of the first emphasis effect and the execution time of the second emphasis effect in the third stage different, which makes it easier for the player to recognize both the first emphasis effect and the second emphasis effect in the third stage compared to when the execution time of the first emphasis effect and the execution time of the second emphasis effect are the same.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a special device effect is being executed in a jackpot effect (see Figure 217 (11)), the effect control unit 300 restricts visibility of the decorative pattern 41, but displays the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43 in a manner that allows at least a portion of them to be visible to the player.
Therefore, the player can be made to pay more attention to the big win effect than to the decorative pattern 41. On the other hand, even during the execution of the big win effect, if the effect key 162 is operated by the player, at least a part of the volume image 42 and the light amount image 43 can be made visible to the player, thereby preventing the player from feeling uneasy that the operation of the effect key 162 by the player is not being reflected.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can change the display mode (operation display mode) of the jackpot highlight image in the first stage and the third stage (see Figure 165 (32) and Figure 217 (11)).
Therefore, the player can be made to feel the variety of ways in which he or she is made to recognize that a big win game is being executed, depending on the stage in which the game state is different.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can make the highlighting performance aspect (light-emitting aspect of the performance button 161) of the performance button 161 when a vibration performance is being executed the same in the first stage and the second stage (see Figure 165 (32), Figure 202 (31)), and can make the highlighting performance aspect of the performance button 161 when a vibration performance is being executed different in the first stage and the third stage (see Figure 217 (11)).
Therefore, in stages where the game state is the same, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that a jackpot game is being executed. Also, it is possible to make the player feel the variety of ways of making the player recognize that a jackpot game is being executed according to stages where the game state is different.

(Variation example 30)
FIG. 218 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 30) will be described with reference to Fig. 218. Variable effect example 30 is an example of a jackpot variable effect based on winning into the second start slot 122 in the special time-saving gaming state.
Variation presentation example 30 is an example of a variation presentation that is executed after the variation presentation that is executed when "AF2" is selected as the "pre-determination presentation pattern" in Figure 40. Also, the variation presentation that is executed when "AF2" is selected as the "pre-determination presentation pattern" in Figure 40 is the variation presentation shown in Figures 213 (1) to (5). Also, variation presentation example 30 is a variation presentation that is executed when "EF2" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Figure 42. Also, in the following explanation, differences from each of the variation presentation examples described above will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as each of the variation presentation examples may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 216(1) to (6) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 218(1), the fifth type of in-execution suggestion effect is performed, and an SPSP suggestion image 561 and a fourth in-execution highlight image 565 are displayed. In the fifth type of in-execution suggestion effect, the effects described using Figures 128(1) to (4) are performed. In addition, a fifth in-execution highlight sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 218 (2), a fourth precursor emphasis image 527 is displayed. The fourth precursor emphasis image 527 is displayed in the manner described with reference to Figs. 83 (1) and (2). In addition, a fourth precursor emphasis sound is output.

Next, the 19th button effect is performed, and the button image 509 is displayed as shown in Fig. 218 (3). In the 19th button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in motion in the manner described with reference to Figs. 86 (3) to (8). In addition, a 7th button emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the button image 509 is displayed, is output. The 7th button emphasis sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the button image 509 (button effect). The output time of the 7th button emphasis sound is 1 second.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the 19th button effect, a 16th post-operation emphasis image 529 is displayed as shown in Fig. 218 (4). In addition, a 16th post-operation emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 218 (5), the fourth jackpot presentation is performed. In the fourth jackpot presentation, a fourth jackpot notification sound is output, a vibration presentation is executed, the three movable parts 115 move to an area overlapping with the image display unit 114, the three movable parts 115, presentation button 161, and lamp L emit rainbow colors, and the fourth jackpot highlight image 569 is displayed. In the fourth jackpot presentation, the presentation described using Figures 137 (2) to (8) and Figures 138 (9) to (16) is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 218(6), the doublet decorative pattern 41 "444" is displayed so as to move from the top to the center of the image display section 114.
218(7), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in an enlarged manner. More specifically, the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in an enlarged manner so that the display area of the center decorative pattern 41 is larger than the display area of the left decorative pattern 41 and the display area of the right decorative pattern 41.

Next, as shown in Fig. 218 (8), the doublet decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a shrinking manner. Also, a fifth doublet emphasis image 620 is displayed around each of the doublet decorative patterns 41. Also, a fifth doublet emphasis sound is output.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figure 217 (15) and Figure 167 (42) to (46) are performed.

(Variation example 31)
219 and 220 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 31) will be described with reference to Figures 219 and 220. Variable effect example 31 is a variable effect based on winning the second start slot 122 in the special time-saving game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and a reach effect is executed.
Also, the variation performance example 31 is a variation performance that is executed when "EH6" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in Fig. 42. Also, the variation performance example 31 is an example of a variation performance that is executed after the variation performance shown in the variation performance example 27.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 214 (1) to (4) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 219 (1), the first transition image 618 is displayed, and the variable image 51, the pending image 52, the stage notification image 501, and the remaining number of times for time reduction image 504 are hidden.
Next, as shown in FIG. 219 (2), a start suggestion effect of the fifth mode is performed, and an SPSP start image 556 and a fourth start emphasis image 560 are displayed. In the start suggestion effect of the fifth mode, the effect described using FIGS. 123 (1) to (4) is performed. In addition, a fifth start emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the fourth start emphasis image 560 is displayed, is output. The fifth start emphasis sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the start suggestion effect. The output time of the fifth start emphasis sound is 0.9 seconds.

Next, as shown in Figure 219 (3), the fifth premonition emphasis image 530 is displayed. The fifth premonition emphasis image 530 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the first right-hit image 503, the number of reserved balls display 55, and the small pattern 56. The fifth premonition emphasis image 530 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and in a layer behind the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the first right-hit image 503, the number of reserved balls display 55, and the small pattern 56. The fifth premonition emphasis image 530 is displayed in an operational manner as shown in Figures 89 (1) and (2). A fifth premonition emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the fifth premonition emphasis image 530 is displayed, is output. The fifth premonition emphasis sound can also be considered as a sound effect emphasizing the display of the button image 509. The output time of the fifth premonition emphasis sound is 0.8 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 219 (4), the 20th button effect is performed, and the button image 509 and the second operation highlight image 531 are displayed. The second operation highlight image 531 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the number of reserved items displayed 55, and the small pattern 56. The second operation highlight image 531 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and behind the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the number of reserved items displayed 55, and the small pattern 56. Note that the 20th button effect is performed as described using FIGS. 89 (3) to (8), 90 (9) to (16), and 91 (17) to (24). The 8th button emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating the display of the button image 509, is output. The 8th button emphasis sound can also be considered as an effect sound that emphasizes the button image 509 (button effect). The output time of the 8th button emphasis sound is 0.7 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 219 (5), a 17th post-operation emphasis image 532 is displayed. The 17th post-operation emphasis image 532 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative symbol 41, the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the first right-hit image 503, the reserved number display 55, and the small symbol 56. The 17th post-operation emphasis image 532 is also drawn on the fifth layer LA5 (see FIG. 147 (2)) in the image display unit 114. That is, the 17th post-operation emphasis image 532 is displayed on a layer behind the decorative symbol 41, the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the first right-hit image 503, the reserved number display 55, and the small symbol 56. A 17th post-operation emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the 17th post-operation emphasis image 532 is displayed, is output. The 17th post-operation emphasis sound can also be considered as an emphasis sound corresponding to the operation of the effect button 161. The output time of the 17th post-operation emphasis sound is 0.15 seconds.
Next, as shown in FIG. 219(6), a 12th button post image 621 is displayed. In addition, a 7th button post emphasis sound is output, which is a sound effect indicating that the 12th button post image 621 is displayed. The output time of the 7th button post emphasis sound is 1.2 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 219(7), a first transitional image 618 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 219(8), the three decorative symbols 41, "454," temporarily stop. Also, the stage notification image 501 and the remaining time-reduction number image 504 are redisplayed. On the other hand, the variable image 51 is not redisplayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 220(9), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "454", are fixed and stopped.

(Variation example 32)
FIG. 221 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable presentation (variable presentation example 32) will be described with reference to FIG. 221. Variable presentation example 32 is an example of a jackpot variable presentation based on winning into the second starting slot 122 in the special time-saving game state. Variable presentation example 30 is an example of a variable presentation executed after the variable presentation executed when "AF3" is selected as the "pre-determination presentation pattern" in FIG. 40. Furthermore, the variable presentation executed when "AF3" is selected as the "pre-determination presentation pattern" in FIG. 40 is the variable presentation shown in FIGS. 213(1) to (5). Furthermore, variable presentation example 32 is a variable presentation executed when "EF3" is selected as the "variable presentation pattern" in FIG. 42. Furthermore, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variable presentation examples will be mainly described, and explanations of similarities with the variable presentation examples may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 214 (1) to (4) and Figure 219 (1) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 221 (1), the start suggestion effect of the fifth mode is performed, and the SPSP start image 556 and the fourth start emphasis image 560 are displayed. In the start suggestion effect of the fifth mode, the effects described using Figures 123 (1) to (4) are performed. In addition, the fifth start emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 221 (2), a fifth precursor emphasis image 530 is displayed. The fifth precursor emphasis image 530 is displayed in an operational manner as shown in Fig. 93 (1) and (2). In addition, a fifth precursor emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 221 (3), the 21st button effect is performed, and the button image 509 and the second operation highlight image 531 are displayed. Note that the 21st button effect is performed as described with reference to Figs. 93 (3) to (8), 94 (9) to (16), and 95 (17) to (24). Also, the 8th button emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 221 (4), an 18th post-operation emphasis image 533 is displayed. The 18th post-operation emphasis image 533 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, volume image 42, light intensity image 43, first right-hit image 503, pending number display 55, and small pattern 56. The 18th post-operation emphasis image 533 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and in a layer behind the volume image 42, light intensity image 43, first right-hit image 503, pending number display 55, and small pattern 56. An 18th post-operation emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the 18th post-operation emphasis image 533 is displayed, is output. The 18th post-operation emphasis sound can also be considered an emphasis sound in response to the operation of the effect button 161. The output time of the 18th post-operation emphasis sound is 0.15 seconds.

Next, as shown in Figure 221 (5), a fourth jackpot presentation is performed. In the fourth jackpot presentation, a fourth jackpot notification sound is output, a vibration presentation is executed, the three movable role objects 115 move to an area overlapping with the image display unit 114, the three movable role objects 115, the presentation button 161, and the lamp L emit light in rainbow colors, and a fourth jackpot highlight image 569 is displayed. In the fourth jackpot presentation, the presentation described using Figures 137 (2) to (8) and Figures 138 (9) to (16) is performed.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 217 (12) to (15) and Figures 167 (42) to (46) are performed.

(Variation example 33)
FIG. 222 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
222, a specific description will be given of a variable effect (variable effect example 33) performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114, etc. The variable effect example 33 is an example of a random miss variable effect based on the fact that the number of reserved prizes for the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state is "2".
In the variation performance example 33, two variation performances are performed. The first of the two variation performances is a variation performance that is executed when "EH1" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in Fig. 42. The second of the two variation performances is a variation performance that is executed when "EH9" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in Fig. 42.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

222(1), as the previous special symbol is stopped and displayed by the performance control unit 300, the less decorative decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114. Also, the remaining time-saving number image 504 displays the text "1 left." Also, two reserved images 52 are displayed, and the reserved number display 55 of the second start port 122 displays "2."
Next, as shown in FIG. 222(2), the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 begin to change as the special symbol changes. The remaining time-saving number image 504 is updated to "0 remaining." The reserved number display 55 of the second start port 122 is updated to "1."

Next, as shown in FIG. 222(3), the three decorative symbols 41, "412," are temporarily stopped, and the tenth stop action is performed. In addition, a thirteenth stop emphasis image 616 is displayed below each of the three decorative symbols 41. In addition, a sixth stop emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 222 (4), with the stop display of the special symbol, the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "412", are fixed and stopped. Also, with the end of the change effect, the change image 51 is no longer displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 222 (5), the second transition image 622 and result image 623 are displayed. The second transition image 622 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, reserved image 52, volume image 42, light intensity image 43, first right-hit image 503, reserved number display 55, and small pattern 56. Furthermore, the second transition image 622 is displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41, reserved image 52, and first right-hit image 503, and on a layer behind the volume image 42, light intensity image 43, reserved number display 55, and small pattern 56.

Next, as shown in FIG. 222(6), the display of the small symbol 56 begins to change as the next special symbol changes. Meanwhile, the decorative symbol 41 is not displayed. Also, the reserved number display 55 of the second start port 122 is updated to "0."
Next, as shown in FIG. 222 (7), along with the stop display of the special symbol, the small symbol 56 "623" is fixed and stopped.

Next, the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is controlled from the special time-saving game state to the normal game state, and as shown in FIG. 222 (8), a decorative symbol 41, a stage image 61, a stage notification image 501, and a variable number image 502 are displayed. In the illustrated example, a stage image 61 corresponding to the first stage is displayed, the stage notification image 501 displays the text "Space," and the variable number image 502 displays the text "101 Games." Furthermore, a second left-hit notification is executed, a second left-hit image 48 is displayed, and a second left-hit sound is output. The second left-hit image 48 performs the effects described with reference to FIGS. 54 (7), (8), and 55 (9) to (12). The decorative symbol 41 is difficult or impossible to see because it is covered by the second left-hit image 48.
Furthermore, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, the variation start is executed with the second left hit notification being executed. In this case, emphasis effects such as the movement of the decorative pattern 41 when it stops and the display of a stop emphasis image are executed, but since the second left hit image 48 is displayed on a layer in front of the emphasis effects, the emphasis effects become difficult or impossible to see.

As described above, in this embodiment, when a right-hit notification is made, the sound associated with the right-hit notification may not be output (see FIG. 167 (42)). On the other hand, when a left-hit notification is made, the sound associated with the left-hit notification is always output (see FIG. 54 (2), FIG. 168 (1), FIG. 222 (8)).
Therefore, the player can be made aware that a left-hit notification is more of a warning than a right-hit notification.

In this embodiment, the first right-hit image 503 is not displayed when the second transition image 622 and the result image 623 are displayed, but this is not limited to this.
When the second transition image 622 and the result image 623 are displayed, the first right-hit image 503 continues to be displayed, and the first right-hit image 503 may become invisible as the stage image 61 corresponding to the first stage is displayed.

In addition, in the variable presentation example 33, when the special time-saving game state is controlled to the normal game state, the second left-hit notification is executed, but this is not limited to this.
When the special time-saving game state is controlled to the normal game state, the first left-hand hit notification may be executed.

(Variation example 34)
Next, referring to Fig. 223, a specific description will be given of the variable effect (variable effect example 34) performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 and the like. Variable effect example 34 is a variable effect example based on a game ball entering the second start port 122 in a special time-saving gaming state. Also, variable effect example 34 is an example of a random miss variable effect based on the number of reserved balls for entry into the second start port 122 being "1". Also, variable effect example 34 is a variable effect that is executed when "EH10" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Fig. 42.
In addition, each of the change presentations from change presentation example 34 to change presentation example 38 described below is a change presentation example when the change begins in the fourth stage.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

As shown in Figure 223 (1), when the effect control unit 300 freezes and displays the previous special symbol, a less decorative symbol 41 is frozen in place on the image display unit 114. At this time, the image display unit 114 displays a volume image 42, a light intensity image 43, a hold number display 55, a small symbol 56, a stage image 61, a stage notification image 501, a remaining time-saving number image 504, and a first right-hit image 503. Additionally, the stage image 61 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the fourth stage, with the stage notification image 501 displaying the text "Grassland" and the remaining time-saving number image 504 displaying the text "100 more." The fourth stage is a presentation mode in the special time-saving game state. The decorative symbol 41 is displayed at a smaller size than in the third stage (see Figure 212 (1)). Also, at this time, the reserved number display 55 of the first starting port 121 shows "0", which is the reserved number for winning at the first starting port 121, and the reserved number display 55 of the second starting port 122 shows "0", which is the reserved number for winning at the second starting port 122. Also, in the first right-hit image 503, the effects described using Figures 57 (1) to (3) are performed.

Next, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 122, as shown in FIG. 223(2), the special symbol starts to change and the change effect starts. At this time, neither the change image 51 nor the reserved image 52 is displayed. At this time, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 start to change. In addition, the remaining number of times for the time-saving mode image 504 is updated to "99 more."
Next, as shown in FIG. 223(3), the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56, "412," are fixed and stopped. In addition, both the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 are fixed and stopped without being temporarily stopped. At this time, a game ball enters the second start hole 122, and the reserved number display 55 of the second start hole 122 is updated to "1."

Next, as shown in FIG. 223(4), as the display of the next special symbol begins to change, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 begin to change. Also, the reserved number display 55 of the second start port 122 is updated to "0." Also, the remaining number of times for time reduction 504 is updated to "98 remaining."
Next, as shown in FIG. 223(5), along with the stop display of the special symbol, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "731" are fixed and stopped.

As described above, in this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 can limit the highlighting of the decorative pattern 41 in certain variable presentations (see Figures 222 (6) and (7), and Figures 223 (2) and (3)). In this embodiment, in the special time-saving gaming state, a variable presentation with a shorter execution time is more likely to be executed when a variable presentation in which the highlighting of the decorative pattern 41 is limited is executed than when a variable presentation in which the highlighting of the decorative pattern 41 is executed. In other words, the average execution time of a variable presentation in which the highlighting of the decorative pattern 41 is limited is shorter than the average execution time of a variable presentation in which the highlighting of the decorative pattern 41 is executed.
Therefore, when a variable performance with a short execution time is executed, the performance is simplified by limiting the highlighting of the decorative pattern 41, etc., so that the player can enjoy the variable performance with a sense of speed without being confused by the performance.

In the variation performance example 34, the variation image 51 and the reserved image 52 are not displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the variation performance example 34, the variation image 51 and the reserved image 52 may be displayed.
Furthermore, in the fourth stage (special time-saving gaming state), if a specific condition is met, the variable effect shown in the variable effect example 34 may be executed. Examples of the specific condition include the remaining number of special symbol variations (variable effects) that can be executed in the special time-saving gaming state being a predetermined number (e.g., 91 times) or more, or the jackpot game being played a predetermined number of times (e.g., 3 times) or more in the special time-saving gaming state.

(Variation example 35)
Next, referring to Fig. 224, a specific description will be given of a variable effect (variable effect example 35) performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114, etc. The variable effect example 35 is an example of a random miss variable effect based on the fact that the reserved number for winning into the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state is "1".
In addition, the variation performance example 35 is a variation performance that is executed when "EH11" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in Fig. 42. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from each of the variation performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 224 (1), the effect control unit 300 stops the previous special symbol, and the image display unit 114 stops the less decorative symbol 41. At this time, the image display unit 114 displays the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, the small symbol 56, the stage image 61, the stage notification image 501, the remaining number of times in the time-saving mode image 504, and the first right-hit image 503. The remaining number of times in the time-saving mode image 504 displays the text "90 more." At this time, the reserved number display 55 of the first start gate 121 indicates "0," which is the reserved number for winning the first start gate 121, and the reserved number display 55 of the second start gate 122 indicates "0," which is the reserved number for winning the second start gate 122. The first right-hit image 503 performs the effects described using FIGS. 57 (1) to (3).
The decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the same manner as in the third stage (see FIG. 212(1)), but are not limited to this. The decorative symbols 41 may be displayed in a different size or position from those in the third stage.

Next, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 122, as shown in FIG. 224(2), the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 start to change in accordance with the start of the change display of the special symbol. Also, the change image 51 is displayed. Also, the remaining number of times of the time-saving play image 504 is updated to "89 remaining."
Next, as shown in FIG. 224 (3), three decorative symbols 41, "412," stop. More specifically, the decorative symbols 41 are stationary. Additionally, the decorative symbols 41 are stationary without any temporary stop. Furthermore, a fourteenth stop emphasis image 624 is displayed around each of the three decorative symbols 41. The fourteenth stop emphasis image 624 is displayed in an area overlapping the display area of the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43, in a layer behind the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43. The display time of the fourteenth stop emphasis image 624 is 0.05 seconds. However, the display time of the fourteenth stop emphasis image 624 may be any time. Furthermore, a seventh stop emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating the display of the stop emphasis image, is output. The seventh stop emphasis sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the decorative symbols 41 in the fourth stage. The output time of the seventh stop emphasis sound is 0.05 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 224 (4), as the special symbol stops, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56, "412," stop. Also, the variable image 51 is no longer displayed. At this time, a game ball enters the second start slot 122, and the reserved number display 55 of the second start slot 122 is updated to "1." Also, the reserved image 52 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 224 (5), as the next special symbol starts to change, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 start to change. Also, the changing image 51 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 224(6), three decorative symbols 41, "623," stop. Also, a fourteenth stop emphasis image 624 is displayed around each of the three decorative symbols 41. Also, a seventh stop emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 224 (7), with the special symbol being stopped, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56, "623", are fixed and stopped. In addition, the variable image 51 is not displayed.

(Variation example 36)
225 and 226 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 36) will be described with reference to Figures 225 and 226. Variable effect example 36 is a variable effect based on winning the second start slot 122 in the special time-saving game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and a reach effect is executed.
Also, the variation performance example 36 is a variation performance that is executed when "EH7" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in Fig. 42. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation performance examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in Fig. 225(1), the effect control unit 300 stops the previous special symbol, and the less decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114. Also, the remaining time-saving number image 504 displays the text "81 left." Also, one reserved image 52 is displayed, and the reserved number display 55 of the second start port 122 shows "1."
Next, as shown in FIG. 225(2), as the next special symbol starts to change, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 start to change. Also, the changing image 51 is displayed, and the reserved number display 55 of the second start port 122 is updated to "0".

Next, as shown in Figure 225 (3), a second reach prompting effect is performed, and a second reach prompting emphasis image 617 is displayed around the left and right decorative symbols 41. In addition, a second reach prompting emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 225 (4), the eighth reach effect is performed, an eighth reach emphasis image 549 is displayed, and an eighth reach action is performed. In the eighth reach effect, the effects described using Fig. 111 (2) to (5) are performed. In addition, a fourth reach emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 225 (5), the first transition image 618 is displayed, and the variable image 51, the stage notification image 501, and the remaining number of time-saving times image 504 are hidden.
Next, as shown in Fig. 225 (6), the start suggestion effect of the fourth mode is performed, and an SPSP start image 556 and a third start emphasis image 559 are displayed. In the start suggestion effect of the fourth mode, the effects described using Fig. 122 (1) to (6) are performed. In addition, a fourth start emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 225 (7), the fourth mode of in-play suggestion effect is performed, and the SPSP suggestion image 561 and the third in-play emphasis image 564 are displayed. In the fourth mode of in-play suggestion effect, the effect described using Fig. 127 (1) to (6) is performed. In addition, the fourth in-play emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 225 (8), a fourth precursor emphasis image 527 is displayed. The fourth precursor emphasis image 527 is displayed in the manner described with reference to Figs. 83 (1) and (2). In addition, a fourth precursor emphasis sound is output.
Next, the 17th button effect is performed, and the button image 509 is displayed as shown in Fig. 226 (9). In the 17th button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in motion in the manner described with reference to Figs. 83 (3) to (8). In addition, the 6th button emphasis sound is output.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the 17th button effect, a 15th post-operation emphasis image 528 is displayed as shown in Fig. 226 (10). In addition, a 15th post-operation emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 226 (11), an image 619 after pressing the eleventh button is displayed. Also, an emphasis sound after pressing the sixth button is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 226(12), the first transitional image 618 is displayed again.
Next, as shown in FIG. 226 (13), the three decorative symbols 41, "454," temporarily stop. Also, the stage notification image 501 and the remaining time-reduction number image 504 are redisplayed. On the other hand, the variable image 51 is not redisplayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 226 (14), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "454", are fixed and stopped.

(Variation example 37)
227 and 228 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 37) will be described with reference to Figures 227 and 228. Variable effect example 37 is an example of a jackpot variable effect based on winning into the second starting slot 122 in the special time-saving game state.
Note that the variation performance example 37 is a variation performance that is executed when "EF4" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in Fig. 42. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation performance examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 225(1) to (5) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 227(1), the start suggestion effect of the fourth mode is performed, and an SPSP start image 556 and a third start emphasis image 559 are displayed. In the start suggestion effect of the fourth mode, the effects explained using Figures 122(1) to (6) are performed. In addition, a fourth start emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 227 (2), the fifth mode of in-execution suggestion effect is performed, and the SPSP suggestion image 561 and the fourth in-execution highlight image 565 are displayed. In the fifth mode of in-execution suggestion effect, the effects described using Fig. 128 (1) to (4) are performed. In addition, the fifth in-execution highlight sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 227(3), a fourth precursor emphasis image 527 is displayed. The fourth precursor emphasis image 527 is displayed in the manner described with reference to Figs. 83(1) and (2). In addition, a fourth precursor emphasis sound is output.
Next, the 18th button effect is performed, and the button image 509 is displayed as shown in Fig. 227 (4). In the 18th button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in motion in the manner described with reference to Figs. 83 (3) to (8). In addition, the 6th button emphasis sound is output.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the 18th button effect, a 16th post-operation emphasis image 529 is displayed as shown in Fig. 227 (5). In addition, a 16th post-operation emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 227 (6), a fourth jackpot presentation is performed. In the fourth jackpot presentation, a fourth jackpot notification sound is output, a vibration presentation is executed, the three movable role objects 115 move to an area overlapping with the image display unit 114, the three movable role objects 115, the presentation button 161, and the lamp L emit light in rainbow colors, and a fourth jackpot highlight image 569 is displayed. In the fourth jackpot presentation, the presentation described using Figures 137 (2) to (8) and Figures 138 (9) to (16) is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 227(7), the doublet decorative pattern 41 "444" is displayed so as to move from the top to the center of the image display section 114.
227(8), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in an enlarged manner. More specifically, the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in an enlarged manner so that the display area of the center decorative pattern 41 is larger than the display area of the left decorative pattern 41 and the display area of the right decorative pattern 41.

Next, as shown in Fig. 228 (9), the doublet decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a shrinking manner. Also, a fifth doublet emphasis image 620 is displayed around each of the doublet decorative patterns 41. Also, a fifth doublet emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 228 (10), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "444", are fixed and stopped.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figure 167 (42) to (46) are performed.

(Variation example 38)
229 to 231 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 38) will be described with reference to Figures 229 to 231. Variable effect example 38 is a variable effect based on winning the second start slot 122 in the special time-saving game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.
Also, the variation effect example 38 is a variation effect that is executed when "EF5" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in Fig. 42. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

229(1), as the previous special symbol is stopped and displayed by the performance control unit 300, the less decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114. Furthermore, the remaining time-saving number image 504 displays the text "50 more." Furthermore, one reserved image 52 is displayed in blue, and the reserved number display 55 of the second start port 122 displays "1."
Next, as shown in FIG. 229(2), as the next special symbol starts to change, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 start to change. Also, a blue changing image 51 is displayed, and the reserved number display 55 of the second start port 122 is updated to "0". Also, the remaining number of times of time reduction image 504 is updated to "49 more".

Next, as shown in FIG. 229 (3), a change effect is executed, and the display color of the changing image 51 changes from blue to rainbow colors. In addition, a second rainbow emphasis sound, which is a sound effect when the rainbow-colored changing image 51 is displayed, is output. The second rainbow emphasis sound can also be considered as an effect sound that emphasizes the changing image 51 (reserved image 52) on which the change effect has been executed in the special time-saving gaming state. The output time of the second rainbow emphasis sound is 2.75 seconds.
Next, as shown in FIG. 229 (4), a third reach prompting effect is executed. In the third reach prompting effect, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in an up-and-down swaying motion, and a third reach prompting emphasis image 625 is displayed surrounding each of the left and right decorative symbols 41. The third reach prompting emphasis image 625 is displayed in an area overlapping the display area of the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43, in a layer behind the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43. In addition, a third reach prompting emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating the display of the third reach prompting emphasis image 625, is output. The third reach prompting emphasis sound can also be considered as an effect sound that emphasizes the "7" decorative symbols 41 on the left and right in the special time-saving game state. The output time of the third reach prompting emphasis sound is 4.5 seconds.

Next, as shown in Figure 229 (5), the 9th reach effect is executed, the 9th reach highlight image 550 is displayed, and the 9th reach action is performed. The 9th reach highlight image 550 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43, and is displayed in a layer behind the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43. Note that the 9th reach effect is performed as described using Figures 112 (1) to (5). In addition, the 5th reach highlight sound, which is a sound effect for the 9th reach effect, is output. The 5th reach highlight sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the reach effect. The output time of the 5th reach highlight sound is 1.5 seconds.

Next, as shown in Figure 229 (6), the sixth premonition emphasis image 534 is displayed. The sixth premonition emphasis image 534 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, the first right-hit image 503, the variable image 51, the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the number of reserved balls display 55, and the small pattern 56. The sixth premonition emphasis image 534 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and in a layer behind the first right-hit image 503, the variable image 51, the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the number of reserved balls display 55, and the small pattern 56. The sixth premonition emphasis image 534 is displayed in the manner described using Figures 98 (1) to (3). A sixth premonition emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the sixth premonition emphasis image 534 is displayed, is output. The sixth premonition emphasis sound can also be considered as a sound effect emphasizing the display of the button image 509. The output time of the sixth premonition emphasis sound is 1 second.

Next, as shown in Fig. 229 (7), a 22nd button effect is performed, and the button image 509 is displayed. In the 22nd button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in motion in the manner described with reference to Figs. 98 (4) to (8) and Figs. 99 (9) to (12). In addition, a 9th button emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the button image 509 is displayed, is output. The 9th button emphasis sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the button image 509 (button effect). The output time of the 9th button emphasis sound is 1.1 seconds.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the 22nd button effect, a 19th post-operation emphasis image 535 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 229 (8). The 19th post-operation emphasis image 535 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, the first right-hit image 503, the variable image 51, the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, and the small pattern 56. The 19th post-operation emphasis image 535 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and behind the first right-hit image 503, the variable image 51, the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, and the small pattern 56. A 19th post-operation emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating the display of the 19th post-operation emphasis image 535, is output. The 19th post-operation emphasis sound can also be considered as an emphasis sound corresponding to the operation of the effect button 161. The output time of the 19th post-operation emphasis sound is 0.3 seconds.

Next, as shown in Figure 230 (9), the fifth jackpot presentation is executed. During the fifth jackpot presentation, a fifth jackpot notification sound is output, a vibration presentation is executed, the three movable role objects 115 move to overlap the image display unit 114, and the three movable role objects 115, presentation button 161, and lamp L emit rainbow-colored light. Additionally, a fifth jackpot highlight image 570 is displayed. The fifth jackpot highlight image 570 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative symbol 41, first right-hit image 503, volume image 42, light intensity image 43, reserved number display 55, and small symbol 56. Additionally, the fifth jackpot highlight image 570 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative symbol 41 and behind the first right-hit image 503, volume image 42, light intensity image 43, reserved number display 55, and small symbol 56. Furthermore, when the fifth jackpot emphasis image 570 is displayed, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed but is difficult or impossible to see because it is covered by the fifth jackpot emphasis image 570.

Next, as shown in Figure 230 (10), the fifth jackpot effect ends.
Next, as shown in FIG. 230 (11), each of the doublet decorative symbols 41 is displayed in an enlarged manner. More specifically, the doublet decorative symbols 41 are displayed in an enlarged manner such that the display area of the center decorative symbol 41 is larger than the display area of the left decorative symbol 41 and the display area of the right decorative symbol 41. Additionally, a sixth doublet highlight image 626 is displayed on the left and right sides of each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. The sixth doublet highlight image 626 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative symbol 41, the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, and the small symbol 56. Additionally, the sixth doublet highlight image 626 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative symbol 41 and behind the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, and the small symbol 56. Additionally, a sixth doublet highlight sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the sixth doublet highlight image 626 is displayed, is output. The sixth doublet emphasis sound can also be regarded as an effect sound that emphasizes the doublet decorative pattern 41 "777" in the special time-saving game state.

Next, as shown in Fig. 230(12), the decorative pattern 41 of the doublet is displayed in the same manner as that shown in Fig. 230(10). The sixth doublet emphasis image 626 is displayed in a reduced size. A sixth doublet emphasis sound is also output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 230(13), the decorative pattern 41 of the doublet is displayed in the same manner as that shown in Fig. 230(11). The sixth doublet emphasis image 626 is displayed in an enlarged manner. A sixth doublet emphasis sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 230(14), the decorative pattern 41 of the doublet is displayed in the same manner as that shown in Fig. 230(10). The sixth doublet emphasis image 626 is displayed in a reduced size. A sixth doublet emphasis sound is also output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 230 (15), the decorative pattern 41 of the doublet is displayed in the same manner as that shown in Fig. 230 (11). The sixth doublet emphasis image 626 is displayed in an enlarged manner. A sixth doublet emphasis sound is also output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 230 (16), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the same display mode as that shown in FIG. 230 (10). The display time of the doublet decorative pattern 41 is 3.75 seconds. However, the display time of the doublet decorative pattern 41 may be any time. In addition, the sixth doublet emphasized image 626 is displayed in a shrinking manner. The display time of the sixth doublet emphasized image 626 is 2.75 seconds. However, the display time of the sixth doublet emphasized image 626 may be any time. In addition, a sixth doublet emphasized sound is output. The output time of the sixth doublet emphasized sound is 2.5 seconds.
Then, as shown in Figure 231 (17), as the special pattern stops, the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 "777" are fixed and stopped.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figure 167 (42) to (46) are performed, except that the decorative pattern 41 of the double numbers is "777".

As described above, in this embodiment, in each stage (first stage to fourth stage), the number of types of highlighting effects for the left decorative pattern 41 (right decorative pattern 41) is greater than the number of types of highlighting effects for the middle decorative pattern 41. Therefore, even in the early stage of the variable effect, before the middle decorative pattern 41 is displayed, it is possible to realize an effect that draws the player's attention to the decorative pattern 41.
In each stage (first to fourth stages), the number of types of highlighting effects for the center decorative pattern 41 may be greater than the number of types of highlighting effects for the left decorative pattern 41 (right decorative pattern 41). In this case, the player can be made to pay more attention to the decorative pattern 41 at the end of the variable effect when the center decorative pattern 41 is displayed.
That is, in each stage (first stage to fourth stage), the number of types of highlighting effects of the middle decorative pattern 41 and the number of types of highlighting effects of the left decorative pattern 41 (right decorative pattern 41) may be different.

In addition, in this embodiment, the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are displayed in the same display manner in each of the presentations (each drawing (Figures 142 to 231) used to explain each of the variable presentation examples) in each of the variable presentation examples (Variable Presentation Example 1 to Variable Presentation Example 38).
In this case, the volume and light intensity notifications are easily recognized by the player regardless of the game situation.

In addition, in this embodiment, the distance (spacing) between the left decorative pattern 41 and the right decorative pattern 41 is shorter when the decorative pattern 41 of the reach eye is "7" (see Figure 229 (5)) than when the decorative pattern 41 of the reach eye is "6" (see Figure 225 (4)).
In this case, when the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye is "7", the player can be made to more clearly recognize that the reach has been achieved.

(Example of performance when the back volume adjustment volume 300S is operated)
Next, the mode of presentation when the back volume control volume 300S is operated will be described.
232 and 233 are diagrams showing one mode of presentation when the back volume control volume 300S is operated.
First, in the customer waiting state, as shown in Fig. 232(1), a customer waiting volume image 44, a customer waiting light intensity image 45, a menu promotion image 46, a stage image 61, and a decorative pattern 41 are displayed. At this time, the volume is set to "3" in the performance control unit 300. At this time, the background volume adjustment volume 300S is set to the volume "5."
In this way, in this embodiment, there may be a case where the volume set in the performance control unit 300 differs from the volume set in the background volume adjustment volume 300S. This difference occurs, for example, when the background volume adjustment volume 300S is set to a volume of "5," thereby setting the volume in the performance control unit 300 to "5," and then the performance key 162 is operated to update the volume setting in the performance control unit 300.

232(2), when the background volume control volume 300S is set to volume "6," the volume is set to "6" in the performance control unit 300, and the volume identification unit 442 of the customer waiting volume image 44 is displayed in a manner indicating volume "5." On the other hand, the sound announcing the volume set in the performance control unit 300 is not output from the speaker 156.
Next, as shown in Figure 232 (3), when the lower key of the effect keys 162 is operated, the volume is set to "5" in the effect control unit 300. In this case, the display mode of the customer waiting volume image 44 does not change. Also, the volume notification sound is not output.

Next, as shown in Figure 232 (4), when the lower key of the performance key 162 is operated, the volume is set to "4" in the performance control unit 300, the volume identification unit 442 of the customer waiting volume image 44 is displayed in a manner indicating the volume "4", and a volume 4 alert sound is output.
Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, as shown in FIG. 232 (5), the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 start to change as the special symbol starts to change, and the customer waiting volume image 44, the customer waiting light intensity image 45, and the menu promotion image 46 are hidden. Also, a blue changing image 51 is displayed. This changing effect is the changing effect shown in the changing effect example 9 (see FIGS. 162 to 167).

Next, as shown in FIG. 232(6), the first big win effect is performed.
232(7), when the back volume control volume 300S is set to volume "5" while the first jackpot effect is being executed, the volume is set to "5" in the effect control unit 300. On the other hand, the volume image 42 is not displayed, and no sound is output to notify the volume set in the effect control unit 300.
Next, as shown in Fig. 232 (8), when the upper key of the effect keys 162 is operated, the volume setting in the effect control unit 300 is maintained at "5" and the volume image 42 is displayed. Also, the volume identification unit 422 is displayed in a manner indicating the volume "5." On the other hand, the volume notification sound is not output.

Next, as shown in Figure 233 (9), when the background volume adjustment volume 300S is set to volume "4," the volume is set to "4" in the performance control unit 300, and the volume identification section 422 of the volume image 42 is displayed in a manner indicating "4." Meanwhile, no volume notification sound is output.

Note that, when the background volume adjustment volume 300S is operated while the first jackpot effect is being executed (see FIG. 232 (7)), the volume image 42 may be displayed but the volume alert sound may not be output. Also, when the background volume adjustment volume 300S is operated while the first jackpot effect is being executed, the volume image 42 may not be displayed but the volume alert sound may be output. In other words, when the background volume adjustment volume 300S is operated while the first jackpot effect is being executed, at least one of the display of the volume image 42 and the output of the volume alert sound may not be executed.
Furthermore, when the effect key 162 is operated when a jackpot effect is not being executed in a variable effect, the volume image 42 is displayed and the volume notification sound is output, and when the effect key 162 is operated when a jackpot effect is being executed (see FIG. 232 (8)), the volume image 42 is displayed but the volume notification sound is not output. In other words, it is sufficient to make the notification mode of the specific notification when the effect key 162 is operated different between when a variable effect is not being executed and when a jackpot effect is being executed, and the notification mode of the specific notification may be the same when a variable effect is not being executed and when a jackpot effect is not being executed in a variable effect.

Furthermore, when a variable effect is not being performed, if the background volume adjustment volume 300S is operated, a volume notification sound may be output, while the volume images (volume image 42, customer waiting volume image 44) may not be displayed. In other words, when a variable effect is not being performed, if the background volume adjustment volume 300S is operated, at least one of the output of the volume notification sound and the display of the volume image may not be performed.
Furthermore, even if the back volume control volume 300S is operated when the volume image 42 is not displayed, the volume image 42 may be displayed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 is capable of displaying an identification image that identifies the performance mode. Examples of the identification image include the stage notification image 501. The identification image has a identification portion and an emphasis portion that emphasizes the identification portion. Examples of the identification portion include the identification portion 501a. Examples of the emphasis portion include the emphasis portion 501b. The performance control unit 300 is also capable of executing specific notifications related to performance effects. Examples of specific notifications include displaying the volume image 42, displaying the light intensity image 43, outputting a volume notification sound, and outputting a light intensity notification sound. The performance control unit 300 can make the display mode of the emphasis portion different between the first and second performance modes (see Figures 43 (2) and (4)), and can make the notification mode of the specific notification common.
In this case, not only is the specific part emphasized, but by making the highlight part correspond to the presentation mode, the presence of the highlight part can emphasize which presentation mode is in use, while the specific notification becomes easier for the player to recognize regardless of the presentation mode, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 is capable of displaying a specific image. The specific image has a specific portion and an emphasis portion that emphasizes the specific portion. The specific images include a first specific image and a second specific image that is different from the first specific image. Here, an example of the first specific image is the stage notification image 501. An example of the second specific image is a left-hit image. An example of the specific portion and emphasis portion of the first specific image is the identification portion 501a and the emphasis portion 501b of the stage notification image 501. An example of the specific portion and emphasis portion of the second specific image is the arrow portion 48b and the emphasis portion 48c of the second left-hit image 48. The performance control unit 300 can change the display mode of the emphasis portion of the first specific image between the first and second performance modes (see Figures 43 (2) and (4)), and can make the display mode of the emphasis portion of the second specific image the same.
In this case, the highlighting portion of the first specific image not only highlights the specific portion of the first specific image, but also realizes diversification of the presentation for each presentation mode, while the second specific image becomes easier for the player to recognize regardless of the presentation mode, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute an emphasis performance that emphasizes the decorative pattern 41 that is stopped during the variable performance. Examples of the emphasis performance include the operation of the decorative pattern 41 when it stops and the display of a stop emphasis image. The performance control unit 300 can make the display mode of the emphasis performance different between the first performance mode and the second performance mode (see FIG. 142 (7) and FIG. 181 (7)), and can make the notification mode of the specific notification the same.
In this case, not only can the decorative pattern 41 be emphasized by the highlighting effect, but the effects can be diversified for each effect mode, while specific notifications can be more easily recognized by the player regardless of the effect mode, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can also issue specific notifications regarding operations. Examples of specific notifications include a left-hit notification. The performance control unit 300 can also change the display mode of the highlighting effect between the first and second performance modes (see FIG. 142 (7) and FIG. 181 (7)), and can use the same notification mode for the specific notification.
In this case, not only can the decorative pattern 41 be emphasized by the highlighting effect, but the diversification of the effects for each effect mode can be realized, while the specific notification can be easily recognized by the player regardless of the effect mode, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute an emphasis performance that emphasizes the left decorative pattern 41 and the right decorative pattern 41 after the start of a specific performance in a variable performance. Examples of specific performances include reach performances. Examples of emphasis performances include reach actions, the display of reach line images 539, and reach-eye emphasis images. The performance control unit 300 can make the display mode of the emphasis performance different between the first performance mode and the second performance mode (see Figures 146 (9) and 185 (9)), and can make the notification mode of the specific notification common.
In this case, the highlighting effect not only emphasizes the left decorative pattern 41 and the right decorative pattern 41, but also diversifies the effects for each effect mode, while making specific notifications easier for players to recognize regardless of the effect mode, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute an emphasis performance that emphasizes the middle decorative pattern 41 after the start of a specific performance in a variable performance. Examples of specific performances include reach performances. Examples of emphasis performances include reach actions, the display of reach line images 539, and emphasis images. The performance control unit 300 can make the display mode of the emphasis performance different between the first performance mode and the second performance mode (see Figures 153 (19) and 191 (3)), and can make the notification mode of the specific notification common.
In this case, the emphasis effect not only emphasizes the middle decorative pattern 41 but also diversifies the effects for each effect mode, while the specific notification becomes easier for the player to recognize regardless of the effect mode, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 can execute a specific variable presentation in which a decorative pattern 41 (a missing decorative pattern 41) indicating that a jackpot game will not be played is displayed after the start of a reach presentation, and can execute an emphasis presentation in which the center decorative pattern 41 that is displayed as stopped is emphasized in the specific variable presentation. Examples of the emphasis presentation include the operation of the decorative pattern 41 when it stops and the display of a stop emphasis image. The presentation control unit 300 can make the display mode of the emphasis presentation different between the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode (see FIG. 146 (14) and FIG. 185 (14)), and can make the notification mode of the specific notification the same.
In this case, not only can the middle decorative pattern 41 be emphasized by the highlighting effect, but the diversification of the effects after the start of the reach effect for each effect mode can be realized, while the specific notification can be easily recognized by the player regardless of the effect mode, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute an emphasis performance in which the right decorative pattern 41 is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display area (for example, the display area of the right decorative pattern 41) in the variable performance, and the right decorative pattern 41 includes a first performance pattern and a second performance pattern different from the first performance pattern. Examples of the emphasis performance include the operation of the decorative pattern 41 when it stops and the display of a stop emphasis image. Examples of the first performance pattern include an even-numbered right decorative pattern 41. Examples of the second performance pattern include an odd-numbered right decorative pattern 41. The performance control unit 300 can make the display mode of the emphasis performance different when the first performance pattern is displayed and when the second performance pattern is displayed (see Figure 142 (8) and Figure 144 (3)), and can make the notification mode of the specific notification common.
In this case, not only can the highlighting effect emphasize the right decorative pattern 41, but it is also possible to diversify the effects according to the type of right decorative pattern 41, while the specific notification becomes easier for the player to recognize regardless of the type of right decorative pattern 41 displayed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In the above explanation, it was mentioned that the specified display area is the display area of the right decorative pattern 41, and the performance pattern to be stopped and displayed in the specified display area is the right decorative pattern 41, but this is not limited to this.
The predetermined display area is the display area of the left decorative pattern 41 or the display area of the middle decorative pattern 41, and the performance pattern stopped and displayed in the predetermined display area may be the left decorative pattern 41 or the middle decorative pattern 41. In addition, the first performance pattern and the second performance pattern may be the same decorative pattern 41 among the left decorative pattern 41, the right decorative pattern 41, and the middle decorative pattern 41, but may be two decorative patterns 41 with different characters (for example, the "4" of the middle decorative pattern 41 and the "5" of the middle decorative pattern 41).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute an emphasis performance that emphasizes the left decorative pattern 41, which is displayed stopped in a predetermined display area (for example, the display area of the left decorative pattern 41), after the start of a specific performance, and the left decorative pattern 41 includes a first performance pattern and a second performance pattern different from the first performance pattern. Specific performances include reach performances, etc. Emphasis performances include reach actions, the display of reach line images 539, and emphasis images, etc. Examples of first performance patterns include even-numbered left decorative patterns 41, etc. Examples of second performance patterns include odd-numbered left decorative patterns 41, etc. The performance control unit 300 can make the display mode of the emphasis performance different when the first performance pattern is displayed and when the second performance pattern is displayed (see Figures 146 (14) and 149 (14)), and can make the notification mode of the specific notification common.
In this case, not only can the highlighting effect emphasize the left decorative pattern 41, but it is also possible to diversify the effects after the start of the specific effect according to the type of left decorative pattern 41, while the specific notification becomes easier for the player to recognize regardless of the type of left decorative pattern 41 displayed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In the above explanation, it was mentioned that the specified display area is the display area of the left decorative pattern 41, and the performance pattern to be stopped and displayed in the specified display area is the left decorative pattern 41, but this is not limited to this.
The predetermined display area is the display area of the right decorative pattern 41 or the display area of the middle decorative pattern 41, and the performance pattern stopped and displayed in the predetermined display area may be the right decorative pattern 41 or the middle decorative pattern 41. In addition, the first performance pattern and the second performance pattern may be the same decorative pattern 41 among the left decorative pattern 41, the right decorative pattern 41, and the middle decorative pattern 41, but may be two decorative patterns 41 with different characters (for example, the "4" of the middle decorative pattern 41 and the "5" of the middle decorative pattern 41).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed, and in the variable performance, it is possible to stop and display the first performance symbol (left decorative symbol 41, right decorative symbol 41) and then stop and display the second performance symbol (middle decorative symbol 41). Examples of the emphasis effect include the operation of the decorative symbol 41 when it stops and the display of a stop emphasis image. The performance control unit 300 can make the display mode of the emphasis effect different when the first performance symbol is displayed and when the second performance symbol is displayed (see Figures 142 (7) and 143 (9)), and can make the notification mode of the specific notification common.
In this case, not only can the highlighting effect emphasize the effect pattern, but it is also possible to diversify the effects depending on whether the first effect pattern or the second effect pattern is displayed, while the specific notification becomes easier for the player to recognize regardless of the effect pattern displayed, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 can execute an emphasis presentation that emphasizes the decorative pattern 41 (double-digit decorative pattern 41) that indicates that a jackpot game will be executed, and the presentation patterns include a first presentation pattern and a second presentation pattern that is different from the first presentation pattern. Examples of the emphasis presentation include the display of a double-digit emphasis image and the motion display of the double-digit decorative pattern 41. Examples of the first presentation pattern include even-numbered decorative patterns 41. Examples of the second presentation pattern include odd-numbered decorative patterns 41. The presentation control unit 300 can change the display mode of the emphasis presentation when the first presentation pattern is displayed and when the second presentation pattern is displayed (see Figures 166 (39) and (40) and Figures 175 (11) to (13)), and can make the notification mode of the specific notification common.
In this case, not only can the double-digit decorative pattern 41 be emphasized by the emphasis effect, but the effects can be diversified depending on whether the first effect pattern or the second effect pattern is displayed, and the specific notification can be more easily recognized by the player regardless of the effect pattern displayed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute an emphasis performance that emphasizes the display of the button image 509 before the button image 509 is displayed, and can execute a specific performance in the variable performance. Examples of the emphasis performance include the display of a premonition emphasis image. Examples of the specific performance include a temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41, a reach performance, an SP reach performance, an SPSP reach performance, and a pseudo consecutive performance. The performance control unit 300 can change the display mode of the emphasis performance before and after the start of the specific performance (see Figure 162 (7) and Figure 165 (29)), and can make the notification mode of the specific notification common.
In this case, the highlighting effect not only makes the player anticipate the button image 509 being displayed before it is even displayed, but also diversifies the effects according to the progress of the variable effects. On the other hand, the specific notification becomes more easily recognized by the player regardless of whether it is before or after the start of the specific effect. This increases the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes the display of the button image 509 before the button image 509 is displayed, can execute a specific effect in the variable effect, and can execute a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means. Examples of the emphasis effect include the display of a premonition emphasis image. Examples of the specific effect include a temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41, a reach effect, an SP reach effect, an SPSP reach effect, and a pseudo consecutive effect. Examples of the specific notification include a left-hit notification. The performance control unit 300 can change the display mode of the emphasis effect before and after the start of the specific effect (see Figures 162 (7) and 165 (29)), and can make the notification mode of the specific notification the same (see Figures 168 (3) and 169 (10)).
In this case, the highlighting effect not only makes the player anticipate the button image 509 being displayed before it is even displayed, but also diversifies the effects according to the progress of the variable effects. On the other hand, the specific notification becomes more easily recognized by the player regardless of whether it is before or after the start of the specific effect. This increases the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes the fact that the button image 509 is to be displayed before the button image 509 is actually displayed. An example of the emphasis effect is the display of a premonition emphasis image. The performance control unit 300 can make the display mode of the emphasis effect different between the first performance mode (e.g., the first stage) and the second performance mode (e.g., the third stage) (see FIG. 165 (29) and FIG. 216 (8)), and can make the notification mode of the specific notification common.
In this case, the highlighting effect not only makes the player anticipate the button image 509 being displayed before it is actually displayed, but also diversifies the effects for each effect mode. On the other hand, the specific notification becomes more easily recognized by the player regardless of the effect mode. This increases the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can display a button image 509 that emphasizes the promotion of operation of the effect button 161, can execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the button image 509, and can execute a specific effect in the variable effect. Examples of change effects include whether or not to display the button highlighting unit 509c, changes in the display mode, the display of the button unit 509a, and the display of the highlighted character 509d. Examples of specific effects include a temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41, a reach effect, an SP reach effect, an SPSP reach effect, and a pseudo consecutive effect. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can change the display mode of the change effect before and after the start of the specific effect (see FIG. 162 (8), FIGS. 62 (2) to (8), FIG. 170 (3), and FIGS. 73 (3) to (8)), and it is possible to make the notification mode of the specific notification common.
In this case, not only can the highlighting state of the button image 509 be changed by the change effect, but the effects can be diversified according to the progress of the change effect, while the specific notification can be more easily recognized by the player regardless of whether it is before or after the start of the specific effect, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can display a button image 509 that emphasizes the promotion of operation of the effect button 161, can execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the button image 509, can execute specific effects in the variable effect, and can execute specific notifications regarding the operation of the operating means. Examples of change effects include the presence or absence of display of the button highlighting unit 509c, changes in the display mode, the display of the button unit 509a, and the display of the highlighted characters 509d. Examples of specific effects include temporary stopping of the decorative pattern 41, reach effects, SP reach effects, SPSP reach effects, and pseudo-consecutive effects. The effect control unit 300 can change the display mode of the change effect before and after the start of the specific effect (see FIG. 162 (8), FIGS. 62 (2) to (8), FIG. 170 (3), and FIGS. 73 (3) to (8)), and can use the same notification mode for the specific notification (see FIG. 168 (4) and FIG. 170 (6)).
In this case, not only can the highlighting state of the button image 509 be changed by the change effect, but the effects can be diversified according to the progress of the change effect, while the specific notification can be more easily recognized by the player regardless of whether it is before or after the start of the specific effect, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can display a button image 509 that emphasizes the promotion of operation of the performance button 161, and can execute a change performance that changes the display mode of the button image 509. Examples of change performance include whether or not to display the button highlighting unit 509c, changing the display mode, displaying the operation of the button unit 509a, and displaying the operation of the highlighted character 509d. The performance control unit 300 can make the display mode of the change performance different between the first and second performance modes (see FIG. 165 (30), FIGS. 70 (3) to (8), FIG. 229 (7), FIGS. 98 (4) to (8), and FIGS. 99 (9) to (13)), and can make the notification mode of the specific notification common.
In this case, not only can the highlighting state of the button image 509 be changed by the change presentation, but the presentation can be diversified for each presentation mode, while specific notifications can be more easily recognized by the player regardless of the presentation mode, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can execute an emphasis effect in response to the operation of the effect button 161 when an operation effect (button effect) is being executed, and the operation effect includes a first operation effect and a second operation effect that is different from the first operation effect. Examples of the emphasis effect include displaying an emphasis image after the operation. Examples of the first operation effect include a button effect in which the effect button 161 can be operated only once during the valid operation period, and a button effect in which the display color of the button emphasis section 509c is white (see (3) to (8) in Figures 70). Examples of the second operation effect include a button effect in which the effect button 161 can be operated multiple times during the valid operation period, and a button effect in which the display color of the button emphasis section 509c is red (see (2) to (8) in Figures 76). The performance control unit 300 can make the display mode of the emphasis performance different when the first operation performance is executed and when the second operation performance is executed (see Figure 71 (11) and Figure 77 (11)), and can make the notification mode of the specific notification common.
In this case, the emphasis effect not only emphasizes the result of operating the effect button 161, but also allows for diversification of the effects according to the type of operation effect, while making it easier for the player to recognize specific notifications regardless of the type of operation effect executed, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can execute an emphasis effect in response to the operation of the effect button 161 when an operation effect (button effect) is being executed, and the operation effect includes a first operation effect and a second operation effect that is different from the first operation effect. Examples of the emphasis effect include displaying an emphasis image after the operation. Examples of the first operation effect include a button effect in which the effect button 161 can be operated only once during the valid operation period, and a button effect in which the display color of the button emphasis section 509c is white (see (3) to (8) in Figures 70). Examples of the second operation effect include a button effect in which the effect button 161 can be operated multiple times during the valid operation period, and a button effect in which the display color of the button emphasis section 509c is red (see (3) to (8) in Figures 81). The performance control unit 300 can make the display mode of the emphasis performance different when the first operation performance is executed and when the second operation performance is executed (see Figure 71 (11) and Figure 82 (11)), and can make the notification mode of the specific notification common (see Figure 169 (11) and Figure 208-2 (3)).
In this case, the emphasis effect not only emphasizes the result of operating the effect button 161, but also allows for diversification of the effects according to the type of operation effect, while making it easier for the player to recognize specific notifications regardless of the type of operation effect executed, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a vibration effect is executed, the effect control unit 300 can execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect object, and the vibration effect can be a first vibration effect or a second vibration effect that is different from the first vibration effect. An example of an emphasis effect is an effect in which the effect object is illuminated. Furthermore, the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be vibration effects that have different execution times. Furthermore, when the first vibration effect is executed and when the second vibration effect is executed, the effect mode of the emphasis effect can be made different (see FIG. 141), and the notification mode of the specific notification can be made the same (see FIG. 165 (32), FIG. 173 (10)).
In this case, the emphasis effect not only emphasizes the presentation mode that is the target of the vibration effect, but also realizes diversification of the presentation according to the type of vibration effect, while the specific notification becomes easier for the player to recognize regardless of the type of vibration effect executed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can execute a specific effect (jackpot effect) that suggests that a jackpot game will be played, and can execute a predetermined emphasis effect when a jackpot effect is played. Examples of the predetermined emphasis effect include outputting a jackpot notification sound, displaying a jackpot emphasis image, vibration effects, bonus effect effects, and rainbow-colored illumination of the effect button 161, lamp L, or movable bonus effect 115. The effect control unit 300 can also change the presentation style of the predetermined emphasis effect between the first and second presentation modes (see FIG. 165 (32) and FIG. 207 (7)), and can use the same presentation style for the specific notification.
In this case, not only can the emphasis effect emphasize that a big win game is being played, but the effects can be diversified for each effect mode, and the specific notification can be easily recognized by the player regardless of the effect mode, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 can display a suggestion image indicating the likelihood of a jackpot game being executed. The suggestion image has a specific portion and an emphasis portion that emphasizes the specific portion. The display mode of the suggestion image includes a first mode and a second mode that has a higher expectation level than the first mode. Examples of the suggestion image include the SPSP start image 556 and a start-time emphasis image, the SPSP suggestion image 561 and a play-in emphasis image, etc. Examples of the suggestion image include the SPSP start image 556 and the SPSP suggestion image 561, etc. Examples of the emphasis portion include the action-displaying portion of the SPSP start image 556, the start-time emphasis image, the action-displaying portion of the SPSP suggestion image 561, and a play-in emphasis image, etc. Examples of the emphasis portion include a white display mode and a red display mode. The performance control unit 300 can change the display mode of the highlighting section when the suggestive image is displayed in the first mode and when it is displayed in the second mode (see Figure 160 (29) and Figure 165 (27)), and can make the notification mode of the specific notification common.
In this case, the highlighting section not only emphasizes the specific section, but also diversifies the presentation according to the display mode of the suggestive image, while the specific notification becomes easier for the player to recognize regardless of the display mode of the displayed suggestive image, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute an emphasis performance that emphasizes the role device performance, and can execute a specific performance in the variable performance. Examples of the emphasis performance include the display of an emphasis image. Examples of the specific performance include a temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41, a reach performance, an SP reach performance, an SPSP reach performance, and a pseudo consecutive performance. The performance control unit 300 can change the display mode of the emphasis performance before and after the start of the specific performance (see Figure 157 (3) and Figure 160 (28)), and can make the notification mode of the specific notification common.
In this case, the emphasis effect not only emphasizes the special device effect, but also diversifies the effect according to the progress of the variable effect, while the specific notification becomes easier for the player to recognize regardless of whether it is before or after the start of the specific effect, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 can display a suggestion image that indicates the likelihood of a jackpot game being executed. The suggestion image has a specific portion and an emphasis portion that emphasizes the specific portion. The suggestion image includes a first suggestion image and a second suggestion image that is different from the first suggestion image. Examples of the first suggestion image include the SPSP start image 556 and a start-time emphasis image. Examples of the second suggestion image include the SPSP in-progress suggestion image 561 and an execution-time emphasis image. Examples of the specific portion of the first suggestion image include the SPSP start image 556. Examples of the emphasis portion of the first suggestion image include the action-displaying portion of the SPSP start image 556 and the start-time emphasis image. Examples of the specific portion of the second suggestion image include the SPSP in-progress suggestion image 561. Examples of the emphasis portion of the second suggestion image include the action-displaying portion of the SPSP in-progress suggestion image 561 and an execution-time emphasis image. The performance control unit 300 can change the display mode of the highlighting section when the first suggestion image is displayed and when the second suggestion image is displayed (see Figures 160 (29) and (30)), and can make the notification mode of the specific notification common.
In this case, the highlighting section not only emphasizes the specific section, but also diversifies the presentation according to the type of suggestive image displayed, while the specific notification becomes easier for the player to recognize regardless of the type of suggestive image displayed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can display a button image 509 that emphasizes the promotion of operation of the effect button 161, can execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the button image 509, and can execute a specific effect in the variable effect. Examples of change effects include whether or not to display the button highlighting unit 509c, changes in the display mode, the movement display of the button unit 509a, and the movement display of the highlighted character 509d. Examples of specific effects include a temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41, a reach effect, an SP reach effect, an SPSP reach effect, and a pseudo consecutive effect. The effect control unit 300 can vary the execution time of the change effect before and after the start of the specific effect (see FIGS. 162 (8) and 165 (30); for example, see the display time of the button highlighting unit 509c in the sixth button effect and the display time of the button highlighting unit 509c in the eighth button effect in FIG. 101), and can use the same notification time for the specific notification.
In this case, not only can the highlighting state of the button image 509 be changed by the change effect, but the change effect can also be weighted depending on the progress of the change effect, while the specific notification can be more easily recognized by the player as a fixed notification regardless of the progress of the change effect, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can display a button image 509 that emphasizes the promotion of operation of the performance button 161, and can execute a change performance that changes the display mode of the button image 509. Examples of change performance include whether or not to display the button highlighting unit 509c, changing the display mode, displaying the operation of the button unit 509a, and displaying the operation of the highlighted character 509d. The performance control unit 300 can also make the execution time of the change performance different from the notification time of the specific notification (see FIGS. 49(7) and (8), 50(7) and (8), and 101).
In this case, while the highlighting state of the button image 509 is changed by the change effect, it is possible to prevent the player from failing to recognize either the change effect or the specific notification, which may occur when the start and end timings of the change effect and the specific notification coincide with each other. This can improve the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can display a button image 509 that emphasizes the promotion of operation of the effect button 161, can execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the button image 509, can execute specific effects in the variable effect, and can execute specific notifications regarding the operation of the operating means. Examples of change effects include whether or not the button highlighting section 509c is displayed, changes in the display mode, the operation display of the button section 509a, and the operation display of the highlighted character 509d. Examples of specific effects include temporary stopping of the decorative pattern 41, reach effects, SP reach effects, SPSP reach effects, and pseudo consecutive effects. Examples of specific notifications include a left-hit notification. The performance control unit 300 can make the execution time of the change performance different before and after the start of the specific performance (see Figures 162 (8), 165 (30); for example, see the display time of the button highlighting unit 509c in the sixth button performance and the display time of the button highlighting unit 509c in the eighth button performance in Figure 101), and can make the notification time of the specific notification the same (see Figures 168 (4), 169 (11), and 56 (2)).
In this case, not only can the highlighting state of the button image 509 be changed by the change effect, but the change effect can also be weighted depending on the progress of the change effect, while the specific notification can be more easily recognized by the player as a fixed notification regardless of the progress of the change effect, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can display a button image 509 that emphasizes the promotion of operation of the performance button 161, can execute a change performance that changes the display mode of the button image 509, and can execute a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means. Examples of change performance include whether or not to display the button highlighting unit 509c, changes in the display mode, the operation display of the button unit 509a, and the operation display of the highlighted character 509d. Also, an example of a specific notification is a left-hit notification. The performance control unit 300 can make the execution time of the change performance different from the notification time of the specific notification (see FIG. 56(2) and FIG. 101).
In this case, while the highlighting state of the button image 509 is changed by the change effect, it is possible to prevent the player from failing to recognize either the change effect or the specific notification, which may occur when the start and end timings of the change effect and the specific notification coincide with each other. This can improve the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 can execute an operation presentation (button presentation) that displays a button image 509 that emphasizes the promotion of operation of the presentation button 161. In the operation presentation, a change presentation can be executed that changes the display mode of the button image 509. The operation presentation includes a first operation presentation and a second operation presentation that is different from the first operation presentation. Examples of change presentations include the presence or absence of display of the button highlighting section 509c, a change in the display mode, an operation display of the button section 509a, and an operation display of the highlighted character 509d. Examples of the first operation presentation include a button presentation in which the presentation button 161 can be operated only once during the valid operation period, and a button presentation in which the display color of the button highlighting section 509c is white (see (3) to (8) in Figures 70). Examples of the second operation presentation include a button presentation in which the presentation button 161 can be operated multiple times during the valid operation period, and a button presentation in which the display color of the button highlighting section 509c is red (see (3) to (8) in Figures 81). The performance control unit 300 can make the execution time of the change performance different when the first operation performance is executed and when the second operation performance is executed (see the display time of the button highlighting unit 509c in the 8th button performance in Figure 101 and the display time of the button highlighting unit 509c in the 16th button performance), and can make the notification time of the specific notification the same.
In this case, not only can the highlighting state of the button image 509 be changed by the change effect, but the change effect can also be weighted depending on the operation effect being executed, while the specific notification can be more easily recognized by the player as a fixed notification regardless of the operation effect being executed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can execute an operation effect (button effect) that displays a button image 509 emphasizing the promotion of operation of the effect button 161. In the operation effect, a change effect can be executed that changes the display mode of the button image 509. The operation effect includes a first operation effect and a second operation effect that is different from the first operation effect, and specific notifications regarding the operation of the operating means can be executed. Examples of change effects include the presence or absence of display of the button highlighting section 509c, a change in the display mode, an operation display of the button section 509a, and an operation display of the highlighted character 509d. Examples of the first operation effect include a button effect in which the effect button 161 can be operated only once during the operation valid period, and a button effect in which the button highlighting section 509c is displayed in white (see (3) to (8) in Figures 70). Examples of the second operation effect include a button effect in which the effect button 161 can be operated multiple times during the operation valid period, and a button effect in which the button highlighting section 509c is displayed in red (see (3) to (8) in Figures 73). Furthermore, examples of specific notifications include a left-hit notification, etc. The presentation control unit 300 can make the execution time of the change presentation different when the first operation presentation is executed and when the second operation presentation is executed (see the display time of the button highlighting unit 509c in the eighth button presentation in FIG. 101 and the display time of the button highlighting unit 509c in the ninth button presentation), and can make the presentation time of the specific notification the same (see FIG. 169 (11), FIG. 170 (6), FIG. 56 (2)).
In this case, not only can the highlighting state of the button image 509 be changed by the change effect, but the change effect can also be weighted depending on the operation effect being executed, while the specific notification can be more easily recognized by the player as a fixed notification regardless of the operation effect being executed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 can display a button image 509 that emphasizes the promotion of operation of the presentation button 161 in a variation presentation, and can execute a change presentation that changes the display mode of the button image 509. Examples of change presentations include whether or not to display the button highlighting section 509c, changing the display mode, displaying the operation of the button section 509a, and displaying the operation of the highlighted character 509d. It is possible to make the execution time of the change presentation different between the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode (see the display time of the button highlighting section 509c in the eighth button presentation and the display time of the button highlighting section 509c in the sixteenth button presentation in FIGS. 165 (30), 207 (6), and 101), and it is possible to make the notification time of the specific notification the same.
In this case, not only can the highlighting state of the button image 509 be changed by the change effect, but the change effect can also be weighted depending on the effect mode, while the specific notification can be more easily recognized by the player as a fixed notification regardless of the effect mode, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 is capable of displaying a special notification image related to the operation of the handle 151, and is capable of executing an emphasis effect that emphasizes at least a portion of the special notification image, and the special notification images include a first special notification image and a second special notification image that is different from the first special notification image. An example of the first special notification image is a left-hit image, etc. An example of the second special notification image is a right-hit image, etc. An example of an emphasis effect for the first special notification image is the display of the emphasis portion 48c of the second left-hit image 48, etc. An example of an emphasis effect for the second special notification image is the display of the emphasis portion 507c of the second right-hit image 507, etc. The performance control unit 300 is capable of differentiating the execution time of the emphasis effect when the first special notification image is displayed from when the second special notification image is displayed (see Figure 56 (2) and Figure 59), and it is possible to make the notification time for the specific notification common.
In this case, not only can the special notification image be emphasized by the emphasis effect, but the emphasis effect can also be weighted depending on the special notification image displayed, while the specific notification can be more easily recognized by the player as a certain notification regardless of the special notification image displayed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 can execute a specific presentation (jackpot presentation) that suggests a jackpot game will be played, and can execute a predetermined emphasis presentation when a jackpot presentation is played. Examples of the predetermined emphasis presentation include outputting a jackpot notification sound, displaying a jackpot emphasis image, vibration presentation, a bonus feature presentation, and rainbow-colored illumination of the presentation button 161, the lamp L, or the movable bonus feature 115. The presentation control unit 300 can also set the execution time of the predetermined emphasis presentation to be different between the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode (see, for example, the output time of the jackpot notification sound in the first jackpot presentation and the output time of the jackpot notification sound in the third jackpot presentation in FIGS. 165 (32), 207 (7), and 141), and can set the notification time of the specific notification to be the same.
In this case, not only can the emphasis effect be used to emphasize that a big win game is being played, but the emphasis effect can also be weighted according to the presentation mode, and the specific notification can be easily recognized by the player as a fixed notification regardless of the presentation mode, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute an emphasis performance that emphasizes the performance object when a vibration performance is executed, and can execute a specific performance in a variable performance. An example of an emphasis performance is a performance that causes the performance object to emit light. Furthermore, examples of specific performances include a temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41, a reach performance, an SP reach performance, an SPSP reach performance, and a pseudo consecutive performance. Furthermore, examples of specific notifications include a left-hit notification. Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can make the execution time of the emphasis performance different before and after the start of the specific performance (see Figures 162 (2), 165 (32), and 141), and can make the notification time of the specific notification the same.
In this case, not only can the highlighting effect emphasize the presentation element, but the emphasis effect can be weighted according to the progress of the variable presentation, while the specific notification can be more easily recognized by the player as a fixed notification regardless of the progress of the variable presentation, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a vibration effect is executed, the effect control unit 300 can execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect body. An example of an emphasis effect is an effect that makes the effect body emit light. The effect control unit 300 can then differentiate the execution time of the emphasis effect from the execution time of the specific notification (see Figures 49 (7) and (8), Figures 50 (7) and (8), and Figure 141).
In this case, while the highlighting effect emphasizes the effect body, it is possible to prevent the player from failing to recognize either the highlighting effect or the specific notification, which can occur when the start and end timings of the highlighting effect and the specific notification coincide with each other. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a vibration effect is executed, the effect control unit 300 can execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect body. An example of an emphasis effect is an effect that makes the effect body glow. The effect control unit 300 can make the execution time of the emphasis effect different between the first and second effect modes (see Figures 165 (32), 207 (7), 141, etc.), and can make the notification time of the specific notification the same.
In this case, not only can the highlighting effect emphasize the presentation object, but the emphasis effect can be weighted depending on the presentation mode, while the specific notification can be more easily recognized by the player as a fixed notification regardless of the presentation mode, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute an emphasis performance that emphasizes the role device performance, and can execute a specific performance in a variable performance. Examples of emphasis performance include the illumination of the movable role device 115 and the display of an emphasis image. Examples of specific performance include the temporary stopping of the decorative pattern 41, a reach performance, an SP reach performance, an SPSP reach performance, and a pseudo consecutive performance. The performance control unit 300 can make the execution time of the emphasis performance different before and after the start of the specific performance (see the role device emphasis image display time in the first role device performance and the role device emphasis image display time in the second role device performance in Figures 162 (3), 165 (26), and 118), and can make the notification time of the specific notification the same.
In this case, not only can the emphasis effect be used to emphasize the special device effect, but the emphasis effect can also be weighted depending on the progress of the variable effect, while the specific notification can be more easily recognized by the player as a fixed notification regardless of the progress of the variable effect, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes the role object effect. Examples of the emphasis effect include illuminating the movable role object 115 and displaying an emphasis image. The performance control unit 300 can set the execution time of the emphasis effect and the notification time of the specific notification to be different (see Figures 49 (7) and (8), Figures 50 (7) and (8), and Figure 118).
In this case, while the highlighting effect emphasizes the performance object effect, it is possible to prevent the player from failing to recognize either the highlighting effect or the specific notification, which can occur when the start and end timings of the highlighting effect and the specific notification are the same. This can increase the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute an emphasis performance that emphasizes the special feature performance, can execute a specific performance in a variable performance, and can execute a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means. Examples of the emphasis performance include the illumination of the movable feature 115 and the display of an emphasis image. Examples of the specific performance include a temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41, a reach performance, an SP reach performance, an SPSP reach performance, and a pseudo consecutive performance. Examples of the specific notification include a left-hit notification. The performance control unit 300 can make the execution time of the emphasis performance different before and after the start of the specific performance (see Figures 162 (3), 165 (26), and 118 for the display time of the special feature highlight image in the first special feature performance and the display time of the special feature highlight image in the second special feature performance, etc.), and can make the notification time of the specific notification the same (see Figures 168 (2), 169 (9), and 56 (2)).
In this case, not only can the emphasis effect be used to emphasize the special device effect, but the emphasis effect can also be weighted depending on the progress of the variable effect, while the specific notification can be more easily recognized by the player as a fixed notification regardless of the progress of the variable effect, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 can display a predetermined notification image (left-hit image) relating to the first game area (e.g., the left side of the game area 111) in the first mode (e.g., normal game mode), and can execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes at least a portion of the predetermined notification image. An example of an emphasis effect is the display of the emphasis portion 48c of the second left-hit image 48. The presentation control unit 300 can then differentiate the execution time of the emphasis effect from the notification time of the specific notification (see Figures 49 (7) and (8), Figures 50 (7) and (8), and Figure 56 (2)).
In this case, while the predetermined notification image is emphasized by the emphasis effect, it is possible to prevent the player from failing to recognize either the emphasis effect or the specific notification, which may occur when the start and end timings of the emphasis effect and the specific notification are the same, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the second mode (for example, a special time-saving game state), the effect control unit 300 can display a predetermined notification image (right-hit image) related to the second game area (the right side of the game area 111), and can execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes at least a portion of the predetermined notification image. An example of an emphasis effect is the display of the emphasis portion 507c of the second right-hit image 507. The effect control unit 300 can then make the execution time of the emphasis effect different from the notification time of the specific notification (see Figures 49 (7) and (8), Figures 50 (7) and (8), and Figure 59).
In this case, while the predetermined notification image is emphasized by the emphasis effect, it is possible to prevent the player from failing to recognize either the emphasis effect or the specific notification, which may occur when the start and end timings of the emphasis effect and the specific notification are the same, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can execute a specific effect (jackpot effect) in the variable effect that suggests that a jackpot game will be played, and when a jackpot effect is played, can execute a first emphasis effect and a second emphasis effect that is different from the first emphasis effect. The first emphasis effect and the second emphasis effect include two of the following effects: output of a jackpot notification sound, display of a jackpot highlight image, vibration effect, bonus effect, rainbow-colored illumination of the effect button 161, rainbow-colored illumination of the lamp L, and rainbow-colored illumination of the movable bonus object 115. The effect control unit 300 can make the execution time of the first emphasis effect, the execution time of the second emphasis effect, and the notification time of the specific notification different (see FIGS. 49 (7) and (8), 50 (7) and (8), 165 (32), and 141).
In this case, the emphasis effect emphasizes that a jackpot game will be played, while preventing the player from failing to recognize either the emphasis effect or the specific notification, which can occur when the start and end timings of the emphasis effect and the specific notification are the same. Furthermore, both the first emphasis effect and the second emphasis effect draw the player's attention, further increasing the player's sense of excitement about the jackpot game being played. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can execute specific effects in variable effects and can display an emphasis image that emphasizes the specific effects. Specific effects include temporary stops of the decorative symbols 41, button effects, reach effects, SP reach effects, SPSP reach effects, and pseudo consecutive effects. The specific notification image can be superimposed on the emphasis image (see FIG. 153 (19) and the like).
In this case, the specific effect can be emphasized, and even if a specific notification image is displayed while an emphasis image is being displayed, the player can be made aware of the notification regarding the effect of the effect, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can display an emphasis image that emphasizes the decorative pattern 41 in the variable performance. The specific notification image can be superimposed on the emphasis image (see FIG. 142 (7)).
In this case, the decorative pattern 41 can be emphasized, and even if a specific notification image is displayed while an emphasized image is being displayed, the player can be made aware of the notification regarding the presentation effect, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can stop and display the decorative symbols 41 when a specific sequence (double numbers) indicates that a jackpot game will be played, and can display an emphasis image that emphasizes the double numbers of the decorative symbols 41. The specific notification image can be superimposed on the emphasis image (see FIG. 166 (34)).
In this case, the decorative pattern 41 of the double numbers can be emphasized, and even if a specific notification image is displayed while the emphasized image is being displayed, the player can be made aware of the notification regarding the performance effect, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can display an emphasis image that emphasizes the fact that the button image 509 will be displayed before the button image 509 is displayed. The specific notification image can be displayed superimposed on the emphasis image (see FIG. 142 (3)).
In this case, it is possible to emphasize that the button image 509 is displayed, and even if a specific notification image is displayed while the emphasized image is being displayed, the player can be made aware of the notification regarding the presentation effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can display an emphasis image in response to the operation of the effect button 161 when the button effect is being executed. The specific notification image can be displayed superimposed on the emphasis image (see FIG. 142 (5)).
In this case, it is possible to emphasize that the effect button 161 has been operated in the button effect, and even if a specific notification image is displayed while the emphasis image is being displayed, the player can be made aware of the notification regarding the effect of the effect, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can display an emphasis image that emphasizes the pseudo consecutive effect. The specific notification image can be displayed superimposed on the emphasis image (see FIG. 151 (6) etc.).
In this case, the pseudo consecutive effects can be emphasized, and even if a specific notification image is displayed while the emphasized image is being displayed, the player can be made aware of the notification regarding the effect of the effects, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can execute a specific effect (jackpot effect) that indicates that a jackpot game will be played, and can display a predetermined emphasized image (jackpot emphasized image) when the jackpot effect is played. The specific notification image can be superimposed on the jackpot emphasized image (see FIG. 165 (32)).
In this case, it is possible to emphasize that a big win game will be played, and even if a specific notification image is displayed while an emphasis image is being displayed, the player can be made aware of the notification regarding the presentation effect, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 can be superimposed on the second left-hit image 48 (see FIG. 168 (2)). Here, by displaying the second left-hit image 48 in motion (see FIG. 55 (9)), each image in the second left-hit image 48 (text portion 48a, arrow portion 48b, highlight portion 48c, background portion 48d) is superimposed on the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43. That is, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can display a special notification image (left-hit image) related to the operation of the handle 151, and can display an emphasis portion that highlights at least a portion of the special notification image. An example of an emphasis portion is the emphasis portion 48c of the second left-hit image 48. Furthermore, the specific notification image can be superimposed on the emphasis portion.
In this case, the special notification image can be emphasized, and even if a specific notification image is displayed while the highlighting section is being displayed, the player can be made aware of the notification regarding the presentation effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 can execute a specific emphasis effect that emphasizes the decorative pattern 41 in the variable presentation, and when a specific effect (SP reach presentation) is executed in the variable presentation, it can display a presentation pattern (decorative pattern 41 with a miss) indicating that a jackpot game will not be executed, and then display a special image. Examples of specific emphasis effects include displaying an emphasis image and an action when the decorative pattern 41 stops. Examples of special images include a switching image 586. In this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 may prevent the specific emphasis effect from being executed after the switching image 586 is displayed in the variable presentation. In other words, the presentation control unit 300 can limit the specific emphasis effect and execute a specific notification while a special image is being displayed (see FIG. 153 (22)).
In this case, even though a decorative pattern 41 of a losing number is displayed, the decorative pattern 41 is emphasized, which prevents a decrease in interest in the game, and the player can be made aware of the specific notification even while a special image is being displayed, thereby increasing interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute an emphasis performance that emphasizes the decorative pattern 41 in the variable performance. Examples of emphasis performance include displaying an emphasis image and operation when the decorative pattern 41 stops. In this embodiment, specific emphasis performances are not executed in specific variable performances such as the variable performances shown in Figures 223 (2) and (3). In other words, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can restrict emphasis performances and execute specific notifications in specific variable performances.
In this case, it is possible to achieve a greater variety in the variable effects than when emphasis effects are executed in all variable effects, and it is also possible to make the player aware of specific notifications in specific variable effects, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 can display the decorative pattern 41 in a specific visual mode that is easy to see during the variable presentation, can execute a specific presentation (jackpot presentation) that suggests a jackpot game will be played during the variable presentation, and can execute a predetermined emphasis presentation when the specific presentation is executed. Examples of the predetermined emphasis presentation include outputting a jackpot notification sound, displaying a jackpot emphasis image, vibration presentation, role presentation, and rainbow-colored illumination of the presentation button 161, lamp L, and movable role presentation 115. Furthermore, when the predetermined emphasis presentation is being executed, the presentation control unit 300 can limit the display of the decorative pattern 41 in a specific visual mode and execute a specific notification (see FIG. 165 (32)).
In this case, compared to when the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a specific visual mode during the execution of the highlight effect, it is possible to make the player more likely to notice the effects that are unique to the execution of a jackpot game (such as the effects executed during the jackpot effect). Also, even during the execution of the highlight effect, the player can be made to recognize the specific notification. This can increase the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes the decorative pattern 41, and can execute specific notifications regarding the performance effects. Examples of emphasis effects include displaying an emphasis image and operations when the decorative pattern 41 stops. Examples of specific notifications include outputting a volume notification sound or a light intensity notification sound. In this embodiment, when the decorative pattern 41 stops, the performance control unit 300 does not execute an emphasis effect and does not output a volume notification sound or a light intensity notification sound (see FIG. 143 (11)). In other words, the performance control unit 300 can limit the emphasis effect and specific notifications when the decorative pattern 41 is stopped and displayed.
In this case, the player is prevented from being distracted by the emphasis effects or specific notifications and losing focus on the stopped display of the decorative pattern 41, and the player can be made to more reliably recognize the end of the variable effects, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes the decorative pattern 41, and can execute specific notifications regarding the performance effects. Examples of emphasis effects include displaying an emphasis image and an operation when the decorative pattern 41 is stopped. Examples of specific notifications include displaying a volume image 42 or a light intensity image 43. In this embodiment, when the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped, the performance control unit 300 does not execute an emphasis effect, but displays the volume image 42 or the light intensity image 43 (see FIG. 143 (11)). In other words, the performance control unit 300 can limit the emphasis effect and execute specific notifications when the decorative pattern 41 is stopped and displayed.
In this case, the player is prevented from being distracted by the emphasis effect and losing focus on the stopped display of the decorative pattern 41, and the player can be made to more reliably recognize the end of the variable effect. Furthermore, by executing a specific notification even at the end of the variable effect, the player can be made to recognize the specific notification and enjoy the next variable effect. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can execute a specific effect (jackpot effect) in the variable effect that indicates a jackpot game is about to be played, and can execute a predetermined emphasis effect when a jackpot effect is played. Examples of the predetermined emphasis effect include outputting a jackpot notification sound, displaying a jackpot emphasis image, vibration effects, special effects, and rainbow-colored illumination of the effect button 161, lamp L, and movable special effects 115. The adjustment means operable by the player to adjust the effect include a first adjustment means (effect key 162) and a second adjustment means (background volume adjustment volume 300S) that is different from the first adjustment means. When a predetermined emphasis effect is being played, the effect control unit 300 can execute a specific notification regarding the effect when the first adjustment means is operated (see FIG. 232 (8)), and can not execute a specific notification when the second adjustment means is operated (see FIG. 232 (7)). Examples of the specific notification include displaying a volume image 42.
In this case, if the first adjustment means is operated by the player while the emphasis effect is being executed, the player can be made aware of the specific notification even while the emphasis effect is being executed. Also, if the second adjustment means is operated by the administrator of the pachinko gaming machine 100 while the emphasis effect is being executed, the specific notification is not executed, so it is possible to prevent the emphasis effect of the execution of the jackpot effect from being interrupted by the specific notification unintended by the player. Therefore, it is possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 can execute a specific presentation (jackpot presentation) in the variable presentation that suggests a jackpot game will be played, can execute a predetermined emphasis presentation when a jackpot presentation is played, and can execute a specific notification regarding the presentation effect when an adjustment means operable by the player and used to adjust the presentation effect is operated. The adjustment means includes a first adjustment means (presentation key 162) and a second adjustment means (background volume adjustment volume 300S) different from the first adjustment means. The specific notifications include a first specific notification (display of volume image 42) and a second specific notification (output of volume notification sound) different from the first specific notification. The predetermined emphasis presentations include output of a jackpot notification sound, display of a jackpot emphasis image, vibration presentation, role-play presentation, rainbow-colored illumination of the presentation button 161, lamp L, or movable role-play object 115, etc. The performance control unit 300 is capable of executing the first specific notification and the second specific notification when the first adjustment means is operated (see Figure 49 (2)), and is capable of not executing at least one of the first specific notification and the second specific notification when the second adjustment means is operated while a specified emphasis performance is being executed.
In this case, when the first adjustment means is operated by the player, the specific notification can be made more easily recognizable by the player. Also, when the administrator of the pachinko gaming machine 100 operates the second adjustment means while the emphasis effect is being executed, at least one of the first specific notification and the second specific notification is not executed, so that it is possible to prevent the emphasis effect indicating that the jackpot effect will be executed from being interrupted by a specific notification unintended by the player. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 can execute a specific presentation (jackpot presentation) in a variable presentation that suggests a jackpot game will be executed, can execute a predetermined emphasis presentation when a jackpot presentation is executed, and can execute a specific notification regarding a presentation effect when the adjustment means (presentation key 162) is operated. Examples of the predetermined emphasis presentation include outputting a jackpot notification sound, displaying a jackpot emphasis image, vibration presentation, a role presentation, and rainbow-colored illumination of the presentation button 161, lamp L, or movable role presentation 115. It is also possible to make the notification mode of the specific notification when the adjustment means is operated different between when a variable presentation is not being executed and when a predetermined emphasis presentation is being executed (see FIG. 49 (2) and FIG. 232 (8)).
In this case, when a predetermined emphasis effect is being executed, the notification mode of the specific notification is different from when a variable effect is not being executed, so that the emphasis effect that a big win effect is being executed is easily conveyed to the player, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes the decorative symbols 41 during a variable effect, and can execute a specific notification regarding the effect when a player operates an adjustment means operable by the player to adjust the effect. The adjustment means includes a first adjustment means (effect key 162) and a second adjustment means (background volume adjustment volume 300S) different from the first adjustment means. Examples of emphasis effects include displaying an emphasis image and operating the decorative symbols 41 when they stop. Examples of specific notifications include displaying a volume image 42 or a customer waiting volume image 44 and outputting a volume notification sound. The effect control unit 300 can execute a specific notification when the first adjustment means is operated while an emphasis effect is being executed (see FIG. 142 (7)). When a variable effect is not being executed, the notification mode of the specific notification can be different depending on whether the first adjustment means is operated or the second adjustment means is operated (see FIGS. 232 (2) and (4)).
In this case, it is possible to make it easier for the user of the pachinko gaming machine 100 to recognize whether the specific notification made when the variable effect is not being executed is due to the operation of the first adjustment means or the operation of the second adjustment means. Furthermore, if the first adjustment means is operated while the emphasis effect is being executed, the specific notification can be made recognized by the player even during the execution of the emphasis effect, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can display an emphasis image that highlights the decorative pattern 41 during the variable effect, and can issue a specific notification regarding the effect when a player operates an adjustment means operable by the player to adjust the effect. The adjustment means includes a first adjustment means (effect key 162) and a second adjustment means (background volume adjustment volume 300S) different from the first adjustment means. The specific notification includes a specific notification image (volume image 42) and a specific notification sound (volume notification sound). The emphasis image reduces the visibility of the decorative pattern 41 without reducing the visibility of the specific notification image (see FIG. 166 (34)). When the specific notification image is displayed, the effect control unit 300 can output the specific notification sound when the first adjustment means is operated, and can suppress the output of the specific notification sound when the second adjustment means is operated (see FIGS. 49 (2) and 233 (9)).
In this case, it is possible to make it easier for the user of the pachinko gaming machine 100 to recognize whether the first adjustment means or the second adjustment means has been operated while the specific notification image is being displayed. Furthermore, even if an emphasis image is displayed while the specific notification image is being displayed, it is possible to make the player recognize the specific notification, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

(Example of what happens when the fluctuation start command is not received)
Next, the mode of presentation when the variation start command is not received by the presentation control unit 300 will be described.
Figure 234 is a diagram showing one aspect of the presentation when the variation start command is not received by the presentation control unit 300.
First, in the waiting state, as shown in Fig. 234 (1), a waiting volume image 44, a waiting light intensity image 45, a menu promotion image 46, a stage image 61, and a decorative pattern 41 are displayed. At this time, a special pattern is displayed in a static state on the first special pattern display 221. At this time, the volume and light intensity set in the performance control unit 300 are both set to "3."

Next, as shown in Figure 234 (2), the gaming control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B enter a disconnected state, where they are not electrically connected. One example of when the gaming control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B enter a disconnected state is when the connector 200C connecting the gaming control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B becomes detached from the gaming control board 200B or the presentation control board 300B. Another example of when the gaming control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B enter a disconnected state is when chattering occurs in the connector 200C (chattering between the gaming control board 200B and the connector 200C, or chattering between the presentation control board 300B and the connector 200C).

Next, when the gaming ball enters the first starting hole 121, as shown in Fig. 234 (3), the first special symbol display 221 starts to display a variable special symbol. Meanwhile, the game control board 200B and the performance control board 300B are not connected, and the variable start command is not received by the performance control unit 300. In this case, the variable performance does not start, and the customer waiting volume image 44, customer waiting light intensity image 45, and menu promotion image 46 continue to be displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 234 (4), the variable display of the special symbol continues on the first special symbol display 221. At this time, when the lower key and the left key of the effect keys 162 are operated, the effect control unit 300 sets both the volume and the light intensity to "2." Furthermore, the volume identifier 442 of the customer waiting volume image 44 changes to a display mode indicating the volume "2," and the light intensity identifier 452 of the customer waiting light intensity image 45 changes to a display mode indicating the light intensity "2." Furthermore, a volume 2 alert sound and a light intensity 2 alert sound are output.

Next, as shown in Figure 234 (5), the reason why the game control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B are in a disconnected state is eliminated, and the game control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B are in a connected state in which they are electrically connected.
Next, as shown in FIG. 234 (6), the special symbol is displayed as stopped. Furthermore, when the variation stop command is received by the performance control unit 300, the customer waiting volume image 44, the customer waiting light intensity image 45, and the menu promotion image 46 are hidden. Meanwhile, the decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped. More specifically, the three decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped by the arrangement of "412" shown in FIGS. 234 (1) to (5). Furthermore, the variation count image 502 is updated to "11 games."

In the state shown in Figure 234 (4), if the special symbol is displayed in a stopped state while the game control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B remain disconnected, the variation stop command will not be received by the presentation control unit 300. In this case, the content shown in Figure 234 (4) will continue to be displayed on the image display unit 114.

In addition, when the variable effect is not being performed and the events shown in Figures 234 (2) to (6) occur before the machine enters the customer waiting state, the effects shown in Figures 234 (2) to (6) are executed using volume image 42 and light intensity image 43 instead of customer waiting volume image 44 and customer waiting light intensity image 45.

(Example of what happens when the fluctuation stop command is not received)
Next, the mode of presentation when the fluctuation stop command is not received by the presentation control unit 300 will be explained.
235 and 236 are diagrams showing one aspect of the performance when the fluctuation stop command is not received by the performance control unit 300. In the following, it is assumed that the fluctuation performance (see FIGS. 162 to 167) is performed when "EA1" is selected as the "fluctuation performance pattern" in FIG.

235(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56, "331," in the image display unit 114. At this time, the first of the two reserved images 52 is displayed in blue.
Next, as shown in FIG. 235 (2), as the variable display of the next special symbol begins, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 begin to vary. Also, the first start operation is executed. Also, at this time, a first start emphasis image 588 is displayed around each of the three decorative symbols 41. Also, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51, and the variable image 51 is displayed in blue. Also, a vibration effect is executed. Also, a first start emphasis sound is output.
Although not shown, after this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 162 (3) to (8), 163 (9) to (16), 164 (17) to (24), and 165 (25) to (29) are performed.

Next, the eighth button effect starts, and the button image 509 is displayed as shown in Fig. 235 (3). In the eighth button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in motion in the manner described with reference to Figs. 70 (3) to (8).
Furthermore, at this time, the player continues to shoot the gaming ball toward the right side of the gaming area 111, and the gaming ball continues to enter the gate 124 provided on the right side of the gaming area 111, so that the second left-hit notification is executed after the first left-hit notification is executed, the second left-hit image 48 is displayed, and the second left-hit sound is output. As a result, the operation display of the button image 509 (the operation display of the button portion 509a, the button highlight portion 509c, and the highlight character 509d) becomes difficult or impossible to see.

Next, as shown in Figure 235 (4), the game control board 200B and the effect control board 300B are assumed to be in a disconnected state. Even in this case, the display of the second left-hit image 48 and the output of the second left-hit sound continue. Furthermore, when the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period for the eighth button effect, the eighth post-operation emphasis image 520 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 235(5), the second left-hit notification that was being executed at the time shown in FIG. 235(3) ends, and the second left-hit image 48 disappears and the output of the second left-hit sound ends. Furthermore, the first jackpot effect is executed. In the first jackpot effect, the first jackpot notification sound is output, a vibration effect is executed, the center movable device 115B moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114, and the center movable device 115B, the effect button 161, and the lamp L emit light in rainbow colors. Furthermore, the first jackpot highlight image 566 is displayed.
Also, at this time, the player continues to fire the gaming ball toward the right side of the gaming area 111, and the gaming ball continuously enters (passes through) the gate 124 provided on the right side of the gaming area 111. Meanwhile, at this time, the second left-hit image 48 is not displayed and the second left-hit sound is not output. More specifically, even if the condition for executing the second left-hit notification, that is, the gaming ball enters (passes through) the gate 124 provided on the right side of the gaming area 111, is met, the second left-hit notification is not executed.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figure 166 (33) to (40) are performed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 235(6), the doublet decorative pattern 41 and the first doublet emphasis image 591 are displayed. Also, the first doublet emphasis sound is output.
The special symbol is then displayed as stopped. Meanwhile, as shown in FIG. 235 (7), the game control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B are disconnected, and the variable stop command is not received by the presentation control unit 300. In this case, the double-digit decorative symbol 41 is not fixedly stopped and remains temporarily stopped. Furthermore, the small symbol 56 continues to display a variable display. Furthermore, when the player operates the upper and right keys of the presentation keys 162, the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are displayed. Meanwhile, neither the volume nor the light intensity notification sound is output.

Next, a jackpot game is started, but on the image display unit 114, as shown in Fig. 235 (8), the doublet decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped and the small symbols 56 continue to be displayed in a variable manner. Also, at this time, if the player operates the upper and right keys of the effect keys 162, the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are displayed. On the other hand, neither the volume nor the light intensity notification sound is output.
After this, although not shown in the figure, the big win game ends, the game state of the pachinko game machine 100 is controlled to a special time-saving game state, and the next special symbol begins to change.

Next, while the special symbol is being displayed and changing, the reason why the game control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B are not connected is resolved, and as shown in Figure 236 (9), the game control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B become connected. Also, at this time, if the player operates the upper and right keys of the presentation keys 162, the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are displayed. However, neither the volume nor the light intensity notification sound is output.

Next, the special symbol is displayed as stopped. Also, as shown in Figure 236 (10), a variable stop command is received by the effect control unit 300. In this case, the less decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56, "444," are fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114. Also, the stage image 61, first right-hit image 503, stage notification image 501, and remaining time-reduction number image 504 are displayed. Also, "0" is displayed on both the reserved number display 55 of the first start slot 121 and the reserved number display 55 of the second start slot 122. Also, when the player operates the upper and right keys of the effect keys 162, the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43 are displayed.

After the variable effect has finished, when the player operates the upper and right keys of the effect keys 162, a volume image 42 and a light intensity image 43 are displayed as shown in Fig. 236 (11). Also, a volume notification sound and a light intensity notification sound are output.
In the examples shown in Figures 235 (7), (8) and 236 (9) to (11), detailed illustrations are omitted, but the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43 are displayed in a display mode corresponding to the operation of the performance key 162 (a display mode indicating the volume and light intensity corresponding to the operation).

As described above, in this embodiment, if the presentation control unit 300 cannot receive a variation stop command from the game control unit 200 during a jackpot variation presentation, the jackpot presentation is executed while the left-hit notification is restricted.
In this case, even if the performance control unit 300 cannot receive a command from the game control unit 200 during the variable performance, the player can be made aware that a jackpot game will be executed. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to a left-hit notification being issued even though the player has not hit the reel with the left hand.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the presentation control unit 300 cannot receive a fluctuation stop command from the game control unit 200, the restrictions on the output of the volume notification sound and light intensity notification sound, which should be relaxed by the final stop of the decorative pattern 41 (end of the fluctuation presentation), are extended.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by having a volume or light intensity notification sound output even though the fluctuation effect has not ended because the fluctuation stop command has not been received, and it is also possible to make the player aware that the fluctuation effect has not ended even after the original end timing of the fluctuation effect.

In the variable presentation shown in Figures 162 to 167, if the execution condition for the second left-hand hit notification is met at the timing shown in Figure 166 (40), the second left-hand hit notification is issued. If the game control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B become disconnected before the special symbol fluctuation stops, the fluctuation stop command is not properly received by the presentation control unit 300. In this case, the decorative symbol 41 remains temporarily stopped even after the timing at which the decorative symbol 41 would normally stop has passed. Furthermore, even after the timing at which the decorative symbol 41 would normally stop has passed, the second left-hand hit notification that is already being executed continues until its intended end. After the second left-hand hit notification ends, even if the execution condition for the second left-hand hit notification, i.e., the game ball entering (passing through) the gate 124 located on the right side of the game area 111, is met, a new second left-hand hit notification is not executed.
In this case, even if the command is not received correctly by the performance control unit 300, it is possible to prevent the player from hitting the right hand that has already been made. Furthermore, after the second left-hit notification has ended, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's interest in the game due to a left-hit notification being made even though the player has not hit the left hand.

Also, although Figures 235 and 236 have described the jackpot variable presentation, the present invention is not limited to this.
In a variable presentation in which a pre-determination presentation is executed, if the presentation control unit 300 cannot receive a command from the game control unit 200, the pre-determination presentation may be executed while the left-hit notification is restricted.

235 and 236, when the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43 of modified example 1 (see FIGS. 53(1) and (2)) or the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43 of modified example 2 (see FIGS. 53(3) and (4)) are used, the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43 are displayed when the effect key 162 is operated at the timing shown in FIGS. 235(7) and (8) and 236(9). In other words, when the effect control unit 300 does not normally receive the fluctuation stop command, the restriction on the display of the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43 at the original end timing of the fluctuation effect is relaxed.
235 and 236, when the volume image and light intensity image of modified example 3 (see FIGS. 53(5) to (8)) are used, even if the effect key 162 is operated at the timings shown in FIGS. 235(7), (8), and 236(9), the volume alert sound and light intensity alert sound are output, but the customer waiting volume image 44 and the customer waiting light intensity image 45 are not displayed. In other words, if the fluctuation stop command is not normally received by the effect control unit 300, the restrictions on the customer waiting volume image 44 and the customer waiting light intensity image 45, which are relaxed to the original end timing of the fluctuation effect, are extended.
In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which a volume alert sound and a light intensity alert sound are output when the effect key 162 is operated while the variable effect is being executed, and when the effect key 162 is operated when the variable effect has ended (the decorative pattern 41 has stopped being fixed), the volume alert sound and the light intensity alert sound are not output. In this case, when the effect key 162 is operated at the timing shown in Figures 235 (7), (8), and 236 (9), the volume alert sound and the light intensity alert sound are output. In other words, if the variable effect stop command is not received correctly by the effect control unit 300, the output of the volume alert sound and the light intensity alert sound, which are normally limited at the end of the variable effect, is relaxed.

(Performance timing when the fluctuation stop command is not received)
Next, the timing of the performance execution when the fluctuation stop command is not received by the performance control unit 300 will be explained.
Fig. 237 is a timing chart of the performance when the fluctuation stop command is not received by the performance control unit 300. More specifically, Fig. 237-1 is a timing chart of the performance when the fluctuation stop command is received by the performance control unit 300, and Fig. 237-2 is a timing chart of the performance when the fluctuation stop command is not received by the performance control unit 300.
In addition, in each of Figures 237-1 and 237-2, we will explain the change performance that is executed when "ER11" is selected as the "change performance pattern" in Figure 41 (see Figures 157 to 161), and the change performance that is executed when "EA1" is selected (see Figures 162 to 167, Figures 235, and Figure 236).

First, we will explain the case where a fluctuation stop command is received by the performance control unit 300 in the fluctuation performance that is executed when "ER11" is selected as the "fluctuation performance pattern" shown in Figure 237-1.
First, at time T1, the performance control unit 300 receives a change start command, starts changing the decorative pattern 41, and displays the first start emphasis image 588 (see Figure 157 (2)).
Next, at time T2, the performance control unit 300 temporarily stops the left decorative pattern 41 and displays the first stop emphasis image 572 (see Figure 159 (21)).

Next, at time T3, the effect control unit 300 executes the first reach effect and displays the first reach highlight image 542 (see Figure 159 (23)).
Next, at time T4, the performance control unit 300 displays the third precursor emphasis image 518 (see Figure 160 (31)).
Next, at time T5, the effect control unit 300 executes the seventh button effect and displays the button highlighting unit 509c (see FIG. 160 (32)).
Next, at time T6, the performance control unit 300 temporarily stops the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 that is a miss (see Figure 161 (38)).
Next, at time T7, the performance control unit 300 receives a variation stop command and fixes and stops the decorative pattern 41 (see FIG. 161 (39)). Here, the time from the timing (time T3) when the first reach-eye emphasis image 542 is displayed to the timing (time T7) when the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped is time t1.

Next, we will explain what happens when a fluctuation stop command is received by the performance control unit 300 in the fluctuation performance that is executed when "EA1" is selected as the "fluctuation performance pattern" shown in Figure 237-1.
First, at time T11, the performance control unit 300 receives a change start command, starts changing the decorative pattern 41, and displays the first start emphasis image 588 (see Figure 162 (2)).
Next, at time T12, the performance control unit 300 temporarily stops the left decorative pattern 41 and displays the first stop emphasis image 572 (see Figure 164 (19)).
Next, at time T13, the effect control unit 300 executes the third reach effect and displays the fourth reach highlight image 544 (see Figure 164 (21)).
Next, at time T14, the performance control unit 300 displays the third precursor emphasis image 518 (see Figure 165 (29)).
Next, at time T15, the effect control unit 300 executes the eighth button effect and displays the button highlighting unit 509c (see FIG. 165 (30)).

Next, at time T16, the effect control unit 300 executes the first jackpot effect and displays the first jackpot highlight image 566 (see Figure 165 (32)).
Next, at time T17, the performance control unit 300 temporarily stops the doublet decorative pattern 41 and displays the first doublet emphasis image 591 (see Figure 166 (40)).
Next, at time T18, the performance control unit 300 receives a variation stop command and fixes and stops the decorative pattern 41 (see FIG. 167 (41)). Here, the time from the timing (time T17) when the first doublet emphasis image 591 is displayed to the timing (time T18) when the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped is time t2. This time t2 is shorter than time t1.

Next, we will explain what happens when the fluctuation stop command is not received by the presentation control unit 300 during the fluctuation presentation executed when "ER11" is selected as the "Fluctuation Presentation Pattern" as shown in Figure 237-2. In this example, the presentation control unit 300 is unable to receive the fluctuation stop command because the game control board 200B and presentation control board 300B are disconnected. Furthermore, during the next fluctuation, by the time the next fluctuation stop command is received, the cause of the disconnection between the game control board 200B and presentation control board 300B is resolved, and the presentation control unit 300 receives the next fluctuation stop command.

First, at time T21, the performance control unit 300 receives a change start command, starts changing the decorative pattern 41, and displays the first start emphasis image 588 (see Figure 157 (2)).
Next, at time T22, the performance control unit 300 temporarily stops the left decorative pattern 41 and displays the first stop emphasis image 572 (see Figure 159 (21)).

Next, at time T23, the effect control unit 300 executes the first reach effect and displays the first reach highlight image 542 (see FIG. 159 (23)).
Next, at time T24, the performance control unit 300 displays the third precursor emphasis image 518 (see Figure 160 (31)).
Next, at time T25, the effect control unit 300 executes the seventh button effect and displays the button highlighting unit 509c (see FIG. 160 (32)).
Next, at time T26, the performance control unit 300 temporarily stops the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 that is a miss (see Figure 161 (38)).

Next, at time T27, the performance control unit 300 would normally stop the decorative pattern 41 upon receiving a change stop command (see FIG. 161 (39)), but in this example, the change stop command cannot be received. As a result, the performance control unit 300 does not stop the decorative pattern 41, but continues the temporary stop state.
Then, at time T28, the performance control unit 300 receives the next variation stop command and fixes and stops the decorative pattern 41. Here, the time from the timing (time T23) when the first reach-eye emphasis image 542 is displayed to the timing (time T28) when the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped is time t3. This time t3 is longer than time t1.

Next, we will explain what happens when the fluctuation stop command is not received by the presentation control unit 300 during the fluctuation presentation executed when "EA1" is selected as the "Fluctuation Presentation Pattern" shown in Figure 237-2. In this example, the game control board 200B and presentation control board 300B become disconnected, preventing the presentation control unit 300 from receiving the fluctuation stop command. Furthermore, during the next fluctuation, the cause of the disconnection between the game control board 200B and presentation control board 300B is resolved by the time the next fluctuation stop command is received, and the presentation control unit 300 receives the next fluctuation stop command.

First, at time T31, the performance control unit 300 receives a change start command, starts changing the decorative pattern 41, and displays the first start emphasis image 588 (see Figure 162 (2)).
Next, at time T32, the performance control unit 300 temporarily stops the left decorative pattern 41 and displays the first stop emphasis image 572 (see Figure 164 (19)).
Next, at time T33, the effect control unit 300 executes the third reach effect and displays the fourth reach highlight image 544 (see Figure 164 (21)).
Next, at time T34, the performance control unit 300 displays the third precursor emphasis image 518 (see Figure 165 (29)).
Next, at time T35, the effect control unit 300 executes the eighth button effect and displays the button highlighting unit 509c (see FIG. 165 (30)).

Next, at time T36, the effect control unit 300 executes the first jackpot effect and displays the first jackpot highlight image 566 (see Figure 165 (32)).
Next, at time T37, the performance control unit 300 temporarily stops the double-digit decorative pattern 41 and displays the first double-digit emphasized image 591 (see Figure 166 (40)).
Next, at time T38, the performance control unit 300 would normally stop the decorative pattern 41 upon receiving a fluctuation stop command (see FIG. 167 (41)), but in this example, the fluctuation stop command cannot be received. As a result, the performance control unit 300 does not stop the decorative pattern 41, but continues the temporary stop state (see FIG. 235 (7)).
Then, at time T39, the performance control unit 300 receives the next variation stop command and stops the decorative pattern 41 (see Figure 236 (10)).

Here, the time from the timing (time T37) when the first double-digit highlight image 591 is displayed to the timing (time T39) when the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped is time t4. This time t4 is longer than time t3 because it includes the time required to execute a jackpot game, for example. In addition, even if the longest execution time of all the executions is executed as the execution of ...
In this way, if a variation stop command is not received, by executing an effect in which the decorative pattern 41 continues to oscillate (temporarily stopped), continuity with the effects that have been executed up to that point, such as emphasis effects, is ensured, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. Also, by continuing the oscillating state of the decorative pattern 41, when the event in which the effect control unit 300 cannot receive a command from the game control unit 200 is resolved and a variation stop command is received, it is possible to execute an effect that is continuous and does not feel uncomfortable to the player, in which the oscillating decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped.

In addition, in the variable performance shown in Figure 237-2, which is executed when "ER11" is selected as the "variable performance pattern," if the variable stop command is not received by the performance control unit 300, the time during which the restriction on the output of the volume notification sound and light intensity notification sound, which should be relaxed by the confirmed stop of the decorative pattern 41, is extended is the time from time T27 to time T28.
Furthermore, in the variable performance executed when "EA1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern," if the performance control unit 300 does not receive a variable stop command, the time during which the restriction on the output of the volume and light intensity alarm sounds, which would be relaxed by the fixed stop of the decorative pattern 41, is extended is the time from time T38 to time T39. This time is longer than the time from time T27 to time T28.

It has also been explained that when the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43 of modified example 1 (see Figures 53 (1) and (2)) or the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43 of modified example 2 (see Figures 53 (3) and (4)) are used, if the fluctuation stop command is not normally received by the performance control unit 300, the restrictions on the display of the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43 at the end timing of the original fluctuation performance are relaxed.
Here, in the variable performance that is executed when "ER11" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" as shown in Figure 237-2, if a variable stop command is not received by the performance control unit 300, the time during which the restrictions on the display of the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are relaxed is the time from time T27 to time T28.
Furthermore, in the variable effect that is executed when "EA1" is selected as the "variable effect pattern," if the effect control unit 300 does not receive a variable effect stop command, the time during which the restrictions on the display of the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are relaxed is the time from time T38 to time T39. This time is longer than the time from time T27 to time T28.

In addition, it was explained that when the volume image and light intensity image of variant example 3 (see Figures 53 (5) to (8)) are used in the variable performance shown in Figures 235 and 236, if the variable stop command is not received normally by the performance control unit 300, the restrictions on the customer waiting volume image 44 and customer waiting light intensity image 45, which are relaxed to the original end timing of the variable performance, are extended.
Here, in the variable performance shown in Figure 237-2, which is executed when "ER11" is selected as the "variable performance pattern," if the variable stop command is not received by the performance control unit 300, the time during which the restrictions on the customer waiting volume image 44 and the customer waiting light intensity image 45, which should be relaxed by the confirmed stop of the decorative pattern 41, are extended is the time from time T27 to time T28.
Furthermore, in the variable performance executed when "EA1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern," if the performance control unit 300 does not receive a variable stop command, the time during which the restrictions on the customer waiting volume image 44 and the customer waiting light intensity image 45, which should be relaxed by the fixed stop of the decorative pattern 41, are extended is the time from time T38 to time T39. This time is longer than the time from time T27 to time T28.

In addition, in a case where a configuration is adopted in which a volume alert sound and a light intensity alert sound are output when the performance key 162 is operated while the variable performance is being performed, and a volume alert sound and a light intensity alert sound are not output when the performance key 162 is operated when the variable performance has ended (the decorative pattern 41 has stopped being fixed), if the variable stop command is not received properly by the performance control unit 300, the output of the volume alert sound and the light intensity alert sound, which are normally restricted at the end timing of the variable performance, is relaxed.
Here, in the variable performance that is executed when "ER11" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" as shown in Figure 237-2, if a variable stop command is not received by the performance control unit 300, the time during which the output of the volume alert sound and light intensity alert sound is reduced is the time from time T27 to time T28.
Furthermore, in the variable effect that is executed when "EA1" is selected as the "variable effect pattern," if the effect control unit 300 does not receive a variable effect stop command, the time during which the output of the volume alert sound and the light intensity alert sound is reduced is the time from time T38 to time T39. This time is longer than the time from time T27 to time T28.

Also, although not shown in the figures, even if the change stop command for a variable effect in which a specific pre-determined effect (such as a chance eye effect) is executed is not received correctly by the effect control unit 300, the specific pre-determined effect will be executed, as in the example shown in Figure 237, but the time from when the specific pre-determined effect is executed to when the change of the decorative pattern 41 stops will be longer than when the change stop command for a variable effect in which a specific pre-determined effect is executed is received by the effect control unit 300.

(Performance when fluctuation start command and fluctuation stop command are not received)
Next, the mode of presentation when the fluctuation start command and fluctuation stop command are not received by the presentation control unit 300 will be described.
Figures 238 and 239 are diagrams showing one form of presentation when the fluctuation start command and fluctuation stop command are not received by the presentation control unit 300.
First, as shown in Fig. 238(1), the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56, "412," are fixed and stopped with the stop display of the previous special symbol. Also, a stage image 61 corresponding to the first stage, a stage notification image 501, a change count image 502, a volume image 42, a light intensity image 43, and four reserved images 52 are displayed. Also, "4" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 of the first starting port 121.

Next, as shown in Figure 238 (2), as the display of the next special symbol begins to change, the decorative symbol 41 and small symbol 56 begin to change, the first start operation is performed, and a first start emphasis image 588 is displayed around each of the three decorative symbols 41. Also, a change image 51 is displayed, and the hold number display 55 of the first start slot 121 is updated to "3." At this time, the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43 are displayed by operating the upper and right keys of the effect keys 162. Meanwhile, neither the volume notification sound nor the light intensity notification sound is output. Also, a first start emphasis sound is output.

238(3), the first zone effect is started and a first zone execution image 537 is displayed. At this time, by operating the upper and right keys of the effect keys 162, the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are displayed. However, neither the volume nor the light intensity notification sound is output.
The first zone effect shown in Figure 238 (3) is an example of a pre-determination effect, which is an effect that makes the player expect a jackpot in the next variable effect after the variable effect when the pre-determination effect is being executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 238 (4), a chance eye effect is executed, and three decorative symbols 41, "113," stop. All three decorative symbols 41 are displayed in green. At this time, a chance eye emphasis image 587 is displayed around the three decorative symbols 41. At this time, by operating the upper and right keys of the effect keys 162, a volume image 42 and a light intensity image 43 are displayed. Meanwhile, neither the volume notification sound nor the light intensity notification sound is output. In addition, a first chance eye emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 238 (5), as the special symbol stops, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56, "113," are fixed and stopped. The variable image 51 is no longer displayed. Meanwhile, the first zone execution image 537 continues to be displayed. At this time, the upper and right keys of the effect keys 162 are operated, causing the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 to be displayed. Meanwhile, neither the volume nor the light intensity notification sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 238 (6), the game control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B are disconnected. At this time, when the upper and right keys of the presentation keys 162 are operated, the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are displayed. Meanwhile, neither the volume notification sound nor the light intensity notification sound is output.
Then, the display of the next special symbol begins to change, but as shown in FIG. 238 (7), the performance control unit 300 cannot receive the change start command. In this case, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 do not start changing. The first zone performance continues, and the first zone execution image 537 continues to be displayed. At this time, the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are displayed by operating the upper and right keys of the performance keys 162. Meanwhile, neither the volume nor the light intensity notification sound is output.

Next, the special symbol is displayed as a static symbol, but the effect control unit 300 cannot receive the stop variable command, as shown in Figure 238 (8). In this case, the first zone effect continues, and the first zone execution image 537 continues to be displayed. Also, at this time, by operating the upper and right keys of the effect keys 162, the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are displayed. Meanwhile, neither the volume nor the light intensity notification sound is output.
Next, the cause of the disconnection between the game control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B is resolved, and the game control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B are connected, as shown in Figure 239 (9). At this time, by operating the upper and right keys of the presentation keys 162, the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are displayed. Meanwhile, neither the volume notification sound nor the light intensity notification sound is output.

Next, the display of the special symbols begins to change. Then, the performance control unit 300 receives a change start command as shown in FIG. 239 (10).
In this case, the first reserved image 52, which is the reserved image 52 corresponding to the previous variable display of the special symbol, is hidden without being moved. Also, the third reserved image 52 is displayed in the display area of the second reserved image 52 without being moved, and the second reserved image 52 is displayed in the display area of the first reserved image 52 without being moved. More specifically, the display position of the reserved image 52 that was displayed in the display area of the third reserved image 52 is instantly switched to the display area of the second reserved image 52 without any movement animation, and the display position of the reserved image 52 that was displayed in the display area of the second reserved image 52 is instantly switched to the display area of the first reserved image 52 without any movement animation.
Then, the second reserved image 52 (reserved image 52 whose display position has been switched to the display area of the second reserved image 52) is moved and displayed in the display area of the first reserved image 52 (a moving animation is performed from the display area of the second reserved image 52 to the display area of the first reserved image 52), and the first reserved image 52 (reserved image 52 whose display position has been switched to the display area of the first reserved image 52) is moved and displayed in the display area of the variable image 51 (a moving animation is performed from the display area of the first reserved image 52 to the display area of the variable image 51), thereby displaying the first reserved image 52 and the variable image 51.
Here, the time required to hide the first reserved image 52, which is the reserved image 52 corresponding to the previous variable display of the special pattern, the time required to display the third reserved image 52 in the display area of the second reserved image 52 (switching the display position), and the time required to display the second reserved image 52 in the display area of the first reserved image 52 (switching the display position) are all shorter than the time required for the moving display of the reserved image 52 (moving animation from the display area of the second reserved image 52 to the display area of the first reserved image 52, and moving animation from the display area of the first reserved image 52 to the display area of the variable image 51).
Furthermore, the decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56 begin to change, the first start operation is performed, and a first start emphasis image 588 is displayed around each of the three decorative symbols 41. The first zone execution image 537 is also hidden. The hold number display 55 for the first start port 121 is updated from "3" to "1." At this time, the upper and right keys of the performance keys 162 are operated, causing the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43 to be displayed. Meanwhile, neither the volume nor light intensity notification sound is output. The first start emphasis sound is also output.
After this, although not shown in the figure, as the next special symbol starts to change and display, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 start to change.

Next, as shown in Figure 239 (11), the decorative pattern 41 is changed at high speed. At this time, the upper and right keys of the effect keys 162 are operated, and the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are displayed. Meanwhile, neither the volume nor the light intensity notification sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 239 (12), the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 are fixed and stopped in association with the stop display of the special symbol. At this time, the upper and right keys of the effect key 162 are operated, and the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are displayed. Meanwhile, neither the volume notification sound nor the light intensity notification sound is output.
After the variable effect ends, when the upper key and the right key of the effect keys 162 are operated, the volume image 42 and the light amount image 43 are displayed. In addition, a volume notification sound and a light amount notification sound are output.
In the examples shown in Figures 238 (2) to (8) and Figures 239 (9) to (12), detailed illustrations are omitted, but the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43 are displayed in a display mode corresponding to the operation of the effect key 162 (a display mode indicating the volume and light intensity corresponding to the operation).

As described above, in this embodiment, if the variable start command for the variable performance in which the first start operation and chance eye performance are executed is not received normally by the performance control unit 300, the first start operation and chance eye performance are restricted, but the zone performance can be executed (see Figure 238 (7)).
Therefore, by limiting the effects that were scheduled to be executed, while preventing the effects from becoming unnatural due to the interruption of the effects that were already being executed, it is possible to indicate to the user of the pachinko game machine 100 that the fluctuation start command was not received properly by the effect control unit 300.

In the example shown in Figure 239, if the change start command for the change performance is not received by the performance control unit 300 and a change start command for the next change performance is received, the first reserved image 52 will become hidden without moving, the display positions of the third reserved image 52 and the second reserved image 52 will switch, and the newly displayed second reserved image 52 and first reserved image 52 will move (moving animation) due to the switch in display position, and the first reserved image 52 and changing image 51 will be displayed, but this is not limited to the above.
When three pending images 52 are displayed, if the change start command for the change performance is not received by the performance control unit 300 and a change start command for the next change performance is received, the third pending image 52 may be hidden without being moved (moving animation). Also, the second pending image 52 and the first pending image 52 may be moved (moving animation), thereby displaying the first pending image 52 and the changing image 51. In this case, there is no need to switch the display position without moving the pending image 52 (moving animation).
In other words, when multiple pending images 52 are displayed, if the change start command for the change performance is not received by the performance control unit 300 but the change start command for the next change performance is received, the pending image 52 displayed in the specific display area farthest from the changing image 51 will be hidden, and the pending image 52 displayed in a display area different from the specific display area will be displayed moving (moving animation) in the next display area.

In addition, when three or more pending images 52 are displayed, the effect control unit 300 may not receive the change start command for the first (first) change effect or the change start command for the next (second) change effect, and may instead receive the change start command for the next (third) change effect. In this case, the pending images 52 displayed in the first specific display area farthest from the change image 51 and the second specific display area next farthest from the change image 51 after the first specific display area will be hidden without being displayed in a moving manner (moving animation), and the pending images 52 displayed in a display area different from either the first or second specific display area will be displayed in a moving manner (moving animation) and displayed in the next display area.

238 and 239, when the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43 of modified example 1 (see FIGS. 53(1) and (2)) or the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43 of modified example 2 (see FIGS. 53(3) and (4)) are used, the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43 are displayed when the effect key 162 is operated at the timings shown in FIGS. 238(7) and (8) and 239(9) to (11). In other words, the restrictions on the display of the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43 at the end timing of the original variable effect (see FIG. 238(8)) are relaxed.
238 and 239, when the volume image and light intensity image of Modification Example 3 (see (5) to (8) of FIG. 53) are used, the customer waiting volume image 44 and the customer waiting light intensity image 45 will not be displayed even if the effect key 162 is operated at the timings shown in (7), (8) of FIG. 238 and (9) to (11) of FIG. 239. In other words, the restrictions on the customer waiting volume image 44 and the customer waiting light intensity image 45, which are relaxed to the end timing of the original variable effect, are extended.
In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which a volume alert sound and a light intensity alert sound are output when the effect key 162 is operated during execution of a variable effect, and when the effect key 162 is operated when the variable effect ends (when the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped), the volume alert sound and the light intensity alert sound are not output. In this case, when the effect key 162 is operated at the timing shown in Figures 238 (7), (8), and 239 (9) to (11), the volume alert sound and the light intensity alert sound are output. In other words, the restriction on the output of the volume alert sound and the light intensity alert sound at the original end timing of the variable effect (see Figure 238 (8)) is relaxed.

Next, a modified example of the presentation example shown in Figures 238 and 239 will be explained.
FIG. 240 shows a modified example of the rendering example shown in FIGS. 238 and 239.
First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 238(1) to (8) and Figures 239(9) and (10) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 240(1), the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 begin to change as the special pattern begins to change. At this time, the game control board 200B and the effect control board 300B become disconnected.

Next, the special symbol is displayed as stopped, but the performance control unit 300 cannot receive the change stop command, as shown in Figure 240 (2). In this case, the decorative symbol 41 continues to be temporarily stopped, and the small symbol 56 continues to change.
Thereafter, when the upper key and the right key of the effect keys 162 are operated, the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are displayed as shown in Fig. 240 (3). On the other hand, neither the volume notification sound nor the light intensity notification sound is output.

Next, the cause of the disconnection between the game control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B is resolved, and the game control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B are connected, as shown in Figure 240 (4). At this time, when the upper and right keys of the presentation keys 162 are operated, the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are displayed. Meanwhile, neither the volume notification sound nor the light intensity notification sound is output.
Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, the display of the special symbol begins to change. Then, as shown in FIG. 240 (5), when the performance control unit 300 receives a change start command, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 begin to change, the reserved image 52 is hidden, and the changing image 51 is displayed.

Then, with the stop display of the special symbol, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56, "623", are fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. 240(6). In addition, the variable image 51 is not displayed.
Then, after the variable effect has ended, when the upper and right keys of the effect keys 162 are operated, a volume image 42 and a light intensity image 43 are displayed, and a volume alert sound and a light intensity alert sound are output, as shown in FIG. 240 (7).

As described above, in this embodiment, if the change stop command for the change performance before the change performance in which the first start operation is executed is not received properly by the performance control unit 300, and the change start command for the change performance after the change performance in which the first start operation is executed is received by the performance control unit 300, the change performance will be executed according to the received change start command.
In this case, it is easier for the player to recognize which special pattern change related to which change start command is being executed, compared to when a change start command related to the change performance next to the change performance in which the first start operation is executed is received by the performance control unit 300 and a performance corresponding to the change performance in which the first start operation is executed is performed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if the change start command for the change performance in which the first start operation is executed is not received normally by the performance control unit 300, and the change start command for the next change performance is received by the performance control unit 300, the first start operation is executed, but the movement pattern of the pending image 52 will be different from normal.
In this case, even if the fluctuation start command is not received normally by the performance control unit 300, it is possible to prevent the performance from becoming unnatural. Also, even if the fluctuation start command is not received normally by the performance control unit 300, when the fluctuation start command for the next fluctuation performance is received by the performance control unit 300, the pending image 52 is displayed moving, so it is possible to prevent the number of pending numbers from being misidentified. On the other hand, by making the movement mode of the pending image 52 different between when the fluctuation start command is received normally by the performance control unit 300 and when it is not received normally, it is possible to make the user more reliably recognize that the fluctuation start command was not received normally by the performance control unit 300.

In addition, when the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43 of modified example 1 (see FIGS. 53(1) and (2)) or the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43 of modified example 2 (see FIGS. 53(3) and (4)) are used in the variable effect shown in Fig. 240, when the effect key 162 is operated at the timing shown in Fig. 240(2) to (5), the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43 are displayed. In other words, the restriction on the display of the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43 at the end timing of the original variable effect (see Fig. 240(2)) is relaxed.
Furthermore, when the volume image and light intensity image of Modification Example 3 (see (5) to (8) of FIG. 53) are used in the variable effect shown in FIG. 240, the customer waiting volume image 44 and the customer waiting light intensity image 45 are not displayed even if the effect key 162 is operated at the timing shown in (2) to (5) of FIG. 240. In other words, the restrictions on the customer waiting volume image 44 and the customer waiting light intensity image 45, which are relaxed to the end timing of the original variable effect, are extended.
In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which a volume alert sound and a light intensity alert sound are output when the effect key 162 is operated during execution of a variable effect, and when the effect key 162 is operated when the variable effect ends (when the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped), the volume alert sound and the light intensity alert sound are not output. In this case, when the effect key 162 is operated at the timing shown in Figures 240 (2) to (5), the volume alert sound and the light intensity alert sound are output. In other words, the restriction on the output of the volume alert sound and the light intensity alert sound at the original end timing of the variable effect (see Figure 240 (2)) is relaxed.

(Example of power cut during a variable effect)
Next, a description will be given of the situation in which the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off and then restored during the execution of a variable presentation.
241 to 243 are diagrams showing one example of a case where the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off during execution of a variable performance and then restored. In this example, it is assumed that the variable performance (see FIGS. 157 to 161) is performed when "ER11" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in FIG. 41.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 157 (1) to (8), 158 (9) to (16), and 159 (17) to (22) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 241 (1), the first reach effect begins, with the reach line image 539, reach suggestion image 540, reach emphasis image 541, and first reach eye emphasis image 542 displayed, and the first reach action is performed. Also, at this time, the central movable role object 115B, lamp L, and effect button 161 are lit in a light-emitting manner that corresponds to the progress of the variable effect. Also, background music (BGM including the first reach emphasis sound, etc.) that corresponds to the progress of the variable effect is output from the speaker 156.

Next, as shown in Figure 241 (2), the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off. At this timing, the first reach effect continues on the image display unit 114. In addition, the middle movable role object 115B, the lamp L, and the effect button 161 continue to light up, and background music continues to be output from the speaker 156.
Next, as shown in Figure 241 (3), sound is no longer output from the speaker 156. Meanwhile, the first reach effect continues in the image display unit 114. In addition, the middle movable role object 115B, the lamp L, and the effect button 161 continue to be lit.

Next, as shown in Figure 241 (4), the image display unit 114 turns off (the image is no longer displayed), while the central movable role object 115B, the lamp L, and the effect button 161 continue to be lit.
Next, as shown in Figure 241 (5), the effect button 161 is turned off. Meanwhile, the middle movable role object 115B and the lamp L continue to be lit.
Next, as shown in Figure 241 (6), the central movable part 115B is turned off. Meanwhile, the lamp L continues to be lit.
Next, as shown in FIG. 241(7), the lamp L is turned off.

Next, as shown in Figure 241 (8), the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on again (the power is restored).
Next, as shown in Figure 242 (9), a preparation image 627 is displayed. Meanwhile, the central movable role object 115B, the lamp L, and the effect button 161 are turned off, and no sound is output from the speaker 156. At this time, the player operates the upper and right keys of the effect key 162, but neither the volume nor the light intensity is changed, neither the volume image 42 nor the light intensity image 43 is displayed, and neither the volume notification sound nor the light intensity notification sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 242 (10), the lamp L and effect button 161 begin to light up. More specifically, they light up in a recovery mode (e.g., white) when power is turned on (the power is restored) to the pachinko gaming machine 100. Meanwhile, the central movable role piece 115B is turned off, and no sound is output from the speaker 156. Also, at this time, the player operates the upper and right keys of the effect keys 162, but neither the volume nor the light intensity is changed, neither the volume image 42 nor the light intensity image 43 is displayed, and neither the volume alert sound nor the light intensity alert sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 242 (11), the central movable device 115 moves to a position where it overlaps with the image display unit 114 and begins to light up. The movement and lighting of the central movable device 115 occurs in a recovery mode (e.g., red) when the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on (power is restored). Meanwhile, no sound is being output from the speaker 156. Also, at this time, the player operates the upper and right keys of the effect keys 162, but neither the volume nor the light intensity is changed, neither the volume image 42 nor the light intensity image 43 is displayed, and neither the volume alert sound nor the light intensity alert sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 242 (12), the center movable role object 115 moves upward and stops. Furthermore, no sound is output from the speaker 156. That is, no emphasis sound is output to emphasize the movable role object 115. At this time, the player operates the upper and right keys of the effect keys 162, but neither the volume nor the light intensity is changed, neither the volume image 42 nor the light intensity image 43 is displayed, and neither the volume notification sound nor the light intensity notification sound is output. Furthermore, the variation of the special symbol stops (it is displayed as stopped).
Next, as shown in FIG. 242 (13), the preparation image 627 disappears, and the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 are fixed and stopped by "123," which is a return mode associated with the power being turned on (power being restored) to the pachinko gaming machine 100. Also, one reserved image 52, reserved number display 55, stage image 61, stage notification image 501, and change count image 502 are displayed. Also, "1" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 of the first start slot 121. Meanwhile, no sound is output from the speaker 156. At this time, the player operates the upper and right keys of the effect keys 162, but neither the volume nor the light intensity is changed, neither the volume image 42 nor the light intensity image 43 is displayed, and neither the volume notification sound nor the light intensity notification sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 242 (14), the variable display of the next special symbol begins. Meanwhile, no sound is output from the speaker 156. At this time, the player operates the upper and right keys of the effect keys 162, but neither the volume nor the light intensity is changed, neither the volume image 42 nor the light intensity image 43 is displayed, and neither the volume notification sound nor the light intensity notification sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 242 (15), the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 begin to change. The changing image 51 is displayed, and the hold number display 55 in the first starting slot 121 is updated to "0." At this time, sound begins to be output from the speaker 156. More specifically, background music is output in accordance with the progress of the change effect. At this time, the player operates the upper and right keys of the effect keys 162, but neither the volume nor the light intensity is changed, neither the volume image 42 nor the light intensity image 43 is displayed, and neither the volume notification sound nor the light intensity notification sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 242 (16), the variable effect continues. Also, at this time, when the player operates the upper key and the right key of the effect key 162, the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are displayed. Furthermore, when the effect key 162 is operated, the volume and the light intensity are changed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 243 (17), the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56, "623", are fixed and stopped in association with the stop display of the special symbol. Also, the variable image 51 is no longer displayed. Also, the variable count image 502 is updated to "32 games."

244 to 246 are diagrams showing one example of a case where the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off during execution of a variable performance and then restored. In this example, the variable performance (see FIGS. 162 to 167) is performed when "EA1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in FIG. 41.
First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 162 (1) to (8), Figures 163 (9) to (16), Figures 164 (17) to (24), and Figures 165 (25) to (31) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 244 (1), in the first jackpot effect, a first jackpot notification sound is output, a vibration effect is executed, the central movable device 115B moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114, the central movable device 115B, effect button 161, and lamp L emit light in rainbow colors, and a first jackpot highlight image 566 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 244 (2), the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off. At this timing, the display of the first jackpot highlight image 566 continues. In addition, the vibration effect, the rainbow-colored illumination of the middle movable device 115B, the lamp L, and the effect button 161, and the output of the first jackpot notification sound continue. In addition, the middle movable device 115B stops at a position overlapping with the image display unit 114.
Next, as shown in FIG. 244 (3), sound is no longer output from the speaker 156. Meanwhile, the first jackpot highlight image 566 continues to be displayed. The vibration effect continues. The rainbow-colored illumination of the center movable role object 115B, the lamp L, and the effect button 161 continues.

Next, as shown in Figure 244 (4), the vibration effect ends. Meanwhile, the first jackpot highlight image 566 continues to be displayed. In addition, the center movable device 115B, the lamp L, and the effect button 161 continue to emit light in rainbow colors.
Next, as shown in Figure 244 (5), the image display unit 114 turns off (the image is no longer displayed). Meanwhile, the central movable part 115B, the lamp L, and the effect button 161 continue to emit light in rainbow colors.
Next, as shown in Figure 244 (6), the effect button 161 is turned off. Meanwhile, the middle movable part 115B and the lamp L continue to emit light in rainbow colors.
Next, as shown in Figure 244 (7), the middle movable part 115B is turned off. Meanwhile, the lamp L continues to emit light in rainbow colors.
Next, as shown in FIG. 244(8), the lamp L is turned off.

Next, as shown in Figure 245 (9), the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on again (the power is restored).
Next, as shown in Fig. 245 (10), a preparation image 627 is displayed. Meanwhile, the central movable role object 115B, the lamp L, and the effect button 161 are turned off, and no sound is output from the speaker 156. At this time, the player operates the upper and right keys of the effect key 162, but neither the volume nor the light intensity is changed, neither the volume image 42 nor the light intensity image 43 is displayed, and neither the volume notification sound nor the light intensity notification sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 245 (11), the lamp L and effect button 161 begin to light up. More specifically, they light up in a manner that accompanies the power being turned on (power being restored) to the pachinko gaming machine 100. Meanwhile, the central movable device 115B is turned off, and no sound is being output from the speaker 156. Also, at this time, the player operates the upper and right keys of the effect keys 162, but neither the volume nor the light intensity is changed, neither the volume image 42 nor the light intensity image 43 is displayed, and neither the volume alert sound nor the light intensity alert sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 245 (12), the central movable device 115 begins to move in a manner associated with the power being turned on (power being restored) to the pachinko gaming machine 100, and begins to light up. Meanwhile, no sound is being output from the speaker 156. Also, at this time, the player operates the upper and right keys of the effect keys 162, but neither the volume nor the light intensity is changed, neither the volume image 42 nor the light intensity image 43 is displayed, and neither the volume alert sound nor the light intensity alert sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 245 (13), the center movable device 115 moves upward and stops. Furthermore, no sound is output from the speaker 156. At this time, the player operates the upper and right keys of the effect keys 162, but neither the volume nor the light intensity changes, neither the volume image 42 nor the light intensity image 43 is displayed, and neither the volume notification sound nor the light intensity notification sound is output. Furthermore, the special symbol stops fluctuating (is displayed as stopped).
Next, as shown in FIG. 245 (14), the preparation image 627 is hidden, and the jackpot notification image 628 and the first right-hit image 503 are displayed. Meanwhile, no sound is output from the speaker 156. At this time, the player operates the upper and right keys of the effect keys 162, but neither the volume nor the light intensity is changed, neither the volume image 42 nor the light intensity image 43 is displayed, and neither the volume notification sound nor the light intensity notification sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 245 (15), sound is output from the speaker 156. More specifically, background music corresponding to the jackpot game is output. At this time, the player operates the upper and right keys of the effect keys 162, but neither the volume nor the light intensity is changed, neither the volume image 42 nor the light intensity image 43 is displayed, and neither the volume notification sound nor the light intensity notification sound is output.
Then, after a predetermined period of time (for example, one second) has elapsed from the state shown in Figure 245 (15), when the player operates the upper key and the right key of the effect keys 162, a volume image 42 and a light intensity image 43 are displayed, as shown in Figure 245 (16).

Next, when the jackpot game ends, as shown in FIG. 246 (17), the decorative symbol 41 with low decorativeness and the small symbol 56 "123" are fixed and stopped. Also, a stage image 61 corresponding to the third stage, a reserved number display 55, a first right-hit image 503, a stage notification image 501, and a time-saving remaining number image 504 are displayed. At this time, when the player operates the upper and right keys of the effect keys 162, the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are displayed. Meanwhile, neither the volume nor the light intensity notification sound is output. Furthermore, when the effect keys 162 are operated, the volume and the light intensity are changed.
Then, after a predetermined period of time (for example, one second) has elapsed from the state shown in Figure 246 (17), when the player operates the upper key and the right key of the effect keys 162, both the volume and the light intensity are changed, as shown in Figure 246 (18), and the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are displayed, and the volume alert sound and the light intensity alert sound are output.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off and then restored, no settings or notifications regarding the volume and light intensity are made until a predetermined period of time has passed since the power supply was restored, even if the effect key 162 is operated.
In this case, it is possible to prevent confusion as to whether the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off and then restored is due to the restoration state or the operation of the effect key 162.

In addition, the timing of the end of each effect shown in Figures 241 to 243 and Figures 244 to 246 when the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off during the execution of the variable effects is not limited to the above examples.
If the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off while the variable effect is being performed, the image display unit 114 may be turned off (the image will no longer be displayed) after the lamp L is turned off.
Furthermore, if the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off while a variable effect is being executed, the lamp L, the movable device 115, and the effect button 161 may be turned off at the same time.
Furthermore, if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off while a variable effect is being executed, the frame lamp 157 may be turned off after the board lamp 116 is turned off. Furthermore, if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off while a variable effect is being executed, the board lamp 116 may be turned off after the frame lamp 157 is turned off. If the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off while a variable effect is being executed, the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 may be turned off at the same time.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off while a jackpot effect is being executed, the lamp L, effect button 161, and movable role device 115 will continue to emit rainbow colors for a predetermined period of time after the power is cut off. In this case, from the time the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off until the various light-emitting devices (lamp L, effect button 161, and movable role device 115) are turned off, the various light-emitting devices may continue to emit rainbow colors by switching the light color, or may continue to emit light in the color that was emitted when the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 was cut off.

Furthermore, when the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off and then restored, the volume and light intensity may be set to the initial settings (for example, both "3").
Also, for example, when the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off and then restored while both the volume and light intensity are "1" in the second stage, it may be set to the first stage and both the volume and light intensity may be set to "3."
Also, for example, if the volume and light intensity are both "1" in the third stage and the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off and then restored, the settings may be maintained in the third stage and both the volume and light intensity may be set to "3."

(Variations of vibration effects)
FIG. 247 explains a modified example of vibration effects.
In the present embodiment, the vibration effect is achieved by vibrating the effect button 161. However, the effect body that vibrates in the vibration effect is not limited to the effect button 161.
As shown in FIG. 247 (1), when the variable effect starts, a vibration effect may be executed (see FIG. 162 (2) etc.). In this case, the vibration effect may be realized by vibrating the movable role object 115. In the illustrated example, the vibration effect is executed by vibrating the center movable role object 115.

Also, as shown in Figure 247 (2), a vibration effect may be executed during the first jackpot effect (see Figure 165 (32), etc.). In this case, the vibration effect may be realized by vibrating the movable part 115. In the example shown, the vibration effect is executed by vibrating the central movable part 115 at a position where it overlaps with the image display unit 114.

In this way, the vibrating performance element in the vibration performance may be a movable prop 115.
Although not shown in the drawings, in the vibration effect described above, the lamp L (board lamp 116, frame lamp 157) may vibrate instead of the movable prop 115. In other words, the performance object that vibrates in the vibration effect may be the lamp L (board lamp 116, frame lamp 157).

(Modification of left-handed image)
Figure 248 shows a modified example of the left-handed hit image.
In the present embodiment, the left-handed hit image has been described as the first left-handed hit image 47 and the second left-handed hit image 48. However, the display mode of the left-handed hit image is not limited to the above-described example.
248(1), when the special symbol stops, the decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped. At this time, the player launches the gaming ball toward the right side of the gaming area 111.

Next, when the execution condition for the first left hit notification (three game balls entering the gate 124 provided on the right side of the game area 111 during normal game mode) is met, the first left hit image 47 is displayed as shown in Fig. 248 (2). More specifically, the first left hit image 47 is displayed so as to move from the right side to the left side on the image display unit 114.
Next, as shown in Figure 248 (3), the first left-hand hit image 47 is displayed in the image display unit 114 so as to move further to the left, and the entire first left-hand hit image 47 is displayed. This first left-hand hit image 47 displays a text portion 47a and an emphasis portion 47c.

In the illustrated example, the text "Hit Left" is displayed as the text portion 47a. In addition, dashed line images extending in the left-right direction are displayed above and below the text portion 47a as the highlighting portion 47c. Even though such decorative images are displayed, they make the text portion 47a (left-hit image) more easily recognizable to the player, and therefore they are perceived as images that emphasize the text portion 47a (left-hit image).
In this way, the left-handed image does not need to have an arrow portion (see FIG. 54(2)). Note that the left-handed image may have an arrow portion but no character portion.

Next, as shown in Figure 248 (4), the first left-hand hit image 47 is displayed in an operational manner so as to move further to the left on the image display unit 114, so that part of the first left-hand hit image 47 is no longer displayed.
Then, as shown in Figure 248 (5), the first left-handed hit image 47 is displayed in an operational manner so as to move further to the left on the image display unit 114, and the first left-handed hit image 47 is no longer displayed.
In addition, even when the first left-hit image 47 shown in FIG. 248 is displayed, the first left-hit sound may be output.

(Variation of Variation Presentation Example 33)
Figure 249 shows a modified example of variation presentation example 33 (see Figure 222).
Next, a description will be given of a modified example of the variation presentation example 33. In the variation presentation example 33, after 100 variation presentations have been executed in the special time-saving game state, the variation presentation based on the reservation for the second start port 122 is executed without using the decorative pattern 41 (see FIG. 222 (6)), but the present invention is not limited to this.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 222(1) to (4) are performed, and then a second transitional image 622 and a result image 623 are displayed as shown in Figure 249(1).
Next, as shown in FIG. 249 (2), a stage image 61, a stage notification image 501, and a variation count image 502 are displayed. In the illustrated example, a stage image 61 corresponding to the first stage is displayed, the stage notification image 501 displays the text "Space," and the variation count image 502 displays the text "100 games." Furthermore, a second left-hand hit image 48 is displayed and a second left-hand hit sound is output. In the second left decorative pattern 41, the effects described using FIGS. 54 (7), (8), and 55 (9) to (12) are performed. Furthermore, "1" is displayed in the hold number display 55 of the second starting slot 122, but the hold image 52 is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 249(3), as the next special symbol starts to change, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 start to change. The changing image 51 is also displayed. The reserved number display 55 of the second start port 122 is updated to "0."
Next, as shown in FIG. 249 (4), three decorative symbols 41, "472," temporarily stop. At this time, the left and right decorative symbols 41 perform a first stop action, and the center decorative symbol 41 performs a second stop action. A first stop emphasis image 572 is displayed around each of the left and right decorative symbols 41, and a fourth stop emphasis image 575 is displayed around the center decorative symbol 41. A first stop emphasis sound is also output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 249(5), the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56, "472", are fixed and stopped in association with the stop display of the special symbol. Also, the variable image 51 is not displayed. Also, the variable count image 502 is updated to "101 games."
249(2) is a variable effect based on the result of the special symbol lottery being a jackpot, the left-hit notification may not be executed. Also, even if the variable effect that starts at the timing shown in FIG. 249(2) is a variable effect based on the result of the special symbol lottery being a jackpot (variable effect shown in FIGS. 162 to 167), the second left-hit notification may be executed.

(Modification of prodromal enhancement image)
Next, a modified example of the prognostic-enhanced image will be described.
250 shows a modified example of the precursor-enhanced image. Note that the modified example of the precursor-enhanced image described below is a modified example of the third precursor-enhanced image 518 (see FIGS. 70(1) and 70(2)).

First, before the button effect begins, as shown in FIG. 250 (1), the display of an omen-emphasized image (third omen-emphasized image 518) begins. In a modified example, a button image 509 is displayed as the omen-emphasized image (third omen-emphasized image 518). More specifically, the button image 509 is displayed in an enlarged form as the omen-emphasized image (third omen-emphasized image 518). Furthermore, the button image 509 as the omen-emphasized image (third omen-emphasized image 518) is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the number of reserved balls display 55, and the small pattern 56. Furthermore, the button image 509 as the omen-emphasized image (third omen-emphasized image 518) is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and behind the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the number of reserved balls display 55, and the small pattern 56.

Next, as shown in Fig. 250(2), the button image 509 as the prognosis-enhanced image (third prognosis-enhanced image 518) is displayed in a reduced size, thereby making the left and right decorative patterns 41 easier to see.
Then, as shown in FIG. 250(3), the button image 509 is displayed in a further reduced size until the entire button image 509 is displayed, and the button effect begins.

In this way, the precursor emphasis image may be button image 509. In this case, the display of the precursor emphasis image is regarded as an emphasis effect that emphasizes the display of button image 509 at the same time as button image 509 is displayed. In other words, the timing of displaying the precursor emphasis image need not be just before button image 509 is displayed, but may be any time before button image 509 is displayed.
250 shows an example in which the button image 509 is displayed as a precursor emphasis image by changing its display size, but this is not limiting. The precursor emphasis image may be displayed as a precursor emphasis image by changing its transparency from high to low over time. The precursor emphasis image may be displayed as a precursor emphasis image by increasing the display size of the button image 509 over time.

In addition, when the button image 509 is displayed as an aura-enhanced image, the button image 509 may be displayed in different display or operating modes (different enlarged display modes, different reduced display modes, different transparency change modes, etc.) for each aura-enhanced image (first aura-enhanced image 508, second aura-enhanced image 513, third aura-enhanced image 518, fourth aura-enhanced image 527, fifth aura-enhanced image 530, sixth aura-enhanced image 534).

Furthermore, at the time shown in Figures 250 (1) and (2), although button image 509 is displayed, the button effect has not yet started and the operation valid period for the button effect has not yet begun. Therefore, even if effect button 161 is operated at the time shown in Figures 250 (1) and (2), the operation of effect button 161 is not accepted and the post-operation highlighted image is not displayed.

Furthermore, in addition to displaying an aura-enhancing image simulating light, an aura-enhancing image using button image 509 as shown in FIG. 250 may also be displayed. In this case, the display of the aura-enhancing image using button image 509 may begin after the display of the aura-enhancing image simulating light has begun. Furthermore, the display of the aura-enhancing image using button image 509 may begin after the display of the aura-enhancing image using button image 509 has begun. In other words, if there is a time when both an aura-enhancing image simulating light and an aura-enhancing image using button image 509 are displayed, the display of either of the aura-enhancing images may begin first, or they may begin displaying simultaneously. Furthermore, in this case, the aura-enhancing image using light may be displayed in an area overlapping the display area of the aura-enhancing image using button image 509, in a layer in front of the aura-enhancing image using button image 509.

(Modification of the starting operation)
251 shows a modified example of the starting operation. In this modified example, it is assumed that the player repeatedly presses the lower and left keys of the effect keys 162 (for example, once every second).
First, as shown in Fig. 251 (1), the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 and small pattern 56 are fixed and stopped. At this time, the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, the small pattern 56, the stage image 61, the stage notification image 501, and the number of changes image 502 are displayed. At this time, the reserved number display 55 of the first start port 121 shows "0".

Next, as shown in FIG. 251 (2), a stop action is performed when the change of the decorative pattern 41 is stopped. In the stop action, each character of the three decorative patterns 41 is displayed leaning to the right and waving their right hand up and down. Furthermore, while the change is stopped, the stop action is performed periodically. The period of the stop action is, for example, 0.3 seconds.
In the illustrated example, the entire stopped action is easily visible due to the right decorative pattern 41 and the center decorative pattern 41. On the other hand, in the left decorative pattern 41, a part of the character is covered by the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 (displayed on the rear layer), so the action display of the stopped action is difficult or impossible to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 251 (3), the game ball enters the first start opening 121. In this case, the reserved number display 55 of the first start opening 121 is updated to "1" and the reserved image 52 is displayed. Meanwhile, the stopped operation by the three decorative symbols 41 continues.
Next, as shown in FIG. 251 (4), the change effect begins with the start of the special symbol change display, the pending image 52 moves to display the change image 51, the pending number display 55 of the first start port 121 is updated to "0," and the change by the small symbol 56 begins. Furthermore, with the start of the change effect, the decorative symbols 41 move upward, and a first start emphasis image 588 is displayed around each of the three decorative symbols 41. Meanwhile, the stop action continues. That is, from the time the change is stopped to the start of the change effect, the decorative symbols 41 tilt and the right hand continues to wave (the action is progressing). Thus, in this modified example, the periodic movement display of the decorative symbols 41 that was performed during the change stop continues (continuously) as the start action. Furthermore, a first start emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 251 (5), a change is started by three decorative symbols 41. In this change effect, any of the change effects described above (the effect after the start of the change effect) may be performed.

(Emphasis on temporary stop)
Next, the temporary stop highlighting effect will be described. The temporary stop highlighting effect is an effect that highlights the decorative symbol 41 while the decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped.
252 and 253 are diagrams showing the temporary stop highlighting effect. In addition, in Fig. 252 to Fig. 261, the display area of the decorative pattern 41 on the image display unit 114 and the surrounding area of this area are shown enlarged. Also, in Fig. 252 to Fig. 261, for the sake of simplicity, the illustration and explanation of each of the effects described above as being executed in the variable effect are omitted.
First, as shown in Figure 252 (1), in the variation performance, three decorative patterns 41 are varied.
Next, as shown in Figure 252 (2), the left decorative pattern 41 is displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 252 (3), the left decorative pattern 41 moves upward at high speed. Then, a temporary stop of the left decorative pattern 41 begins. In this example, a temporary stop is performed in which the decorative pattern 41 swings up and down. Then, with the start of the temporary stop, a temporary stop highlighting effect begins. In the example shown, the display mode of the decorative pattern 41 changes as a temporary stop highlighting effect. More specifically, the lower part of the letters in the left decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a reflected manner.

Next, as shown in Figure 252 (4), the left decorative pattern 41 descends during the temporary stop. Also, as an effect to emphasize the temporary stop, the portion displayed in a reflected manner in the decorative pattern 41 changes. More specifically, the central portion of the character in the left decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a reflected manner.
Next, as shown in Figure 252 (5), the left decorative pattern 41 further descends during the temporary stop. Also, as an effect to emphasize the temporary stop, the portion of the decorative pattern 41 displayed in a reflected manner changes. More specifically, the upper portion of the characters in the left decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a reflected manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 252 (6), the left decorative pattern 41 rises during the temporary stop. Furthermore, as a temporary stop highlight effect, the portion of the decorative pattern 41 displayed in a reflected manner changes. More specifically, the central portion of the characters in the left decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a reflected manner. The position and display manner of the decorative pattern 41 at this time are the same as those shown in FIG. 252 (4). That is, the movement of the decorative pattern 41 due to the temporary stop and the movement display of the decorative pattern 41 due to the temporary stop highlight effect are linked.
In addition, a right decorative pattern 41 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the right decorative pattern 41 is positioned below the left decorative pattern 41.

Next, as shown in Figure 252 (7), the left decorative symbol 41 rises further during the temporary stop. Also, during the temporary stop highlighting effect, the lower part of the characters in the left decorative symbol 41 is displayed in a reflected manner. After this, the left decorative symbol 41 periodically performs the linked temporary stop and temporary stop highlighting effect until the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped.
In addition, the right decorative pattern 41 moves upward at high speed and reaches a position where it is aligned vertically with the left decorative pattern 41. Then, the right decorative pattern 41 starts to temporarily stop, and a temporary stop highlighting effect starts. In the illustrated example, the temporary stop highlighting effect is achieved by displaying the lower part of the characters in the right decorative pattern 41 in a reflected manner.

Next, as shown in Fig. 252 (8), the left and right decorative symbols 41 descend during the temporary stop. Also, as an effect to emphasize the temporary stop, the center of the characters of the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a reflected manner.
In this way, in this embodiment, the newly temporarily stopped decorative pattern 41 is synchronized with the decorative pattern 41 that has already been temporarily stopped, and a temporary stop and temporary stop highlighting effect is performed.

Next, as shown in Figure 253 (9), the left and right decorative patterns 41 further descend during the temporary stop. Additionally, to emphasize the temporary stop, the upper portions of the letters in the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a reflected manner.

Next, as shown in Fig. 253 (10), the left and right decorative symbols 41 rise during the temporary stop. Also, as an effect to emphasize the temporary stop, the center of the characters of the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a reflected manner.
Also displayed is a center decorative pattern 41. In the illustrated example, the center decorative pattern 41 is positioned below the decorative patterns 41 on the left and right.

Next, as shown in Fig. 253 (11), the left and right decorative symbols 41 rise further during the temporary stop. Also, in the temporary stop highlighting effect, the lower parts of the characters of the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a reflected manner.
Furthermore, the middle decorative pattern 41 moves upward at high speed until it reaches a position where it is aligned with the left and right decorative patterns 41 in the vertical direction. Then, the middle decorative pattern 41 starts to temporarily stop, and a temporary stop highlighting effect starts. In the illustrated example, the temporary stop highlighting effect is achieved by displaying the lower part of the characters of the middle decorative pattern 41 in a reflected manner.

Next, as shown in Fig. 253 (12), the three decorative symbols 41 descend during the temporary stop. Also, as an effect to emphasize the temporary stop, the three decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a manner such that the center portions of the letters are reflected.
Then, as the special symbols stop varying, the three decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped as shown in Fig. 253 (13). This ends the temporary stop and the temporary stop highlighting effect, and the display mode of the three decorative symbols 41 returns to the mode before the temporary stop highlighting effect started.

As described above, in this embodiment, emphasis effects are periodically performed using the decorative patterns 41 that are temporarily stopped.
In addition, in the left and right decorative patterns 41, the temporary stop highlighting effect ends after one or more cycles of the action display in the temporary stop highlighting effect, while in the center decorative pattern 41, the temporary stop highlighting effect ends before one cycle of the action display in the temporary stop highlighting effect. However, even in the center decorative pattern 41, one or more cycles of the action display in the temporary stop highlighting effect may be performed before the temporary stop highlighting effect ends.
In addition, the part whose display mode has changed due to the temporary stop highlighting effect (the part displayed in a reflected manner in Figures 252 and 253) may be referred to as a temporary stop highlighting image below.
The period of the action display by the temporary stop highlighting effect is, for example, 1.5 seconds, but the period of the action display by the temporary stop highlighting effect may be any period.

254 is a diagram showing a temporary stop highlighting effect. In the following example, an example of a variable effect based on the reservation of the first start port 121 being "4" will be described.
First, as shown in Figure 254 (1), in the change performance, three decorative patterns 41 change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 254(2), three decorative patterns 41 are displayed.
Next, as shown in Figure 254 (3), the three decorative symbols 41 move upward at high speed. Then, the three decorative symbols 41 begin to temporarily stop, and a temporary stop highlighting effect begins. In the illustrated example, the lower portions of the characters in the three decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a reflected manner.

Next, as shown in Fig. 254 (4), the three decorative symbols 41 descend during the temporary stop. Also, as an effect to emphasize the temporary stop, the three decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a manner such that the center portions of the letters are reflected.
Then, as the special symbols stop varying, the three decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped as shown in Fig. 254 (5). This ends the temporary stop and the temporary stop highlighting effect, and the display mode of the three decorative symbols 41 returns to the mode before the temporary stop highlighting effect started.

In this way, in a variable effect based on the hold of the first start port 121 being "4", the temporary stop highlight effect ends before one cycle of the action display in the temporary stop highlight effect is completed in the three decorative patterns 41. However, even in a variable effect based on the hold of the first start port 121 being "4", one or more cycles of the action display in the temporary stop highlight effect may be performed in the three decorative patterns 41 before the temporary stop highlight effect is completed.
Furthermore, in a scattered variation effect based on the hold of the first starting port 121 being "4", the temporary stop emphasis effect ends before the operation display in the temporary stop emphasis effect of the three decorative patterns 41 completes one cycle, whereas in a miss variation effect in which an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect is executed, the temporary stop emphasis effect may end after the display of the switching image 586 (see Figure 153 (23) etc.) after the operation display in the temporary stop emphasis effect of the three decorative patterns 41 completes one cycle or more.
Furthermore, there are cases where the fluctuation stop command for the random fluctuation performance based on the hold of the first start port 121 being "4" is not received by the performance control unit 300, and the fluctuation stop command for the next fluctuation performance is received by the performance control unit 300. In this case, in the fluctuation performance based on the hold of the first start port 121 being "4", the operation display in the temporary stop highlight performance of the three decorative patterns 41 may be one cycle or more before the temporary stop highlight performance ends.

In the example shown in Fig. 237-1, the temporary stop highlighting effect using three decorative symbols 41 is executed from time T6 to time T7. In the example shown in Fig. 237-2, the temporary stop highlighting effect using three decorative symbols 41 is executed from time T26 to time T28. Here, the time from time T26 to time T28 is longer than the time from time T6 to time T7.
Then, from time T6 to time T7 and from time T26 to time T28, the operation display in the temporary stop highlighting effect of the three decorative symbols 41 is performed for one or more cycles.
The number of periods of the operation display executed as the temporary stop highlighting effect of the three decorative patterns 41 is greater from time T26 to time T28 than from time T6 to time T7.

Figure 255 shows the decorative pattern 41 when the variable performance starts.
First, as shown in Figure 255 (1), it is assumed that the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped.
Next, as shown in Figure 255 (2), the variable effect starts with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol. At this time, the start operation is performed, and the three decorative symbols 41 rise. In the illustrated example, the lower parts of the letters of the three decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a reflected manner.

Then, as shown in Figure 255 (3), the decorative pattern 41 begins to change.
In this way, the temporary stop highlighting image may be displayed during the start operation. That is, the temporary stop highlighting effect may be executed while the start operation is being executed.

Figures 256 and 257 are diagrams showing the temporary stop highlighting effect after the start of the reach effect.
First, after the reach effect (see FIG. 146(9)) starts, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed as shown in FIG. 256(1).
Next, as shown in Fig. 256(2), the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in an expanding manner. In this way, the left and right decorative symbols 41 may be expanded after the start of the reach effect.

Next, as shown in Figure 256 (3), the left and right decorative patterns 41 begin to temporarily stop, and a temporary stop highlighting effect begins. In the example shown, the left and right decorative patterns 41 rise, and the lower parts of the characters in the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a reflected manner.

Next, as shown in Fig. 256 (4), the left and right decorative symbols 41 descend during the temporary stop. Also, as an effect to emphasize the temporary stop, the center of the characters of the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a reflected manner.
Next, as shown in Fig. 256 (5), the left and right decorative symbols 41 further descend during the temporary stop. Also, as an effect to emphasize the temporary stop, the upper parts of the characters of the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a reflected manner.

Next, as shown in Fig. 256 (6), the left and right decorative symbols 41 rise during the temporary stop. Also, as an effect to emphasize the temporary stop, the center of the characters of the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a reflected manner.
In addition, a center decorative pattern 41 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the center decorative pattern 41 is positioned below the left and right decorative patterns 41. In addition, the center decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a smaller display size than the left and right decorative patterns 41.

Next, as shown in Fig. 256 (7), the left and right decorative symbols 41 rise further during the temporary stop. Also, in the temporary stop highlighting effect, the lower parts of the characters of the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a reflected manner.
Furthermore, the middle decorative pattern 41 moves upward at high speed until it reaches a position where it is aligned with the left and right decorative patterns 41 in the vertical direction. Then, the middle decorative pattern 41 starts to temporarily stop, and a temporary stop highlighting effect starts. In the illustrated example, the temporary stop highlighting effect is achieved by displaying the lower part of the characters of the middle decorative pattern 41 in a reflected manner.

Next, as shown in Fig. 256 (8), the three decorative symbols 41 descend during the temporary stop. Also, as an effect to emphasize the temporary stop, the three decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a manner such that the center portions of the letters are reflected.
Then, as the special symbols stop varying, the three decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. 257 (9). This ends the temporary stop and the temporary stop highlighting effect, and the display mode of the three decorative symbols 41 returns to the mode before the temporary stop highlighting effect started. In addition, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are reduced in size to return to the display size before the start of the reach effect.

Figure 258 shows a temporary stop highlighting effect when the SP reach effect is being executed.
258(1), in the SP reach effect, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped and the effect of emphasizing the temporary stop is executed. In the example shown, the effect of emphasizing the temporary stop is displayed by reflecting the upper part of the characters of the left and right decorative symbols 41.
In addition, after the development image 584 (see FIG. 153 (19)) is hidden, the middle decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a moving manner.

Next, as shown in Figure 258 (2), the left and right decorative patterns 41 rise during the temporary stop. Furthermore, as an emphasis effect during the temporary stop, the center portions of the characters in the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a reflected manner. Furthermore, the middle decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the center of the image display unit 114.

Next, as shown in Fig. 258 (3), the left and right decorative symbols 41 rise further during the temporary stop. In addition, in the temporary stop highlighting effect, the lower parts of the characters of the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a reflected manner.
In addition, the central decorative pattern 41 moves upward at high speed. Then, the central decorative pattern 41 starts to temporarily stop, and a temporary stop highlighting effect starts. In the illustrated example, as the temporary stop highlighting effect, the lower part of the characters in the central decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a reflected manner.

Next, as shown in Fig. 258 (4), the three decorative symbols 41 descend during the temporary stop. Also, as an effect to emphasize the temporary stop, the three decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a manner such that the center portions of the letters are reflected.
Next, as shown in Fig. 258 (5), the three decorative symbols 41 further descend during the temporary stop. Also, as an effect to emphasize the temporary stop, the upper parts of the letters of the three decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a reflected manner.
Next, as shown in Fig. 258 (6), the three decorative symbols 41 rise during the temporary stop. Also, as an effect to emphasize the temporary stop, the three decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a manner such that the center of the letters is displayed in a reflected manner.

Next, as shown in Fig. 258 (7), the three decorative symbols 41 rise further during the temporary stop. Also, as an effect to emphasize the temporary stop, the lower parts of the letters of the three decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a reflected manner.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 153 (22) to (24) are executed.
In this way, in the SP reach effect, the operation display in the temporary stop highlight effect is performed for one cycle or more in the middle decorative pattern 41 before the temporary stop highlight effect ends.

In addition, Figure 258 explains the temporary stop highlighting effect when the SP reach effect is being executed.
Here, even when the SPSP reach effect is being executed, the temporary stop highlight effect shown in Fig. 258 may be executed. More specifically, after the post-sixth button image 590 (see Fig. 161 (34)) is displayed, the display of the decorative pattern 41 of the miss and the temporary stop highlight effect may be executed in the manner shown in Fig. 258.

Figure 259 is a diagram showing a temporary stop highlighting effect using decorative patterns 41 with the same number of digits.
First, an emphasis effect using the doublet decorative symbols 41 (see FIG. 166 (40)) is performed, and then, as shown in FIG. 259 (1), a temporary stop is performed using the doublet decorative symbols 41, and an emphasis effect during the temporary stop is executed. In the illustrated example, as the emphasis effect during the temporary stop, the centers of the characters of the three decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a reflected manner.

Next, as shown in Fig. 259 (2), the three decorative symbols 41 rise during the temporary stop. Also, as an effect to emphasize the temporary stop, the lower parts of the letters of the three decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a reflected manner.
Next, as shown in Fig. 259 (3), the three decorative symbols 41 descend during the temporary stop. In addition, as an effect to emphasize the temporary stop, the center portions of the letters of the three decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a reflected manner.

Next, as shown in Fig. 259 (4), the three decorative symbols 41 further descend during the temporary stop. Also, as an effect to emphasize the temporary stop, the upper parts of the letters of the three decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a reflected manner.
Next, as shown in Fig. 259 (5), the three decorative symbols 41 rise during the temporary stop. Furthermore, as a temporary stop highlight effect, the center portions of the characters of the three decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a reflective manner. Thus, for the double-digit decorative symbols 41, the motion display in the temporary stop highlight effect is performed for one or more cycles before the temporary stop highlight effect ends.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figure 167 (41) to (46) are performed.

237-1, the temporary stop highlighting effect using the doublet decorative symbols 41 is executed over a period from time T17 to time T18 (time t2). Also, in the example shown in FIG. 237-2, the temporary stop highlighting effect using the doublet decorative symbols 41 is executed over a period from time T37 to time T39 (time t4).
In this case, the emphasis effect continues even after the timing at which the variable effect would normally end, thereby preventing a decline in interest.
Furthermore, the number of periods of the operation display executed as the temporary stop highlighting effect of the three decorative patterns 41 is greater from time T37 to time T39 than from time T17 to time T18.

(Variations of the temporary stop highlighting effect)
260 is a diagram showing a modified example of the temporary stop highlighting effect. The change in the display mode of the decorative pattern 41 due to the temporary stop highlighting effect is not limited to the above-described example.
260(1), a temporary stop and a temporary stop highlight effect are executed for the decorative pattern 41. In the illustrated example, in the temporary stop highlight effect, the face of the character in the decorative pattern 41 is hidden by the text.

Next, as shown in Fig. 260 (2), the decorative symbols 41 rise during the temporary stop. Also, as an effect to emphasize the temporary stop, the face of the character in the decorative symbols 41 is displayed in motion so as to appear above the text.
260(3), the decorative symbols 41 rise further during the temporary stop. Also, to emphasize the temporary stop, the face and part of the body of the character in the decorative symbols 41 are displayed in motion so that they appear above the characters.

Next, as shown in Fig. 260(4), the decorative pattern 41 descends during the temporary stop. To emphasize the temporary stop, the character's body in the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a motion so that it is hidden by the text. The display mode of the decorative pattern 41 at this time is the same as that shown in Fig. 260(2).
Next, as shown in Fig. 260(5), the decorative pattern 41 further descends during the temporary stop. Also, as an effect to emphasize the temporary stop, the character face of the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a motion so that it is hidden by the text. The display mode of the decorative pattern 41 at this time is the same as that shown in Fig. 260(1).
In this way, the display of the decorative patterns 41 shown in Figures 260 (1) to (5) may be periodically executed as a temporary stop highlighting effect.

(Other variations of the temporary stop highlighting effect)
Figure 261 shows another modified example of a temporary stop highlighting effect.
261(1), a temporary stop and a temporary stop highlight effect are executed for the decorative pattern 41. In the illustrated example, in the temporary stop highlight effect, the center of the characters in the decorative pattern 41 are displayed in a reflected manner.

261(2), the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped, and the character position does not change, while the character turns to the left. Also, as an effect to emphasize the temporary stop, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a motion such that the lower part of the character is displayed in a reflected manner.
261(3), the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped, and the character position does not change, while the characters face forward. Also, during the temporary stop highlighting effect, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a motion such that the center of the characters is displayed in a reflected manner.

261(4), the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped, and the character position does not change, while the characters face to the right. Also, as an effect to emphasize the temporary stop, the upper part of the characters of the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a reflected manner.
261(5), the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped, and the character position does not change, while the characters face forward. Also, during the temporary stop highlighting effect, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a motion such that the center of the characters is displayed in a reflected manner.
In this way, the operational display of the decorative pattern 41 shown in Figures 261 (1) to (5) may be periodically executed as a temporary stop highlighting effect.

The temporary stop highlighting effect may be achieved by changing the display mode of the decorative pattern 41 (part of the decorative pattern 41 becomes the display mode of the temporary stop highlighting image), or by adding the temporary stop highlighting image to a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 in the display area of the decorative pattern 41, thereby changing the visibility of the decorative pattern 41.
Furthermore, even during execution of the temporary stop highlighting effect, the decorative pattern 41 may overlap with the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43. In this case, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a layer behind the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43, making the temporary stop highlighting effect difficult or impossible to see.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that when the decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops, a stop-time action and a stop emphasis image are displayed. Here, a temporary stop emphasis effect may be started when the stop-time action and the stop emphasis image are being displayed. In this case, if the stop emphasis image is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41, the stop emphasis image makes the temporary stop emphasis effect difficult to see or impossible to see. More specifically, in the area of the decorative pattern 41 that overlaps with the stop emphasis image, the temporary stop emphasis effect becomes difficult to see or impossible to see. On the other hand, the visibility of the temporary stop emphasis effect is not affected by the stop-time action.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that the start action and the display of the start emphasis image are performed when the decorative pattern 41 begins to change. Here, a temporary stop emphasis effect may be started when the start action and the display of the start emphasis image are being performed. In this case, if the start emphasis image is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41 and on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41, the start emphasis image makes the temporary stop emphasis effect difficult to see or impossible to see. More specifically, in the area of the decorative pattern 41 that overlaps with the start emphasis image, the temporary stop emphasis effect becomes difficult to see or impossible to see. On the other hand, the visibility of the temporary stop emphasis effect is not affected by the start action.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a variable effect using the decorative pattern 41 shown in Figure 223 is executed, a temporary stop highlighting effect is not executed.
In addition, the temporary stop highlighting effect using a specific decorative pattern 41 (for example, the middle decorative pattern 41) among the three decorative patterns 41 may not be executed.

In this embodiment, the display sizes of the highlighted images are different from each other. Specifically, the ratio of the area overlapping with the display area of the decorative pattern 41 to the decorative pattern 41 is different from each other. Furthermore, the ratio of the display area to the decorative pattern 41 is different from each other.
Here, the temporary stop highlighted image may have the lowest ratio of the area overlapping with the display area of the decorative pattern 41 to the decorative pattern 41 among all the highlighted images. Also, the temporary stop highlighted image may have the lowest ratio of the display area to the decorative pattern 41 among all the highlighted images. Also, the temporary stop highlighted image may have the smallest display size among all the highlighted images.
Furthermore, the chance eye emphasis image 587 may have the highest ratio of the area overlapping with the display area of the decorative pattern 41 to the decorative pattern 41 among all the emphasis images. Furthermore, the chance eye emphasis image 587 may have the highest ratio of the display area to the decorative pattern 41 among all the emphasis images. Furthermore, the chance eye emphasis image 587 may have the largest display size among all the emphasis images.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the decorative pattern 41 starts to change, the visibility of the decorative pattern 41 and the start emphasis image gradually decreases (the transparency of the decorative pattern 41 and the start emphasis image increases, the decorative pattern 41 and the start emphasis image become hidden by other effect images, etc.), while the decorative pattern 41 changes at high speed. On the other hand, when the decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops, the transparency of the decorative pattern 41 gradually decreases and the stopped emphasis image becomes invisible, gradually improving the visibility of the decorative pattern 41. Furthermore, the decorative pattern 41 may maintain a high state of visibility from the start of the change until the temporary stop.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that a variable effect is performed in which three decorative patterns 41 are displayed together (see Figure 144 (3) and Figure 254 (2)).
In this case, the three decorative symbols 41 may be temporarily stopped simultaneously. Also, the three decorative symbols 41 may be temporarily stopped approximately simultaneously, and do not have to be temporarily stopped at the same timing.
In addition, in a variable effect in which three decorative symbols 41 temporarily stop simultaneously or approximately simultaneously, a temporary stop highlight effect may not be executed. In addition, the proportion of the temporary stop highlight image to the decorative symbols 41 in the temporary stop highlight effect may be smaller in a variable effect in which three decorative symbols 41 temporarily stop simultaneously or approximately simultaneously than in a variable effect in which three decorative symbols 41 temporarily stop in order.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned change performances, the three decorative patterns 41 may start changing in order (for example, left decorative pattern 41, right decorative pattern 41, middle decorative pattern 41), the three decorative patterns 41 may start changing simultaneously, or the three decorative patterns 41 may start changing approximately simultaneously.
In either manner in which the fluctuation is started, the temporary stop emphasis image may be displayed when the start operation is performed. Also, in the case where three decorative patterns 41 start to fluctuate simultaneously or three decorative patterns 41 start to fluctuate approximately simultaneously, the temporary stop emphasis image may not be displayed when the start operation is performed. Furthermore, in the case where three decorative patterns 41 start to fluctuate simultaneously or three decorative patterns 41 start to fluctuate approximately simultaneously, the proportion of the temporary stop emphasis image to the decorative patterns 41 in the temporary stop emphasis performance may be smaller when three decorative patterns 41 start to fluctuate simultaneously or three decorative patterns 41 start to fluctuate approximately simultaneously than when three decorative patterns 41 start to fluctuate in sequence.

In addition, there are variation modes in which the pattern (middle decorative pattern 41, etc.) that starts to change last (temporarily stops) is smaller (or larger) than the decorative patterns 41 on the left and right. In such cases, it is possible to make the proportion of the temporary stop emphasis image of the pattern (middle decorative pattern 41, etc.) that starts to change last (temporarily stops) in the middle decorative pattern 41 smaller (or larger) than the proportion of the temporary stop emphasis images of the left and right decorative patterns 41 in the left and right decorative patterns 41.

In addition, the proportion of the temporary stop highlight image in the decorative pattern 41 may be smaller in the time-shortened game state than in the normal game state. In addition, the display size of the temporary stop highlight image may be smaller in the time-shortened game state than in the normal game state.
In addition, in this embodiment, the start emphasis image and the stop emphasis image are displayed not only in areas overlapping with the display area of the decorative pattern 41 but also in areas not overlapping with the display area of the decorative pattern 41, while the temporary stop emphasis image may be displayed only in areas overlapping with the display area of the decorative pattern 41.

In the present embodiment, it has been described that a reach symbol emphasizing image or a double symbol emphasizing image is displayed.
Here, when the reach symbol emphasis image or the doublet symbol emphasis image is displayed, the temporary stop emphasis image may be displayed. In this case, the temporary stop emphasis image is displayed in a layer behind the reach symbol emphasis image or the doublet symbol emphasis image. Therefore, in the part (or the entirety) of the decorative pattern 41 where the reach symbol emphasis image or the doublet symbol emphasis image overlaps, the temporary stop emphasis image becomes difficult to see or cannot be seen.

Also, in this embodiment, it has been described that various operation displays are executed by the decorative symbols 41. Here, among the operation displays of the decorative symbols 41, operation displays other than the temporary stop (start operation, stop operation, reach operation, operation of the decorative symbols 41 with double numbers, etc.) are not executed periodically. In other words, among the operation displays of the decorative symbols 41, operation displays other than the temporary stop (start operation, stop operation, reach operation, operation of the decorative symbols 41 with double numbers, etc.) are not executed repeatedly, but are executed only once.
It has also been described that an emphasis image that emphasizes the decorative pattern 41 is displayed. Here, the display (operational display) of the emphasis images (start emphasis image, reach symbol emphasis image, doublet emphasis image, stop emphasis image, etc.) other than the provisional stop emphasis image among the various emphasis images that emphasize the decorative pattern 41 is not executed periodically. In other words, the display (operational display) of the emphasis images (start emphasis image, reach symbol emphasis image, doublet emphasis image, stop emphasis image, etc.) other than the provisional stop emphasis image among the various emphasis images that emphasize the decorative pattern 41 is not executed repeatedly, but is executed only once.
Furthermore, the display (operational display) of the precursor emphasis image and the post-operation emphasis image is not performed periodically, i.e., the display (operational display) of the precursor emphasis image and the post-operation emphasis image is not performed repeatedly but is performed only once.
Furthermore, any of the above-described highlighted images may be displayed in motion.

(Volume Limit)
Next, the restriction on the volume of the sound output from the speaker 156 of the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be described.
In the present embodiment, the volume of the sound output from the speaker 156 is set to one of a plurality of levels. Here, an upper limit of the volume to be output may be set according to the level of the volume setting.

Let's consider a case where the volume is set to one of seven levels. In this case, if the volume is "7," the upper limit is set to 95 dB. If the volume is "6," the upper limit is set to 90 dB. If the volume is "5," the upper limit is set to 85 dB. If the volume is "4," the upper limit is set to 80 dB. If the volume is "3," the upper limit is set to 75 dB. If the volume is "2," the upper limit is set to 70 dB. If the volume is "1," the upper limit is set to 65 dB.

In addition, the upper limit of the volume level that can be set by the player operating the effect key 162 may be set by an administrator of the pachinko gaming machine 100. For example, the administrator sets the upper limit of the volume level that can be set by operating the effect key 162 to "4." In this case, the volume levels that can be set by operating the effect key 162 are "1," "2," "3," and "4." In other words, the upper limit of the volume that can be set by operating the effect key 162 is 80 dB.

The administrator may set the upper limit of the volume level that can be set by the player operating the effect key 162, for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered on. More specifically, when the effect button 161 is operated while the preparation image 627 (see FIG. 242 (9)) is displayed, a setting screen may be displayed for setting the upper limit of the volume level that can be set by operating the effect key 162. Then, by operating the effect key 162 or the effect button 161 on the setting screen, the upper limit of the volume level that can be set by subsequent operation of the effect key 162 may be set.

In this embodiment, it has been described that a start action is executed. Here, the start action may be a movement or movement of the entire decorative pattern 41, or a movement or movement of only the character portion of the decorative pattern 41.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it was explained that a left-hit sound is output when a left-hit notification is executed during a variable effect. In this case, even when a sound effect corresponding to the variable effect is being output, the left-hit sound may be output without restriction.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the identification image or specific image is the stage notification image 501, but the present invention is not limited to this.
The identification image or specific image may be, for example, a zone execution image (first zone execution image 537, second zone execution image 613). In this case, the specific portion of the identification image or specific image may be a text portion of the zone execution image ("X zone", "Y zone"). Furthermore, the highlighting portion of the identification image or specific image may be a mark portion of the zone execution image ("◯, △, □, ◇", "●, ▲, ■, ◆").
In addition, in the identification image or the specific image, the specific portion and the highlighting portion may be provided integrally or separately.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that in the first left-hand hit image 47 (see FIG. 54(2)), the highlighting portion 47c highlights the arrow portion 47b (first left-hand hit image 47).
When the arrow portion 47b and the background portion 47d are displayed, the player is more likely to notice the first left-hit image 47, and as a result, the character portion 47a is more likely to be noticed. Therefore, the arrow portion 47b and the background portion 47d can also be regarded as highlighting portions that emphasize the character portion 47a (first left-hit image 47).
Furthermore, when the character portion 47a and the background portion 47d are displayed, the player is more likely to notice the first left-hit image 47, and as a result, the player is more likely to notice the arrow portion 47b. Therefore, the character portion 47a and the background portion 47d can also be regarded as an emphasis portion that emphasizes the arrow portion 47b (first left-hit image 47).

In the present embodiment, the highlighting portion 47c is associated with the arrow portion 47b, but is not limited to this. The highlighting portion 47c may be associated with the text portion 47a to emphasize the text portion 47a.
Furthermore, it is sufficient that at least one of the character portion 47 a and the arrow portion 47 b is provided in the first left-hand hit image 47. Furthermore, the first left-hand hit image 47 does not necessarily have to have the highlight portion 47 c or the background portion 47 d.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that in the second left-handed hit image 48 (see FIG. 54(8)), the highlighting portion 48c highlights the arrow portion 48b (second left-handed hit image 48).
When the arrow portion 48b and the background portion 48d are displayed, the player is more likely to notice the second left-hit image 48, and as a result, the character portion 48a is more likely to be noticed. Therefore, the arrow portion 48b and the background portion 48d can also be regarded as highlighting portions that emphasize the character portion 48a (second left-hit image 48).
Furthermore, when the character portion 48a and the background portion 48d are displayed, the player is more likely to notice the second left-hit image 48, and as a result, the player is more likely to notice the arrow portion 48b. Therefore, the character portion 48a and the background portion 48d can also be perceived as highlighting portions that emphasize the arrow portion 48b (second left-hit image 48).

In the present embodiment, the highlighting portion 48c is associated with the arrow portion 48b, but is not limited to this. The highlighting portion 48c may be associated with the text portion 48a to emphasize the text portion 48a.
Furthermore, it is sufficient that at least one of the character portion 48a and the arrow portion 48b is provided in the second left-hand hit image 48. Furthermore, the second left-hand hit image 48 does not necessarily have to have the highlight portion 48c or the background portion 48d.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the second left-handed hit notification is executed by the notifications described using Figures 54 (7), (8) and Figures 55 (9) to (12), but this is not limited to this.
The notifications described using Figures 54(7) and (8) and Figures 55(9) to (12) may be executed as the first left-handed hit notification. In this case, the left-handed hit notifications shown in Figures 154, 155, 168 to 170, 205, 206, and 208-2 may be the first left-handed hit notification.

In addition, in the left-hit notifications shown in Figures 154, 155, 168 to 170, 205, 206, and 208-2, the second left-hit sound is output, but this is not limited to this.
In the left-handed hit notifications shown in Figures 154, 155, 168 to 170, 205, 206, and 208-2, a left-handed hit warning sound may be output.

In addition, in this embodiment, the left-handed hit notification described using Figures 154, 155, 168 to 170, 205, 206, and 208-2 is the left-handed hit notification shown in Figures 54 (7), (8), and 55 (9) to (12), but is not limited to this.
As the left-handed hit notification described using Figures 154, 155, 168 to 170, 205, 206, and 208-2, the left-handed hit notification described using Figures 54 (2) to (6) may be executed instead of the left-handed hit notification shown in Figures 54 (7), (8), and 55 (9) to (12).

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that the background portion 503c is displayed in the first right-hit image 503 (see Figure 57 (1)).
When the background portion 503c is displayed, the first right-hit image 503 is more likely to be noticed by the player, and as a result, the character portion 503a and the arrow portion 503b are more likely to be noticed. Therefore, the background portion 503c can also be regarded as an emphasis portion that emphasizes the character portion 503a and the arrow portion 503b (first right-hit image 503).
Furthermore, the first right-hit image 503 only needs to have at least one of the character portion 503a and the arrow portion 503b, and does not necessarily need to have the background portion 503c.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that in the second right-hit image 507 (see FIG. 58(2)), the highlighting portion 507c highlights the arrow portion 507b (second right-hit image 507).
When the arrow portion 507b and the background portion 507d are displayed, the player is more likely to notice the second right-hit image 507, and as a result, the character portion 507a is more likely to be noticed. Therefore, the arrow portion 507b and the background portion 507d can also be regarded as highlighting portions that emphasize the character portion 507a (second right-hit image 507).
Furthermore, when the character portion 507a and the background portion 507d are displayed, the player is more likely to notice the second right-hit image 507, and as a result, the player is more likely to notice the arrow portion 507b. Therefore, the character portion 507a and the background portion 507d can also be regarded as an emphasis portion that emphasizes the arrow portion 507b (second right-hit image 507).

In the present embodiment, the highlighting portion 507c is associated with the arrow portion 507b, but is not limited to this. The highlighting portion 507c may be associated with the text portion 507a to emphasize the text portion 507a.
Furthermore, the second right-hit image 507 only needs to have at least one of the character portion 507a and the arrow portion 507b, and does not necessarily need to have the highlight portion 507c or the background portion 507d.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second specific image is a left-handed hit image (first left-handed hit image 47, second left-handed hit image 48), but this is not limited to this.
The second specific image may be a right-hit image (first right-hit image 503, second right-hit image 507).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the decorative pattern 41 is described as being displayed in a stopped state. Here, the "stop display" of the decorative pattern 41 (performance pattern) includes both a provisional stop display and a confirmed stop display.

In the present embodiment, various emphasis images (a reach line image 539, a first reach eye emphasis image 542, a second reach eye emphasis image 543, a third reach eye emphasis image 544, a fourth reach eye emphasis image 545, a fifth reach eye emphasis image 546, a sixth reach eye emphasis image 547, a seventh reach eye emphasis image 548, an eighth reach eye emphasis image 549, a ninth reach eye emphasis image 550, a development emphasis image 554, a first stop emphasis image 572, a second stop emphasis image 573, a third stop emphasis image 574, a fourth stop emphasis image 575, a fifth stop emphasis image 578, a sixth stop emphasis image 579, a pseudo consecutive emphasis image 582, a first development teasing emphasis image 585, a chance eye emphasis image 586, a 7, first start emphasis image 588, first doublet emphasis image 591, promotion teaser emphasis image 592, first reach teaser emphasis image 597, second doublet emphasis image 598, seventh stop emphasis image 602, eighth stop emphasis image 603, ninth stop emphasis image 604, tenth stop emphasis image 605, eleventh stop emphasis image 608, twelfth stop emphasis image 609, second development teaser emphasis image 610, second start emphasis image 611, third doublet emphasis image 614, fourth doublet emphasis image 615, thirteenth stop emphasis image 616, second reach teaser emphasis image 617, fifth doublet emphasis image 620, fourteenth stop emphasis image 624, third reach teaser emphasis image 625, and sixth doublet emphasis image 626) are displayed.
Here, various emphasis images that emphasize the decorative pattern 41 (performance pattern) may be displayed around (around) the decorative pattern 41 (performance pattern), and may not be displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41 (performance pattern). Also, various emphasis images that emphasize the decorative pattern 41 (performance pattern) may not be displayed around (around) the decorative pattern 41 (performance pattern), but may be displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41 (performance pattern). Also, various emphasis images that emphasize the decorative pattern 41 (performance pattern) may be displayed around (around) the decorative pattern 41 (performance pattern) and in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41 (performance pattern). Furthermore, when various highlighting images that emphasize the decorative pattern 41 (performance pattern) are displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41 (performance pattern), these various highlighting images may be displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 (performance pattern), on a layer behind the decorative pattern 41 (performance pattern), or on the same layer as the decorative pattern 41 (performance pattern).

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it has been described that each prognostic emphasis image and each post-operation emphasis image are displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41, but the present invention is not limited to this.
Each precursory emphasis image may be displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 , while each post-operation emphasis image may be displayed on a layer behind the decorative pattern 41 .
In addition, each precursory emphasis image may be displayed on a layer behind the decorative pattern 41, while each post-operation emphasis image may be displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the decorative pattern 41 (performance pattern) stops (temporarily stops), various emphasis images (first stop emphasis image 572, second stop emphasis image 573, third stop emphasis image 574, fourth stop emphasis image 575, fifth stop emphasis image 578, sixth stop emphasis image 579, pseudo consecutive emphasis image 582, chance number emphasis image 587, first doublet emphasis image 591, second doublet emphasis image 598, seventh stop emphasis image 602, eighth stop emphasis image 603, ninth stop emphasis image 604, tenth stop emphasis image 605, eleventh stop emphasis image 608, twelfth stop emphasis image 609, third doublet emphasis image 614, fourth doublet emphasis image 615, thirteenth stop emphasis image 616, fifth doublet emphasis image 620, fourteenth stop emphasis image 624, sixth doublet emphasis image 626) are displayed.
Here, the display timing of the various highlighted images displayed when the decorative pattern 41 (performance pattern) stops (temporarily stops) may be just before the decorative pattern 41 (performance pattern) stops (temporarily stops), may be just after the decorative pattern 41 (performance pattern) stops (temporarily stops), or may be simultaneously with the stopping (temporarily stopping) of the decorative pattern 41 (performance pattern). In other words, the display timing of the various highlighted images displayed when the decorative pattern 41 (performance pattern) stops (temporarily stops) may be any timing as long as it is "when the decorative pattern 41 (performance pattern) stops (temporarily stops)."

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the performance control unit 300 changes the performance mode before the start of a specific performance and after the start of a specific performance (changing the display mode of the highlighting performance, changing the display mode of the changing performance, changing the execution time of the highlighting performance).
Here, the timings at which different types of effects are performed, "before the start of a specific effect" and "after the start of a specific effect," are not limited to times in one variable effect (the same variable effect). In other words, "before the start of a specific effect" and "after the start of a specific effect" may be times in different variable effects.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that in one button performance, change performances that change the display mode of the button image 509 (such as the operation display of the button section 509a, the display (operation display) of the button highlight section 509c, and the operation display of the highlight character 509d) are repeatedly performed, but this is not limited to this.
For example, in the button presentation, the operation display of the button section 509a and the display (operation display) of the button highlight section 509c may be performed periodically (repeatedly), while the operation display of the highlighted character 509d may not be performed periodically (repeatedly) (performed only once). Furthermore, the operation display of the button section 509a and the display (operation display) of the highlighted character 509d may be performed periodically (repeatedly), while the display (operation display) of the button highlight section 509c may not be performed periodically (repeatedly) (performed only once). Furthermore, the display (operation display) of the button highlight section 509c and the display (operation display) of the highlighted character 509d may be performed periodically (repeatedly), while the operation display of the button section 509a may not be performed periodically (repeatedly) (performed only once). Furthermore, even in the button presentation in which the highlighted character 509d is not displayed, the same configuration may be used, except that the highlighted character 509d is not displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute an emphasis effect in response to the operation of the effect button 161 when an operation effect (button effect) is being executed, and it has been explained that examples of the emphasis effect include displaying an emphasis image after the operation.
Here, the emphasis effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 161 when the operation effect (button effect) is being executed may be the display of an emphasis image during operation (first emphasis image during operation 514, second emphasis image during operation 531).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the button effect, and the seventh post-operation emphasis image 519 (see FIG. 161(33)), the fifteenth post-operation emphasis image 528 (see FIG. 215(10)), or the seventeenth post-operation emphasis image 532 (see FIG. 219(5)) is displayed, a jackpot game is not executed. Therefore, the seventh post-operation emphasis image 519, the fifteenth post-operation emphasis image 528, and the seventeenth post-operation emphasis image 532 can also be considered as images suggesting that the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the button effect, if the eighth post-operation highlighted image 520 (see FIG. 165 (31)), the fourteenth post-operation highlighted image 526 (see FIG. 207 (6)), the sixteenth post-operation highlighted image 529 (see FIG. 217 (10)), the eighteenth post-operation highlighted image 533 (see FIG. 221 (4)), or the nineteenth post-operation highlighted image 535 (see FIG. 229 (8)) is displayed, a jackpot game is executed. Therefore, the eighth post-operation highlighted image 520, the fourteenth post-operation highlighted image 526, the sixteenth post-operation highlighted image 529, the eighteenth post-operation highlighted image 533, and the nineteenth post-operation highlighted image 535 can also be regarded as images suggesting that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the various post-operation emphasis images (first post-operation emphasis image 510, second post-operation emphasis image 511, third post-operation emphasis image 512, fourth post-operation emphasis image 515, fifth post-operation emphasis image 516, sixth post-operation emphasis image 517, seventh post-operation emphasis image 519, eighth post-operation emphasis image 520, ninth post-operation emphasis image 521, tenth post-operation emphasis image 522, eleventh post-operation emphasis image 523, twelfth post-operation emphasis image 524, thirteenth post-operation emphasis image 525, fourteenth post-operation emphasis image 526, fifteenth post-operation emphasis image 528, sixteenth post-operation emphasis image 529, seventeenth post-operation emphasis image 532, eighteenth post-operation emphasis image 533, and nineteenth post-operation emphasis image 535) are images that correspond to the operation of the effect button 161 when the button effect is being executed. Here, the display of various post-operation emphasis images can also be considered as emphasis effects that emphasize the results of operating the effect button 161. In addition, the display of various post-operation emphasis images can also be considered as emphasis effects that emphasize that the effect button 161 has been operated.

In addition, in this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 is capable of executing a specific presentation (jackpot presentation) in the variable presentation that suggests that a jackpot game will be played, and when the specific presentation is played, it is capable of executing a predetermined emphasis presentation. Examples of the predetermined emphasis presentation include the output of a jackpot notification sound, the display of a jackpot emphasis image, a vibration presentation, a role presentation, and the illumination of the presentation button 161, lamp L, and movable role presentation 115 in rainbow colors. Here, the predetermined emphasis presentation can also be considered as an emphasis presentation that emphasizes the result of the special pattern lottery (that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot). The predetermined emphasis presentation can also be considered as an emphasis presentation that emphasizes that a jackpot game will be played.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the start suggestion effect and the ongoing suggestion effect are executed in the SPSP reach effect, but this is not limited to this.
The start suggestion effect and the in-execution suggestion effect may be executed in the SP reach effect. Also, the start suggestion effect and the in-execution suggestion effect may be executed in the normal reach effect. Furthermore, the start suggestion effect and the in-execution suggestion effect may be executed before the start of the normal reach effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display time (execution time of the button effect, valid operation period for the button effect) of the button section 509a for each button effect (first button effect to twenty-second button effect) has been explained (see Figure 101).
Here, in each button effect (first button effect to twenty-second button effect), the gauge portion 509b of the button image 509 starts to display at the same timing as the button portion 509a, and ends to display at the same timing as the button portion 509a. Therefore, the display time of the button portion 509a in each button effect (first button effect to twenty-second button effect) can also be regarded as the display time of the gauge portion 509b.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the specific notification can be a left-handed hit notification. Here, the execution time of the specific notification can be the display time of the left-handed hit image (first left-handed hit image 47, second left-handed hit image 48), the output time of the left-handed hit sound (first left-handed hit sound, second left-handed hit sound), the flashing time of the lamp L for the second left-handed hit notification, etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are displayed in a layer in front of each effect image when superimposed on each effect image, but this is not limited to this.
When the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are displayed superimposed on each effect image, they may be displayed on a layer behind each effect image.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when various jackpot emphasis images (first jackpot emphasis image 566, second jackpot emphasis image 567, third jackpot emphasis image 568, fourth jackpot emphasis image 569, fifth jackpot emphasis image 570) are displayed, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed on a layer behind the various jackpot emphasis images, thereby making the decorative pattern 41 difficult or impossible to see, but this is not limited to this.
When various jackpot emphasis images (first jackpot emphasis image 566, second jackpot emphasis image 567, third jackpot emphasis image 568, fourth jackpot emphasis image 569, fifth jackpot emphasis image 570) are displayed, decorative pattern 41 is not displayed, and thus decorative pattern 41 may be difficult to see or not visible. In other words, when various jackpot emphasis images are displayed, if decorative pattern 41 is difficult to see or not visible, decorative pattern 41 may be displayed or not visible.

In addition, in this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 can execute a specific presentation (jackpot presentation) in a variable presentation that suggests that a jackpot game will be played, and can execute a predetermined emphasis presentation when a jackpot presentation is played. Examples of the predetermined emphasis presentation include outputting a jackpot notification sound, displaying a jackpot emphasis image, vibration presentation, role presentation, and rainbow-colored illumination of the presentation button 161, the lamp L, and the movable role presentation 115. The adjustment means that can be operated by the player and used to adjust the presentation effects include a first adjustment means (presentation key 162) and a second adjustment means (background volume adjustment volume 300S) that is different from the first adjustment means. It has been explained that when a predetermined emphasis presentation is being played, if the first adjustment means is operated, the presentation control unit 300 can execute a specific notification regarding the presentation effect (see Figure 232 (8)), and if the second adjustment means is operated, the presentation control unit 300 can not execute a specific notification (see Figure 232 (7)). An example of the specific notification is the display of a volume image 42.
Here, the performance control unit 300 may output a volume notification sound when the performance key 162 is operated while a predetermined emphasis performance is being executed, and may not output a volume notification sound when the back volume adjustment volume 300S is operated.
Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 may output a volume notification sound when the performance key 162 is operated while a predetermined emphasis performance is being performed, and may not display the volume image 42 when the back volume adjustment volume 300S is operated. Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 may display a volume image 42 when the performance key 162 is operated while a predetermined emphasis performance is being performed, and may not output a volume notification sound when the back volume adjustment volume 300S is operated. In other words, when a predetermined emphasis performance is being performed,
The "specific notification" that can be executed when the first adjustment means is operated and the "specific notification" that cannot be executed when the second adjustment means is operated may be different specific notifications.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 has been described as making the stop action of the decorative pattern 41 and the display mode of the stop emphasis image different between the first stage and the second stage when the decorative pattern 41 stops, but is not limited to this. The performance control unit 300 may make one of the stop action of the decorative pattern 41 and the display mode of the stop emphasis image common and the other different between the first stage and the second stage when the decorative pattern 41 stops.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the performance control unit 300 has been described as varying both the stop action of the decorative pattern 41 and the display mode of the stop emphasis image in accordance with the characters of the decorative pattern 41 in one stage, but is not limited to this. The performance control unit 300 may make one of the stop action of the decorative pattern 41 and the display mode of the stop emphasis image common and the other different in accordance with the characters of the decorative pattern 41 in one stage.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the performance control unit 300 changes both the action display of the double-digit decorative pattern 41 and the double-digit emphasis image depending on the characters of the double-digit decorative pattern 41 in one stage, but this is not limited to this.
In one stage, the performance control unit 300 may vary either the action display of the double-digit decorative pattern 41 or the double-digit emphasis image according to the characters of the double-digit decorative pattern 41, and may make the other the same.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of volume levels that can be adjusted by operating the effect key 162 is different from the number of volume levels that can be adjusted by operating the back volume control volume 300S, but this is not limited to this. The number of volume levels that can be adjusted by operating the effect key 162 and the number of volume levels that can be adjusted by operating the back volume control volume 300S may be the same.
Furthermore, the number of volume levels that can be set by the performance control unit 300 and the number of volume levels that can be adjusted by operating the background volume control volume 300S may be the same.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the left-hit sounds (first left-hit sound, second left-hit sound, left-hit warning sound) are output at a constant volume regardless of the volume setting made by operating the effect key 162, but this is not limited to this.
The volume of the left-hit sounds (first left-hit sound, second left-hit sound, left-hit warning sound) may be changed by operating the effect key 162. Also, while the volume of the first left-hit sound is changed by operating the effect key 162, the volume of the second left-hit sound and the left-hit warning sound may not be changed even if the effect key 162 is operated.
In addition, in the third embodiment, the volume of the sound (voice, warning sound, etc.) that accompanies the occurrence of an error (magnetic error, etc.) described later may not change regardless of the state in which the effect key 162 is operated, and may always be output at maximum volume.

In addition, in this embodiment, the left-handed hit images (first left-handed hit image 47, second left-handed hit image 48) are displayed on a layer behind the volume image (volume image 42, customer waiting volume image 44) and the light intensity image (light intensity image 43, customer waiting light intensity image 45), but are not limited to this.
The left-handed hit images (first left-handed hit image 47, second left-handed hit image 48) may be displayed on a layer in front of the volume images (volume image 42, customer waiting volume image 44) and light intensity images (light intensity image 43, customer waiting light intensity image 45). Also, the first left-handed hit image 47 may be displayed on a layer behind the volume images (volume image 42, customer waiting volume image 44) and light intensity images (light intensity image 43, customer waiting light intensity image 45), while the second left-handed hit image 48 may be displayed on a layer in front of the volume images (volume image 42, customer waiting volume image 44) and light intensity images (light intensity image 43, customer waiting light intensity image 45).

In addition, in the present embodiment, the execution mode of the left-handed hit notification is the same in the first stage and the second stage, but this is not limited to this.
The performance control unit 300 may change the display mode (operation display mode) of the left-hit notification image between the first stage and the second stage. Also, the left-hit notification sound may be changed between the first stage and the second stage. In other words, the performance control unit 300 may change the notification mode of the left-hit notification between the first stage and the second stage.

Also, in the variation performance example 8, the image 590 after the sixth button is hidden when the decorative pattern 41 of the missing number is displayed (see Figure 161 (35), (36)), but this is not limited to this.
The sixth button post image 590 may be displayed even when the missing decorative pattern 41 is displayed (see Fig. 161 (35) and (36)). In this case, the sixth button post image 590 is displayed in an area overlapping the display area of the missing decorative pattern 41, in a layer behind the missing decorative pattern 41.

Also, in the variable performance example 28, when the image 619 after the 11th button is displayed, the decorative pattern 41 of the missing number is not displayed (see Figure 215 (11)), but this is not limited to this.
Even when the after-11 button image 619 is displayed (see FIG. 215 (11)), the missing decorative pattern 41 may be displayed. In this case, the after-11 button image 619 is displayed in an area overlapping the display area of the missing decorative pattern 41, and is displayed in a layer behind the missing decorative pattern 41.

Also, in the variable performance example 31, when the image 621 after the 12th button is displayed, the decorative pattern 41 of the missing number is not displayed (see Figure 219 (6)), but this is not limited to this.
Even when the 12th button post image 621 is displayed (see FIG. 219(6)), the missing decorative pattern 41 may be displayed. In this case, the 12th button post image 621 is displayed in an area overlapping the display area of the missing decorative pattern 41, and is displayed in a layer behind the missing decorative pattern 41.

Furthermore, each post-button image may be displayed on the fifth layer LA5 (see FIG. 147 (2)) in the image display unit 114. That is, the post-button image may be displayed on a layer behind the decorative pattern 41, volume image, light intensity image, and various emphasis images.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display mode of the background is different between the left-handed hit image (first left-handed hit image 47, second left-handed hit image 48) and the right-handed hit image (first right-handed hit image 503, second right-handed hit image 507), but this is not limited to this.
The display format of the background may be the same for the left-handed hit images (first left-handed hit image 47, second left-handed hit image 48) and the right-handed hit images (first right-handed hit image 503, second right-handed hit image 507).

Furthermore, the display position and size of the left-hit notification image and the right-hit notification image may differ. For example, the first left-hit image 47 may be displayed in a different position from the first right-hit image 503 and may be larger in display size than the first right-hit image 503.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that a plurality of effect images with different action display cycles are displayed.
Here, if the period of the motion display of one effect image and the period of the motion display of another effect image are different, the motion speeds are also different. In this case, the motion display of one effect image and the motion display of another effect image can also be considered to have different motion modes.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when a big win effect is executed, the lamp L emits light in response to the big win effect.
Here, when a specific emphasis effect is executed, the lamp L may be configured to emit light in response to this specific emphasis effect. Examples of the specific emphasis effect include a reach effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, a button effect, and the like.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the volume image and the light intensity image are displayed on the same layer as the pending number display 55 and the small pattern 56, but this is not limited to this.
The volume image and light intensity image may be displayed on a layer in front of the pending number display 55 and small pattern 56, or on a layer behind the pending number display 55 and small pattern 56.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that when the SP reach performance is being executed, a moving image (SP reach image 552) corresponding to the SP reach performance is displayed as the background across the entire display area of the image display unit 114.
Here, even when the SPSP reach performance is being executed, a moving image corresponding to the SPSP reach performance may be displayed as a background in the entire display area of the image display unit 114. In this case, the moving image corresponding to the SPSP reach performance is displayed in a display mode (operation mode) different from the moving image corresponding to the SP reach performance.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the volume notification sound and the light amount notification sound are different sounds, but the present invention is not limited to this.
The volume notification sound and the light amount notification sound may be the same sound.

In this embodiment, it has been explained that a special feature performance is executed. Here, the special feature performance can also be understood as the performance of the movable feature 115 from when the movable feature 115 starts to move until when the movable feature 115 returns to its position before the movement.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that even if the characters are the same decorative pattern 41, different stop emphasis images are displayed when the left decorative pattern 41 or the right decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops and when the middle decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops, but this is not limited to this.
When the left decorative pattern 41 or the right decorative pattern 41 that is temporarily stopped and the center decorative pattern 41 have the same character, the same stop emphasis image may be displayed when the left decorative pattern 41 or the right decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped and when the center decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in certain stages (first stage, second stage), the stop action executed when the middle decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops and the stop emphasis image displayed are different between the variable performance in which the reach performance is not executed and the variable performance in which the reach performance is executed, even if the decorative pattern 41 has a common odd or even number (see Figure 143 (9), Figure 149 (14)), but this is not limited to this.
In a variable performance in which a reach performance is executed, if the decorative pattern 41 has an odd or even number in common with a variable performance in which a reach performance is not executed, the stop action executed when the middle decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops and the stop emphasis image displayed may be common to the variable performance in which a reach performance is not executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it has been described that in the variable effect based on the result of the special symbol lottery being a jackpot, the promotion teasing effect may not be executed, but this is not limited to this. In the variable effect based on the result of the special symbol lottery being a jackpot, the promotion teasing effect may be executed without fail.
In addition, in each of the above-mentioned variable effects in which a promotion teasing effect is being executed, the promotion teasing effect may not be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, different role effects (different operations of the movable role object 115) are executed when the development effect is executed and when the jackpot effect is executed, but this is not limited to this.
The role effect (the operation of the movable role object 115) may be the same when the development effect is executed and when the big win effect is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the pseudo consecutive performance is executed, the decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops in the variable performance and then changes and is displayed again, but this is not limited to this.
Even when a pseudo consecutive performance is executed after the start of the variable performance, it is not necessary to temporarily stop and again display the variable of the decorative pattern 41. Also, when a pseudo consecutive performance is executed after the start of the variable performance, the variable of the decorative pattern 41 may be displayed again without temporarily stopping the decorative pattern 41.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it has been described that the decorative pattern 41 is difficult to see or cannot be seen during the execution of each big win effect, but the present invention is not limited to this.
While the decorative pattern 41 may be difficult or impossible to see during the first, third, or fifth jackpot effects, the doublet decorative pattern 41 may be easily visible during the second jackpot effect. Specifically, during the second jackpot effect, the second jackpot highlight image 567 may be displayed only on a portion of the image display unit 114, thereby making the doublet decorative pattern 41 easily visible. Furthermore, during the second jackpot effect, the decorative pattern 41 may be displayed on a layer in front of the second jackpot highlight image 567, thereby making the doublet decorative pattern 41 easily visible. However, even in this case, when the second left-hit image 48 is displayed during the second jackpot effect, the doublet decorative pattern 41 becomes more difficult to see than when the second left-hit image 48 is not displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the SPSP reach effect is executed in the special time-saving gaming state, but this is not limited to this.
In the special time-saving gaming state, the SPSP reach effect may not be executed, but the SP reach effect may be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that there are SP reach effects and SPSP reach effects, but the present invention is not limited to this.
The SP reach effect and the SPSP reach effect may be regarded as a single effect. That is, the SP reach effect and the SPSP reach effect may be collectively referred to as the SP reach effect.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 displays the button image 509 after displaying the prognosis-emphasizing image, but this is not limited to this.
The performance control unit 300 may display the button image 509 while displaying the foreshadowing image. More specifically, the button image 509 may be displayed after the foreshadowing image has started to be displayed but before it has finished. Here, "after the foreshadowing image has started to be displayed but before it has finished" includes a state in which the foreshadowing image has started to be hidden (for example, the transparency of the foreshadowing image has started to increase), but at least a portion of the foreshadowing image is still displayed. In this case, the performance control unit 300 may display the foreshadowing image in an area overlapping the display area of the button image 509, on a layer in front of the button image 509. Alternatively, the foreshadowing image may be displayed in an area overlapping the display area of the button image 509, on a layer behind the button image 509. Alternatively, the foreshadowing image may be displayed in an area including the display area of the button image 509, on the same layer as the button image 509.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 displays the post-operation emphasis image after hiding the button image 509, but this is not limited to this.
The performance control unit 300 may display a post-operation emphasis image while displaying the button image 509. More specifically, the post-operation emphasis image may be displayed after the button image 509 starts to be displayed but before it ends. Here, "after the button image 509 starts to be displayed but before it ends" includes a state in which the button image 509 starts to be hidden (for example, the transparency of the button image 509 starts to increase) but at least a portion of the button image 509 remains displayed. Furthermore, if the performance button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the button performance, the performance control unit 300 may display the post-operation emphasis image after the performance button 161 is operated and after the button image 509 starts to be displayed but before it ends. In this case, the performance control unit 300 may display the post-operation emphasis image in an area overlapping the display area of the button image 509, on a layer in front of the button image 509. Furthermore, the post-operation emphasis image may be displayed in an area overlapping the display area of the button image 509, on a layer behind the button image 509. The post-operation emphasis image may be displayed in an area including the display area of the button image 509 and on the same layer as the button image 509 .

In addition, the sound output as the big win notification sound may also change in accordance with the change in the display mode of the big win highlight image.
The big win notification sound can also be regarded as a device emphasis sound that emphasizes the movable device 115.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that in the variable presentation, background music is output in accordance with the progress of the game.
Here, the background music may be different before and after the start of the reach effect in the variable effect. In addition, the background music may be the same before and after the start of the reach effect, and the background music may be different before and after the output of the first action emphasis sound (before the action display of the left and right decorative patterns 41) and after the output (after the action display).

In addition, in this embodiment, various emphasized sounds are output.
Here, when the various emphasized sounds are output, none of them are output repeatedly, i.e., when the various emphasized sounds are output, they are output only once.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period for the button effect, the button image 509 is hidden. Therefore, the button image 509 can be hidden at any time depending on the operation of the effect button 161.

In addition, in this embodiment, an image that imitates the effect button 161 being pressed multiple times (repeated action display) is displayed as the button image 509 in each button effect, but this is not limited to this.
As the button image 509, a button effect (hereinafter referred to as a non-periodic button effect) may be provided in which an image simulating the manner in which the effect button 161 is pressed only once is displayed (no repeated action display, not periodic). Also, a non-periodic button effect may be executed before the start of a specific effect (temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41, reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, pseudo consecutive effect, etc.), and after the start of the specific effect, a button effect may be executed in which an image simulating the manner in which the effect button 161 is pressed multiple times (repeated action display). Also, a non-periodic button effect may be executed in the time-saving game state, and a button effect may be executed in which an image simulating the manner in which the effect button 161 is pressed multiple times (repeated action display) is executed in the normal game state.

In this embodiment, a first mode highlight effect (symbol blackout) can be executed for each of the three decorative symbols 41 when the symbols are stopped (temporarily stopped), and a second mode highlight effect (symbol highlight effect other than blackout) can be executed, and there are cases where the first mode highlight effect is executed for each of the three decorative symbols 41 (for example, a symbol blackout followed by a development effect), where the first mode is executed for each of the three decorative symbols 41 and then the second mode is executed, and where the second mode highlight effect is executed for each of the three decorative symbols 41 (variable miss effect). The expectation of a jackpot game being executed differs between when the first mode highlight effect is executed for each of the three decorative symbols 41, when the first mode is executed for each of the three decorative symbols 41 and then the second mode is executed, and when the second mode highlight effect is executed for each of the three decorative symbols 41. More specifically, when the first mode emphasis effect is performed on each of the three decorative patterns 41, when the first mode is performed on the three decorative patterns 41 and then the second mode is performed, and when the second mode emphasis effect is performed on each of the three decorative patterns 41, the earlier the effect is performed, the higher the expectation.
Furthermore, in the variable effect, the emphasis effect of the first mode is not executed after the emphasis effect of the second mode is executed. However, if the variable effect in which the emphasis effect of the second mode is executed after the emphasis effect of the first mode is executed more easily than the variable effect in which the emphasis effect of the first mode is executed after the emphasis effect of the second mode, the variable effect in which the emphasis effect of the first mode is executed may be executed after the emphasis effect of the second mode.
Furthermore, the first mode emphasis effect can be executed in either the first stage or the second stage, but the second mode emphasis effect may be executed only in the first stage. In this case, in the second stage, when a variation effect is executed, a third mode emphasis effect different from the second mode may be executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the left-hit image is displayed in a layer behind the volume image and the light intensity image, but the present invention is not limited to this.
The left-handed hit images (first left-handed hit image 47, second left-handed hit image 48) may be displayed on a layer in front of the volume image and the light intensity image. Also, the first left-handed hit image 47 may be displayed on a layer behind the volume image and the light intensity image, while the second left-handed hit image 48 may be displayed on a layer in front of the volume image and the light intensity image.

In addition, when the variable effect is not being executed (variation is stopped), the left-hit image may be placed on the decorative pattern 41, while the right-hit image may not be placed on the decorative pattern 41.
Furthermore, the left-hit image may be displayed in different display modes in the first stage and the second stage.

In addition, in this embodiment, the lamp L, the effect button 161, and the movable role object 115 are not illuminated in response to the first left-hit notification. This can also be interpreted as limiting the illumination of the lamp L, the effect button 161, and the movable role object 115 in the first left-hit notification.
Also, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the lamp L, the effect button 161, and the movable role object 115 emit light in accordance with the second left hit notification. Here, the lamp L, the effect button 161, and the movable role object 115 emit light in accordance with the second left hit notification, but may be turned off. Also, when the second left hit notification is executed in the variable performance, the lamp L, the effect button 161, and the movable role object 115 may be turned off.

In the present embodiment, the start emphasis image is displayed when the start action is being performed. In this case, the display of the start emphasis image may start after the start action is started, or the start action may start after the display of the start emphasis image is started. Furthermore, the start emphasis image may be hidden after the start action is completed, or the start action may be completed after the start emphasis image is hidden.
In the present embodiment, the stop emphasis image is displayed when the stop-time action is being executed. In this case, the display of the stop emphasis image may be started after the stop-time action is started, or the stop-time action may be started after the display of the stop emphasis image is started. Furthermore, the stop emphasis image may be hidden after the stop-time action is finished, or the stop-time action may be finished after the stop emphasis image is hidden.
Also, in this embodiment, it has been described that the reach-eye stop emphasis image is displayed when a reach action is being executed. In this case, the display of the reach-eye emphasis image may start after the reach action has started, or the reach action may start after the display of the reach-eye emphasis image has started. Furthermore, the reach-eye emphasis image may be hidden after the reach action has ended, or the reach action may end after the reach-eye emphasis image has been hidden.
In the present embodiment, it has been described that a doublet emphasis image is displayed when an action display using the doublet decorative pattern 41 is being executed. In this case, the display of the doublet emphasis image may be started after the action display using the doublet decorative pattern 41 is started, or the action display using the doublet decorative pattern 41 may be started after the display of the doublet emphasis image is started. Furthermore, the doublet emphasis image may be hidden after the action display using the doublet decorative pattern 41 is finished, or the action display using the doublet decorative pattern 41 may be finished after the display of the doublet emphasis image is finished.

Furthermore, when an emphasis image that emphasizes the decorative pattern 41 is displayed, the decorative pattern 41 may be enlarged or reduced. In this case, the display size of the emphasis image that emphasizes the decorative pattern 41 may also be enlarged or reduced in accordance with the enlargement or reduction of the decorative pattern 41.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it has been explained that a portion of the doublet decorative pattern 41 may not fit within the display area of the image display unit 114 (see Figure 175 (12)). Here, even when a reach effect is executed, the reach decorative pattern 41 may expand, and a portion of the reach decorative pattern 41 may not fit within the display area of the image display unit 114.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it has been described that an image imitating light or the button image 509 may be displayed as the prognostic-enhanced image.
Here, both the image imitating light and button image 509 may be displayed as the prognostic enhancement image. In this case, the image imitating light may be displayed in a layer in front of button image 509 in an area overlapping the display area of button image 509.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it has been described that each prognostic-enhancing image is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41, but this is not limiting.
The premonition emphasis image may be displayed on a layer behind the decorative pattern 41. Also, for example, in a variable effect, before the start of a specific effect, the premonition emphasis image may be displayed on a layer behind the decorative pattern 41, and after the start of the specific effect, the premonition emphasis image may be displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41. Also, before the start of a specific effect, the premonition emphasis image may be displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41, and after the start of the specific effect, the premonition emphasis image may be displayed on a layer behind the decorative pattern 41. Examples of specific effects include a temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41, a reach effect, an SP reach effect, an SPSP reach effect, and a pseudo consecutive effect.
Also, for example, in the first presentation mode (first stage, etc.), the premonition emphasis image may be displayed on a layer behind the decorative pattern 41, and in the second presentation mode (second to fourth stages, etc.), the premonition emphasis image may be displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41. Also, in the first presentation mode, the premonition emphasis image may be displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41, and in the second presentation mode, the premonition emphasis image may be displayed on a layer behind the decorative pattern 41.
In addition, any of the prognostic emphasis images may be displayed on a layer behind the decorative pattern 41.

In addition, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes the decorative pattern 41 (double-digit decorative pattern 41) that suggests that a jackpot game will be executed, and the effect patterns include a first effect pattern and a second effect pattern that is different from the first effect pattern, and it has been explained that it is possible to make the display mode of the emphasis effect different when the first effect pattern is displayed and when the second effect pattern is displayed (see Figures 166 (39) and (40), and Figures 175 (11) to (13)). It has also been explained that the first effect pattern includes even-numbered decorative patterns 41, and the second effect pattern includes odd-numbered decorative patterns 41.
Here, the action display in which the double-digit decorative pattern 41 expands (see Figures 166 (33) and (34)) can also be considered as an emphasis effect that emphasizes the double-digit decorative pattern 41. Also, the display mode (action display mode) is different between the left decorative pattern 41 (right decorative pattern 41) and the center decorative pattern 41 (see Figure 166 (33)). Therefore, "making the display mode of the emphasis effect different when the first decorative pattern is displayed and when the second decorative pattern is displayed" also includes the case where the first decorative pattern is the left decorative pattern 41 or the right decorative pattern 41, and the second decorative pattern is the center decorative pattern 41.

In the present embodiment, the display mode of the highlighted image is different for each stage. Here, the highlighted image may have a common display size (shape) for each stage, but may have a different display color, resulting in a different display mode for each stage.
The shape of the identifying portion 501a of the stage notification image 501 may also change for each stage. For example, the identifying portion 501a of the stage notification image 501 may be displayed in the same shape as the highlighting portion 501b for each stage.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the performance control unit 300 can make the performance mode (display mode, execution time, etc.) of a predetermined performance different between two scenes to be compared (such as the first performance mode and the second mode, or before the start of a specific performance and after the start of a specific performance: hereinafter referred to as the first scene and the second scene). Here, "making different" means that the predetermined performance is executed in the first performance mode in the first scene and in the second performance mode in the second scene, and is not limited to providing a performance mode that is executed only in the first scene and a performance mode that is executed only in the second scene as the predetermined performance.
In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the performance control unit 300 can make the performance manner of the predetermined performance common to the two scenes to be compared. Here, "making common" means that the predetermined performance is executed in the same performance manner in the first scene and the second scene, and is not limited to providing only the same performance manner in the first scene and the second scene as the predetermined performance.

In the present embodiment, the button highlighting portion 509c is displayed in red or rainbow colors.
Here, in a button effect in which the button highlighting portion 509c is displayed in red or rainbow colors, the effect button 161 may protrude, and the amount of operation (distance) of the effect button 161 may be greater than in a normal button effect.
Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine 100 may be provided with other operating means (for example, a lever that can be pulled by the player) different from the effect button 161. In addition, in a button effect in which the button highlighting portion 509c is displayed in red or rainbow colors, the operation of the other operating means may be promoted. In this case, an image imitating the other operating means may be displayed in motion as the button image 509.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the stage notification image 501 is displayed when the zone execution image (first zone execution image 537, second zone execution image 613) is displayed, but this is not limited to this.
By displaying a zone execution image (first zone execution image 537, second zone execution image 613) instead of the stage notification image 501, the stage notification image 501 may be hidden while the zone execution image is displayed. In this case, the change from the stage notification image 501 to the zone execution image can also be seen as a change in the identification image that identifies the presentation mode. In the change, the identification section 501a of the stage notification image 501 changes to the text portion of the zone execution image ("X Zone", "Y Zone"), and the highlighting section 501b of the stage notification image 501 changes to the mark portion of the zone execution image ("◯, △, □, ◇", "●, ▲, ■, ◆").

In addition, the mark portions ("○, △, □, ◇", "●, ▲, ■, ◆") in the zone execution images (first zone execution image 537, second zone execution image 613) may be displayed near the text portions ("X Zone", "Y Zone") in the zone execution images to emphasize the text portions.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the display mode of the post-operation emphasis image may indicate the likelihood of a jackpot game being executed. In this case, the display color of the post-operation emphasis image may indicate the likelihood of a jackpot game being executed. For example, in a miss variation presentation, the post-operation emphasis image may be displayed in white or blue, and in a jackpot variation presentation, the post-operation emphasis image may be displayed in red.

Furthermore, in one button effect, whether or not a post-operation emphasis image is displayed may differ depending on the result of the special symbol lottery. For example, when the eighth button effect is executed in a loss variation effect, the post-operation emphasis image (eighth post-operation emphasis image 520) may not be displayed regardless of whether the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period for this eighth button effect. And when the eighth button effect is executed in a jackpot variation effect, if the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period for this eighth button effect, the post-operation emphasis image (eighth post-operation emphasis image 520) may be displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that when the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the button effect, the post-operation emphasis image is displayed, and when the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period in the button effect, the post-operation emphasis image is not displayed, but this is not limited to this.
Regardless of whether the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the button effect, a post-operation emphasis image may be displayed when the valid operation period in the button effect has elapsed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that the display positions of both the right-hit image and the left-hit image move, but this is not limited to this. The display position of the left-hit image may not move, but the display position of the right-hit image may move.

In addition, the highlighted image displayed in the time-saving game mode may overlap with the right-hit image. In this case, the highlighted image is displayed in a layer behind the right-hit image.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the volume of the second left-handed hitting sound cannot be adjusted, but this is not limiting.
The volume of the second left-hit sound may also be adjusted by operating the effect key 162 or the back volume adjustment volume 300S.

In addition, in each of the variable presentation examples in this embodiment (Variable Presentation Example 1 to Variable Presentation Example 38), it has been explained that the player repeatedly presses the lower key and the left key of the presentation key 162 (for example, every second).
Here, in each variable effect example, the player may alternately operate the upper and lower keys of the effect keys 162 (for example, once every second), and may alternately operate the right and left keys of the effect keys 162 (for example, once every second). In this case, the volume and light intensity are adjusted each time the effect key 162 is operated. Furthermore, if a volume alert sound and a light intensity alert sound can be output in the variable effect, the volume alert sound and the light intensity alert sound are output each time the effect key 162 is operated. More specifically, the volume alert sound and the light intensity alert sound are output along with the effect sound corresponding to the variable effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that an emphasis effect is executed in response to the operation of the effect button 161 when the operation effect (button effect) is being executed.
In this embodiment, the timing at which a specific image starts to be displayed varies depending on the timing at which the effect button 161 is operated in the button effect. Examples of the specific images include a first button post image 571, a second button post image 576, a third button post image 577, a fourth button post image 580, a fifth button post image 589, a sixth button post image 590, a seventh button post image 601, an eighth button post image 606, a ninth button post image 607, a tenth button post image 612, an eleventh button post image 619, a twelfth button post image 621, a first jackpot highlight image 566, a second jackpot highlight image 567, a third jackpot highlight image 568, a fourth jackpot highlight image 569, and a fifth jackpot highlight image 570. Therefore, the display of the specific images can also be considered as an emphasis effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 161 when the operation effect (button effect) is being executed. In other words, the display of this specific image can be regarded as an emphasis effect that emphasizes the result of operating the effect button 161. In further other words, the display of this specific image can be regarded as an emphasis effect that emphasizes that the effect button 161 has been operated.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that each jackpot highlight image is displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 (double-digit decorative pattern 41), but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, in the normal game mode, the jackpot highlight image may be displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 (double-digit decorative pattern 41), and in the time-saving game mode, the jackpot highlight image may be displayed on a layer behind the decorative pattern 41 (double-digit decorative pattern 41).
In addition, in the normal game state, the jackpot emphasis image may be displayed on a layer behind the decorative pattern 41 (double-digit decorative pattern 41), and in the time-saving game state, the jackpot emphasis image may be displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 (double-digit decorative pattern 41).
Furthermore, regardless of the gaming state, the big win highlight image may be displayed on a layer behind the decorative pattern 41 (double-digit decorative pattern 41).

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the performance control unit 300 may differentiate the notification mode of the left-hit notification between the first stage and the second stage. Here, differentiating the notification mode of the left-hit notification between the first stage and the second stage also includes a first left-hit notification being made in the first stage and a second left-hit notification being made in the second stage.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that in the SP reach performance and the SPSP reach performance, the reserved image 52 and the variable image 51 are made invisible, making them difficult or impossible to see, but this is not limited to this.
For example, the pending image 52 and the variable image 51 may be displayed on a layer behind the performance image displayed in accordance with the SP reach performance or the SPSP reach performance, making the pending image 52 and the variable image 51 difficult or impossible to see.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that in the SP reach performance, the pending image 52 becomes difficult to see or impossible to see, while the variable image 51 is easy to see, and in the SPSP reach performance, both the pending image 52 and the variable image 51 become difficult to see or impossible to see, but this is not limited to this.
In the SP reach effect, both the reserved image 52 and the variable image 51 may be easily visible, or both may be difficult to see or impossible to see. Also, in the SPSP reach effect, both the reserved image 52 and the variable image 51 may be easily visible, or the reserved image 52 may be difficult to see or impossible to see, while the variable image 51 may be easily visible.

In addition, in this embodiment, the stop emphasis image displayed when the left decorative pattern 41, "7", temporarily stops is different between the first stage and the second stage (see Figure 172 (4) and Figure 209 (4)), but this is not limited to this. The stop emphasis image displayed when the left decorative pattern 41, "7", temporarily stops may be the same between the first stage and the second stage.

In addition, in this embodiment, the button highlighting portion 509c is displayed to highlight the display color of the button portion 509a, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the display color of the button portion 509a itself may be changed. In this case, the button portion 509a may also be regarded as a button highlight portion. That is, the button image 509a and the button highlight portion 509c may be integrated.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it has been explained that at least a portion of the various highlighted images is displayed in an area that does not overlap with the display area of the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43, and therefore at least a portion of the highlighted images is visible even when they are displayed while the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are being displayed.
Here, because the second left-hit image 48 has a larger display size than the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43, if various emphasized images are displayed while the second left-hit image 48 is being displayed, the various emphasized images may be difficult to see. Therefore, the second left-hit image 48 may be displayed in a display mode with high transparency. More specifically, the second left-hit image 48 may be displayed with a high transparency so that the effect images displayed on the layer behind the second left-hit image 48 are visible to the player even through the second left-hit image 48. In this case, even when the second left-hit image 48 is being displayed, the player can recognize the various effect images, such as the decorative pattern 41, button image 509, and emphasized images, displayed on the layer behind the second left-hit image 48.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the third stage and the fourth stage are described as presentation modes in the special time-saving game state, but the present invention is not limited to this.
The third stage may be a presentation mode in a special time-shortened game state, while the fourth stage may be a presentation mode in a special time-shortened game state. Also, the fourth stage may be a presentation mode in a special time-shortened game state, while the third stage may be a presentation mode in a special time-shortened game state. Also, both the third stage and the fourth stage may be presentation modes in a special time-shortened game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that a change effect is executed to change the display mode of the button image 509. It has also been described that the change effect may include whether or not the button highlighting portion 509c is displayed, a change in the display mode, an operation display of the button portion 509a, and an operation display of the highlighted character 509d.
As described above, the display mode of the gauge portion 509b of the button image 509 changes as the effective operation period in the button effect decreases (passes) (see (2) to (8) in FIG. 60). Therefore, the change in the display mode of the gauge portion 509b (operation display) can also be considered as a change effect that changes the display mode of the button image 509. Also, varying the execution time of the change effect at two different times (before the start of the specific effect and after the start of the specific effect, between when the first operation effect is executed and when the second operation effect is executed, and between when the first effect mode and the second effect mode) includes varying the display time of the gauge portion 509b at these two different times.

Furthermore, when the gauge section 509b is displayed, the button image 509 becomes more easily noticed, which in turn encourages the player to operate the effect button 161. Therefore, the gauge section 509b can also be regarded as an emphasis section that emphasizes the button image 509 (button effect). Furthermore, the display of the gauge section 509b can also be regarded as an emphasis effect that emphasizes the button image 509 (button effect).
However, unlike the button section 509a, the button highlight section 509c, and the highlight character 509d, the action display of the gauge section 509b is not repeated in one button performance.

Furthermore, in the time-saving game mode, whether the variable effect starts from the third stage or the fourth stage may be selectable by the player operating the effect button 161 or the effect key 162 during a jackpot game, for example.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 displays the post-button image after hiding the button image 509, but this is not limited to this.
The performance control unit 300 may display a button-post image while displaying the button image 509. More specifically, the button-post image may be displayed after the button image 509 starts to be displayed but before it ends. Here, "after the button image 509 starts to be displayed but before it ends" includes a state in which the button image 509 starts to be hidden (for example, the transparency of the button image 509 starts to increase) but at least a portion of the button image 509 is still displayed. Furthermore, if the performance button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the button performance, the performance control unit 300 may display the button-post image after the performance button 161 is operated and after the button image 509 starts to be displayed but before it ends. In this case, the performance control unit 300 may display the button-post image in an area overlapping the display area of the button image 509, on a layer in front of the button image 509. Alternatively, the button-post image may be displayed in an area overlapping the display area of the button image 509, on a layer behind the button image 509. The post-button image may be displayed in an area including the display area of the button image 509 and on the same layer as the button image 509 .

Furthermore, each post-button image may be displayed on the entirety of one layer in the image display section 114 .
In addition, each button back image may be displayed on a layer behind the decorative pattern 41.

In the present embodiment, the specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means includes a left-handed hitting image. In this case, the operating means includes the handle 151.
Here, the effect key 162 is also regarded as an operating means. When the effect key 162 is operated, the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the customer waiting volume image 44, the customer waiting light intensity image 45, the volume alert sound, the light intensity alert sound, etc. are displayed as notifications related to the effect. Therefore, the display of the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the customer waiting volume image 44, the customer waiting light intensity image 45, the volume alert sound, the light intensity alert sound, etc. are also regarded as specific notifications related to the operation of the operating means.

Furthermore, the reach-eye emphasis image may be displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the left and right decorative patterns 41, and on a layer in front of the left and right decorative patterns 41. Furthermore, the reach-eye emphasis image may be displayed in an area not overlapping the display areas of the left and right decorative patterns 41. Furthermore, the reach-eye emphasis image may be displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the left and right decorative patterns 41 and in an area not overlapping the display areas of the left and right decorative patterns 41. Furthermore, the reach-eye emphasis image may be displayed on the same layer as the decorative patterns 41, or on a different layer (a layer behind).
The stop emphasis image may be displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41 and on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41. The stop emphasis image may be displayed in an area that does not overlap with the display area of the decorative pattern 41. The stop emphasis image may be displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41 and an area that does not overlap with the display area of the decorative pattern 41. The stop emphasis image may be displayed on the same layer as the decorative pattern 41, or on a different layer (a layer behind).
The development provocative emphasis image may be displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the development image 584 and the middle decorative pattern 41, on a layer in front of the development image 584 and the middle decorative pattern 41. The development provocative emphasis image may be displayed on the same layer as the development image 584 and the middle decorative pattern 41, or on a layer (a layer behind) different from the development image 584 and the middle decorative pattern 41.
The start emphasis image may be displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41 and on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41. The start emphasis image may be displayed in an area that does not overlap with the display area of the decorative pattern 41. The start emphasis image may be displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41 and in an area that does not overlap with the display area of the decorative pattern 41. The start emphasis image may be displayed on the same layer as the decorative pattern 41, or on a different layer (a layer behind).
The doublet emphasis image may be displayed in an area overlapping the display area of the decorative pattern 41, on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41. The doublet emphasis image may be displayed in an area not overlapping the display area of the decorative pattern 41. The doublet emphasis image may be displayed in an area overlapping the display area of the decorative pattern 41 and an area not overlapping the display area of the decorative pattern 41. The doublet emphasis image may be displayed in the same layer as the decorative pattern 41, or in a different layer (a layer behind).
Furthermore, the reach highlighting image may be displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41, on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41. Furthermore, the reach highlighting image may be displayed in an area that does not overlap with the display area of the decorative pattern 41. Furthermore, the reach highlighting image may be displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41 and in an area that does not overlap with the display area of the decorative pattern 41. Furthermore, the reach highlighting image may be displayed on the same layer as the decorative pattern 41, or on a different layer (a layer behind).

It should be noted that, regardless of the timing at which the display of the volume image 42 is started, the display time of the volume image 42 when the effect key 162 is operated once is constant (5 seconds). In addition, regardless of the timing at which the display of the volume image 42 is started in each of the above-mentioned variable effect examples, the display time of the volume image 42 when the effect key 162 is operated once is constant (5 seconds). Furthermore, regardless of the timing at which the volume notification sound is output in each of the above-mentioned variable effect examples, the output time of the volume notification sound when the effect key 162 is operated once is constant (0.1 seconds).
Furthermore, regardless of the timing at which the display of the light quantity image 43 is started, the display time of the light quantity image 43 when the effect key 162 is operated once is constant (5 seconds). In addition, regardless of the timing at which the display of the light quantity image 43 is started in each of the above-mentioned variable effect examples, the display time of the light quantity image 43 when the effect key 162 is operated once is constant (5 seconds). Furthermore, regardless of the timing at which the light quantity notification sound is output in each of the above-mentioned variable effect examples, the output time of the light quantity notification sound when the effect key 162 is operated once is constant (0.1 seconds).

Also, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the volume image 42 (light intensity image 43) is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of various emphasized images (omen emphasized image, post-operation emphasized image, during-operation emphasized image, reach mark emphasized image, role emphasized image, development emphasized image, jackpot emphasized image, stop emphasized image, pseudo consecutive emphasized image, development promotion emphasized image, start emphasized image, double number emphasized image, promotion promotion emphasized image, reach promotion emphasized image, etc.), and is displayed in a layer in front of the emphasized images. Here, as described above, the gauge portion 421 of the volume image 42 (gauge portion 431 of the light intensity image 43) and the background portion 425 (background portion 435) have high transparency. Therefore, an emphasis image (such as a premonition emphasis image, a post-operation emphasis image, an operation emphasis image, a reach symbol emphasis image, a role emphasis image, a development emphasis image, a jackpot emphasis image, a stop emphasis image, a pseudo-consecutive emphasis image, a development teaser emphasis image, a start emphasis image, a double-digit emphasis image, a promotion teaser emphasis image, or a reach symbol emphasis image) displayed behind the volume image 42 (light intensity image 43) may be visible to a player through the gauge portion 421 of the volume image 42 (gauge portion 431 of the light intensity image 43) or the background portion 425 (background portion 435). Also, when an emphasis image displays an action, the action display of the emphasis image displayed behind the volume image 42 (light intensity image 43) may be visible to a player through the gauge portion 421 of the volume image 42 (gauge portion 431 of the light intensity image 43) or the background portion 425 (background portion 435). In this case, even if the emphasis image is displayed while the volume image 42 or the light amount image 43 is being displayed, the emphasis image can be recognized by the player.
Furthermore, at least a portion of each of the various emphasized images is displayed in an area that does not overlap with the display area of the volume image 42 and the light quantity image 43. Therefore, even if an emphasized image is displayed while the volume image 42 or the light quantity image 43 is being displayed, the emphasized image can be recognized by the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the effect key 162 is operated when the volume image or light intensity image is not displayed, the volume or light intensity is changed, and the volume image or light intensity image is displayed and a volume alert sound or light intensity alert sound is output in a manner indicating the changed volume or light intensity, but this is not limited to this.
When the effect key 162 is operated while the volume image or light intensity image is not displayed, the volume or light intensity may not be changed, and the volume image or light intensity image may be displayed and the volume alert sound or the light intensity alert sound may be output in a manner that indicates the set volume or light intensity. When the effect key 162 is operated while the volume image or light intensity image is displayed, the volume or light intensity may be changed, and the volume or light intensity image may be displayed and the volume alert sound or the light intensity alert sound may be output in a manner that indicates the changed volume or light intensity.

In this embodiment, the menu promotion image 46 is displayed while waiting for customers. Here, similar to the button portion 509a of the button image 509, the menu promotion image 46 may also display the operation target identification portion 461 in a display mode that mimics the state in which the effect button 161 alternates (periodically) between an operated state and an unoperated state. Similarly to the button highlighting portion 509c, the menu promotion image 46 may also display an image that mimics light highlighting the operation target identification portion 461 in a periodic manner in accordance with the operation display of the operation target identification portion 461. In this case, the period of the operation display of the operation target identification portion 461 may be different from any of the periods of the operation display of the button portion 509a in each button effect. Furthermore, the period of the operation display of the image highlighting the operation target identification portion 461 may be different from any of the periods of the operation display of the button highlighting portion 509c in each button effect. Furthermore, the menu promotion image 46 can also be broadly considered a button effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that vibration effects and special feature effects may be executed even when specific notifications (at least one of displaying the volume image 42, displaying the light intensity image 43, displaying the customer waiting volume image 44, displaying the customer waiting light intensity image 45, outputting the volume notification sound, and outputting the light intensity notification sound) are restricted by operation of the effect key 162, such as when a variable effect is not being executed (when the variable effect is stopped). Here, for example, even during a jackpot game, specific notifications (at least one of displaying the volume image 42, displaying the light intensity image 43, displaying the customer waiting volume image 44, displaying the customer waiting light intensity image 45, outputting the volume notification sound, and outputting the light intensity notification sound) are restricted.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 has been described as setting the volume to one of seven levels, from "1" to "7," but this is not limited to this. The number of volume levels that can be set in the performance control unit 300 may be five levels that can be identified by a volume image. Furthermore, the number of volume levels that can be adjusted by the back volume adjustment volume 300S may also be five levels.

The second left-handed image 48 may also be displayed when any of the above-mentioned highlighted images is displayed. In this case, the second left-handed image 48 may be displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of each highlighted image, on a layer in front of each highlighted image.

In addition, in this embodiment, the emphasis image is displayed in a display mode that corresponds to the game state, but this is not limited to this. For example, the jackpot emphasis image may be displayed (operationally displayed) in a common display mode in both the normal game state and the time-saving game state. In other words, the emphasis image may be displayed in a common display mode regardless of the game state.

(Characteristic Configuration 1 of the Present Embodiment)
Here, the characteristic configuration of the present embodiment described above will be explained. In this embodiment, when the effect symbol temporarily stops, a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect symbol can be executed, and a second emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) that emphasizes the change in the effect symbol during temporary stop can be executed, and the form of the first emphasis effect and the form of the second emphasis effect can be made different.
In this case, the performance symbols are emphasized in different ways when they temporarily stop and while they are temporarily stopped, and the interest is increased by adding variations so that the player does not get bored even in the case of an immediate loss variation or the like.

In addition, in this embodiment, a first emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the effect pattern when the effect pattern temporarily stops, and a second emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) can be executed to emphasize the change in the effect pattern during the temporary stop, and the first emphasis effect can emphasize the effect pattern with an emphasis different from that of the second emphasis effect, and the second emphasis effect can emphasize the effect pattern by changing the emphasis area of the effect pattern.
In this case, a natural change different from the temporary stop emphasis is given to the performance pattern during the temporary stop to prevent a monotonous impression and improve interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, a first emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the effect pattern when the effect pattern temporarily stops, and a second emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) can be executed to emphasize the change in the effect pattern during the temporary stop.The first emphasis effect can emphasize the effect pattern without repeatedly (periodically) changing the emphasis area, and the second emphasis effect can emphasize the effect pattern by repeatedly (periodically) changing the emphasis area.
In this case, when the game is temporarily stopped, the performance pattern is emphasized in a single, non-repeated manner, and during the temporary stop, the performance pattern is emphasized periodically and repeatedly, thereby varying the emphasis of the performance pattern and improving interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, a first emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the effect pattern when the effect pattern temporarily stops, and a second emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) can be executed to emphasize the change in the effect pattern during the temporary stop, and the first emphasis effect can emphasize the effect pattern by emphasizing at least the outer area of the effect pattern, and the second emphasis effect can emphasize the effect pattern by emphasizing the surface area of the effect pattern.
In this case, the area in which the performance pattern can be emphasized is changed between when the ball is temporarily stopped and during the temporary stop, thereby enhancing the interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, a first emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the effect pattern when the effect pattern temporarily stops, and a second emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) can be executed to emphasize the change in the effect pattern during the temporary stop.The first emphasis effect can include an action effect in which a predetermined part of the effect pattern (character part, etc.) performs a predetermined action to emphasize the effect pattern, and a first image effect in which a predetermined emphasis image is displayed to emphasize the effect pattern, and the second emphasis effect can include a second image effect in which a specific emphasis image (emphasis image during temporary stop) different from the predetermined emphasis image is displayed to emphasize the effect pattern.
In this case, the character actions and effects are clearly changed between when the game is temporarily stopped and while it is temporarily stopped, which increases interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, a first emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the effect pattern when the effect pattern starts to change, and a second emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the effect pattern when the effect pattern temporarily stops, and the first and second emphasis effects can include an action effect that emphasizes the effect pattern by causing a predetermined part of the effect pattern (such as a character part) to perform a predetermined action, and an image effect that emphasizes the effect pattern by displaying a predetermined emphasis image, and the action effect and image effect of the first emphasis effect and the action effect and image effect of the second emphasis effect are different from each other.
In this case, by using different emphasis modes, the change is made between when the fluctuation starts and when it stops, which increases interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern when the effect pattern begins to change, a second emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern when the effect pattern temporarily stops, and a third emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) that emphasizes the change in the effect pattern while it is temporarily stopped.It is possible to execute the first emphasis effect before starting the display of the change in the effect pattern, end the display of the change, execute the second emphasis effect, and then execute the third emphasis effect.
In this case, no temporary stop emphasis is executed when the fluctuation starts, creating a sense of speed, while temporary stop emphasis is executed when the fluctuation stops, leaving a lingering impression and increasing interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, a first emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the effect pattern when the effect pattern begins to change, and a second emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) can be executed to emphasize the change in the effect pattern during a temporary stop.The first emphasis effect can include an action effect in which a predetermined part of the effect pattern (character part, etc.) performs a predetermined action to emphasize the effect pattern, and a first image effect in which a predetermined emphasis image (effect image) is displayed to emphasize the effect pattern, and the second emphasis effect can include a second image effect in which a specific emphasis image (emphasis image during temporary stop) different from the predetermined emphasis image is displayed to emphasize the effect pattern.
In this case, the character actions and effects are clearly changed when the change starts and when the change is temporarily stopped, which increases interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, a first emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the effect pattern when the effect pattern begins to change, and a second emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) can be executed to emphasize the change in the effect pattern during temporary stop, and the first emphasis effect can emphasize the effect pattern by emphasizing at least the outer area of the effect pattern, and the second emphasis effect can emphasize the effect pattern by emphasizing the surface area of the effect pattern.
In this case, the area where the performance pattern can be emphasized is changed between when the variation starts and when the game is temporarily stopped, thereby increasing the interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, a first emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the effect pattern when the effect pattern begins to change, and a second emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the effect pattern in a specific state (reach state) that raises expectations for the execution of a special game, and the first emphasis effect can emphasize the effect patterns individually (in sequence), and the second emphasis effect can simultaneously emphasize the effect patterns that make up the specific state.
In this case, the individual effect patterns that start to change are emphasized in the change start emphasis, and the effect patterns that make up the reach eyes are emphasized in the reach emphasis, thereby enhancing the interest by emphasizing in accordance with the situation.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern of a specific state (reach state) that raises the expectation of the execution of a special game, and a second emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern when the effect pattern temporarily stops, and the first emphasis effect can simultaneously emphasize the effect patterns that constitute the specific state, and the second emphasis effect can emphasize the effect patterns individually (in sequence).
In this case, the individual effect symbols that are temporarily stopped are emphasized in the temporary stop emphasis, and the effect symbols that constitute the reach eyes are emphasized in the reach emphasis, thereby enhancing the interest by emphasizing according to the situation.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the first effect pattern when the reel temporarily stops, and a second emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) that emphasizes the change in the second effect pattern during the temporary stop, and it is possible to make the proportion of the emphasis area relative to the first effect pattern different from the proportion of the emphasis area relative to the second effect pattern.
In this case, by making the proportion of the emphasis area different between the temporary stop emphasis and the temporary stop emphasis, the impact (strength) of the emphasis can be changed to enhance interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the performance pattern in the first column (left column) temporarily stops, a first emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the performance pattern, and when the performance patterns in the first and second columns (right column) temporarily stop and then the performance pattern in the third column (middle column) temporarily stops, a second emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the performance pattern, and a third emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) can be executed to emphasize the change in the performance pattern during temporary stop, and after the first emphasis effect is executed for the performance pattern in the first column and then the third emphasis effect is executed, the second emphasis effect can be executed for the performance pattern in the third column, and then the third emphasis effect for the performance pattern in the first column and the third emphasis effect for the performance pattern in the third column can be executed in synchronization.
In this case, the left and middle images emphasize the temporary stop with a time lag, and then synchronize to emphasize the temporary stop, resulting in a natural flow and a sense of unity.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the performance pattern in the first column (left column) temporarily stops, a first emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the performance pattern, and when the performance pattern in the second column (right column) temporarily stops after the performance pattern in the first column temporarily stops, a second emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the performance pattern, and a third emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) can be executed to emphasize the change in the performance pattern during temporary stop, and after the first emphasis effect is executed for the performance pattern in the first column and then the third emphasis effect is executed, the second emphasis effect can be executed for the performance pattern in the second column, and then the third emphasis effect for the performance pattern in the first column and the third emphasis effect for the performance pattern in the second column can be executed in synchronization.
In this case, the left and right images emphasize the temporary stop with a time difference, and then synchronize to emphasize the temporary stop, resulting in a natural flow and a sense of unity.

In addition, in this embodiment, a first emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the effect pattern of a specific state (reach state) that raises the expectation that a special game will be played, and after the first emphasis effect is executed in the specific state, a second emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the effect pattern that results in a combination that notifies that a special game will not be played.The first emphasis effect can emphasize the effect pattern that constitutes the specific state by displaying a specific image across the effect pattern (reach pattern) that constitutes the specific state, and the second emphasis effect can emphasize the effect pattern that stops last (reach miss pattern) that constitutes a combination that notifies that a special game will not be played, by emphasizing the effect pattern that stops last.
In this case, the left and right symbols are emphasized together for the reach symbol, and the middle symbol is emphasized for the reach miss symbol, and emphasis is performed according to the situation to enhance interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern of a specific state (reach state) that anticipates the execution of a special game, and a second emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern (mixed missing numbers) that has formed a combination that notifies that a special game will not be executed without reaching a specific state; the first emphasis effect can emphasize the effect pattern that constitutes a specific state by displaying a first specific image across the effect pattern (reach pattern) that constitutes the specific state, and the second emphasis effect can emphasize the effect pattern (mixed missing numbers) that constitutes a combination that notifies that a special game will not be executed by emphasizing each of the effect patterns that stop.
In this case, the left and right patterns are emphasized together for the reach combination, and the left and right center patterns are emphasized for the mixed miss combination, so that emphasis is performed according to the situation to enhance interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, after a specific state (reach state) is reached in which a special game is expected to be played, a first emphasis effect can be executed to highlight a performance pattern that forms a combination that notifies that a special game will not be played, and a second emphasis effect can be executed to highlight a performance pattern (a miss with a combination) that forms a combination that notifies that a special game will not be played without reaching a specific state.The first emphasis effect can highlight a performance pattern (a miss with a reach) that forms a combination that notifies that a special game will not be played by highlighting the performance pattern that stops last, and the second emphasis effect can highlight a performance pattern (a miss with a combination) that notifies that a special game will not be played by highlighting each of the performance patterns that stop.
In this case, the center symbol is emphasized for a reach miss, and the center symbols on the left and right are emphasized for a barrage miss, so that emphasis is performed according to the situation to enhance interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern that is temporarily stopped, a second emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) that emphasizes the change in the effect pattern that has temporarily stopped, and specific notifications (volume/light intensity images, etc.) regarding effect effects that can be adjusted according to operation, the first emphasis effect can include image display and sound output, the second emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) can include an image display that is different from the image display of the first emphasis effect but does not include sound output, the specific notification can include image display and sound output, and it is possible to limit the effect of the image displays of the first and second emphasis effects on the specific notification.
In this case, the effect symbols are emphasized in different modes (images and sound effects) when and while the effect symbols are temporarily stopped, and the interest is increased by providing variations so that the player does not get bored even in the case of an immediate loss variation, while ensuring the visibility of the volume, image, etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern that is temporarily stopped, a second emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) that emphasizes the change in the effect pattern that has temporarily stopped, and specific notifications (volume/light intensity images, etc.) regarding effect effects that can be adjusted according to operation, the first emphasis effect includes an image display that can provide emphasis different from that of the second emphasis effect and can include sound output, the second emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) includes an image display that can change the emphasis area of the effect pattern and can not include sound output, the specific notification can include an image display and sound output, and it is possible to limit the influence of the image displays of the first and second emphasis effects on the specific notification.
In this case, the visual effect during the temporary stop is given a natural change that is different from the temporary stop emphasis, etc., to reduce the monotonous impression and improve interest, while ensuring the visibility of the volume image, etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern that is temporarily stopped, a second emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) that emphasizes the change in the effect pattern that has temporarily stopped, and specific notifications (volume/light intensity images, etc.) regarding effect effects that can be adjusted according to operation, the first emphasis effect includes an image display that can emphasize the effect pattern without repeatedly (periodically) changing the emphasis area and can include sound output, the second emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) includes an image display that can repeatedly (periodically) change the emphasis area and can not include sound output, the specific notification can include an image display and sound output, and it is possible to limit the effect of the image displays of the first and second emphasis effects on the specific notification.
In this case, when the game is temporarily stopped, the performance pattern is highlighted in a single, non-repeated manner, and during the temporary stop, the performance pattern is highlighted and displayed periodically and repeatedly without sound, thereby varying the emphasis of the performance pattern to improve interest and ensuring visibility of the volume image, etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern that is temporarily stopped, a second emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) that emphasizes the change in the effect pattern that has temporarily stopped, and specific notifications (volume/light intensity images, etc.) regarding effect effects that can be adjusted according to operation, the first emphasis effect includes an image display that can emphasize at least the outer area of the effect pattern and can include sound output, the second emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) includes an image display that can emphasize the surface area of the effect pattern and can not include sound output, the specific notification can include an image display and sound output, and it is possible to limit the influence of the image displays of the first and second emphasis effects on the specific notification.
In this case, the area in which the performance pattern can be emphasized and the presence or absence of sound effects are changed between when the game is temporarily stopped and during the temporary stop, thereby enhancing interest and ensuring visibility of the volume image, etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern that is temporarily stopped, a second emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) that emphasizes the change in the effect pattern that has temporarily stopped, and specific notifications (volume/light intensity images, etc.) regarding effect effects that can be adjusted according to operation, the first emphasis effect includes an image display that can include an operation display that activates a specific part of the effect pattern (character part, etc.) and a specific emphasis display, and can include sound output, the second emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) includes an image display that can include a specific emphasis display (emphasis during temporary stop) that is different from the specific emphasis display, and can not include sound output, the specific notification can include an image display and sound output, and it is possible to limit the influence of the image displays of the first and second emphasis effects on the specific notification.
In this case, the character actions and effects are changed and sound effects are turned on or off between when the game is temporarily stopped and during the temporary stop, increasing interest while ensuring visibility of the volume image and the like.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes a performance pattern that starts to change, a second emphasis effect that emphasizes a performance pattern that temporarily stops, and specific notifications (volume/light intensity images, etc.) regarding performance effects that can be adjusted according to operation, the first and second emphasis effects include an image display that can include an action display that moves a specified part of the performance pattern (character part, etc.) and a specified emphasis display, and can include different sound outputs, the action display and emphasis display of the first emphasis effect and the action display and emphasis display of the second emphasis effect are different from each other, the specific notification can include an image display and sound output, and it is possible to limit the influence of the image displays of the first and second emphasis effects on the specific notification.
In this case, by differentiating the emphasis modes of the display and sound, the difference between when the fluctuation starts and when it stops is clearly impressed, increasing interest, while ensuring the visibility of the volume image, etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes a performance pattern that starts to change, a second emphasis effect that emphasizes a performance pattern that temporarily stops, a third emphasis effect that emphasizes a change in a performance pattern that has temporarily stopped (emphasis during temporary stop), and specific notifications (volume/light intensity images, etc.) regarding performance effects that can be adjusted according to operation can be executed, the first and second emphasis effects include image display and can include sound output, the third emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) can include image display but not sound output, the image displays of the first to third emphasis effects are different from each other and the sound outputs of the first and second emphasis effects can be different, it is possible to start the display of the changing performance pattern after executing the first emphasis effect, end the display of the changing effect and execute the second emphasis effect before executing the third emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop), the specific notifications can include image display and sound output, and it is possible to limit the influence of the image displays of the first to third emphasis effects on the specific notifications.
In this case, when the variation starts, no temporary stop emphasis is executed to give a sense of speed, while when the variation stops, temporary stop emphasis is executed to leave a lingering impression and improve interest, while ensuring the visibility of the volume image, etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes a performance pattern that is about to start changing, a second emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) that emphasizes the change in a performance pattern that has temporarily stopped, and specific notifications (volume/light intensity images, etc.) regarding performance effects that can be adjusted according to operation, the first emphasis effect includes an image display that can include an operation display that moves a specific part of the performance pattern (character part, etc.) and a specific emphasis display, and can include sound output, the second emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) includes an image display that can include a specific emphasis display (emphasis during temporary stop) that is different from the specific emphasis display, and can not include sound output, the specific notification can include an image display and sound output, and it is possible to limit the influence of the image displays of the first and second emphasis effects on the specific notification.
In this case, the character actions and effects are changed when the change starts and when the change is temporarily stopped, and the presence or absence of sound effects is changed to increase interest, while ensuring the visibility of the volume image, etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes a performance pattern that is about to start changing, a second emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) that emphasizes the change in a performance pattern that has temporarily stopped, and specific notifications (volume/light intensity images, etc.) regarding performance effects that can be adjusted according to operation, the first emphasis effect includes an image display that can emphasize at least the outer area of the performance pattern and can include sound output, the second emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) includes an image display that can emphasize the surface area of the performance pattern and can not include sound output, the specific notification can include an image display and sound output, and it is possible to limit the effect of the image displays of the first and second emphasis effects on the specific notification.
In this case, the area in which the performance pattern can be emphasized and the presence or absence of sound effects are changed between when the variation starts and during the temporary stop, thereby enhancing interest, while ensuring the visibility of the volume image, etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes a performance pattern that has begun to change, a second emphasis effect that emphasizes a performance pattern in a specific state (reach state) that anticipates the execution of a special game, and specific notifications (volume/light intensity images, etc.) regarding performance effects that can be adjusted according to operation, the first emphasis effect includes an image display that can emphasize performance patterns individually (in sequence) and can include sound output, the second emphasis effect includes an image display that can simultaneously emphasize performance patterns in a specific state and can include sound output that is different from the first emphasis effect, the specific notification can include an image display and sound output, and it is possible to limit the influence of the image displays of the first and second emphasis effects on the specific notification.
In this case, the individual performance symbols are emphasized in the change start emphasis, and the reach eyes are emphasized together in the reach emphasis (and different sound effects are produced) to increase interest while ensuring the visibility of the volume image, etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern of a specific state (reach state) that anticipates the execution of a special game, a second emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern that is temporarily stopped, and specific notifications (volume/light intensity images, etc.) regarding effect effects that can be adjusted according to operation, the first emphasis effect includes an image display that can simultaneously emphasize the effect patterns of specific states and can include an audio output different from the second emphasis effect, the second emphasis effect includes an image display that can emphasize the effect patterns individually (in sequence) and can include an audio output, the specific notification can include an image display and an audio output, and it is possible to limit the influence of the image displays of the first and second emphasis effects on the specific notification.
In this case, the temporary stop emphasis and the like emphasize individual effect patterns, and the reach emphasis and the like emphasize all reach eyes together (and also produce different sound effects) to increase interest while ensuring visibility of the volume image and the like.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the first effect pattern that temporarily stops, a second emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) that emphasizes the change in the second effect pattern during temporary stop, specific notifications (volume/light intensity images, etc.) regarding effect effects that can be adjusted according to operation, it is possible to make the proportion of the emphasis area relative to the first effect pattern in the first emphasis effect different from the proportion of the emphasis area relative to the second effect pattern in the second emphasis effect, the first emphasis effect can include image display and sound output, the second emphasis effect can include image display but not sound output, the specific notification can include image display and sound output, and it is possible to limit the effect of the image displays of the first and second emphasis effects on the specific notification.
In this case, by varying the proportion of the emphasis area between temporary stop emphasis and temporary stop emphasis, the impact (strength) of the emphasis can be varied to increase interest while ensuring the visibility of the volume image, etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, a first emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the effect pattern of the first column (left column) that temporarily stops, a second emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the effect pattern of the third column (middle column) that temporarily stops after the effect patterns of the first and second columns (right column) temporarily stop, a first emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) can be executed to emphasize the change of the effect pattern that has temporarily stopped, and specific notifications (volume/light intensity images, etc.) regarding effect effects that can be adjusted according to operation can be executed, and the first and second emphasis effects can include image display and sound output. The third emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) can include an image display but not an audio output, and after the first emphasis effect is executed for the effect symbols in the first column and then the third emphasis effect is executed, the second emphasis effect can be executed for the effect symbols in the third column, and then the third emphasis effect for the effect symbols in the first column and the third emphasis effect for the effect symbols in the third column can be executed in synchronization, and the specific notification can include an image display and an audio output, and it is possible to limit the effect of the image displays of the first to third emphasis effects on the specific notification.
In this case, the left and middle images emphasize the temporary stop with a time difference, and then synchronously emphasize the temporary stop without any sound effect, creating a casual, unified presentation that enhances interest while ensuring the visibility of the volume image, etc.

In this embodiment, a first emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the effect pattern of the first column (left column) that is temporarily stopped, a second emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the effect pattern of the second column (right column) that is temporarily stopped after the effect pattern of the first column has temporarily stopped, a third emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) can be executed to emphasize the change in the effect pattern that has temporarily stopped, and specific notifications (volume/light intensity images, etc.) regarding the effect that can be adjusted according to operation can be executed, and the first and second emphasis effects can include image display and sound output, and the first emphasis effect can be executed. The adjustment effect (emphasis during temporary stop) can include image display but not sound output, and after executing the first emphasis effect on the effect pattern in the first column and then the third emphasis effect on the effect pattern in the second column, the third emphasis effect on the effect pattern in the first column and the third emphasis effect on the effect pattern in the second column can be executed in synchronization, and the specific notification can include image display and sound output, and it is possible to limit the effect of the image displays of the first to third emphasis effects on the specific notification.
In this case, the left and right images emphasize a temporary stop with a time difference, and then synchronously emphasize the temporary stop without any sound effect, thereby producing a casual and unified presentation to enhance interest while ensuring the visibility of the volume image, etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern of a specific state (reach state) that anticipates the execution of a special game, and after executing the first emphasis effect in the specific state, it is possible to execute a second emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern of a combination that notifies that a special game will not be executed, and it is possible to execute a specific notification (volume/light intensity image, etc.) regarding the effect effect that can be adjusted according to operation, the first emphasis effect includes an image display that can emphasize the effect pattern (reach eye) of the specific state by displaying a specific image across the effect pattern, and can include an audio output, the second emphasis effect includes an image display that can emphasize the effect pattern (reach miss eye) that notifies that a special game will not be executed by emphasizing the effect pattern that stops last, and can include an audio output different from the first emphasis effect, the specific notification can include an image display and an audio output, and it is possible to limit the influence of the image displays of the first and second emphasis effects on the specific notification.
In this case, the left and right patterns are emphasized in the reach pattern, and the missing center pattern is emphasized in the reach miss pattern (and a sound effect different from that for the reach pattern emphasis is produced) to enhance interest while ensuring visibility of the volume image, etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern of a specific state (reach state) that anticipates the execution of a special game, a second emphasis effect (missed combination emphasis/active, etc.) that emphasizes the effect pattern that notifies that a special game will not be executed without entering a specific state, and a specific notification (volume/light intensity image, etc.) regarding the effect that can be adjusted according to operation, the first emphasis effect includes an image display that can emphasize the effect pattern (missed combination) of a specific state by displaying a specific image across the effect pattern (reach pattern), and can include an audio output, the second emphasis effect includes an image display that can emphasize the effect pattern (missed combination) that notifies that a special game will not be executed by emphasizing each of the stopping effect patterns, and can include an audio output different from the first emphasis effect, the specific notification can include an image display and an audio output, and it is possible to limit the influence of the image displays of the first and second emphasis effects on the specific notification.
In this case, the left and right patterns are emphasized for reach patterns, and the left and right center patterns are emphasized for mixed miss patterns (and sound effects different from those for emphasizing reach patterns are produced) to enhance interest while ensuring visibility of volume images, etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, after a specific state (reach state) that anticipates the execution of a special game, a first emphasis effect can be executed that emphasizes an effect pattern that notifies that a special game will not be executed, a second emphasis effect can be executed that emphasizes an effect pattern that notifies that a special game will not be executed without reaching a specific state, and specific notifications (volume/light intensity images, etc.) regarding effect effects that can be adjusted according to operation can be executed, the first emphasis effect includes an image display that can emphasize an effect pattern that notifies that a special game will not be executed (reach miss) by emphasizing the effect pattern that stops last, and can include an audio output, the second emphasis effect includes an image display that can emphasize an effect pattern that notifies that a special game will not be executed (various miss) by emphasizing each of the effect patterns that stop, and can include an audio output different from the first emphasis effect, the specific notification can include an image display and an audio output, and it is possible to limit the influence of the image displays of the first and second emphasis effects on the specific notification.
In this case, the middle symbol is emphasized for a close miss, and the middle symbols on the left and right are emphasized for a mixed miss (and a different sound effect is generated from that for emphasizing a close miss), thereby ensuring the visibility of the volume image and the like while providing appropriate emphasis.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes a predetermined image (performance pattern, etc.) related to the change in the performance pattern, and it is possible to execute a specific notification (left-hit notification) that notifies the player about the playing method, and while the performance pattern is stopped to be confirmed, it is possible to execute a specific notification (left-hit notification), while it is possible to limit the emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop, etc.).
In this case, during the confirmation stop, the highlighting effect is limited to clearly display the confirmation effect pattern, while the left hit notification allows notification of an important game method that can be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a first emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) that emphasizes the change in the effect pattern during a temporary stop, a second emphasis effect that emphasizes an operation prompt image, and a specific notification (left-hit notification) that notifies the player about the game method; the first emphasis effect can emphasize the effect pattern by repeatedly (periodically) changing the emphasis area, and the second emphasis effect can emphasize the operation prompt image without repeatedly (periodically) changing the emphasis area; while the effect pattern is stopped to be confirmed, it is possible to execute a specific notification (left-hit notification), while the first emphasis effect can be restricted.
In this case, during the confirmed stop, the first emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) that enhances the effect is restricted to clearly display the confirmed effect pattern, while the left-hit notification is permitted as an important game method that can be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern that is temporarily stopped, a second emphasis effect that emphasizes the operation prompt image, and a specific notification (left hit notification) that notifies the player about the game method, and the first emphasis effect can include an action effect that moves at least a part of the effect pattern (character part, etc.) and an image effect that displays a predetermined emphasis image (effect pattern effect), and the second emphasis effect can include an action effect that moves at least a part of the operation prompt image and an image effect that displays a predetermined emphasis image, and while the effect pattern is stopped to be confirmed, it is possible to execute a specific notification (left hit notification), while the first emphasis effect can be restricted.
In this case, during the confirmed stop, the first emphasis effect (temporary stop emphasis, etc.) that enhances the presentation effect is restricted to clearly display the confirmed presentation pattern, while the left-hit notification is permitted as an important game method that can be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the operation prompting image, a second emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) that emphasizes the change in the temporarily stopped effect pattern, and a specific notification (left hit notification) that notifies the player about the game method, the first emphasis effect can include an action effect that causes at least a portion of the operation prompting image to operate and an image effect that displays a predetermined emphasis image, and the second emphasis effect can include an image effect that displays a specific emphasis image (emphasis image during temporary stop) that is different from the predetermined emphasis image, and while the effect pattern is stopped in a confirmed state, it is possible to execute a specific notification (left hit notification), while the second emphasis effect can be restricted.
In this case, during the confirmed stop, the two-emphasis effect (occurring during temporary stop) that enhances the presentation effect is restricted to clearly display the confirmed presentation pattern, while the left-hit notification is permitted as an important game method that can be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes an operation prompting image, a second emphasis effect that emphasizes a temporary stop effect pattern, a third emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) that emphasizes a change in the effect pattern during temporary stop, and a specific notification (left hit notification) that notifies the player about the playing method, and the first emphasis effect can emphasize at least the outer area of the area where the operation prompting image is displayed, the second emphasis effect can emphasize at least the outer area of the effect pattern, and the third emphasis effect can emphasize the surface area of the effect pattern, and while the effect pattern is stopped to be confirmed, it is possible to execute a specific notification (left hit notification), while the third emphasis effect is restricted.
In this case, during the confirmed stop, the 3-highlight effect (highlighting during temporary stop) that enhances the presentation effect is restricted to clearly display the confirmed presentation pattern, while the left-hit notification is permitted as an important game method that can be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern that is temporarily stopped, a second emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) that emphasizes the change in the effect pattern that has temporarily stopped, and a specific notification (left-hit notification) that notifies the player about the playing method, and the first emphasis effect can be executed in the order in which the effect patterns temporarily stop, and then the second emphasis effect can be executed in synchronization, and while the effect pattern is stopped to be confirmed, it is possible to execute a specific notification (left-hit notification).
In this case, during the confirmed stop, the second emphasis effect (synchronizing multiple patterns that have temporarily stopped in sequence to emphasize the temporary stop) that enhances the presentation effect is restricted to clearly display the confirmed presentation pattern, while the left-hit notification is permitted as an important game method that can be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern of the first column (left column) that temporarily stops, a second emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern of the third column (middle column) that temporarily stops after the effect patterns of the first and second columns (right column) temporarily stop, a third emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) that emphasizes a change in the effect patterns that have temporarily stopped, and a specific notification (left hit notification) that notifies the player about the playing method.After executing the first emphasis effect on the effect pattern of the first column and then the third emphasis effect, it is possible to execute the second emphasis effect on the effect pattern of the third column, and then execute the third emphasis effect on the effect pattern of the first column and the third emphasis effect on the effect pattern of the third column in synchronization, and while the effect pattern is stopped in a confirmed state, it is possible to execute a specific notification (left hit notification) while the effect pattern is stopped in a confirmed state, while the third emphasis effect can be restricted.
In this case, during the confirmed stop, the third emphasis effect (which is synchronized with the left and center symbols that have been temporarily stopped in order to emphasize the temporary stop) that enhances the presentation effect is restricted to clearly display the confirmed presentation symbol, while the left hit notification is permitted as an important game method that can be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern of the first column (left column) that temporarily stops, a second emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern of the second column (right column) that temporarily stops after the effect pattern of the first column has temporarily stopped, a third emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) that emphasizes the change in the effect pattern that has temporarily stopped, and a specific notification (left hit notification) that notifies the user about the playing method. After executing the first emphasis effect on the effect pattern of the first column and then the third emphasis effect, it is possible to execute the second emphasis effect on the effect pattern of the second column, and then execute the third emphasis effect on the effect pattern of the first column and the third emphasis effect on the effect pattern of the second column in synchronization, and while the effect pattern is stopped in a confirmed state, it is possible to execute a specific notification (left hit notification) while the third emphasis effect is being executed.
In this case, during the confirmed stop, the third emphasis effect (synchronizing the left and right patterns that have temporarily stopped in order to emphasize the temporary stop) which enhances the presentation effect is restricted to clearly display the confirmed presentation pattern, while the notification is permitted for the important game method in which specific notification is executable.

In addition, in this embodiment, a specific presentation means can execute a specific emphasis presentation that emphasizes a specific image (presentation pattern, etc.) related to the presentation of changing presentation patterns, and a specific notification (left-hit notification) that notifies the game method can be executed, and a presentation corresponding to the specific emphasis presentation can be executed in a specific presentation means different from the specific presentation means, and if a specific notification (left-hit notification) is executed while a specific emphasis presentation (reach emphasis, etc.) is being executed, the specific presentation means can execute a presentation corresponding to the specific emphasis presentation, but can restrict the execution of the presentation corresponding to the specific notification.
In this case, when the left-hit notification is made on an LCD screen or the like, the device/button will continue to display the effect corresponding to the LCD's highlight effect and will not participate in the left-hit notification, thereby preventing excessive left-hit notification.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display means (liquid crystal) is capable of displaying an operation prompting image that prompts the player to operate the operating means and of executing a predetermined emphasis effect that emphasizes the operation prompting image, and is capable of executing a specific notification (left-hit notification) that notifies the player of a game method, and the operating means is capable of executing an effect corresponding to the predetermined emphasis effect, and if a specific notification (left-hit notification) is executed while the predetermined emphasis effect is being executed, the operating means is capable of executing an effect corresponding to the predetermined emphasis effect, but is also capable of restricting the execution of an effect corresponding to the specific notification.
In this case, when a left-hit notification is made on a liquid crystal display or the like, the button continues to display a presentation corresponding to the highlighting of the button image on the liquid crystal display and does not participate in the left-hit notification, thereby preventing excessive left-hit notification.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display means is capable of executing a predetermined emphasis effect that emphasizes a predetermined image to notify the execution of a special game, and is capable of executing a specific notification (left-hit notification) that notifies the game method, and the operation means is capable of executing an effect corresponding to the predetermined emphasis effect, and if a specific notification (left-hit notification) is executed while the predetermined emphasis effect is being executed, the operation means is capable of executing an effect corresponding to the predetermined emphasis effect, but is also capable of restricting the execution of an effect corresponding to the specific notification.
In this case, when a left-hit notification is made on an LCD screen or the like, the buttons continue to display effects corresponding to the LCD's rainbow effect, etc., and do not participate in the left-hit notification, thereby preventing excessive left-hit notifications.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display means can execute a predetermined emphasis effect that emphasizes the display pattern of a specific state (reach state) that anticipates the execution of a special game, and can execute a specific notification (left-hit notification) that notifies the player of the game method, and the operation means can execute an effect corresponding to the predetermined emphasis effect, and if the specific notification (left-hit notification) is executed while the predetermined emphasis effect is being executed, the operation means can execute an effect corresponding to the predetermined emphasis effect, but can restrict the execution of the effect corresponding to the specific notification.
In this case, when a left-hit notification is made on a liquid crystal display or the like, the button does not participate in the left-hit notification by continuing to display effects corresponding to the reach emphasis on the liquid crystal display, etc., thereby preventing excessive left-hit notification.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display means is capable of executing a predetermined emphasis effect that emphasizes a display pattern (double numbers) that notifies the execution of a special game, and is capable of executing a specific notification (left-hit notification) that notifies the game method, and the operation means is capable of executing an effect corresponding to the predetermined emphasis effect, and if a specific notification (left-hit notification) is executed while the predetermined emphasis effect is being executed, the operation means is capable of executing an effect corresponding to the predetermined emphasis effect, but is also capable of restricting the execution of an effect corresponding to the specific notification.
In this case, when a left-hit notification is made on an LCD screen or the like, the button does not participate in the left-hit notification by continuing to display effects corresponding to the LCD screen highlighting the double numbers, etc., thereby preventing excessive left-hit notifications.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display means can execute a predetermined emphasis effect that emphasizes a predetermined image to notify the execution of a special game, and can execute a specific notification (left-hit notification) that notifies the game method, and the movable device can execute an effect corresponding to the predetermined emphasis effect, and if a specific notification (left-hit notification) is executed while the predetermined emphasis effect is being executed, the movable device can execute an effect corresponding to the predetermined emphasis effect, but can restrict the execution of the effect corresponding to the specific notification.
In this case, for movable devices, when a left-hit notification is made on a liquid crystal display or the like, the device continues to display effects corresponding to the liquid crystal display's rainbow effect or the like and does not participate in the left-hit notification, thereby preventing excessive left-hit notifications.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display means can execute a predetermined emphasis effect that emphasizes the performance pattern of a specific state (reach state) that anticipates the execution of a special game, and can execute a specific notification (left-hit notification) that notifies the game method, and the movable role can execute an effect corresponding to the predetermined emphasis effect, and if the specific notification (left-hit notification) is executed while the predetermined emphasis effect is being executed, the movable role can execute an effect (role emphasis/action) corresponding to the predetermined emphasis effect, while the execution of the effect corresponding to the specific notification can be restricted.
In this case, when the left-hit notification is made on a liquid crystal display or the like, the movable device continues to display effects corresponding to the reach emphasis on the liquid crystal display, etc., and does not participate in the left-hit notification, thereby preventing excessive left-hit notification.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display means can execute a predetermined emphasis effect that emphasizes a display pattern (double numbers) that notifies the execution of a special game, and can execute a specific notification (left-hit notification) that notifies the game method, and the movable role can execute an effect corresponding to the predetermined emphasis effect, and if a specific notification (left-hit notification) is executed while the predetermined emphasis effect is being executed, the movable role can execute an effect (role emphasis/action) that corresponds to the predetermined emphasis effect, while the execution of the effect corresponding to the specific notification can be restricted.
In this case, when the left-hit notification is made on a liquid crystal display or the like, the movable device continues to display effects corresponding to the highlighting of the double numbers on the liquid crystal display, etc., and does not participate in the left-hit notification, thereby preventing excessive left-hit notification.

(Characteristic Configuration 2 of the Present Embodiment)
Next, the characteristic configuration of the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, it is possible to execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern while the effect pattern is fluctuating, it is possible to output an emphasis sound when the emphasis effect is executed, it is possible to execute a specific notification regarding the operation of the operation means, it is possible to execute a first mode and a second mode, it is possible to make the emphasis sound different between the first mode and the second mode, and it is possible to make the notification sound output when the specific notification is executed common between the first mode and the second mode.
In this case, by using different emphasis sounds for the first and second modes, it is possible to add variety to the presentation, while by using the same notification sounds for multiple modes, it is possible to make specific notifications easier for players to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes a performance pattern that has been temporarily stopped in a specific area, it is possible to output an emphasis sound when the emphasis effect is executed, it is possible to execute a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means, there are a first mode and a second mode, it is possible to make the emphasis sound different between the first mode and the second mode, and it is possible to make the notification sound output when the specific notification is made the same between the first mode and the second mode.
In this case, by making the emphasis sound that emphasizes the effect symbol that has stopped in the specific area different between the first mode and the second mode, it is possible to provide variety to the effect symbol that has stopped in the specific area. On the other hand, by making the notification sound common to multiple modes, it is possible to make the specific notification easier for the player to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, an emphasis effect can be executed when the effect pattern stops, and an emphasis sound can be output when the emphasis effect is executed, the effect pattern includes a first effect pattern and a second effect pattern, and a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means can be executed, and although the display form of the emphasis effect differs between the first effect pattern and the second effect pattern, the emphasis sound is common, and the notification sound of the specific notification is common whether the first effect pattern stops or the second effect pattern stops.
In this case, the display mode of the emphasis effect can be different when the first effect symbol stops and when the second effect symbol stops, but the emphasis sound can be the same, so that the effect can be made diverse and the common emphasis sound can be made uniform. On the other hand, by making the notification sound the same when the first effect symbol stops and when the second effect symbol stops, the specific notification can be made easy to understand for the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, an emphasis effect can be executed when the effect pattern stops, and an emphasis sound can be output when the emphasis effect is executed, and the effect patterns include a first effect pattern, a second effect pattern, and a third effect pattern, and a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means can be executed, and the emphasis sound is the same for the first effect pattern and the second effect pattern, but different for the first effect pattern and the third effect pattern, and the notification sound of the specific notification is the same regardless of which of the first effect pattern to the third effect pattern stops.
In this case, the emphasis sound can be the same when the first effect symbol stops and when the second effect symbol stops, and the emphasis sound can be different between the first effect symbol and the third effect symbol, so that the effect can have uniformity and diversity. On the other hand, by making the notification sound the same regardless of which effect symbol stops, the specific notification can be made easy to understand for the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern in the first area and a second emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern in the second area, it is possible to output an emphasis sound when the emphasis effect is executed, and it is possible to execute a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means, and although the display form is different between the first emphasis effect and the second emphasis effect, it is possible to make the emphasis sound common, and it is possible to make the notification sound output when the specific notification is executed common between the execution of the first emphasis effect and the execution of the second emphasis effect.
In this case, by using different display modes for the highlighting effect for the symbols that stop in the first area and the highlighting effect for the symbols that stop in the second area, it is possible to add variety to the effects, and by outputting the same highlight sound for both highlighting effects, it is possible to add uniformity to the effects. On the other hand, by using the same notification sound during the execution of both highlighting effects, it is possible to make the specific notification easier for the player to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first performance pattern can be stopped in the first area (left area) and the second area (right area) (reach is established), the second performance pattern can be stopped in the first area (left area) and the second area (right area) (reach is established), an emphasis performance can be executed before the same type of performance pattern stops in the first area and the second area, the performance pattern can be made different between the emphasis performance executed before the first performance pattern stops in the first area and the second area and the emphasis performance executed before the second performance pattern stops in the first area and the second area, specific notifications can be executed regarding the operation of the operating means, and the notification sound output during the specific notification can be made the same during the execution of the emphasis performance before the first performance pattern stops in the first area and the second area and during the execution of the emphasis performance before the second performance pattern stops in the first area and the second area.
In this case, by differentiating the presentation mode between the first symbol and the second symbol, it is possible to provide variety to the presentation and increase the expectation for the reach presentation. On the other hand, by using the same notification sound for the reach presentation using either symbol, it is possible to make the specific notification of the specific notification easier for the player to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first performance pattern can be stopped in the first area (left area) and the second area (right area) (reach is achieved), the second performance pattern can be stopped in the first area (left area) and the second area (right area) (reach is achieved), an emphasis performance can be executed for the performance pattern stopped in the first area and the second area, the performance pattern can be made different between the emphasis performance when the first performance pattern is stopped in the first area and the second area and the emphasis performance when the second performance pattern is stopped in the first area and the second area, specific notifications can be executed regarding the operation of the operating means, and the notification sound output at the time of the specific notification can be made the same when the first performance pattern is stopped in the first area and the second area and when the second performance pattern is stopped in the first area and the second area.
In this case, by differentiating the presentation mode of the emphasis presentation when the first symbol is reached and when the second symbol is reached, it is possible to provide variety to the presentation and improve the interest of the subsequent reach presentation. On the other hand, by using the same notification sound when either symbol is reached, it is possible to make the specific notification of the specific notification easier for the player to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, a predetermined effect pattern can be stopped in the first area (left area) and the second area (right area), and after the predetermined effect pattern is stopped in the first and second areas, a special effect (reach effect) can be executed, and after the predetermined effect pattern is stopped in the first and second areas, before the special effect is executed, there are times when an emphasis effect is executed in a first mode and when an emphasis effect is executed in a second mode different from the first mode, and it is possible to make the emphasis sound of the emphasis effect different when the emphasis effect is executed in the first mode and when the emphasis effect is executed in the second mode, and it is possible to execute a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means, and it is possible to make the notification sound output at the time of the specific notification the same when the emphasis effect is executed in the first mode and when the emphasis effect is executed in the second mode.
In this case, by performing an emphasis effect when the effect symbols are stopped in the first and second areas and by varying the effect mode of the emphasis effect, it is possible to provide variety to the effect and improve the interest of the subsequent reach effect. On the other hand, by using the same notification sound regardless of the mode in which the emphasis effect is performed, it is possible to make the specific notification of the specific notification easier for the player to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, a special effect (reach effect) can be executed by stopping the effect patterns in the first and second areas (left and middle areas), and the special effect includes an early effect and a subsequent late effect, and while the late effect is being executed, a predetermined effect is executed in the third area (middle area) using a first effect pattern that is the same as the effect pattern stopped in the first and second areas and a second effect pattern that is different from the first effect pattern, and an emphasis effect is executed for the effect patterns during the predetermined effect, and an emphasis sound can be output when the emphasis effect is executed, and a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means can be executed, and the emphasis sound can be made common for the emphasis effect for the first effect pattern and the emphasis effect for the second effect pattern, and the notification sound output during the specific notification can be made common when the emphasis effect for the first effect pattern is being executed and when the emphasis effect for the second effect pattern is being executed.
In this case, in the latter half of the special effect, the predetermined effect using the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol in the second area can be emphasized, thereby increasing the interest of the effect. By making the notification sound common to multiple modes even during the execution of the predetermined effect, it is possible to make the specific notification easier for the player to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, a special effect (reach effect) can be executed by stopping the effect symbols in the first area and the second area (left area and middle area), and the special effects include a first special effect that is executed by stopping the first effect symbol in the first area and the second area, and a second special effect that is executed by stopping the second effect symbol in the first area and the second area, and when the first effect symbol is stopped in the third area (middle area) in the first special effect, a first emphasis effect can be executed for the first effect symbol, and when the second effect symbol is stopped in the third area (middle area) in the second special effect, a second emphasis effect can be executed for the second effect symbol, specific notifications can be issued regarding operation of the operating means, and the emphasis sound for the emphasis effect can be made different when the first emphasis effect is executed and when the second emphasis effect is executed, and the notification sound output at the time of the specific notification can be made the same when the first emphasis effect is executed and when the second emphasis effect is executed.
In this case, by using different emphasis sounds when the first effect symbol in the third area stops and a jackpot is announced, and when the second effect symbol stops and a jackpot is announced, it is possible to add variety to the presentation. Also, by using the same notification sound when either effect symbol stops, it is possible to make the specific notification of the specific notification easier for the player to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, an emphasis effect can be executed for a display pattern that indicates a jackpot, an emphasis sound can be output when the emphasis effect is executed, a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means can be executed, there are a first mode and a second mode, the emphasis sound can be different between the first mode and the second mode, and the notification sound output when the specific notification is made can be the same between the first mode and the second mode.
In this case, the jackpot symbol can be emphasized by the emphasis effect and emphasis sound. By using different emphasis sounds in the first and second modes, the effect can be made more diverse. On the other hand, by using the same notification sound in multiple modes, the specific notification can be made easier for the player to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a special effect (reach effect) using a performance pattern, and the special effect is divided into an early effect and a late effect, and in the early effect, a first emphasis effect can be executed for the performance pattern, and in the late effect, a second emphasis effect can be executed for the performance pattern, and specific notifications regarding operation of the operating means can be executed, and it is possible to make the performance pattern different between the first emphasis effect and the second emphasis effect, and it is possible to make the type of specific notification the same when the first emphasis effect is being executed and when the second emphasis effect is being executed.
In this case, by making the presentation style of the emphasis effect different between the early and late special effects, it is possible to add variety to the presentation, while by making the style of the specific notification common before and after the special effect, it is possible to make the specific notification easier for players to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes the reel, it is possible to output an emphasis sound when the emphasis effect is executed, it is possible to execute specific notifications regarding the operation of the operating means, and it is possible to execute special effects (reach effects) that raise expectations of special games, and the special effects include early stage effects and late stage effects, and the presentation style of the emphasis effect differs when the reel effect is executed in the early stage effect and when the reel effect is executed in the late stage effect, and it is possible to make the notification sound output during the specific notification the same when the reel effect is executed in the early stage effect and when the reel effect is executed in the late stage effect.
In this case, the type of emphasis effect when the role object operates can be made different between the first and second stage effects, which can add variety to the effects. On the other hand, by using the same notification sound regardless of which emphasis effect is being performed, it is possible to make the specific notification easier for the player to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a reel performance that operates a reel, it is possible to execute an emphasis performance on the reel in the reel performance, it is possible to output an emphasis sound when executing the emphasis performance, it is possible to execute a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means, there are a first mode and a second mode, it is possible to make the emphasis sound different between the first mode and the second mode, and it is possible to make the notification sound output when the specific notification is made the same between the first mode and the second mode.
In this case, by making the emphasis sound different when the reel operates in the first mode and the second mode, it is possible to add variety to the presentation, while by making the notification sound common across multiple modes, it is possible to make specific notifications easier for players to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect that suggests the possibility of a special game being executed, it is possible to execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes the suggestive effect, it is possible to output an emphasis sound when the emphasis effect is executed, the suggestive effect has a first form and a second form, it is possible to execute a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means, it is possible to make the emphasis sound different for the suggestive effect of the first form and the suggestive effect of the second form, and it is possible to make the notification sound output when the specific notification is executed the same when the suggestive effect of the first form is executed and when the suggestive effect of the second form is executed.
In this case, by making the emphasis sound of the suggestive effect different between the first and second modes, it is possible to add variety to the effect, while by making the notification sound the same regardless of whether the suggestive effect is performed in the first or second mode, it is possible to make the specific notification easier for the player to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to display a corresponding display (reserved image 52, variable image 51) corresponding to the game information, it is possible to execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes the corresponding display, it is possible to output an emphasis sound when the emphasis effect is executed, the corresponding display has a first state and a second state, it is possible to execute a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means, it is possible to make the emphasis sound different when the corresponding display is displayed in the first state and when it is displayed in the second state, and it is possible to make the notification sound output during the specific notification the same when the corresponding display is displayed in the first state and when it is displayed in the second state.
In this case, by using different emphasis sounds when the corresponding display is displayed in the first mode and when it is displayed in the second mode, it is possible to add variety to the presentation, while by using the same notification sound regardless of the mode the icon changes to, it is possible to make the specific notification easier for the player to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute an operation performance that displays an operation prompting image that prompts operation of the first operating means, it is possible to execute an emphasis performance related to the operation performance when executing the operation performance, it is possible to output an emphasis sound when executing the emphasis performance, it is possible to execute a specific notification regarding operation of the second operating means, there are a first mode and a second mode, it is possible to make the emphasis sound different between the first mode and the second mode, and it is possible to make the notification sound output when the specific notification is made the same between the first mode and the second mode.
In this case, by making the emphasis sounds different when executing the operation presentation in the first mode and the second mode, it is possible to add variety to the presentation, while by making the notification sounds common across multiple modes, it is possible to make specific notifications easier for players to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute an operation performance that displays an operation prompting image that prompts operation of the first operating means, it is possible to execute an emphasis performance that emphasizes the operation performance before displaying the operation prompting image, it is possible to output an emphasis sound when the emphasis performance is executed, the emphasis performance has a first form and a second form, it is possible to execute a specific notification regarding operation of the second operating means, it is possible to make the emphasis sound different when executing the emphasis performance of the first form and when executing the emphasis performance of the second form, and it is possible to make the notification sound output when the specific notification is the same when executing the emphasis performance of the first form and when executing the emphasis performance of the second form.
In this case, by performing the first mode emphasis effect or the second mode emphasis effect before forming the button image, it is possible to add variety to the effect, while by making the notification sound the same regardless of which mode of emphasis effect is performed, it is possible to make the specific notification easier for the player to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute an operation performance that displays an operation prompting image that prompts operation of the first operation means, it is possible to execute an emphasis performance that emphasizes the operation prompting image during the operation valid period, it is possible to output an emphasis sound when the emphasis performance is executed, the operation performance includes a first operation performance that causes operation in a first manner and a second operation performance that causes operation in a second manner, it is possible to execute a specific notification regarding operation of the second operation means, it is possible to make the emphasis sound different when the first operation performance is executed and when the second operation performance is executed, and it is possible to make the notification sound output when the specific notification is executed the same when the first operation performance is executed and when the second operation performance is executed.
In this case, by making the emphasis sounds of the operation presentation different between the first operation presentation and the second operation presentation, it is possible to add variety to the presentation, while by making the notification sounds common to multiple operation presentations, it is possible to make specific notifications easier for players to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute an operation effect that displays an operation prompting image that prompts operation of the first operation means, it is possible to execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes the operation prompting image during the operation valid period, it is possible to output an emphasis sound when the emphasis effect is executed, it is possible to execute a specific notification regarding the operation of the second operation means, it is possible to make the emphasis sound different before and after the execution of a special effect (reach), and it is possible to make the notification sound output during the specific notification the same before and after the execution of the special effect.
In this case, by making the emphasis sounds of the operation effects different before and after the special effects, it is possible to add variety to the effects, while by making the notification sounds the same before and after the special effects, it is possible to make the specific notifications easier for players to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute an operation performance that displays an operation prompting image that prompts operation of the first operating means, it is possible to execute an emphasis performance in response to operation of the first operating means during the operation performance, it is possible to execute a first operation performance at a first timing and a second operation performance at a second timing, it is possible to execute a first emphasis performance in response to operation while the first operation performance is being executed, it is possible to execute a second emphasis performance in response to operation while the second operation performance is being executed, it is possible to execute a specific notification regarding operation of the second operating means, it is possible to make the emphasis sound different between the first emphasis performance and the second emphasis performance, and it is possible to make the notification sound output during the specific notification the same when the first emphasis performance is executed and when the second emphasis performance is executed.
In this case, by making the emphasis sound of the emphasis effect corresponding to the operation different between the first operation effect at the first timing and the second operation effect at the second timing, it is possible to add variety to the effects, while by making the notification sound the same at both timings, it is possible to make the specific notification easier for the player to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute an operation performance that displays an operation prompting image that prompts operation of the first operation means, it is possible to execute an emphasis performance in response to operation during the valid operation period, it is possible to output an emphasis sound when the emphasis performance is executed, and it is possible to execute a specific notification regarding operation of the second operation means, the operation performance including a first operation performance that causes operation in a first manner and a second operation performance that causes operation in a second manner, it is possible to make the emphasis sound different for the emphasis performance that causes operation during the first operation performance and the emphasis performance that causes operation during the second operation performance, and it is possible to make the notification sound output during the specific notification the same when an emphasis performance that causes operation during the first operation performance is executed and when an emphasis performance that causes operation during the second operation performance is executed.
In this case, the emphasis sound of the emphasis effect executed according to the operation can be made different when the first operation effect is performed and when the second operation effect is performed, thereby providing variety to the effect, while the notification sound can be made common regardless of which operation effect is executed, making it easier for the player to understand the specific notification.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern while the effect pattern is changing, it is possible to output an emphasis sound when the emphasis effect is executed, it is possible to execute a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means, there are a first mode and a second mode, it is possible to make the length of the emphasis sound different between the first mode and the second mode, and it is possible to make the length of the notification sound output during the specific notification the same between the first mode and the second mode.
In this case, by making the output time of the emphasis sound different between the first mode and the second mode, it is possible to add variety to the presentation, while by making the notification sound common to multiple modes, it is possible to make specific notifications easier for players to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a special effect (reach effect) using an effect pattern, and the special effect is divided into an early effect and a late effect, and in the early effect, a first emphasis effect can be executed for the effect pattern, and in the late effect, a second emphasis effect can be executed for the effect pattern, and specific notifications regarding operation of the operating means can be executed, and the length of the emphasis sound in the emphasis effect can be made different between the first emphasis effect and the second emphasis effect, and it is possible to make the length of the notification sound of the specific notification the same when the first emphasis effect is being executed and when the second emphasis effect is being executed.
In this case, by making the duration of the emphasis sound different between the early and late stages of the special effect, it is possible to add variety to the effect, while by making the form of the specific notification common before and after the special effect, it is possible to make the specific notification easier for the player to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, an emphasis effect can be executed for a display pattern that indicates a jackpot, an emphasis sound can be output when the emphasis effect is executed, and a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means can be executed, and there are a first mode and a second mode, and the length of the emphasis sound can be made different between the first mode and the second mode, and the length of the notification sound output when the specific notification is made can be made the same between the first mode and the second mode.
In this case, the presentation can be varied by varying the duration of the emphasis sound when the jackpot symbol is displayed between the first and second modes. On the other hand, by using the same notification sound across multiple modes, it is possible to make specific notifications easier for players to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute an operation performance that displays an operation prompting image that prompts operation of the first operating means, it is possible to execute an emphasis performance related to the operation performance when executing the operation performance, it is possible to output an emphasis sound when executing the emphasis performance, it is possible to execute a specific notification regarding operation of the second operating means, there are a first mode and a second mode, it is possible to make the length of the emphasis sound different between the first mode and the second mode, and it is possible to make the length of the notification sound output when the specific notification is made the same between the first mode and the second mode.
In this case, by making the output time of the emphasis sound during the operation presentation different between the first mode and the second mode, it is possible to add variety to the presentation, while by making the notification sound common across multiple modes, it is possible to make specific notifications easier for players to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a reel performance that operates a reel, it is possible to execute an emphasis performance on the reel in the reel performance, it is possible to output an emphasis sound when executing the emphasis performance, it is possible to execute a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means, there are a first mode and a second mode, it is possible to make the length of the emphasis sound different between the first mode and the second mode, and it is possible to make the length of the notification sound output during the specific notification the same between the first mode and the second mode.
In this case, by making the output time of the emphasis sound when the reel operates different between the first mode and the second mode, it is possible to add variety to the presentation, while by making the notification sound common to multiple modes, it is possible to make specific notifications easier for players to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect that suggests the possibility of a special game being executed, it is possible to execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes the suggestive effect, it is possible to output an emphasis sound when the emphasis effect is executed, the suggestive effect has a first form and a second form, it is possible to execute a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means, it is possible to make the length of the emphasis sound different between the suggestive effect of the first form and the suggestive effect of the second form, and it is possible to make the length of the notification sound output when the specific notification is the same when the suggestive effect of the first form is executed and when the suggestive effect of the second form is executed.
In this case, by making the output time of the emphasis sound of the suggestive effect different between the first and second modes, it is possible to add variety to the effect, while by making the output time of the notification sound the same regardless of whether the suggestive effect is performed in the first or second mode, it is possible to make the specific notification easier for the player to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to display a corresponding display (reserved image 52, variable image 51) corresponding to the game information, it is possible to execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes the corresponding display, it is possible to output an emphasis sound when the emphasis effect is executed, the corresponding display has a first state and a second state, it is possible to execute a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means, it is possible to make the length of the emphasis sound different when the corresponding display is displayed in the first state and when it is displayed in the second state, and it is possible to make the length of the notification sound output during the specific notification the same when the corresponding display is displayed in the first state and when it is displayed in the second state.
In this case, the output time of the emphasis sound can be made different when the corresponding display is displayed in the first mode and when it is displayed in the second mode, thereby adding variety to the presentation, while the output time of the notification sound can be made the same regardless of the mode the icon changes to, making the specific notification easier for the player to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a special effect (reach effect) using an effect pattern, it is possible to execute an emphasis effect on the effect pattern in the special effect, it is possible to output an emphasis sound when the emphasis effect is executed, it is possible to continuously output a predetermined sound while the effect pattern is changing, it is possible to execute a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means, the predetermined sound is different before and after the execution of the emphasis effect, and it is possible to make the notification sound output during the specific notification the same before and after the execution of the emphasis effect.
In this case, the output of the emphasis sound for the emphasis effect switches to a predetermined sound, which increases the interest of the emphasis effect and adds variety to the effect using sound. On the other hand, by using the same notification sound before and after the emphasis effect, it is possible to make the specific notification easier for the player to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a special effect (reach effect) using an effect pattern, it is possible to execute an emphasis effect on the effect pattern in the special effect, it is possible to output an emphasis sound when the emphasis effect is executed, the emphasis effects include a first emphasis effect and a second emphasis effect which has a higher expectation level than the first emphasis effect, it is possible to continuously output a predetermined sound while the effect pattern is changing, it is possible to execute a specific notification regarding the operation of the operation means, it is possible to output a first emphasis sound while the first emphasis effect is being executed and a second emphasis sound while the second emphasis effect is being executed, the predetermined sound is the same before and after the execution of the first emphasis effect but is different before and after the execution of the second emphasis effect, the notification sound output during the specific notification is the same before and after the execution of the first emphasis effect, and the notification sound is the same before and after the execution of the second emphasis effect.
In this case, a common predetermined sound can be output before and after the output of the first emphasis sound, and the predetermined sound is switched before and after the output of the second emphasis sound, which improves the interest of the emphasis effect and provides consistency and variety to the effect using sound. Also, by using a common notification sound before and after the first emphasis effect and before and after the second emphasis effect, it is possible to make the specific notification easier for the player to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes a performance pattern while the performance pattern indicating a jackpot is being displayed, it is possible to execute a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means, it is possible to execute a specific notification during the emphasis effect, and it is possible to execute a specific notification with priority over the emphasis effect.
In this case, if an emphasis effect is displayed while a pattern indicating a jackpot is being displayed, the player may panic and hit the ball to the right, but by prioritizing the specific notification (left-hit notification), unnecessary hits to the right can be prevented.

In addition, in this embodiment, an emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the effect pattern while the effect pattern indicating a jackpot is being displayed, a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means can be executed, and a specific notification can be executed during the emphasis effect, with the execution time of the specific notification being longer (or different) than the execution time of the emphasis effect.
In this case, unnecessary right-hand hits can be suppressed by making the specific notification for a relatively long time.

In addition, in this embodiment, an emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the effect pattern while the effect pattern indicating a jackpot is being displayed, a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means can be executed, and a specific notification can be executed during the emphasis effect, and when a specific notification is executed during the emphasis effect, at least a part of the effect pattern and the emphasis effect becomes difficult to see or impossible to see due to the specific notification image.
In this case, the specific notification image hides part of the symbols and highlighting effects, so that the specific notification can be seen even during the highlighting effects. Since the other parts of the symbols and highlighting effects are not hidden by the specific notification image, the player can still recognize the symbols and highlighting effects even during the specific notification, so that the interest is not lost.

In addition, in this embodiment, an emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the effect pattern while it is displayed, which indicates a jackpot, and a specific notification (left-hit notification) regarding the operation of the operating means (handle) can be executed, and the specific notification can be executed during the emphasis effect, and the specific notification continues for a predetermined time, and if the special pattern is displayed in a stopped state even before the predetermined time has elapsed, the specific notification can be terminated.
In this case, the player may panic and hit the ball to the right during the emphasized display that suggests a big win, but by continuing the specific notification (left hit notification) for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to reliably prevent unnecessary hitting to the right, and if the special symbol is stopped, the player can play in accordance with the special symbol stopping.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern while the effect pattern that suggests a jackpot is being displayed, and it is possible to output a specific alarm sound (left-hit alarm sound) related to the operation of the operating means (handle), and it is possible to output the specific alarm sound during the emphasis effect, and the specific alarm sound is output for a predetermined time, and if the special pattern is displayed in a stopped state even before the predetermined time has elapsed, the output of the specific alarm sound can be terminated.
In this case, the player may panic and hit the right button during the emphasized effect that suggests a big hit, but by outputting a specific notification sound (left hit), it is possible to suppress unnecessary right hits, and if the special symbol stops, a sound corresponding to the special symbol stopping can be output.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a reel effect that operates a reel, and when the reel effect is executed, it is possible to execute an emphasis effect on the reel, it is possible to execute a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means, it is possible to execute the specific notification and the reel effect simultaneously, and when the specific notification and the reel effect are executed, it is possible to make the reel appear while giving priority to the specific notification over the emphasis effect associated with the reel effect.
In this case, the player may panic and hit the right hand during the bonus effect that suggests a big win, but by outputting a specific notification sound (a left hit), it is possible to prevent unnecessary right hand hits. Even in this case, the bonus effect will appear, so the fun factor can be maintained.

In addition, in this embodiment, an emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the effect pattern while it is being displayed, which indicates a jackpot, an emphasis sound can be output when the emphasis effect is executed, a specific notification (left-hit notification) regarding the game can be executed depending on the operation of the operating means (handle), a specific notification can be executed during the emphasis effect, and the output time of the notification sound related to the specific notification is longer (or different) than that of the emphasis sound related to the emphasis effect.
In this case, the player may panic and hit the right button while the effect symbol indicating a big win is displayed, but by making the notification sound for the specific notification longer than the emphasis sound for the emphasis effect, unnecessary hits to the right can be prevented.

In addition, in this embodiment, an emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the effect pattern while the effect pattern indicating a jackpot is being displayed, a first specific notification (left-hit notification) regarding the operation of the operating means (handle) can be executed, the first specific notification can be executed during the emphasis effect, and after the emphasis effect, a second specific notification (right-hit notification) regarding the operation of the operating means (handle) can be executed, the first specific notification can continue for a first period of time, and the second specific notification can continue for a second period of time that is longer than the first period of time.
In this case, the player may panic and hit the ball to the right during the emphasized display that suggests a big win, but by executing the first specific notification (left hit notification), it is possible to prevent unnecessary hitting to the right, and then by executing the second specific notification, it is possible to make the player perform the correct operation.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern while it is displayed, which indicates a jackpot, and there is an operating means that can perform a first operation (hit to the right) and a second operation (hit to the left), and when the first operation (hit to the right) is performed on the operating means (handle), a specific notification (hit to the left) can be executed, and during the emphasis effect, it is possible to execute a specific notification when the first operation (hit to the right) is performed, and after the emphasis effect, it is possible to not execute a specific notification when the first operation (hit to the right) is performed.
In this case, the player may panic and hit the ball to the right during the emphasis effect that suggests a big win, but by executing a specific notification (left hit notification), unnecessary hitting to the right can be suppressed, and the specific notification can be suppressed after the emphasis effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, an emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the effect pattern while the effect pattern indicating a jackpot is displayed, a first specific notification (left-hit notification) regarding the operation of the operating means (handle) can be executed, the first specific notification can be executed during the emphasis effect, and after the emphasis effect, a second specific notification (right-hit notification) regarding the operation of the operating means (handle) can be executed upon the start of a special game, the first specific notification being executed at a fixed first position, and the second specific notification being executed at the second position and then at the third position.
In this case, the player may panic and hit the right button during the highlighting effect that suggests a jackpot, but by executing the first specific notification (left hit notification), it is possible to prevent unnecessary hitting the right button and then execute the second specific notification. The first specific notification is displayed in a fixed position, making it easy for the player to understand, while the second specific notification's display position changes, adding variety to the effect and increasing interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display of the effect pattern can be changed based on the determination result of whether or not to play a special game, and when it is determined that a special game will be played, the game can be controlled to a second game state (time-saving state) that is more advantageous than the first game state (normal state), and in the second game state, a specific notification (right hit notification) regarding a specified operation (right hit) of the operating means (handle) can be executed, and in the second game state, an emphasis effect can be executed on the effect pattern while the effect pattern is being displayed in a changing manner, and an emphasis effect can be executed during the specific notification (right hit notification), and when an emphasis effect is executed during the specific notification, the specific notification (right hit notification) applies to a part of the emphasis effect and is displayed with priority over that part of the emphasis effect.
In this case, the specific notification is preferentially displayed so as to overlap with a part of the highlight effect, so it can be displayed in a prominent position and made easy for the player to understand. Even in this case, other parts of the highlight effect (and effect pattern) are not covered by the specific notification, so the highlight effect (and effect pattern) can be seen, and interest can be improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game can be controlled between a first game state (normal state) and a second game state (time-saving state) that is more advantageous than the first game state, and in the second game state, a first specific notification (right-hit notification) regarding a first operation of the operating means (handle) can be executed, and when transitioning from the second game state to the first game state, a second specific notification regarding a second operation of the operating means (handle) can be executed, and in the first game state, an emphasis effect can be executed on the effect pattern when the effect pattern stops, and a second specific notification can be executed during the emphasis effect, and the second specific notification can be displayed in priority over the effect pattern and the emphasis effect.
In this case, the second specific notification is displayed with priority over the symbols, and even if an emphasis effect is performed, the second specific notification is displayed with priority over the emphasis effect, so that the player can be strongly encouraged to perform the second operation.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game can be controlled between a first game state (normal state) and a second game state (time-shortened state), and in the first game state, if a first condition regarding the operation of the operating means (handle) is met, a specific notification (left-hit notification) can be executed, and if a second condition regarding the transition of the game state is met, a specific notification can be executed, and if a specific notification is made based on the second condition being met, the specific notification can be made in a first manner, and if a specific notification is made based on the first condition being met, the specific notification can be made in the first manner and then in the second manner.
In this case, when a specific notification (left-hit notification) is made based on the establishment of the first condition, the specific notification is made in two stages, which allows the player to perform the correct operation on the operating means. On the other hand, when a specific notification is made based on the establishment of the second condition, the specific notification is not made in two stages, which prevents excessive specific notifications.

In addition, in this embodiment, after stopping the display pattern indicating a jackpot, a re-draw display can be executed in which a different display pattern indicating a jackpot or the same display pattern is displayed, and in the re-draw display, an emphasis display can be executed in which the display pattern is emphasized, a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means can be executed, a specific notification can be executed during the emphasis display, and the specific notification can be displayed with priority over the emphasis display.
In this case, if a jackpot is confirmed, the player may rush and make a right hit even though it is not the right time to do so. However, by displaying a specific notification (left hit notification) as a priority, unnecessary right hits can be prevented.

In addition, in this embodiment, a full rotation reach effect is performed in which a specific pattern combination, which is a combination of the same patterns that indicates a jackpot, is displayed in a variable manner, and in the full rotation reach effect, an emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the effect pattern, a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means can be executed, a specific notification can be executed during the emphasis effect, and the specific notification can be displayed with priority over the emphasis effect.
In this case, if a jackpot is confirmed, the player may rush and make a right hit even though it is not the right time to do so. However, by displaying a specific notification (left hit notification) as a priority, unnecessary right hits can be prevented.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern during the variable effect, it is possible to output an emphasis sound when executing the emphasis effect, it is possible to execute a special effect using the effect pattern, it is possible to display a specific image after displaying an effect pattern indicating a miss in the special effect, it is possible to execute a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means, and it is possible to limit the output of the emphasis sound while the specific image is being displayed, but it is possible to output a notification sound regarding the specific notification.
In this case, the interest of the effect using the effect pattern can be improved by executing the highlight effect, while the highlight sound of the highlight effect can be limited while the specific image is being displayed after the result of the special effect is displayed, so that attention can be drawn to the specific image. It is also possible to output the notification sound even while the specific image is being displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect that suggests the possibility of a special game being played, it is possible to execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes the suggestion effect, it is possible to output an emphasis sound when the emphasis effect is executed, it is possible to adjust the effect of the effect depending on the operation of the first operating means, it is possible to output a specific notification sound depending on the operation of the second operating means, it is possible to output a specific notification sound during the emphasis effect, and when the specific notification is performed during the emphasis effect and an operation is performed on the first operating means, it is possible to adjust the emphasis sound and it is possible to adjust the specific notification sound.
In this case, unnecessary right hits can be suppressed by outputting the specific notification sound even during the emphasis effect, and the specific notification sound can be adjusted by the first operating means.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect that suggests the possibility of a special game being executed, it is possible to execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes the suggestion effect, it is possible to output an emphasis sound when the emphasis effect is executed, it is possible to adjust the effect of the effect depending on the operation of the first operating means, it is possible to output a specific notification sound depending on the operation of the second operating means, it is possible to execute a specific notification during the emphasis effect, and when the specific notification is executed during the emphasis effect and an operation is performed on the first operating means, it is possible to adjust the emphasis sound but not adjust the specific notification sound.
In this case, unnecessary right hits can be suppressed by outputting a specific notification sound even during the emphasis effect, and by making the specific notification sound unadjustable even when the emphasis sound is adjusted using the first operating means, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice the specific notification.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect that suggests the possibility of a special game being executed, and it is possible to execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes the suggestion effect, and it is provided with first adjustment means and second adjustment means that can adjust the effect of the effect, and if an operation is performed on the first adjustment means while the emphasis effect is being executed, it is possible to adjust the effect of the emphasis effect and to issue a specific notification, and if an operation is performed on the second adjustment means, it is possible to adjust the effect of the emphasis effect without issuing the specific notification.
In this case, the effect of the emphasis effect can be adjusted even during the emphasis effect, and when the first adjustment means is used, a specific notification is made, so that the adjustment can be recognized, whereas when the second adjustment means is used, no specific notification is made, so that the user can concentrate on the emphasis effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display pattern can be displayed in a variable manner, an emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the effect pattern, and first and second adjustment means are provided that can adjust the effect of the emphasis effect, and if an operation is performed on the first adjustment means while the emphasis effect is being executed, the effect of the emphasis effect can be adjusted and a specific notification can be issued, and if an operation is performed on the second adjustment means, the effect of the emphasis effect can be adjusted without issuing the specific notification.
In this case, the effect of the emphasis effect can be adjusted even during the emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern, and when the first adjustment means is used, a specific notification is made so that the adjustment can be recognized, whereas when the second adjustment means is used, no specific notification is made so that the player can concentrate on the emphasis effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect that suggests the possibility of a special game being played, it is possible to execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes the suggestion effect, it is possible to set a first mode and a second mode, it is possible to execute the emphasis effect in the second mode, the effect of the emphasis effect can be changed from the first state to the second state depending on the operation of the adjustment means, and when the power is turned off and then turned on while set to the second mode and the second state, the second mode is maintained but the effect is returned to the first state (or set to the second state).
In this case, the effect of the highlighting effect can be adjusted, and the interest can be improved. When the power is turned off in the second mode and then turned on again, the second mode can be started again, and the effect that has been set can be reset.

Second Embodiment
The second embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. Note that the following mainly focuses on differences from the above-described embodiments, and explanations of points that are the same as any of the above-described embodiments may be omitted.

Furthermore, the configuration described above in the first embodiment may correspond to the configuration described below. More specifically, the normal gaming state corresponds to the normal state. Furthermore, the special time-saving gaming state and the special time-saving gaming state correspond to the high-base time-saving state. Furthermore, the stage image 61 corresponds to the background image. Furthermore, the gaming state command corresponds to the gaming state designation command. Furthermore, the gaming control board 200B corresponds to the main control board 200B.
Corresponding configurations of one embodiment and another embodiment may be interchanged, or a configuration included in one embodiment may be added to a configuration of another embodiment that corresponds to this configuration.

Figure 262 is a diagram showing the flow of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of this embodiment.
The pachinko gaming machine 100 of this embodiment has a total of eight types of jackpots: five types of Type 1 jackpots and three types of Type 2 jackpots. When the special symbol stops on a jackpot symbol, a Type 1 jackpot game is executed as a special game. When the special symbol stops on a small jackpot symbol, a small jackpot game is executed, and when a gaming ball lands in a specific area during the small jackpot game, a Type 2 jackpot game is executed as a special game. The eight types of jackpots are as follows:

(1st Class 10R A)
This jackpot is one of the symbols that can be selected in a special symbol lottery triggered by the establishment of the activation condition for the first special symbol. In this jackpot special game, rounds 1 to 10 are played. In each round, the first major prize opening 125 is opened until the number of winning balls in the first major prize opening 125 reaches a specified number (e.g., 9 balls) or a specified time (e.g., 29 seconds) has elapsed, and then closed for two seconds.

The gaming states of the pachinko gaming machine 100 include a normal state and a low base time-saving state in which play is performed by hitting with the left hand, and a high base time-saving state in which play is performed by hitting with the right hand. Hitting with the left hand is a method of operating the handle 151 that launches the gaming ball to the left side of the gaming area 111. Hitting with the right hand is a method of operating the handle 151 that launches the gaming ball to the right side of the gaming area 111. As shown in Figure 262, if a first-type 10R win results in A in the normal state, the gaming state after the special game will return to the normal state. If a first-type 10R win results in A in the low base time-saving state, the gaming state after the special game will return to the low base time-saving state. The number of time-saving times (B) when the low base time-saving state is reached after a special game of a first-type 10R win in A is 500.

In the normal state, the normal symbol variation time is 60 seconds, and the opening time of the movable piece 15b per winning normal symbol lottery is 0.1 seconds.
In addition, in the low base time-shortening state, the normal symbol fluctuation time is 59 seconds, and the opening time of the movable piece 15b per winning normal symbol lottery is 0.11 seconds.
In addition, in the high base time-saving state, the normal symbol variation time is 5 seconds, and the opening time of the movable piece 15b per winning normal symbol lottery is 6 seconds.

Here, the difference between the normal symbol change time in the low base time-saving state and the normal symbol change time in the normal state is only 1 second, and the advantage in auxiliary play in the low base time-saving state is roughly the same as the advantage in auxiliary play in the normal state (it is slightly advantageous in auxiliary play in the normal state). On the other hand, the normal symbol change time in the high base time-saving state is more than 50 seconds shorter than the normal symbol change time in the normal state and the low base time-saving state, and the advantage in auxiliary play in the high base time-saving state is higher than the advantage in auxiliary play in the normal state and the low base time-saving state. Therefore, if the normal state is considered the first normal state, the low base time-saving state can also be considered a second normal state that has a higher advantage in auxiliary play than the first normal state. Furthermore, the high base time-saving state can also be considered a time-saving state that has an even higher advantage in auxiliary play than the second normal state.

(1st Class 2R B)
This jackpot is one of the symbols that can be selected in a special symbol lottery triggered by the establishment of the activation condition for the first special symbol. In this jackpot special game, rounds of play are played, from the first round to the second round. In each round of play, the first major prize opening 125 is opened and closed in the following manner: the first major prize opening 125 is opened until the number of winning balls in the first major prize opening 125 reaches a predetermined number or a predetermined time has elapsed, and then the first major prize opening 125 is closed for two seconds.
Also, as shown in Figure 262, if a Type 1 2R win results in B in the normal state, the game state after the special game will return to the normal state. If a Type 1 2R win results in B in the low base time-saving state, the game state after the special game will return to the normal state.

(1st Class 2R C)
This jackpot is one of the symbols that can be selected in a special symbol lottery triggered by the establishment of the activation condition for the first special symbol. In this jackpot special game, rounds of play are played, from the first round to the second round. In each round of play, the first major prize opening 125 is opened and closed in the following manner: the first major prize opening 125 is opened until the number of winning balls in the first major prize opening 125 reaches a predetermined number or a predetermined time has elapsed, and then the first major prize opening 125 is closed for two seconds.
Also, as shown in FIG. 262, if a Type 1 2R result in C in the normal state, the game state after the special game will be in a high base time-saving state. The number of time-saving times (J) when the high base time-saving state is reached after a Type 1 2R C special game is reached is 100 times. If a Type 1 2R result in C in the low base time-saving state, the game state after the special game will again be in a low base time-saving state. The number of time-saving times (B) when the low base time-saving state is reached after a Type 1 2R C special game is reached is 700 times.

(1st Class 10R F)
This jackpot is one of the symbols that can be selected in a special symbol lottery triggered by the establishment of the conditions for triggering the second special symbol. In this jackpot special game, rounds 1 to 10 are played. In each round, the first major prize opening 125 is opened until the number of winning balls in the first major prize opening 125 reaches a predetermined number or a predetermined time has elapsed, and then closed for two seconds.
Also, as shown in FIG. 262, if the first type 10R per F is played in the high base time-saving state, the game state after the special game will return to the high base time-saving state. The number of time-saving times (J) when the high base time-saving state is reached after the first type 10R per F special game is played will be 100 times.

(G per 2R of the first type)
This jackpot is one of the symbols that can be selected in a special symbol lottery triggered by the establishment of the activation condition for the second special symbol. In this jackpot special game, rounds 1 and 2 are played. In each round, the first major prize opening 125 is opened until the number of winning balls in the first major prize opening 125 reaches a predetermined number or a predetermined time has elapsed, and then closed for two seconds.
Also, as shown in Figure 262, if the first type 2R per G occurs in the high base time-saving state, the game state after the special game will return to the high base time-saving state. The number of time-saving times (J) when the high base time-saving state is reached after the first type 2R per G special game is reached will be 100 times.

(2nd class actual 9R per H)
This jackpot is one of the symbols that can be selected in a special symbol lottery triggered by the establishment of the activation condition for the second special symbol. In this jackpot special game, after the small jackpot game, which is essentially the first round, and a win in the specific area 19B, round games from round 2 to round 10 are played. In each round game, the first large prize opening 125 is opened and closed in the following manner: first large prize opening 125 is opened until the number of winning balls in first large prize opening 125 reaches a specified number or a specified time has elapsed, and then first large prize opening 125 is closed for two seconds.
262, if the second type substantial 9R H is achieved in the high base time-saving state, the game state after the special game will return to the high base time-saving state. The number of time-saving times (J) when the high base time-saving state is achieved after the special game of the second type substantial 9R H is achieved will be 100 times.

(Type 2 actual 2R per 1)
This jackpot is one of the symbols that can be selected in a special symbol lottery triggered by the establishment of the activation condition for the second special symbol. In this jackpot special game, after the small jackpot game, which is essentially the first round, and a win in the specific area 19B, round games (rounds 2 and 3) are played. In each round game, the first large prize opening 125 is opened and closed in the following manner: the first large prize opening 125 is opened until the number of winning balls in the first large prize opening 125 reaches a predetermined number or a predetermined time has elapsed, and then the first large prize opening 125 is closed for two seconds.
Also, as shown in Figure 262, if the second type of substantial 2R per game is reached in the high base time-saving state, the game state after the special game will return to the high base time-saving state. The number of time-saving times (J) when the high base time-saving state is reached after the second type of substantial 2R per game is reached is 100 times.

(J1. Type 2 actual 9R J)
This jackpot is one of the symbols that can be selected in a special symbol lottery triggered by the establishment of the activation condition for the second special symbol. In this jackpot special game, after the small jackpot game, which is essentially the first round, and a win in the specific area 19B, round games from round 2 to round 10 are played. In each round game, the first large prize opening 125 is opened and closed in the following manner: first large prize opening 125 is opened until the number of winning balls in first large prize opening 125 reaches a specified number or a specified time has elapsed, and then first large prize opening 125 is closed for two seconds.
262, when a second type substantial 9R win is generated as J in the high base time-shortening state, the game state after the special game returns to the normal state. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, during the high base time-shortening state, if a second type substantial 9R win is generated as H, a first type substantial 10R win is generated as G, a second type substantial 9R win is generated as H, or a second type substantial 2R win is generated as I, the most advantageous high base time-shortening state continues, but if a second type substantial 9R win is generated as J, the state returns to the normal state.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 100 of this embodiment has four types of special misses. Special misses are misses that can only be selected in the special pattern lottery triggered by the fulfillment of the conditions for starting the first special pattern. The four types of special misses are as follows:

(High base time-saving special miss a)
As shown in Figure 262, when this special miss a occurs in the normal state, the high base time-saving state is entered. The number of time-saving times (J) when the high base time-saving state is entered after the special miss a is entered is 100 times.

(Low base time-saving special miss b)
As shown in Figure 262, when this special miss b occurs in the normal state, the state becomes a low base time-saving state. The number of time-saving times (B) when the state becomes a low base time-saving state after the special miss b is 700 times.

(Low base time-saving special miss c)
As shown in Figure 262, when this special miss c occurs in the normal state, the state becomes a low base time-saving state. The number of time-saving times (B) when the state becomes a low base time-saving state after this special miss c is 500 times.

(Low base time-saving operation special miss d)
As shown in the game flow of Figure 262, when this special miss d occurs in the normal state, the game enters a low base time-saving state. The number of time-saving times (B) when the game enters the low base time-saving state after this special miss d is 300 times.

Missions other than the four types of special misses mentioned above are normal misses. Stopping on a normal miss symbol does not trigger a change in game state. However, as shown in the game flow in Figure 262, if the variable display stopping on a normal miss symbol continues for 900 times while the game state is not in the high base time-saving state, the game state will change to the high base time-saving state after the 900th symbol stops. The number of time-saving times (J) when the game enters the high base time-saving state after 900 normal misses is 100.

As mentioned above, the low base time-saving state offers a higher advantage in terms of supplementary play than the normal state. However, as shown in the game flow in Figure 262, in the low base time-saving state, no matter what special symbol stops on, the high base time-saving state does not occur. In contrast, in the normal state, if the special symbol stops on the C symbol for a Type 1 2R win, the high base time-saving state occurs after the special play ends. If the special symbol stops on the A symbol for a high base time-saving activation special miss, the high base time-saving state occurs immediately. Therefore, in terms of the ease of entering the high base time-saving state, the normal state offers a higher advantage than the low base time-saving state. In this case, when in the normal state, the player will want to remain in the normal state and have more opportunities to advance to the high base time-saving state by drawing the C symbol for a Type 1 2R win or the A symbol for a high base time-saving activation special miss. Additionally, while in the low base time-saving state, players will want to either hit the B symbol per Type 1 2R as quickly as possible, or resolve the fluctuation in the number of low base time-saving turns (B) and move on to the normal state.

Figure 263 (a) shows the normal background setting table. The normal background setting table associates data indicating the game state with data indicating the type of background image. Specifically, in the normal background setting table, the normal state is associated with an evening background, the low base time-saving state with a daytime background, and the high base time-saving state with a night background. The background image is stage image 61 (see Figure 43).

Figure 263 (b) shows the special background setting table. The special background setting table associates data indicating the game state with data indicating the background image. Specifically, in the special background setting table, the normal state and low base time-saving state are associated with an evening background, and the high base time-saving state is associated with a night background.

In this way, immediately after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, the performance control board 300B (performance control unit 300) displays the background image of the evening background, which is the background for the normal state, on the image display unit 114 as a performance image common to the normal state and the low base time-shortening state, regardless of whether the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is restored in the normal state or in the low base time-shortening state.
264(a), when the gaming state immediately after the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered on is the normal state, the performance control board 300B (performance control unit 300) selects the evening background, which is the original background for the normal state, and displays the background image of the evening background on the image display unit 114. After this, the performance control board 300B (performance control unit 300) maintains the display of the background image of the evening background until it receives a gaming state designation command for the low base time-shortened state, and when it receives the gaming state designation command for the low base time-shortened state, it changes the background to a daytime background in accordance with the gaming state designation command.

Also, as shown in Figure 264 (b), when the game state immediately after the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered on is a low base time-shortened state, the presentation control board 300B (presentation control unit 300) selects an evening background, which is the same background as the normal state, and displays the background image of the evening background on the image display unit 114. After this, the presentation control board 300B (presentation control unit 300) sets 30 variations of the special pattern as the predetermined condition for returning to the original background (daytime background), and until the 30 variations of the special pattern are completed, if a game state designation command for the low base time-shortened state is received while the same background image (evening background) as the normal state is being displayed, the presentation control board 300B (presentation control unit 300) ignores the game state designation command with regard to the display of the background image, and maintains the display of the evening background image. When the special symbol has changed 30 times and the specified conditions are met, the background image will return to its original display mode (daytime background), and when a command to designate a normal game state is received, an evening background image, which corresponds to the normal state, will be displayed, and when a command to designate a low base time-saving game state is received, a daytime background image, which corresponds to the low base time-saving state, will be displayed.

(Modification)
Next, a modification of this embodiment will be described.
265(b) is a diagram showing a special background setting table of a modified example, in which the normal state and the low base time-saving state are associated with a daytime background, and the high base time-saving state is associated with an evening background.

In this embodiment, if the power restoration designation command sent from the main control board 200B (game control unit 200) to the presentation control board 300B (presentation control unit 300) when power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is restored corresponds to the normal state, the presentation control board 300B (presentation control unit 300) displays, on the image display unit 114, a daytime background image, which is the background for the low base time reduction state, as a presentation image common to the normal state and the low base time reduction state, immediately after the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered on, regardless of whether power is restored to the pachinko gaming machine 100 in the normal state or the low base time reduction state. The power restoration designation command is a command that designates the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is restored.

More specifically, in a modified example, as shown in the example of FIG. 266(a), when the gaming state immediately after the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered on is normal, the performance control board 300B (performance control unit 300) selects a daytime background, which is the same background as the low-base time-saving state, and displays the background image of the daytime background on the image display unit 114. After this, the performance control board 300B (performance control unit 300) sets 30 fluctuations of the special symbol as the predetermined condition for returning to the original background, and until 30 fluctuations of the special symbol are executed, if a gaming state designation command for the normal state is received while the background image the same as the low-base time-saving state is being displayed, the gaming state designation command is ignored with regard to the display of the background image, and the daytime background image continues to be displayed. When the special symbol has changed 30 times and the specified conditions are met, the background will return to its original state, and when a game state designation command for a low base time-saving state is received, a background image of a daytime background, which corresponds to the low base time-saving state, will be displayed, and when a game state designation command for a normal state is received, a background image of an evening background, which corresponds to the normal state, will be displayed.

As shown in the example of Figure 266 (b), when the gaming state immediately after the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered on is a low base time-shortened state, the performance control board 300B (performance control unit 300) selects a daytime background, which is the original background for a low base time-shortened state, and displays the background image of the daytime background on the image display unit 114. After this, the performance control board 300B (performance control unit 300) maintains the display of the background image of the daytime background until it receives a gaming state designation command for the normal state, and when it receives a gaming state designation command for the normal state, it changes the background image to an evening background in accordance with that gaming state designation command.

In this modified example, the low base time-saving state is more advantageous than the normal state in terms of the likelihood of transitioning to the high base time-saving state. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 263(c), in contrast to the first embodiment, in the normal background setting table, the normal state is associated with a daytime background and the low base time-saving state with an evening background. Immediately after the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, the performance control board 300B (performance control unit 300) displays the background image of the evening background, which is the background for the low base time-saving state, on the image display unit 114 as a performance image common to the normal state and the low base time-saving state, regardless of whether the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is restored in the normal state or in the low base time-saving state.

In addition, in the modified example, from the perspective of the ease of transitioning to a high base time-saving state, a low base time-saving state is more advantageous than a normal state. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 265(c), in the normal background setting table, the normal state is associated with a daytime background and the low base time-saving state with an evening background. Immediately after the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, the performance control board 300B (performance control unit 300) displays the background image of the daytime background, which is the background for the normal state, on the image display unit 114 as a performance image common to the normal state and the low base time-saving state, regardless of whether the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is restored in the normal state or in the low base time-saving state.

Therefore, immediately after the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, the effect control board 300B (effect control unit 300) causes the image display unit 114 to display the background image of the evening background, which is the background for the normal state, as an effect image common to the normal state and the low base time-shortening state, regardless of whether the power is restored to the pachinko gaming machine 100 in the normal state or the low base time-shortening state.

In addition, immediately after the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, the performance control board 300B (performance control unit 300) causes the image display unit 114 to display the background image of the evening background, which is the background for the normal state, as a performance image common to the normal state and the low base time-saving state, regardless of whether the power is restored to the pachinko gaming machine 100 in the normal state or the low base time-saving state.

Figure 267 is a diagram showing the setting table when a special losing symbol stops. The setting table when a special losing symbol stops associates the following with the five types of special losses in this embodiment: stopped symbol data, data indicating the game state before the special losing symbol stops, data indicating the game state when the special losing symbol stops, data indicating the number of low-base time-saving times (B), data indicating the number of high-base time-saving times (J), and data indicating the number of high-probability times (X).

Therefore, immediately after the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, the effect control board 300B (effect control unit 300) causes the image display unit 114 to display the background image of the evening background, which is the background for the normal state, as an effect image common to the normal state and the low base time-shortening state, regardless of whether the power is restored to the pachinko gaming machine 100 in the normal state or the low base time-shortening state.

In addition, immediately after the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, the performance control board 300B (performance control unit 300) displays on the image display unit 114 a background image of a daytime background, which is the background for the low base time reduction state, as a performance image common to the normal state and the low base time reduction state, regardless of whether the power is restored to the pachinko gaming machine 100 in the normal state or the low base time reduction state.

In addition, immediately after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, the presentation control board 300B (presentation control unit 300) may display a background image on the image display unit 114 that is different from either the evening background that is the original background of the normal state or the daytime background that is the original background of the low base time-shortening state, as a presentation image common to the normal state and the low base time-shortening state.
In addition, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the low base time-saving state is more advantageous than the normal state from the viewpoint of the ease of transitioning to the high base time-saving state, but this is not limiting. The low base time-saving state may be more advantageous than the normal state.

The normal state of this embodiment may be regarded as the first stage of the first embodiment. The low base time-saving state of this embodiment may be regarded as the second stage of the first embodiment. The high base time-saving state of this embodiment may be regarded as the third and fourth stages of the first embodiment.
The normal state of this embodiment may be regarded as the first and second stages of the first embodiment. The low base time-saving state of this embodiment may be regarded as the third stage of the first embodiment. The high base time-saving state of this embodiment may be regarded as the fourth stage of the first embodiment.

(Characteristic Configuration 3 of this Embodiment)
Here, the characteristic configuration of the present embodiment will be explained. The pachinko gaming machine 100 of this embodiment is a gaming machine comprising: a special game execution means, an auxiliary game execution means, an effect means including an image display means, a main control means for causing the special game execution means to execute a special game based on the result of a special symbol lottery, causing the auxiliary game execution means to execute an auxiliary game based on the result of a normal symbol lottery, and capable of generating a plurality of types of commands including commands according to the progress of the game, and an effect control means for receiving the commands generated by the main control means and performing effects by the effect means based on the received commands, the main control means including a game state setting means for setting the gaming state of the gaming machine to any one of a first state, a second state having a higher advantage in relation to the auxiliary game than the first state, and a third state having a higher advantage in relation to the auxiliary game than the second state, and the effect control means for causing the effect means to display an effect image common to the first state and the second state immediately after the power of the gaming machine is turned on.

The pachinko gaming machine 100 of this embodiment is equipped with a special game execution means, an auxiliary game execution means, a presentation means including an image display means, a main control means that causes the special game execution means to execute a special game based on the result of a special symbol lottery, causes the auxiliary game execution means to execute an auxiliary game based on the result of a normal symbol lottery, and is capable of generating multiple types of commands including commands according to the progress of the game, and a presentation control means that receives the commands generated by the main control means and performs presentations by the presentation means based on the received commands, and the main control The gaming machine includes a gaming state setting means for setting the gaming state of the gaming machine to one of a first state, a second state in which the degree of advantage in terms of auxiliary games is higher than in the first state, and a third state in which the degree of advantage in terms of auxiliary games is higher than in the second state, and the presentation control means causes the presentation means to display a background image of the first state when the gaming state immediately after the gaming machine is powered on is the first state, and causes the presentation means to display the same background image as the first state when the gaming state immediately after the gaming machine is powered on is the second state.

The pachinko gaming machine 100 of this embodiment also includes a special game execution means, an auxiliary game execution means, a presentation means including an image display means, a main control means that causes the special game execution means to execute a special game based on the results of a special symbol lottery, causes the auxiliary game execution means to execute an auxiliary game based on the results of a normal symbol lottery, and is capable of generating multiple types of commands including commands according to the progress of the game, and a presentation control means that receives the commands generated by the main control means and performs presentations using the presentation means based on the received commands, and the main control means is capable of switching the gaming state of the gaming machine between a first state, The gaming machine includes a game state setting means for setting the game state to either a second state, which has a higher advantage in terms of auxiliary games than the second state, or a third state, which has a higher advantage in terms of auxiliary games than the second state; the presentation control means, if the game state immediately after the gaming machine is powered on is the first state, causes the presentation means to display a background image of the first state; if the game state immediately after the gaming machine is powered on is the second state, causes the presentation means to display the same background image as the first state; and, if a game state designation command for the second state is received while the same background image is being displayed, maintains the display of the same background image.

The pachinko gaming machine 100 of this embodiment is equipped with a special game execution means, an auxiliary game execution means, a presentation means including an image display means, a main control means that causes the special game execution means to execute a special game based on the results of a special symbol lottery, causes the auxiliary game execution means to execute an auxiliary game based on the results of a normal symbol lottery, and is capable of generating multiple types of commands including commands according to the progress of the game, and a presentation control means that receives the commands generated by the main control means and performs presentations using the presentation means based on the received commands, and the main control means changes the gaming state of the gaming machine between a first state, a second state that is more suitable for auxiliary games than the first state, and a third state that is more suitable for auxiliary games than the first state. The gaming machine includes a game state setting means for setting the gaming state to either a second state, which has a higher advantage in relation to auxiliary games, or a third state, which has a higher advantage in relation to auxiliary games than the second state, and the presentation control means, when the gaming state immediately after the gaming machine is powered on is the first state, causes the presentation means to display a background image of the first state, and when the gaming state immediately after the gaming machine is powered on is the second state, causes the presentation means to display a background image identical to the first state, and when a game state designation command for the second state is received while the identical background image is being displayed, ignores the game state designation command with regard to the display of the background image. Furthermore, if a predetermined condition is met, when the game state designation command for the second state is received while the identical background image is being displayed, causes the presentation control means to display a background image corresponding to the second state.

The pachinko gaming machine 100 of this embodiment is equipped with a special game execution means, an auxiliary game execution means, a presentation means including an image display means, a main control means that causes the special game execution means to execute a special game based on the result of a special symbol lottery, causes the auxiliary game execution means to execute an auxiliary game based on the result of a normal symbol lottery, and is capable of generating multiple types of commands including commands according to the progress of the game, and a presentation control means that receives the commands generated by the main control means and performs presentations by the presentation means based on the received commands, and the main control The gaming machine includes a gaming state setting means for setting the gaming state of the gaming machine to one of a first state, a second state in which the degree of advantage in terms of auxiliary games is higher than in the first state, and a third state in which the degree of advantage in terms of auxiliary games is higher than in the second state, and the presentation control means causes the presentation means to display a background image of the second state when the gaming state immediately after the gaming machine is powered on is the second state, and causes the presentation means to display the same background image as the second state when the gaming state immediately after the gaming machine is powered on is the first state.

The pachinko gaming machine 100 of this embodiment also includes a special game execution means, an auxiliary game execution means, a presentation means including an image display means, a main control means that causes the special game execution means to execute a special game based on the results of a special symbol lottery, causes the auxiliary game execution means to execute an auxiliary game based on the results of a normal symbol lottery, and is capable of generating multiple types of commands including commands according to the progress of the game, and a presentation control means that receives the commands generated by the main control means and performs presentations using the presentation means based on the received commands, and the main control means is capable of switching the gaming state of the gaming machine between a first state, The gaming machine includes a game state setting means for setting the game state to either a second state, which has a higher advantage in terms of auxiliary games than the second state, or a third state, which has a higher advantage in terms of auxiliary games than the second state; the presentation control means causes the presentation means to display a background image of the second state if the game state immediately after the game machine is powered on is the second state, and causes the presentation means to display the same background image as the second state if the game state immediately after the game machine is powered on is the first state; and maintains the display of the same background image if a game state designation command for the first state is received while the same background image is being displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine 100 of this embodiment is equipped with a special game execution means, an auxiliary game execution means, a presentation means including an image display means, a main control means that causes the special game execution means to execute a special game based on the results of a special symbol lottery, causes the auxiliary game execution means to execute an auxiliary game based on the results of a normal symbol lottery, and is capable of generating multiple types of commands including commands according to the progress of the game, and a presentation control means that receives the commands generated by the main control means and performs presentations using the presentation means based on the received commands, and the main control means changes the gaming state of the gaming machine between a first state, a second state that is more suitable for auxiliary games than the first state, and a third state that is more suitable for auxiliary games than the first state. The gaming machine includes a game state setting means for setting the gaming state to either a second state, which has a higher advantage in relation to auxiliary games, or a third state, which has a higher advantage in relation to auxiliary games than the second state, and the presentation control means, when the gaming state immediately after the gaming machine is powered on is the second state, causes the presentation means to display a background image of the second state, and when the gaming state immediately after the gaming machine is powered on is the first state, causes the presentation means to display a background image identical to the second state, and when a game state designation command for the first state is received while the identical background image is being displayed, ignores the game state designation command with regard to the display of the background image. Furthermore, if a predetermined condition is met, when the game state designation command for the second state is received while the identical background image is being displayed, causes the background image corresponding to the second state to be displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine 100 of this embodiment is equipped with a special game execution means, an auxiliary game execution means, a presentation means including an image display means, a main control means that causes the special game execution means to execute a special game based on the results of a special symbol lottery, causes the auxiliary game execution means to execute an auxiliary game based on the results of a normal symbol lottery, and is capable of generating multiple types of commands including commands according to the progress of the game, and a presentation control means that receives the commands generated by the main control means and performs presentations using the presentation means based on the received commands, and The control means includes a game state setting means for setting the game state of the gaming machine to one of a first state, a second state that has a higher advantage in terms of auxiliary games than the first state, or a third state that has a higher advantage in terms of auxiliary games than the second state, and the presentation control means, upon receiving a power restoration command from the main control means, causes the presentation means to display a presentation image common to the first and second states, regardless of whether the game state designation command included in the received power restoration command is the first or second state.

The pachinko gaming machine 100 of this embodiment also comprises a special game execution means, an auxiliary game execution means, a presentation means including an image display means, a main control means that causes the special game execution means to execute a special game based on the results of a special symbol lottery, causes the auxiliary game execution means to execute an auxiliary game based on the results of a normal symbol lottery, and is capable of generating multiple types of commands including commands according to the progress of the game, and a presentation control means that receives the commands generated by the main control means and performs presentations using the presentation means based on the received commands, and the main control means: The gaming machine includes a gaming state setting means that sets the gaming state of the gaming machine to one of a first state, a second state that has a higher advantage in terms of auxiliary games than the first state, or a third state that has a higher advantage in terms of auxiliary games than the second state, and the presentation control means, upon receiving a power restoration command corresponding to the first state from the main control means, causes the presentation means to display a background image of the first state, and upon receiving a power restoration command corresponding to the second state from the main control means, causes the presentation means to display the same background image as the first state.

The pachinko gaming machine 100 of this embodiment is equipped with a special game execution means, an auxiliary game execution means, a presentation means including an image display means, a main control means that causes the special game execution means to execute a special game based on the result of a special symbol lottery, causes the auxiliary game execution means to execute an auxiliary game based on the result of a normal symbol lottery, and is capable of generating multiple types of commands including commands according to the progress of the game, and a presentation control means that receives the commands generated by the main control means and performs presentations using the presentation means based on the received commands, and the main control means changes the gaming state of the gaming machine between a first state, an auxiliary game state lower than the first state, and a presentation control means that causes the main control means to execute a special game based on the result of a normal symbol lottery. The gaming machine includes a game state setting means for setting the game state to either a second state, which has a higher advantage in terms of technique, or a third state, which has a higher advantage in terms of auxiliary play than the second state; the presentation control means, upon receiving a power restoration command corresponding to the first state from the main control means, causes the presentation means to display a background image of the first state; upon receiving a power restoration command corresponding to the second state from the main control means, causes the presentation means to display the same background image as the first state; and, if a game state designation command for the second state is received while the same background image is being displayed, maintains the display of the same background image.

The pachinko gaming machine 100 of this embodiment is equipped with a special game execution means, an auxiliary game execution means, a presentation means including an image display means, a main control means for causing the special game execution means to execute a special game based on the results of a special symbol lottery, causing the auxiliary game execution means to execute an auxiliary game based on the results of a normal symbol lottery, and capable of generating multiple types of commands including commands according to the progress of the game, and a presentation control means for receiving the commands generated by the main control means and performing presentations by the presentation means based on the received commands, and the main control means is configured to change the gaming state of the gaming machine between a first state, a second state, and a third state, which is more effective in relation to the auxiliary game than the first state. The gaming machine includes a game state setting means for setting the game state to either a second state having a higher interest rate or a third state having a higher advantage in terms of auxiliary games than the second state, and the presentation control means, upon receiving a power restoration command corresponding to the first state from the main control means, causes the presentation means to display a background image of the first state, and upon receiving a power restoration command corresponding to the second state from the main control means, causes the presentation means to display a background image identical to the first state, and, if a game state designation command for the second state is received while the identical background image is being displayed, ignores the game state designation command with regard to the display of the background image. Furthermore, if a predetermined condition is met, upon receiving a game state designation command for the second state while the identical background image is being displayed, causes the background image corresponding to the second state to be displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine 100 of this embodiment also comprises a special game execution means, an auxiliary game execution means, a presentation means including an image display means, a main control means that causes the special game execution means to execute a special game based on the results of a special symbol lottery, causes the auxiliary game execution means to execute an auxiliary game based on the results of a normal symbol lottery, and is capable of generating multiple types of commands including commands according to the progress of the game, and a presentation control means that receives the commands generated by the main control means and performs presentations using the presentation means based on the received commands, and the main control means: The gaming machine includes a gaming state setting means for setting the gaming state of the gaming machine to one of a first state, a second state that has a higher advantage in terms of auxiliary games than the first state, and a third state that has a higher advantage in terms of auxiliary games than the second state, and the presentation control means, upon receiving a power restoration command corresponding to the second state from the main control means, causes the presentation means to display a background image of the second state, and upon receiving a power restoration command corresponding to the first state from the main control means, causes the presentation means to display the same background image as the second state.

The pachinko gaming machine 100 of this embodiment is equipped with a special game execution means, an auxiliary game execution means, a presentation means including an image display means, a main control means that causes the special game execution means to execute a special game based on the result of a special symbol lottery, causes the auxiliary game execution means to execute an auxiliary game based on the result of a normal symbol lottery, and is capable of generating multiple types of commands including commands according to the progress of the game, and a presentation control means that receives the commands generated by the main control means and performs presentations using the presentation means based on the received commands, and the main control means changes the gaming state of the gaming machine between a first state, an auxiliary game state lower than the first state, and a presentation control means that causes the main control means to execute a special game based on the result of a normal symbol lottery. The gaming machine includes a game state setting means for setting the game state to either a second state, which has a higher advantage in terms of technique, or a third state, which has a higher advantage in terms of auxiliary play than the second state; the presentation control means, upon receiving a power restoration command corresponding to the second state from the main control means, causes the presentation means to display a background image of the second state; upon receiving a power restoration command corresponding to the first state from the main control means, causes the presentation means to display the same background image as the second state; and, if a game state designation command for the first state is received while the same background image is being displayed, maintains the display of the same background image.

The pachinko gaming machine 100 of this embodiment is equipped with a special game execution means, an auxiliary game execution means, a presentation means including an image display means, a main control means for causing the special game execution means to execute a special game based on the results of a special symbol lottery, causing the auxiliary game execution means to execute an auxiliary game based on the results of a normal symbol lottery, and capable of generating multiple types of commands including commands according to the progress of the game, and a presentation control means for receiving the commands generated by the main control means and performing presentations by the presentation means based on the received commands, and the main control means is configured to change the gaming state of the gaming machine between a first state, a second state, and a third state, which is more effective in relation to the auxiliary game than the first state. The gaming machine includes a game state setting means for setting the game state to either a second state, which has a higher interest rate, or a third state, which has a higher advantage in terms of auxiliary games than the second state, and the presentation control means, upon receiving a power restoration command corresponding to the second state from the main control means, causes the presentation means to display a background image of the second state, and upon receiving a power restoration command corresponding to the first state from the main control means, causes the presentation means to display a background image identical to that of the second state, and, if a game state designation command for the first state is received while the identical background image is being displayed, ignores the game state designation command with regard to the display of the background image. Furthermore, if a predetermined condition is met, upon receiving a game state designation command for the second state while the identical background image is being displayed, causes the background image corresponding to the second state to be displayed.

(Third embodiment)
The third embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. Note that the following mainly focuses on differences from the above-described embodiments, and explanations of points that are the same as any of the above-described embodiments may be omitted.

Furthermore, the configurations described above in the first and second embodiments may correspond to the configurations described below. More specifically, the first special symbol display 221 described above corresponds to the first special symbol display 60 described below. The second special symbol display 222 described above corresponds to the second special symbol display 61 described below. The first special symbol reserved display 218 described above corresponds to the first special symbol reserved display 63 described below. The second special symbol reserved display 219 described above corresponds to the second special symbol reserved display 64 described below. The image display unit 114 described above corresponds to the first image display device 70. The effect button 161 described above corresponds to the effect button 17 described below. The movable role object 115 described above corresponds to the first movable member 73a described below. The speaker 156 described above corresponds to the audio output device 9 described below. The frame lamp 157 described above corresponds to the top lamp 10b described below. The board lamp 116 described above corresponds to the board lamp 74b described below.
Furthermore, the decorative pattern 41 described above corresponds to the decorative pattern 700 described later. The reserved image 52 described above corresponds to the reserved image 702 described later. The variable image 51 described above corresponds to the variable image 701 described later. The reserved number display 55 described above corresponds to the reserved number display 703 described later. The small pattern 56 described above corresponds to the small pattern 704 described later. The demo image 506 described above corresponds to the customer waiting image 710 described later. The stage image 61 described above corresponds to the stage image 706 described later. The first right-hit image 503 described above corresponds to the first right-hit image 720 and the second right-hit image 725 described later. The second right-hit image 507 described above corresponds to the third right-hit image 737 described later. The preparation image 627 described above corresponds to the recovery image 742 described later. The second transition image 622 described above corresponds to the first transition image 728 described later. The result image 623 described above corresponds to the result image 729 described later. Furthermore, the above-mentioned variable count image 502 corresponds to the execution count image 705, which will be described later. Furthermore, the above-mentioned remaining time-saving count image 504 corresponds to the special remaining time-saving count image 738, which will be described later. Furthermore, the above-mentioned first left-hit image 47 and second left-hit image 48 correspond to the left-hit image 730, which will be described later. Furthermore, the above-mentioned SP reach image 552 corresponds to the SP reach image 712, which will be described later. Furthermore, the above-mentioned button image 509 corresponds to the button operation image 714, which will be described later. Furthermore, the above-mentioned development emphasis image 554 corresponds to the first emphasis image 711, which will be described later. Furthermore, the above-mentioned switching image 586 corresponds to the first eye-catching image 715, which will be described later. Furthermore, the above-mentioned customer waiting volume image 44 and customer waiting light intensity image 45 correspond to the adjustment image 716. Furthermore, the above-mentioned menu promotion image 46 corresponds to the menu image 717, which will be described later. The first jackpot emphasis image 566, the second jackpot emphasis image 567, and the third jackpot emphasis image 568 correspond to the second emphasis image 718 in the normal game mode, which will be described later. The fourth jackpot emphasis image 569 and the fifth jackpot emphasis image 570 correspond to the second emphasis image 718 in the time-saving game mode, which will be described later.
Corresponding configurations of one embodiment and another embodiment may be interchanged, or a configuration included in one embodiment may be added to a configuration of another embodiment that corresponds to this configuration.

[Produced image]
Figure 268 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the first image display device 70, etc.
Next, the effect image that the effect control unit 300 causes the first image display device 70 to display will be described.
268, the effect image is displayed on the first image display device 70 under the control of the effect control unit 300. In this embodiment, the effect image displayed on the first image display device 70 includes a decorative pattern 700, a variable image 701, a variable base 701P, a reserved image 702, a reserved base 702P, a reserved number display 703, a small pattern 704, an execution count image 705, and a stage image 706. Further, the first image display device 70 displays a first front image 707, a remaining number of times reached image 708, a second front image 709, a clear denial image 744, a customer waiting image 710, a first emphasis image 711, an SP reach image 712, an SPSP reach image 713, a button operation image 714, a first eye-catching image 715, an adjustment image 716, a menu image 717, a second emphasis image 718, an opening image 719, a first right-hit image 720, a promotion image 721, an in-round image 722, a number of rounds image 723, a special time-saving selection image 745, a normal time-saving opening image 746, a first right-hit image 747, a second right-hit image 748, a first right-hit image 749, a first right-hit image 750, a first right-hit image 751, a first right-hit image 752, a promotion image 753, a round in progress image 754, a round number image 755, a round number image 756, a round number image 757, a round number image 758, a round number image 759, a round number image 760, a round number image 761, a round number image 762, a round number image 763, a round number image 764, a round number image 765, a round number image 766, a round number image 767, a round number image 768, a round number image 769, a round number image 770, a round number image 771, a round number image 772, a round number image 773, a round number image 774, a round number image 775, a round number image 776, a round number image 777, a round number image 77 The following may be displayed: start image 724, card warning image 739, game warning image 740, second right-hit image 725, normal time-saving remaining number of times image 726, switching image 727, first transition image 728, result image 729, left-hit image 730, second eye-catching image 731, countdown image 732, special time-saving start image 733, second transition image 734, special time-saving selection image 735, mode start image 736, third right-hit image 737, special time-saving remaining number of times image 738, magnetic error notification image 741, recovery in progress image 742, and zone notification image 743.

(Decorative design 700)
As shown in FIG. 268 (1), three decorative patterns 700 are displayed on the first image display device 70. When describing the three patterns constituting the decorative pattern 700 individually, the pattern located on the left side may be referred to as the "left decorative pattern 700," the pattern located in the center as the "middle decorative pattern 700," and the pattern located on the right side as the "right decorative pattern 700." When describing the left decorative pattern 700 and the right decorative pattern 700 together, they may be referred to as the "left and right decorative patterns 700." When describing the left decorative pattern 700, the middle decorative pattern 700, and the right decorative pattern 700 together, they may be referred to as the "three decorative patterns 700." Furthermore, three decorative patterns 700 with matching numbers may be referred to as "double-digit decorative patterns 700."

In this embodiment, the display modes of the decorative pattern 700 include a highly decorative display mode (see Fig. 268(1)) in which character images and the like are displayed in addition to letters such as numbers, and a less decorative display mode (see Fig. 278(10), Fig. 283(23), etc.) in which letters such as numbers are the main display. The images of characters and the like provided in the highly decorative decorative pattern 700 are different for each letter of the decorative pattern 700, and the image of the characters and the like can also be used to identify which pattern it is.
Here, the display mode of the decorative pattern 700 is switched according to changes in the game state or the progress of the presentation, etc. As will be described in detail later, for example, decorative patterns 700 with low decorativeness are displayed in SP reach presentations, SPSP reach presentations, special time-shortened game states, and special time-shortened game states, while decorative patterns 700 with high decorativeness are displayed in other cases, etc. Furthermore, the display mode, display size, etc. of the decorative patterns 700 may differ between the special time-shortened game state and the special time-shortened game state.
In addition, the decorative pattern 700 with low decorativeness may also display images such as pictures and characters in addition to letters such as numbers. In other words, the "decorative pattern 700 with low decorativeness" shown in Figure 278 (10) and Figure 283 (23) etc. may have a higher proportion of the area occupied by letters in the decorative pattern 700 compared to the "decorative pattern 700 with high decorativeness". Furthermore, the decorative pattern 700 with low decorativeness may be a pattern consisting of letters only. The decorative pattern 700 is an example of a performance pattern.

In the decorative pattern 700 variation presentation, the presentation control unit 300 displays the three decorative patterns 700 in a varying manner, for example by vertical scrolling (scrolling downwards), and then first temporarily stops the left decorative pattern 700 (for example, the number "0"), then temporarily stops the right decorative pattern 700 (for example, the number "9"), and then temporarily stops the middle decorative pattern (for example, the number "2"). After all decorative patterns 700 have been temporarily stopped in this manner, all decorative patterns 700 are finally stopped in accordance with the stopped display of the special patterns. Note that the combination "029" of the stopped decorative patterns 700 shown in Figure 268 (1) is an example of a combination that occurs when the special pattern lottery result is a loss.

(Variable image 701)
As shown in FIG. 268 (4), the first image display device 70 displays a variable image 701 indicating that the special symbol is being displayed variably (the decorative symbol 700 is being displayed variably) by the main CPU 110a of the main control unit 110m. That is, the variable image 701 is displayed as an image related to the variable display of the special symbol while the special symbol is being displayed variably. The variable image 701 is displayed when the variable display of the special symbol starts, and disappears when the special symbol is displayed stationary. As will be described in detail later, the variable image 701 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the stage, game state, etc., which will be described later. In the illustrated example, the variable image 701 is formed in a circular shape and has a cross-shaped mark.

Furthermore, the variable image 701 changes its display mode, such as its display color, to notify or suggest the likelihood of winning the jackpot. Furthermore, if the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot, a color with a higher likelihood of winning is displayed than if the result is a miss. For example, if the colors of the variable image 701 are set to white, blue, green, red, or rainbow, the later the order, the higher the likelihood of winning. Furthermore, the likelihood of winning a rainbow-colored variable image 701 may be 100%.

(Variable base 701P)
268(1), the variable pedestal 701P is an area where the variable image 701 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the variable pedestal 701P is displayed in the lower center of the display area of the first image display device 70. However, the variable pedestal 701P may be displayed at any position in the display area of the first image display device 70.
In the illustrated example, the variable pedestal 701P is displayed regardless of whether the variable image 701 is displayed or not, but this is not limiting. The variable pedestal 701P may be displayed when the variable image 701 is displayed, and may not be displayed when the variable image 701 is not displayed. Furthermore, the variable pedestal 701P may not be displayed even when the variable image 701 is displayed. In other words, the variable pedestal 701P may not be used.

(Reserved image 702)
As shown in FIG. 268(3), the first image display device 70 displays a reserved image 702 based on the current reserved information in the main RAM 110c (sub-RAM 130c). In other words, the reserved image 702 is an image indicating that the right to determine a jackpot is reserved. In addition, in this embodiment, the display mode of the reserved image 702 on the screen is determined based on the result of the preliminary determination process.
The reserved image 702 has a smaller display size than the variable image 701. Furthermore, as will be described in detail later, the reserved image 702 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the stage, game status, etc., as will be described later. In the illustrated example, the reserved image 702 is circular and has a cross-shaped mark. The reserved image 702 also changes its display mode, such as its display color, to notify or indicate the likelihood of winning a jackpot. Furthermore, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, a color with a higher likelihood of winning is displayed than if the result is a miss. For example, if the colors of the reserved image 702 are set to white, blue, green, red, or rainbow, the later the order, the higher the likelihood of winning. Furthermore, the likelihood of winning a rainbow-colored reserved image 702 may be 100%. Hereinafter, the display mode of the white variable image 701 and the display mode of the white reserved image 702 may be referred to as the normal display mode. In addition, in the following, the display mode of the variable image 701, which is a color different from white, i.e., a color with a higher expectation than white, and the display mode of the pending image 702, which is a color with a higher expectation than white, may be referred to as the expected color display mode.

As described above, a win at the first starting port 121 can result in up to four pending images. Therefore, a win at the first starting port 121 can result in up to four pending images 702 being displayed on the first image display device 70. In addition, in this embodiment, the multiple pending images 702 generated by a win at the first starting port 121 are displayed in an area to the left of the variable image 701, in order from a position closer to the variable image 701 to a position further away, that is, from right to left.

Although detailed description will be omitted, a maximum of four reserve images are also generated by a winning game ball entering the second starting hole 122. Therefore, a maximum of four reserve images 702 are displayed on the first image display device 70 in response to a winning game ball entering the second starting hole 122. In this embodiment, the multiple reserve images 702 generated by a winning game ball entering the second starting hole 122 are displayed in an area to the right of the variable image 701 in order from a position closer to the variable image 701 to a position farther away, that is, from left to right.
In this embodiment, the variable image 701 and the reserved image 702 are basically configured with the same or similar display modes (display size, shape, transparency, etc.). However, the variable image 701 and the reserved image 702 may be configured with different display modes. Furthermore, the variable image 701 and the reserved image 702 displayed upon winning at the first starting gate 121 and the variable image 701 and the reserved image 702 displayed upon winning at the second starting gate 122 may be configured with the same display mode or different display modes.

In addition, in the following description, the up to four pending images 702 that are displayed may be referred to as the "first pending image 702," "second pending image 702," "third pending image 702," and "fourth pending image 702," in order of their proximity to the variable image 701.

(Retention pedestal 702P)
As shown in FIG. 268(1), the reserved base 702P indicates the area in which the reserved image 702 is displayed. The reserved base 702P is displayed in a manner different from the variable base 701P. However, the reserved base 702P may be displayed in the same manner as the variable base 701P. Furthermore, the reserved base 702P corresponding to the reserved image 702 based on winning at the first starting gate 121 is displayed below the display area of the first image display device 70, to the left of the variable base 701P (see FIG. 268(1)). Furthermore, the reserved base 702P corresponding to the reserved image 702 based on winning at the second starting gate 122 is displayed below the display area of the first image display device 70, to the right of the variable base 701P (see FIG. 283(23)).
In the illustrated example, the holding pedestal 702P is displayed regardless of whether the holding image 702 is displayed, but this is not limiting. The holding pedestal 702P may be displayed when the holding image 702 is displayed, and may not be displayed when the holding image 702 is not displayed. Furthermore, the holding pedestal 702P may not be displayed even when the holding image 702 is displayed. In other words, the holding pedestal 702P may not be used.
In addition, in the following description, the holding bases 702P may be referred to as the "first holding base 702P,""second holding base 702P,""third holding base 702P," and "fourth holding base 702P," in order of proximity to the variable base 701P.

(Pending number display 703)
As shown in Fig. 268 (1), the first image display device 70 displays a hold number display 703 based on the hold information in the main RAM 110c (sub-RAM 130c). This hold number display 703 is an image showing the hold number. Here, the hold image 702 displayed on the first image display device 70 changes in number depending on the hold number for winning at the first start gate 121 and the second start gate 122. In the hold number display 703, the hold number for winning at the first start gate 121 is displayed on the left side, and the hold number for winning at the second start gate 122 is displayed on the right side.

(Small design 704)
268(1), the first image display device 70 displays a small symbol 704 indicating that a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (the decorative symbol 700 is being displayed in a variable manner) based on a winning entry into the first starting gate 121 or the second starting gate 122. The small symbol 704 is controlled by the performance control unit 300, and is displayed in a variable manner in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol, and is displayed in a stationary manner in accordance with the stationary display of the special symbol.

In the illustrated example, the small patterns 704 are three images each corresponding to the decorative patterns 700, and are displayed on the right side of the image display area of the first image display device 70. These small patterns 704 are displayed as images smaller in size than the decorative patterns 700. As mentioned above, the decorative patterns 700 may be displayed in either a highly decorative or less decorative display mode, but the small patterns 704 are displayed only in a less decorative display mode that mainly consists of text. However, the small patterns 704 may also be displayed in a display mode that displays images such as pictures and characters in addition to text. The small patterns 704 may also be patterns consisting only of text. These small patterns 704 are also considered to be performance patterns.

The small symbol 704 is displayed (e.g., vertically scrolling) in a manner that indicates that the special symbol is being displayed in a changing manner in response to a winning entry into the first starting slot 121 or the second starting slot 122. As the small symbol 704 scrolls, number images are displayed in increments of one from "1" to "9," and then the number is displayed again in increments of one from "1." When the special symbol is displayed in a static state, the small symbol 704 is also displayed in a static state. In the example shown, the number indicated by the statically displayed small symbol 704 matches the number indicated by the decorative symbol 700. To further explain, in the example of Figure 268 (1), the number corresponding to "029" in the decorative symbol 700 is displayed as the small symbol 704.

(Execution count image 705)
As shown in FIG. 268 (1), an execution count image 705 is displayed on the first image display device 70. This execution count image 705 indicates the number of newly executed variable displays (the number of variable displays of the decorative pattern 700) since the number of variable displays of the special pattern was reset. The display content of the execution count image 705 is updated each time a variable display is executed. In the illustrated example, the execution count image 705 displays the text "99 GAMES," which indicates the number of variable displays executed. Note that the number of variable displays indicated in the execution count image 705 may be the number of variable displays already executed as variable displays, or may be the number of variable displays including not only the number of already executed displays but also the number of variable displays currently being executed. Furthermore, the display content of the execution count image 705 may be updated during the execution of the variable display or after the variable display has ended. The execution count image 705 is displayed on a layer behind the decorative pattern 700. However, the execution count image 705 may also be displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700.

(Stage image 706)
As shown in FIG. 268 (1), a stage image 706 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The stage image 706 is an image that indicates or indicates the stage currently being played in the currently playing performance. Furthermore, the stage is the stage in the performance of the gaming machine 1. In this embodiment, multiple types of stages are provided, and a stage image 706 having a display mode corresponding to the currently playing stage is displayed. The stage image 706 is displayed in a layer behind (lower than) the decorative pattern 700, the variable image 701, the reserved image 702, the reserved number display 703, the small pattern 704, the execution count image 705, etc., among the multiple layers provided on the first image display device 70. In other words, the stage image 706 is displayed as a background image on the first image display device 70. Furthermore, the stage image 706 may be a moving image. In the illustrated example, a space-themed moving image is displayed as the stage image 706.
The stage image 706 changes, for example, when a variation effect in one stage has been performed a predetermined number of times. Furthermore, when a specific variation effect has been performed, the stage image 706 may change in the variation effect following this specific variation effect. Examples of specific variation effects include a variation effect in which an SP reach effect is executed, and a variation effect in which an SPSP reach effect is executed. Furthermore, the stage image 706 changes depending on the gaming state of the gaming machine 1. More specifically, the stage image 706 is displayed in different display modes in the normal gaming state, the special time-saving gaming state, and the special time-saving gaming state. The background of the stage image 706 can also be considered as the presentation mode of the gaming machine 1.

(First front image 707)
As shown in FIG. 268 (6), the first image display device 70 displays a first front image 707. The first front image 707 is displayed in a layer in front (higher) of the layer in which the decorative pattern 700 is displayed, among multiple layers provided in the first image display device 70. The first front image 707 may be displayed across the entire display area of the first image display device 70. In this case, the first front image 707 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700, the execution count image 705, the stage image 7006, the remaining number of times reached image 708 (described later), etc., and in a layer behind (lower) the variable image 701, the reserved image 702, the reserved number display 703, the small pattern 704, etc. However, the first front image 707 may also be displayed in a layer in front of the variable image 701 and the reserved image 702. The first front image 707 is displayed during the execution of the variable performance.

(Remaining number of times reached image 708)
As shown in FIG. 268 (5), the first image display device 70 displays a remaining number of times image 708. This remaining number of times image 708 is an image indicating the number of variable effects required to enter the special time-saving game state. The display content of the remaining number of times image 708 is updated each time a variable effect is performed. In the illustrated example, the remaining number of times image 708 displays the text "400 more," which indicates the number of variable effects required to enter the special time-saving game state. Note that the number of variable effects displayed in the remaining number of times image 708 may include the variable effect currently being performed, or may exclude the variable effect currently being performed. Furthermore, the display content of the remaining number of times image 708 may be updated during the variable effect or after the variable effect has ended. The remaining number of times image 708 is displayed on a layer behind the decorative pattern 700. However, the remaining number of times image 708 may also be displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700.

(Second front image 709)
As shown in FIG. 273 (4), the first image display device 70 displays a second front image 709. The second front image 709 is displayed in a layer in front (higher) of the layer in which the decorative pattern 700 is displayed, among the multiple layers provided in the first image display device 70. The second front image 709 is displayed in a display mode different from that of the first front image 707. The second front image 709 may also be displayed across the entire display area of the first image display device 70. In this case, the second front image 709 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, the remaining number of times reached image 708, etc., and in a layer behind (lower) the variable image 701, the reserved image 702, the reserved number display 703, the small pattern 704, etc. However, the second front image 709 may also be displayed in a layer in front of the variable image 701 and the reserved image 702. In addition, the second front image 709 is executed in a variable performance of a variable performance pattern in which the first front image 707 is not executed.

(Clear negation image 744)
As shown in FIG. 273 (4), a clear denial image 744 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The clear denial image 744 is displayed when an RWM clear denial effect is executed. The display of the clear denial image 744 suggests to the player that the RWM has not been cleared. In the illustrated example, a character appearing in the content that is the subject of the gaming machine 1 is displayed as the clear denial image 744.

(Customer waiting image 710)
As shown in FIG. 277 (1), a customer waiting image 710 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The customer waiting image 710 is an image for advertising the gaming machine 1 when it is in a customer waiting state. The customer waiting image 710 is displayed across the entire display area of the first image display device 70. However, the customer waiting image 710 may be displayed in a portion of the display area of the first image display device 70 and not in another portion. In the illustrated example, the customer waiting image 710 displays a moving image related to the content that is the subject of the gaming machine 1. The customer waiting image 710 is displayed on a layer in front of the decorative symbol 700, the variable image 701, the reserved image 702, the small symbol 704, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, the remaining number of times reached image 708, etc., and on a layer behind (lower than) the reserved number display 703, etc. However, the customer waiting image 710 may also be displayed on a layer behind the variable image 701, the reserved image 702, the small symbol 704, etc.

(First emphasized image 711)
As shown in FIG. 278 (9), a first emphasized image 711 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The first emphasized image 711 is an image that emphasizes the effect produced by the first movable member 73a. The first emphasized image 711 is displayed across the entire display area of the first image display device 70. In the illustrated example, the first emphasized image 711 is a radial image. More specifically, the first emphasized image 711 is a radial image of a specific color centered on the position of the first movable member 73a. The specific color may be any color, but is, for example, red. The first emphasized image 711 is displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700, variable base 701P, reserved image 702, reserved base 702P, execution count image 705, stage image 706, remaining number of times reached image 708, etc., and on a layer behind the reserved number display 703, small pattern 704, etc.

(SP reach image 712)
As shown in FIG. 278 (10), an SP reach image 712 is displayed on the first image display device 70. This SP reach image 712 is an image indicating that an SP reach effect is being executed. The SP reach image 712 is, for example, a moving image in which a character appearing in the content that is the subject of the gaming machine 1 plays a mini-game. In addition, the SP reach image 712 displays a background different from that of the stage image 706. In addition, the SP reach image 712 is displayed on a layer in front of the variable image 701, variable base 701P, reserved image 702, reserved base 702P, execution count image 705, stage image 706, remaining number of times reached image 708, etc., and on a layer behind the decorative pattern 700, reserved number display 703, small pattern 704, etc.

(SPSP reach image 713)
As shown in FIG. 278 (11), an SPSP reach image 713 is displayed on the first image display device 70. This SPSP reach image 713 is an image indicating that an SPSP reach effect is being executed. The SPSP reach image 713 is, for example, a moving image of characters appearing in the content that is the subject of the gaming machine 1 fighting. Furthermore, the SPSP reach image 713 displays a background different from that of the stage image 706 and the SP reach image 712. Furthermore, the SPSP reach image 713 is displayed on a layer in front of the variable image 701, variable base 701P, reserved image 702, reserved base 702P, execution count image 705, stage image 706, remaining number of times reached image 708, etc., and on a layer behind the decorative pattern 700, reserved number display 703, small pattern 704, etc.

(Button operation image 714)
As shown in FIG. 278 (12), a button operation image 714 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The button operation image 714 is an image that is displayed when a promotion effect is being executed. The display of this button operation image 714 allows the player to recognize that it is time to operate the effect button 17. In the example shown, an image that resembles the effect button 17 is displayed as the button operation image 714. In this embodiment, the button operation image 714 is displayed for a predetermined period of time, and if the effect button 17 is operated before this predetermined period has elapsed since the button operation image 714 was displayed, a predetermined effect is executed. In other words, in the promotion effect, the valid period for operating the effect button 17 is determined as the display period of the button operation image 714.

(First eye-catching image 715)
As shown in FIG. 279 (14), a first eye-catching image 715 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The first eye-catching image 715 is an image showing a character appearing in the content that is the subject of the gaming machine 1. The first eye-catching image 715 is displayed when the SPSP reach effect ends in a variation effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss or a revival variation is performed during normal gaming. Also, if the SP reach effect is executed but not executed, the first eye-catching image 715 may be displayed when the SP reach effect ends. The first eye-catching image 715 is displayed across the entire display area of the first image display device 70. In addition, the first eye-catching image 715 is displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700, the variable image 701, the variable base 701P, the reserved image 702, the reserved base 702P, the number of executions image 705, the stage image 706, the remaining number of times to be reached image 708, etc., and on a layer behind the reserved number display 703, the small pattern 704, etc.

(Adjusted image 716)
As shown in FIG. 280 (1), an adjustment image 716 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The adjustment image 716 is an image for adjusting the volume of the sound output from the audio output device 9 and the light intensity of various lamps. When the player operates the cross key 19 while the adjustment image 716 is displayed, the volume and the light intensity of various lamps are adjusted. In the illustrated example, the adjustment image 716 includes an image imitating a speaker, an image imitating a lamp, and an image imitating the cross key 19. The adjustment image 716 is displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700.

(Menu image 717)
As shown in FIG. 280 (1), a menu image 717 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The menu image 717 is an image for displaying a menu screen (not shown) for setting up the gaming machine 1 on the first image display device 70. In other words, the menu image 717 is an image that notifies the player that a menu screen can be displayed. When the player operates the effect button 17 while the menu image 717 is displayed, the menu screen is displayed on the first image display device 70. In the illustrated example, the menu image 717 is an image that resembles the effect button 17 and the text "Display menu with button." In addition, the menu image 717 is displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700.

(Second emphasized image 718)
As shown in FIG. 282 (15), the first image display device 70 displays a second emphasized image 718. The second emphasized image 718 is an image that emphasizes the effect of the first movable member 73a. The second emphasized image 718 is displayed across the entire display area of the first image display device 70. In the illustrated example, the second emphasized image 718 is a radial image centered on the position of the first movable member 73a. The second emphasized image 718 is displayed in a color different from the first emphasized image 711. The color of the second emphasized image 718 may be any color, for example, rainbow colors. The second emphasized image 718 is displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700, variable base 701P, reserved image 702, reserved base 702P, execution count image 705, stage image 706, remaining number of times reached image 708, etc., and on a layer behind the reserved number display 703, small pattern 704, etc.

(Opening image 719)
As shown in FIG. 282 (18), an opening image 719 is displayed on the first image display device 70. This opening image 719 is an image for notifying the player of the start of a jackpot game or the start of a small jackpot game. In the example shown, the opening image 719 displays the text "BIG Bonus! Congratulations," which indicates the start of a jackpot game. This opening image 719 indicates the type of jackpot (e.g., the total number of rounds) and the game status after the jackpot game ends.

(First right-hit image 720)
As shown in FIG. 283 (19), the first right-hit image 720 on the first image display device 70 is an image for encouraging the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side of the game area 5a. The first right-hit image 720 is displayed when a jackpot game is being executed. In the illustrated example, the first right-hit image 720 displays an arrow mark pointing to the right.

(Promotional image 721)
283 (19), a promotion image 721 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The promotion image 721 is an image for encouraging the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side of the game area 5a. In the illustrated example, the promotion image 721 displays the text "Aim to the right!!", an image that resembles the game area 5a, and an arrow mark pointing from the left side to the right side in the image that resembles the game area 5a.

(Round image 722)
283 (20), a round-in-progress image 722 is displayed on the first image display device 70. This round-in-progress image 722 is a moving image of a character appearing in the content that is the subject of the gaming machine 1. The round-in-progress image 722 is displayed during a round in a jackpot game.

(Round number image 723)
As shown in Fig. 283 (20), a round number image 723 is displayed on the first image display device 70. This round number image 723 is an image for informing the player of the number of rounds currently being played in a jackpot game. In the illustrated example, the round number image 723 displays the text "Round 1."

(Special time-saving selection image 745)
As shown in FIG. 283 (21), a special time-saving selection image 745 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The special time-saving selection image 745 is an image that allows the player to select a mode of presentation in the special time-saving game state. In the illustrated example, the special time-saving selection image 745 allows two modes, "A" and "B," to be selected. When the special time-saving selection image 745 is displayed, the player can select one of the modes by operating the presentation button 17. In the illustrated example, the "A" mode is selected.

(Normal time-saving start image 724)
As shown in FIG. 283 (22), a normal time-saving start image 724 is displayed on the first image display device 70. This normal time-saving start image 724 is an image that notifies the start of a special time-saving game state. In the example shown, the text "Entering A mode!!" is displayed as the normal time-saving start image 724. The "A mode" displayed on the normal time-saving start image 724 is the mode selected in the special time-saving selection image 745 (see FIG. 283 (21)).

(Card warning image 739)
283 (22), a card warning image 739 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The card warning image 739 is an image for warning the player not to forget to take a card that can identify the remaining value of a card from a lending device (not shown) that communicates with the gaming machine 1 to lend game balls. In the example shown, the card warning image 739 displays the text "Be careful not to forget to take your card."

(Game warning image 740)
As shown in Fig. 283 (22), a gaming warning image 740 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The gaming warning image 740 is an image to warn players not to get addicted to the game. In the example shown, the gaming warning image 740 displays the text "Pachinko is a game that should be enjoyed in moderation. Be careful not to get addicted."

(Second right-hand hit image 725)
As shown in FIG. 283 (23), a second right-hit image 725 is displayed on the first image display device 70. This second right-hit image 725 is an image for encouraging the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side of the game area 5a. The second right-hit image 725 is continuously displayed when the special time-saving game state is active and when the special time-saving game state is active. In the illustrated example, the second right-hit image 725 displays an arrow mark pointing to the right and the text "right hit."

(Normal time-saving remaining number of times image 726)
As shown in Fig. 283 (23), a normal time reduction remaining number image 726 is displayed on the first image display device 70. This normal time reduction remaining number image 726 is an image indicating the remaining number of special symbol lotteries in the special time reduction gaming state. In the illustrated example, the normal time reduction remaining number image 726 displays the text "100 times," indicating that the remaining number of special symbol lotteries in the special time reduction gaming state is 100.

(Switching image 727)
As shown in FIG. 288 (9), a switching image 727 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The switching image 727 is an image for switching the background displayed on the first image display device 70. The switching image 727 is displayed when the SPSP reach effect ends in a variation effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss or a revival variation is performed during the special time-saving game state. Furthermore, if the SP reach effect is executed but not executed, the switching image 727 may be displayed when the SP reach effect ends. In the illustrated example, an image simulating darkness is shown as the switching image 727. Furthermore, the switching image 727 is displayed on a layer in front of the decorative symbol 700, the variable image 701, the variable base 701P, the reserved image 702, the reserved base 702P, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, the remaining number of times in the normal time-saving game image 726, etc., and on a layer behind the reserved number display 703, the small symbol 704, etc.

(First transitional image 728)
As shown in FIG. 288 (12), a first transitional image 728 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The first transitional image 728 is an image that is displayed when the stage image 706 is switched. In this embodiment, the stage image 706 corresponding to the special time-shortened gaming state is switched to the stage image 706 corresponding to the normal gaming state via the first transitional image 728. Also, the stage image 706 corresponding to the special time-shortened gaming state is switched to the stage image 706 corresponding to the normal gaming state via the first transitional image 728. In the illustrated example, an image resembling a door is displayed as the first transitional image 728. The first transitional image 728 is displayed across the entire surface of the first image display device 70. However, the first transitional image 728 may be displayed in a portion of the first image display device 70 and not in another portion. Furthermore, the first transition image 728 displayed when switching from the stage image 706 corresponding to the special time-saving game state to the stage image 706 corresponding to the normal game state and the first transition image 728 displayed when switching from the stage image 706 corresponding to the special time-saving game state to the stage image 706 corresponding to the normal game state may have the same display mode or different display modes. The first transition image 728 is displayed on a layer in front of the decorative symbol 700, the variable image 701, the variable base 701P, the reserved image 702, the reserved base 702P, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, the remaining number of times reached image 708, the remaining number of times normal time-saving image 726, etc., and on a layer behind the reserved number display 703, the small symbol 704, etc.

(Result image 729)
As shown in FIG. 289 (13), a result image 729 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The result image 729 is an image showing the result of a jackpot game. The result image 729 is displayed when the first transition image 728 is displayed after a jackpot game has been played. Furthermore, if multiple jackpot games have been played before the first transition image 728 is displayed, the result image 729 shows the cumulative results of these multiple jackpot games. In the illustrated example, the result image 729 displays the text "A mode," which indicates that a special time-saving game state was active, the text "TOTAL 3 times," which indicates that three jackpot games have been played, and the text "3024 points acquired," which corresponds to the number of prize balls won in the jackpot game.

(Left-handed image 730)
As shown in FIG. 290 (20), a left-hit image 730 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The left-hit image 730 is an image for encouraging the player to shoot the game ball toward the left side of the game area 5a. In the illustrated example, the left-hit image 730 displays an arrow mark pointing to the left and the text "Hit Left." The left-hit image 730 is displayed when switching from the special time-saving game state to the normal game state or when switching from the special time-saving game state to the normal game state.

(Second eye-catching image 731)
As shown in FIG. 291 (29), the first image display device 70 displays a second eye-catching image 731. The second eye-catching image 731 is an image depicting a character appearing in the content that is the subject of the gaming machine 1, and is an image different from the first eye-catching image 715. However, the second eye-catching image 731 may be the same image as the first eye-catching image 715. The second eye-catching image 731 is displayed when switching stages, i.e., when changing the display mode of the stage image 706. More specifically, the second eye-catching image 731 is displayed when the variable effect is started when changing the display mode of the stage image 706. Furthermore, the second eye-catching image 731 is displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700, variable image 701, variable base 701P, reserved image 702, reserved base 702P, execution count image 705, stage image 706, remaining number of times reached image 708, etc., and on a layer behind the reserved number display 703, small pattern 704, etc.

(Countdown image 732)
As shown in FIG. 298 (2), a countdown image 732 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The countdown image 732 is an image that notifies, as a countdown, the number of times that the variable display of the special symbol (the number of variable effects) executed after a predetermined condition is met (execution of RAM clear, resetting of the number of changes) remains until the special time-shortened game state is entered. The countdown image 732 is started when the number of variable displays until the special time-shortened game state is entered reaches a specific number. The specific number may be any number, but is, for example, three. The display content of the countdown image 732 is updated for each variable effect. In the illustrated example, the countdown image 732 displays an image of "1," indicating that one variable effect is required until the special time-shortened game state is entered.

(Special time-saving start image 733)
299(7), a special time-saving start image 733 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The special time-saving start image 733 is an image that notifies the start of a special time-saving game state. In the illustrated example, the special time-saving start image 733 includes the text "TIME-SHORTENED GAME START!" and an arrow pointing to the right.

(Second transition image 734)
As shown in FIG. 299 (9), a second transitional image 734 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The second transitional image 734 is an image that is displayed when the stage image 706 is switched. In this embodiment, the stage image 706 corresponding to the normal gaming state is switched to the stage image 706 corresponding to the special time-saving gaming state via the second transitional image 734. In the illustrated example, an image resembling a shutter is displayed as the second transitional image 734. The second transitional image 734 is displayed across the entire surface of the first image display device 70. However, the second transitional image 734 may be displayed on one part of the first image display device 70 and not on the other part. The second transition image 734 is displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700, variable image 701, variable base 701P, reserved image 702, reserved base 702P, execution count image 705, stage image 706, remaining number of times reached image 708, etc., and on a layer behind the reserved number display 703, small pattern 704, etc.

(Special time-saving selection image 735)
As shown in FIG. 299 (10), a special time-saving selection image 735 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The special time-saving selection image 735 is an image that allows the player to select a mode of presentation in the special time-saving game state. In the illustrated example, the special time-saving selection image 735 allows the player to select either of two modes, "a" or "b." When the special time-saving selection image 735 is displayed, the player can select either mode by operating the presentation button 17. In the illustrated example, mode "a" is selected.

(Mode start image 736)
299(11), a mode start image 736 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The mode start image 736 is an image that notifies the player that a mode effect will begin in the special time-saving gaming state. In the illustrated example, the mode start image 736 displays the text "Entering Chance Mode!!"

(Third right-hand shot image 737)
As shown in FIG. 299 (12), a third right-hit image 737 is displayed on the first image display device 70. This third right-hit image 737 is an image for encouraging the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side of the game area 5a. The third right-hit image 737 is displayed in the first variable effect in the special time-saving game state. In the illustrated example, the third right-hit image 737 displays an arrow mark pointing to the right and the text "right hit."

(Special time-saving remaining number image 738)
As shown in FIG. 299 (12), the first image display device 70 displays a special time-saving remaining number image 738. The special time-saving remaining number image 738 is an image that indicates the remaining number of special symbol lotteries in the special time-saving gaming state. In the illustrated example, the special time-saving remaining number image 738 displays the text "749," which indicates that the remaining number of special symbol lotteries in the special time-saving gaming state is 749.

(Magnetic error notification image 741)
As shown in FIG. 317(2), a magnetic error notification image 741 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The magnetic error notification image 741 is an image that notifies a magnetic error. When an abnormal magnetism is detected by the magnetic detection sensor 57a, the magnetic error notification image 741 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the magnetic error notification image 741 displays the text "Magnet detected."

(Recovery image 742)
As shown in FIG. 327 (4), a recovery image 742 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The recovery image 742 is an image indicating that the gaming machine 1 is recovering from a power-off state. In this embodiment, after the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the recovery image 742 is displayed before the decorative symbol 700, the reserved image 702, the reserved number display 703, the small symbol 704, the stage image 706, and the like are displayed. The recovery image 742 is also displayed over the entire display area of the first image display device 70. The recovery image 742 is also displayed on a layer in front of the decorative symbol 700, the variable base 701P, the reserved image 702, the reserved base 702P, the reserved number display 703, the small symbol 704, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, the remaining number of times reached image 708, and the like. In the illustrated example, the recovery image 742 displays the text "Recovering."

(Zone notification image 743)
As shown in FIG. 337 (2), a zone notification image 743 is displayed on the first image display device 70. This zone notification image 743 is an image that notifies that a zone effect is being executed. The zone notification image 743 also displays information for identifying which of the multiple zone effects is being executed. In the illustrated example, the zone notification image 743 displays the text "Chance Zone" for identifying the zone effect that is being executed.

(Example of variation 1)
268 to 270, a specific description will be given of the variation presentation of the decorative pattern 700 (variation presentation example 1) performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the first image display device 70, etc. Variation presentation example 1 is a variation presentation example of the decorative pattern 700 based on a game ball entering the first starting hole 121 in a normal game state. Also, variation presentation example 1 is a variation presentation example in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and the reach presentation is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 268(1), the highly decorative decorative symbol 700 is fixed and stopped on the first image display device 70 by the performance control unit 300 when the previous special symbol is stopped and displayed. At this time, the first image display device 70 displays the decorative symbol 700, variable base 701P, reserved base 702P, reserved number display 703, small symbol 704, execution count image 705, and stage image 706. At this time, the reserved number display 703 of the first start gate 121 displays "0," which is the reserved number for winning the first start gate 121, and the reserved number display 703 of the second start gate 122 displays "0," which is the reserved number for winning the second start gate. The execution count image 705 displays the text "99 GAME." A background corresponding to the first stage is displayed as the stage image 706. The first stage corresponds to the normal game mode.
The top lamp 10b of the frame lighting device 10, the panel lamp 74b of the panel lighting device 74, the movable member lamp 74c of the panel lighting device 74, and the button lamp 17c are all in the first mode. The first mode is, for example, a mode in which they emit light in white. Although not shown, the sound output device 9 continues to output background music corresponding to the previous variable effect.

When a gaming ball enters the first starting slot 121, as shown in FIG. 268 (2), the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 begin to change in response to the start of the special symbol change. In this embodiment, the left decorative symbol 700, the center decorative symbol 700, the right decorative symbol 700, and the small symbol 704 each display the numbers "1" through "9" in order. That is, in this embodiment, the left decorative symbol 700, the center decorative symbol 700, the right decorative symbol 700, and the small symbol 704 each display the numbers individually. Note that the left decorative symbol 700, the center decorative symbol 700, the right decorative symbol 700, and the small symbol 704 may display characters other than numbers, such as English letters. Furthermore, as the change begins, the decorative symbol 700 changes downward at a slow speed, while the small symbol 704 changes at a fast speed.
In addition, when the drawings indicate that the decorative pattern 700 or the small pattern 704 is changing (scrolling) at a particularly high speed, the target pattern is displayed with an arrow (↓) for ease of understanding. The decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 that are displayed changing at high speed have a higher transparency than when they are not displayed changing. Furthermore, the target pattern that is displayed changing at high speed may be invisible or difficult to see to the player, or may be visible to the player. Furthermore, the behavior of the decorative pattern 700 when it starts to change, such as when the decorative pattern 700 is displayed changing at a low speed, may be referred to below as the "start-of-change behavior."

Furthermore, as the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, "1" is displayed in the hold number display 703 of the first starting hole 121, as shown in Figure 268 (2). At this time, a step-by-step display effect of the hold image 702 begins. The step-by-step display effect is an effect in which the display mode of the hold image 702 is changed in stages while the hold image 702 is displayed. The step-by-step display effect is executed when the display of the hold image 702 begins. In the example shown, the first hold image 702 is displayed in a small size at a position above and away from the first hold base 702P. The step-by-step display effect will be described in detail later.

Furthermore, as the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, as shown in Figure 268 (2), the audio output device 9 begins to output a winning sound to notify the player of the entry into the first starting hole 121. At this time, the light emission modes of the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c change to light emission modes corresponding to the variable presentation. More specifically, the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c all change from the first mode to the second mode. The second mode is a light emission mode in which the lights are lit in blue, and is different from the first mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 268 (3), the decorative pattern 700 moves further downward due to the start of the fluctuation operation. At this time, the step-by-step display performance is completed, and the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed on the first reserved base 702P. This reserved image 702 has a larger display size than the example shown in Figure 268 (2). The display mode of this reserved image 702 is a display mode corresponding to the first stage. The winning sound that notifies the player of a winning entry into the first starting port 121 continues to be output until the step-by-step display performance is completed, and is no longer output once the step-by-step display performance is completed.

In addition, although not shown in the example shown in Figure 268 (3), once the step-by-step display effect is completed, an action effect for the reserved image 702 begins. An action effect is an effect that displays the variable image 701 or the reserved image 702 in action. The action effect is executed according to the progress of the effect. More specifically, the action effect is executed while the variable effect is being executed. Furthermore, the action effect does not have to be executed when the variable effect is not being executed, and the action effect may be executed even when the variable effect is not being executed. By executing the action effect, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variable image 701 or the reserved image 702. The action effect will be described in more detail later.

Next, as shown in Figure 268 (4), the initial fluctuation operation ends, and the decorative pattern 700 fluctuates at a high speed. Furthermore, the pending image 702 moves to the fluctuation base 701P and expands, causing the fluctuating image 701 to be displayed. At this time, the pending number display 703 in the first starting port 121 switches to "0." While not shown, background music corresponding to the fluctuating performance currently being performed is continuously output from the audio output device 9 while the fluctuating performance is being performed.

268(1) to (4), the decorative patterns 700 are arranged in a horizontal line as a left decorative pattern 700, a center decorative pattern 700, and a right decorative pattern 700, and move (scroll) up and down when displayed in a variable manner, but are not limited to this. For example, the decorative patterns 700 may be arranged in a vertical line as a left decorative pattern 700, a center decorative pattern 700, and a right decorative pattern 700, and each of them may move (scroll) left and right.
Furthermore, the state in which the decorative symbol 700 or the small symbol 704 is displayed by an arrow (↓) in the drawing is not limited to the state in which the target symbol is displayed. For example, the state in which the target symbol is displayed by an arrow (↓) in the drawing may be a state in which the target symbol is hidden and therefore cannot be seen by the player.

268(1) to (4), when a game ball enters the first starting gate 121 in a state where there is no reservation for winning at the first starting gate 121 and the special symbol is not changing, "1" is displayed in the reservation number display 703 of the first starting gate 121, and the reservation image 702 is displayed. Then, the reservation image 702 moves to the display position of the changing image 701, and "0" is displayed in the reservation number display 703 of the first starting gate 121.
However, in a state where there is no reservation for winning at the first starting gate 121 and the special symbol is not changing, when a game ball enters the first starting gate 121, the reservation number display 703 at the first starting gate 121 may remain at "0." In this case, the reservation image 702 may be displayed, and then the reservation image 702 may move to display the variable image 701, or the variable image 701 may be displayed without displaying the reservation image 702.

Furthermore, although not shown, when a game ball enters the second starting gate 122 in a state where no reservation has been made for a winning entry at the second starting gate 122 and the special symbol has not changed, the reservation number display 703 of the second starting gate 122 may display "1" and the reservation image 702 may be displayed. After that, the reservation image 702 may move to the display position of the changing image 701, and the reservation number display 703 of the second starting gate 122 may display "0".
However, in a state where there is no reservation for winning at the second start port 122 and the special symbol has not changed, when a game ball enters the second start port 122, the reservation number display 703 at the second start port 122 may remain at "0." In this case, the reservation image 702 may be displayed, and then the reservation image 702 may move to display the variable image 701, or the variable image 701 may be displayed without displaying the reservation image 702.

Next, as shown in Figure 268 (5), the first front image 707 begins to be displayed. When the first front image 707 begins to be displayed, the transparency of the first front image 707 is high, and the decorative pattern 700 displayed on a layer behind the first front image 707 is visible to the player. Also, at this time, the remaining number of times to be reached image 708 is displayed. In the example shown, the remaining number of times to be reached image 708 displays the text "400 more."

Next, as shown in Figure 268 (6), the transparency of the first front image 707 is reduced, and the decorative pattern 700 displayed on the layer behind the first front image 707 becomes invisible or difficult to see by the player.

Next, as the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, "1" is displayed in the reserve number display 703 of the first starting hole 121, as shown in Figure 269 (7). At this time, a tiered display effect begins, and a small reserve image 702 is displayed at a position above and away from the first reserve base 702P. At this time, the sound output device 9 also begins to output a winning sound.

Next, as shown in Fig. 269(8), the stage display effect is completed, and the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed on the first reserved pedestal 702P in a display size larger than the example shown in Fig. 269(7). Also, although not shown, when the stage display effect is completed, the motion effect of the reserved image 702 is started. Also, the winning sound continues to be output until the stage display effect is completed, and when the stage display effect is completed, it is no longer output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 269(9), the first front image 707 is hidden, and the decorative pattern 700, which is displayed changing at high speed, becomes visible to the player again.
The display period of the first front image 707 is, for example, 3 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 269 (10), the left decorative pattern 700 scrolls slowly and then temporarily stops at the position where it had been fixed until the start of the change. More specifically, the number "4" which is the left decorative pattern 700 temporarily stops.
In addition, when it is indicated in the drawing that the decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped, for ease of understanding, a mark similar to a double quotation mark is used around the temporarily stopped decorative pattern 700.

Next, as shown in Figure 269 (11), as a game ball enters the first starting hole 121, the hold number display 703 of the first starting hole 121 displays "2". At this time, a step-by-step display effect begins, and the hold image 702 is displayed in a small size at a position above and away from the second hold base 702P. At this time, the audio output device 9 begins to output a winning sound to notify the player of the entry into the first starting hole 121. This winning sound is different from the winning sound that is output when the hold image 702 in the normal display mode (see Figure 269 (8)) is displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 269 (12), the step-by-step display effect is completed, and the reserved image 702 is displayed in a large size in the expected color on the second reserved base 702P. In the illustrated example, the second reserved image 702 is displayed in blue. More specifically, the second reserved image 702 is displayed in a manner that includes a circular portion made of blue and a circular portion that resembles an aura and is located above the circular portion. Furthermore, once the step-by-step display effect is completed, the motion effect of the second reserved image 702 begins. Furthermore, the winning sound that notifies the player of a winning entry into the first starting hole 121 continues to be output until the step-by-step display effect is completed, and is no longer output after a predetermined time has elapsed since the step-by-step display effect was completed. This predetermined time is, for example, one second. In other words, the winning sound is output for a longer period of time when the blue reserved image 702 is displayed than when the reserved image 702 is displayed in the normal display mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 270 (13), the right decorative pattern 700 scrolls slowly and then temporarily stops at the position where it had been fixed until the start of the change. More specifically, the number "1" which is the right decorative pattern 700 temporarily stops.
Next, as shown in FIG. 270 (14), the middle decorative symbol 700 scrolls slowly and then temporarily stops at the position where it had been fixed and stopped until the change began. More specifically, the number "2" that is the middle decorative symbol 700 temporarily stops. Then, after the three decorative symbols 700 temporarily stop, as the special symbol stops changing, the three decorative symbols 700 are fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. 270 (15). This decorative symbol 700 combination "421" is an example of a combination that occurs when the special symbol lottery result is a miss. Furthermore, as the special symbol stops changing, the three small symbols 704 also stop and fixed. In other words, all of the small symbols 704 stop and fixed without any temporary stop. At this time, the combination "421" of the small symbols 704 matches the combination of the decorative symbols 700. At this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "100 GAMES." The execution time of this variable effect is, for example, 8 seconds.

(Step-by-step display effect using the circular reserved image 702 in the normal display mode)
Next, a description will be given of a step-by-step display effect using the circular reserved image 702 in the normal display mode. Fig. 271 is a diagram showing an example of a step-by-step display effect using the circular reserved image 702 in the normal display mode.
The circular reserved image 702 in the normal display mode performs a four-stage display effect. When a game ball enters the first starting hole 121, a highly transparent reserved image 702 is first displayed in white as the first stage of the stage display effect, as shown in FIG. 271 (1). This reserved image 702 is semicircular. Furthermore, this reserved image 702 is displayed at a position above and away from the reserved base 702P. The display mode of the reserved image 702 in the first stage of the stage display effect is the display mode of the reserved image 702 shown in FIG. 268 (2) and FIG. 269 (7).

Next, as shown in FIG. 271 (2), a reserved image 702 with a lower transparency than the first stage is displayed as the second stage of the stage display effect. This reserved image 702 is circular and has a cross mark. Furthermore, this reserved image 702 has a larger display size than the first stage and is displayed closer to the reserved base 702P than the first stage.
Next, as shown in Fig. 271 (3), as the third stage of the stage display effect, a reserved image 702 with a lower transparency than the second stage is displayed. This reserved image 702 has a larger display size than the second stage and is displayed at a position closer to the reserved base 702P than the second stage.

Next, as shown in FIG. 271 (4), in the fourth stage, or final stage, of the staged display performance, a reserved image 702 with lower transparency than the third stage is displayed. This reserved image 702 is displayed at a larger display size than the third stage. Furthermore, this reserved image 702 is displayed closer to the reserved base 702P than in the third stage. The display mode of reserved image 702 in the final stage of the staged display performance is the display mode of reserved image 702 shown in FIG. 268 (3) and FIG. 269 (8). That is, although not shown, after the reserved image 702 in the first stage shown in FIG. 268 (2) and FIG. 269 (7) is displayed, the reserved image 702 in the second stage of the staged display performance is displayed, and then the reserved image 702 in the third stage of the staged display performance is displayed. Then, the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode shown in FIG. 268 (3) and FIG. 269 (9) is displayed.

Hereinafter, the display mode of reserved image 702 in the final stage may be referred to as the completed display mode. In particular, the display size of reserved image 702 in the completed display mode may be referred to as the completed display size. Furthermore, the form of reserved image 702 in the completed display mode may be referred to as the completed form. Furthermore, the transparency of reserved image 702 in the completed display mode may be referred to as the completed transparency. Furthermore, the display position of reserved image 702 in the completed display mode may be referred to as the completed display position.
Furthermore, the display mode of the reserved image 702 in the first to third stages, i.e., not the final stage, may be referred to as the incomplete display mode hereinafter. In particular, the display size of the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode may be referred to as the incomplete display size. Furthermore, the form of the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode may be referred to as the incomplete form. Furthermore, the transparency of the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode may be referred to as the incomplete transparency. Furthermore, the operation mode of the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode may be referred to as the incomplete operation mode. Furthermore, the display position of the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode may be referred to as the incomplete display position.
In this embodiment, the time from when the step-by-step display performance starts until the pending image 702 in the completed display mode is displayed, i.e., the execution time of the step-by-step display performance using the pending image 702 in the circular normal display mode, is 0.2 seconds.

Furthermore, when the step-by-step display effect is completed, the motion effect of the reserved image 702 begins, as shown in Figure 271 (5). The circular reserved image 702 in the normal display mode periodically rotates clockwise as a motion effect. The rotation period in this motion effect is, for example, 2.0 seconds.

As described above, reserved image 702 is displayed in a stepwise display performance while its display size changes stepwise. More specifically, reserved image 702 is displayed so that its display size increases stepwise. Also, reserved image 702 is displayed in a stepwise display performance while its display position changes stepwise. More specifically, reserved image 702 is displayed so that it moves stepwise toward reserved pedestal 702P (completed display position). Also, reserved image 702 is displayed in a stepwise display performance while its transparency changes stepwise. More specifically, reserved image 702 is displayed so that its transparency decreases stepwise. Also, reserved image 702 is displayed so that its form changes stepwise. More specifically, reserved image 702 is displayed so that its form gradually approaches the completed form.
When the reserved image 702 is displayed, if the reserved image 702 switches from a hidden state to a completed display state without a gradual display effect, the player may feel uncomfortable with the display of the reserved image 702. Therefore, in this embodiment, the reserved image 702 is displayed in stages using a gradual display effect, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable. Furthermore, the gradual display effect allows the player to enjoy the changes in the display state of the reserved image 702.

(Step-by-step display effect using blue reserved image 702)
Next, a description will be given of a step-by-step display effect using the blue reserved image 702. FIG. 272 is a diagram showing an example of a step-by-step display effect using the blue reserved image 702.
The blue reserved image 702 performs a four-stage display effect. When a game ball enters the first starting hole 121, a highly transparent reserved image 702 is displayed in white as the first stage of the stage display effect, as shown in FIG. 272 (1). This reserved image 702 is semicircular. Furthermore, this reserved image 702 is displayed at a position above and away from the reserve base 702P. The display mode of the reserved image 702 in the first stage of the stage display effect is the display mode of the reserved image 702 shown in FIG. 269 (11). Furthermore, the display mode (display size, transparency, shape, display position, etc.) of the blue reserved image 702 in the first stage is the same as the display mode of the first stage of the stage display effect using the circular reserved image 702 in the normal display mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 272(2), in the second stage of the stage display effect, reserved image 702 is displayed in blue with a lower transparency than in the first stage. This reserved image 702 is displayed in a manner including a circular portion 702a made of blue and formed in a circular shape, and an aura portion 702b located above circular portion 702a and simulating an aura. Furthermore, this reserved image 702 has a larger display size than in the first stage and is displayed in a position closer to reserved base 702P than in the first stage.
Next, as shown in Fig. 272 (3), as the third stage of the stage display effect, a reserved image 702 with a lower transparency than the second stage is displayed. This reserved image 702 has a larger display size than the second stage and is displayed at a position closer to the reserved base 702P than the second stage.

Next, as shown in FIG. 272 (4), in the fourth stage, i.e., the final stage, of the staged display effect, a reserved image 702 with lower transparency than the third stage is displayed. This reserved image 702 is displayed at a larger display size than the third stage. Furthermore, this reserved image 702 is displayed closer to the reserved base 702P than the third stage. The display mode of the reserved image 702 in the final stage of the staged display effect is the display mode of the reserved image 702 shown in FIG. 269 (12). That is, although not shown, after the reserved image 702 in the first stage shown in FIG. 269 (11) is displayed, the reserved image 702 in the second stage of the staged display effect is displayed, and then the reserved image 702 in the third stage of the staged display effect is displayed. Then, the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode shown in FIG. 269 (12) is displayed.
In this embodiment, the time from when the step-by-step display performance starts until the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode is displayed, i.e., the execution time of the step-by-step display performance using the blue reserved image 702, is 0.3 seconds. In other words, the execution time of the step-by-step display performance using the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode is longer than the execution time of the step-by-step display performance using the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode.

Furthermore, once the step-by-step display effect is completed, the motion effect of the reserved image 702 begins, as shown in Figure 272 (5). As a motion effect, the circular portion 702a of the blue circular reserved image 702 periodically rotates clockwise, and the aura portion 702b periodically swings from side to side. The rotation period in this motion effect is, for example, 2.0 seconds. The swing period in this motion effect is, for example, 1.5 seconds.

As described above, the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode and the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode have the same display mode in the first stage of the step-by-step display presentation. In this case, when the reserved image 702 in the first stage of the step-by-step display presentation is displayed, the player cannot distinguish whether the displayed reserved image 702 is in the normal display mode or the expected color display mode. Therefore, the player can be given a sense of anticipation as to which display mode the reserved image 702 will be displayed in.
Although the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode and the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode have the same display mode in the first stage of the step-by-step display effect, this is not limited to this. The reserved image 702 in the normal display mode and the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode may have the same display mode in one or more of the first stage display color, shape, display size, transparency, and display position, but may differ in other display modes. Even in this case, when the first stage reserved image 702 is displayed, it is difficult for the player to distinguish whether the displayed reserved image 702 is in the normal display mode or the expected color display mode. This allows the player to feel a sense of anticipation as to which display mode the reserved image 702 will be displayed in.

Furthermore, in the reserved image 702 (variable image 701) in the expected color display mode, the display mode other than the display color (display size, transparency, shape, display position, etc.) may be the same regardless of the display color, or may be different for each display color. Furthermore, in the reserved image 702 (variable image 701) in the expected color display mode, the display mode other than the display color (display size, transparency, shape, display position, etc.) is the same for specific multiple colors (e.g., blue and red), and the display mode other than the display color (display size, transparency, shape, display position, etc.) for special colors (e.g., rainbow colors) may also be different from the specific multiple colors.
Furthermore, in the reserved image 702 (variable image 701) of the expected color display mode, if the display mode other than the display color (display size, transparency, shape, display position, etc.) differs depending on the display color, the display mode (display size, transparency, shape, display position, etc.) of each stage in the step-by-step display presentation may also differ. Furthermore, in the reserved image 702 (variable image 701) of the expected color display mode, if the display mode other than the display color (display size, transparency, shape, display position, etc.) is the same regardless of the display color, the display mode (display size, transparency, shape, display position, etc.) of each stage in the step-by-step display presentation may also be the same.

Furthermore, the action mode in the action presentation by the pending image 702 (variable image 701) in the expected color display mode may be the same regardless of the display color, or may be different for each display color. Furthermore, in the pending image 702 (variable image 701) in the expected color display mode, the action mode in the action presentation may be the same for certain multiple colors (e.g., blue and red), while the action mode in the action presentation for special colors (e.g., rainbow colors) may be different from the certain multiple colors.

(Example of variation 2)
Figure 273 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the first image display device 70.
Next, another specific example (variation presentation example 2) of the variation presentation of the decorative pattern 700 will be described with reference to FIG. 273. Variation presentation example 2 is a variation presentation example of the decorative pattern 700 based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 121 in the normal game state. Also, variation presentation example 2 is a variation presentation example in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and the reach presentation is not executed. Furthermore, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation presentation example 1 will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as variation presentation example 1 may be omitted.

First, as shown in Figure 273 (1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 700 and small symbol 704 on the first image display device 70. At this time, four reserved images 702, a play count image 705, and a stage image 706 are displayed. At this time, the reserved number display 703 of the first starting gate 121 displays "4." The play count image 705 displays the text "49 GAME." A background corresponding to the first stage is displayed as the stage image 706. The top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c are all in the second mode. Although not shown, background music corresponding to the previous variation effect continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in Figure 273 (2), as the display of the next special symbol begins to change, the decorative symbol 700 and small symbol 704 begin to change. Also, the hold number display 703 in the first starting port 121 switches to "3." Also, at this time, the second hold image 702, the third hold image 702, and the fourth hold image 702 move toward the first hold base 702P, the second hold base 702P, and the third hold base 702P, respectively. Also, the first hold image 702 moves toward the variable base 701P and expands, causing the variable image 701 to be displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 273 (3), the display of the second front image 709 begins. When the display of the second front image 709 begins, the transparency of the second front image 709 is high, and the decorative pattern 700 displayed on the layer behind the second front image 709 is visible to the player.

Next, as shown in FIG. 273(4), the transparency of the second front image 709 is reduced, and the decorative symbols 700 displayed on the layer behind the second front image 709 become difficult or impossible for the player to see. At this time, a clear negation image 744 and the remaining number of times to be reached image 708 are also displayed. The remaining number of times to be reached image 708 displays the text "200 more."
Next, as shown in FIG. 273(5), the second front image 709 disappears, and the decorative pattern 700, which is being displayed changing at high speed, becomes visible to the player again.
The display period of the second front image 709 is, for example, 2 seconds.

Next, as the special symbols stop varying, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704, "853," are displayed together and fixed as shown in FIG. 273(6). At this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "50 GAMES."
The execution time of this variable effect is, for example, 4 seconds.

(Variation example 3)
274 and 275 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the first image display device 70.
Next, another specific example (variation presentation example 3) of the variation presentation of the decorative pattern 700 will be explained with reference to FIG. 274. Variation presentation example 3 is a variation presentation example of the decorative pattern 700 based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 121 in the normal game state. Also, variation presentation example 3 is a variation presentation example in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and a reach presentation is executed. Furthermore, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation presentation examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the respective variation presentation examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 274(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 are fixed and stopped by the performance control unit 300 in the first image display device 70. At this time, the reserved number display 703 of the first starting gate 121 displays "0." The execution count image 705 displays the text "200 GAMES." The remaining number of times reached image 708 displays the text "300 more." A background corresponding to the second stage is displayed as the stage image 706. The second stage corresponds to the normal game state and is different from the first stage.
The top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the first mode. Although not shown, the sound output device 9 continues to output background music corresponding to the previous variable effect.

Next, when a gaming ball enters the first starting opening 121, as shown in Figure 274 (2), the decorative symbol 700 and small symbol 704 begin to change as the special symbol begins to change. At this time, the decorative symbol 700 begins to change, and the small symbol 704 begins to change at high speed. At this time, the hold number display 703 of the first starting opening 121 displays "1." At this time, the hold image 702 begins to be displayed in a gradual manner. In the example shown, the hold image 702 is displayed in a small size on the first hold base 702P. At this time, the sound output device 9 begins to output a winning sound as the gaming ball enters the first starting opening 121. At this time, the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c all switch from the first state to the second state.

Next, as shown in Figure 274 (3), the start-of-variation operation progresses. At this time, the step-by-step display performance is completed, and a star-shaped reserved image 702 is displayed in the normal display mode on the first reserved base 702P. This reserved image 702 has a larger display size than the example shown in Figure 274 (2). The display mode of this reserved image 702 is a display mode corresponding to the second stage. The winning sound continues to be output until the step-by-step display performance is completed, and is no longer output once the step-by-step display performance is completed. Although not shown in the figure, once the step-by-step display performance is completed, the operation of the reserved image 702 begins.

Next, as shown in Figure 274 (4), the initial fluctuation operation ends, and the decorative pattern 700 fluctuates at a high speed. Furthermore, the pending image 702 moves to the fluctuation base 701P and expands, causing the fluctuating image 701 to be displayed. At this time, the pending number display 703 in the first starting port 121 switches to "0." While not shown, background music corresponding to the fluctuating performance being performed is continuously output from the audio output device 9 while the fluctuating performance is being performed.

Next, as shown in Figure 274 (5), the left decorative pattern 700, "4", temporarily stops.
Next, as shown in Figure 274 (6), the right decorative pattern 700 "4" temporarily stops, and the reach effect begins.
Next, as shown in FIG. 275(7), the middle decorative pattern 700 "3" temporarily stops.
Then, as the special symbols stop varying, three decorative symbols 700 are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 275 (8). The decorative symbol 700 combination "434" is an example of a combination when the special symbol lottery result is a miss. Also, as the special symbols stop varying, the small symbol 704 "434" is also fixed and stopped. At this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "201 GAME". At this time, the display content of the remaining number of times to be reached image 708 is updated to "299 more".

(Step-by-step display effect using the star-shaped reserved image 702 in the normal display mode)
Next, a description will be given of a step-by-step display effect using the star-shaped reserved image 702 in the normal display mode. Fig. 276 is a diagram showing an example of a step-by-step display effect using the star-shaped reserved image 702 in the normal display mode.
The star-shaped reserved image 702 in the normal display mode performs a four-stage display effect. When a game ball enters the first starting hole 121, a highly transparent reserved image 702 is first displayed in white as the first stage of the stage display effect, as shown in FIG. 276 (1). This reserved image 702 is a star-shaped image with the top missing. The display mode of the reserved image 702 in the first stage of the stage display effect is the display mode of the reserved image 702 shown in FIG. 274 (2).

Next, as shown in FIG. 276(2), a reserved image 702 with a lower transparency than the first stage is displayed as the second stage of the stage display effect. This reserved image 702 is star-shaped. Furthermore, this reserved image 702 is displayed at a larger display size than the first stage.
Next, as shown in FIG. 276 (3), a reserved image 702 with a lower transparency than the second stage is displayed as the third stage of the staged display effect. This reserved image 702 is displayed in a larger display size than the second stage. Furthermore, in the third stage, an action display using the reserved image 702 is performed. More specifically, in the third stage, an action display is performed in which the reserved image 702 emits light. In the illustrated example, an image simulating light is displayed moving from the center of the reserved image 702 toward the periphery of the reserved image 702.

Next, as shown in FIG. 276(4), a reserved image 702 with lower transparency than the third stage is displayed as the fourth stage, i.e., the final stage, of the staged display effect. This reserved image 702 is displayed at a larger display size than the third stage. Note that the action display using the reserved image 702 performed in the third stage of the staged display effect is not performed in the final stage. The display mode of the reserved image 702 in the final stage of the staged display effect is the display mode of the reserved image 702 shown in FIG. 274(3). That is, although not shown, after the reserved image 702 in the first stage shown in FIG. 274(2) is displayed, the reserved image 702 in the second stage of the staged display effect is displayed, and then the reserved image 702 in the third stage of the staged display effect is displayed. Then, the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode shown in FIG. 274(3) is displayed.
In this embodiment, the time from when the step-by-step display performance starts until reserved image 702 is displayed in the completed display mode, i.e., the execution time of the step-by-step display performance by reserved image 702 in the star-shaped normal display mode, is 0.2 seconds. In other words, the execution time of the step-by-step display performance by reserved image 702 in the star-shaped normal display mode is the same as the execution time of the step-by-step display performance by reserved image 702 in the circular normal display mode.

Furthermore, once the step-by-step display effect is completed, the motion effect of the reserved image 702 begins, as shown in Figure 276 (5). The star-shaped reserved image 702 in the normal display mode periodically rotates counterclockwise as a motion effect. The rotation period in this motion effect is, for example, 2.0 seconds.

(Variation example 4)
Figures 277 to 279 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the first image display device 70.
Next, another specific example (variation presentation example 4) of the variation presentation of the decorative pattern 700 will be described with reference to Figures 277 to 279. Variation presentation example 4 is a variation presentation example of the decorative pattern 700 based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 121 in the normal game state. Also, variation presentation example 4 is a variation presentation example in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss, and a reach presentation, an SP reach presentation, and an SPSP reach presentation are executed. Also, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation presentation examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the respective variation presentation examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in Figure 277 (1), a customer waiting image 710 is displayed. Also, "0" is displayed in the hold number display 703 of the first starting gate 121. Also, at this time, the special symbol fluctuation has stopped, and no fluctuation performance is being performed. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c are all in the third state. The third state is a state in which they are turned off. Also, at this time, no sound is being output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when a game ball enters the first starting gate 121, as shown in Figure 277 (2), the customer waiting image 710 disappears as the special symbol begins to change and display. At this time, the decorative symbol 700, small symbol 704, execution count image 705, stage image 706, and remaining number of times reached image 708 become easily visible to the player. At this time, the decorative symbol 700 and small symbol 704 begin to change. At this time, the decorative symbol 700 begins to change, and the small symbol 704 is displayed changing at high speed. At this time, "1" is displayed in the pending number display 703 of the first starting gate 121. The execution count image 705 displays the text "250 GAMES," and the remaining number of times reached image 708 displays the text "250 more." A background corresponding to the second stage is displayed as the stage image 706. At this time, the staged display of the reserved image 702 begins. In the illustrated example, the reserved image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode on the first reserved base 702P. In addition, as the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, the sound output device 9 begins to output a winning sound. At this time, the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c all switch from the third mode to the second mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 277 (3), the operation at the start of the fluctuation progresses. At this time, the stage display performance is completed, and the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the first reserved base 702P. The winning sound continues to be output until the stage display performance is completed, and is no longer output once the stage display performance is completed. Although not shown in the figure, once the stage display performance is completed, the operation performance of the reserved image 702 begins.

Next, as shown in Figure 277 (4), the initial fluctuation operation ends, and the decorative pattern 700 fluctuates at a high speed. Furthermore, the pending image 702 moves to the fluctuation base 701P and expands, causing the fluctuating image 701 to be displayed. At this time, the pending number display 703 in the first starting port 121 switches to "0." While not shown, background music corresponding to the fluctuating performance being performed is continuously output from the audio output device 9 while the fluctuating performance is being performed.

Next, when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 121, as shown in Figure 277 (5), the hold number display 703 of the first starting hole 121 displays "1". At this time, the staged display of the hold image 702 begins. In the example shown, the hold image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode on the first hold base 702P. In addition, as the gaming ball enters the first starting hole 121, the sound output device 9 begins to output a winning sound.

Next, as shown in Figure 277 (6), the staged display performance is completed, and the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the first reserved base 702P. In addition, the winning sound continues to be output until the staged display performance is completed, and is no longer output once the staged display performance is completed. In addition, although not shown in the figure, once the staged display performance is completed, the motion performance of the reserved image 702 begins.

Next, as shown in Figure 278 (7), the left decorative pattern 700, "6", temporarily stops.
Next, as shown in Figure 278 (8), the right decorative pattern 700 "6" temporarily stops, and the reach effect begins.

Next, as shown in FIG. 278 (9), a development effect is executed. The development effect is an effect that notifies the player that the reach effect will progress to the SP reach effect. In the development effect, a moving effect is executed, and a first emphasized image 711 is displayed. The moving effect is an effect that moves the first movable member 73a. In the illustrated example, as a moving effect, the first movable member 73a moves to a position overlapping the first image display device 70. At this time, the decorative pattern 700, the variable image 701, the reserved image 702, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of times achieved image 708 become difficult or impossible to see for the player. Meanwhile, the reserved number display 703 and the small pattern 704 remain easily visible for the player. Furthermore, when the development effect is executed, the state of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c changes. More specifically, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the second state to the fourth state. The fourth state is a state in which the lamps light up in green, and is different from any of the first to third states.
Furthermore, when a game ball enters the first start opening 121 while the development effect is being executed, the reserved number display 703 of the first start opening 121 switches to "2." Meanwhile, the reserved image 702 remains invisible to the player. At this time, the winning sound accompanying the entry into the first start opening 121 is not output.

Next, after the development and moving effects end and the first movable member 73a retreats to a position where it does not overlap the first image display device 70, the SP Reach effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 278 (10). During the execution of the SP Reach effect, the SP Reach image 712 is displayed. At this time, the variable image 701, the reserved image 702, the execution count image 705, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 become difficult or impossible for the player to see. Meanwhile, the reserved number display 703 and the small symbols 704 remain easily visible to the player. At this time, a background image corresponding to the SP Reach effect is displayed on the first image display device 70. Furthermore, during the execution of the SP Reach effect, the left and right decorative symbols 700 are displayed in a smaller display size and with a less decorative display mode. Furthermore, these left and right decorative symbols 700 are displayed on the upper side of the first image display device 70. In the illustrated example, the left decorative pattern 700 is displayed in the upper left corner of the first image display device 70, and the right decorative pattern 700 is displayed in the upper right corner of the first image display device 70. Note that the display positions of the left and right decorative patterns 700 when the SP reach performance is being performed are not limited to the illustrated example. When the SP reach performance is being performed, the left and right decorative patterns 700 may be displayed in any position on the first image display device 70, as long as the positions are different from the display positions before the execution of the SP reach performance (see FIG. 278 (8)).
Furthermore, if a game ball enters the first start port 121 while the SP reach effect is being executed, the reserved number display 703 of the first start port 121 switches to "3." Also, a winning sound accompanying the entry into the first start port 121 is output from the audio output device 9. Meanwhile, the reserved image 702 remains invisible to the player.

Next, as shown in Figure 278 (11), the SPSP reach effect is executed. During the execution of the SPSP reach effect, an SPSP reach image 713 is displayed. At this time, the first image display device 70 displays a background image corresponding to the SPSP reach effect.
In addition, when a game ball enters the first start hole 121 while the SPSP reach effect is being executed, the reserved number display 703 of the first start hole 121 switches to "4." Meanwhile, the reserved image 702 remains invisible to the player. In addition, no winning sound is output in association with the ball entering the first start hole 121.
The decorative pattern 700 with low decorativeness that is displayed when the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is being executed may be displayed on a layer different from the decorative pattern 700 with high decorativeness (see FIG. 278 (8)). For example, the decorative pattern 700 with high decorativeness may be displayed on a layer behind the variable image 701 and the reserved image 702, whereas the decorative pattern 700 with low decorativeness may be displayed on a layer in front of the variable image 701 and the reserved image 702.

Next, as shown in FIG. 278 (12), a promotion effect is executed and a button operation image 714 is displayed.
When the player operates the effect button 17 while the button operation image 714 is displayed, the number "5" which is the center decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped as shown in Fig. 279 (13). At this time, the center decorative pattern 700 is displayed in a less decorative manner and in a larger display size than the decorative patterns 700 on the left and right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 279 (14), the first eye-catching image 715 is displayed. At this time, the decorative symbol 700, the variable image 701, the reserved image 702, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 become difficult or impossible for the player to see. Meanwhile, the reserved number display 703 and the small symbol 704 continue to be easily visible to the player.
The time from when the variable effect starts until the first eye-catching image 715 is displayed is, for example, 60 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 279 (15), the display area of the first eye-catching image 715 on the first image display device 70 becomes smaller. More specifically, the first eye-catching image 715 slides to the right, thereby reducing the display area of the first eye-catching image 715. At this time, in the area of the first image display device 70 where the first eye-catching image 715 is not displayed, the third reserved image 702, the fourth reserved image 702, the number of executions image 705, and the remaining number of times to be reached image 708 become easily visible to the player. Also, at this time, the highly decorative temporary stop display of the left decorative pattern 700 becomes easily visible to the player. Furthermore, the portion of the second reserved image 702 that does not overlap with the first eye-catching image 715 becomes visible or easily visible to the player. Also, the portion of the stage image 706 that does not overlap with the first eye-catching image 715 becomes easily visible to the player. Meanwhile, the middle decorative pattern 700, right decorative pattern 700, variable image 701, and first reserved image 702 remain difficult or impossible to see for the player. Furthermore, the portion of the stage image 706 that overlaps with the first eye-catching image 715 remains difficult or impossible to see for the player. Furthermore, the portion of the second reserved image 702 that overlaps with the first eye-catching image 715 remains difficult or impossible to see for the player. At this time, the motion effects of the fourth reserved image 702, the third reserved image 702, and the second reserved image 702 are being executed, and the motion displays of the fourth reserved image 702, the third reserved image 702, and the second reserved image 702 become visible or easily visible for the player.

Next, as shown in FIG. 279 (16), the first eye-catching image 715 is hidden. At this time, the provisional stop display of the three highly decorative decorative patterns 700 becomes easily visible to the player. Also, the variable image 701 and the first reserved image 702 become easily visible to the player. Furthermore, the entire stage image 706 and the entire second reserved image 702 become easily visible to the player. Also, at this time, four reserved images 702 in the normal display mode are displayed in the completed display mode. That is, for the second reserved image 702, the third reserved image 702, and the fourth reserved image 702, the stage display effects are not visible to the player, and the reserved images 702 in the completed display mode are displayed.
The display time of the first eye-catching image 715 is, for example, 2.5 seconds.

Then, as the special symbols stop varying, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbols 704 are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 279 (17). The combination "656" of the decorative symbols 700 and the small symbols 704 is an example of a combination when the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss. In addition, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "251 GAMES," and the display content of the remaining number of times reached image 708 is updated to "249 remaining." At this time, the variable image 701 is not displayed. The execution time of this variable effect is, for example, 70 seconds.
In this variable effect, the time from when the left decorative pattern 700 temporarily stops until the right decorative pattern 700 temporarily stops is, for example, 5 seconds. The time from when the right decorative pattern 700 temporarily stops until the center decorative pattern 700 temporarily stops is, for example, 20 seconds.
The timing of updating the display content when the execution count image 705 is redisplayed may be the same as the timing of updating the display content when the remaining number of times to be reached image 708 is redisplayed. In this case, both the execution count image 705 and the remaining number of times to be reached image 708 may be redisplayed with the updated display content or with the display content before the update.

As described above, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 121 during the execution of a development effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, etc., the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode will not be visible to the player, but the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode will become visible.
In this way, the change in display mode from the incomplete display mode of reserved image 702 is not visible to the player, which prevents the player from paying excessive attention to reserved image 702, and allows the player to focus on the image unique to the performance being executed.

Furthermore, if a game ball enters the first start hole 121 while the notification effect is being executed, no winning sound is output to notify the player of the entry into the first start hole 121. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from being distracted by the entry into the first start hole 121 and losing attention to the notification effect.
In addition, sound effects for the notification effect may be output while the notification effect is being executed.

Furthermore, when a game ball enters the first start hole 121 during execution of the SP reach performance, a winning sound is output to notify the player of the entry into the first start hole 121, whereas when a game ball enters the first start hole 121 during execution of the SPSP reach performance, no winning sound is output.
This allows the priority between making the player aware of the winning of the first starting hole 121 and making the player pay attention to the performance being executed when the winning is won to be switched according to the progress of the performance, thereby realizing a sharp performance.

In addition, when a game ball enters the first start port 121 while the notification effect is being executed and when the SP reach effect is being executed, a winning sound is output to notify the player of the entry into the first start port 121, and it is also possible to configure the system so that no winning sound is output when a game ball enters the first start port 121 while the SPSP reach effect is being executed.
In addition, if a game ball enters the first start port 121 while the notification effect is being executed, a winning sound is output to notify the player of the entry into the first start port 121, and in both cases where a game ball enters the first start port 121 while the SP reach effect and the SPSP reach effect are being executed, the winning sound may not be output.

Furthermore, as time passes, the display area of the first eye-catching image 715 gradually becomes smaller, so that some of the multiple reserved images 702 are visible or easily visible to the player, and others are difficult or impossible to see. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the first eye-catching image 715 is displayed across the entire surface of the first image display device 70 and then switches to a state in which the first eye-catching image 715 is hidden, this configuration reduces the sense of incongruity caused by the stage image 706 and the like being displayed again, while allowing the player to quickly recognize that the hidden reserved images 702 are still there.

Furthermore, when the first eye-catching image 715 is displayed in a portion of the display area of the first image display device 70, a portion of the one reserved image 702 is visible to the player, and another portion of this one reserved image 702 is difficult or impossible to see for the player (see FIG. 279 (15)). In this state, an action presentation is being performed using this one reserved image 702.
In this case, even if only a part of the reserved image 702 is visible to the player, it is possible to make the player more easily aware of the existence of the reserved image 702. Therefore, it is possible to make the player quickly recognize that the hidden reserved image 702 has not disappeared.

In the case of a reach variation, after the middle decorative pattern 700 temporarily stops and the reach is lost, a first effect is performed in which a first predetermined image (first eye-catching image 715) appears, the decorative pattern 700 is hidden, and then the decorative pattern 700 appears again. In the case of a loss variation, a second predetermined image (first front image 707, second front image 709) appears during the scrolling variation of the decorative pattern 700, the decorative pattern 700 is hidden, and then the decorative pattern 700 appears again, and a second effect is performed to notify of a loss. The variation time is longer when the first effect is performed than when the second effect is performed.
In this case, in the first effect, the decorative pattern 700 stops in a losing mode, and then the decorative pattern 700 is hidden by the display of the first predetermined image, which can make the player hopeful that the temporary loss may develop into some kind of effect. Furthermore, in the second effect, the decorative pattern 700 is suddenly hidden during the variable display, which adds an element of surprise and makes the player excited. Although the common event of hiding the decorative pattern 700 occurs, the predetermined image appears from a different state. This can diversify the variations in the effects and increase the interest.

Furthermore, the small symbol 704 continues to be displayed while the first predetermined image and the second predetermined image are being displayed.
In this case, even when the decorative pattern 700 is hidden, the small pattern 704 is displayed, so that the changing state of the special pattern can be confirmed.

Furthermore, the display time of the first predetermined image is different from the display time of the second predetermined image. In particular, the display time of the second predetermined image is longer than the display time of the first predetermined image (second foreground image 709).
In this case, by shortening the display time of the first predetermined image, it is possible to smoothly transition from a missed reach to the next effect, and by lengthening the display time of the second predetermined image, it is possible to build up the player's expectations.

In addition, a reserved image 702 (variable image 701) can be displayed, and the reserved image 702 (variable image 701) is hidden while the first predetermined image is being displayed, and is redisplayed when the decorative pattern 700 appears, and the reserved image 702 (variable image 701) is displayed (not hidden) while the second predetermined image is being displayed.
In this case, since neither the decorative pattern 700 nor the reserved image 702 (variable image 701) is displayed while the first predetermined image is being displayed, it is possible to draw attention to the first predetermined image. While the second predetermined image is being displayed, the decorative pattern 700 is not displayed, but the reserved image 702 (variable image 701) is displayed, so that the player can recognize the current status (whether it is being varied, how many reserved images there are, etc.).

In addition, a specific effect (such as an SP reach effect) with a high expectation is executed before the first predetermined image is displayed, and no specific effect is executed before the second predetermined image is displayed.
In this case, the player's expectations can be heightened by the special effects, and even if a symbol indicating a loss is displayed from the special effects, the player's expectations can be maintained by the appearance of the first predetermined image. On the other hand, the second predetermined image is displayed without going through the special effects, so the player's expectations can be immediately heightened.

When the first effect is performed, the background image changes before and after the first predetermined image is displayed (in the order of the background in the SP reach effect, the first predetermined image, and the first or second stage). When the second effect is performed, the background image does not change before and after the second predetermined image is displayed (in the order of the first or second stage, the second predetermined image, and the first or second stage).
In this case, when the first effect is performed, the first predetermined image is displayed when switching from the specific background to the normal background, making the background transition smooth. On the other hand, when the second effect is performed, the normal background is suddenly switched to the second predetermined image, heightening the player's anticipation.

In addition, depending on the judgment result, it is possible to stop the multiple decorative patterns 700 in a predetermined order, and when the second performance (display of the second front image 709) is executed, the multiple decorative patterns 700 are not stopped in the predetermined order, and when the first performance is executed, the multiple decorative patterns 700 are stopped in a predetermined order, and the time from when the first pattern (left decorative pattern 700) stops to when the second pattern (right decorative pattern 700) stops is different from the time from when the second pattern (right decorative pattern 700) stops to when the third pattern (middle decorative pattern 700) stops.
In this case, when the first effect is executed, the decorative symbols 700 stop in order, and there is time until the third decorative symbol 700 stops, which can arouse the player's anticipation. Furthermore, even when the third decorative symbol 700 stops, the first predetermined image is displayed, which can reduce the player's disappointment and leave open the possibility of further developments. Furthermore, when the second effect is executed, the decorative symbols 700 do not stop in order, which can create an unexpected effect and increase the player's interest.

Furthermore, the appearance of the decorative pattern 700 is different before and after the first predetermined image appears, and the appearance of the decorative pattern 700 is the same before and after the second predetermined image appears.
In this case, when the first performance is performed, the appearance of the decorative pattern 700 changes via the first predetermined image, which allows for a smooth change in the appearance of the decorative pattern 700. When the second performance is performed, although there is no change in the appearance of the decorative pattern 700 before and after the display of the second predetermined image, the second predetermined image suddenly appears, which allows for an unexpected performance and increases interest.

In addition, in Variable Presentation Example 4, it was explained that the variable image 701 is displayed after the SP Reach presentation and the SPSP Reach presentation end (see Figure 279 (16)), but this is not limited to this. The variable image 701 does not have to be displayed after the SP Reach presentation and the SPSP Reach presentation end.

(Variation example 5)
Figures 280 to 283 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the first image display device 70.
Next, another specific example (variation presentation example 5) of the variation presentation of the decorative pattern 700 will be described with reference to Figures 280 to 283. Variation presentation example 5 is a variation presentation example of the decorative pattern 700 based on a game ball entering the first starting hole 121 in the normal game state. Also, variation presentation example 5 is a variation presentation example in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot. Furthermore, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation presentation examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the respective variation presentation examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in Figure 280 (1), an adjustment image 716 and a menu image 717 are displayed. Furthermore, "0" is displayed in the hold number display 703 of the first starting gate 121. At this time, the special symbol is displayed as stopped, and no variable effects are being performed. Furthermore, a background corresponding to the first stage is displayed as the stage image 706. At this time, the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c are all in the fifth mode. The fifth mode is a light-emitting mode in which they light up yellow, and is different from any of the first to fifth modes. Furthermore, at this time, no sound is being output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 121, as shown in Figure 280 (2), the decorative symbol 700 and small symbol 704 begin to change as the special symbol begins to change. At this time, the decorative symbol 700 begins to change, and the small symbol 704 changes and displays at high speed. At this time, a winning light-emitting effect is executed. In the winning light-emitting effect, a winning light-emitting effect notification sound is output from the audio output device 9. This sound is different from the winning sound output when the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode or the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode is displayed. The winning light-emitting effect notification sound can also be considered as a winning sound that notifies the player of a winning ball entering the first starting hole 121. In addition, in the winning light-emitting effect, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all enter the sixth mode. The sixth mode is a mode in which the light periodically flashes red. The blinking cycle is, for example, 0.5 seconds. At this time, the hold number display 703 of the first starting port 121 displays "1." At this time, the staged display of the hold image 702 begins. In the example shown, the hold image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode at a position above and away from the first hold base 702P.

Next, as shown in Figure 280 (3), the operation at the start of the fluctuation progresses. At this time, the step-by-step display performance is completed, and the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the first reserved base 702P. In the example shown, the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode is displayed in blue. Also, although not shown, when the step-by-step display performance is completed, the operation performance of the first reserved image 702 begins. Furthermore, the notification sound for the winning light-emitting performance will no longer be output after a predetermined time has elapsed since the step-by-step display performance was completed. This predetermined time is, for example, 2 seconds.

Next, as shown in Figure 280 (4), the initial fluctuation operation ends, and the decorative pattern 700 fluctuates at a high speed. Furthermore, the pending image 702 moves to the fluctuation base 701P and expands, causing the fluctuating image 701 to be displayed. At this time, the pending number display 703 in the first starting port 121 switches to "0." While not shown in the figure, background music corresponding to the fluctuating performance being performed is continuously output from the audio output device 9 while the fluctuating performance is being performed.

Next, when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 121, as shown in FIG. 280 (5), the hold number display 703 of the first starting hole 121 displays "1." At this time, the staged display of the hold image 702 begins. In the example shown, the hold image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode at a position above and away from the first hold base 702P. In addition, as the gaming ball enters the first starting hole 121, the sound output device 9 begins to output a winning sound.

Next, when the staged display effect for the first reserved image 702 is completed and a game ball enters the first start slot 121, a "2" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the first start slot 121, as shown in FIG. 280 (6). At this time, the staged display effect for the second reserved image 702 begins. In the illustrated example, the reserved image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode at a position above and away from the second reserved base 702P. Furthermore, as the game ball enters the first start slot 121, the sound output device 9 begins to output a winning sound. More specifically, before the output of the winning sound corresponding to the first reserved image 702 ends, the sound corresponding to the second reserved image 702 begins to be output. Furthermore, the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in a completed display mode on the first reserved base 702P. Although not illustrated, once the staged display effect is completed, the action effect for the first reserved image 702 begins.

In addition, if the output of the current winning sound begins before the output of the previous winning sound has finished, the output of the previous winning sound may be stopped when the output of the current winning sound begins. Also, even if the output of the current winning sound begins before the output of the previous winning sound has finished, the previous winning sound may be output until the end. In other words, the previous winning sound and the current winning sound may be output simultaneously. Also, if the output of the winning sound notifying the current winning start begins before the output of the previous winning sound has finished, the current winning sound may not be output until the output of the previous winning sound has finished.

Next, when the gradual display effect by the second reserved image 702 is completed and a game ball enters the first start opening 121, "3" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the first start opening 121, as shown in FIG. 281 (7). At this time, the gradual display effect of the third reserved image 702 also begins. In the example shown, the reserved image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode at a position above and away from the third reserved base 702P. In addition, as the game ball enters the first start opening 121, the sound output device 9 begins to output a winning sound. In addition, the reserved image 702 in the normal game state is displayed in a completed display mode on the second reserved base 702P. In addition, although not shown in the figure, when the gradual display effect is completed, the action effect of the second reserved image 702 begins.

Next, as shown in Figure 281 (8), the tiered display effect by the third reserved image 702 is completed, and the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the third reserved base 702P. Also, although not shown, once the tiered display effect is completed, the movement effect of the third reserved image 702 begins. Also, the winning sound continues to be output until the tiered display effect is completed, and is no longer output once the tiered display effect is completed.

Next, as shown in Figure 281 (9), the left decorative pattern 700, "4", temporarily stops.
Next, as shown in Figure 281 (10), the right decorative pattern 700 "4" temporarily stops, and the reach effect begins.
Next, as shown in Figure 281 (11), an extended effect is executed. In the extended effect, the movable effect is executed and the first emphasized image 711 is displayed. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the sixth aspect to the fourth aspect.

Next, as shown in Figure 281 (12), the SP reach effect is executed. During the execution of the SP reach effect, the SP reach image 712 is displayed. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all enter the second mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 282 (13), the SPSP reach effect is executed. During the execution of the SPSP reach effect, the SPSP reach image 713 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 282 (14), a promotion effect is executed and a button operation image 714 is displayed.

When the player operates the effect button 17 while the button operation image 714 is displayed, a jackpot notification effect is executed, as shown in Figure 282 (15). The jackpot notification effect is an effect that notifies the player that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot. In the jackpot effect, a moving effect is executed and the second emphasis image 718 is displayed. In the example shown, as a moving effect, the first moving member 73a moves to a position overlapping with the first image display device 70. Also, at this time, the decorative pattern 700, variable image 701, reserved image 702, execution count image 705, stage image 706, and remaining number of times to be achieved image 708 become difficult or impossible to see for the player. Meanwhile, the reserved number display 703 and small pattern 704 remain easily visible to the player. Furthermore, when the jackpot notification effect is executed, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c switch from the second mode to the seventh mode. The seventh mode is a light emission mode in which the lights are illuminated in the following colors over time: red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple. In other words, the seventh mode is a light emission mode in which the illumination color changes through seven colors over time, creating a rainbow of colors. The seventh mode can also be interpreted as a mode that suggests or notifies the player that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. In the illustrated example, the top lamp 10b lights up red, the board lamp 74b lights up orange, the movable member lamp 74c lights up yellow, and the button lamp 17c lights up green. Furthermore, when the jackpot notification effect is executed, the sound effect of the jackpot notification effect is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when the jackpot notification effect ends and the second highlight image 718 disappears, the double-digit decorative symbol 700 temporarily stops, as shown in FIG. 282 (16). In the illustrated example, the decorative symbol 700 is displayed as the combination "444." At this time, the decorative symbol 700 is displayed larger than the display mode during the SPSP reach effect (see FIG. 282 (13)). Meanwhile, the small symbol 704 continues to display in a variable manner. At this time, the execution count image 705 and the remaining number of times reached image 708 are redisplayed. Meanwhile, the variable image 701 and the reserved image 702 continue to be difficult or impossible for the player to see. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c continue to be in the seventh mode. In the illustrated example, the top lamp 10b lights up orange, the board lamp 74b lights up yellow, the movable member lamp 74c lights up green, and the button lamp 17c lights up blue. At this time, the first image display device 70 again displays a background corresponding to the SPSP reach effect.
In addition, the background of the first image display device 70 when the double-digit decorative pattern 700 is displayed may be a background corresponding to the stage currently being stayed in, i.e., a background corresponding to the first stage.

Furthermore, if a game ball enters the first starting slot 121 while the double-digit decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped, the reserved number display 703 of the first starting slot 121 will display "4." Meanwhile, the reserved image 702 will remain difficult or impossible for the player to see. Furthermore, no winning sound will be output.

Then, as the special symbol stops changing, the decorative symbol 700 is fixed and stopped, as shown in Figure 282 (17). Furthermore, "444" is fixed and stopped as the small symbol 704. That is, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 display a matching combination of "444." At this time, the display content of the number of times played image 705 is updated to "351 GAMES." At this time, the display content of the remaining number of times reached image 708 is updated to "149 left." At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c continue to be in the seventh mode. In the illustrated example, the top lamp 10b lights up yellow, the board lamp 74b lights up green, the movable member lamp 74c lights up blue, and the button lamp 17c lights up indigo.

Next, as shown in Figure 282 (18), an opening image 719 is displayed. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all change from the seventh mode to the second mode. Also, although not shown, during the execution of the jackpot game, background music corresponding to the progress of the jackpot game is output from the sound output device 9.
Next, as shown in Fig. 283 (19), a first right-hit image 720 and a promotion image 721 are displayed. The display time of the promotion image 721 is, for example, 5 seconds.

Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the prompt image 721 was displayed, a round-in-progress image 722 and a round number image 723 are displayed, as shown in Fig. 283 (20). In the illustrated example, the round number image 723 displays the text "Round 1."
Next, when the final round is over, a special time-saving selection image 745 is displayed as shown in FIG. 283 (21). In the illustrated example, the cursor is positioned on the “A” mode in the special time-saving selection image 745.
Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the special time-saving selection image 745 was displayed, the normal time-saving start image 724 is displayed as shown in FIG. 283 (22). At this time, a card warning image 739 and a game warning image 740 are also displayed.

Next, when the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving game state, as shown in Figure 283 (23), the decorative symbol 700 with low decorativeness, "444," is fixed and stopped on the first image display device 70. The decorative symbol 700 displayed at this time corresponds to the sequence of numbers that was finally fixed and stopped before the jackpot game was executed, i.e., when the jackpot was won. The small symbol 704 is also fixed and stopped by the sequence of numbers "444," just like the decorative symbol 700. At this time, the stage image 706 displays a background corresponding to the third stage. The third stage is a stage corresponding to the special time-saving game state. At this time, the second right-hit image 725 and the remaining number of normal time-saving times image 726 are also displayed. In the illustrated example, the remaining number of normal time-saving times image 726 displays the text "100 times," indicating the remaining number of special symbol lotteries in the special time-saving game state. Additionally, the reserved number display 703 of the first starting port 121 shows "4," and the reserved number display 703 of the second starting port 122 shows "0." Neither the variable image 701 nor the reserved image 702 is displayed. The time from when the double-digit decorative pattern 700 is displayed (see Figure 282 (16)) until the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving gaming state is, for example, 150 seconds.

As described above, if a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 121 while the doublet decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped, the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode will not be visible to the player. In this case, by making the change in display mode from the incomplete display mode of the reserved image 702 difficult or impossible for the player to see, it is possible to prevent the player from focusing excessively on the reserved image 702 while the doublet decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped, and to make the player focus on the fact that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot.
Furthermore, if a game ball enters the first start hole 121 while the doublet decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped, no winning sound is output. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from being distracted by the game ball entering the first start hole 121 and losing track of the fact that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot.
However, even if a gaming ball enters the first start hole 121 when the doublet decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped, a stage display effect may be executed, and the reserved image 702 of each stage may be visible or easily visible to the player. Also, even if a gaming ball enters the first start hole 121 when the doublet decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped, a winning sound may be output.

In addition, in this embodiment, suggestive effects (display of execution count image 705, display of remaining number of times reached image 708, and display of countdown image 732, described below) can be executed to indicate when a special time-saving game state may occur. During a specified miss variation effect (miss without reach), there is an execution period during which suggestive effects are executed, but there is no non-execution period during which suggestive effects are not executed, and during a jackpot variation effect, there is an execution period during which suggestive effects are executed (before the SP reach effect) and a non-execution period during which suggestive effects are not executed (during the SP reach effect, during the SPSP reach effect). Therefore, while the suggestive effects create anticipation that a special time-saving game state will occur, the non-execution periods during the jackpot variation effect during which suggestive effects are not executed allow the player to focus their attention on the variation effects, making the game more enjoyable.

In addition, suggestive effects (display of execution count image 705, display of remaining number of times image 708, and display of countdown image 732, described below) can be executed to indicate when a special time-saving game state may occur. During the first reach variation effect (reach effect), there is an execution period during which the suggestive effects are executed, but there is no non-execution period during which the suggestive effects are not executed. During the second reach variation effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect), which has a higher expectation level than the first reach variation effect, there is an execution period during which the suggestive effects are executed (before the SP reach effect) and a non-execution period during which the suggestive effects are not executed (during the SP effect, during the SPSP reach effect). Therefore, while the suggestive effects create anticipation for the occurrence of a special time-saving game state, the non-execution period during the second reach variation effect, which has a higher expectation level than the first reach variation effect, allows the player to focus their attention on the variation effects, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, during a jackpot variation effect in which a suggestive effect is executed, there can be multiple periods during which the suggestive effect is not executed (during a development effect, during an SPSP reach effect, etc.).Furthermore, during a jackpot variation effect in which a suggestive effect is executed, there can be multiple periods during which the suggestive effect is executed (before an SP reach effect, after the decorative pattern 700 with a double number has temporarily stopped, etc.).

Furthermore, during a specific reach with a miss variation effect in which a suggestive effect is executed, there may be multiple periods during which the suggestive effect is not executed (during a development effect, during an SPSP reach, etc.).Furthermore, during a specific reach with a miss variation effect in which a suggestive effect is executed, there may be multiple periods during which the suggestive effect is executed (before a reach effect, after the three decorative patterns 700 temporarily stop, etc.).

Note that the display of the execution count image 705 and the remaining number of times image 708 may continue even during the execution of the development effect, SP reach effect, or SPSP reach effect. Even in this case, the hold image 702 is hidden during the execution of the development effect, SP reach effect, or SPSP reach effect. That is, suggestive effects (such as the display of the execution count image 705, the remaining number of times image 708, or the countdown image 732 described below) that indicate a time when a special time-saving game state may occur can be executed. During specific effects (such as the development effect, SP/SPSP reach effect, etc.) that anticipate the execution of a jackpot game, the hold icon is hidden, but the b time-saving suggestive effect can continue to be executed. In this case, the suggestive effects can create anticipation of the occurrence of a special time-saving game state, while making the player aware of the occurrence of the special time-saving game state even during the specific effect. This can reduce the player's dissatisfaction even if the specific effect is executed and fails, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.
The suggestive effect is executed a predetermined period before the special time-saving gaming state occurs (before a predetermined change occurs).

In addition, when the special time-saving game state is entered, a suggestion effect (display of the normal time-saving start image 724) can be executed to confirm in advance that the special time-saving game state will be entered.

(Example of variation 6)
284 and 285 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the first image display device 70.
Next, another specific example (variation presentation example 6) of the variation presentation of the decorative pattern 700 will be described with reference to Figures 284 and 285. Variation presentation example 6 is a variation presentation example of the decorative pattern 700 based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 122 in the special time-saving game state. Also, variation presentation example 6 is a variation presentation example in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and the reach presentation is not executed. Furthermore, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation presentation examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the respective variation presentation examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 284 (1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the decorative symbol 700 and small symbol 704 with low decorativeness are fixed and stopped by the effect symbol 130m in the first image display device 70. At this time, the execution count image 705, stage image 706, second right-hit image 725, and remaining number of times in normal time reduction image 726 are displayed. The reserved number display 703 of the first starting gate 121 shows "0," and the reserved number display 703 of the second starting gate 122 shows "0." The background corresponding to the third stage is displayed as the stage image 706. The execution count image 705 displays the text "10 GAMES," and the remaining number of times in normal time reduction image 726 displays the text "90 times."
The top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the first mode. Although not shown, the sound output device 9 continues to output background music corresponding to the previous variable effect.

Next, when a gaming ball enters the second start opening 122, as shown in Figure 284 (2), the decorative pattern 700 and small pattern 704 begin to change as the special pattern begins to change. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 begins to change, and the small pattern 704 begins to change at high speed. At this time, the display content of the remaining number of times for normal time reduction image 726 is updated to "89 times." At this time, "1" is displayed in the hold number display 703 of the second start opening 122. At this time, the staged display performance of the hold image 702 begins. In the illustrated example, the hold image 702 is displayed in a small size on the first hold base 702P. At this time, as the gaming ball enters the second start opening 122, the audio output device 9 begins to output a winning sound to notify the player of the entry into the second start opening 122. At this time, the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c all switch from the first position to the second position.

In the special time-shortened gaming state, the decorative symbol 700 may not be moved at the start of its variation. That is, in the special time-shortened gaming state, the decorative symbol 700 may be displayed to vary at high speed as soon as its variation starts.
Furthermore, the winning sound that notifies the player of a win at the second starting hole 122 may be the same as the winning sound that notifies the player of a win at the first starting hole 121, or may be a different sound.

Next, as shown in Figure 284 (3), the start-of-variation operation progresses. At this time, the step-by-step display performance is completed, and a triangular reserved image 702 is displayed in the normal display mode on the first reserved base 702P. This reserved image 702 has a larger display size than the example shown in Figure 284 (2). The display mode of this reserved image 702 is a display mode corresponding to the third stage. The winning sound that notifies the player of a winning entry into the second starting port 122 continues to be output until the step-by-step display performance is completed, and is no longer output once the step-by-step display performance is completed. Although not shown in the figure, once the step-by-step display performance is completed, the operation of the reserved image 702 begins.

Next, as shown in Figure 284 (4), the initial fluctuation operation ends, and the decorative pattern 700 fluctuates at a high speed. Furthermore, the pending image 702 moves to the fluctuation base 701P and expands, causing the fluctuating image 701 to be displayed. At this time, the pending number display 703 in the second starting port 122 switches to "0."

Next, when a gaming ball enters the second start opening 122, as shown in Figure 284 (5), the reserve number display 703 of the second start opening 122 displays "1". At this time, the reserve image 702 begins to be displayed in stages. In the example shown, the reserve image 702 is displayed in a small size on the first reserve base 702P. In addition, as the gaming ball enters the second start opening 122, the sound output device 9 begins to output a winning sound.

Next, as shown in Figure 284 (6), the tiered display effect is completed, and a triangular reserved image 702 is displayed in the normal display mode on the first reserved base 702P. This reserved image 702 has a larger display size than the example shown in Figure 284 (5). The winning sound continues to be output until the tiered display effect is completed, and is no longer output once the tiered display effect is completed. Although not shown in the figure, once the tiered display effect is completed, the motion effect of the reserved image 702 begins.

Next, as shown in Figure 285 (7), the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704 "412" are displayed together and fixed. At this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "11 GAME."

As described above, in this embodiment, suggestive effects (such as displaying the execution count image 705, the remaining number of times reached image 708, and the countdown image 732 described below) can be executed to indicate when a special time-saving game state may occur. During variable effects executed in the normal game state, there are execution periods (before the SP reach effect) during which suggestive effects are executed and non-execution periods (during the SP effect, during the SPSP reach effect, etc.) during which suggestive effects are not executed. During variable effects executed in the specific game state (time-saving game state), there are no execution periods during which suggestive effects are executed, but there are non-execution periods during which suggestive effects are not executed. Therefore, while suggestive effects create anticipation of the occurrence of a special time-saving game state, by not executing suggestive effects in the specific game state, it is possible to focus the player's attention on the effects in the specific game state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

(Step-by-step display effect using the triangular reserved image 702 in the normal display mode)
Next, a description will be given of a gradual display effect using the triangular reserved image 702 in the normal display mode. Fig. 286 is a diagram showing an example of a gradual display effect using the triangular reserved image 702 in the normal display mode.
The triangular reserved image 702 in the normal display mode performs a four-stage display effect. When a game ball enters the second starting hole 122, a highly transparent reserved image 702 is first displayed in white as the first stage of the stage display effect, as shown in FIG. 286(1). This reserved image 702 has a triangular shape with the top missing. The upper part of this reserved image 702 is displayed on the reserved base 702P, and the lower part is displayed below the reserved base 702P. The display mode of the reserved image 702 in the first stage of the stage display effect is the display mode of the reserved image 702 shown in FIG. 284(2) and FIG. 284(5).

Next, as shown in FIG. 286 (2), a reserved image 702 with a lower transparency than the first stage is displayed as the second stage of the stage display effect. This reserved image 702 has a triangular shape. Furthermore, this reserved image 702 has a larger display size than the first stage and is displayed higher than the first stage.
Next, as shown in Figure 286 (3), a reserved image 702 with a lower transparency than the second stage is displayed as the third stage of the stage display effect. This reserved image 702 has a larger display size than the second stage and is displayed higher than the second stage.

Next, as shown in FIG. 286(4), a reserved image 702 with lower transparency than the third stage is displayed as the fourth stage, i.e., the final stage, of the staged display effect. This reserved image 702 is displayed at a larger display size than the third stage. Furthermore, the entire reserved image 702 is displayed on the reserved display base 702P. The display mode of the reserved image 702 in the final stage of the staged display effect is the display mode of the reserved image 702 shown in FIG. 284(3) and FIG. 284(6). That is, although not shown, after the reserved image 702 in the first stage shown in FIG. 284(2) and FIG. 284(5) is displayed, the reserved image 702 in the second stage of the staged display effect is displayed, and then the reserved image 702 in the third stage of the staged display effect is displayed. Then, the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode shown in FIG. 284(3) and FIG. 284(6) is displayed.
In this embodiment, the time from when the step-by-step display performance starts to when the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode is displayed, i.e., the execution time of the step-by-step display performance using the reserved image 702 in the triangular normal display mode, is 0.2 seconds.

Furthermore, once the step-by-step display effect is completed, the motion effect of the reserved image 702 begins, as shown in Figure 286 (5). The triangular reserved image 702 in the normal display mode periodically moves up and down as a motion effect. The period of the up and down movement in this motion effect is, for example, 2.0 seconds. In other words, the period of the motion effect by the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode in the special time-saving game state is the same period as the period of the motion effect by the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode in the normal game state.

(Example of variation 7)
287 to 292 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the first image display device 70.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (Variation Rendering Example 7) will be described with reference to FIGS. 287 to 292. Variation Rendering Example 7 includes a variable effect based on winning the second start slot 122 in the special time-saving gaming state, a variable effect based on winning the second start slot 122 in the normal gaming state, and a variable effect based on winning the first start slot 121 in the normal gaming state. Furthermore, in Variation Rendering Example 7, six variable effects are performed. The first of these six variable effects is a variable effect based on winning the second start slot 122 in the special time-saving gaming state. Furthermore, the second through fourth of the six variable effects are variable effects based on winning the second start slot 122 in the normal gaming state. Furthermore, the fifth and sixth of the six variable effects are variable effects based on winning the first start slot 121 in the normal gaming state.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, as shown in Figure 287 (1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 700 and small symbol 704 in the first image display device 70. At this time, four reserved images 702, an execution count image 705, a stage image 706, a second right-hit image 725, and a remaining number of normal time-saving times image 726 are displayed. The reserved number display 703 of the second starting slot 122 shows "4." The stage image 706 shows a background corresponding to the fourth stage. The fourth stage corresponds to the special time-saving game state and is a different stage from the third stage. The fourth stage is set when the "B" mode is selected in the special time-saving selection image 745 (see Figure 283 (21)). The display mode of the four reserved images 702 corresponds to the fourth stage and is the same as the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode displayed in the third stage. Additionally, the execution count image 705 displays the text "99 GAMES," and the remaining normal time-saving count image 726 displays the text "1 time." The top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable part lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c are all in the second state. Although not shown, the audio output device 9 continues to output background music corresponding to the previous variable effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 287(2), the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 start to change as the next special symbol starts to change. Also, the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 122 switches to "3."
Next, as shown in Figure 287 (3), the left decorative pattern 700, "4", temporarily stops.
Next, as shown in Figure 287 (4), the right decorative pattern 700 "4" temporarily stops, and the reach effect begins.

Next, as shown in Fig. 287 (5), the SP reach effect is executed. That is, in the special time-saving gaming state, the SP reach effect is executed without executing the development effect. During the execution of the SP reach effect, an SP reach image 712 is displayed. At this time, the first image display device 70 displays a background corresponding to the SP reach effect, which is different from the background during the execution of the SP reach effect in the normal gaming state.
In addition, even in the special time-saving game state, the SP reach effect may be executed after the development effect is executed.

Next, as shown in Figure 287 (6), the SPSP reach effect is executed. While the SPSP reach effect is being executed, the SPSP reach image 713 is displayed. At this time, the first image display device 70 displays a background corresponding to the SPSP reach effect, which is different from the background displayed during execution of the SPSP reach effect in normal gaming mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 288(7), a promotion effect is executed and a button operation image 714 is displayed.
Then, when the player operates the effect button 17 while the button operation image 714 is displayed, the number "5", which is the middle decorative pattern 700, temporarily stops as shown in FIG. 288 (8).

Next, as shown in Figure 288 (9), the switching image 727 is displayed. At this time, the decorative symbol 700, variable image 701, reserved image 702, execution count image 705, stage image 706, and remaining normal time reduction count image 726 become difficult or impossible for the player to see. On the other hand, the reserved number display 703, small symbol 704, and second right-hit image 725 remain easily visible to the player.

288(10), when the switching image 727 is hidden, the temporary stop display of the three decorative symbols 700, "454," becomes easily visible to the player. Also, the variable image 701, the reserved image 702, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining normal time reduction count image 726 become easily visible to the player.
Then, as the special symbols stop varying, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704, "454," are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 288 (11). At this time, the variable image 701 is not displayed. The display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "100 GAMES." As the special symbols stop varying, the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the normal gaming state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 288 (12), the first transition image 728 is displayed. At this time, the decorative symbol 700, the reserved image 702, the execution count image 705, and the stage image 706 become difficult or impossible for the player to see. Meanwhile, the reserved number display 703 and the small symbol 704 remain easily visible to the player. The second right-hit image 725 and the remaining normal time reduction count image 726 are hidden.
Next, a result image 729 is displayed as shown in FIG. 289(13).

Next, as shown in FIG. 289 (14), the small symbol 704 begins to change as the display of the next special symbol begins to change. This change is based on winning the second start slot 122 in normal game mode. In addition, the decorative symbol 700 is not displayed during this change. That is, in this change, the small symbol 704 is used to perform the change without using the decorative symbol 700. In addition, the change image 701 and the reserved image 702 are not displayed during this change. In addition, the reserved number display 703 in the second start slot 122 switches to "2."
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, the three small symbols 704, "721", are displayed together and are fixed as shown in FIG. 289 (15).

Next, as shown in FIG. 289 (16), the small symbol 704 starts to change as the next special symbol starts to change. Also, the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 122 switches to "1."
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, three small symbols 704 are displayed together and fixed as shown in Figure 289 (17). The combination of small symbols 704, "658", is an example of a combination when the result of the special symbol lottery is a losing combination.

Next, as shown in FIG. 289 (18), the small symbol 704 starts to change as the next special symbol starts to change. Also, the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 122 switches to "0".
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, three small symbols 704, "421", are displayed together and are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 290 (19).

When the variable effect based on winning the second starting slot 122 ends without any pending wins based on winning the second starting slot 122, the highly decorative decorative symbol 700, "421," is fixed and stopped on the first image display device 70, as shown in FIG. 290 (20). In other words, the combination of decorative symbols 700 matches the combination of small symbols 704. At this time, the stage image 706 displays a background corresponding to the fifth stage. The fifth stage corresponds to the normal game state and is different from any of the first through fourth stages. At this time, the execution count image 705 and the left-hit image 730 are also displayed. The execution count image 705 displays the text "100 GAMES," which includes the number of new variable effect effects performed since the number of special symbol variable display counts was reset. The number displayed in the execution count image 705 is the number of variable effect effects performed since the gaming machine 1 was controlled to the special time-saving game state. At this time, the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c all switch from the second state to the first state. At this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a voice message saying, "Please return to left-handed play."

Then, after a predetermined time has passed without any winnings in the first starting slot 121, the adjustment image 716 and menu image 717 are displayed, as shown in Figure 290 (21). At this time, the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c all switch from the first state to the fifth state.

Next, when a gaming ball enters the first starting opening 121, as shown in Figure 290 (22), the decorative symbol 700 and small symbol 704 begin to change as the special symbol begins to change. At this time, the decorative symbol 700 begins to change, and the small symbol 704 begins to change at high speed. At this time, the hold number display 703 of the first starting opening 121 displays "1." At this time, the hold image 702 begins to display in a gradual manner. In the example shown, the hold image 702 is displayed in a small size at a position above and away from the first hold base 702P. At this time, the sound output device 9 begins to output a winning sound as the gaming ball enters the first starting opening 121. At this time, the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c all switch from the fifth mode to the second mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 290 (23), the operation at the start of the fluctuation progresses. At this time, the step-by-step display performance is completed, and a square-shaped reserved image 702 is displayed in the normal display mode on the first reserved base 702P. This reserved image 702 has a larger display size than the example shown in Figure 290 (22). This reserved image 702 is also in a display mode corresponding to the fifth stage. Although not shown, once the step-by-step display performance is completed, the operation performance of the reserved image 702 begins. The winning sound continues to be output until the step-by-step display performance is completed, and is no longer output once the step-by-step display performance is completed.

Next, as shown in Figure 290 (24), the initial fluctuation operation ends, and the decorative pattern 700 fluctuates at a high speed. Furthermore, the pending image 702 moves to the fluctuation base 701P and expands, causing the fluctuating image 701 to be displayed. At this time, the pending number display 703 in the first starting port 121 switches to "0." While not shown, background music corresponding to the fluctuating performance being performed is continuously output from the audio output device 9 while the fluctuating performance is being performed.

Next, as the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, "1" is displayed in the reserve number display 703 of the first starting hole 121, as shown in Figure 291 (25). At this time, a tiered display effect begins, and a small reserve image 702 is displayed at a position above and away from the first reserve base 702P. At this time, the sound output device 9 begins to output a winning sound.

Next, as shown in Figure 291 (26), the tiered display effect is completed, and the reserved image 702 is displayed in the normal display mode on the first reserved base 702P at a display size larger than the example shown in Figure 291 (25). Also, although not shown, once the tiered display effect is completed, the motion effect of the reserved image 702 begins. Also, the winning sound continues to be output until the tiered display effect is completed, and is no longer output once the tiered display effect is completed.

Next, after the three decorative symbols 700 temporarily stop, the special symbols stop fluctuating, and the three decorative symbols 700 stop as shown in Figure 291 (27). This decorative symbol 700 combination "712" is an example of a combination that occurs when the special symbol lottery result is a miss. Also, as the special symbols stop fluctuating, three small symbols 704 "712" also stop as a fixed combination. At this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "101 GAME". At this time, the remaining number of times to be achieved image 708 is also displayed. The remaining number of times to be achieved image 708 displays the text "399 more."

Next, as shown in FIG. 291 (28), the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 begin to change as the next special symbol starts to change. Also, the reserved number display 703 of the first start port 121 switches to "0".
Next, as shown in FIG. 291 (29), the second eye-catching image 731 is displayed. At this time, the decorative symbol 700, the variable image 701, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of times image 708 become difficult or impossible to see for the player. Meanwhile, the reserved number display 703 and the small symbol 704 remain easily visible to the player. Also, at this time, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 121, a "1" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the first starting hole 121. Meanwhile, the reserved image 702 remains difficult or impossible to see for the player. Also, upon the game ball entering the first starting hole 121, the audio output device 9 outputs a winning sound to notify the player of the entry into the first starting hole 121. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound effect indicating the second eye-catching image 731 is displayed. That is, the sound output device 9 outputs the winning sound and the sound effect at the same time.

Next, as shown in Figure 291 (30), the second eye-catching image 731 is hidden, and the decorative pattern 700, variable image 701, execution count image 705, stage image 706, and remaining count image 708 become easily visible to the player. The stage image 706 shows a background corresponding to the first stage. Also, at this time, the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode. In other words, the reserved images 702 for each stage in the stage display presentation are not visible to the player, and the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode is easily visible to the player.

Next, after the three decorative symbols 700 temporarily stop, the special symbols stop fluctuating, and the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704, "412," stop for a certain period, as shown in Figure 292 (31). At this time, the display content of the number of games played image 705 is updated to "102 GAMES," and the display content of the remaining number of games reached image 708 is updated to "398 more."

As described above, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 121 while the second eye-catching image 731 is being displayed, the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode will not be visible to the player, and the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode will be easily visible to the player. In this way, by not allowing the player to see the change in display mode from the incomplete display mode of the reserved image 702, the reserved image 702 is prevented from drawing excessive attention from the player while the second eye-catching image 731 is being displayed, and the player can be made to notice that the stage is changing.
Furthermore, if a game ball enters the first start hole 121 while the second eye-catching image 731 is being displayed, a winning sound is output to notify the player of the entry into the first start hole 121. Therefore, even if the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode is not visible to the player, the player can be made to recognize that a game ball has entered the first start hole 121.

It has been explained that in the special time-saving game state, when the reserved image 702 is displayed in the normal display mode, the display mode of the reserved image 702 is the same regardless of the stage, but this is not limited to this. Even in the special time-saving game state, when the reserved image 702 is displayed in the normal display mode, the display mode of the reserved image 702 may differ depending on the stage.

(Step-by-step display effect using the square-shaped reserved image 702 in the normal display mode)
Next, a description will be given of a step-by-step display effect using the square-shaped reserved image 702 in the normal display mode. Fig. 293 is a diagram showing an example of a step-by-step display effect using the square-shaped reserved image 702 in the normal display mode.
The square-shaped reserved image 702 in the normal display mode performs a three-stage display effect. When a game ball enters the first starting hole 121, a highly transparent reserved image 702 is displayed in white as the first stage of the stage display effect, as shown in FIG. 293 (1). This reserved image 702 is rectangular and extends left and right. Furthermore, this reserved image 702 is displayed at a position above and away from the reserved base 702P. The display mode of the reserved image 702 in the first stage of the stage display effect is the display mode of the reserved image 702 shown in FIG. 290 (22) and FIG. 291 (25).

Next, as shown in Fig. 293 (2), in the second stage of the stage display effect, a square reserved image 702 with a lower transparency than the first stage is displayed in a square shape. This reserved image 702 has a larger display size than the first stage and is displayed in a position closer to the reserved base 702P than the first stage.
Next, as shown in FIG. 293 (3), in the third stage, i.e., the final stage, of the staged display effect, a reserved image 702 with lower transparency than the second stage is displayed. This reserved image 702 has a larger display size than the second stage and is displayed closer to the reserved base 702P than the second stage. The display mode of the reserved image 702 in the final stage of the staged display effect is the display mode of the reserved image 702 shown in FIG. 290 (23) and FIG. 291 (26). That is, although not shown, after the reserved image 702 in the first stage shown in FIG. 290 (22) and FIG. 291 (25) is displayed, the reserved image 702 in the second stage of the staged display effect is displayed, and then the reserved image 702 in the third stage of the staged display effect is displayed. Then, the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode shown in FIG. 290 (23) and FIG. 291 (26) is displayed.
In this embodiment, the time from when the step-by-step display performance starts to when the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode is displayed, i.e., the execution time of the step-by-step display performance using the reserved image 702 in the square-shaped normal display mode, is 0.2 seconds.

Furthermore, once the step-by-step display effect is completed, the motion effect of the reserved image 702 begins, as shown in Figure 293 (4). The square-shaped reserved image 702 in the normal display mode periodically rotates halfway clockwise and then halfway counterclockwise as a motion effect. The rotation period in this motion effect is, for example, 2.0 seconds.

(Example of variation 8)
Figures 294 to 296 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the first image display device 70.
Next, another specific example of the variable presentation (Variation Presentation Example 8) will be described with reference to Figures 294 to 296. Variation Presentation Example 8 is a variation presentation example of the decorative pattern 700 based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 122 in the special time-saving game state. Also, Variation Presentation Example 8 includes four variable presentations. Of these four variable presentations, the first to third variable presentations are variable presentations in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss. Also, of the four variable presentations, the fourth variable presentation is a variable presentation in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, as shown in Figure 294 (1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the decorative symbol 700 and small symbol 704 are fixed and stopped by the effect control unit 300 on the first image display device 70. At this time, three reserved images 702 are displayed in the normal display mode. At this time, the reserved number display 703 of the second starting port 122 shows "3." The number of executions image 705 shows the text "50 GAMES," and the remaining number of normal time-saving times image 726 shows the text "50 times." The stage image 706 shows a background corresponding to the fourth stage. The top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c are all in the second mode. Although not shown, background music corresponding to the previous variation effect continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in Figure 294 (2), the decorative pattern 700 and small pattern 704 begin to change as the next special pattern begins to change. The pending number display 703 in the second starting slot 122 also changes to "2." At this time, the remaining number of normal time reduction times image 726 is updated to "49 times."

Next, as the game ball enters the second starting hole 122, "3" is displayed on the reserve number display 703 of the second starting hole 122, as shown in Figure 294 (3). At this time, a step-by-step display effect begins, and a reserve image 702 is displayed on the third reserve base 702P. This third reserve image 702 shows a triangular portion and a lightning bolt mark. At this time, the audio output device 9 begins to output a winning sound to notify the player that the game ball has entered the second starting hole 122. This winning sound is different from any of the winning sounds described above.

Next, as shown in Figure 294 (4), the step-by-step display effect is completed, and a reserved image 702 in an expected color display mode is displayed on the third reserved base 702P. This third reserved image 702 consists of a triangular portion displayed in rainbow colors and a circular portion surrounding this triangle. This third reserved image 702 is the reserved image 702 that is displayed when the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot. Although not shown, once the step-by-step display effect is completed, the motion display of the third reserved image 702 begins. Furthermore, the winning sound that notifies of a win in the second starting hole 122 will no longer be output once a predetermined time has elapsed since the step-by-step display effect was completed. This predetermined time is, for example, 2.5 seconds.

Next, as the special symbols stop changing, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704, "412," are displayed together and fixed, as shown in Figure 294 (5). At this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "51 GAME." While not shown in the figure, background music corresponding to the currently executing change effect is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 294(6), the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 start to change as the next special symbol starts to change. Also, the reserved number display 703 in the second start port 122 changes to "2." Also, the display content of the remaining number of times for normal time reduction 726 is updated to "48 times."
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704, "721," are displayed together and fixed as shown in FIG. 295(7). At this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "52 GAMES."

Next, as shown in FIG. 295(8), the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 start to change as the next special symbol starts to change. Also, the reserved number display 703 in the second start port 122 switches to "1." Also, the display content of the remaining number of times for normal time reduction 726 is updated to "47 times."
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704, "563," are displayed together and fixed, as shown in FIG. 295(9). At this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "53 GAME."

Next, as shown in Figure 295 (10), as the display of the next special symbol begins to change, the decorative symbol 700 and small symbol 704 begin to change. The pending number display 703 in the second starting slot 122 also changes to "0." The remaining number of normal time reduction plays image 726 is updated to "46 plays." The first pending image 702 moves toward the play base 701P and expands, causing the rainbow-colored changing image 701 to be displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 295 (11), a reach prompting effect is executed. A reach prompting effect is an effect that suggests whether or not a reach effect will be executed. In the example shown, after the "7" that is the left decorative pattern 700 temporarily stops, the "7" that is the right decorative pattern 700 swings up and down to suggest whether or not a reach effect will be executed.

Next, as shown in Figure 295 (12), the right decorative symbol 700, "7", temporarily stops, and the reach effect begins. At this time, a sound effect indicating that the left and right decorative symbols 700, "7", have lined up is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in Figure 296 (13), the SP reach effect is executed. During the execution of the SP reach effect, the SP reach image 712 is displayed.
Next, the SPSP reach effect is executed as shown in Figure 296 (14). During the execution of the SPSP reach effect, an SPSP reach image 713 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 296 (15), a promotion effect is executed and a button operation image 714 is displayed.

When the player operates the effect button 17 while the button operation image 714 is displayed, a jackpot notification effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 296 (16). During this jackpot notification, a moving effect is executed and the second highlight image 718 is displayed. At this time, the decorative symbol 700, variable image 701, reserved image 702, execution count image 705, stage image 706, and remaining normal time reduction count image 726 remain difficult or impossible to see for the player. The reserved number display 703, small symbol 704, and second right-hit image 725 remain easily visible for the player. When the jackpot notification effect is executed, the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c all switch from the second mode to the seventh mode. In the illustrated example, the top lamp 10b lights up red, the board lamp 74b lights up orange, the movable member lamp 74c lights up yellow, and the button lamp 17c lights up green. Additionally, when the jackpot notification effect is being executed, the sound effect of the jackpot notification effect is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when the jackpot notification effect ends and the second emphasized image 718 disappears, the double-digit decorative pattern 700 "777" temporarily stops, as shown in Figure 296 (17). At this time, the execution count image 705 and the remaining normal time reduction count image 726 are displayed again. At this time, the top lamp 10b lights up orange, the board lamp 74b lights up yellow, the movable member lamp 74c lights up green, and the button lamp 17c lights up blue.

Then, as the special symbol stops changing, the decorative symbol 700 is fixed and stopped, as shown in Figure 296 (18). Furthermore, "777" is fixed and stopped as the small symbol 704. In other words, the display of the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 matches the combination of "777". At this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "54 GAMES". At this time, the top lamp 10b lights up yellow, the board lamp 74b lights up green, the movable member lamp 74c lights up blue, and the button lamp 17c lights up indigo.

Although not shown, the jackpot game is then executed in the same manner as in Variation Presentation Example 6. That is, an opening image 719 (see FIG. 282 (18)) is displayed, followed by a first right-hit image 720 and a promotion image 721 (see FIG. 283 (19)). After a predetermined time has passed, a round-in-progress image 722 and a round number image 723 (see FIG. 283 (20)) are displayed, and when the final round is completed, a special time-saving selection image 745 (see FIG. 283 (21)) is displayed, followed by a normal time-saving start image 724 (see FIG. 283 (22)). The number of remaining special symbol draws in the special time-saving game state becomes 100 (see FIG. 283 (23)).

(Step-by-step display effect using rainbow-colored reserved image 702)
Next, a description will be given of the gradual display effect using the rainbow-colored reserved image 702. FIG. 297 is a diagram showing the gradual display effect using the rainbow-colored reserved image 702.
The rainbow-colored reserved image 702 performs a four-stage display effect. When a game ball enters the second starting hole 122, as shown in FIG. 297(1), a low-transparency reserved image 702 is first displayed in white on the reserved base 702P as the first stage of the stage display effect. This reserved image 702 is triangular. Furthermore, in the first stage of the stage display effect, an action display is performed using the reserved image 702. More specifically, a lightning bolt mark is displayed as falling into the triangular portion of the reserved image 702. The display mode of the reserved image 702 in the first stage of the stage display effect is the display mode of the third reserved image 702 shown in FIG. 294(3).

Next, as shown in FIG. 297(2), as the second stage of the staged display effect, a new circular image with high transparency is displayed on the reserved image 702. This circular image is shown to surround the triangular portion of the reserved image 702.
Next, as shown in Figure 297 (3), as the third stage of the stage display performance, the circular image in the pending image 702 is displayed with a lower transparency than the second stage.
Next, as shown in FIG. 297(4), in the fourth stage, i.e., the final stage, of the staged display effect, the circular image in the reserved image 702 is displayed with a lower transparency than in the third stage. The display mode of the reserved image 702 in the final stage of the staged display effect is the display mode of the third reserved image 702 shown in FIG. 294(4). That is, although not shown, after the reserved image 702 in the first stage shown in FIG. 294(3) is displayed, the reserved image 702 in the second stage of the staged display effect is displayed, and then the reserved image 702 in the third stage of the staged display effect is displayed. Then, the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode shown in FIG. 294(4) is displayed.
In this way, as the stages in the step-by-step display performance progress, the transparency of only a portion of reserved image 702 may change. Such a change in the transparency of only a portion of reserved image 702 can also be considered a change in the form of reserved image 702. In this embodiment, the time from the start of this step-by-step display performance to the completion display state, i.e., the execution time of the step-by-step display performance using rainbow-colored reserved image 702, is 0.5 seconds.

Furthermore, when the stepwise display effect is completed, the motion effect of the reserved image 702 is started, as shown in FIG. 297 (5). The rainbow-colored reserved image 702 periodically rotates clockwise as a motion effect. The rotation period in this motion effect is, for example, 3.0 seconds. In other words, the period of the motion effect by the rainbow-colored reserved image 702 is longer than the period of the motion effect by the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode.
In the action representation using the rainbow-colored reserved image 702, the triangular portion may periodically rotate clockwise, and the circular portion may periodically rotate counterclockwise. In this case, the periods of the actions may be the same or different.

As described above, in this embodiment, the execution time of the step-by-step display effect of the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode is longer than the execution time of the step-by-step display effect of the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode. In this case, by making the player experience the sense of anticipation of the reserved image 702 with higher expectations than the normal display mode being displayed for a longer period of time, the player can be given a sense of excitement when the reserved image 702 with high expectations is displayed.

In this embodiment, the display mode of the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is described as differing depending on the stage. Here, the display mode of the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode may also differ depending on the stage, just like the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode. On the other hand, the display mode of the rainbow-colored reserved image 702 may be the same regardless of the stage. In this case, the gradual display effect of the rainbow-colored reserved image 702 may include an action display that is not performed in either the gradual display effect of the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode in each stage or the gradual display effect of the blue reserved image 702 in each stage (see FIG. 297(1)). In this case, the gradual display effect can make the player feel more strongly that the rainbow-colored reserved image 702 is rare.
Furthermore, the rainbow-colored reserved image 702 may have more stages in which the display mode changes in the step-by-step display presentation than the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode and the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode consisting of a specific color (blue, green, red, etc.).

(Example of variation 9)
298 to 303 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the first image display device 70.
Next, another specific example of the variable effects (Variation Effects Example 9) will be described with reference to Figures 298 to 303. Variation Effects Example 9 includes seven variable effects. The first of these seven variable effects is a variable effect based on a winning entry into the first start slot 121 in the normal game state. The second variable effect is a variable effect based on a winning entry into the first start slot 121 in the special time-saving game state. The third and fourth variable effects are variable effects based on a winning entry into the second start slot 122 in the special time-saving game state. The fifth to seventh variable effects are variable effects based on a winning entry of a game ball into the second start slot 122 in the normal game state.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, as shown in Figure 298 (1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 700 and small symbol 704 on the first image display device 70. At this time, four reserved images 702 are displayed. At this time, the reserved number display 703 of the first starting gate 121 shows "4." The number of times played image 705 shows the text "499 GAMES," and the remaining number of times reached image 708 shows the text "1 more." The stage image 706 shows a background corresponding to the first stage. The top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c are all in their second modes. Although not shown, background music corresponding to the previous variation effect continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in Figure 298 (2), the decorative pattern 700 and small pattern 704 begin to change as the next special pattern begins to change. Also, the pending number display 703 in the first starting slot 121 switches to "3." At this time, the countdown image 732, "1," is also displayed.

Next, as the special symbols stop varying, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704, "421," are displayed together and fixed, as shown in Figure 298 (3). At this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "500 GAMES," and the display content of the remaining number of times reached image 708 is updated to "0 remaining." In other words, the number of executed variation effects reaches the number of variation effects required to enter the special time-saving game state. As a result, the game state of the gaming machine 1, which was in the normal game state, is controlled to the special time-saving game state.

Next, as shown in Figure 298 (4), the decorative pattern 700 and small pattern 704 begin to change as the next special pattern begins to change. The pending number display 703 in the first starting slot 121 also changes to "2." At this time, the second right-hit image 725 is also displayed. At this time, the countdown image 732, "0," is also displayed.

Next, as the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, "3" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the first starting hole 121, as shown in Fig. 298 (5). At this time, a step-by-step display effect is started, and the reserved image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode at a position above and away from the third reserved pedestal 702P. At this time, the sound output device 9 starts to output a winning sound.
Next, as shown in Fig. 298 (6), the stage display effect is completed, and the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the third reserved pedestal 702P. Also, although not shown, when the stage display effect is completed, the motion effect of the reserved image 702 is started. Also, the winning sound is continuously output until the stage display effect is completed, and is no longer output when the stage display effect is completed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 299 (7), a special time-saving start image 733 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 299 (8), the display of the second transitional image 734 begins. More specifically, the second transitional image 734 is displayed by sliding from the right side to the left side of the first image display device 70, so that the second transitional image 734 is displayed in a portion of the display area of the first image display device 70. At this time, in the area of the first image display device 70 where the second transitional image 734 is not displayed, the left decorative symbol 700, which is rapidly changing, the third reserved image 702, the execution count image 705, and the remaining number of times to be reached image 708 remain visible or easily visible to the player. Furthermore, the portions of the second reserved image 702 and the stage image 706 that do not overlap with the second transitional image 734 are visible or easily visible to the player, while the portions that overlap with the second transitional image 734 are difficult or invisible to the player. Additionally, the middle decorative symbol 700, right decorative symbol 700, first reserved image 702, and variable image 701 become difficult or impossible to see for the player. Furthermore, in the area of the first image display device 70 where the second transition image 734 is displayed, the reserved number display 703, small symbol 704, and second right-hit image 725 remain easily visible for the player. At this time, the motion display using the second reserved image 702 and the third reserved image 702 is being executed, and the motion display of the second reserved image 702 and the third reserved image 702 becomes visible or easily visible for the player. The time from the start of the variable display until the second transition image 734 is displayed is, for example, 5 seconds.

Next, as shown in Figure 299 (9), the second transition image 734 is displayed across the entire first image display device 70. At this time, the left decorative pattern 700, the third reserved image 702, the second reserved image 702, the number of executions image 705, and the remaining number of times to be achieved image 708 also become difficult or impossible to see for the player. Also, at this time, as the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, a "4" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the first starting hole 121. On the other hand, the fourth reserved image 702 is difficult or impossible to see for the player. Also, at this time, the winning sound announcing the entry into the first starting hole 121 is not output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 299 (10), a special time-saving selection image 735 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the cursor is positioned on the "a" mode in the special time-saving selection image 735.
Next, as shown in FIG. 299(11), a mode start image 736 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 299 (12), the second transition image 734 and the mode start image 736 are hidden, and the decorative symbol 700 with a low decorativeness, "125," is temporarily displayed on the first image display device 70. At this time, the stage image 706 displays a background corresponding to the sixth stage. The sixth stage corresponds to the special time-saving game state. At this time, the third right-hit image 737 and the remaining number of special time-saving games image 738 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the remaining number of special time-saving games image 738 displays the text "749," indicating the remaining number of special symbol draws in the special time-saving game state. Furthermore, the reserved number display 703 of the first start slot 121 displays "4," and the reserved number display 703 of the second start slot 122 displays "0." Note that neither the variable image 701 nor the reserved image 702 is displayed. At this time, the audio output device 9 may output a sound such as "Please hit to the right" to encourage the player to shoot the game ball to the right side of the game area 5a.
The display period of the second transitional image 734 is, for example, 10 seconds.

Next, as the special symbols stop varying, three decorative symbols 700 are fixed and stopped, as shown in Figure 300 (13). The combination "125" of these decorative symbols 700 and small symbols 704 is an example of a combination that occurs when the special symbol lottery result is a losing one.

Next, when a gaming ball enters the second start opening 122, as shown in Figure 300 (14), the decorative pattern 700 and small pattern 704 begin to change as the special pattern begins to change. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 begins to change, and the small pattern 704 begins to change at high speed. At this time, the display content of the special time-saving remaining number of times image 738 is updated to "748." At this time, "1" is displayed in the hold number display 703 of the second start opening 122. At this time, the staged display of the hold image 702 begins. In the illustrated example, the hold image 702 is displayed in a small size at a position above and away from the first hold base 702P. At this time, as the gaming ball enters the second start opening 122, the audio output device 9 begins to output a winning sound announcing the entry into the second start opening 122.

Next, as shown in Figure 300 (15), the start-of-variation operation progresses. At this time, the step-by-step display performance is completed, and a trapezoidal reserved image 702 is displayed in the normal display mode on the first reserved base 702P. This reserved image 702 has a larger display size than the example shown in Figure 300 (14). This reserved image 702 is also in a display mode corresponding to the sixth stage. The winning sound that notifies the player of a winning entry into the second starting port 122 continues to be output until the step-by-step display performance is completed, and is no longer output once the step-by-step display performance is completed. Although not shown in the figure, once the step-by-step display performance is completed, the operation of the reserved image 702 begins.

Next, as shown in Figure 300 (16), the initial fluctuation operation ends, and the decorative pattern 700 fluctuates at a high speed. Furthermore, the pending image 702 moves to the fluctuation base 701P and expands, causing the fluctuating image 701 to be displayed. At this time, the pending number display 703 in the second start port 122 switches to "0."

Next, when a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 122, as shown in FIG. 300 (17), the reserve number display 703 of the second starting hole 122 displays "1." At this time, the reserve image 702 begins to be displayed in a gradual manner. In the example shown, the reserve image 702 is displayed in a small size at a position above and away from the first reserve base 702P. In addition, as the gaming ball enters the second starting hole 122, the sound output device 9 begins to output a winning sound.

Next, as shown in Figure 300 (18), the staged display performance is completed, and a trapezoidal reserved image 702 is displayed in the normal display mode on the first reserved base 702P. This reserved image 702 has a larger display size than the example shown in Figure 300 (17). The winning sound continues to be output until the staged display performance is completed, and is no longer output once the staged display performance is completed. Although not shown in the figure, once the staged display performance is completed, the motion performance of the reserved image 702 begins.

Next, as the special symbols stop varying, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704 "463" are displayed together and stopped as shown in Figure 301 (19).
In this way, each time a variable effect is executed in the special time-saving game state, the number of remaining times for special pattern lotteries in the special time-saving game state is reduced, and the value shown in the special time-saving remaining number image 738 is subtracted by one.

Then, when the 750th variable effect begins in the special time-saving game state, the decorative symbol 700 and small symbols are displayed changing at high speed, as shown in Figure 301 (20). At this time, the remaining number of special time-saving plays image 738 displays the text "0." The reserved number display 703 of the first starting port 121 displays "4," and the reserved number display 703 of the second starting port 122 displays "3." At this time, the variable image 701 and three reserved images 702 are displayed. The stage image 706 displays the background corresponding to the sixth stage.

Next, as the special symbols stop varying, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704, "254," are displayed together and fixed, as shown in FIG. 301 (21). At this time, the variable image 701 is no longer displayed. When the special symbols stop varying, the gaming state of the gaming machine 1, which was in the special time-saving gaming state, is controlled to the normal gaming state.
Next, as shown in FIG. 301 (22), the first transition image 728 is displayed. At this time, the decorative symbol 700, the reserved image 702, and the stage image 706 become difficult or impossible for the player to see. The second right-hit image 725 and the special time-saving remaining number image 738 are hidden. Meanwhile, the reserved number display 703 and the small symbol 704 remain easily visible to the player.

Next, as shown in FIG. 301 (23), the small symbol 704 begins to change as the next special symbol begins to change. This change is based on winning the second start slot 122 in normal game mode. Furthermore, the decorative symbol 700 is not displayed during this change. That is, during this change, a change effect is performed using the small symbol 704 without using the decorative symbol 700. Furthermore, during this change, the change image 701 and the reserved image 702 are not displayed. At this time, the reserved number display 703 of the second start slot 122 switches to "2." At this time, the result image 729 (see FIG. 289 (13)) is not displayed.
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, three small symbols 704 are displayed together and fixed as shown in Figure 302 (24). The combination of small symbols 704, "755," is an example of a combination that occurs when the special symbol lottery result is a losing one.

Next, as shown in FIG. 302 (25), the small symbol 704 starts to change as the next special symbol starts to change. Also, the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 122 switches to "1."
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, three small symbols 704 are displayed together and fixed as shown in Figure 302 (26). The combination of small symbols 704, "127," is an example of a combination that occurs when the special symbol lottery result is a losing one.

Next, as shown in FIG. 302 (27), the small symbol 704 starts to change as the next special symbol starts to change. Also, the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 122 switches to "0".
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, three small symbols 704, "421", are displayed together and are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 302 (28).

When the variable effect based on winning at the second starting gate 122 ends without any pending wins based on winning at the second starting gate 122, the highly decorative decorative pattern 700 "421" is fixed and stopped on the first image display device 70, as shown in Figure 302 (29). In other words, the combination of decorative patterns 700 matches the combination of small patterns 704. At this time, the background corresponding to the fifth stage is displayed as the stage image 706. At this time, the execution count image 705 and the left hit image 730 are also displayed. The execution count image 705 displays the text "1253 GAME," which includes the total number of variable effects performed since the number of variable display of the special symbol was reset: 500, which is the number of variable effects based on winning the first start slot 121 in the normal game state; 1, which is the number of variable effects based on winning the first start slot 121 in the special time-saving game state; 749, which is the number of variable effects based on winning the second start slot 122 in the special time-saving game state; and 3, which is the number of variable effects based on winning the second start slot 122 in the normal game state. Also, four reserved images 702 are displayed at this time. These four reserved images 702 include the three reserved images 702 (see FIG. 298(3)) that were displayed immediately before the gaming machine 1 was controlled to the special time-saving game state. Although not shown, all four reserved images 702 are performing action effects. On the other hand, the variable image 701 is not displayed. At this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a voice message saying, "Please return to left-handed hitting."

Next, as the display of the special symbol begins to change, the decorative symbol 700 and small symbol 704 begin to change, as shown in FIG. 303 (30). At this time, the hold number display 703 of the first starting port 121 switches to "3." At this time, the second hold image 702, the third hold image 702, and the fourth hold image 702 move toward the first hold base 702P, the second hold base 702P, and the third hold base 702P, respectively. As the first hold image 702 moves toward the variable base 701P and expands, the variable image 701 is displayed. While not shown, after that, as the special symbol stops changing, the decorative symbol 700 and small symbol 704 are fixed and stopped, and the variable image 701 is no longer displayed.
In this way, when the gaming machine 1 that was in the normal gaming state is controlled to the special time-shortened gaming state and then controlled to the normal gaming state again, the reserved image 702 (see Figure 298 (4)) that was displayed when it was controlled to the special time-shortened gaming state is re-displayed when it is controlled to the normal gaming state again.

In addition, in variation effect example 9, it was explained that the second transition image 734 is displayed during the high-speed variation (scrolling) of the decorative pattern 700 during the first variation effect in the special time-shortened game state, but this is not limited to this. For example, the second transition image 734 may be displayed when the first variation effect in the special time-shortened game state begins. Also, the second transition image 734 may be displayed immediately before the special time-shortened game state, that is, when the final variation effect in the normal game state stops. In this case, the time from when the second transition image 734 is displayed until the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-shortened game state is, for example, 10 seconds.

Also, in the variation performance example 9, it was explained that the result image 729 (see Figure 289 (13)) is not displayed when the first transition image 728 is displayed, but this is not limited to this.
Even when the result of the special symbol lottery does not result in a jackpot in the special time-shortened game state and the game state shifts to the normal game state, the result image 729 may be displayed when the first transition image 728 is displayed.

(Step-by-step display effect using the trapezoidal reserved image 702 in the normal display mode)
Next, a description will be given of a step-by-step display effect using the trapezoidal reserved image 702 in the normal display mode. Fig. 304 is a diagram showing an example of a step-by-step display effect using the trapezoidal reserved image 702 in the normal display mode.
The trapezoidal reserved image 702 in the normal display mode performs a four-stage display effect. When a game ball enters the second starting hole 122, as shown in FIG. 304(1), a highly transparent reserved image 702 is displayed in white at a position above and away from the reserved base 702P as the first stage of the stage display effect. This reserved image 702 is square-shaped. The display mode of the reserved image 702 in the first stage of the stage display effect is the display mode of the reserved image 702 shown in FIG. 300(14) and FIG. 300(17).

Next, as shown in FIG. 304(2), a reserved image 702 with a lower transparency than the second stage is displayed as the second stage of the stage display effect. This reserved image 702 is trapezoidal. Furthermore, this reserved image 702 has a larger display size than the first stage and is displayed closer to the reserved base 702P than the first stage.
Next, as shown in Fig. 304 (3), as the third stage of the stage display effect, a reserved image 702 with a lower transparency than the second stage is displayed. This reserved image 702 has a larger display size than the second stage, and is displayed at a position closer to the reserved base 702P than the second stage.

Next, as shown in FIG. 304(4), a reserved image 702 with lower transparency than the third stage is displayed as the fourth stage, i.e., the final stage, of the staged display effect. This reserved image 702 has a larger display size than the third stage and is displayed closer to the reserved base 702P than the third stage. The display mode of the reserved image 702 in the final stage of the staged display effect is the display mode of the reserved image 702 shown in FIG. 300(15) and FIG. 300(18). That is, although not shown, after the reserved image 702 in the first stage shown in FIG. 300(14) and FIG. 300(17) is displayed, the reserved image 702 in the second stage of the staged display effect is displayed, and then the reserved image 702 in the third stage of the staged display effect is displayed. Then, the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode shown in FIG. 300(15) and FIG. 300(18) is displayed.
In this embodiment, the time from when the step-by-step display performance starts until the pending image 702 in the completed display mode is displayed, i.e., the execution time of the step-by-step display performance using the pending image 702 in the trapezoidal normal display mode, is 0.2 seconds.

Furthermore, once the step-by-step display effect is completed, the motion effect of the reserved base 702 begins, as shown in Figure 304 (5). The trapezoidal reserved image 702 in the normal display mode periodically moves left and right as a motion effect. The cycle of left and right movement in this motion effect is, for example, 2.0 seconds. In other words, the cycle of the motion effect by the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode in the special time-saving game state is the same as the cycle of the motion effect by the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode in the special time-saving game state, and the cycle of the motion effect by the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode in the normal game state.

Figure 305 is an explanatory diagram of each effect in variable effect example 9.
As shown in FIG. 305, at time T1 in the variation effect example 9, the first variation effect in the special time-saving game state begins. At this time, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 have begun to vary, and the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 are easily visible to the player. At this time, the variable image 701 and the two reserved images 702 are performing action effects, and the variable image 701 and the two reserved images 702 are easily visible to the player. At this time, the stage image 706 shows a background corresponding to the first stage. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the second mode. At this time, background music corresponding to the currently executing variation effect is being output from the audio output device 9. The state at time T1 is the state shown in FIG. 298 (4).

After that, at time T2, the game ball enters the first starting hole 121.
Then, at time T3, the third reserved image 702 is displayed in the display mode of the first stage of the stage display effect, and the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode becomes visible or easily visible to the player. At this time, the sound output device 9 starts to output a winning sound to notify the player of a winning at the first starting hole 121. The state at time T3 is the state shown in FIG. 298 (5).
Thereafter, the staged display effect by the third reserved image 702 progresses, and at time T4, the staged display effect ends, and the third reserved image 702 is displayed in a completed display mode. At this time, the action effect by the third reserved image 702 also starts. The state at time T4 is the state shown in FIG. 298 (6).
After that, at time T5, the winning sound announcing the winning of the first starting hole 121 is no longer output from the audio output device 9.

Thereafter, the gaming machine 1 is controlled to a special time-saving gaming state, and at time T6, the display of the second transition image 734 begins.
Subsequently, when the display area of the second transitional image 734 on the first display device 70 becomes larger, at time T7, the left decorative pattern 700 becomes visible or easily visible to the player, while the middle decorative pattern 700 and the right decorative pattern 700 become difficult or invisible to the player. At this time, the variable image 701 becomes difficult or invisible to the player. At this time, the third reserved image 702 becomes visible or easily visible to the player. At this time, a portion of the second reserved image 702 becomes visible or easily visible to the player, while another portion of the second reserved image 702 becomes difficult or invisible to the player. At this time, the first reserved image 702 becomes difficult or invisible to the player. At this time, a portion of the stage image 706 is visible or easily visible to the player, while another portion of the stage image 706 is difficult or impossible to see by the player. The state at time T7 is the state shown in FIG. 299 (8).

After that, when the second transition image 734 is displayed across the entire first display device 70, at time T8, the three decorative patterns 700 become difficult or impossible to see for the player. At this time, the variable image 701 is hidden. At this time, all three reserved images 702 become difficult or impossible to see for the player. At this time, the entire stage image 706 becomes difficult or impossible to see for the player. The state at time T8 is the state shown in Figure 299 (9).

Then, at time T9, when the second transition image 734 is no longer displayed, the three decorative symbols 700 are temporarily stopped, and the three decorative symbols 700 are easily visible to the player. Also, the stage image 706 shows a background corresponding to the sixth stage. The state at time T9 is the state shown in FIG. 299 (12).
At time T10, the first variable effect in the special time-saving game state ends. At this time, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 are fixed and stopped. The state at time T10 is the state shown in FIG. 300 (13).

Thereafter, when the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the normal gaming state, at time T11, the first transition image 728 is hidden and the four reserved images 702 are easily visible. These four reserved images 702 include the reserved images 702 that were difficult to see or impossible to see at time T8. At this time, the reserved images 702 perform an action presentation. The state at time T11 is the state shown in FIG. 302 (29).
After that, at time T12, the next variable effect starts. The state at time T12 is the state shown in FIG. 303 (30).

As described above, in this embodiment, the main control board 110 can be controlled between a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode. An example of the first mode is the normal game mode. An example of the second mode is the special time-saving game mode. In this embodiment, when the first variable effect in the second mode is started while the reserved image 702 is displayed, the effect control board 130 makes the motion display of the reserved image 702 difficult to see or invisible before making it easy to see, and makes the motion display of the decorative pattern 700 difficult to see or invisible before making it easy to see. An example of the motion display of the reserved image 702 is the motion display in the motion effect. An example of the motion display of the decorative pattern 700 is the motion display of a variable effect or a temporary stop motion display.
In this case, after the start of the first variable effect in the special time-saving game state, the effect of the reserved image 702 that was being executed before the start of the first variable effect is prevented from still being noticed by the player, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice the movement display of the decorative pattern 700 that is unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can execute highly entertaining effects.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the first variable performance in the second mode is started while the pending image 702 is being displayed, the performance control board 130 can make the pending image 702 difficult to see or impossible to see after the start of the first variable performance, and start the next variable performance after the first variable performance before the pending image 702 becomes easily visible.
In this case, when the next variation effect after the first variation effect in the special time-saving game state starts, the effect of the reserved image 702 that was being executed before the start of the first variation effect is prevented from still being focused on by the player, making it easier for the player to focus on the variation effect unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can execute highly entertaining effects.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the first variable performance in the second mode is started while the pending image 702 is being displayed, the performance control board 130 makes the pending image 702 difficult to see or impossible to see and then does not make it easy to see in the first variable performance, and makes the decorative pattern 700 difficult to see or impossible to see and then makes it easy to see.
In this case, after the start of the first variable effect in the special time-saving game state, the effect of the reserved image 702 that was being executed before the start of the first variable effect is prevented from still being noticed by the player, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice the effect using the decorative pattern 700 that is unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can execute highly entertaining effects.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the first variable performance in the second mode is started while the reserved image 702 is being displayed, the performance control board 130 does not make the small pattern 704 difficult or impossible to see in the first variable performance, but makes the reserved image 702 difficult or impossible to see.
In this case, even when the first variable effect in the special time-saving game state starts, it is possible to prevent the player from still focusing on the effect of the reserved image 702 that was being executed before the start of the first variable effect. On the other hand, since the small symbol 704 continues to be visible or easily visible, the player is made aware that the variable effect is continuing even when the reserved image 702 becomes difficult or impossible to see, making it easier for the player to focus on the variable effect unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can execute highly entertaining effects.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the first variation effect in the second mode is started while the reserved image 702 is displayed, the effect control board 130 makes the reserved image 702 difficult to see or impossible to see in the first variation effect, and does not make it easy to see, and when a special effect is executed while the reserved image 702 is displayed, makes the reserved image 702 difficult to see or impossible to see, and then makes it easy to see. Examples of special effects include an SP reach effect and an SPSP reach effect.
In this case, even when the first variable effect in the special time-saving game state starts, the effect of the reserved image 702 that had been executed before the start of the first variable effect can still be prevented from drawing the player's attention. On the other hand, when a special effect is executed, the first image display device 70 can execute an effect unique to the special effect using a wide display area including the display area of the reserved image 702, and by making the reserved image 702 easily visible again, the player can be made to recognize that the right to determine a jackpot has not been lost. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining effects can be provided.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the first variable performance in the second mode is started while the reserved image 702 and the variable image 701 are displayed, the performance control board 130 makes the reserved image 702 and the variable image 701 difficult to see or impossible to see in the first variable performance, and then does not make either of them easy to see; when a special performance is executed while the reserved image 702 and the variable image 701 are displayed, the performance control board 130 makes the reserved image 702 and the variable image 701 difficult to see or impossible to see, and then makes both of the reserved image 702 and the variable image 701 easy to see.
In this case, even when the first variable effect in the special time-saving game state starts, the effect of the reserved image 702 that had been executed before the start of the first variable effect can still be prevented from drawing the player's attention. On the other hand, when a special effect is executed, the first image display device 70 can execute an effect unique to the special effect using a wide display area including the display areas of the variable image 701 and the reserved image 702. Furthermore, by making the reserved image 702 easily visible again, the player can be made to recognize that the right to determine a jackpot has not been lost. Furthermore, by making the variable image 701 easily visible again, the player can be made to recognize that the next variable effect has not started when the variable image 701 and the reserved image 702 become difficult or impossible to see. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining effects can be provided.

Furthermore, once the display of the second transitional image 734 begins, the display area of the second transitional image 734 gradually increases over time, so that some of the multiple reserved images 702 are easily visible to the player, while others are not. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the display switches from a state in which the second transitional image 734 is not displayed to a state in which the second transitional image 734 is displayed over the entire first image display device 70, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that a reserved image 702 was present, while minimizing the sense of incongruity caused by the stage image 706 becoming hidden.

Furthermore, when the second transition image 734 is displayed in a portion of the display area of the first image display device 70, a portion of one reserved image 702 is visible to the player, and another portion of this one reserved image 702 is not visible to the player (see Figure 299 (8)).In this state, an action presentation is performed using this one reserved image 702.
In this case, even if only a portion of the reserved image 702 is visible to the player, it is possible to make the player more aware of the existence of the reserved image 702.

Furthermore, if a game ball enters the first start hole 121 while the second transition image 734 is being displayed, the reserved image 702 is difficult or impossible for the player to see, and no winning sound is output to notify the player of the entry into the first start hole 121. Therefore, in a special time-saving game state in which a game ball is more likely to enter the second start hole 122, the player is prevented from becoming overly aware that a game ball has entered the first start hole 121, and the player can be made to focus on the effects unique to the special time-saving game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, suggestive effects (such as displaying the execution count image 705, the remaining number of times reached image 708, and the countdown image 732) can be executed to indicate when a special time-saving game state may occur, and in the event of a jackpot, suggestive effects (such as pre-reading effects or jackpot advance effects, such as displaying the rainbow-colored reserve image 702) that confirm a jackpot in advance can be executed. However, in the event of a special time-saving game state, suggestive effects (pre-reading effects) that confirm a special time-saving game state in advance (more than two fluctuations in advance) are not executed. This prevents the inconvenience of a special time-saving game state not occurring despite the execution of a suggestive effect that confirms a special time-saving game state, while also increasing the enjoyment of the game through the confirmation of a jackpot.

In addition, it is possible to execute a specific suggestive effect (display of countdown image 732) that indicates a time when a special time-saving gaming state may occur, and during the first period of the normal gaming state (before the countdown image 732 begins to be displayed), the probability of executing a suggestive effect that guarantees a jackpot (such as displaying the rainbow-colored hold image 702) is higher than the probability of executing the specific suggestive effect, and during the second period of the normal gaming state (after the countdown image 732 begins to be displayed), the probability of executing the specific suggestive effect is higher than the probability of executing a suggestive effect that guarantees a jackpot. Here, "the probability of executing a suggestive effect that guarantees a jackpot is higher than the probability of executing a specific suggestive effect" includes the case where a specific suggestive effect is not executed (0%). Furthermore, "the probability of executing a specific suggestive effect is higher than the probability of executing a suggestive effect that guarantees a jackpot" also includes the case where a specific suggestive effect is always executed (100%).

In variable presentation example 9, when the gaming machine 1 is controlled from a special time-shortened play state to a normal play state, it is set to the fifth stage, the same as when the gaming machine 1 is controlled from a special time-shortened play state to a normal play state. However, this is not limited to this. When the gaming machine 1 is controlled from a special time-shortened play state to a normal play state, it may be controlled to the first stage. In other words, it is possible to set multiple presentation modes, and it is possible to differentiate the presentation mode set based on the end of the special time-shortened play state from the presentation mode set based on the end of the special time-shortened play state. In this case, by increasing the presentation variations at the end of the time-shortened play state depending on the type of time-shortened play, it is possible to improve the presentation effect and increase the enjoyment of the game.

Also, as described above, when either the special time-saving game state or the special time-saving game state ends, after the end, the game mode transitions to a dedicated mode (fifth stage) and then to the normal mode (first stage).
When the gaming machine 1 is controlled from a special time-shortened gaming state to a normal gaming state, even when it is controlled to the first stage, the left-hit image 730 may be displayed in the same display position as when it is controlled to the fifth stage. In other words, the left-hit notification when the game machine 1 transitions from either the special time-shortened gaming state or the special time-shortened gaming state to the dedicated mode (fifth stage) after the end of the special time-shortened gaming state, and the left-hit notification when the game machine 1 transitions from either the special time-shortened gaming state or the special time-shortened gaming state to the normal mode (first stage) are executed in the same notification manner.
When the special time-saving game state ends, the result display (display of result image 729) is executed and then the game transitions to a dedicated mode (5th stage) after the end, and when the special time-saving game state ends, the result display is not executed and the game transitions to the normal mode (1st stage).
It has also been explained that the special time-saving game state can be terminated (transitioned to the normal game state) when the number of variable times reaches a predetermined number or when the number of small wins reaches a predetermined number (including one). Here, the special time-saving game state may also be terminated (transitioned to the normal game state) when the number of small wins reaches a predetermined number (including one). Furthermore, when the special time-saving game state is controlled to the normal game state based on the number of variable times reaching a predetermined number, a transition to the fifth stage may occur, and when the special time-saving game state is controlled to the normal game state based on the number of small wins reaching a predetermined number, a transition to the first stage may occur. In other words, the transition to different presentation modes may occur when the special time-saving game state ends with the number of time-saving times and when the special time-saving game state ends with the number of small wins.

Furthermore, in both cases where the gaming machine 1 is controlled from the special time-shortened gaming state to the normal gaming state and where the gaming machine 1 is controlled from the special time-shortened gaming state to the normal gaming state, the left-hit image 730 is displayed after the end of the variable effect based on the reserved (remaining reserved) ball for winning at the second starting port 122. However, this is not limited to this. When the gaming machine 1 is controlled from the special time-shortened gaming state to the normal gaming state, the left-hit image 730 may be displayed even before the end of the variable effect based on the reserved (remaining reserved) ball for winning at the second starting port 122. In other words, when the first time-shortened gaming state (e.g., the special time-shortened gaming state) ends, a predetermined left-hit notification (display of the left-hit image 730 and audio notification of left-hit) can be executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the end of the time-shortened gaming state (when the remaining reserved ball is consumed). When the second time-shortened gaming state (the special time-shortened gaming state) ends, a predetermined left-hit notification (display of the left-hit image 730 and audio notification of left-hit) can be executed before a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the end of the time-shortened gaming state (when the remaining reserved ball is consumed). In this case, by changing the timing of the left-hit notification depending on the type of time reduction, it is possible to vary the gameplay and increase the interest in the game.
In addition, when the gaming machine 1 is controlled from a special time-saving gaming state to a normal gaming state, the left-hit image 730 may be displayed even before the end of the variable presentation based on the reservation (remaining reservation) for winning at the second starting port 122.

Furthermore, when the gaming machine 1 is controlled from the time-shortened gaming state to the normal gaming state, if the left-hit image 730 is displayed from the time the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the normal gaming state until the end of the variable presentation based on the reservation (remaining reservation) for the winning entry into the second starting port 122, the display period of the left-hit image 730 differs depending on the number of times the variable presentation based on the reservation (remaining reservation) for the winning entry into the second starting port 122 is executed. In other words, when either the special time-shortened gaming state or the special time-shortened gaming state ends, the length of the predetermined period for the left-hit notification changes (changes according to the number of remaining reservations).
Furthermore, when either the special time-saving game state or the special time-saving game state ends, a left-hit notification may be issued even if the state after the end is a customer waiting state. Furthermore, when either the special time-saving game state or the special time-saving game state ends, execution of a left-hit notification may be put on hold when the state after the end is a customer waiting state, and a left-hit notification may be issued when the variable display starts.
In addition, the left-hit notification after the end of the special time-saving game state and the left-hit notification after the end of the special time-saving game state may be executed in the same notification mode (notification image, notification period).

Furthermore, consider a configuration in which, when the gaming machine 1 is controlled from the special time-shortened gaming state to the normal gaming state, the left-hit image 730 is displayed after the end of the variation effect based on the reserve (remaining reserve) for a win in the second starting port 122, and when the gaming machine 1 is controlled from the special time-shortened gaming state to the normal gaming state, the left-hit image 730 is displayed at the time of control to the normal gaming state (the time when the final variation in the special time-shortened gaming state stops). In this case, when the gaming machine 1 is controlled from the special time-shortened gaming state to the normal gaming state, the display timing of the left-hit image 730 differs depending on the number of remaining reserves, whereas when the gaming machine 1 is controlled from the special time-shortened gaming state to the normal gaming state, the display timing of the left-hit image 730 does not change. In other words, when the first time-saving mode (for example, a special time-saving game state) ends, a predetermined left-hit notification (display of left-hit image 730 and audio notification of left-hit) can be executed at one of multiple timings (timings corresponding to the number of remaining reserved balls), and when the second time-saving mode (for example, a special time-saving game state) ends, a predetermined left-hit notification (display of left-hit image 730 and audio notification of left-hit) can be executed at timing 1 (immediately after the pause time has elapsed). Therefore, by changing the timing of the left-hit notification depending on the type of time-saving mode, it is possible to vary the gameplay and increase the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, when either the special time-saving game state or the special time-saving game state ends, the timing of the execution of the left-hand hit notification does not change depending on the number of remaining reserves for winning into the first start port 121 at the end of the time-saving, but changes depending on the number of remaining reserves for winning into the second start port 122 at the end of the time-saving.
Furthermore, the left-hand hit notification when either the special time-shortened game state or the special time-shortened game state ends is executed in the same notification mode regardless of the timing of execution.
In addition, the left-hand hit notification after the special time-shortened game state ends and the left-hand hit notification after the special time-shortened game state ends are executed in the same notification mode.

In addition, when the time-saving feature (for example, a special time-saving game state) ends, a predetermined left-hit notification (display of left-hit image 730, audio notification of left-hit) can be executed after a predetermined period of time has passed since the end of the time-saving feature (consumer of remaining reserves), and from the time the time-saving feature ends until the predetermined left-hit notification is executed, the execution of predetermined preview effects (prediction preview effects, jackpot preview effects) corresponding to the normal game state is restricted. This allows players to bask in the afterglow of the end of the advantageous period, making it possible to increase their interest in the game.

In addition, it can be set to multiple presentation modes (stages, modes that allow for pre-reading presentations), and when the time-saving feature (for example, a special time-saving game state) ends, a predetermined left-hit notification (display of left-hit image 730, audio notification of left-hit) can be executed after a predetermined period of time has passed since the end of the time-saving feature (consumer of remaining reserves), and during the period from the end of the time-saving feature until the execution of the predetermined left-hit notification, it is restricted from setting a predetermined presentation mode (a specific stage such as the first stage, a mode that allows for pre-reading presentations). This allows the player to bask in the afterglow of the end of the advantageous period, making it possible to increase interest in the game.

Furthermore, when the gaming machine 1 is controlled from a time-saving gaming state (special time-saving gaming state, special time-saving gaming state) to a normal gaming state, consider a configuration in which the left-hit image 730 is displayed after the variable effect based on the reserve (remaining reserve) for winning at the second starting port 122 has ended. In this case, the number of variable effects executed before the left-hit image 730 is displayed varies depending on the number of remaining reserves. In other words, when either the special time-saving gaming state or the special time-saving gaming state ends, the number of variable displays before the left-hit notification is made changes.

Furthermore, when the specified number of times is reached (when entering a special time-saving gaming state), a first predetermined image (second transition image 734, etc.) appears, the decorative pattern 700 is hidden, and then the decorative pattern 700 appears again, in a first effect. Furthermore, in a normal state other than the specified number of times, in the case of a miss variation, a second predetermined image (first front image 707, second front image 709, etc.) appears while the pattern is varying, the decorative pattern 700 is hidden (making it difficult or impossible to see), and then the decorative pattern 700 appears again, in a second effect. Then, when the first effect is performed, the game transitions to a special time-saving gaming state.
In this case, by displaying a first predetermined image and hiding the symbols when the specified number of times is reached, the player can anticipate a transition to a special mode (special time-saving game state), thereby increasing the interest. Also, by displaying a different second predetermined image and hiding the symbols even when the specified number of times is not reached, the player can anticipate a special effect (jackpot). By suddenly hiding the symbols, an element of surprise is created, making the player excited. Although the common event of hiding the symbols occurs, it develops into a different effect and state. This makes it possible to diversify the variations in the effects, thereby increasing the interest.

Furthermore, the small pattern 704 (including the variation notification LED 59) continues to be displayed while the first predetermined image and the second predetermined image are being displayed.
In this case, even when the decorative pattern 700 is hidden, the small pattern 704 is displayed, so that the changing state of the special pattern can be confirmed.

Furthermore, the display time of the first predetermined image is different from the display time of the second predetermined image. More specifically, the display time of the first predetermined image is longer than the display time of the second predetermined image.
In this case, by extending the display time of the first predetermined image, it is possible to impress upon the player the special effects that occur when entering the special time-saving game state, and to heighten the player's expectations, and by shortening the display time of the second predetermined image, it is possible to prevent the player from having excessive expectations.

In addition, the first predetermined image appears when the decorative pattern 700 starts to change or stops changing, and the second predetermined image appears while the decorative pattern is being scrolled.
In this case, by making the first predetermined image appear at the timing of the start or stop of the change of the decorative pattern 700, it is possible to ensure sufficient time to display the first predetermined image even if the change time is short. Also, by making the second predetermined image appear while the decorative pattern 700 is being scrolled, it is possible to increase the interest during scrolling.

Furthermore, when the first presentation is performed, the presentation mode is switched from the first presentation mode (for example, the first stage, normal game state) to the second presentation mode (the sixth stage, special time-shortened game state), but is not switched to the second presentation mode even when the second presentation is performed.
In this case, since the execution of the first effect switches the effect mode, it is possible to give special value to the first effect and increase interest. The execution of the first effect allows for smooth switching of the effect mode.

In addition, when the first effect is performed, a right-hit notification is made, but even when the second effect is performed, a right-hit notification is not made.
In this case, the right-hit notification is made when the first effect is executed, so the right-hit can be prepared by the first effect.

Also, there are times when the first predetermined image and the decorative pattern 700 are displayed simultaneously, and there are times when the second predetermined image and the decorative pattern 700 are displayed simultaneously.
In this case, the decorative pattern 700 gradually disappears and gradually reappears, allowing the screen to be switched smoothly and without any sense of incongruity.

Furthermore, the second effect is not executed in the time-saving game state. That is, the execution rate of the second effect is higher in the first game state (normal game state) than in the second game state (time-saving game state). In this case, since the second effect is executed with a relatively high probability in the normal game state, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored. Furthermore, since the execution probability of the second effect is low in the time-saving game state, it is possible to repeat fluctuations one after another until a fluctuation with a high expectation is reached without performing unnecessary effects.
If the execution rate of the second effect is higher in the normal game state than in the time-shortened game state, the second effect may be executed in the time-shortened game state.

Furthermore, suggestive effects suggesting the first effect (display of the execution count image 705, display of the remaining number of times reached image 708, and display of the countdown image 732) can be executed, and the execution probability of the suggestive effects is higher than the execution probability of the effect suggesting the second effect. Note that "the execution probability of the suggestive effects is higher than the execution probability of the effect suggesting the second effect" also includes the case where the effect suggesting the second effect is not executed (0%).
In this case, when the first effect is executed, a suggestive effect is executed, which can heighten expectations for the first effect. Also, when the second effect is executed, an effect suggesting the second effect is unlikely to be executed, which can prevent excessive effects and prevent excessive expectations from being generated.

Furthermore, the appearance of the decorative pattern 700 differs before and after the first predetermined image appears (before and after entering the special time-shortening game state).
In addition, in variable performance example 9, the first predetermined image was displayed in a variable performance in which the result of the special pattern lottery was a miss and a reach performance was not executed. Here, the first predetermined image does not have to be displayed in a variable performance in which the result of the special pattern lottery was a jackpot or a reach performance was executed. Also, the first predetermined image may be displayed even in a variable performance in which the result of the special pattern lottery was a jackpot or a reach performance was executed.

In addition, in the variable presentation example 4, the first eye-catching image 715 is displayed. Here, the first eye-catching image 715 does not have to be displayed in the time-saving game state. That is, when the predetermined number of times is reached (when the special time-saving game state is entered), a first presentation is performed in which a first predetermined image (such as the second transition image 734) appears, the decorative pattern 700 is hidden, and the decorative pattern 700 appears again. Furthermore, in the normal game state other than the predetermined number of times, after the SP reach presentation is performed, a second presentation is performed in which a second predetermined image (the first eye-catching image 715) appears, the decorative pattern 700 is hidden, and the first eye-catching image 715 appears again. The execution rate of the second presentation is higher in the normal game state than in the time-saving game state.
In this case, when the specified number of times is reached, the first predetermined image is displayed and the decorative symbol 700 is hidden, making the player look forward to a transition to a special mode (special time-saving game state), thereby increasing the interest. Also, even if the specified number of times is not reached, the second predetermined image is displayed and the decorative symbol 700 is hidden when the reach is missed, thereby reducing disappointment when the reach is missed.
If the execution rate of the second effect is higher in the normal game state than in the time-shortened game state, the second effect may be executed in the time-shortened game state.

Furthermore, even when a predetermined condition (reaching a predetermined number of times) is satisfied, if a reach fluctuation pattern is selected, the first eye-catching image 715 may be displayed. That is, if a reach fluctuation pattern is selected in the fluctuation of the predetermined number of times, a reach effect is performed according to the reach fluctuation pattern, and the reach is missed and the second predetermined image is displayed.
In this case, even if a predetermined condition is satisfied (a predetermined number of fluctuations), if a reach fluctuation pattern is selected, the second predetermined image is displayed, thereby reducing disappointment when the reach is missed.

Also, a specific performance (reach performance) can be executed, and when it is determined that there is a loss, the specific performance is executed and then a second predetermined image is displayed to stop the loss symbol, and when it is determined that there is a big win, the specific performance is executed and then the big win symbol is stopped without displaying the second predetermined image.
In this case, in the case of a big win, the player can be satisfied by immediately displaying the decorative pattern 700 of the same digits, and in the case of a loss, the second predetermined image is displayed to reduce the player's disappointment and give the player hope that the game may develop into another performance.

Although it has been described that the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the second mode when the second transition image 734 is displayed, when the first eye-catching image 715 is displayed, and in the special time-saving game state, this is not limiting. The light-emitting modes of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c may be different when the second transition image 734 is displayed, when the first eye-catching image 715 is displayed, and in the special time-saving game state. That is, the lamps emit light in a first specific mode while the first predetermined image is displayed, the lamps emit light in a second specific mode while the second predetermined image is displayed, and the lamps emit light in a third specific mode during the second game state (special time-saving game state).
In this case, it is possible to determine whether or not the time-saving mode will be entered based on the light emission mode of the lamp.

The first predetermined image appears at a first time from the start of the fluctuation, and the second predetermined image appears at a second time from the start of the fluctuation, which is longer than the first time.
In this case, the first predetermined image appears in a short time after the symbol starts to change, so it can be displayed even if the time it takes for the specified number of changes is short. Also, the second predetermined image appears after a relatively long time has passed since the symbol starts to change, so it can heighten the player's expectations.

(Variation example 10)
Figures 306 to 309 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the first image display device 70.
Next, another specific example of the variable effects (variable effect example 10) will be described with reference to Figures 306 to 309. Variable effect example 10 includes three variable effects. The first of these three variable effects is a variable effect based on winning at the first start port 121 in the normal gaming state. The second of the three variable effects is a variable effect based on winning at the first start port 121 in the special time-saving gaming state. The third of the three variable effects is a variable effect based on winning at the second start port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, as shown in Figure 306 (1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 700 and small symbol 704 on the first image display device 70. At this time, one reserved image 702 is displayed. At this time, the reserved number display 703 of the first starting gate 121 shows "1." The number of times played image 705 shows the text "499 GAMES," and the remaining number of times reached image 708 shows the text "1 more." A background corresponding to the first stage is displayed as a stage image 706. The top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c are all in their second modes. Although not shown, background music corresponding to the previous variation effect continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 306(2), the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 begin to change as the next special symbol starts to change. Also, the reserved number display 703 of the first start port 121 switches to "0." Also, at this time, the countdown image 732, "1," is displayed.
Next, as the special symbols stop fluctuating, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704, "421," are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 306 (3). At this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "500 GAMES," and the display content of the remaining number of times reached image 708 is updated to "0 remaining." At this time, the gaming machine 1 is controlled to a special time-saving gaming state. When the gaming machine 1 is controlled to a special time-saving gaming state, a second right-hit image 725 is displayed. Meanwhile, the stage image 706 still shows a background corresponding to the first stage. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the second mode to the first mode.

Then, when a predetermined time has passed since the special symbol stopped changing without a gaming ball entering the first starting hole 121, an adjustment image 716 and a menu image 717 are displayed, as shown in Figure 306 (4). This predetermined time is, for example, 20 seconds. At this time, the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c all switch from the first state to the fifth state. Also, although not shown in the figure, at this time, background music corresponding to the previous changing effect is output from the audio output device 9 at a volume lower than that during the changing effect.

Furthermore, if a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of the adjustment image 716 and menu image 717 without a game ball entering the first starting slot 121, the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, as shown in Figure 306 (5). This predetermined time is, for example, 60 seconds. At this time, the decorative symbol 700, small symbol 704, execution count image 705, stage image 706, and remaining count image 708 become difficult or impossible for the player to see. Meanwhile, the pending number display 703 and second right-hit image 725 remain easily visible to the player. At this time, the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c all switch from the fifth mode to the eighth mode. The eighth mode is a purple light-emitting mode, different from any of the first through seventh modes. At this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a notification sound to notify players that they are in the special time-shortened gaming state. For example, the audio output device 9 repeatedly outputs the notification sound, "The special time-shortened gaming state has been entered."

Next, when the gaming ball enters the first starting hole 121, the manner in which the sound is output by the audio output device 9 changes, as shown in Figure 306 (6). For example, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to a special time-saving gaming state. This sound effect is different from the notification sound that notifies the player that the special time-saving gaming state has been entered. At this time, the decorative symbol 700, small symbol 704, execution count image 705, stage image 706, and remaining number of times reached image 708 remain difficult or impossible for the player to see. At this time, the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c all remain in the eighth mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 307 (7), the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c all switch from the eighth mode to the second mode. At this time, the decorative symbol 700, small symbol 704, execution count image 705, stage image 706, and remaining count image 708 remain difficult or impossible for the player to see. At this time, the sound output device 9 continues to output a sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to a special time-saving gaming state.

Next, as shown in Figure 307 (8), a non-display effect for the customer waiting image 710 is executed. The non-display effect increases the transparency of the image over time, eventually making the image non-displayable. In the example shown, the transparency of the customer waiting image 710 increases as the non-display effect for the customer waiting image 710 begins. As the transparency of the customer waiting image 710 increases, the decorative pattern 700, small pattern 704, execution count image 705, stage image 706, and remaining count image 708 become visible to the player, although not easily visible to the player. Meanwhile, at this time, neither the variable image 701 nor the reserved image 702 is displayed. At this time, the sound output device 9 continues to output a sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to a special time-saving gaming state.

Next, as shown in Figure 307 (9), the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 progresses, and the transparency of the customer waiting image 710 becomes even higher. At this time, as the display of the special symbol begins to change, the decorative symbol 700 and small symbol 704 begin to change. At this time, the decorative symbol 700 begins to change, and the small symbol 704 begins to change at high speed. At this time, the hold number display 703 of the first starting port 121 displays "1." At this time, the display of the hold image 702 begins. Here, the step-by-step display effect is not executed, and the hold image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the first image display device 70. Although the decorative symbol 700, the hold image 702, the small symbol 704, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of times to be achieved image 708 are not easily visible to the player, they are still visible to the player. At this time, the sound output device 9 continues to output a sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state.

Next, as shown in Figure 307 (10), the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 ends, and the customer waiting image 710 is no longer displayed. As a result, the decorative symbol 700, reserved image 702, small symbol 704, execution count image 705, stage image 706, and remaining count image 708 become easily visible to the player. At this time, the start of the variation operation is also in progress. At this time, the sound output device 9 continues to output a sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to a special time-saving gaming state.

Next, as shown in Figure 307 (11), the fluctuation start operation ends, and the decorative pattern 700 fluctuates at a high speed. Furthermore, the pending image 702 moves to the fluctuation base 701P and expands, causing the fluctuating image 701 to be displayed. At this time, the pending number display 703 in the first starting slot 121 switches to "0". Also, at this time, the countdown image 732, "0", is displayed. Also, at this time, the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state is no longer output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, "1" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the first starting hole 121, as shown in Fig. 307 (12). At this time, a step-by-step display effect is started, and the reserved image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode at a position above and away from the first reserved pedestal 702P. At this time, the sound output device 9 starts to output a winning sound.
Next, as shown in Fig. 308 (13), the stage display effect is completed, and the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the first reserved pedestal 702P. Also, although not shown, when the stage display effect is completed, the motion effect of the reserved image 702 is started. Also, the winning sound is continuously output until the stage display effect is completed, and is no longer output when the stage display effect is completed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 308(14), a special time-saving start image 733 is displayed. The display time of this special time-saving start image 733 is, for example, 3 seconds.
Next, as shown in FIG. 308 (15), the display of the second transition image 734 begins. More specifically, the second transition image 734 is displayed in a portion of the display area of the first image display device 70. At this time, in the area of the first image display device 70 where the second transition image 734 is not displayed, the left decorative symbol 700, the execution count image 705, and the remaining number of times to be reached image 708, which are rapidly changing, remain visible to the player. Furthermore, the portion of the stage image 706 that does not overlap with the second transition image 734 is visible to the player, while the portion that overlaps with the second transition image 734 is difficult or impossible to see. Furthermore, the center decorative symbol 700, the right decorative symbol 700, the changing image 701, and the reserved image 702 are difficult or impossible to see to the player. In addition, in the area of the first image display device 70 where the second transition image 734 is displayed, the pending number display 703, small pattern 704, and second right-hit image 725 continue to be visible or easily visible to the player.

Next, as shown in Fig. 308 (16), the second transition image 734 is displayed on the entire surface of the first image display device 70. At this time, the left decorative symbol 700, the execution count image 705, and the remaining number of times to be reached image 708 also become difficult or impossible for the player to see.
Next, as shown in FIG. 308 (17), as the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, the reserved number display 703 of the first starting hole 121 displays "2." Meanwhile, the reserved image 702 is difficult or impossible for the player to see. Also, at this time, no winning sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 308 (18), a special time-saving selection image 735 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the cursor is positioned on the "a" mode in the special time-saving selection image 735.
Next, as shown in FIG. 309 (19), a mode start image 736 is displayed. At this time, as the game ball enters the second start opening 122, a "1" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the second start opening 122. Meanwhile, the reserved image 702 is difficult or impossible for the player to see. At this time, a winning sound is output from the audio output device 9 to notify the player of the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 122.

Next, as shown in FIG. 309 (20), the second transition image 734 and the mode start image 736 are hidden, and the low-decorative decorative pattern 700, "125," is temporarily stopped on the first image display device 70. At this time, the background corresponding to the sixth stage is displayed as the stage image 706. At this time, the third right-hit image 737 and the special time-saving remaining number image 738 are displayed. The reserved number display 703 of the first starting slot 121 shows "2," and the reserved number display 703 of the second starting slot 122 shows "1." One reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode. Meanwhile, the variable image 701 is not displayed.
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704 "125" are fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. 309 (21).

Next, as shown in Figure 309 (22), as the display of the special symbol begins to change, the decorative symbol 700 and small symbol 704 begin to change. The number of reserved symbols displayed 703 in the second starting slot 122 also changes to "0." The first reserved image 702 moves to the variable symbol base 701P and expands, causing the variable symbol 701 to be displayed. While not shown, after that, as the special symbol stops and is displayed, the decorative symbol 700 and small symbol 704 are fixed and stopped, and the variable symbol 701 is no longer displayed.

Figure 310 is an explanatory diagram of each effect in variable effect example 10.
As shown in FIG. 310, at time T1 in variation presentation example 10, a customer waiting image 710 is displayed. At this time, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 are difficult or impossible for the player to see. Also, at this time, the reserved image 702 is not displayed. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the eighth mode. Also, at this time, an alarm sound is output from the audio output device 9 to notify that a special time-saving game state is in effect. The state at time T1 is the state shown in FIG. 306 (5).

After that, at time T2, the game ball enters the first starting hole 121.
After that, at time T3, the sound output device 9 starts to output a sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state. That is, the sound output from the sound output device 9 switches from the notification sound to the sound effect. The state at time T3 is the state shown in FIG. 306 (6).
Thereafter, at time T4, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c switch from the eighth position to the second position. The state at time T4 is the state shown in FIG. 307(7).

Then, at time T5, the display of the customer waiting image 710 is started. At this time, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 are visible to the player. Meanwhile, the reserved image 702 is not displayed. The state at time T5 is the state shown in FIG. 307 (8).
Then, at time T6, the variation effect starts. At this time, the decorative symbol 700 varies slowly, and the small symbol 704 varies quickly. At this time, the display of the reserved image 702 starts, and the reserved image 702 becomes visible to the player. At this time, the reserved image 702 is displayed in a completed display mode. At this time, the motion effect of the reserved image 702 starts. The state at time T6 is the state shown in FIG. 307 (9).

Then, at time T7, the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 ends. At this time, the decorative symbol 700, the reserved image 702, and the small symbol 704 are all easily visible to the player. The state at time T7 is the state shown in FIG. 307 (10).
After that, at time T8, the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-shortening gaming state is no longer output from the audio output device 9.
After that, at time T9, the decorative pattern 700 changes at a high speed. At this time, the reserved image 702 moves to the change base 701P. The state at time T9 is the state shown in FIG. 307 (11).

In this way, the reserved image 702 (variable image 701) can be displayed, and the reserved image 702 (variable image 701) based on winning at the first starting gate 121 is not displayed while the first predetermined image (second transition image 734) is displayed, and the reserved image 702 (variable image 701) based on winning at the second starting gate 122 is also displayed together with the appearance of the decorative pattern 700, and the reserved image 702 (variable image 701) is displayed while the second predetermined image (first front image 707, second front image 709) is displayed.
In this case, since both the decorative pattern 700 and the reserved image 702 (variable image 701) are hidden while the first predetermined image is displayed, it is possible to draw attention to the first predetermined image. Also, since a transition in the game state is involved, by hiding the reserved image 702 (variable image 701), it is possible to smoothly switch to another reserved image 702 (variable image 701) as the transition to a different game state occurs. Also, while the second predetermined image is displayed, the decorative pattern 700 is hidden while the reserved image 702 (variable image 701) is displayed, so that the player can recognize the current state (whether it is changing, how many reserved images there are, etc.).

In addition, a reserved image 702 (variable image 701) can be displayed, and the reserved image 702 (variable image 701) is hidden while the first predetermined image (second transition image 734) is displayed, and another reserved image 702 (variable image 701) is also displayed when the decorative pattern 700 appears, and the reserved image 702 (variable image 701) is hidden while the second predetermined image (first eye-catching image 715) is displayed, and the reserved image 702 (variable image 701) is also re-displayed when the decorative pattern 700 appears.
In this case, since both the decorative symbol 700 and the reserved image 702 (variable image 701) are displayed while the first predetermined image is being displayed, it is possible to draw attention to the first predetermined image. Also, since a transition in the game state is involved, by hiding the reserved image 702 (variable image 701), it is possible to smoothly switch to another reserved image 702 (variable image 701) in a different game state. Also, by hiding the reserved image 702 (variable image 701) while the second predetermined image is being displayed, it is possible to smoothly switch from a reach miss to the next screen.

(Variation example 11)
Figures 311 to 313 are figures showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the first image display device 70.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 11) will be described with reference to Figures 311 to 313. Variable effect example 11 is a variable effect example of the decorative pattern 700 based on winning into the first starting hole 121 in the special time-saving game state.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, as shown in Figure 311 (1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 fixes and stops the decorative symbol 700 and small symbol 704 in the first image display device 70. The number of times played image 705 displays the text "500 GAMES," and the remaining number of times reached image 708 displays the text "0 more." The stage image 706 displays a background corresponding to the first stage. The gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is in a special time-saving gaming state, and the second right-hit image 725 is displayed. At this time, the adjustment image 716 and menu image 717 are also displayed. The top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c are all in the fifth mode. At this time, the audio output device 9 outputs background music corresponding to the previous variation effect at a volume lower than that during the execution of the variation effect. The state shown in Figure 311 (1) is the same as the state shown in Figure 306 (4).

Next, when the gaming ball enters the first starting hole 121, as shown in Fig. 311 (2), the sound output device 9 starts to output a sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all continue to be in the fifth mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 311 (3), the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the fifth mode to the second mode. At this time, the sound output device 9 continues to output the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state.

Next, as shown in Figure 311 (4), a non-display effect for the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 is initiated. In the example shown, the transparency of the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 is increased due to the initiation of the non-display effect. Then, as the transparency of the adjustment image 716 is increased, the portions of the middle decorative pattern 700 and the right decorative pattern 700 that overlap with the adjustment image 716 are not easily visible to the player, but are still visible to the player. At this time, the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to a special time-saving gaming state continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 311 (5), the non-display effect for the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 ends, and the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are no longer displayed. As a result, the middle decorative pattern 700 and the right decorative pattern 700 become easily visible to the player as a whole. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 begin to change as the special pattern begins to change. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 starts to change, and the small pattern 704 is displayed changing at high speed. At this time, "1" is displayed in the hold number display 703 of the first starting port 121. At this time, the display of the hold image 702 begins. Meanwhile, the step-by-step display effect is not executed, and the hold image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the first image display device 70. This hold image 702 is easily visible to the player. At this time, the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in Figure 311 (6), the fluctuation start operation ends, and the decorative pattern 700 fluctuates at a high speed. Furthermore, the pending image 702 moves to the fluctuation base 701P and expands, causing the fluctuating image 701 to be displayed. At this time, the pending number display 703 in the first starting slot 121 switches to "0". At this time, the countdown image 732, "0", is displayed. At this time, the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state is no longer output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, "1" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the first starting hole 121, as shown in Fig. 312 (7). At this time, a step-by-step display effect is started, and the reserved image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode at a position above and away from the first reserved pedestal 702P. At this time, the sound output device 9 starts to output a winning sound.
Next, as shown in Fig. 312 (8), the stage display effect is completed, and the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the first reserved pedestal 702P. Also, although not shown, when the stage display effect is completed, the motion effect of the reserved image 702 is started. Also, the winning sound is continuously output until the stage display effect is completed, and is no longer output when the stage display effect is completed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 312 (9), a special time-saving start image 733 is displayed.
312(10), the display of the second transitional image 734 begins. More specifically, the second transitional image 734 is displayed in a part of the display area of the first image display device 70.
Next, as shown in FIG. 312 (11), a second transitional image 734 is displayed over the entire first image display device 70.

Next, as shown in FIG. 312 (12), as the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, the reserved number display 703 of the first starting hole 121 displays "2." Meanwhile, the reserved image 702 is difficult or impossible for the player to see. Also, at this time, no winning sound is output to notify the player of the entry into the first starting hole 121.
Next, as shown in Fig. 313 (13), a special time-saving selection image 735 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the cursor is positioned on the "a" mode in the special time-saving selection image 735.

Next, as shown in Figure 313 (14), the mode start image 736 is displayed. At this time, as the game ball enters the second start opening 122, a "1" is displayed in the hold number display 703 of the second start opening 122. Meanwhile, the hold image 702 is difficult or impossible for the player to see. At this time, a winning sound is output from the audio output device 9 to notify the player that a winning ball has entered the second start opening 122.

Next, as shown in FIG. 313 (15), the second transition image 734 and the mode start image 736 are hidden, and the low-decorative decorative pattern 700, "125," is temporarily stopped on the first image display device 70. At this time, a background corresponding to the sixth stage is displayed as the stage image 706. At this time, the third right-hit image 737 and the remaining number of special time-saving times image 738 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the remaining number of special time-saving times image 738 displays the text "749." Furthermore, the reserved number display 703 of the first start port 121 displays "2," and the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 122 displays "1." One reserved image 702 is also displayed. Meanwhile, the variable image 701 is not displayed.
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704 "125" are fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. 313 (16).

As described above, in this embodiment, in the second mode, the effect control board 130 can display a specific image before the start of the special effect, and if a win occurs while a specific image is being displayed in the second mode, the effect control board 130 makes the reserved image of a specific mode difficult to see or impossible to see. Examples of special effects include the display of the special time-saving start image 733, the display of the second transition image 734, and the display of the mode start image 736. Examples of specific images include the customer waiting image 710, the adjustment image 716, and the menu image 717. Examples of specific modes include an incomplete display mode.
In this case, the specific image can attract the player's interest even before the start of the special effect. Furthermore, if a win occurs while a specific image is being displayed in the special time-saving game state, the reserved image 702 of the specific mode is not visible to the player, thereby preventing the player from paying excessive attention to the reserved image 702 in the special time-saving game state and allowing the player to focus on the effect unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining effects can be provided.

In this embodiment, the effect control board 130 can display a specific image before the start of the special effect in the second mode, and if a win occurs while a specific image is being displayed in the second mode, the effect control board 130 makes the reserved image of the specific action mode difficult to see or impossible to see. An example of the specific action mode is an incomplete action mode.
In this case, the specific image can attract the player's interest even before the start of the special effect. Furthermore, if a win occurs while a specific image is being displayed in the special time-saving game state, the reserved image 702 of the specific action mode is not visible to the player, thereby preventing the player from paying excessive attention to the reserved image 702 in the special time-saving game state and allowing the player to focus on the effect unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining effects can be provided.

In this embodiment, the effect control board 130 can display the reserved image 702 on the first image display device 70 in the first mode and then in the second mode. In the second mode, a specific image can be displayed before the start of the special effect. If a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed in the second mode, the reserved image 702 in the first mode is made difficult to see or impossible to see. An example of the first mode is an incomplete mode. An example of the second mode is a completed mode.
In this case, the change in the form of the reserved image 702 can entertain the player. Furthermore, even before the start of the special effect, the specific image can attract the player's interest. Furthermore, if a win occurs while a specific image is being displayed in the special time-shortened game state, the change in the form of the reserved image 702 is not visible to the player, thereby preventing the player from focusing excessively on the reserved image 702 in the special time-shortened game state and allowing the player to focus on the effects unique to the special time-shortened game state. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining effects can be provided.

In this embodiment, the effect control board 130 can display a specific image before the start of the special effect in the second mode, and if a win occurs while the specific image is being displayed in the second mode, the reserved image 702 with a specific transparency is made difficult to see or impossible to see. An example of the specific transparency is an incomplete transparency.
In this case, the specific image can attract the player's interest even before the start of the special effect. Furthermore, if a win occurs while a specific image is being displayed in the special time-saving game state, the reserved image 702 with a specific transparency is not visible to the player, thereby preventing the player from focusing excessively on the reserved image 702 in the special time-saving game state and allowing the player to focus on the effects unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining effects can be provided.

In this embodiment, the effect control board 130 can display the reserved image 702 at a first position on the first image display device 70 and then at a second position. In the second mode, a specific image can be displayed before the start of the special effect. If a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed in the second mode, the reserved image 702 at the first position is made difficult to see or impossible to see. An example of the first position is an incomplete display position. An example of the second position is a completed display position.
In this case, the change in the display position of the reserved image 702 can entertain the player. Furthermore, even before the start of the special effect, the specific image can attract the player's interest. Furthermore, if a win occurs while a specific image is being displayed in the special time-shortened game state, the change in the display position of the reserved image 702 is not visible to the player, thereby preventing the player from focusing excessively on the reserved image 702 in the special time-shortened game state and allowing the player to focus on the effects unique to the special time-shortened game state. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining effects can be provided.

As described above, in this embodiment, in the second mode, the performance control board 130 can display a specific image before the start of the special performance, and can set the sound output to the first mode when the variable performance is being executed, and can set the sound output to the second mode when the specific image is displayed in the second mode.
In this case, the specific image can attract the player's interest even before the start of the special effect. Also, by outputting a sound in a manner that corresponds to the display of the specific image in the special time-saving game state, the player can be made aware that the specific image is being displayed in the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can execute highly entertaining effects.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the second mode, the performance control board 130 can display a specific image before the start of the special performance, and can set the top lamp 10b to the second state, etc. when a variable performance is being executed, and can set the top lamp 10b to the eighth state, etc. when a specific image is being displayed in the second mode.
In this case, the specific image can attract the player's interest even before the start of the special effect. Also, by changing the state of the top lamp 10b according to the display of the specific image in the special time-saving game state, the player can be made aware that the specific image is being displayed in the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining effects.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the second mode, the performance control board 130 can display a specific image before the start of the special performance, and can set the board lamp 74b to the second state or the like when a variable performance is being executed, and can set the board lamp 74b to the eighth state or the like when a specific image is being displayed in the second mode.
In this case, the specific image can attract the player's interest even before the start of the special effect. Also, by changing the mode of the board lamp 74b according to the display of the specific image in the special time-saving game state, the player can be made aware that the specific image is being displayed in the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining effects.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the second mode, the performance control board 130 can display a specific image before the start of the special performance, and can set the movable member lamp 74c and button lamp 17c to the second state or the like when a variable performance is being executed, and can set the movable member lamp 74c and button lamp 17c to the eighth state or the like when a specific image is displayed in the second mode.
In this case, the specific image can attract the player's interest even before the start of the special effect. Also, by changing the state of the movable member lamp 74c and the state of the button lamp 17c according to the state of the specific image being displayed in the special time-saving game state, the player can be made aware that the specific image is being displayed in the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining effects.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the second mode, the performance control board 130 can display a specific image before the start of the special performance, and if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed in the second mode, the display of the decorative pattern 700 can begin before the display of the reserved image 702 begins.
In this case, the specific image can attract the player's interest even before the start of the special effect. Also, if a win occurs while a specific image is being displayed in the special time-saving game state, the effect symbol 700 is displayed earlier than the reserved image 702, allowing the player to focus on the variable effect unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining effects can be provided.

As described above, in this embodiment, if a prize is won in the second mode before the start of the special effect, while the special pattern is stopped, and no pending information is stored in the main RAM 110c, the presentation control board 130 makes the pending image 702 of a specific form difficult to see or impossible to see.
As a result, if a win occurs before the start of the special effect and while the special symbol is stopped and there is no reserved effect, the reserved image 702 of the specific mode is not visible to the player, thereby preventing the player from paying excessive attention to the reserved image 702 in the special time-saving game state and allowing the player to focus on the effect that is unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can execute highly entertaining effects.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a prize is won in the second mode before the start of the special effect, while the special pattern is stopped, and no pending information is stored in the main RAM 110c, the presentation control board 130 makes the pending image 702 of the specific operating mode difficult to see or impossible to see.
As a result, if a win occurs before the start of the special effect and while the special symbol is stopped and there is no reserved effect, the reserved image 702 of the specific action mode is not visible to the player, thereby preventing the player from paying excessive attention to the reserved image 702 in the special time-saving game state and allowing the player to focus on the effect that is unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can execute highly entertaining effects.

In this embodiment, if a win occurs before the start of the special effect in the second mode, while the special symbol is stopped, and no reserved information is stored in the main RAM 110c, the effect control board 130 makes the reserved image 702 of a specific form difficult to see or impossible to see. An example of the specific form is an incomplete form.
As a result, if a win occurs before the start of the special effect and while the special symbol is stopped and there is no reserved effect, the reserved image 702 of a specific form is not visible to the player, thereby preventing the player from paying excessive attention to the reserved image 702 in the special time-saving game state and allowing the player to focus on the effect that is unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can execute highly entertaining effects.

In this embodiment, the effect control board 130 can display the reserved image 702 at a first transparency level on the first image display device 70, and then at a second transparency level. In the second mode, if a win occurs before the start of the special effect, while the special symbol is stopped, and reserved information is not stored in the main RAM 110c, the reserved image 702 at the first transparency level is made difficult to see or impossible to see. An example of the first transparency level is incomplete transparency. An example of the second transparency level is completed transparency.
In this case, the player can be entertained by the change in transparency of the reserved image 702. Furthermore, if a win occurs before the start of the special effect and while the special symbol is stopped and there is no reserved effect, the change in transparency of the reserved image 702 is not visible to the player, thereby preventing the player from paying excessive attention to the reserved image 702 in the special time-saving game state and allowing the player to focus on the effects unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining effects can be provided.

In this embodiment, if a win occurs in the second mode before the start of the special effect, while the special symbol is stopped, and no reserved information is stored in the main RAM 110c, the effect control board 130 makes the reserved image 702 at a specific position difficult to see or impossible to see. An example of the specific position is an incomplete display position.
As a result, if a win occurs before the start of the special effect and while the special symbol is stopped and there is no reserved, the reserved image 702 at the specific position is not visible to the player, thereby preventing the player from paying excessive attention to the reserved image 702 in the special time-saving game state and allowing the player to focus on the effects unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can execute highly entertaining effects.

In this embodiment, the performance control board 130 can display the reserved image 702 on the first image display device 70 in a first mode and then in a second mode, and can display the special image in a display mode corresponding to the controlled mode of the first mode or the second mode. If a win occurs while the special symbol is stopped and a special image corresponding to the first mode is displayed after the start of the specific notification, the reserved image 702 in the first mode is made difficult to see or invisible, and a special image corresponding to the second mode is displayed. An example of the first mode is an incomplete display mode. An example of the second mode is a completed display mode. An example of the special image is a decorative symbol 700 or a stage image 706. An example of the specific notification is the display of a second right-hit image 725 or a sound prompting the launch of the game ball to the right in the game area 5a.
In this case, the change in the state of the reserved image 702 can entertain the player. Furthermore, even when a special image corresponding to the normal game state is displayed, the specific notification is initiated, allowing the player to recognize that a prize can be won by launching a game ball into the second game area. Furthermore, if a prize is won while a special symbol is stopped and a special image corresponding to the normal game state is displayed after the specific notification is initiated, the change in the state of the reserved image 702 is not visible to the player. This prevents the player from focusing excessively on the reserved image 702 in the special time-saving game state, and allows the player to focus on the special image unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining effects can be provided.

In this embodiment, the performance control board 130 can display the reserved image 702 on the first image display device 70 in a first operation mode and then in a second operation mode, and if a win occurs while the special symbol is stopped and a special image corresponding to the first mode is being displayed after the start of the specific notification, the reserved image 702 in the first operation mode is made difficult to see or impossible to see, and a special image corresponding to the second mode is displayed. An example of the first operation mode is an incomplete operation mode. An example of the second operation mode is an operation mode in an operation performance.
In this case, the change in the operation mode of the reserved image 702 can entertain the player. Furthermore, even when a special image corresponding to the normal game state is displayed, the specific notification is initiated, allowing the player to recognize that a prize can be won by launching a game ball into the second game area. Furthermore, if a prize is won while a special symbol is stopped and a special image corresponding to the normal game state is displayed after the specific notification is initiated, the change in the operation mode of the reserved image 702 is not visible to the player. This prevents the player from focusing excessively on the reserved image 702 in the special time-saving game state, and allows the player to focus on the special image unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining effects can be provided.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if a prize is won while the special pattern is stopped after the start of the specific notification and a special image corresponding to the first mode is being displayed, the performance control board 130 makes the reserved image 702 of a specific form difficult to see or impossible to see, and displays a special image corresponding to the second mode.
In this case, even when a special image corresponding to the normal game state is displayed, the specific notification is initiated, allowing the player to recognize that a prize can be won by launching a game ball into the second game area. Furthermore, if a prize is won while a special symbol is stopped and a special image corresponding to the normal game state is displayed after the specific notification has started, the reserved image 702 of a specific form is not visible to the player, thereby preventing the player from focusing excessively on the reserved image 702 in the special time-saving game state and allowing the player to focus on the special image unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining effects can be provided.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a prize is won while the special pattern is stopped and a special image corresponding to the first mode is being displayed after the start of the specific notification, the performance control board 130 makes the reserved image 702 of the first transparency difficult to see or impossible to see, and displays a special image corresponding to the second mode.
In this case, the change in transparency of the reserved image 702 can entertain the player. Furthermore, even when a special image corresponding to the normal game state is displayed, the specific notification is initiated, allowing the player to recognize that a prize can be won by launching a game ball into the second game area. Furthermore, if a prize is won while a special symbol is stopped and a special image corresponding to the normal game state is displayed after the specific notification is initiated, the change in transparency of the reserved image 702 is not visible to the player, thereby preventing the player from focusing excessively on the reserved image 702 in the special time-saving game state and allowing the player to focus on the special image unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining effects can be provided.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a prize is won while the special pattern is stopped after the start of the specific notification and a special image corresponding to the first mode is being displayed, the performance control board 130 makes the reserved image 702 at the first position difficult to see or impossible to see, and displays a special image corresponding to the second mode.
In this case, the change in the display position of the reserved image 702 can entertain the player. Furthermore, even when a special image corresponding to the normal game state is displayed, the specific notification is initiated, allowing the player to recognize that a prize can be won by launching a game ball into the second game area. Furthermore, if a prize is won while a special symbol is stopped and a special image corresponding to the normal game state is displayed after the specific notification is initiated, the change in the display position of the reserved image 702 is not visible to the player. This prevents the player from focusing excessively on the reserved image 702 in the special time-saving game state, and allows the player to focus on the special image unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining effects can be provided.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a prize is won in the second mode before the start of the special effect, the effect control board 130 can change the sound output from the first mode to the second mode before the display of the pending image 702 is completed.
In this case, when a win occurs in the special time-saving game state before the start of the special effect, the sound output mode is switched earlier than the display of the reserved image 702, making it easier for the player to quickly recognize that the game is in the special time-saving game state even if the player is looking away from the gaming machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can execute highly entertaining effects.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed in the second mode before the start of the special effect, the effect control board 130 can change the sound output from the first mode to the second mode before the specific image is no longer displayed.
In this case, when a win is won in the special time-saving game state before the start of the special effect, by switching the sound output mode more quickly than by hiding the specific image, it becomes easier for the player to quickly recognize that the special time-saving game state is in effect, regardless of the display content of the first image display device 70. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can execute highly entertaining effects.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a prize is won in the second mode before the start of the special performance, the performance control board 130 can change the sound output from the first mode to the second mode before the decorative pattern 700 becomes easily visible.
In this case, when a win occurs in the special time-saving game state before the start of the special effect, the sound output mode is switched more quickly than when the decorative pattern 700 is made easily visible to the player, making it easier for the player to recognize that the special time-saving game state is in effect even when the player is looking away from the gaming machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can execute highly entertaining effects.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a prize is won in the second mode before the start of the special effect, the effect control board 130 can change the sound output from the first mode to the second mode before the small pattern 704 becomes easily visible.
In this case, when a win occurs in the special time-saving game state before the start of the special effect, the sound output mode is switched more quickly than when the small symbol 704 is made easily visible to the player, making it easier for the player to recognize that the special time-saving game state is in effect even if the player is looking away from the gaming machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can execute highly entertaining effects.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a prize is won in the second mode before the start of the special performance, the performance control board 130 can change the sound output from the first mode to the second mode before changing the top lamp 10b from the first light-emitting mode to the second light-emitting mode.
In this case, when a win is made in the special time-saving game state before the start of the special effect, the sound output mode is switched more quickly than the switching of the light emission mode of the top lamp 10b, making it easier for the player to quickly recognize that the game is in the special time-saving game state even if the player is looking away from the gaming machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can execute highly entertaining effects.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a prize is won in the second mode before the start of the special performance, the performance control board 130 can change the sound output from the first mode to the second mode before changing the board lamp 74b from the first light-emitting mode to the second light-emitting mode.
In this case, when a win is made in the special time-saving game state before the start of the special effect, the sound output mode is switched more quickly than the switching of the light emission mode of the board lamp 74b, making it easier for the player to quickly recognize that the game is in the special time-saving game state even if the player is looking away from the gaming machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can execute highly entertaining effects.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a prize is won in the second mode before the start of the special performance, the performance control board 130 can change the sound output from the first mode to the second mode before changing the movable member lamp 74c or the button lamp 17c from the first light-emitting mode to the second light-emitting mode.
In this case, when a win is made in the special time-saving game state before the start of the special effect, the sound output mode is switched more quickly than switching the light emission mode of the movable member lamp 74c or the button lamp 17c, making it easier for the player to quickly recognize that the game is in the special time-saving game state even if the player is looking away from the gaming machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can execute highly entertaining effects.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a win occurs while a specific image is being displayed in the special time-saving game mode, the sound output mode is switched before the reserved image 702 becomes visible to the player. This allows the player to quickly recognize that they have won, regardless of the display content of the first image display device 70.

In particular, in this embodiment, if a win occurs while the customer waiting image 710 is displayed in a special time-saving game state, the sound output mode is switched before the display of the customer waiting image 710 begins. Therefore, even if the customer waiting image 710 prevents the player from recognizing the game situation from the display content of the first image display device 70, the player can quickly recognize that he or she has won.

In addition, if a win occurs while a specific image is being displayed in the special time-saving game mode, the state of the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c is switched before the reserved image 702 becomes visible to the player. This allows the player to quickly recognize that they have won, regardless of the display content of the first image display device 70.

In particular, in this embodiment, if a win occurs while the customer waiting image 710 is displayed in the special time-saving game state, the state of the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c is switched before the display of the customer waiting image 710 begins. Therefore, even if the customer waiting image 710 prevents the player from recognizing the game situation from the display content of the first image display device 70, the player can quickly recognize that he or she has won.

In addition, if a win occurs while a specific image is being displayed in the special time-saving game mode, the decorative pattern 700 will be visible to the player before the reserved image 702 becomes visible to the player. Therefore, even if the reserved image 702 is not visible, the player can be quickly informed that a variable effect will be performed.

In particular, in this embodiment, if a win occurs while the customer waiting image 710 is displayed in the special time-saving game mode, the decorative pattern 700 is made visible to the player before the customer waiting image 710 is hidden. Therefore, even if the information displayed on the first image display device 70 regarding the game is obstructed by the customer waiting image 710, the player can be quickly informed that a variable effect will be performed.

Furthermore, if a win occurs when a specific image is displayed in the special time-saving game state, the gradual display effect is not executed, but if a game ball enters the first starting hole 121 between the start of the variable effect based on this win and the display of the second transition image 734, the gradual display effect is executed. Therefore, the player can enjoy not only the effects unique to the special time-saving game state, but also the changes in the display mode of the reserved image 702, and can also give the player a sense of exclusivity from the reserved image 702 that is displayed based on a win when a specific image is displayed in the special time-saving game state.

Furthermore, if a win occurs while the second transition image 734 is being displayed, the reserved image 702 in an incomplete display state will not be visible to the player. This prevents the player from focusing too much on the reserved image 702, and allows the player to focus on the change from the stage image 706 corresponding to the normal game state to the stage image 706 unique to the special time-saving game state.

In particular, in this embodiment, if a game ball enters the first start hole 121 while the second transition image 734 is displayed, no winning sound is output to notify the player of the entry into the first start hole 121. This prevents the player from becoming overly aware of the game ball entering the first start hole 121 in a special time-saving game state in which it is easier for the game ball to enter the second start hole 122, and allows the player to focus on the change from the stage image 706 corresponding to the normal game state to the stage image 706 unique to the special time-saving game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, even when the second transition image 734 is displayed, if a game ball enters the second start hole 122, a winning sound is output to notify the player of the entry into the second start hole 122. This allows the player to recognize that the game is in a special time-saving game state in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the second start hole 122.

It should be noted that even when the second transition image 734 is displayed, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 121, a winning sound may be output to notify the player of the entry into the first starting hole 121. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly believing that the entry into the first starting hole 121 is invalid.
Furthermore, when the second transition image 734 is displayed and a game ball enters the second start hole 122, it may be configured not to output a winning sound that notifies the player of the entry into the second start hole 122. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from being overly aware of the game ball entering the second start hole 122, and to allow the player to focus on the change from the stage image 706 corresponding to the normal game state to the stage image 706 unique to the special time-saving game state.

(Variation of Variation Presentation Example 10)
Figures 314 to 316 are figures showing modified examples of variation presentation example 10.
In the variation effect example 10, the variation effect based on winning at the first starting port 121 was explained as the first variation effect in the special time-saving game state, but the first variation effect in the special time-saving game state is not limited to the above example.
Below, a modified example of variation presentation example 10 will be explained with reference to Figures 314 to 316. This modified example is an example in which, as the first variation presentation in the special time-saving game state, a variation presentation is performed based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 122. Note that in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation presentation examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation presentation examples may be omitted.

First, as in Variation Presentation Example 10, in the normal game state, the final variation presentation of the predetermined number of times required to enter the special time-saving game state is completed, and the gaming machine 1 is controlled to enter the special time-saving game state. Furthermore, if a predetermined time elapses after the final variation presentation has ended without a game ball entering either the first start slot 121 or the second start slot 122, a customer waiting image 710 is displayed, as shown in Figure 314 (1). Furthermore, the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c all enter the eighth mode. At this time, an alarm sound is output from the audio output device 9 to notify players that the special time-saving game state has been entered. The state shown in Figure 314 (1) is the same as the state shown in Figure 306 (5) in Variation Presentation Example 10.

Next, when the gaming ball enters the second starting hole 122, as shown in Figure 314 (2), the audio output device 9 begins to output a sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to a special time-saving gaming state. At this time, the decorative symbol 700, small symbol 704, execution count image 705, stage image 706, and remaining count image 708 remain difficult or impossible for the player to see. At this time, the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c all remain in the eighth mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 314 (3), the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c all switch from the eighth mode to the second mode. At this time, the decorative symbol 700, small symbol 704, execution count image 705, stage image 706, and remaining count image 708 remain difficult or impossible for the player to see. At this time, the sound output device 9 continues to output a sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state.

Next, as shown in Figure 314 (4), the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 begins, and the transparency of the customer waiting image 710 increases. At this time, the decorative pattern 700, small pattern 704, execution count image 705, stage image 706, and remaining count image 708 are visible to the player, although not easily visible to the player. Meanwhile, neither the variable image 701 nor the reserved image 702 is displayed. Also, at this time, the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to a special time-saving gaming state continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in Figure 314 (5), the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 progresses, and the transparency of the customer waiting image 710 becomes even higher. At this time, as the display of the special symbol begins to change, the decorative symbol 700 and small symbol 704 begin to change. At this time, the decorative symbol 700 begins to change, and the small symbol 704 changes and displays at high speed. At this time, the reserved number display 703 of the second starting port 122 remains showing "0." At this time, neither the changing image 701 nor the reserved image 702 is displayed. Although the decorative symbol 700, small symbol 704, execution count image 705, stage image 706, and remaining number of times reached image 708 are not easily visible to the player, they remain visible to the player. At this time, the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to a special time-saving gaming state continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 314 (6), the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 ends, and the customer waiting image 710 disappears. As a result, the decorative symbol 700, small symbol 704, execution count image 705, stage image 706, and remaining count image 708 become easily visible to the player. At this time, the change start operation ends, and the decorative symbol 700 changes at a high speed. At this time, the countdown image 732, "0," is displayed. Meanwhile, neither the change image 701 nor the reserved image 702 is displayed on the first image display device 70. At this time, the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving game state is no longer output from the audio output device 9.
Also, at this time, when the game ball enters the second start opening 122, "1" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the second start opening 122. Also, a winning sound that notifies the player of the entry into the second start opening 122 is output from the audio output device 9. Meanwhile, the reserved image 702 is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 315 (7), a special time-saving start image 733 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 315 ( 8 ), the display of the second transitional image 734 begins, and the second transitional image 734 is displayed in a part of the display area of the first image display device 70 .
Next, as shown in FIG. 315(9), a second transitional image 734 is displayed over the entire first image display device 70.
Next, as shown in Fig. 315 (10), a special time-saving selection image 735 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the cursor is positioned on the "a" mode on the special time-saving selection image 735.
Next, as shown in FIG. 315(11), a mode start image 736 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 315 (12), the second transition image 734 and the mode start image 736 are hidden, and the low-decorative decorative pattern 700 "125" is temporarily stopped on the first image display device 70. At this time, a background corresponding to the sixth stage is displayed as the stage image 706. At this time, the third right-hit image 737 and the remaining number of special time-saving times image 738 are displayed. The reserved number display 703 of the first start port 121 shows "0," and the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 122 shows "1." One reserved image 702 is also displayed. Meanwhile, the variable image 701 is not displayed.
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704 "125" are fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. 316 (13).

As described above, in this embodiment, if a game ball enters the first start hole 121 while a specific image is displayed in the special time-saving game state, the reserved image 702 is displayed (see FIG. 307(10)), and then the variable image 701 is displayed (see FIG. 307(11)). On the other hand, if a game ball enters the second start hole 122 while a specific image is displayed in the special time-saving game state, neither the reserved image 702 nor the variable image 701 is displayed (see FIG. 314(6)).
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable because the reserved image 702 and the variable image 701 based on winning at the first start gate 121 are not displayed even though the stage image 706 having a background corresponding to the normal game state is displayed. Also, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable because the reserved image 702 and the variable image 701 based on winning at the second start gate 122, which is difficult to win at in the normal game state, are displayed even though the stage image 706 having a background corresponding to the normal game state is displayed.

In particular, in this embodiment, if a reservation is made for winning at the first starting port 121 during the first variable presentation in the special time-saving game state, the reservation image 702 is displayed when the stage image 706 with a background corresponding to the normal game state is displayed (see Figure 298 (6)), and the reservation image 702 is not displayed when the stage image 706 with a background corresponding to the special time-saving game state is displayed (see Figure 299 (12)).
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the reserved image 702 based on winning at the first start port 121 is not displayed even though the stage image 706 with a background corresponding to the normal game state is displayed. Also, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the reserved image 702 based on winning at the first start port 121, which is difficult to aim for winning in the special time-shortened game state, is displayed even though the stage image 706 with a background corresponding to the special time-shortened game state is displayed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if a reservation is made for winning at the second starting port 122 during the first variable presentation in the special time-saving game state, the reservation image 702 is not displayed when the stage image 706 with a background corresponding to the normal game state is displayed (see Figure 314 (6)), and the reservation image 702 is displayed when the stage image 706 with a background corresponding to the special time-saving game state is displayed (see Figure 315 (12)).
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the reserved image 702 based on winning at the second starting gate 122, which is difficult to win in the normal game state, is displayed even though the stage image 706 with a background corresponding to the normal game state is displayed. Also, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the reserved image 702 based on winning at the second starting gate 122, which is easy to win in the special time-shortened game state, is not displayed even though the stage image 706 with a background corresponding to the special time-shortened game state is displayed.

(Other examples of variation effect example 10)
Figure 317 is a diagram showing another example of presentation in variable presentation example 10.
In the variation effect example 10, an example is described in which the first variation effect in the special time-saving game state starts when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, but the effects that are performed when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed are not limited to the above example.
Below, other examples of the variation in the variation example 10 will be explained with reference to Figure 317. In the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation examples and variations will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation examples and variations will be omitted.

First, as in Variation Presentation Example 10, the final variation presentation of the predetermined number of times required to enter the special time-saving game state is completed, and the gaming machine 1 is controlled to enter the special time-saving game state. Furthermore, if a predetermined time elapses after the final variation presentation has ended without a game ball entering either the first start slot 121 or the second start slot 122, a customer waiting image 710 is displayed, as shown in Figure 317 (1). Furthermore, the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c all enter the eighth mode. At this time, an alarm sound is output from the audio output device 9 to notify the player that the special time-saving game state has been entered. The state shown in Figure 317 (1) is the same as the state shown in Figure 306 (5) in Variation Presentation Example 10.

If the magnetic sensor 57a detects an abnormal magnetic field while the waiting image 710 is displayed, a magnetic error occurs, and the magnetic error notification image 741 is displayed, as shown in Figure 317 (2). At this time, the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c all switch from the eighth mode to the ninth mode. The ninth mode is a light-emitting mode in which the lights periodically flash orange, and is different from any of the first to eighth modes. The ninth mode can be considered to indicate or notify the occurrence of an error. The flashing period in the ninth mode is, for example, 1.5 seconds. In other words, the flashing period in the ninth mode is longer than the flashing period in the winning light-emitting effect. At this time, a warning sound is output from the audio output device 9 along with the voice message "Magnet detected."

As described above, in this embodiment, if an error occurs while a specific image is being displayed in a special time-saving game state, the sound output mode is switched to a mode corresponding to the occurrence of the error. Therefore, even if the player takes their eyes off the gaming machine 1 while the specific image is being displayed, the player can be made aware that an error has occurred.

In the example shown in Figure 317 (2), if a magnetic error occurs while the customer waiting image 710 and the second right hit image 725 are displayed, neither the customer waiting image 710 nor the second right hit image 725 is displayed, and the magnetic error notification image 741 is displayed. However, this is not limited to this. If a magnetic error occurs while the customer waiting image 710 or the second right hit image 725 is displayed, the customer waiting image 710 and the right hit image 725 may continue to be displayed, and the magnetic error notification image 741 may be displayed on a layer in front of the customer waiting image 710.

Furthermore, regardless of the game status, if an error occurs when a specific image is being displayed, the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c are switched to the ninth mode, the sound output mode is switched to a mode corresponding to the occurrence of the error, and further, a magnetic error notification image 741 may be displayed.
Furthermore, not only when an error occurs when a specific image is being displayed, but in any case, when an error occurs, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are switched to the ninth mode, the sound output mode is switched to a mode corresponding to the occurrence of the error, and further, a magnetic error notification image 741 may be displayed.

(Variation of Variation Presentation Example 11)
Figures 318 to 320 are figures showing modified examples of variation presentation example 11.
In the example of the variation effect 11, the first variation effect in the special time-saving game state is a variation effect in which the result of the lottery for the special pattern based on winning at the first starting port 121 is a miss, but the present invention is not limited to this.
Below, a modified example of variation presentation example 11 will be explained with reference to Figures 318 to 320. This modified example is an example in which, as the first variation presentation in the special time-saving gaming state, a variation presentation is performed in which the result of the special symbol lottery based on winning at the second start port 122 is a jackpot. Note that in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation presentation examples and variations will be mainly explained, and explanations of similarities with the variation presentation examples and variations may be omitted.

First, as in Variation Presentation Example 11, in the normal game state, the final variation presentation of the predetermined number of times required to enter the special time-saving game state is completed, and the gaming machine 1 is controlled to enter the special time-saving game state. Furthermore, if a predetermined time elapses after the final variation presentation has ended without a game ball entering either the first start slot 121 or the second start slot 122, an adjustment image 716 and a menu image 717 are displayed, as shown in FIG. 318 (1). Furthermore, the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c all enter the fifth mode. Although not shown, at this time, background music corresponding to the previous variation presentation is output from the audio output device 9 at a lower volume than when the variation presentation was being executed. The state shown in FIG. 318 (1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 311 (1) in Variation Presentation Example 11.

Next, when the gaming ball enters the second starting hole 122, as shown in Fig. 318(2), a sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state is output from the sound output device 9. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all continue to be in the fifth mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 318 (3), the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the fifth mode to the second mode. At this time, the sound output device 9 continues to output the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state.

318(4), the non-display effect of the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 is started, and the transparency of the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 increases. At this time, the sound output device 9 continues to output the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state.
Next, as shown in FIG. 318(5), the non-display effect of the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 ends, and the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are no longer displayed. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 begin to change as the special pattern begins to change. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 starts to change, and the small pattern 704 changes and displays at high speed. At this time, the reserved number display 703 in the second start slot 122 still shows "0," and neither the variable image 701 nor the reserved image 702 is displayed. At this time, the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to a special time-saving gaming state continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 318(6), the fluctuation start operation ends, and the fluctuation of the decorative symbol 700 becomes faster. At this time, the countdown image 732, "0," is displayed. At this time, neither the fluctuation image 701 nor the reserved image 702 is displayed. At this time, the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state is no longer output from the audio output device 9.
Next, when the game ball enters the second start opening 122, as shown in FIG. 319 (7), "1" is displayed in the reserve number display 703 of the second start opening 122. Also, a winning sound announcing the entry into the second start opening 122 is output from the audio output device 9. Meanwhile, the reserve image 702 is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 319 ( 8 ), the display of the second transitional image 734 begins, and the second transitional image 734 is displayed in a part of the display area of the first image display device 70 .
Next, as shown in Fig. 319 (9), the second transition image 734 is displayed on the entire surface of the first image display device 70. That is, the second transition image 734 is displayed without displaying the special time-saving start image 733 (see Fig. 312 (9)).

Next, as shown in Figure 319 (10), the second transition image 734 disappears, and the double-digit decorative pattern 700, "444," temporarily stops. At this time, the stage image 706 is displayed again. In the illustrated example, the stage image 706 shows a background corresponding to the first stage. At this time, the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable part lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c switch from the second state to the seventh state. In the illustrated example, the top lamp 10b lights up orange, the board lamp 74b lights up yellow, the movable part lamp 74c lights up green, and the button lamp 17c lights up blue. At this time, the execution count image 705 and the remaining number of times to be achieved image 708 are not displayed.

Then, as the special symbol stops fluctuating, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704, "444," are fixed and stopped, as shown in Figure 319 (11). At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c continue to be in the seventh mode. In the example shown, the top lamp 10b lights up yellow, the board lamp 74b lights up green, the movable member lamp 74c lights up blue, and the button lamp 17c lights up in deep blue.

Next, as shown in Figure 319 (12), an opening image 719 is displayed. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the seventh position to the second position.
Next, as shown in FIG. 320 (13), a first right-hit image 720 and a promotion image 721 are displayed.

Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the prompt image 721 was displayed, a round-in-progress image 722 and a round number image 723 are displayed, as shown in Fig. 320 (14). In the illustrated example, the round number image 723 displays the text "Round 1."
Next, when the final round is completed, a special time-saving selection image 745 is displayed as shown in Fig. 320 (15). In the illustrated example, the cursor is positioned on the "A" mode in the special time-saving selection image 745.
Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the special time-saving selection image 745 was displayed, the normal time-saving start image 724 is displayed as shown in Fig. 320 (16). At this time, a card warning image 739 and a game warning image 740 are also displayed.

Next, when the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving gaming state, as shown in Figure 320 (17), the decorative symbol 700 with low decorativeness, "444," is fixed and stopped on the first image display device 70. The small symbol 704 is also fixed and stopped by the sequence of numbers "444," just like the decorative symbol 700. At this time, a background corresponding to the third stage is displayed as the stage image 706. At this time, a second right-hit image 725 and a remaining number of normal time-saving plays image 726 are also displayed. The reserved number display 703 of the first starting slot 121 shows "0," and the reserved number display 703 of the second starting slot 122 shows "1." One reserved image 702 is also displayed.

In this modified example, we have described a variable effect based on a winning combination when the adjustment image 716 and menu image 717 are displayed before the start of the first variable effect in the special time-saving game state. Here, the variable effect described in this modified example may be executed based on a winning combination at the first start gate 121 or the second start gate 122 when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed before the start of the first variable effect in the special time-saving game state (see Figure 306 (5)).

In this way, when the specified number of times is reached (when entering the special time-saving gaming state), a first predetermined image (second transition image 734, etc.) appears, the decorative pattern 700 is hidden, and then the decorative pattern 700 appears again, in a first effect. In addition, in the case of a jackpot, a second effect is performed in which the decorative pattern 700 indicating a jackpot is displayed. In addition, both when the first effect is performed and when the second effect is performed, the game transitions to the time-saving gaming state. The presentation style of the second effect in the case of a jackpot differs depending on whether the specified number of times is reached or not.
In this case, when the specified number of times is reached, the first predetermined image is displayed and the decorative pattern 700 is hidden, making the player anticipate a transition to a special mode (special time-saving game state), thereby increasing the interest. Also, if a jackpot occurs even after the specified number of times, the game will transition to the time-saving game state. Also, by differentiating the presentation mode when a jackpot occurs when the specified number of times is reached from when the specified number of times is reached, the presentation can be diversified, thereby increasing the interest.

Furthermore, when the specified number of times is reached (when entering a special time-saving gaming state), a first predetermined image (second transition image 734, etc.) appears, the decorative pattern 700 is hidden, and then the decorative pattern 700 appears again, in a first effect. In the case of a jackpot, a second effect is performed in which the decorative pattern 700 indicating a jackpot is displayed. In addition, whether the first effect is performed or the second effect is performed, the game transitions to a time-saving gaming state. When the specified number of times is reached, the presentation style of the first effect differs depending on whether the jackpot is reached or not.
In this case, when the specified number of times is reached, the presentation mode of the first presentation can be made different in the case of a big win and in the case of a miss, thereby diversifying the presentation and improving the interest.

In addition, the presentation format is different between the right-hit notification presentation when the first presentation is performed (display of special time-saving start image 733) and the right-hit notification presentation when the second presentation is performed (display of first right-hit image 720 and promotion image 721).
In this case, the presentation can be diversified by making the presentation mode of the right-hit notification presentation different when the first presentation is performed and when the second presentation is performed.

Furthermore, when the first effect is performed, the card warning image 739 (game warning image 740) is not displayed and the game state transitions to a specific mode showing the second game state (time-shortened game state), and when the second effect is performed, the card warning image 739 (game warning image 740) is displayed and then the game state transitions to a specific mode showing the second game state (time-shortened game state).
In this case, in the case of a jackpot, a card warning image 739 (game warning image 740) is displayed to alert the player, and when entering a special time-saving game state, these images are not displayed, so that the game can immediately transition to a presentation mode showing the special time-saving game state.

In addition, the first time from when the first predetermined image is displayed until when the game state transitions to the second game state (time-shortened game state) is shorter than the second time from when the second predetermined image is displayed until when the game state transitions to the second game state (time-shortened game state).
In this case, when the first predetermined image is displayed, the game state can be shifted to the second game state in a short time, thereby increasing the interest.

(Variation example 12)
Figures 321 and 322 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the first image display device 70.
Next, another specific example of the variation effect (Variation effect example 12) will be described with reference to Figures 321 and 322. Variation effect example 12 includes two variation effects. The first of these two variation effects is a variation effect based on a game ball winning in the first start slot 121 in a special time-saving game state. The second variation effect is a variation effect based on a game ball winning in the second start slot 122 in a special time-saving game state.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned variable presentation examples and modified examples, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the above-mentioned variable presentation examples and modified examples.

First, as shown in Figure 321 (1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 700 and small symbol 704 on the first image display device 70. At this time, the text "700" is displayed in the remaining number of special time-saving times image 738. A background corresponding to the sixth stage is also displayed as the stage image 706. The number of reserved balls displayed 703 at the first starting gate 121 and the number of reserved balls displayed 703 at the second starting gate 122 both show "0." The top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c are all in the first mode. Although not shown, background music corresponding to the previous variation effect continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when a game ball enters the first starting slot 121, as shown in FIG. 321 (2), the decorative pattern 700 and small pattern 704 begin to change as the special pattern starts to change. Meanwhile, the reserved number display 703 of the first starting slot 121 continues to show "0." Neither the variable image 701 nor the reserved image 702 is displayed. The display content of the remaining number of special time-saving times image 738 is updated to "699." At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the first mode to the second mode.
Next, when the game ball enters the second start opening 122, as shown in FIG. 321 (3), the reserved number display 703 of the second start opening 122 displays "1." At this time, a step-by-step display effect is started, and the reserved image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode at a position above and away from the first reserved pedestal 702P. At this time, the sound output device 9 starts to output a winning sound.

Next, as shown in FIG. 321 (4), the staged display effect is completed, and the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the first reserved pedestal 702P. Although not shown, when the staged display effect is completed, the motion effect of the reserved image 702 is started. On the other hand, even when the staged display effect is completed, the reserved image 702 does not move to the variable pedestal 701P, but continues to be displayed on the first reserved pedestal 702P. The winning sound continues to be output until the staged display effect is completed, and is no longer output when the staged display effect is completed.
Also, at this time, when the game ball enters the second start opening 122, "2" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the second start opening 122. Also, at this time, a step-by-step display effect is started, and the reserved image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode at a position above and away from the second reserved pedestal 702P. Also, at this time, output of a winning sound from the audio output device 9 is started.

Next, as shown in Fig. 321 (5), the staged display effect is completed, and the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the second reserved pedestal 702P. Although not shown, when the staged display effect is completed, the motion effect of the second reserved image 702 is started. Furthermore, the winning sound that notifies the winning of the second starting hole 122 continues to be output until the staged display effect is completed, and is no longer output when the staged display effect is completed.
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704 "364" are fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. 321 (6).

Next, as shown in FIG. 322 (7), as the display of the next special symbol begins to change, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 begin to change. At this time, the reserved number display 703 of the second starting port 122 switches to "1." At this time, the second reserved image 702 moves toward the first reserved base 702P. The first reserved image 702 moves toward the variable base 701P and expands, thereby displaying the variable image 701. The display content of the special time-saving remaining number image 738 is updated to "698."
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704, "712," are fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. 322 (8). Also, the variable image 701 is no longer displayed.

(Variation example 13)
Figures 323 to 325 are figures showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the first image display device 70.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 13) will be described with reference to Figures 323 to 325. Variable effect example 13 is a variable effect based on the game ball entering the second start slot 122 in the special time-saving game state, and is a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned variable presentation examples and modified examples, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the above-mentioned variable presentation examples and modified examples.

First, as shown in Figure 323 (1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 fixes and stops the decorative symbol 700 and small symbol 704 on the first image display device 70. At this time, the remaining number of times for special time-saving play 738 displays the text "600." The stage image 706 also displays a background corresponding to the seventh stage. The seventh stage is set when mode "b" is selected in the special time-saving play selection image 735 (see Figure 299 (10)). The number of reserved balls indicators 703 for the first starting slot 121 and the number of reserved balls indicators 703 for the second starting slot 122 both display "0." The top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c are all in the first mode. Although not shown, background music corresponding to the previous variation effect continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when a gaming ball enters the second start opening 122, as shown in Figure 323 (2), the decorative symbol 700 and small symbol 704 begin to change as the special symbol begins to change. At this time, the decorative symbol 700 begins to change, and the small symbol 704 begins to change at high speed. The display content of the special time-saving remaining number image 738 is updated to "599." At this time, the reserved number display 703 in the second start opening 122 displays "1." At this time, a step-by-step display effect begins, and the reserved image 702 is displayed in a small size on the first reserved base 702P. At this time, the sound output device 9 begins to output a winning sound. At this time, the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c all switch from the first state to the second state.

Next, as shown in Figure 323 (3), the operation at the start of the fluctuation progresses. At this time, the step-by-step display performance is completed, and a rectangular reserved image 702 is displayed in the normal display mode on the first reserved base 702P. This reserved image 702 has a larger display size than the example shown in Figure 323 (2). The display mode of this rectangular reserved image 702 is the display mode corresponding to the seventh stage. Although not shown, once the step-by-step display performance is completed, the operation performance of the reserved image 702 begins. The winning sound continues to be output until the step-by-step display performance is completed, and is no longer output once the step-by-step display performance is completed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 323 (4), the start-of-variation operation ends, and the decorative pattern 700 changes at a high speed. Also, the reserved image 702 moves to the variable base 701P and expands, thereby displaying the variable image 701. Also, at this time, the reserved number display 703 of the first start port 121 switches to "0."
Next, when the game ball enters the second start opening 122, as shown in FIG. 323 (5), the reserved number display 703 of the second start opening 122 displays "1." At this time, a step-by-step display effect is started, and the reserved image 702 is displayed in a small size on the first reserved pedestal 702P. At this time, the sound output device 9 starts to output a winning sound.

Next, as shown in Figure 323 (6), the tiered display effect is completed, and the rectangular reserved image 702 is displayed in the normal display mode on the first reserved base 702P. Also, although not shown, once the tiered display effect is completed, the movement effect of the reserved image 702 begins. Also, the winning sound continues to be output until the tiered display effect is completed, and is no longer output once the tiered display effect is completed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 324 (7), the left decorative pattern 700 "4" temporarily stops, and then the right decorative pattern 700 "4" temporarily stops, and the reach effect begins.
Next, as shown in FIG. 324 (8), the "4" that is the middle decorative symbol 700 temporarily stops, and the "444" that is the doublet decorative symbol 700 temporarily stops. That is, the doublet decorative symbol 700 temporarily stops without performing either the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c switch from the second mode to the seventh mode. In the illustrated example, the top lamp 10b lights up orange, the board lamp 74b lights up yellow, the movable member lamp 74c lights up green, and the button lamp 17c lights up blue.

Then, as the special symbol stops fluctuating, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704, "444," are fixed and stopped, as shown in Figure 324 (9). At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c continue to be in the seventh mode. In the example shown, the top lamp 10b lights up yellow, the board lamp 74b lights up green, the movable member lamp 74c lights up blue, and the button lamp 17c lights up indigo.

Next, as shown in Figure 324 (10), an opening image 719 is displayed. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the seventh position to the second position.
Next, as shown in FIG. 324 (11), a first right-hit image 720 and a promotion image 721 are displayed.

Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the prompt image 721 was displayed, a round-in-progress image 722 and a round number image 723 are displayed, as shown in Fig. 324 (12). In the illustrated example, the round number image 723 displays the text "Round 1."
Next, when the final round is over, a special time-saving selection image 745 is displayed as shown in FIG. 325(13). In the illustrated example, the cursor is positioned over the “A” mode on the special time-saving selection image 745.
Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the special time-saving selection image 745 was displayed, the normal time-saving start image 724 is displayed as shown in FIG. 325 (14). At this time, a card warning image 739 and a game warning image 740 are also displayed.

Next, when the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving gaming state, as shown in Figure 325 (15), the decorative symbol 700 with low decorativeness, "444," is fixed and stopped on the first image display device 70. The small symbol 704 is also fixed and stopped with the number sequence "444," just like the decorative symbol 700. At this time, a background corresponding to the third stage is displayed as the stage image 706. A second right-hit image 725 and a remaining number of normal time-saving plays image 726 are also displayed. The reserved number display 703 of the first starting slot 121 shows "0," and the reserved number display 703 of the second starting slot 122 shows "1." One reserved image 702 is also displayed.

(Step-by-step display effect using rectangular reserved image 702 in normal display mode)
Next, a description will be given of a step-by-step display effect using the rectangular reserved image 702 in the normal display mode. Fig. 326 is a diagram showing an example of a step-by-step display effect using the rectangular reserved image 702 in the normal display mode.
The rectangular reserved image 702 in the normal display mode performs a four-stage display effect as a staged display effect. When a game ball enters the second starting hole 122, a highly transparent reserved image 702 is first displayed in white as the first stage of the staged display effect, as shown in FIG. 326(1). This reserved image 702 is a rectangular shape extending vertically. The display mode of the reserved image 702 in the first stage of the staged display effect is the display mode of the reserved image 702 shown in FIG. 323(2) and FIG. 323(5).

Next, as shown in FIG. 326 (2), as the second stage of the stage display effect, a reserved image 702 with a lower transparency than the first stage is displayed in white. This reserved image 702 is formed by a plurality of images, each of which is rectangular and extends vertically, arranged at a predetermined interval in the horizontal direction. In the illustrated example, in the reserved image 702, four rectangular images are arranged at a predetermined interval in the horizontal direction. This reserved image 702 is displayed at a larger display size than the first stage.
Next, as shown in Figure 324 (3), as the third stage of the stage display effect, a reserved image 702 with a lower transparency than the second stage is displayed in white. In the illustrated example, the reserved image 702 has six images each having a rectangular shape extending vertically, and is displayed in a row at a predetermined interval in the horizontal direction. This reserved image 702 is displayed in a larger display size than the second stage.

Next, as shown in Figure 324 (4), in the fourth stage, or final stage, of the staged display performance, a reserved image 702 with lower transparency than the third stage is displayed. This reserved image 702 is rectangular and extends left and right. Furthermore, this reserved image 702 is displayed at a larger display size than the third stage. The display mode of reserved image 702 in the final stage of the staged display performance is the display mode of reserved image 702 shown in Figures 323 (3) and 323 (6). That is, although not shown, after the reserved image 702 in the first stage shown in Figures 323 (2) and 323 (5) is displayed, the reserved image 702 in the second stage of the staged display performance is displayed, and then the reserved image 702 in the third stage of the staged display performance is displayed. Then, the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode shown in Figures 323 (3) and 323 (6) is displayed.

In this way, the change from the stage where lines are formed on the reserved image 702 (see Figure 326 (3)) to the stage where lines are not formed on the reserved image 702 (see Figure 326 (4)) can also be considered a change in the form of the reserved image 702. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the time from when the staged display performance begins to when the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode is displayed, i.e., the execution time of the staged display performance using the rectangular reserved image 702 in the normal display mode, is 0.2 seconds.

Furthermore, once the step-by-step display effect is completed, the motion effect of the reserved image 702 begins, as shown in Figure 326 (5). The rectangular reserved image 702 in the normal display mode periodically swings up and down as a motion effect. The swinging period in this motion effect is, for example, 2.0 seconds.

(Variation example 14)
Figures 327 and 328 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the first image display device 70.
Next, another specific example (variation presentation example 14) of the variation presentation of the decorative pattern 700 will be described with reference to Figures 327 and 328. Variation presentation example 14 is a variation presentation example based on winning at the first start slot 121 in normal gaming mode, and is a variation presentation example when the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned off and then restored while the variation presentation is being executed. In addition, the following explanation will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned variation presentation examples and each modified example, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the variation presentation examples and each modified example.

First, as shown in Figure 327 (1), the first special symbol display 60 stops displaying the variable display of the previous special symbol. Furthermore, the first special symbol reserve display 63 displays the number of reserved symbols for winning in the first starting gate 121 as "3." At this time, the decorative symbol 700 and small symbol 704 are fixed and stopped in the first image display device 70. Furthermore, the reserved symbol display 703 in the first starting gate 121 displays "3," and three reserved symbols 702 are displayed. Furthermore, the number of times played image 705 displays the text "150 GAMES," and the remaining number of times reached image 708 displays the text "350 more." Furthermore, the stage image 706 displays a background corresponding to the first stage. Furthermore, the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c are all in the second mode. Also, although not shown in the figure, the background music corresponding to the previous variable effect continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in Figure 327 (2), the first special pattern display 60 begins to display the next special pattern. Furthermore, the first special pattern reserve display 63 displays the number of reserved prizes for the first starting gate 121 as "2." Furthermore, as the display of the special pattern begins to change, the decorative pattern 700 and small pattern 704 begin to change. Furthermore, the reserve number display 703 for the first starting gate 121 switches to "2."

Next, when the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off, the LEDs on the first special symbol display 60 and the first special symbol reserved display 63 go out, as shown in Figure 327 (3). At this time, the first image display device 70, top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c all go out. Additionally, no sound is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restored, as shown in Fig. 327 (4), the variation of the special symbols on the first special symbol display 60 resumes. Also, on the first special symbol reserve display 63, the number of reserved symbols for the winning combination in the first starting slot 121 is displayed as "2".
Thereafter, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all enter the tenth mode, which is a light emission mode in which they light up yellow-green and is different from any of the first to ninth modes.
After that, a restoration in progress image 742 is displayed on the first image display device 70 .
On the other hand, since the power supply to the gaming machine 1 has been restored, no sound has been output from the audio output device 9.

After that, as shown in Figure 327 (5), the special pattern continues to change on the first special pattern display device 60. Also, the first image display device 70 continues to display the recovery image 742. Also, at this time, when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 121, the first special pattern reserve display device 63 displays the number of reserves for the winning ball in the first starting hole 121 as "3". Meanwhile, neither the reserve image 702 nor the reserve number display 703 is displayed on the first image display device 70.

Next, as shown in Figure 327 (6), the variable display of the special pattern stops on the first special pattern display 60.
After that, the non-display effect of the recovery image 742 begins, and the transparency of the recovery image 742 increases. As the transparency of the recovery image 742 increases, the decorative symbol 700, the reserved image 702, the reserved number display 703, the small symbol 704, the number of executions image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 become visible to the player, although not easily visible to the player. At this time, all three reserved images 702 are displayed in a completed display mode. In other words, the third reserved image 702 is displayed without being visible to the player in an incomplete display mode. Furthermore, no sound is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 328 (7), the non-display effect of the restoration image 742 ends, and the restoration image 742 is no longer displayed. As a result, the decorative symbol 700, the reserved image 702, the small symbol 704, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 are all easily visible to the player. At this time, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704, "135," are fixed and stopped. The reserved number display 703 of the first starting slot 121 shows "3." The execution count image 705 displays the text "151 GAMES," and the remaining number of times reached image 708 displays the text "349 remaining." Meanwhile, no sound is output from the audio output device 9.
At this time, the motion presentation of the three reserved images 702 is being executed, and all three reserved images 702 are rotating clockwise from their initial positions before the motion presentation started.

Next, as shown in Fig. 328 (8), a warning sound announcing that the next variable effect will start is output from the audio output device 9. For example, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound saying "Variable effect will start soon."
At this time, the motion presentation of the three reserved images 702 continues, and the three reserved images 702 further rotate in the clockwise direction.

Next, as shown in Fig. 328 (9), the first special symbol display 60 starts to display the next special symbol. Also, the first special symbol reserve display 63 displays the number of reserved symbols for the winning combination in the first starting slot 121 as "2".
Thereafter, as the display of the special symbol begins to change, the decorative symbol 700 and small symbol 704 begin to change. Also, the hold number display 703 at the first starting port 121 switches to "2." Also, as the first hold image 702 moves to the change base 701P, the change image 701 is displayed. Also, background music corresponding to the change performance being performed is output from the audio output device 9. Although not shown in the figure, after this, as the change of the special symbol stops, the decorative symbol 700 and small symbol 704 are fixed and stopped, and the change image 701 is no longer displayed.

Figure 329 is an explanatory diagram of each effect in variable effect example 14.
As shown in FIG. 329, at time T1 in variation presentation example 14, a variation presentation in the normal game state begins. At this time, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 begin to vary, and the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 are easily visible to the player. Also, at this time, the motion presentation of the variable image 701 and the two reserved images 702 is being executed, and the variable image 701 and the two reserved images 702 are easily visible to the player. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the second mode. Also, at this time, background music corresponding to the currently executing variation presentation is being output from the audio output device 9. The state at time T1 is the state shown in FIG. 327 (2).

Then, at time T2, the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off. At this time, the decorative pattern 700, variable image 701, reserved image 702, and small pattern 704 are no longer displayed. At this time, the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c are all turned off. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9. The state at time T2 is the state shown in Figure 327 (3).

Thereafter, at time T3, the power to the gaming machine 1 is restored.
Thereafter, at time T4, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all assume the tenth mode.
Thereafter, at time T5, a recovery in progress image 742 is displayed. The state at time T5 is the state shown in FIG. 327(4).
After that, at time T6, the game ball enters the first starting hole 121.

After that, at time T7, the variable effect that had been started before the power to the gaming machine 1 was shut off ends. At this time, the non-display effect of the recovery image 742 begins. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 and small pattern 704 are fixed and stopped, and the decorative pattern 700 and small pattern 704 become visible to the player. At this time, the display of the third reserved image 702 begins. This third reserved image 702 is displayed in a completed display mode. At this time, the operation effect of the three reserved images 702 is being executed. At this time, all three reserved images 702 become visible to the player. At this time, the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c all switch from the tenth mode to the second mode. The state at time T7 is the state shown in Figure 327 (6).

Then, at time T8, the non-display effect of the restoration image 742 ends, and the restoration image 742 is no longer displayed. At this time, the decorative symbol 700, the three reserved images 702, and the small symbol 704 are all easily visible to the player. The state at time T8 is the state shown in FIG. 328(7).
Thereafter, at time T9, a warning sound announcing that the next variable effect will start is output from the sound output device 9. The state at time T9 is the state shown in FIG. 328(8).

After that, at time T10, the next variation effect starts. At this time, the decorative symbols 700 and the small symbols 704 start to vary. At this time, background music corresponding to the variation effect being performed is output from the audio output device 9.
After that, at time T11, the first reserved image 702 moves to the variable base 701P, and the display of the variable image 701 begins. The state at time T11 is shown in FIG. 328 (9).
This is the state shown in Figure 1.

As described above, in this embodiment, if a prize is won after the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off and the special pattern that was being executed at the time of power cut is changing, i.e., while the recovery image 742 is being displayed, the pending image 702 in the completed display mode is displayed without the pending image 702 in the incomplete display mode being visible to the player.
In this case, since the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode is not visible to the player, the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode can be seen by the player immediately after the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned off and then restored. Therefore, the player can be made aware immediately that a reservation will be generated by winning at the first start gate 121 while the restoration image 742 is being displayed, that is, when the decorative pattern 700 and the stage image 706 are not being displayed, and this can give the player a sense of security.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off and then restored while there is a hold, the hold image 702 displays an operation before the next change in the change being executed when the power is restored is started (see Figure 328 (7)).
In this case, the reserved image 702 becomes more noticeable than when no action is displayed on the reserved image 702. Therefore, it is possible to make the player quickly recognize that the reserved game has not been lost when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off and then restored while there is a hold, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are displayed as still images when they are redisplayed, but the hold image 702 is displayed as an animated image.
In this case, it is possible to prevent confusion on the part of the player that may occur when the decorative symbol 700 or the small symbol 704 is displayed in an operational state when it is redisplayed, and that the player is unable to recognize which variation this operational display corresponds to. In addition, it is possible to make the player more aware that the reserved positions held when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off are not lost due to the power cut off.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is executed, the reserved images 702 that have been hidden are gradually re-displayed (see Fig. 279 (15) and Fig. 279 (16)). On the other hand, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off and then restored while there is a reserved image, the reserved images 702 that have been hidden are displayed all at once (see Fig. 328 (7)).
In this case, when the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is executed, it is possible to make the player aware that the hidden reserved image 702 has not disappeared, while suppressing the sense of incongruity caused by the re-display of the stage image 706, etc. Furthermore, when the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned off and then restored, it is possible to make the player aware immediately that the reserved image at the time of the power outage has not been lost due to the power outage, thereby giving the player a sense of security. In other words, by varying the manner in which the reserved image 702 is re-displayed depending on whether the reserved image 702 was hidden by the effect, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is executed, the hidden variable image 701 and the reserved image 702 are both redisplayed (see FIG. 279 (16)). On the other hand, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is turned off and then restored while there is a reserved image, the hidden variable image 701 is not redisplayed, but the reserved image 702 is redisplayed (see FIG. 328 (9)).
In this case, when an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect is executed, the player can be made to recognize that this SP reach effect or SPSP reach effect has been executed in a variable effect based on the variable image 701. Furthermore, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is turned off and then restored while there is a reserved game, the variable image 701 is redisplayed, which can prevent the player from misunderstanding that the variable effect that was being executed when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 was turned off will be executed again.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off and then restored while there is a hold, the hold image 702 is displayed before the sound effect is output (see Figures 328 (7) and 328 (8)).
In this case, the player can be made aware of the number of reserved balls before the variable presentation starts after the power to the gaming machine 1 is restored.

In particular, in this embodiment, if a prize is won in a special time-saving game state before the start of the special effect, the sound output mode is switched before the display of the reserved image 702 is completed. On the other hand, if the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned off and then restored while a reserved game exists, the display of the reserved image 702 is completed before the sound effect is output. In other words, the chronological relationship between the sound output timing and the display timing of the reserved image 702 is reversed depending on whether the reserved image 702 is not displayed because there is no reserved game, or the reserved image 702 is not displayed even though there is a reserved game.
In this case, depending on the state of the gaming machine 1, the player is made to quickly recognize that a special time-saving gaming state will begin, or the number of reserved balls is made to quickly recognize the number of reserved balls, thereby making it difficult for the player's interest to decrease regardless of the state of the gaming machine 1.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is turned off and then turned back on, a sound effect is output after the restoration image 742 is no longer displayed.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking the output sound effect for a sound related to the power being restored, and to make the player aware that the effect will resume.

In particular, in this embodiment, if a prize is won while a specific image is displayed in the special time-saving game state before the start of the special effect, the sound output mode is switched before the specific image is hidden. On the other hand, if the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned off and then restored, the effect sound is output after the restoration image 742 is hidden. In other words, the chronological relationship between the sound output timing and the image non-display timing is reversed depending on whether an image is displayed based on a change in the state of the gaming machine 1.
In this case, depending on whether an image is displayed based on a change in the state of the gaming machine 1, the player is made to recognize the effect while suppressing misunderstandings by the player, or the player is made to recognize the effect as soon as possible, thereby making it difficult for the player's interest to decrease regardless of the state of the gaming machine 1.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is turned off and then restored, a sound effect is output after the decorative pattern 700 is displayed.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking the output sound for a sound related to the power being restored, and to make the player recognize that the output sound is a sound related to a variable effect.

In particular, in this embodiment, if a win occurs during the special time-saving game state before the start of the special effect, the sound output mode is switched before the decorative symbol 700 becomes easily visible. On the other hand, if the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off and then restored, the effect sound is output after the decorative symbol 700 becomes easily visible. In other words, depending on whether the decorative symbol 700 has become invisible based on a change in the state of the gaming machine 1, the effect is either made visible to the player while suppressing player misconception, or made visible to the player as soon as possible, thereby making it less likely that the player's interest will decrease regardless of the state of the gaming machine 1.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is turned off and then restored, a sound effect is output after the small symbol 704 is displayed.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking the output sound for a sound related to the power being restored, and to make the player recognize that the output sound is a sound related to a variable effect.

In particular, in this embodiment, if a win occurs during the special time-saving game state before the start of the special effect, the sound output mode is switched before the small symbols 704 become easily visible. On the other hand, if the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off and then restored, the effect sound is output after the small symbols 704 become easily visible. In other words, depending on whether the small symbols 704 have become invisible based on a change in the state of the gaming machine 1, the effect is either made visible to the player while suppressing player misconception, or made visible to the player as soon as possible, making it possible to prevent a decline in the player's interest regardless of the state of the gaming machine 1.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is turned off and then restored, the top lamp 10b emits light and then a sound effect is output.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking the output sound for a sound related to the power being restored, and to make the player recognize that the output sound is a sound related to the performance.

In particular, in this embodiment, if a win occurs during the special time-saving game state before the start of the special effect, the sound output mode is switched before the mode of the top lamp 10b is switched. On the other hand, if the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off and then restored, the sound effect is output after the top lamp 10b switches from an off state to an illuminating state. In other words, depending on whether the top lamp 10b has entered a specific state based on a change in the state of the gaming machine 1, the player is either made aware of the effect while suppressing player misconception, or is made aware of the effect immediately, making it possible to prevent a decline in the player's interest regardless of the state of the gaming machine 1.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is turned off and then restored, the effect sound is output after the board lamp 74b lights up.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking the output sound for a sound related to the power being restored, and to make the player recognize that the output sound is a sound related to the performance.

In particular, in this embodiment, if a win occurs during the special time-saving game state before the start of the special effect, the sound output mode is switched before the mode of the board lamp 74b is switched. On the other hand, if the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off and then restored, the sound effect is output after the board lamp 74b switches from an off state to an illuminating state. In other words, depending on whether the board lamp 74b has changed to a specific state based on a change in the state of the gaming machine 1, the player is either made aware of the effect while suppressing player misconception, or is made aware of the effect immediately, making it less likely that the player's interest will decrease regardless of the state of the gaming machine 1.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is turned off and then restored, the effect sound is output after the movable member lamp 74c and the button lamp 17c emit light.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking the output sound for a sound related to the power being restored, and to make the player recognize that the output sound is a sound related to the performance.

In particular, in this embodiment, if a win occurs during the special time-saving game state before the start of the special effect, the sound output mode is switched before the state of the movable member lamp 74c and button lamp 17c is switched. On the other hand, if the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off and then restored, the sound effect is output after the movable member lamp 74c and button lamp 17c switch from an off state to an illuminating state. In other words, by making the player aware of the effect while suppressing player misconception, or by making the player aware of the effect immediately, depending on whether the movable member lamp 74c and button lamp 17c have entered a specific state based on a change in the state of the gaming machine 1, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's interest, regardless of the state of the gaming machine 1.

(Variation example 15)
Figures 330 and 331 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the first image display device 70.
Next, another specific example (variation presentation example 15) of the variation presentation of the decorative pattern 700 will be described with reference to Figures 330 and 331. Variation presentation example 15 is a variation presentation example based on winning at the second start slot 122 in a special time-saving game state, and is a variation presentation example when the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned off and then restored during the execution of the variation presentation. In addition, the following explanation will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned variation presentation examples and each modified example, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the variation presentation examples and each modified example.

First, as shown in Figure 330 (1), the variable display of the previous special symbol is stopped on the second special symbol display 61. Furthermore, on the first special symbol reserve display 63, the reserved number for winning at the first starting gate 121 is displayed as "0," i.e., it is unlit. Furthermore, on the second special symbol reserve display 64, the reserved number for winning at the second starting gate 122 is displayed as "3." At this time, the decorative symbol 700 and small symbol 704 are fixed and stopped on the first image display device 70. Furthermore, the reserved number display 703 for the first starting gate 121 displays "0," and the reserved number display 703 for the second starting gate 122 displays "3." Furthermore, three reserved images 702 are displayed. Furthermore, the text "700" is displayed on the remaining number image 738 for the special time-saving feature. Furthermore, a background corresponding to the sixth stage is shown as the stage image 706. Additionally, the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c are all in the second state. Also, although not shown, the background music corresponding to the previous variable effect continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in Figure 330 (2), the second special symbol display 61 begins to display the next special symbol. Furthermore, the second special symbol reserve display 64 displays the number of reserved symbols for winning at the second starting port 122 as "2." Furthermore, as the display of the special symbol begins to change, the decorative symbol 700 and small symbol 704 begin to change. Furthermore, the reserved symbol display 703 at the second starting port 122 switches to "2." Furthermore, the display content of the remaining number of special time-saving symbols image 738 is updated to "699."

Next, when the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off, as shown in Figure 330 (3), the LEDs in the second special pattern display device 61, first special pattern reserved display device 63, and second special pattern reserved display device 64 go out. At this time, the first image display device 70, top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c all go out. In addition, no sound is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restored, as shown in Fig. 330 (4), the variation of the special symbols on the second special symbol display 61 resumes. Also, the second special symbol reserve display 64 displays the number of reserved symbols for winning the second starting slot 122 as "2".
Thereafter, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all assume the tenth mode.
Thereafter, the first image display device 70 displays the recovery image 742 and the second right-hit image 725 .
On the other hand, since the power supply to the gaming machine 1 has been restored, no sound has been output from the audio output device 9.

After that, as shown in Figure 330 (5), the special symbol continues to change on the second special symbol display device 61. Furthermore, the first image display device 70 continues to display the recovery image 742. Furthermore, at this time, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 121, the first special symbol reserve display device 63 displays the number of reserved balls for the winning ball in the first starting hole 121 as "1". Meanwhile, neither the reserved image 702 nor the reserved number display 703 is displayed on the first image display device 70. Furthermore, no sound is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 121, as shown in Figure 330 (6), the first special symbol reserve display 63 displays the number of reserved balls for the winning entry into the first starting hole 121 as "2". Meanwhile, the first image display device 70 does not display either the reserved image 702 or the reserved number display 703. Furthermore, no sound is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 122, as shown in Figure 331 (7), the second special symbol reserve display 64 displays the number of reserved balls for the winning entry into the second starting hole 122 as "3." Meanwhile, neither the reserved image 702 nor the reserved number display 703 is displayed on the first image display device 70.

Next, as shown in Figure 331 (8), the variable display of the special pattern stops on the second special pattern display 61.
After that, the non-display effect of the restoration image 742 begins, and as the transparency of the restoration image 742 increases, the decorative symbol 700, the reserved image 702, the reserved number display 703, the small symbol 704, the stage image 706, and the special time-saving remaining number image 738 become visible to the player, although not easily visible to the player. At this time, the third reserved image 702 is displayed in a completed display mode without a step-by-step display effect. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in Figure 331 (9), the non-display effect of the recovery image 742 ends, and the recovery image 742 is no longer displayed. This makes the decorative symbol 700, reserved image 702, small symbol 704, execution count image 705, stage image 706, and remaining special time-saving count image 738 easily visible to the player. At this time, the decorative symbol 700 and small symbol 704, "135," are fixed and stopped. The reserved count display 703 of the first start slot 121 shows "2," and the reserved count display 703 of the second start slot 122 shows "3." The remaining special time-saving count image 738 displays the text "699." At this time, the motion effect of the reserved image 702 is being executed, and all three reserved images 702 have moved to the right from their initial positions before the motion effect began. At this time, no sound is being output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in Figure 331 (10), a warning sound is output from the audio output device 9 to warn that the next change effect will begin. At this time, the motion effect of the reserved images 702 continues, and all three reserved images 702 have moved to the left from their initial positions before the motion effect began.

Next, as shown in FIG. 331 (11), the second special symbol display 61 starts to display the next special symbol. Also, the second special symbol reserve display 64 displays the number of reserved symbols for the winning combination in the second starting slot 122 as "2".
Thereafter, as the display of the special symbol begins to change, the decorative symbol 700 and small symbol 704 begin to change. In addition, the reserved number display 703 in the second starting port 122 switches to "2." In addition, the first reserved image 702 moves to the changing base 701P, and the changing image 701 is displayed. In addition, background music corresponding to the changing performance being performed is output from the audio output device 9. Although not shown in the figure, after this, as the special symbol stops changing, the decorative symbol 700 and small symbol 704 are fixed and stopped, and the changing image 701 is no longer displayed.

(Variation example 16)
Figures 332 to 334 are figures showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the first image display device 70.
Next, another specific example (variation presentation example 16) of the variation presentation of the decorative pattern 700 will be described with reference to Figures 332 to 334. Variation presentation example 16 is an example of the first variation presentation based on winning at the first start slot 121 in a special time-saving gaming state, and is an example of a variation presentation when the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned off and then restored while the variation presentation is being executed. In addition, the following explanation will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned variation presentation examples and each modified example, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the variation presentation examples and each modified example.

First, in the normal game mode, the final variable effect of the predetermined number of times required to enter the special time-saving game mode is completed, and the gaming machine 1 is controlled to enter the special time-saving game mode. Furthermore, if a predetermined time has passed since the final variable effect ended without a game ball entering either the first starting slot 121 or the second starting slot 122, a customer waiting image 710 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 332 (1). Furthermore, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all enter the eighth mode. At this time, an alarm sound is output from the audio output device 9 to indicate that the special time-saving game mode has been entered. The state shown in FIG. 332 (1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 306 (5) in the variable effect example 10.
In addition, the second special symbol reserved indicator 64 displays the number of reserved wins in the second starting hole 122 as "0." In other words, the LED in the second special symbol reserved indicator 64 is turned off.

Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, as shown in Figure 332 (2), the sound output device 9 begins to output a sound effect indicating that the game machine 1 has been controlled to a special time-saving game state.
Next, as shown in FIG. 332(3), the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the eighth position to the second position.
Next, as shown in FIG. 332 (4), the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 is initiated, and the transparency of the customer waiting image 710 increases, so that the decorative symbol 700, the small symbol 704, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining count image 708 are visible to the player, although not easily visible to the player. The stage image 706 also shows a background corresponding to the first stage. At this time, the sound output device 9 continues to output a sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving game state.

Next, as shown in Figure 332 (5), the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 progresses, and the transparency of the customer waiting image 710 becomes even higher. At this time, as the display of the special symbol begins to change, the decorative symbol 700 and small symbol 704 begin to change. At this time, the decorative symbol 700 begins to change, and the small symbol 704 begins to change at high speed. At this time, "1" is displayed in the hold number display 703 of the first start port 121. At this time, the display of the hold image 702 begins. Meanwhile, the step-by-step display effect is not executed, and the hold image 702 is displayed in a completed display mode. At this time, the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to a special time-saving gaming state continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in Figure 332 (6), the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 ends, and the customer waiting image 710 is no longer displayed. As a result, the decorative symbol 700, reserved image 702, small symbol 704, execution count image 705, stage image 706, and remaining count image 708 become easily visible to the player. Also, at this time, the start of the variation operation is in progress. Also, at this time, the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to a special time-saving gaming state continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in Figure 333 (7), the fluctuation start operation ends, and the decorative pattern 700 fluctuates at a high speed. Furthermore, the pending image 702 moves to the fluctuation base 701P and expands, displaying the fluctuating image 701. At this time, the pending number display 703 in the first starting slot 121 switches to "0." Also, at this time, the countdown image 732, "0," is displayed. Also, at this time, the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to a special time-saving gaming state is no longer output from the audio output device 9. Also, although not shown, background music corresponding to the fluctuating effect currently being performed is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off, as shown in Figure 333 (8), the first image display device 70, top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c all turn off. In addition, sound will no longer be output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restored, the variable display of the special symbols resumes. After that, as shown in FIG. 333 (9), the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all become the tenth mode.
After that, a recovery image 742 is displayed on the first image display device 70. Meanwhile, no sound is output from the audio output device 9.
Furthermore, when the recovery image 742 is displayed, if a game ball enters the second start hole 122, the second special symbol reserve display 64 displays the number of reserved balls for the entry into the second start hole 122 as "1." On the other hand, neither the reserved image 702 nor the reserved number display 703 is displayed on the first image display device 70.

Next, when the special symbol stops fluctuating, as shown in Figure 333 (10), the non-display effect of the recovery image 742 begins, and the transparency of the recovery image 742 increases. As the transparency of the recovery image 742 increases, the decorative symbol 700, reserved image 702, reserved number display 703, small symbol 704, stage image 706, and remaining number of special time-saving turns image 738 become visible to the player, although not easily visible to the player. At this time, the reserved image 702 is displayed in a completed display mode without a step-by-step display effect. A background corresponding to the sixth stage is displayed as the stage image 706. At this time, the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c all switch from the tenth mode to the second mode. No sound is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in Figure 333 (11), the non-display effect of the recovery image 742 ends, and the recovery image 742 is no longer displayed. As a result, the decorative symbol 700, reserved image 702, small symbol 704, execution count image 705, stage image 706, and remaining special time-saving count image 738 become easily visible to the player. At this time, the decorative symbol 700 and small symbol 704, "135," are fixed and stopped. The reserved count display 703 of the first start port 121 shows "0," and the reserved count display 703 of the second start port 122 shows "1." The remaining special time-saving count image 738 displays the text "749." At this time, the motion effect of the reserved image 702 is being executed, and the reserved image 702 has moved to the left from its initial position before the motion effect began. At this time, no sound is being output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in Figure 333 (12), a warning sound is output from the audio output device 9 to warn that the next change effect will begin. At this time, the motion effect of the reserved image 702 continues, and the reserved image 702 moves to the right from its initial position before the motion effect began.

Next, when the display of the special symbol changes begins, the decorative symbol 700 and small symbol 704 start changing, as shown in Figure 334 (13). The reserved number display 703 in the second starting port 122 also switches to "0". The first reserved image 702 moves to the changing base 701P, causing the changing image 701 to be displayed. The display content of the remaining number of special time-saving images 738 is updated to "748". BGM corresponding to the changing performance currently being performed is output from the audio output device 9. Although not shown in the figure, after this, as the special symbol stops changing, the decorative symbol 700 and small symbol 704 are fixed and stopped, and the changing image 701 is no longer displayed.

As described above, in this embodiment, if the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off and then restored while the special time-saving game state is changing and a special image corresponding to the normal game state is being displayed, a special image corresponding to the special time-saving game state will be displayed.
In this case, even if the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off, the player can be made to quickly recognize that the gaming machine 1 is in a special time-saving gaming state.

Note that if power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off and then restored while fluctuations in the special time-saving game state are stopped and the decorative pattern 700 and stage image 706 corresponding to the normal game state are being displayed, the decorative pattern 700 and stage image 706 corresponding to the normal game state will be displayed again. In this case, the special image corresponding to the special time-saving game state will not be displayed unless a win occurs in the first start slot 121 or the second start slot 122.

(Variation example 17)
Figures 335 and 336 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the first image display device 70.
Next, another specific example (variation presentation example 17) of the variation presentation of the decorative pattern 700 will be described with reference to Figures 335 and 336. Variation presentation example 17 is a variation presentation example based on winning at the first start slot 121 in normal gaming mode, and is a variation presentation example when the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned off and then restored during the execution of the variation presentation. In addition, the following explanation will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned variation presentation examples and each modified example, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the variation presentation examples and each modified example.

First, the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving gaming state, and then the final variable effect in the special time-saving gaming state ends. The gaming machine 1 is then controlled back to the normal gaming state without being controlled to the special time-saving gaming state. In this case, as shown in FIG. 335 (1), the highly decorative symbol 700 "421" is fixed and stopped on the first image display device 70. At this time, a background corresponding to the fifth stage is displayed as the stage image 706 corresponding to the normal gaming state. Four reserved images 702, a number of executions image 705, and a left-hit image 730 are also displayed. The number of executions image 705 displays the text "1253 GAME." The variable display of the previous special symbol is stopped on the first special symbol display 60. The first special symbol reserved display 63 displays the number of reserved wins for the first starting slot 121 as "4." The state shown in Figure 335 (1) is the same as the state shown in Figure 302 (29) in Variation Presentation Example 9.

Next, as the special symbol stops changing, the first special symbol display 60 begins displaying the next special symbol, as shown in Figure 335 (2). The first special symbol reserve display 63 also displays the number of reserved wins in the first starting slot 121 as "3." As the special symbol starts to change, the decorative symbol 700 and small symbol 704 begin to change. BGM corresponding to the ongoing change performance is also output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off, the LEDs on the first special symbol display 60 and the first special symbol reserved display 63 go out, as shown in Figure 335 (3). At this time, the first image display device 70, top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c all go out. Additionally, no sound is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restored, as shown in Fig. 335 (4), the variation of the special symbols on the first special symbol display 60 resumes. Also, the first special symbol reserve display 63 displays the number of reserved symbols for winning the first starting slot 121 as "3".
Thereafter, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all become the 10 mode.
After that, a restoration in progress image 742 is displayed on the first image display device 70 .
On the other hand, no sound is output from the audio output device 9.

After that, as shown in Figure 335 (5), the special pattern continues to change on the first special pattern display device 60. Also, the first image display device 70 continues to display the recovery image 742. Also, at this time, when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 121, the first special pattern reserve display device 63 displays the number of reserved balls for the winning entry into the first starting hole 121 as "4". Meanwhile, neither the reserved image 702 nor the reserved number display 703 is displayed on the first image display device 70.

Next, as shown in Figure 335 (6), the variable display of the special pattern stops on the first special pattern display 60.
After that, the non-display effect of the recovery image 742 begins, and the transparency of the recovery image 742 increases, so that the decorative symbol 700, the reserved image 702, the reserved number display 703, the small symbol 704, the execution count image 705, and the stage image 706 are visible to the player, although not easily visible to the player. At this time, the fourth reserved image 702 is displayed in a completed display mode without a staged display effect. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the tenth mode to the second mode. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 336 (7), the non-display effect of the recovery image 742 ends, and the recovery image 742 is no longer displayed. This allows the decorative symbol 700, reserved image 702, small symbol 704, execution count image 705, and stage image 706 to be easily visible to the player. Furthermore, the decorative symbol 700 and small symbol 704, "135," are fixed and stopped. Furthermore, the reserved number display 703 of the first starting slot 121 shows "4." Furthermore, the stage image 706 shows a background corresponding to the first stage. Furthermore, at this time, the motion effect of the reserved image 702 is being executed, and all four reserved images 702 are rotating clockwise from their initial positions before the motion effect began. Furthermore, no sound is output from the audio output device 9 at this time.
Here, the execution count image 705 displays content that is different from the content displayed immediately before the power to the gaming machine 1 was cut off (see FIG. 335(2)). In the illustrated example, the execution count image 705 displays the text "???".

Next, as shown in Figure 336 (8), a warning sound is output from the audio output device 9 to warn that the next variable effect will begin. Also, at this time, the motion effect of the reserved images 702 continues, and the four reserved images 702 continue to rotate clockwise.

Next, as shown in Fig. 336 (9), the first special symbol display 60 starts to display the next special symbol. Also, the first special symbol reserve display 63 displays the number of reserved symbols for the winning combination in the first starting slot 121 as "3".
After that, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 begin to change. The hold number display 703 in the first starting slot 121 switches to "3." BGM corresponding to the currently executing change effect is output from the audio output device 9. At this time, a "through" effect is executed. The "through" effect is an effect that notifies the gaming machine 1 that it has returned to the normal gaming state without executing a change effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot in the special time-saving gaming state. In the "through" effect, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all enter the 11th mode. The 11th mode is a light-emitting mode that periodically flashes purple and is different from any of the 1st to 10th modes. The flashing period in the 11th mode is, for example, 2.0 seconds. In other words, the blinking period in the eleventh mode is longer than the blinking period in the light-emitting effect when a win occurs and the blinking period that indicates or notifies of the occurrence of an error.

In this way, the special time-saving game mode can be executed only once between jackpots, and if the power is cut off and then restored during normal game mode after the special time-saving game mode has ended, a specific notification can be issued (displaying "???" on the execution count image 705, and the lamp lighting up in a specific manner) to indicate that the special time-saving game mode has been executed. This allows for a friendly notification to be given to the player, making it possible to increase their interest in the game.

In addition, the special time-saving game mode can only be executed once between jackpots, and if the power is interrupted and then restored during normal game mode after the special time-saving game mode has ended, a first notification can be issued to notify players that the power has been restored (display of the restoration image 742), and a second notification can be issued to indicate that the special time-saving game mode has been executed (display of the execution count image 705 "???" and the lamp illuminating in a specific manner). This allows for friendly notifications to be given to players, making it possible to increase their interest in the game.

In addition, if the power is cut off and then restored during normal game mode after the special time-saving game mode has ended, the error lamp is flashed with a specific notification, but the flashing is made in a manner different from when an error (magnetic error, etc.) occurs.
In addition, a specific notification is made by changing the information (the execution count image 705) displayed during the normal game state to a specific display mode ("???").
Furthermore, when control is exercised from the special time-saving gaming state into the normal gaming state without going through a jackpot game, "???" may be displayed on the execution count image 705 regardless of whether the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off. In other words, during the normal gaming state after the special time-saving gaming state ends and before the power is restored after being cut off, a first specific notification (execution count image 705 "???") may be issued, and after the power is restored after being cut off, both the first specific notification and the second specific notification (light emission of the lamp in a specific mode) may be issued.

Furthermore, if the gaming machine 1 is powered off while controlled from the special time-saving game state to the normal game state and then returns to the normal state, it will be set to the first stage. However, even in this case, the clear negation image 744 will be displayed. On the other hand, if the gaming machine 1 is powered off while controlled from the special time-saving game state to the normal game state without going through a jackpot game and then returns to the normal state, the clear negation image 744 will not be displayed. In other words, if the power is powered off in the second presentation mode (fifth stage) after the special time-saving game state ends and then returns to the normal state, even if the machine is controlled to the first presentation mode (first stage) after the return, a specific notification regarding whether or not the RAM has been cleared (such as displaying the clear negation image 744) can be executed. On the other hand, if the power is powered off in the second presentation mode (fifth stage) after the special time-saving game state ends and then returns to the normal state, even if the machine is controlled to the first presentation mode (first stage) after the return, a specific notification regarding whether or not the RAM has been cleared (such as displaying the clear negation image 744) will not be executed. This allows useful information to be communicated to the player, increasing the player's interest in the game.

In this embodiment, it has been explained that when the gaming machine 1 is controlled to a special time-saving gaming state, and then is controlled to a normal gaming state again without being controlled to the special time-saving gaming state, and the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off and then restored, the text "???" is displayed on the execution count image 705, but this is not limited to this.
When the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-shortened gaming state and then controlled to the normal gaming state again without being controlled to the special time-shortened gaming state, the text "???" may be displayed on the execution count image 705 when the stage image 706 corresponding to the normal gaming state is displayed (see Figure 335 (1)), regardless of whether the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off or not.

(Example of variation 18)
Figure 337 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the first image display device 70.
Next, another specific example (variation presentation example 18) of the variation presentation of the decorative pattern 700 will be described with reference to Fig. 337. Variation presentation example 18 is a variation presentation example when a game ball enters the second start opening 122 while a pre-reading presentation based on a win in the first start opening 121 is being executed. In addition, the following explanation will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned variation presentation examples and each modified example, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the variation presentation examples and each modified example.

First, as shown in Figure 337 (1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the decorative symbol 700 and small symbol 704 are fixed and stopped by the performance control unit 300. At this time, two reserved images 702 are displayed. The second reserved image 702 is displayed in green. The display of this green reserved image 702 is an example of a pre-reading performance. A background corresponding to the first stage is displayed as a stage image 706. The top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c are all in their second forms. Although not shown, background music corresponding to the previous variation performance is continuously output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in Figure 337 (2), as the display of the next special symbol begins to change, the decorative symbol 700 and small symbol 704 begin to change. At this time, the zone effect begins, and the zone notification image 743 is displayed. While the zone effect is being performed, the display content of the stage image 706 changes. In the example shown, the background corresponding to the eighth stage is displayed as the stage image 706.

Next, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 122, "1" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the second starting hole 122, as shown in Figure 337 (3).
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704, "412," temporarily stop and then finally stop, as shown in FIG. 337(4). At this time, the display mode of the first reserved image 702 switches from the green display mode to the normal display mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 337 (5), as the display of the next special symbol begins to change, the decorative symbol 700 and small symbol 704 begin to change. Also, the pending number display 703 for the second starting gate 122 switches to "0." In other words, the change effect being performed at this time is a change effect based on winning at the second starting gate 122. Also, at this time, the zone notification image 743 is hidden. Also, a background corresponding to the first stage is displayed as the stage image 706.

Next, as the special symbols stop changing, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704, "721," stop as shown in Figure 337 (6). After this, the first reserved image 702 moves to the changing base 701P, and a changing effect based on winning at the first starting slot 121 is executed. During this changing effect, the changing image 701 is displayed in the normal display mode, and when the changing effect ends, the changing image 701 is no longer displayed.

In this way, when a change based on a win at the second start port 122 is prioritized over a change based on a win at the first start port 121, if a win at the second start port 122 occurs during normal gameplay and a look-ahead effect based on a win at the first start port 121 is being executed, the look-ahead effect based on a win at the first start port 121 will end. This eliminates the inconvenience of the look-ahead effect based on a win at the first start port 121 being disrupted by a win at the second start port 122, making the game more enjoyable.

In addition, the special 1 pre-reading effect (display of the green pending image 702) ends at the timing (end timing) when the change based on winning at the first starting port 121 is confirmed.
Also, when a pre-reading effect in which the background changes is in progress, the pre-reading effect is ended at the timing when the change starts based on winning at the second starting port 122.
Furthermore, for example, when a look-ahead effect is being executed based on a winning entry into the first start port 121, a game ball may enter the second start port 122 while the variable effect based on a winning entry into the first start port 121 is stopped. In this case, the look-ahead effect is ended at the timing of the winning entry into the second start port 122.

(Example of variation 19)
Figure 338 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the first image display device 70.
Next, another specific example of the variable presentation (variable presentation example 19) will be described with reference to Fig. 338. Variable presentation example 19 is a variable presentation example based on winning the second starting slot 122 in the normal game state. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variable presentation examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the above-mentioned variable presentation examples may be omitted.

First, the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving gaming state, and then the final variable presentation in the special time-saving gaming state ends, causing the gaming machine 1 to return to the normal gaming state without being controlled to the special time-saving gaming state. Then, as shown in FIG. 338 (1), the first image display device 70 displays the first transition image 728. Furthermore, the reserved number display 703 of the first starting port 121 shows "0," and the reserved number display 703 of the second starting port 122 shows "1." At this time, the small symbol 704, "254," is also displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 338 (2), the small symbol 704 starts to change as the display of the next special symbol starts to change. Also, the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 122 switches to "0." Also, at this time, if a game ball enters the first start port, the reserved number display 703 of the first start port 121 displays "1." Meanwhile, the reserved image 702 is not displayed, and no winning sound is output to notify the player of the entry into the first start port 121.
However, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 121 while the first transition image 728 is displayed, a winning sound may be output.

Next, as the special symbol stops changing, the three small symbols 704, "421," are displayed together and fixed, as shown in Figure 338 (3). Also, at this time, if a game ball enters the first starting slot, "2" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the first starting slot 121. Meanwhile, the reserved image 702 is not displayed, and no winning sound is output to notify the player of a winning ball entering the first starting slot 121.

When the variable effect based on winning at the second start port 122 ends without any pending results based on winning at the second start port 122, the highly decorative pattern 700 "421" is fixed and stopped on the first image display device 70, as shown in Figure 338 (4). At this time, a background corresponding to the fifth stage is displayed as a stage image 706 corresponding to the normal game state. At this time, two pending images 702 are displayed. These two pending images 702 are displayed in a completed display mode without a step-by-step display effect. Although not shown, both pending images 702 are performing an action effect. The variable image 701 is not displayed.

Next, as the special symbol stops changing, the decorative symbol 700 and small symbol 704 begin to change, as shown in Figure 338 (5). At this time, the hold number display 703 of the first starting port 121 displays "1". At this time, the second hold image 702 moves toward the first hold base 702P. Furthermore, as the first hold image 702 moves toward the change base 701P, the change image 701 is displayed. Although not shown in the figure, after this, as the special symbol stops changing, the decorative symbol 700 and small symbol 704 are fixed and stopped.

(Variation example 20)
Figures 339 to 345 are figures showing example 20 of variable performance.
Next, another specific example of the variation presentation example (variation presentation example 20) will be explained with reference to Figures 339 to 345. Variation presentation example 20 is a variation presentation example when a game ball enters the first starting hole 121 in a normal game state. Note that in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation presentation examples and each modified example will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation presentation examples and each modified example may be omitted.

First, as the previous special symbol stops changing, the decorative symbol 700 and small symbol 704 are fixed and stopped. Next, when a predetermined time has passed without a game ball entering either the first start hole 121 or the second start hole 122 and there is no pending winning at the first start hole 121, the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, as shown in Figure 339 (1). At this time, the decorative symbol 700, small symbol 704, execution count image 705, stage image 706, and remaining number of times reached image 708 become difficult or impossible to see for the player. Meanwhile, the pending number display 703 remains easily visible to the player. At this time, the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c all enter the eighth mode. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when the gaming ball enters the first starting hole 121, the sound output device 9 begins to output a winning sound, as shown in Figure 339 (2). At this time, the decorative symbol 700, small symbol 704, execution count image 705, stage image 706, and remaining count image 708 remain difficult or impossible for the player to see. At this time, the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c all remain in the eighth mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 339 (3), the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c all switch from the eighth mode to the second mode. At this time, the decorative symbol 700, small symbol 704, execution count image 705, stage image 706, and remaining count image 708 remain difficult or impossible for the player to see. At this time, the sound output device 9 continues to output the winning sound.

Next, as shown in Figure 339 (4), a non-display effect for the customer waiting image 710 is executed, and the transparency of the customer waiting image 710 increases, so that the decorative pattern 700, small pattern 704, execution count image 705, stage image 706, and remaining count image 708 are visible to the player, although not easily visible to the player. Meanwhile, neither the variable image 701 nor the reserved image 702 is displayed. Also, at this time, the winning sound continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in Figure 339 (5), the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 progresses, and the transparency of the customer waiting image 710 becomes even higher. At this time, as the display of the special symbol begins to change, the decorative symbol 700 and small symbol 704 begin to change. At this time, the decorative symbol 700 begins to change, and the small symbol 704 is displayed changing at high speed. At this time, a "1" is displayed in the hold number display 703 of the first starting port 121. At this time, the display of the hold image 702 begins. More specifically, the hold image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode without a step-by-step display effect. This hold image 702 is not easily visible to the player, but is still visible to the player. At this time, the sound of a winning combination continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in Figure 339 (6), the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 ends, and the customer waiting image 710 is no longer displayed. As a result, the decorative pattern 700, reserved image 702, small pattern 704, execution count image 705, stage image 706, and remaining count image 708 become easily visible to the player. In addition, the start of the variation operation is in progress. At this time, the sound output device 9 continues to output the winning sound.

Next, as shown in Figure 340 (7), the initial fluctuation operation ends, and the decorative pattern 700 fluctuates at a high speed. Furthermore, the pending image 702 moves to the fluctuation base 701P and expands, causing the fluctuating image 701 to be displayed. At this time, the pending number display 703 in the first starting slot 121 switches to "0." At this time, the winning sound is no longer output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, "1" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the first starting hole 121, as shown in Fig. 340 (8). At this time, a step-by-step display effect is started, and the reserved image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode at a position above and away from the first reserved pedestal 702P. At this time, the sound output device 9 starts to output a winning sound.
Next, as shown in Fig. 340 (9), the stage display effect is completed, and the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the first reserved pedestal 702P. Also, although not shown, when the stage display effect is completed, the motion effect of the reserved image 702 is started. Also, the winning sound is continuously output until the stage display effect is completed, and is no longer output when the stage display effect is completed.

Next, as shown in Figure 340 (10), the left decorative pattern 700, "4", temporarily stops.
Next, as shown in Figure 340 (11), the right decorative pattern 700 "4" temporarily stops, and the reach effect begins.
Next, as shown in Figure 340 (12), an extended effect is executed. In the extended effect, the movable effect is executed and the first emphasized image 711 is displayed. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the second state to the fourth state.

Next, as shown in Figure 341 (13), the SP reach effect is executed. During the execution of the SP reach effect, the SP reach image 712 is displayed. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all enter the second mode.
Next, the SPSP reach effect is executed as shown in Figure 341 (14). During the execution of the SPSP reach effect, an SPSP reach image 713 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 341 (15), a promotion effect is executed and a button operation image 714 is displayed.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 17 while the button operation image 714 is displayed, the middle decorative pattern 700 "3" temporarily stops, as shown in FIG. 341 (16).
Next, as shown in FIG. 341 (17), the first eye-catching image 715 is displayed.
Next, when the first eye-catching image 715 is no longer displayed, the three decorative patterns 700 "434" are temporarily stopped in a state where they are easily visible to the player, as shown in Figure 341 (18).

Then, as the special symbols stop fluctuating, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704, "434," are fixed and stopped, as shown in Figure 342 (19). The display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "201 GAME," and the display content of the remaining number of times reached image 708 is updated to "299 more." At this time, the fluctuating image 701 is no longer displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 342 (20), as the display of the next special symbol begins to change, the small symbol 704 begins to change. Meanwhile, the decorative symbol 700 has not yet started to change. Also, the reserved image 702 has not moved toward the change base 701P, but is displayed on the reserved base 702P.

Next, when the gaming ball enters the first starting hole 121, the staged display presentation of the reserved image 702 begins, as shown in Figure 342 (21). In the example shown, the reserved image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode at a position above and away from the first reserved base 702P. This reserved image 702 is displayed in the first stage display mode of the staged display presentation (see Figure 271 (1)). In addition, as the gaming ball enters the first starting hole 121, the sound output device 9 begins to output a winning sound.

Next, as the staged display performance of the reserved image 702 progresses, a reserved image 702 having a display mode of the third stage (see FIG. 271 (3)) in the staged display performance is displayed on the first reserved base 702P, as shown in FIG. 342 (22). At this time, two reserved images 702 are displayed overlapping each other on the first reserved base 702P. More specifically, a reserved image 702 having a display mode of the third stage in the staged display performance and a reserved image 702 having a completed display mode are displayed overlapping each other. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 begins to change, and the operation at the start of the change begins. At this time, the winning sound continues to be output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 342 (23), when the staged display effect of the reserved image 702 is completed, the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the first reserved pedestal 702P. Also, at this time, the reserved image 702 that was displayed in the completed display mode on the first reserved pedestal 702P in the example shown in FIG. 342 (22) moves to the variable pedestal 701P, and the variable image 701 is displayed. Also, at this time, the variable start operation is in progress. Also, the winning sound continues to be output until the staged display effect is completed, and is no longer output when the staged display effect is completed.
Next, as shown in Figure 342 (24), the operation at the start of the change ends, and the change of the decorative pattern 700 becomes faster.

Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, as shown in Fig. 343 (25), a winning sound announcing the entry into the first starting hole 121 is output from the audio output device 9. At this time, "2" is displayed on the reserve number display 703 of the first starting hole 121. Furthermore, the second reserve image 702 is displayed on the second reserve pedestal 702P in a completed display mode without a step-by-step display effect being performed, i.e., without the incomplete display mode being visible to the player.
Next, as shown in Figure 343 (26), the left decorative pattern 700, "7", temporarily stops.
Next, as shown in Figure 343 (27), the right decorative pattern 700, "1", temporarily stops.

Next, when the gaming ball enters the first starting hole 121, as shown in Fig. 343 (28), the sound output device 9 starts to output a winning sound that notifies the player of the entry into the first starting hole 121. At this time, the hold number display 703 of the first starting hole 121 displays "3." At this time, the staged display performance of the third hold image 702 starts, and the hold image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode at a position above and away from the third hold pedestal 702P.
Next, as shown in Figure 343 (29), the stage display effect is completed, and the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the third reserved pedestal 702P. In addition, the winning sound continues to be output until the stage display effect is completed, and is no longer output when the stage display effect is completed.

Then, as the special symbol stops changing, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704, "721," are fixed and stopped, as shown in Figure 343 (30). At this time, the display content of the number of times played image 705 is updated to "202 GAMES," and the display content of the remaining number of times reached image 708 is updated to "298 more."

Next, as shown in FIG. 344 (31), as the next special symbol starts to change, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 start to change. Also, the reserved number display 703 of the first start port 121 switches to "2".
Then, as the special symbols stop varying, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704, "483," are fixed and stopped as shown in Fig. 344 (32). At this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "203 GAME," and the display content of the remaining number of times to be reached image 708 is updated to "297 more."

Next, as shown in FIG. 344 (33), as the display of the next special symbol begins to change, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 begin to change. Also, the reserved number display 703 of the first start port 121 switches to "1."
Then, as the variation of the special symbols stops, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704, "532", are fixed and stopped as shown in Fig. 344 (34). At this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "204 GAME", and the display content of the remaining number of times to be reached image 708 is updated to "296 more".

Next, as shown in FIG. 344 (35), as the next special symbol starts to change, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 start to change. Also, the reserved number display 703 of the first start port 121 switches to "0".
Then, as the variation of the special symbols stops, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704, "327", are fixed and stopped as shown in Fig. 344 (36). At this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "205 GAMES", and the display content of the remaining number of times to be reached image 708 is updated to "295 more".

Then, when a predetermined time has passed since the special symbols stopped fluctuating without a gaming ball entering either the first start hole 121 or the second start hole 122, an adjustment image 716 and a menu image 717 are displayed as shown in Fig. 345 (37). At this time, sound is no longer output from the sound output device 9.
Furthermore, if a predetermined time elapses without a game ball entering either the first starting slot 121 or the second starting slot 122 after the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed, a customer waiting image 710 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 345 (38). At this time, the decorative symbol 700, the small symbol 704, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 become difficult or impossible for the player to see. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the second state to the eighth state. Furthermore, no sound is output from the audio output device 9. The state shown in FIG. 345 (38) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 339 (1).

As described above, in variable presentation example 20, if a win occurs when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed in normal game mode, the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode is made difficult or impossible to see, and then the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode is made visible or easily visible. Here, even if a win occurs when the stage image 706, adjustment image 716, and menu image 717 corresponding to the first stage are displayed in normal game mode, the same presentation as the example shown in variable presentation example 20 may be executed. In other words, if a win occurs when the stage image 706, adjustment image 716, and menu image 717 corresponding to the first stage are displayed in normal game mode, the step-by-step display presentation may not be executed, and the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode may become easily visible while the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode remains invisible.

As described above, in this embodiment, if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed, the reserved image 702 of the incomplete display size is made difficult to see or impossible to see.
Even if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed, if the player is made to view the reserved image 702 of the incomplete display size before the reserved image 702 of the completed display size is made visible to the player, it is necessary to start displaying the reserved image 702 of the incomplete display size after the non-display effect of the specific image is started. In this case, the display timing of the reserved image 702 of the completed display size is delayed by the amount of the non-display effect if the prize is won while a specific image is being displayed compared to if the prize is won while a specific image is not being displayed. Therefore, if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed, the reserved image 702 of the incomplete display size is made difficult or impossible to see, and the reserved image 702 of the completed display size is displayed without delay, thereby preventing the display timing of the reserved image 702 of the completed display size from being shifted depending on whether the specific image is being displayed at the time of the prize.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed, the incomplete reserved image 702 is made difficult or impossible to see.
Even if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed, if the player is made to view the reserved image 702 in an incomplete form before the reserved image 702 in a completed form is to be viewed by the player, it is necessary to start displaying the reserved image 702 in an incomplete form after the non-display effect for the specific image is started. In this case, the display timing of the reserved image 702 in a completed form is delayed by the time the non-display effect is executed when a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed, compared to when a prize is won while a specific image is not being displayed. Therefore, if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed, the reserved image 702 in an incomplete form is made difficult or impossible to view, and the reserved image 702 in a completed form is displayed without delay, thereby preventing the display timing of the reserved image 702 in a completed form from being shifted depending on whether or not the specific image is being displayed at the time of the prize.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed, the reserved image 702 with incomplete transparency is made difficult to see or impossible to see.
Even if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed, if the player is allowed to view the reserved image 702 with incomplete transparency before the reserved image 702 with completed transparency is to be viewed by the player, the display of the reserved image 702 with incomplete transparency must be started after the non-display effect for the specific image is initiated. In this case, the display timing of the reserved image 702 with completed transparency is delayed by the time required for the non-display effect to be executed when a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed, compared to when a prize is won while a specific image is not being displayed. Therefore, if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed, the reserved image 702 with incomplete transparency is made difficult or impossible to view, and the reserved image 702 with completed transparency is displayed without delay, thereby preventing the display timing of the reserved image 702 with completed transparency from being delayed depending on whether the specific image is displayed at the time of the prize.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a win occurs while a specific image is being displayed, the reserved image 702 of the incomplete action mode is made difficult to see or impossible to see.
Even if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed, if the player is to view the reserved image 702 of an incomplete action mode before the action presentation of the reserved image 702 is to be made visible to the player, it is necessary to start displaying the reserved image 702 of the incomplete action mode after the non-display presentation of the specific image has begun. In this case, the execution timing of the action presentation of the reserved image 702 is delayed by the time the non-display presentation is executed if the prize is won when a specific image is being displayed, compared to when a prize is won when a specific image is not being displayed. Therefore, if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed, the reserved image 702 of the incomplete action mode is made difficult or impossible to see, and the action presentation of the reserved image 702 is performed without delay, thereby preventing the execution timing of the action presentation of the reserved image 702 from being delayed depending on whether or not the specific image is being displayed at the time of the prize.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a win occurs while a specific image is being displayed, the reserved image 702 at the incomplete display position is made difficult to see or impossible to see.
Even if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed, if the player is to view the reserved image 702 at the incomplete display position before the reserved image 702 at the completed display position, it is necessary to start displaying the reserved image 702 at the incomplete display position after the non-display effect for the specific image has begun. In this case, the display timing of the reserved image 702 at the completed display position is delayed by the amount of the non-display effect if the prize is won while a specific image is being displayed compared to if the prize is won while a specific image is not being displayed. Therefore, if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed, the reserved image 702 at the incomplete display position is made difficult or impossible to view, and the reserved image 702 at the completed display position is displayed without delay, thereby preventing the display timing of the reserved image 702 at the completed display position from being delayed depending on whether the specific image is being displayed at the time of the prize.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a win occurs while a specific image is being displayed, the sound output mode is switched before the reserved image 702 becomes visible to the player. This allows the player to quickly recognize that they have won, regardless of the display content of the first image display device 70.

In particular, in this embodiment, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is turned off and then restored while there is a reserved game, the reserved image 702 becomes visible to the player before the effect sound is output. In other words, the chronological relationship between the output timing of the sound and the display timing of the reserved image 702 is reversed depending on whether there is a case where the reserved image 702 is not displayed because there is no reserved game, or whether there is a reserved game but the reserved image 702 is not displayed.
In this case, by making the player aware of the start of the performance or the number of reserved balls as soon as possible depending on the state of the gaming machine 1, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing regardless of the state of the gaming machine 1.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a win occurs while a specific image is being displayed, the sound output mode is switched before the specific image is no longer displayed. This makes it easier for the player to quickly recognize that they have won, even if they are looking away from the gaming machine 1.

In particular, in this embodiment, if a win occurs while the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, the sound output mode is switched before the display of the customer waiting image 710 begins. Therefore, even if the customer waiting image 710 prevents the player from recognizing the game situation from the display content of the first image display device 70, the player can quickly recognize that they have won.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a win occurs while a specific image is being displayed, the state of the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c is switched before the reserved image 702 becomes visible to the player. This allows the player to quickly recognize that they have won, regardless of the display content of the first image display device 70.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a win occurs within a specified period in the next variable effect following a variable effect in which an SP Reach effect or an SPSP Reach effect has been executed, the pending image 702 in its completed display state is displayed without the player being able to see the incomplete display state of the pending image 702 (see Figure 343 (25)). In this way, by not allowing the player to see a specific effect in the next variable effect following a variable effect in which an SP Reach effect or an SPSP Reach effect has been executed, the player can enjoy the sense of accomplishment of having executed the SP Reach effect or the SPSP Reach effect for a long time.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a prize is won when a specific image is displayed in normal game mode and the player is in the first stage, the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete action mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) is made difficult to see or invisible (see Figure 339 (6)). On the other hand, if a prize is won when a specific image is displayed in normal game mode and the player is in the second stage, the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode is made visible or easily visible (see Figure 277 (2)).

In this embodiment, when a prize is won while the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, the timing for switching the sound output mode, the timing for switching the modes of the various lamps, and the timing for displaying or hiding the image are different depending on whether the background of the stage image 706 is the first stage or the second stage, but this is not limited to this.
Even if a win occurs when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed and the game is in the second stage, the timing of switching the sound output mode, the timing of switching the various lamp modes, and the timing of displaying or hiding images may be the same as when a win occurs when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed and the game is in the first stage. That is, if a win occurs when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed and the game is in the second stage, the game may first switch from a state in which no sound is output to a state in which a winning sound is output (see FIG. 339(2)), and then the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c may all be switched from the eighth mode to the second mode (see FIG. 339(3)). After that, the display of the customer waiting image 710 begins, and the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704, the stage image 706, etc. may be made visible to the player (see FIG. 339(4)). Furthermore, after that, the reserved image 702 may be made visible to the player, and then the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 may be completed (see Figure 339 (5) and Figure 339 (6)).

(Variation example 21)
Figures 346 and 347 are figures showing an example of a variation presentation 21.
Next, another specific example of a variation presentation example (variation presentation example 21) will be described with reference to Figures 346 and 347. In variation presentation example 21, two variation presentations are executed. The first of these two variation presentations is a variation presentation that occurs when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 121 in a special time-saving gaming state. The second of the two variation presentations is a variation presentation that occurs when a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 122 in a special time-saving gaming state. Note that the following explanation will mainly focus on differences from the above-mentioned variation presentation examples and variations, and may omit explanations of points that are the same as the variation presentation examples and variations.

First, the gaming machine 1 is controlled to a special time-saving gaming state, and as shown in Figure 346 (1), the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704, "444," are fixed and stopped. At this time, the stage image 706 shows a background corresponding to the third stage. The remaining number of times in the normal time-saving gaming mode image 726 displays the text "100 times." The reserved number display 703 of the first starting slot 121 shows "1," and the reserved number display 703 of the second starting slot 122 shows "0." Neither the variable image 701 nor the reserved image 702 is displayed. The top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c are all in the second mode. Although not shown, background music corresponding to the special time-saving gaming state is continuously output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 346 (2), as the next special symbol starts to change, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 start to change. At this time, the reserved number display 703 of the first start port 121 switches to "0".
Next, when a game ball enters the second start opening 122, as shown in FIG. 346 (3), the reserve number display 703 of the second start opening 122 displays "1." At this time, a staged display effect of the reserve image 702 is started. In the illustrated example, the reserve image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode on the first reserve pedestal 702P. At this time, the sound output device 9 starts to output a winning sound to notify the player of the winning of the second start opening 122.

Next, as shown in Fig. 346 (4), the stage display effect is completed, and the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the first reserved pedestal 702P. Also, although not shown, when the stage display effect is completed, the motion effect of the reserved image 702 is started. Also, the winning sound is continuously output until the stage display effect is completed, and is no longer output when the stage display effect is completed.
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 "853" are fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. 346 (5).

Next, as shown in FIG. 346 (6), as the display of the next special symbol begins, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 begin to change. At this time, the display content of the remaining number of times for normal time reduction image 726 is updated to "99 times." Furthermore, the reserved image 702 moves to the variable base 701P, causing the variable image 701 to be displayed. At this time, when a game ball enters the first start opening 121, "1" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the first start opening 121. Meanwhile, the reserved image 702 is not displayed, and the step display effect is not executed. Furthermore, a winning sound announcing a winning entry into the first start opening 121 is not output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 347(7), with the stopping of the variation of the special symbol, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704, "421", are fixed and stopped. In addition, the variable image 701 is not displayed.

As described above, in this embodiment, if a game ball enters the second start port 122 while a variable effect based on a win at the first start port 121 is being executed, the reserved image 702 in an incomplete display mode will be visible or easily visible to the player. On the other hand, if a game ball enters the first start port 121 while a variable effect based on a win at the second start port 122 is being executed, the reserved image 702 in an incomplete display mode will not be visible to the player.

(Variation example 22)
Figure 348 shows an example of a variation presentation 22.
Next, another specific example of the variation presentation example (variation presentation example 22) will be described with reference to Fig. 348. Variation presentation example 22 is an example in which a variation presentation based on winning at the first starting port 121 is performed as the first variation presentation in the special time-saving gaming state. Note that in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation presentation examples and each modified example will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation presentation examples and each modified example may be omitted.

First, in the normal game mode, the final variable effect of the predetermined number of times required to enter the special time-saving game mode is completed, and the gaming machine 1 is controlled to enter the special time-saving game mode. Furthermore, if a predetermined time has passed since the final variable effect ended without a game ball entering either the first starting slot 121 or the second starting slot 122, a customer waiting image 710 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 348 (1). Furthermore, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all enter the eighth mode. At this time, an alarm sound is output from the audio output device 9 to indicate that the special time-saving game mode is in effect. The state shown in FIG. 348 (1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 306 (5) in the variable effect example 10.
Although not shown, the background corresponding to the second stage is displayed as the stage image 706 until the customer waiting image 710 is displayed. Then, as a result of the customer waiting image 710 being displayed, the stage image 706 is difficult or impossible for the player to see.

Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, as shown in Figure 348 (2), the sound output device 9 begins to output a sound effect indicating that the game machine 1 has been controlled to a special time-saving game state.
Next, as shown in FIG. 348(3), the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the eighth position to the second position.

Next, as shown in Figure 348 (4), the customer waiting image 710 is hidden. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 and small pattern 704 begin to change. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 begins to change, and the small pattern 704 is displayed changing at high speed. At this time, the hold number display 703 of the first starting port 121 displays "1". At this time, a step-by-step display effect begins, and the hold image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode on the first hold base 702P. At this time, the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to a special time-saving gaming state continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in Figure 348 (5), the fluctuation start operation progresses. At this time, the staged display performance is completed, and the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the first reserved base 702P. At this time, the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in Figure 348 (6), the fluctuation start operation ends, and the decorative pattern 700 fluctuates at a high speed. Furthermore, the pending image 702 moves to the fluctuation base 701P and expands, displaying the fluctuation image 701. At this time, the pending number display 703 in the first starting slot 121 switches to "0." Also, at this time, the countdown image 732, "0," is displayed. Also, at this time, the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to a special time-saving gaming state is no longer output from the audio output device 9. Although not shown, after this, the second transition image 734 (see Figure 308 (16)) is displayed, and the stage image 706 switches to the background corresponding to the sixth stage (see Figure 309 (20)), and the fluctuation performance ends.

As described above, in variation presentation example 22, if a prize is won when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed in the special time-saving game state and the player is in the second stage, the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display state is made visible or easily visible, and then the reserved image 702 in the completed display state is made visible or easily visible. Here, even if a prize is won in the special time-saving game state before the start of the first variation presentation and when the stage image 706, adjustment image 716, and menu image 717 corresponding to the second stage are displayed, the same presentation as the example shown in variation presentation example 22 may be executed. In other words, if a prize is won in the special time-saving game state before the start of the first variation presentation and when the stage image 706, adjustment image 716, and menu image 717 corresponding to the second stage are displayed, the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display state may be made visible or easily visible, and then the reserved image 702 in the completed display state may be made visible or easily visible.

As described above, even if a prize is won at the first starting port 121 when a specific image is displayed in a special time-saving game state, the reserved image 702 in an incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made visible or easily visible to the player.
In particular, in this embodiment, if a game ball enters the first start gate 121 when a specific image is displayed in the special time-saving game state and the game is in the first stage, the reserved image 702 in a specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) is made difficult or impossible for the player to see (see FIG. 307 (10)). On the other hand, if a game ball enters the first start gate 121 when a specific image is displayed in the special time-saving game state and the game is in the second stage, the reserved image 702 in a specific incomplete display mode is made visible or easily visible to the player. If a game ball enters the second start gate 122 when a specific image is displayed in the special time-saving game state and the game is in the first or second stage, the reserved image 702 may not be displayed in any display mode. However, when a specific image is displayed in a special time-saving game state and the game ball enters the second starting hole 122 when the game is in the first or second stage, the reserved image 702 may be displayed.

In addition, in a special time-saving game state, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 121 before the start of the special effect and when the special pattern is stopped during the first stage and there are no reserved images, the reserved image 702 of a specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult to see or invisible, and then the reserved image 702 of a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. On the other hand, in the special time-saving game state, if a game ball enters the first start port 121 while a special symbol is stopped and there is no reserved ball when the special effect is not started and the game is in the second stage, the reserved image 702 in a predetermined incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made visible or easily visible, and then the reserved image 702 in a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. Also, in the special time-saving game state, if a game ball enters the second start port 122 while a special symbol is stopped and there is no reserved ball when the special effect is not started and the game is in the first or second stage, the reserved image 702 may not be displayed in any display mode. However, in the special time-saving game state, before the start of the special effect, and in the first or second stage, when the special symbol is stopped and there is no reserved ball, the reserved ball image 702 may be displayed even if the game ball enters the second start hole 122.

In addition, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 121 while the special pattern is stopped and a special image corresponding to the first stage is being displayed after the start of a specific notification, the reserved image 702 of a specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult to see or invisible, and then the reserved image 702 of a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. On the other hand, if a gaming ball enters the first start gate 121 while a special symbol is stopped and a special image corresponding to the second stage is displayed after the start of the specific notification, the reserved image 702 in a predetermined incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made visible or easily visible, and then the reserved image 702 in a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. Also, if a gaming ball enters the second start gate 122 while a special symbol is stopped and a special image corresponding to the first or second stage is displayed after the start of the specific notification, the reserved image 702 may not be displayed in either display mode. However, the reserved image 702 may be displayed even if a gaming ball enters the second start gate 122 while a special symbol is stopped and a special image corresponding to the first or second stage is displayed after the start of the specific notification.

In addition, regardless of the game status, if a game ball enters the first start opening 121 while a specific image is displayed in the first stage, the reserved image 702 of a specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult to see or invisible, and then the reserved image 702 of a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. On the other hand, regardless of the game status, if a game ball enters the first start opening 121 while a specific image is displayed in the second stage, the reserved image 702 of a specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made visible or easily visible, and then the reserved image 702 of a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. Furthermore, regardless of the game status, if a game ball enters the second starting hole 122 when a specific image is displayed in the first or second stage, the reserved image 702 may not be displayed in any display mode. However, regardless of the game status, even if a game ball enters the second starting hole 122 when a specific image is displayed in the first or second stage, the reserved image 702 may be displayed.

Furthermore, regardless of the game status, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 121 when a special pattern is stopped in the first stage and there are no reserved symbols, the reserved image 702 of a specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult to see or invisible, and then the reserved image 702 of a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. On the other hand, regardless of the game status, if a game ball enters the first start gate 121 when a special symbol is stopped in the second stage and there are no reserved balls, the reserved image 702 in a predetermined incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made visible or easily visible, and then the reserved image 702 in a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. Also, regardless of the game status, if a game ball enters the second start gate 122 when a special symbol is stopped in the first or second stage and there are no reserved balls, the reserved image 702 may not be displayed in any display mode. However, regardless of the game status, the reserved image 702 may be displayed even if a game ball enters the second start gate 122 when a special symbol is stopped in the first or second stage and there are no reserved balls.

Furthermore, regardless of the stage, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 121 (second starting hole 122) while a specific image is being displayed, the reserved image 702 of a specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult to see or invisible, and then the reserved image 702 of a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible.
Furthermore, regardless of whether the game is in a normal game state, a special time-saving game state, or a special time-saving game state, if a game ball enters the first start port 121 (second start port 122) while a special pattern is stopped and no reserved balls exist, the reserved image 702 of a specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult to see or invisible, and then the reserved image 702 of a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible.
Furthermore, regardless of which image is displayed on the first display device 70, if a game ball enters the first start port 121 (second start port 122) when a special pattern is stopped and there is no reserved ball, the reserved image 702 of a specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult to see or invisible, and then the reserved image 702 of a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible.

Furthermore, for example, the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode may be made visible while the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode is visible. In other words, if the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed based on a win at the first starting port 121 while a specific image is displayed in the special time-saving game mode, the reserved image 702 in the specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult or impossible to see, and then the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. On the other hand, when a specific image is displayed in a special time-saving game state and a reserved image 702 in an expected color display mode is displayed based on a win at the first starting port 121, the reserved image 702 in a predetermined incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made visible or easily visible before the reserved image 702 in a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) is made visible or easily visible.

In addition, in a special time-saving game state, when a reserved image 702 in a normal display mode is displayed based on a winning entry into the first starting port 121 before the start of a special effect, while the special pattern is stopped and there are no reserved images, the reserved image 702 in a specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult to see or invisible, and then the reserved image 702 in a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. On the other hand, in a special time-saving game state, if a reserved image 702 in an expected color display mode is displayed based on a win at the first starting port 121 before the start of a special effect, while the special pattern is stopped and there are no reserved symbols, the reserved image 702 in a predetermined incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made visible or easily visible, and then the reserved image 702 in a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible.

In addition, if a reserved image 702 in a normal display mode is displayed based on a winning result when a special pattern is stopped and a special image corresponding to the first stage is displayed after the start of a specific notification, the reserved image 702 in a specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult to see or invisible, and then the reserved image 702 in a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. On the other hand, if a reserved image 702 in an expected color display mode is displayed based on a win when the special pattern is stopped and a special image corresponding to the first stage is displayed after the start of the specific notification, the reserved image 702 in a predetermined incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made visible or easily visible before the reserved image 702 in a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) is made visible or easily visible.

Furthermore, regardless of the game state, when a reserved image 702 in a normal display mode is displayed based on a winning entry into the first starting port 121 (second starting port 122) when a specific image is displayed, the reserved image 702 in a specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult to see or invisible, and then the reserved image 702 in a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. On the other hand, if a reserved image 702 in an expected color display mode is displayed based on winning at the first starting port 121 (second starting port 122) when a specific image is displayed, the reserved image 702 in a predetermined incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made visible or easily visible before the reserved image 702 in a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) is made visible or easily visible.

In addition, regardless of the game status, when a reserved image 702 in a normal display mode is displayed based on a winning entry into the first start port 121 (second start port 122) when a special pattern is stopped and no reserved symbols exist, the reserved image 702 in a specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult to see or invisible, and then the reserved image 702 in a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. On the other hand, if a reserved image 702 in an expected color display mode is displayed based on a win at the first start gate 121 (second start gate 122) when a special pattern is stopped and no reserved symbols exist, the reserved image 702 in a predetermined incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made visible or easily visible, and then the reserved image 702 in a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible.

(Variation example 23)
Figures 349 and 350 are figures showing an example of a variation presentation 23.
Next, another specific example of the variation presentation example (variation presentation example 23) will be described with reference to Figures 349 and 350. Variation presentation example 23 is an example in which a variation presentation based on winning at the first starting port 121 is performed as the first variation presentation in the special time-saving game state. Note that in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation presentation examples and each modified example will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation presentation examples and each modified example may be omitted.

First, in the normal game mode, the final variable effect of the predetermined number of times required to enter the special time-saving game mode ends, and the gaming machine 1 is controlled to enter the special time-saving game mode. Furthermore, if a predetermined time elapses after the final variable effect ends without a game ball entering either the first start slot 121 or the second start slot 122, an adjustment image 716 and a menu image 717 are displayed, as shown in Figure 349 (1). Furthermore, the stage image 706 shows a background corresponding to the second stage. Furthermore, the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c all enter the fifth mode. At this time, background music corresponding to the previous variable effect is output from the audio output device 9 at a volume lower than that during the variable effect.

Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, as shown in Figure 349 (2), the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the fifth state to the second state.
Next, as shown in FIG. 349 (3), the sound output device 9 starts to output a sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to a special time-shortening gaming state.

Next, as shown in Figure 349 (4), the adjustment image 716 and menu image 717 are hidden. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 and small pattern 704 begin to change. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 begins to change, and the small pattern 704 is displayed changing at high speed. At this time, the hold number display 703 in the first starting slot 121 displays "1". At this time, the hold image 702 is displayed in a completed display mode without a gradual display effect. At this time, the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to a special time-saving gaming state continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in Figure 349 (5), the decorative pattern 700 changes at a high speed. Furthermore, the pending image 702 moves to the changing base 701P and expands, causing the changing image 701 to be displayed. At this time, the pending number display 703 in the first starting slot 121 switches to "0." At this time, the countdown image 732, "0," is displayed. At this time, the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state is no longer output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 121, as shown in FIG. 349 (6), the hold number display 703 of the first starting hole 121 displays "1." At this time, a step-by-step display effect is started, and the hold image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode on the first hold base 702P. At this time, the sound output device 9 starts to output a winning sound that notifies the player of the entry into the first starting hole 121.
Next, as shown in Fig. 350 (7), the staged display effect is completed, and the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the first reserved pedestal 702P. Although not shown, when the staged display effect is completed, the motion effect of the reserved image 702 is started. Furthermore, the winning sound that notifies the winning of the first starting hole 121 continues to be output until the staged display effect is completed, and is no longer output when the staged display effect is completed.

Next, after the second transition image 734 (see FIG. 308(16)) is displayed, as shown in FIG. 350(8), a background corresponding to the sixth stage is displayed as the stage image 706. In addition, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704, "125", are fixed and stopped.
After this, every time a variable effect is executed in the special time-shortened game state, the number of remaining times for special symbol lotteries in the special time-shortened game state is reduced, and the value shown in the special time-shortened remaining number image 738 is subtracted by one.

Then, when the final variable effect in the special time-saving gaming state ends, the gaming machine 1 is controlled back to the normal gaming state, and after the first transition image 728 (see Figure 301 (22)) is displayed, a background corresponding to the first stage is displayed as the stage image 706. Also, at this time, the reserved image 702 is displayed. This reserved image 702 is the reserved image 702 (see Figure 350 (7)) that was displayed when the background corresponding to the second stage was displayed as the stage image 706.

In addition, the variable effects described in each variable effect example and modified example are not limited to variable effects based on the number of reserved items shown in the figures.
The variable effects described in each variable effect example and variant example may be variable effects based on the number of reserved balls being 0, may be variable effects based on the number of reserved balls being 1, may be variable effects based on the number of reserved balls being 2, may be variable effects based on the number of reserved balls being 3, or may be variable effects based on the number of reserved balls being 4.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a variable effect based on winning when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed in a special time-saving game state, a variable effect in which the result of the lottery for the special pattern is a miss has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this.
As a variable effect based on winning at the first start port 121 or the second start port 122 when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed in the special time-saving game state, a variable effect may be executed in which the result of the lottery for the special pattern is a jackpot, as in a modified example of variable effect example 11 (see Figures 318 to 320).

Furthermore, in the variable performance example 20, a variable performance in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and an SPSP reach performance is executed has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this.
As in variation presentation example 20, as a variation presentation based on winning at the first start gate 121 when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed in the normal gaming state, the "variable presentation in which a reach presentation is not executed" shown in variation presentation example 1 and variation presentation example 2 may be executed, or the "variable presentation in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot" shown in variation presentation example 5 may be executed. Also, as a variation presentation based on winning at the first start gate 121 when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed in the normal gaming state, any of the variation presentations described in the first and second embodiments may be executed.

In addition, in the variable presentation example 20, it was explained that when a game ball enters the first starting hole 121 while the customer waiting image 710 is displayed in the normal game state, the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode becomes difficult or impossible for the player to see, and the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode becomes easily visible to the player.
Here, the case where the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode becomes difficult or impossible for the player to see is not limited to the case where a gaming ball enters the first start gate 121 when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed in the normal gaming state. As an example, even if a gaming ball enters the first start gate 121 when the adjustment image 716 menu image 717 is displayed in the normal gaming state (see Figures 280(1) and 280(2)), the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode may become difficult or impossible for the player to see, and the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode may become easily visible to the player. In this case, as a variable effect based on a winning entry into the first starting gate 121 when the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed in the normal gaming state, the "variable effect in which a reach effect is not executed" shown in variable effect example 1 and variable effect example 2 may be executed, or the "variable effect in which a reach effect is executed" shown in variable effect example 3 and variable effect example 4 may be executed, or the "variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot" shown in variable effect example 5 may be executed. Also, as a variable effect based on a winning entry into the first starting gate 121 when the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed in the normal gaming state, any of the variable effects described in the first and second embodiments may be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the gaming ball enters the second starting hole 122, a winning sound is output to notify the player of the winning, but the present invention is not limited to this.
When the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, a winning sound is output, whereas when the game ball enters the second starting hole 122, no winning sound may be output.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it has been described that a specific image becomes difficult to see or cannot be seen. Specific images include decorative symbol 700, variable image 701, reserved image 702, reserved number display 703, small symbol 704, execution count image 705, stage image 706, and remaining number of times to be reached image 708. Here, a state in which a specific image becomes difficult to see or cannot be seen may be a state in which a specific image is displayed, but is difficult to see or cannot be seen because other images displayed in layers in front of the specific image obstruct the view of the specific image. Examples of other images include customer waiting image 710, first emphasized image 711, SP reach image 712, SPSP reach image 713, first eye-catching image 715, second emphasized image 718, first transition image 728, second eye-catching image 731, second transition image 734, and recovery image 742. Furthermore, a state in which a specific image is not visible may also be a state in which the specific image is not visible because it is not displayed in the first place.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete shape, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be difficult to see or impossible to see. Here, an example of a case in which the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode becomes difficult to see or impossible to see is when the step-by-step display performance is not executed and the reserved image 702 is displayed in the completed display mode from the start of displaying the reserved image 702, making the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode difficult to see or impossible to see. Another example of a case in which the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode becomes difficult to see or impossible to see is when the step-by-step display performance is executed to display the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode, but the visibility of the reserved image 702 is obstructed by another image displayed on a layer in front of the reserved image 702, making the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode difficult to see or impossible to see. Furthermore, when reserved image 702 in an incomplete display mode is difficult to see or impossible to see because another image is displayed on a layer in front of reserved image 702, the step-by-step display effect may or may not be executed. In this way, making reserved image 702 in an incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) difficult to see or impossible to see includes both cases where reserved image 702 in an incomplete display mode is not displayed, and cases where reserved image 702 in an incomplete display mode is displayed but difficult to see or impossible to see.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that when the pending image 702 in an incomplete display mode becomes difficult to see or impossible to see, the pending image 702 in an incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) at any stage of the staged display performance also becomes difficult to see or impossible to see, but this is not limited to this.
For example, when reserved image 702 in an incomplete display mode is made difficult or impossible to see, reserved image 702 in an incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) in a first stage of the staged display presentation may be made difficult or impossible to see, and then reserved image 702 in an incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) in a second stage of the staged display presentation may be made visible or easily visible. In other words, when reserved image 702 in an incomplete display mode is made difficult or impossible to see, reserved image 702 in a completed display mode in at least one stage of the staged display presentation may be made difficult or impossible to see.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a specific image is displayed in the special time-saving game state and the game ball enters the first starting hole 121 during the first stage, the reserved image 702 of a specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete action mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult or impossible for the player to see. In this case, the reserved image 702 of a specific incomplete display mode that is difficult or impossible for the player to see may be the reserved image 702 of any display mode in the stage presentation.
In addition, in this embodiment, when a specific image is displayed in the special time-saving game state and the game ball enters the first starting hole 121 during the second stage, the reserved image 702 in a predetermined incomplete display mode may be made visible or easily visible to the player. In this case, the reserved image 702 in an incomplete display mode that is visible or easily visible to the player may be the reserved image 702 in a display mode of any stage in the stage presentation.

Furthermore, in the special time-saving game state, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 121 while the special symbol is stopped and there are no reserved symbols during the first stage before the start of the special effect, the reserved image 702 of a specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult or impossible to see, and then the reserved image 702 of a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 of a specific incomplete display mode that is difficult or impossible to see for the player may be the reserved image 702 of any stage in the display mode of the stage effect.
Furthermore, in the special time-saving game state, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 121 while the special symbol is stopped and there are no reserved symbols during the second stage before the start of the special effect, the reserved image 702 in a predetermined incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made visible or easily visible, and then the reserved image 702 in a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode that is made visible or easily visible to the player may be the reserved image 702 in any display mode in the staged effect.

Furthermore, it has been explained that if a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 121 while the special symbol is stopped and a special image corresponding to the first stage is being displayed after the start of the specific notification, the reserved image 702 of a specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult or impossible to see, and then the reserved image 702 of a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 of the specific incomplete display mode that is difficult or impossible to see for the player may be the reserved image 702 of any display mode in the stage presentation.
Furthermore, it has been explained that if a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 121 while the special symbol is stopped and a special image corresponding to the second stage is being displayed after the start of the specific notification, the reserved image 702 of a predetermined incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made visible or easily visible, and then the reserved image 702 of a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 of the incomplete display mode that is made visible or easily visible to the player may be the reserved image 702 of any display mode in the stage presentation.

Furthermore, regardless of the game state, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 121 while a specific image is being displayed in the first stage, the reserved image 702 of a specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult or impossible to see, and then the reserved image 702 of a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 of the specific incomplete display mode that is difficult or impossible to see for the player may be the reserved image 702 of any display mode in the stage presentation.
Furthermore, it has been explained that, regardless of the game state, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 121 while a specific image is being displayed in the second stage, the reserved image 702 in a predetermined incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made visible or easily visible, and then the reserved image 702 in a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode that is made visible or easily visible to the player may be the reserved image 702 in any display mode in the stage presentation.

Furthermore, regardless of the game state, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 121 while a special symbol is stopped and no reserved symbols exist in the first stage, the reserved image 702 of a specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult or impossible to see, and then the reserved image 702 of a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 of a specific incomplete display mode that is difficult or impossible to see for the player may be the reserved image 702 of any display mode in the stage presentation.
Furthermore, regardless of the game state, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 121 while a special symbol is stopped in the second stage and there are no reserved symbols, the reserved image 702 of a predetermined incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made visible or easily visible, and then the reserved image 702 of a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 of the incomplete display mode that is made visible or easily visible to the player may be the reserved image 702 of any display mode in the stage presentation.

Furthermore, in the case where a reserved image 702 in a normal display mode is displayed based on a win in the first starting slot 121 while a specific image is being displayed in a special time-saving game state, the reserved image 702 in a specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult or impossible to see, and then the reserved image 702 in a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 in a specific incomplete display mode that is difficult or impossible to see for the player may be the reserved image 702 in a display mode of any stage in the stage presentation.
Furthermore, in the case where a specific image is displayed in a special time-saving game state and reserved image 702 in an expected color display mode is displayed based on a win in first starting hole 121, reserved image 702 in a predetermined incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made visible or easily visible before reserved image 702 in a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) is made visible or easily visible. In this case, reserved image 702 in an incomplete display mode that is made visible or easily visible to the player may be reserved image 702 in a display mode of any stage in the stage presentation.

Furthermore, in the special time-saving game state, when a reserved image 702 in a normal display mode is displayed based on a win in the first start slot 121 before the start of the special effect, while the special symbol is stopped, and there are no reserved symbols, it is possible to make the reserved image 702 in a specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) difficult to see or invisible, and then make the reserved image 702 in a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 in a specific incomplete display mode that is difficult to see or invisible to the player may be the reserved image 702 in a display mode of any stage in the staged effect.
Furthermore, in the special time-saving game state, when a reserved image 702 in an expected color display mode is displayed based on a win in the first starting slot 121 before the start of the special effect, while the special symbol is stopped, and there are no reserved symbols, it is possible to first make visible or easily viewable the reserved image 702 in a predetermined incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position), and then make visible or easily viewable the reserved image 702 in a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position). In this case, the reserved image 702 in an incomplete display mode that is visible or easily viewable to the player may be the reserved image 702 in any display mode in the staged effect.

Furthermore, it has been explained that, in the case where a reserved image 702 in a normal display mode is displayed based on a winning result when a special image corresponding to the first stage is displayed while the special symbol is stopped after the start of the specific notification, the reserved image 702 in a specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult or impossible to see, and then the reserved image 702 in a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 in a specific incomplete display mode that is difficult or impossible to see for the player may be the reserved image 702 in a display mode of any stage in the stage presentation.
Furthermore, in the case where the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode is displayed based on a win when the special symbol is stopped and the special image corresponding to the first stage is displayed after the start of the specific notification, the reserved image 702 in a predetermined incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made visible or easily visible before the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) is made visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode that is made visible or easily visible to the player may be the reserved image 702 in the display mode of any stage in the stage presentation.

Furthermore, regardless of the game state, when a reserved image 702 in a normal display mode is displayed based on a win at the first start gate 121 (second start gate 122) while a specific image is being displayed, the reserved image 702 in a specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult or impossible to see, and then the reserved image 702 in a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 in a specific incomplete display mode that is difficult or impossible to see for the player may be the reserved image 702 in a display mode of any stage in the stage presentation.
Furthermore, when a reserved image 702 in an expected color display mode is displayed based on a win at the first start gate 121 (second start gate 122) while a specific image is being displayed, the reserved image 702 in a predetermined incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made visible or easily visible before the reserved image 702 in a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) is made visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 in an incomplete display mode that is made visible or easily visible to the player may be the reserved image 702 in any display mode in the stage presentation.

Furthermore, regardless of the game state, when a reserved image 702 in a normal display mode is displayed based on a win at the first start gate 121 (second start gate 122) while a special symbol is stopped and no reserved symbols exist, the reserved image 702 in a specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult or impossible to see, and then the reserved image 702 in a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 in a specific incomplete display mode that is difficult or impossible to see for the player may be the reserved image 702 in any display mode in the staged presentation.
Furthermore, when a reserved image 702 in an expected color display mode is displayed based on a win at the first start gate 121 (second start gate 122) while a special symbol is stopped and no reserved symbols exist, the reserved image 702 in a predetermined incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made visible or easily visible before the reserved image 702 in a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) is made visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 in an incomplete display mode that is made visible or easily visible to the player may be the reserved image 702 in any display mode in the staged presentation.

Furthermore, when making the reserved image 702 of the incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) difficult to see or impossible to see, the reserved image 702 of the incomplete display mode in one of the multiple stages in the staged display presentation may be made difficult to see or impossible to see, while the reserved image 702 of the incomplete display mode in the other stages may be made visible or easily visible. As an example, when making the reserved image 702 of the incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) difficult to see or impossible to see, the reserved image 702 of the incomplete display mode in the first stage of the staged display presentation may be made difficult to see or impossible to see, while the reserved image 702 of the incomplete display mode in both the second and third stages may be made visible or easily visible.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it has been described that in the staged display performance, there are multiple stages of the pending image 702, which is an incomplete display state, but this is not limited to this.
The display mode of the pending image 702 in the staged display performance needs to have at least one stage of the pending image 702 in an incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) and one stage of the pending image 702 in a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position).

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that the winning sound continues to be output until the stage display effect is completed, but this is not limited to this.
The winning sound may be stopped from being output before the stage display effect is completed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a variable effect is performed in which the result of the special pattern lottery in the special time-saving game state is a jackpot, the variable image 701 and the reserved image 702 are displayed when the double-digit decorative pattern 700 temporarily stops or when the double-digit decorative pattern 700 is fixedly stopped (see Figure 324 (8) and Figure 324 (9)), but this is not limited to this.
When a variable effect is performed in which the result of the special pattern lottery in the special time-saving game state is a jackpot, when the doublet decorative pattern 700 temporarily stops or when the doublet decorative pattern 700 is finally stopped, the variable image 701 may be displayed without the reserved image 702. Also, when a variable effect is performed in which the result of the special pattern lottery in the special time-saving game state is a jackpot, when the doublet decorative pattern 700 temporarily stops or when the doublet decorative pattern 700 is finally stopped, the variable image 701 may be displayed without the reserved image 702. Also, when a variable effect is performed in which the result of the special pattern lottery in the special time-saving game state is a jackpot, when the doublet decorative pattern 700 temporarily stops or when the doublet decorative pattern 700 is finally stopped, neither the variable image 701 nor the reserved image 702 may be displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that the first reserved image 702 moves to the variable base 701P, causing the variable image 701 to be displayed, but the variable image 701 may not be used. More specifically, if the variable effect ends while the first reserved image 702 is displayed, the first reserved image 702 may become hidden when the next variable effect begins. In this case, the first reserved image 702 may become hidden while moving, or may become hidden at the position displayed on the first reserved base 702P without moving. Furthermore, if a prize is won when there are no reserved images, the reserved image 702 may become hidden after the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode is displayed on the first reserved base 702P.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a stage corresponding to a normal game state is switched to a stage corresponding to a special time-saving game state while a reserved image exists, the variable image 701 is not displayed, and the reserved image 702 is displayed (see FIG. 309 (20)). In other words, it has been described that the reserved image 702 moves to the variable base 701P after the stage is switched, but this is not limited to this.
The variable image 701 may be displayed when a stage corresponding to the normal game state is switched to a stage corresponding to the special time-shortened game state while a reserved game exists. In other words, the movement of the reserved image 702 to the variable base 701P may be completed before the stage switch is completed. Furthermore, when a stage corresponding to the normal game state is switched to a stage corresponding to the special time-shortened game state while a reserved game exists, the movement of the reserved image 702 to the variable base 701P may have started but not been completed. Furthermore, when the variable image 701 is not used, the first reserved image 702 may already be hidden when a stage corresponding to the normal game state is switched to a stage corresponding to the special time-shortened game state while a reserved game exists.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start gate 121 (second start gate 122) while the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, the pending image 702 moves after the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 ends, but this is not limited to this.
If a gaming ball enters the first start gate 121 (second start gate 122) while the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, the reserved image 702 may move while the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 is being executed. In this case, the movement of the reserved image 702 may start after the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 starts, and the movement of the reserved image 702 may be completed after the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 ends. Alternatively, the movement of the reserved image 702 may start before the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 starts. Furthermore, after that, the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 is executed, and the movement of the reserved image 702 may be completed after the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 ends.

Furthermore, the chronological relationship between the timing at which the pending image 702 moves, the timing at which the pending image 702 changes to the display mode of the varying image 701, and the timing at which the decorative pattern 700 begins to vary is not limited to the example described above.
Between the start of movement of all displayed reserved images 702 and the arrival at the next reserved pedestal 702P (variable pedestal 701P) (completion of movement), the change from the display mode of the first reserved image 702 to the display mode of the variable image 701 may be started and completed. Also, after the start of movement of all displayed reserved images 702 and the start of change from the display mode of the first reserved image 702 to the display mode of the variable image 701, the change of the decorative pattern 700 may be started. Then, after the start of change of the decorative pattern 700, the movement of all displayed reserved images 702 and the change from the display mode of the first reserved image 702 to the display mode of the variable image 701 may be completed.

Furthermore, if the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and a variable effect in which an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect is executed is performed, the next variable effect may be a variable effect in which the second eye-catching image 731 is displayed (see Figures 291 (28) to 291 (30) and 292 (31)). If a game ball enters the first starting hole 121 (second starting hole 122) while this second eye-catching image 731 is displayed, the second eye-catching image 731 may obstruct visibility of the reserved image 702, making it difficult or impossible to view the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode. Furthermore, the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode may become easily visible after the second eye-catching image 731 is no longer displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that even if a win occurs when the SPSP reach effect is being executed, a winning sound is not output (see Figure 278 (11)). Here, in a variable effect in which the SPSP reach effect is executed, if the game ball wins in the first start hole 121 (second start hole 122) when the stage image 706 is displayed again after this SPSP reach effect (see Figure 279 (16)), a step-by-step display effect may be executed and a winning sound may be output.

Furthermore, if a game ball enters the first start hole 121 (second start hole 122) when the number of reserved balls stored is at the upper limit (four), no winning sound will be output, the step-by-step display effect will not be executed, and a new reserved image 702 will not be displayed, regardless of the time of entry as described above.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that the customer waiting image 710 is displayed even in the special time-saving game state. Here, in the special time-saving game state, before the start of the first variable effect, the customer waiting image 710 is displayed when a special symbol is stopped, there are no reserved balls, and no winning occurs for a predetermined period of time. On the other hand, after the start of the first variable effect, the customer waiting image 710 may not be displayed even if there are no reserved balls and no winning occurs for a predetermined period of time. In other words, in the special time-saving game state, whether or not the customer waiting image 710 is displayed may be switched between before the start of the first variable effect and after the start of the first variable effect. However, even after the start of the first variable effect in the special time-saving game state, if a game ball enters the second start hole 122 (first start hole 121) while a special symbol is stopped and there are no reserved balls, the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode may be made difficult or impossible to see, and the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode may be made easily visible. Furthermore, in the special time-saving game mode, even after the first variable effect has started, if the special symbol is stopped, there are no reserved symbols, and no winning occurs for a predetermined time, the adjustment image 716 and menu image 717 may be displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that when the adjustment image 716 or the menu image 717 is displayed, the state of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, the button lamp 17c, and the state of the sound output are switched, but this is not limited to this.
When the adjustment image 716 or the menu image 717 is displayed, the states of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c may be switched, but the state of the sound output may not be switched. When the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, the states of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c, and the state of the sound output may be switched.
Furthermore, when the adjustment image 716 or the menu image 717 is displayed, the sound output mode may be switched, while the modes of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c may not be switched. When the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, the modes of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c may be switched. When the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, the sound output mode may or may not be switched.
Furthermore, the states of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c, and the sound output state may not be changed when the adjustment image 716 or the menu image 717 is displayed. However, the states of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c, and the sound output state may be changed when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off and then restored while there is a hold, a warning sound is output to warn that the next variable effect after the variable effect being executed when the power supply was cut off will start, and then the next variable effect starts, but this is not limited to this.
When the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned off and then restored while there is a reserved game, sound may be suppressed until the next variable effect after the variable effect being executed when the power supply was turned off is started. When the next variable effect after the variable effect being executed when the power supply was turned off is started, background music corresponding to the variable effect may be output.

In addition, in this embodiment, the movement of the decorative pattern 700 at the start of the movement is described as the movement of the decorative pattern 700 downward at a low speed, but this is not limited to this.
The change start operation may be, for example, a slow upward movement of the decorative pattern 700. In this case, when the change start operation ends, the decorative pattern 700 may be caused to change downward at a high speed.
The movement at the start of the movement may be, for example, a specific movement by the character shown in the decorative pattern 700. Examples of the specific movement include a movement in which the character raises its hand, a movement in which the character's facial expression changes, a movement in which the character's hair or clothing moves, etc. When the specific movement is performed, the decorative pattern 700 may slowly move upward or downward, or may remain in the position where it was fixed and stopped.

In addition, in this embodiment, in both cases where a prize is won while the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed, and where a prize is won while the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, the sound output mode is switched before switching the modes of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c, but this is not limited to this.
For example, if a prize is won while the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed, the sound output mode may be switched when the modes of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are switched. Also, if a prize is won while the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed, the sound output mode may be switched after the modes of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are switched. That is, if a prize is won while the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed, the sound output mode may be switched after the modes of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are switched. Then, the fluctuation start operation or the display of the pending image 702 may be started after the modes of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c and the sound output mode have all been switched.

In addition, in this embodiment, if there are no reserved symbols when the special symbols stop changing, the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c are all switched from the second state to the first state (see Figure 306 (3)). However, this is not limited to this. Even if there are no reserved symbols when the special symbols stop changing, the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c may continue to be in the second state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the decorative pattern 700 changes at high speed while the change performance is being performed, but when the second transition image 734 is displayed, the rapidly changing decorative pattern 700 becomes difficult to see or impossible to see. That is, the decorative pattern 700 at the display size during rapid change becomes difficult to see or impossible to see. In other words, the decorative pattern 700 at the transparency level during rapid change becomes difficult to see or impossible to see. In yet another way, the decorative pattern 700 in the form during rapid change becomes difficult to see or impossible to see. In yet another way, the decorative pattern 700 at the position during rapid change becomes difficult to see or impossible to see.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that the display state of the pending image 702 approaches the completed display state as the staged display performance progresses, but this is not limited to this.
In the step-by-step display performance, a stage may be provided in which the reserved image 702 is displayed in a display mode (display size, transparency, display position, form, etc.) that is further away from the completed display mode. For example, a stage may be provided in which the reserved image 702, which has a display size smaller than the completed display mode, is displayed in an even smaller display size. Also, a stage may be provided in which the reserved image 702, which has a higher transparency than the completed display mode, is displayed at an even higher transparency. Also, a stage may be provided in which the reserved image 702, which is displayed at a position farther away from the display position in the completed display mode, is displayed at a position further away from the display position in the completed display mode.

The number of stages provided in the staged display effect may also differ depending on the display mode of the reserved image 702, such as reserved images 702 displayed for each stage or reserved images 702 displayed for each display color. In this case, for reserved images 702 in the normal display mode, blue reserved images 702, red reserved images 702, and rainbow reserved images 702, the later the image is in the staged display mode, the more stages may be provided in the staged display effect. In other words, the higher the expected value of a reserved image 702, the more stages may be provided in the staged display effect.

Furthermore, when a reserved image 702 in an expected color display mode is displayed, the reserved image 702 may be displayed in the same color as the completed display mode in the first stage of the staged display presentation, or the reserved image 702 may be displayed in a color different from the completed display mode. Also, for example, when a blue reserved image 702 is displayed, the reserved image 702 may be displayed in a color different from blue in the first stage of the staged display presentation, whereas when a reserved image 702 in a specific color (red, rainbow, etc.) that has a higher expectation level than blue is displayed, the reserved image 702 may be displayed in the specific color in the first stage of the staged display presentation.

Also, in this embodiment, it has been described that one reserved image 702 periodically displays two different actions in an action presentation (see FIG. 272 (5)). Here, the periods of the two different action presentations may be the same as each other, or may be different. Furthermore, the period of either of the two different action presentations may be the same as the period of the action presentation in the action presentation by the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode. Furthermore, the period of one of the two different action presentations may be the same as the period of the action presentation in the action presentation by the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode, and the period of the other may be different from the period of the action presentation in the action presentation by the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode. Furthermore, the period of either of the two different action presentations may be different from the period of the action presentation in the action presentation by the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode.
Furthermore, the hold image 702 in the normal display mode may periodically display two different actions.

The period of the action display in the action presentation may also differ depending on the degree of expectation. For example, a blue reserved image 702 may be displayed in a first cycle in a first operation mode and in a second cycle in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode. A reserved image of a specific color (red, rainbow, etc.) with a higher expectation than blue may be displayed in a third cycle in a third operation mode and in a fourth cycle in a fourth operation mode different from the third operation mode. In this case, the third cycle may be shorter or longer than the first cycle. The fourth cycle may be shorter or longer than the second cycle. The first and third cycles may be the same, or the second and fourth cycles may be the same. The third and fourth cycles may be the same or different. The first to fourth operating modes may be any of the operations described above (clockwise rotation, counterclockwise rotation, vertical movement, horizontal movement, swinging, etc.), or may be operations different from those described above.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, an example has been described in which no sound is output from the audio output device 9 when the adjustment image 716 and menu image 717 are displayed, or when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed. Here, when the adjustment image 716 and menu image 717 are displayed, or when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, the audio output device 9 may output a sound at a volume that is not audible to the player. In other words, it is sufficient that no sound is audibly output from the audio output device 9 when the adjustment image 716 and menu image 717 are displayed, or when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c all flash during the winning illumination effect. Here, during the winning illumination effect, the flashing cycle of the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c may become longer over time. For example, during the winning illumination effect, the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c may flash at a first cycle and then at a second cycle that is longer than the first cycle. In this case, the color of the light emitted during the flashing at the first cycle and the color of the light emitted during the flashing at the second cycle may be the same color or different colors. Furthermore, both the first cycle and the second cycle may be shorter than the cycle of the flashing that indicates or notifies of the occurrence of an error (the flashing in the ninth mode) and the cycle of the flashing during the skip effect (the flashing in the eleventh mode).

In the present embodiment, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c emit light of a single color in the first, second, fourth to sixth, and eighth to eleventh modes, but this is not limiting. The emitted light color may change as the performance progresses.
Although the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all described as emitting light of the same color in the first, second, fourth to sixth, and eighth to eleventh embodiments, this is not limitative. In the first, second, fourth to sixth, and eighth to eleventh embodiments, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c may all emit light of different colors.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the light emission of the seventh mode, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c each emit light in a different color, but this is not limited to this. In the light emission of the seventh mode, at least two or more light emitters among the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c (for example, the top lamp 10b and the panel lamp 74b) may emit light in the same color, and the other light emitters may emit light in a different color. In addition, in the light emission of the seventh mode, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c may all emit light in the same color.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the pending number display 703 is hidden during the execution of a jackpot game (see Figure 283 (20)), but this is not limited to this.
The reserved number display 703 may be displayed even during execution of a jackpot game. In this case, if a game ball enters the first start port 121 (second start port 122) during execution of a jackpot game, the reserved number display 703 for the first start port 121 (second start port 122) may be displayed in an incremented manner. The reserved image 702 corresponding to this entry may not be displayed in an incomplete display manner, but may be displayed in a completed display manner when the stage image 706 corresponding to the normal game state (time-saving game state) is displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that when the reserved image 702 is displayed, depending on the stage, the image being displayed, whether or not there is a reserve, the state of the gaming machine 1, etc., the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display state will not be visible, and the reserved image 702 in the completed display state will be easily visible, but this is not limited to this.
For example, in a special time-saving game state, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 122, regardless of the stage, the image being displayed, whether or not there is a reserve, the state of the game machine 1, etc., the reserve image 702 in the incomplete display state may be made easily visible, and then the reserve image 702 in the completed display state may be made easily visible.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that a specific sound effect is output when the "7" decorative patterns 700 on the left and right are aligned (see Figure 295 (12)).
Here, a sound effect may be output when a number other than "7" is aligned as the left and right decorative patterns 700. Furthermore, this sound effect may be different from the specific sound effect that is output when "7" is aligned as the left and right decorative patterns 700.
Furthermore, the sound effect when a reach is achieved may be different in the normal game state, the special time-shortened game state, and the special time-shortened game state.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it has been explained that when the first transition image 728 is displayed, the gaming machine 1 is controlled to a normal gaming state, whether the gaming machine 1 is controlled to a special time-shortened gaming state or a special time-shortened gaming state, but this is not limited to this.
When the gaming machine 1 is controlled to a special time-shortened gaming state, the special time-shortened gaming state may continue when the first transition image 728 is displayed (see FIG. 288 (12)). Then, when the special symbol stops fluctuating while there are no reserved symbols for the second start slot 122, the gaming machine 1 may be controlled to a normal gaming state. On the other hand, when the gaming machine 1 is controlled to a special time-shortened gaming state, the gaming machine 1 may be controlled to a normal gaming state when the first transition image 728 is displayed (before there are no reserved symbols for the second start slot 122). However, even when the gaming machine 1 is controlled to a special time-shortened gaming state, the special time-shortened gaming state may continue when the first transition image 728 is displayed (when there are reserved symbols for the second start slot 122), just like when the gaming machine 1 is controlled to a special time-shortened gaming state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the transparency of the customer waiting image 710 is gradually increased before it is hidden, but the present invention is not limited to this.
The customer waiting image 710 may be switched from a displayed state to a hidden state without gradually changing the transparency. In this case, the hold image 702 may not be displayed when the customer waiting image 710 is hidden, and the hold image 702 may start to be displayed after the customer waiting image 710 is hidden.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that the action presentation starts when the stage display presentation is completed, but the present invention is not limited to this.
The action effect may be started even before the completion of the step-by-step display effect. In this case, the action effect may be started during the step-by-step display effect, i.e., when the reserved image 702 is displayed in the incomplete display mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that a winning sound is output from the sound output device 9 in response to a win. Here, the winning sounds that notify that the gaming ball has entered the first starting hole 121 in the first stage, the second stage, and the fifth stage may be different sounds or the same sound.
Furthermore, the winning sound that notifies the player that the game ball has entered the second starting hole 122 may be different or the same in the third stage and the fourth stage.
Furthermore, the winning sound that notifies the player that the game ball has entered the second starting hole 122 may be different or the same in the sixth stage and the seventh stage.
In addition, the winning sound that notifies that the game ball has entered the second starting hole 122 may be different or the same sound in the special time-shortened game state and the special time-shortened game state.
Furthermore, the winning sound that notifies that the game ball has entered the second starting hole 122 may be different or the same in the first stage, the sixth stage, and the seventh stage.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 121 or the second starting hole 122, a winning sound is output and the display of the pending image 702 begins, but this is not limited to this.
For example, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 121 or the second starting hole 122, the display of the pending image 702 may begin after the sound output device 9 starts to output the winning sound.

In addition, in this embodiment, the sound output based on a win in the first start slot 121 or the second start slot 122 when a specific image is displayed in the special time-shortened game state is described as a sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-shortened game state, but this is not limited to this. The sound output based on a win in the first start slot 121 or the second start slot 122 when a specific image is displayed in the special time-shortened game state may be a winning sound that notifies of a win. Furthermore, regardless of the game state, the sound output based on a win in the first start slot 121 or the second start slot 122 when a specific image is displayed may be background music corresponding to the variable presentation, and may be a sound output without reducing the volume.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it has been explained that when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, the small symbols 704 are difficult or impossible for the player to see, but this is not limited to this.
By displaying the small symbols 704 on a layer in front of the customer waiting image 710, the small symbols 704 may be easily visible to the player even when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a prize is won while the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, the display of the pending image 702 begins after the display of the customer waiting image 710 begins (see Figures 307 (9), 332 (5), and 339 (5)), but this is not limited to this.
In the case where a prize is won while the customer waiting image 710 is being displayed, the display of the reserved image 702 may be started before the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 is started. In addition, in the case where a prize is won while the customer waiting image 710 is being displayed, the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode may be displayed without the step-by-step display effect being executed before the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 is started, so that the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode may be visible or easily visible without the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode becoming visible. Furthermore, in the case where a prize is won while the customer waiting image 710 is being displayed, the step-by-step display effect may be started and completed before the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 is started, so that the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode may be visible or easily visible without the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode becoming visible.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a player operates the effect button 17 while the menu image 717 is displayed, a menu screen (not shown) is displayed on the first image display device 70. Specifically, the menu screen is an image displayed across the entire display area of the first image display device 70. In addition, in this embodiment, an example of an effect that occurs when a game ball enters the first start gate 121 or the second start gate 122 while the customer waiting image 710 is displayed has been described. The above-described effect examples, which occur when a game ball enters the first start gate 121 or the second start gate 122 while the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, may also be effects that are executed when a game ball enters the first start gate 121 or the second start gate 122 while the menu screen is displayed. In other words, even if a prize is won when the menu screen is displayed instead of the customer waiting image 710, the same effect as when a prize is won when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed may be executed. In this case, the menu screen is also considered to be a specific image.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the first change effect is executed in the special time-saving game state, the decorative pattern 700 changes at high speed, and then the special time-saving start image 733, the second transition image 734, the mode start image 736, etc. are displayed, but this is not limited to this.
When the first variation effect in the special time-shortening gaming state is executed, the special time-shortening start image 733, the second transition image 734, the mode start image 736, etc. may be displayed before the decorative pattern 700 changes at high speed, i.e., while the variation start operation is being executed. Also, the special time-shortening start image 733, the second transition image 734, the mode start image 736, etc. may be displayed before the variation start operation begins. Also, the special time-shortening start image 733, the second transition image 734, the mode start image 736, etc. may be displayed before the reserved image 702 is displayed. In other words, during the first variation effect in the special time-shortening gaming state, the timing at which the reserved image 702 starts to be displayed or the timing at which the special time-shortening start image 733, the second transition image 734, the mode start image 736, etc. start to be displayed may be displayed first.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the first change effect is executed in the special time-saving game state, the decorative pattern 700 changes at high speed, and then the decorative pattern 700 and stage image 706, etc., having a display mode corresponding to the special time-saving game state, are displayed, but this is not limited to this.
When the first variation effect in the special time-shortened game state is executed, the decorative pattern 700, the stage image 706, etc., having a display mode corresponding to the special time-shortened game state may be displayed before the decorative pattern 700 changes at high speed, i.e., while the variation start operation is being executed. Furthermore, the decorative pattern 700, the stage image 706, etc., having a display mode corresponding to the special time-shortened game state may be displayed before the variation start operation begins. Furthermore, the decorative pattern 700, the stage image 706, etc., having a display mode corresponding to the special time-shortened game state may be displayed before the reserved image 702 is displayed. In other words, during the first variation effect in the special time-shortened game state, the timing at which the reserved image 702 starts to be displayed or the timing at which the decorative pattern 700, the stage image 706, etc., having a display mode corresponding to the special time-shortened game state start may be displayed first.

Furthermore, the combination of the stage and the display mode of the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is not limited to the above example.
Any combination of the above-described stages and the display mode of the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode may be used. For example, the display mode of the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode in the first stage may be a star-shaped display mode (see FIG. 276 ).

Furthermore, the first and fifth stages of the third embodiment may be the first stage of the first embodiment, and the second and eighth stages of the third embodiment may be the second stage of the first embodiment. Furthermore, the first stage of the third embodiment may be the first stage of the first embodiment, and the second, fifth, and eighth stages of the third embodiment may be the second stage of the first embodiment. Furthermore, the first and fifth stages of the third embodiment may be the second stage of the first embodiment, and the second and eighth stages of the third embodiment may be the first stage of the first embodiment.
Furthermore, the third and fourth stages of the third embodiment may be the third stage of the first embodiment, and the sixth and seventh stages of the third embodiment may be the fourth stage of the first embodiment. Furthermore, the third and sixth stages of the third embodiment may be the third stage of the first embodiment, and the fourth and seventh stages of the third embodiment may be the fourth stage of the first embodiment.

Furthermore, while multiple embodiments have been described above, the configuration included in one embodiment may be interchanged with the configuration included in another embodiment, or the configuration included in one embodiment may be added to another embodiment.

41...Decorative pattern, 42...Volume image, 43...Light intensity image, 51...Variable image, 52...Hold image, 61...Stage image, 100...Pachinko game machine, 114...Image display unit, 121...First start slot, 122...Second start slot, 200...Game control unit, 231...Random number acquisition unit, 234...Special pattern determination unit, 300...Performance control unit, 508...First premonition emphasis image, 572...First stop emphasis image

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player,
A determination means for making a determination;
a performance control means for controlling the performance;
an adjustment means used to adjust the performance effect;
an operating means,
The performance control means
It can be set to either a first mode or a second mode,
It is possible to display information display according to game information,
A predetermined character image can be displayed,
It is possible to perform a role-playing effect that operates the movable means,
It is possible to execute a variable effect in which the effect pattern is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped.
In the variable performance, a specific performance suggesting that the special game will be executed can be executed,
When the specific effect is executed, a first emphasis effect can be executed,
The adjusting means includes a first adjusting means and a second adjusting means different from the first adjusting means,
When the first emphasis effect is being executed, a specific notification regarding the effect can be executed when the first adjustment means is operated,
During the execution of the variable performance, a second emphasis performance that periodically changes the performance pattern can be executed at a predetermined timing,
It is possible to execute an operation performance that prompts the user to operate the operation means,
The operation performance includes a first operation performance and a second operation performance,
Before the start of the predetermined performance executed in the variable performance and after the start of the predetermined performance, the execution time of the first operation performance and the execution time of the second operation performance can be made different,
In the second operation presentation, the operation image can be periodically changed and displayed,
The cycle of the second emphasis effect and the cycle of the operation image can be made different ,
The display that periodically changes the operation image includes a first display that can be executed in a first cycle, a second display that can be executed in the first cycle, and a third display that can be executed in a second cycle that is different from the first cycle .